Sei sulla pagina 1di 562

MiCOM

P342, P343
Generator Protection Relays

Software Version 0070C

Technical Guide

P34x/EN T/F33
MiCOM P342, P343 Guides
Generator Protection Relays

This version of the Technical Guide is specific to the following models

Model Number Software Number


P342------0070C P342------0070-A/B/C
P343------0070C P343------0070-A/B/C

For other models / software versions, please contact ALSTOM T&D – Energy,
Automation & Information for the relevant information.
(Software versions P342------0010*, P342------0020*, P342------0030*,
P342------0040*, P342------0050* and P343------0010*, P343------0020*,
P343------0030*, P343------0040*, P343------0050* are not supported by this
menu database, see TG8614A (0010), TG8614B (0020 – 0040),
P34x/EN T/C11 (0050) and P34x/EN T/D22 (0060) for information on the
menu database for these software versions)
Technical Guide
MiCOM P342, P343
Generator Protection Relays

Volume 1
Technical Guide P34x/EN T/F33

MiCOM P342, P343

GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAYS

MICOM P342, P343

CONTENT

Issue Control

Handling of Electronic Equipment

Safety Instructions

Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33

Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

Relay Description P34x/EN HW/F33

Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

SCADA Communications P34x/EN CT/F33

Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

External Connection Diagrams P34x/EN CO/F33

Hardware/Software Version History and


P34x/EN VC/E33
Compatibility
P34x/EN T/F33 Technical Guide

MiCOM P342, P343


Issue Control P34x/EN T/E33

MiCOM P342, P343

Manual Issue F33 Amendments completed 17.10.2003

Doc.
Section Page Description
Ref.
Front cover
Software version details amended to reflect latest relay
- - - software, on the back of the front cover
All references to appendices and chapters replaced with
IT Throughout
new subdocument references
Password protection
Minor amendment made to Access level column of table
Last row of table : As level 1 plus: and Password 2
IT 3.4 11 required swapped around
All references to appendices and chapters replaced with
AP Throughout
new subdocument references
Configuration column
16 1st row of table added
AP 2.1 16 - 17 Last 3 rows added to table
Voltage controlled overcurrent protection
AP 2.5.1.1 40 1st paragraph after equations : last sentence added
Setting guidelines for under impedance function
AP 2.5.2.1 44 This title amended
Undervoltage protection function (27)
Paragraph before note : last 2 DDB signals on last line
45 changed
AP 2.6 46 K = Time Multiplier Setting equation amended
Overfrequency protection function
AP 2.9 52 Paragraph 5 : 3rd sentence added
Power factor element
AP 2.10.1.3 57 Paragraph 2 : Last sentence re-written
Negative phase sequence thermal protection
AP 2.11 59 Figure 18 : new diagram added
Reverse power protection function
1st paragraph after table : (“Power1 DO Timer/Power2
AP 2.12.3 67 DO Timer”) moved from 5th sentence to 3rd sentence
Residual overvoltage/neutral voltage
displacement protection function
Paragraph after Figure 21 : DDB signals changed in 2nd
AP 2.14 73 sentence
Overfluxing protection
AP 2.18 91 Paragraph 4 : DDB signal changed in 1st sentence
Resistive temperature device (RTD) thermal
protection
95 1st paragraph after bullet points : last sentence re-written
AP 2.20 96 Last paragraph of section added
DDB output
AP 2.22.7.2 115 DDB signals in table changed
P34x/EN T/E33 Technical Guide
Issue Control
MiCOM P342, P343

Manual Issue F33 Amendments completed 17.10.2003

Doc.
Section Page Description
Ref.
Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers
AP 2.24.2 122 Last row of 2nd table added
Breaker fail timer settings
Typical delay data in undercurrent elements row of table
AP 2.24.3.1 123 changed
Breaker fail undercurrent settings
AP 2.24.4 123 Paragraphs 3 and 4 added
Current loop inputs and outputs
AP 2.27 127 New section added
Current loop inputs
AP 2.27.1 127 - 129 New section added
Setting guidelines for current loop inputs
AP 2.27.2 129 - 130 New section added
Current loop outputs
AP 2.27.3 130 - 135 New section added
Setting guidelines for current loop outputs
AP 2.27.4 135 New section added
Circuit breaker condition monitoring features
145 Data in 1st table : deleted and changed
145 - 146 2nd table re-written
AP 3.5.1 146 Paragraphs after 2nd table : added
Setting guidelines
AP 3.5.2 146 New section added
Setting the Σ Ι^ thresholds
AP 3.5.2.1 146 New section added
Setting the number of operations thresholds
AP 3.5.2.2 146 - 147 New section added
Setting the operating time thresholds
AP 3.5.2.3 147 New section added
Setting the excessive fault frequency thresholds
AP 3.5.2.4 147 New section added
Relay alarm conditions
Data in table re-written
AP 3.7.3 154 Last paragraph of section : added
Control inputs
AP 3.11 164 Last paragraph of section : added
All references to appendices and chapters replaced with
HW Throughout
new subdocument references
Output relay board
HW 2.4.2 9 Paragraph 1 : words two and six swapped around
Issue Control P34x/EN T/E33

MiCOM P342, P343

Manual Issue F33 Amendments completed 17.10.2003

Doc.
Section Page Description
Ref.
Current loop input output board (CLIO)
HW 2.9 11 - 12 New section added
Platform software initialisation & monitoring
HW 4.1.3 18 Paragraph 1 : minor additions to 1st sentence
Continuous self-testing
Last bullet point : added
HW 4.2 19 Last paragraph : minor additions to 2nd sentence
All references to appendices and chapters replaced with
TD Throughout
new subdocument references
Currents
TD 1.1 7 Data changed in 1st table
Voltages
TD 1.2 7 Data changed in 1st table
Output relay contacts
TD 1.6 8 Paragraph 1 : words two and six swapped around
Negative phase sequence thermal (46)
TD 10.18 38 Data in table amended
Pole slipping (78) {P343}
TD 10.22 40 Data in table amended
Thermal overload (49)
This title amended
TD 10.23 41 Data in table amended
Current loop input and outputs (CLIO)
TD 13.3 44 - 47 New section added
Accuracy
TD 13.3.1 47 New section added
Performance
TD 13.3.2 47 New section added
All references to appendices and chapters replaced with
CT Throughout
new subdocument references
Relay menu database
GC - - Amended to reflect latest relay software
External connection diagrams
CO - - Additional diagrams added
Hardware/software version history and
compatibility
Presented in new layout and updated to reflect latest relay
VC - - software
P34x/EN T/E33 Technical Guide
Issue Control
MiCOM P342, P343
HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT
A person’s normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several
thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when
handling circuits can cause serious damage, which often may not be immediately
apparent but the reliability of the circuit will have been reduced.
The electronic circuits of AREVA T&D are immune to the relevant levels of electrostatic
discharge when housed in their cases. Do not expose them to the risk of damage by
withdrawing modules unnecessarily.
Each module incorporates the highest practicable protection for its semiconductor
devices. However, if it becomes necessary to withdraw a module, the following
precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and long life for which the
equipment has been designed and manufactured.
1. Before removing a module, ensure that you are a same electrostatic potential
as the equipment by touching the case.
2. Handle the module by its front-plate, frame, or edges of the printed circuit
board. Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit track or
connectors.
3. Do not pass the module to any person without first ensuring that you are both
at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.
4. Place the module on an antistatic surface, or on a conducting surface which is
at the same potential as yourself.
5. Store or transport the module in a conductive bag.
More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be
found in BS5783 and IEC 60147-0F.
If you are making measurements on the internal electronic circuitry of an equipment
in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a conductive wrist
strap.
Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between 500k – 10M ohms. If a
wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact with the case to
prevent the build up of static. Instrumentation which may be used for making
measurements should be earthed to the case whenever possible.
AREVA T&D strongly recommends that detailed investigations on the electronic
circuitry, or modification work, should be carried out in a Special Handling Area such
as described in BS5783 or IEC 60147-0F.
CONTENT

1. SAFETY SECTION 3
1.1 Health and safety 3
1.2 Explanation of symbols and labels 3

2. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING 3

3. EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS 4


3.1 Current transformer circuits 4
3.2 External resistors 4
3.3 Battery replacement 4
3.4 Insulation and dielectric strength testing 4
3.5 Insertion of modules and pcb cards 4
3.6 Fibre optic communication 5

4. OLDER PRODUCTS 5

5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL 5

6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 6
1. SAFETY SECTION
This Safety Section should be read before commencing any work on the
equipment.
1.1 Health and safety
The information in the Safety Section of the product documentation is intended to
ensure that products are properly installed and handled in order to maintain them in
a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the
equipment will be familiar with the contents of the Safety Section.
1.2 Explanation of symbols and labels
The meaning of symbols and labels may be used on the equipment or in the product
documentation, is given below.

Caution: refer to product documentation Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective/safety *earth terminal Functional *earth terminal


Note: This symbol may also be
used for a protective/safety earth
terminal if that terminal is part of a
terminal block or sub-assembly
e.g. power supply.

*NOTE: THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THE PRODUCT DOCUMENTATION IS THE
DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.

2. INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING


Equipment connections
Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work on this
equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The
product documentation should be consulted before installing, commissioning or
servicing the equipment.
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present
a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.
If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all
personnel to avoid electrical shock or energy hazards.
Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations
to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. To
ensure that wires are correctly terminated, the correct crimp terminal and tool for the
wire size should be used.
Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective earth
terminal, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug
connected equipment. Omitting or disconnecting the equipment earth may cause a
safety hazard.
The recommended minimum earth wire size is 2.5mm2, unless otherwise stated in the
technical data section of the product documentation.
Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked:
− Voltage rating and polarity;
− CT circuit rating and integrity of connections;
− Protective fuse rating;
− Integrity of earth connection (where applicable)
− Remove front plate plastic film protection
− Remove insulating strip from battery compartment

3. EQUIPMENT OPERATING CONDITIONS


The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental
limits.
3.1 Current transformer circuits
Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high level voltage produced
may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation.
3.2 External resistors
Where external resistors are fitted to relays, these may present a risk of electric shock
or burns, if touched.
3.3 Battery replacement
Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended
type and be installed with the correct polarity, to avoid possible damage to the
equipment.
3.4 Insulation and dielectric strength testing
Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the
end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to
discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected.
3.5 Insertion of modules and pcb cards
These must not be inserted into or withdrawn from equipment whist it is energised
since this may result in damage.
3.6 Fibre optic communication
Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed
directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal
level of the device.

4. OLDER PRODUCTS
Electrical adjustments
Equipments which require direct physical adjustments to their operating mechanism
to change current or voltage settings, should have the electrical power removed
before making the change, to avoid any risk of electrical shock.
Mechanical adjustments
The electrical power to the relay contacts should be removed before checking any
mechanical settings, to avoid any risk of electric shock.
Draw out case relays
Removal of the cover on equipment incorporating electromechanical operating
elements, may expose hazardous live parts such as relay contacts.
Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards
When using an extender card, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the
equipment whilst it is energised. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards.
Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card.
Insertion and withdrawal of heavy current test plugs
When using a heavy current test plug, CT shorting links must be in place before
insertion or removal, to avoid potentially lethal voltages.

5. DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL


Decommissioning: The auxiliary supply circuit in the relay may include capacitors
across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy
hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the relay (both
poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely
discharged via the external terminals prior to decommissioning.
Disposal: It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water
courses is avoided. The product should be disposed of in a safe
manner. Any products containing batteries should have them
removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short
circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation,
may apply to the disposal of lithium batteries.
6. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Protective fuse rating
The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for this equipment
is 16A, Red Spot type or equivalent, unless otherwise stated in the technical data
section of the product documentation.

Insulation class: IEC 601010-1 : 1990/A2 : 2001 This equipment requires a


Class I protective (safety) earth
EN 61010-1: 2001 connection to ensure user
Class I safety.

Insulation IEC 601010-1 : 1990/A2 : 1995 Distribution level, fixed


Category Category III insulation. Equipment in this
(Overvoltage): EN 61010-1: 2001 category is qualification tested
Category III at 5kV peak, 1.2/50µs,
500Ω, 0.5J, between all supply
circuits and earth and also
between independent circuits.

Environment: IEC 601010-1 : 1990/A2 : 1995 Compliance is demonstrated


Pollution degree 2 by reference to generic safety
standards.
EN 61010-1: 2001
Pollution degree 2

Product Safety: 72/23/EEC Compliance with the European


Commission Low Voltage
Directive.
EN 61010-1: 2001 Compliance is demonstrated
EN 60950-1: 2002 by reference to generic safety
standards.
Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343

INTRODUCTION
P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction

MiCOM P342, P343


Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 1/28

CONTENT

1. INTRODUCTION TO MICOM 3

2. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES 4

3. USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE 6


3.1 Introduction to the relay 6
3.1.1 Front panel 6
3.1.2 Relay rear panel 7
3.2 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options 8
3.3 Menu structure 9
3.3.1 Protection settings 10
3.3.2 Disturbance recorder settings 11
3.3.3 Control and support settings 11
3.4 Password protection 11
3.5 Relay configuration 12
3.6 Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD) 12
3.6.1 Default display and menu time-out 13
3.6.2 Menu navigation and setting browsing 14
3.6.3 Password entry 14
3.6.4 Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records 14
3.6.5 Setting changes 15
3.7 Front communication port user interface 16
3.8 Rear communication port user interface 17
3.8.1 Courier communication 18
3.8.2 MODBUS communication 20
3.8.3 IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication 21
3.8.4 DNP 3.0 Communication 23
3.9 Second rear communication port 24
P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction

Page 2/28 MiCOM P342, P343

Figure 1: Relay front view 6


Figure 2: Relay rear view 8
Figure 3: Menu structure 10
Figure 4: Front panel user interface 13
Figure 5: Front port connection 16
Figure 6: PC – relay signal connection 17
Figure 7: Remote communication connection arrangements 19
Figure 8: Second rear port k-bus application 26
Figure 9: Second rear port EIA(RS)485 example 27
Figure 10: Second rear port EIA(RS)232 example 27
Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 3/28

1. INTRODUCTION TO MICOM
MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply
requirements. It comprises a range of components, systems and services from AREVA
T&D.
Central to the MiCOM concept is flexibility.
MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive
communication capabilities, to integrate it with your power supply control system.
The components within MiCOM are:
− P range protection relays;
− C range control products;
− M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring;
− S range versatile PC support and substation control packages.
MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state
and behaviour of the power system using disturbance and fault records. They can
also provide measurements of the system at regular intervals to a control centre
enabling remote monitoring and control to take place.
For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, visit our website:
www.areva-td.com
P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction

Page 4/28 MiCOM P342, P343

2. INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES


The guides provide a functional and technical description of the MiCOM protection
relay and a comprehensive set of instructions for the relay’s use and application.
Divided into two volumes, as follows:
Volume 1 – Technical Guide, includes information on the application of the relay and
a technical description of its features. It is mainly intended for protection engineers
concerned with the selection and application of the relay for the protection of the
power system.
Volume 2 – Operation Guide, contains information on the installation and
commissioning of the relay, and also a section on fault finding. This volume is
intended for site engineers who are responsible for the installation, commissioning
and maintenance of the relay.
The section content within each volume is summarised below:
Volume 1 Technical Guide
Handling of Electronic Equipment
Safety Section
P34x/EN IT Introduction
A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start
using the relay.
P34x/EN AP Application Notes
Comprehensive and detailed description of the features of the relay including both
the protection elements and the relay’s other functions such as event and disturbance
recording, fault location and programmable scheme logic. This section includes a
description of common power system applications of the relay, calculation of suitable
settings, some typical worked examples, and how to apply the settings to the relay.
P34x/EN HW Relay Description
Overview of the operation of the relay’s hardware and software. This section
includes information on the self-checking features and diagnostics of the relay.
P34x/EN TD Technical Data
Technical data including setting ranges, accuracy limits, recommended operating
conditions, ratings and performance data. Compliance with technical standards is
quoted where appropriate.
P34x/EN CT Communications and Interface Guide
This section provides detailed information regarding the communication interfaces of
the relay, including a detailed description of how to access the settings database
stored within the relay. The section also gives information on each of the
communication protocols that can be used with the relay, and is intended to allow the
user to design a custom interface to a SCADA system.
P34x/EN GC Relay Menu Database: User interface/Courier/MODBUS/
IEC60870-5-103/DNP 3.0
Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief description
of each.
Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 5/28

P34x/EN CO External Connection Diagrams


All external wiring connections to the relay.
P34x/EN VC Hardware / Software Version History and Compatibility
Volume 2 Operation Guide
Handling of Electronic Equipment
Safety Section
P34x/EN IT Introduction
A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to start
using the relay.
P34x/EN IN Installation
Recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of the relay. A
guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of the relay is provided
incorporating earthing recommendations.
P34x/EN CM Commissioning and Maintenance
Instructions on how to commission the relay, comprising checks on the calibration
and functionality of the relay. A general maintenance policy for the relay is outlined.
P34x/EN PR Problem Analysis
Advice on how to recognise failure modes and the recommended course of action.
P34x/EN GC Relay Menu Database: User interface/Courier/MODBUS/
IEC 60870-5-103/DNP 3.0
Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief description
of each.
P34x/EN CO External Connection Diagrams
All external wiring connections to the relay.
P34x/EN VC Hardware / Software Version History and Compatibility
Repair Form
P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction

Page 6/28 MiCOM P342, P343

3. USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE


The settings and functions of the MiCOM protection relay can be accessed both from
the front panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear communication ports.
Information on each of these methods is given in this section to describe how to get
started using the relay.
3.1 Introduction to the relay
3.1.1 Front panel
The front panel of the relay is shown in Figure 1, with the hinged covers at the top
and bottom of the relay shown open. Extra physical protection for the front panel can
be provided by an optional transparent front cover. With the cover in place read only
access to the user interface is possible. Removal of the cover does not compromise
the environmental withstand capability of the product, but allows access to the relay
settings. When full access to the relay keypad is required, for editing the settings, the
transparent cover can be unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers
are open. If the lower cover is secured with a wire seal, this will need to be removed.
Using the side flanges of the transparent cover, pull the bottom edge away from the
relay front panel until it is clear of the seal tab. The cover can then be moved
vertically down to release the two fixing lugs from their recesses in the front panel.

Serial No and I*, V Ratings Top cover

In 1/5 A 50/60 Hz
SER No Vx V
DIAG No Vn V

LCD
TRIP

Fixed ALARM
Hotkeys
function
LEDs OUT OF SERVICE

HEALTHY
User programable
= CLEAR function LEDs
= READ

= ENTER

Keypad

Bottom
cover
Battery compartment Front comms port Download/monitor port P0103ENb

Figure 1: Relay front view


Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 7/28

The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in Figure 1:
− a 16-character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD).

− a 7-key keypad comprising 4 arrow keys (/, 6, 8 and 2), an enter key
(5), a clear key (0), and a read key (1).

− 12 LEDs; 4 fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel and 8
programmable function LEDs on the right hand side.
Under the top hinged cover:
− the relay serial number, and the relay’s current and voltage rating information*.
Under the bottom hinged cover:
− battery compartment to hold the 1/2 AA size battery which is used for memory
back-up for the real time clock, event, fault and disturbance records.
− a 9-pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to the
relay (up to 15m distance) via an EIA(RS)232 serial data connection.
− a 25-pin female D-type port providing internal signal monitoring and high
speed local downloading of software and language text via a parallel data
connection.
The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel are used to indicate
the following conditions:
Trip (Red) indicates that the relay has issued a trip signal. It is reset when the
associated fault record is cleared from the front display. (Alternatively the trip LED
can be configured to be self-resetting)*.
Alarm (Yellow) flashes to indicate that the relay has registered an alarm. This may be
triggered by a fault, event or maintenance record. The LED will flash until the alarms
have been accepted (read), after which the LED will change to constant illumination,
and will extinguish when the alarms have been cleared.
Out of service (Yellow) indicates that the relay’s protection is unavailable.
Healthy (Green) indicates that the relay is in correct working order, and should be on
at all times. It will be extinguished if the relay’s self-test facilities indicate that there is
an error with the relay’s hardware or software. The state of the healthy LED is
reflected by the watchdog contact at the back of the relay.
3.1.2 Relay rear panel
The rear panel of the relay is shown in Figure 2. All current and voltage signals*,
digital logic input signals and output contacts are connected at the rear of the relay.
Also connected at the rear is the twisted pair wiring for the rear EIA(RS)485
communication port, the IRIG-B time synchronising input and the optical fibre rear
communication port which are both optional.

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model


P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction

Page 8/28 MiCOM P342, P343

Optional IRIG-B board Digital input connections

A B C D E F

Power supply
connection
IRIG B

TX
PORT 1

Rear comms port


(RS485)
RX

Current* and voltage Digital output


input terminals (relays) connections
P0104ena

Figure 2: Relay rear view


Refer to the wiring diagram in section P34x/EN CO/E33 for complete connection
details.
3.2 Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options
The relay has three user interfaces:
− the front panel user interface via the LCD and keypad.
− the front port which supports Courier communication.
− the rear port which supports one protocol of either Courier, MODBUS,
IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3.0. The protocol for the rear port must be specified
when the relay is ordered.
The measurement information and relay settings which can be accessed from the
three interfaces are summarised in Table 1.

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model


Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 9/28

Keypad/ IEC870-5-
Courier MODBUS DNP3.0
LCD 103
Display & modification of
• • •
all settings
Digital I/O signal status • • • • •
Display/extraction of
• • • • •
measurements
Display/extraction of fault
• • •
records
Extraction of disturbance
• • •
records
Programmable scheme

logic settings
Reset of fault & alarm
• • • • •
records
Clear event & fault records • • • •
Time synchronisation • • • •
Control commands • • • • •

Table 1
3.3 Menu structure
The relay’s menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each setting in the menu is
referred to as a cell, and each cell in the menu may be accessed by reference to a
row and column address. The settings are arranged so that each column contains
related settings, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings are contained
within the same column. As shown in Figure 3, the top row of each column contains
the heading which describes the settings contained within that column. Movement
between the columns of the menu can only be made at the column heading level. A
complete list of all of the menu settings is given in section P34x/EN GC/E33 of the
manual.

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model


P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction

Page 10/28 MiCOM P342, P343

Column header Up to 4 protection setting groups

System data View records Overcurrent Ground fault Overcurrent Ground fault

Column
data
settings

Control & support Group 1 Group 2

Repeated for groups 2, 3 and 4

P0106ena

Figure 3: Menu structure


All of the settings in the menu fall into one of three categories: protection settings,
disturbance recorder settings, or control and support (C&S) settings. One of two
different methods is used to change a setting depending on which category the
setting falls into. Control and support settings are stored and used by the relay
immediately after they are entered. For either protection settings or disturbance
recorder settings, the relay stores the new setting values in a temporary ‘scratchpad’.
It activates all the new settings together, but only after it has been confirmed that the
new settings are to be adopted. This technique is employed to provide extra security,
and so that several setting changes that are made within a group of protection
settings will all take effect at the same time.
3.3.1 Protection settings
The protection settings include the following items:
− protection element settings
− scheme logic settings
− auto-reclose and check synchronisation settings (where appropriate)*
− fault locator settings (where appropriate)*
There are four groups of protection settings, with each group containing the same
setting cells. One group of protection settings is selected as the active group, and is
used by the protection elements.

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model


Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 11/28

3.3.2 Disturbance recorder settings


The disturbance recorder settings include the record duration and trigger position,
selection of analogue and digital signals to record, and the signal sources that trigger
the recording.
3.3.3 Control and support settings
The control and support settings include:
− relay configuration settings
− open/close circuit breaker*
− CT & VT ratio settings*
− reset LEDs
− active protection setting group
− password & language settings
− circuit breaker control & monitoring settings*
− communications settings
− measurement settings
− event & fault record settings
− user interface settings
− commissioning settings
3.4 Password protection
The menu structure contains three levels of access. The level of access that is enabled
determines which of the relay’s settings can be changed and is
controlled by entry of two different passwords. The levels of access are summarised
in Table 2.

Access level Operations enabled


Level 0 Read access to all settings, alarms, event
No password required records and fault records
As level 0 plus:
Control commands, e.g.
Level 1 circuit breaker open/close.
Password 1 or 2 required Reset of fault and alarm conditions.
Reset LEDs.
Clearing of event and fault records.
Level 2 As level 1 plus:
Password 2 required All other settings

Table 2
Each of the two passwords are 4 characters of upper case text. The factory default
for both passwords is AAAA. Each password is user-changeable once it has been
correctly entered. Entry of the password is achieved either by a prompt when a
setting change is attempted, or by moving to the ‘Password’ cell in the ‘System data’
Note: *May vary according to relay type/model
P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction

Page 12/28 MiCOM P342, P343

column of the menu. The level of access is independently enabled for each interface,
that is to say if level 2 access is enabled for the rear communication port, the front
panel access will remain at level 0 unless the relevant password is entered at the front
panel. The access level enabled by the password entry will time-out independently
for each interface after a period of inactivity and revert to the default level. If the
passwords are lost an emergency password can be supplied - contact AREVA T&D
with the relay’s serial number. The current level of access enabled for an interface
can be determined by examining the 'Access level' cell in the 'System data' column,
the access level for the front panel User Interface (UI), can also be found as one of
the default display options.
The relay is supplied with a default access level of 2, such that no password is
required to change any of the relay settings. It is also possible to set the default
menu access level to either level 0 or level 1, preventing write access to the relay
settings without the correct password. The default menu access level is set in the
‘Password control’ cell which is found in the ‘System data’ column of the menu (note
that this setting can only be changed when level 2 access is enabled).
3.5 Relay configuration
The relay is a multi-function device which supports numerous different protection,
control and communication features. In order to simplify the setting of the relay,
there is a configuration settings column which can be used to enable or disable many
of the functions of the relay. The settings associated with any function that is disabled
are made invisible, i.e. they are not shown in the menu. To disable a function
change the relevant cell in the ‘Configuration’ column from ‘Enabled’ to ‘Disabled’.
The configuration column controls which of the four protection settings groups is
selected as active through the ‘Active settings’ cell. A protection setting group can
also be disabled in the configuration column, provided it is not the present active
group. Similarly, a disabled setting group cannot be set as the active group.
The column also allows all of the setting values in one group of protection settings to
be copied to another group.
To do this firstly set the ‘Copy from’ cell to the protection setting group to be copied,
then set the ‘Copy to’ cell to the protection group where the copy is to be placed. The
copied settings are initially placed in the temporary scratchpad, and will only be used
by the relay following confirmation.
To restore the default values to the settings in any protection settings group, set the
‘Restore defaults’ cell to the relevant group number. Alternatively it is possible to set
the ‘Restore defaults’ cell to ‘All settings’ to restore the default values to all of the
relay’s settings, not just the protection groups’ settings. The default settings will
initially be placed in the scratchpad and will only be used by the relay after they have
been confirmed. Note that restoring defaults to all settings includes the rear
communication port settings, which may result in communication via the rear port
being disrupted if the new (default) settings do not match those of the master station.
3.6 Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD)
When the keypad is exposed it provides full access to the menu options of the relay,
with the information displayed on the LCD.

The /, 6, 8 and 2 keys which are used for menu navigation and setting value
changes include an auto-repeat function that comes into operation if any of these
keys are held continually pressed. This can be used to speed up both setting value
Note: *May vary according to relay type/model
Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 13/28

changes and menu navigation; the longer the key is held depressed, the faster the
rate of change or movement becomes.

System Other default displays


frequency 3-phase voltage

Alarm messages

Date and time


C
C

Column 1 Column 2 Column n


Group 4
Sytem data View records Other column headings Overcurrent

Data 1.1 Data 2.1 Data n.1


Language Last record |>1 function
C
Note: The C key will return
to column header
Data 1.2 Data 2.2 from any menu cell Data n.2
Password Time and date |>1 directional

Other setting Other setting Other setting


cells in cells in cells in
column 1 column 2 column n

Data 1.n Data 2.n Data n.n


Password C – A voltage |> char angle
level 2

P0105ena

Figure 4: Front panel user interface


3.6.1 Default display and menu time-out
The front panel menu has a selectable default display. The relay will time-out and
return to the default display and turn the LCD backlight off after 15 minutes of
keypad inactivity. If this happens any setting changes which have not been confirmed
will be lost and the original setting values maintained.
The contents of the default display can be selected from the following options:
3-phase and neutral current, 3-phase voltage, power, system frequency, date and
time, relay description, or a user-defined plant reference*. The default display is
selected with the ‘Default display’ cell of the ‘Measure’t setup’ column. Also, from the
default display the different default display options can be scrolled through using the
/and 6 keys. However the menu selected default display will be restored following
the menu time-out elapsing. Whenever there is an uncleared alarm present in the
relay (e.g. fault record, protection alarm, control alarm etc.) the default display will
be replaced by:

Alarms/Faults
Present

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model


P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction

Page 14/28 MiCOM P342, P343

Entry to the menu structure of the relay is made from the default display and is not
affected if the display is showing the ‘Alarms/Faults present’ message.
3.6.2 Menu navigation and setting browsing
The menu can be browsed using the four arrow keys, following the structure shown in
Figure 4. Thus, starting at the default display the 8 key will display the first column
heading. To select the required column heading use the Pand 6 keys. The setting
data contained in the column can then be viewed by using the
2 and 8 keys. It is possible to return to the column header either by holding the
[up arrow symbol] key down or by a single press of the clear key 0. It is only
possible to move across columns at the column heading level. To return to the
default display press the 8 key or the clear key 0 from any of the column
headings. It is not possible to go straight to the default display from within one of the
column cells using the auto-repeat facility of the 8 key, as the auto-repeat will stop
at the column heading. To move to the default display, the 8 key must be released
and pressed again.
3.6.3 Password entry
When entry of a password is required the following prompt will appear:

Enter password
**** Level 1

Note: The password required to edit the setting is the prompt as shown
above
A flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password may be changed.
Press the 8 and 2 keys to vary each character between A and Z. To move
between the character fields of the password, use the 4 and 6 keys. The password is
confirmed by pressing the enter key 5. The display will revert to ‘Enter Password’ if
an incorrect password is entered. At this point a message will be displayed indicating
whether a correct password has been entered and if so what level of access has been
unlocked. If this level is sufficient to edit the selected setting then the display will
return to the setting page to allow the edit to continue. If the correct level of
password has not been entered then the password prompt page will be returned to.
To escape from this prompt press the clear key 0. Alternatively, the password can
be entered using the ‘Password’ cell of the ‘System data’ column.
For the front panel user interface the password protected access will revert to the
default access level after a keypad inactivity time-out of 15 minutes. It is possible to
manually reset the password protection to the default level by moving to the
‘Password’ menu cell in the ‘System data’ column and pressing the clear key 0
instead of entering a password.
3.6.4 Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records
The presence of one or more alarm messages will be indicated by the default display
and by the yellow alarm LED flashing. The alarm messages can either be self-
resetting or latched, in which case they must be cleared manually. To view the alarm
messages press the read key 1. When all alarms have been viewed, but not

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model


Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 15/28

cleared, the alarm LED will change from flashing to constant illumination and the
latest fault record will be displayed (if there is one). To scroll through the pages of
this use the 1 key. When all pages of the fault record have been viewed, the
following prompt will appear:

Press clear to
reset alarms

To clear all alarm messages press 0; to return to the alarms/faults present display
and leave the alarms uncleared, press 1. Depending on the password configuration
settings, it may be necessary to enter a password before the alarm messages can be
cleared (see section on password entry). When the alarms have been cleared the
yellow alarm LED will extinguish, as will the red trip LED if it was illuminated following
a trip.
Alternatively it is possible to accelerate the procedure, once the alarm viewer has
been entered using the 1 key, the 0 key can be pressed, this will move the display
straight to the fault record. Pressing 0 again will move straight to the alarm reset
prompt where pressing 0 once more will clear all alarms.

3.6.5 Setting changes


To change the value of a setting, first navigate the menu to display the relevant cell.
To change the cell value press the enter key 5, which will bring up a flashing cursor
on the LCD to indicate that the value can be changed. This will only happen if the
appropriate password has been entered, otherwise the prompt to enter a password
will appear. The setting value can then be changed by pressing the or 6 keys. If the
setting to be changed is a binary value or a text string, the required bit or character to
be changed must first be selected using the /and 6 keys. When the desired new
value has been reached it is confirmed as the new setting value by pressing
5. Alternatively, the new value will be discarded either if the clear button 0 is
pressed or if the menu time-out occurs.
For protection group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must be
confirmed before they are used by the relay. To do this, when all required changes
have been entered, return to the column heading level and press the key. Prior to
returning to the default display the following prompt will be given:

Update settings?
Enter or clear

Pressing 5 will result in the new settings being adopted, pressing 0 will cause the
relay to discard the newly entered values. It should be noted that, the setting values
will also be discarded if the menu time out occurs before the setting changes have
been confirmed. Control and support settings will be updated immediately after they
are entered, without ‘Update settings?’ prompt.

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model


P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction

Page 16/28 MiCOM P342, P343

3.7 Front communication port user interface


The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located
under the bottom hinged cover. It provides EIA(RS)232 serial data communication
and is intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown
in Figure 5. This port supports the Courier communication protocol only. Courier is
the communication language developed by AREVA T&D to allow communication with
its range of protection relays. The front port is particularly designed for use with the
relay settings program MiCOM S1 which is a Windows 98/NT based software
package.

MiCOM relay

Laptop

SK2

SK1

25 pin
download/monitor port

9 pin
Battery front comms port Serial communication port
(COM 1 or COM 2)
Serial data connector
(up to 15m)

P0107ena

Figure 5: Front port connection


The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin
connections of the relay’s 9-pin front port are as follows:
Pin no. 2 Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 3 Rx Receive data
Pin no. 5 0V Zero volts common
None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to
the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below
(if in doubt check your PC manual):
25 Way 9 Way
Pin no. 3 2 Rx Receive data
Pin no. 2 3 Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 7 5 0V Zero volts common
For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the
Rx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the
PC, as shown in Figure 6. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin
connections as given above, a ‘straight through’ serial connector is required, i.e. one
that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. Note that a common
cause of difficulty with serial data communication is connecting Tx to Tx and Rx to Rx.
Note: *May vary according to relay type/model
Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 17/28

This could happen if a ‘cross-over’ serial connector is used, i.e. one that connects pin
2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or if the PC has the same pin configuration as the
relay.

PC
MiCOM relay

DCE Serial data connector DTE


Pin 2 Tx Pin 2 Rx
Pin 3 Rx Pin 3 Tx
Pin 5 0V Pin 5 0V

Note: PC connection shown assuming 9 Way serial port

P0108ena

Figure 6: PC – relay signal connection


Having made the physical connection from the relay to the PC, the PC’s
communication settings must be configured to match those of the relay. The relay’s
communication settings for the front port are fixed as shown in the table below:

Protocol Courier
Baud rate 19,200 bits/s
Courier address 1
Message format 11 bit - 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit (even parity),
1 stop bit

The inactivity timer for the front port is set at 15 minutes. This controls how long the
relay will maintain its level of password access on the front port. If no messages are
received on the front port for 15 minutes then any password access level that has
been enabled will be revoked.
3.8 Rear communication port user interface
The rear port can support one of four communication protocols (Courier, MODBUS,
DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-103), the choice of which must be made when the relay is
ordered. The rear communication port is provided by a 3-terminal screw connector
located on the back of the relay. See section P34x/EN CO/E33 for details of the
connection terminals. The rear port provides K-Bus/EIA(RS)485 serial data
communication and is intended for use with a permanently-wired connection to a
remote control centre. Of the three connections, two are for the signal connection,
and the other is for the earth
shield of the cable. When the K-Bus option is selected for the rear port, the
two signal connections are not polarity conscious, however for MODBUS, IEC 60870-
5-103 and DNP3.0 care must be taken to observe the correct polarity.
The protocol provided by the relay is indicated in the relay menu in the
‘Communications’ column. Using the keypad and LCD, firstly check that the ‘Comms
settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the
‘Communications’ column. The first cell down the column shows the communication
protocol being used by the rear port.

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model


P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction

Page 18/28 MiCOM P342, P343

3.8.1 Courier communication


Courier is the communication language developed by AREVA T&D to allow remote
interrogation of its range of protection relays. Courier works on a master/slave basis
where the slave units contain information in the form of a database, and respond
with information from the database when it is requested by a master unit.
The relay is a slave unit which is designed to be used with a Courier master unit such
as MiCOM S1, MiCOM S10, PAS&T or a SCADA system. MiCOM S1 is a Windows
NT4.0/98 compatible software package which is specifically designed for setting
changes with the relay.
To use the rear port to communicate with a PC-based master station using Courier, a
KITZ K-Bus to EIA(RS)232 protocol converter is required. This unit is available from
AREVA T&D. A typical connection arrangement is shown in Figure 7. For more
detailed information on other possible connection arrangements refer to the manual
for the Courier master station software and the manual for the KITZ protocol
converter. Each spur of the K-Bus twisted pair wiring can be up to 1000m in length
and have up to 32 relays connected to it.

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model


Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 19/28

Twisted pair ‘K-Bus’ RS485 communications link

MiCOM relay MiCOM relay MiCOM relay

RS232 K-Bus

PC

KITZ protocol
converter
PC serial port

Modem

Public switched Courier master station


telephone network eg. substation control room

PC

Modem

Remote Courier master station P0109ena


eg. area control centre

Figure 7: Remote communication connection arrangements


Having made the physical connection to the relay, the relay’s communication settings
must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay
menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set
to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Only two settings apply to
the rear port using Courier, the relay’s address and the inactivity timer. Synchronous
communication is used at a fixed baud rate of 64kbits/s.
Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the first cell
down which indicates the communication protocol:

Protocol
Courier

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model


P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction

Page 20/28 MiCOM P342, P343

The next cell down the column controls the address of the relay:

Remote address
1

Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in Figure 7, it


is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the
master control station are accepted by one relay only. Courier uses an integer
number between 0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is
important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The Courier address is
then used by the master station to communicate with the relay.
The next cell down controls the inactivity timer:

Inactivity timer
10.00 mins

The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any
messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any
password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and
30 minutes.
Note that protection and disturbance recorder settings that are modified using an on-
line editor such as PAS&T must be confirmed with a write to the ‘Save changes’ cell of
the ‘Configuration’ column. Off-line editors such as MiCOM S1 do not require this
action for the setting changes to take effect.
3.8.2 MODBUS communication
MODBUS is a master/slave communication protocol which can be used for network
control. In a similar fashion to Courier, the system works by the master device
initiating all actions and the slave devices, (the relays), responding to the master by
supplying the requested data or by taking the requested action. MODBUS
communication is achieved via a twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be
used over a distance of 1000m with up to 32 slave devices.
To use the rear port with MODBUS communication, the relay’s communication
settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In
the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the ‘Configuration’
column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Four settings
apply to the rear port using MODBUS which are described below. Move down the
‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the first cell down which
indicates the communication protocol:

Protocol
MODBUS

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model


Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 21/28

The next cell down controls the MODBUS address of the relay:

MODBUS address
23

Up to 32 relays can be connected to one MODBUS spur, and therefore it is necessary


for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control
station are accepted by one relay only. MODBUS uses an integer number between 1
and 247 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same
MODBUS address. The MODBUS address is then used by the master station to
communicate with the relay.
The next cell down controls the inactivity timer:

Inactivity timer
10.00 mins

The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any
messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any
password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and
30 minutes.
The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used:

Baud rate
9600 bits/s

MODBUS communication is asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the


relay, ‘9600 bits/s’, ‘19200 bits/s’ and ‘38400 bits/s’. It is important that whatever
baud rate is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the MODBUS master
station.
The next cell down controls the parity format used in the data frames:

Parity
None

The parity can be set to be one of ‘None’, ‘Odd’ or ‘Even’. It is important that
whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the
MODBUS master station.
3.8.3 IEC 60870-5 CS 103 communication
The IEC specification IEC 60870-5-103: Telecontrol Equipment and Systems, Part 5:
Transmission Protocols Section 103 defines the use of standards
IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5 to perform communication with protection
equipment. The standard configuration for the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol is to use a
twisted pair connection over distances up to 1000m. As an option for IEC 60870-5-
103, the rear port can be specified to use a fibre optic connection for direct

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model


P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction

Page 22/28 MiCOM P342, P343

connection to a master station. The relay operates as a slave in the system,


responding to commands from a master station. The method of communication uses
standardised messages which are based on the VDEW communication protocol.
To use the rear port with IEC 60870-5-103 communication, the relay’s
communication settings must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user
interface. In the relay menu firstly check that the ‘Comms settings’ cell in the
‘Configuration’ column is set to ‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column.
Four settings apply to the rear port using IEC 60870-5-103 which are described
below. Move down the ‘Communications’ column from the column heading to the
first cell which indicates the communication protocol:

Protocol
IEC 60870-5-103

The next cell down controls the IEC 60870-5-103 address of the relay:

Remote address
162

Up to 32 relays can be connected to one IEC 60870-5-103 spur, and therefore it is


necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master
control station are accepted by one relay only. IEC 60870-5-103 uses an integer
number between 0 and 254 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays
have the same IEC 60870-5-103 address. The IEC 60870-5-103 address is then
used by the master station to communicate with the relay.
The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used:

Baud rate
9600 bits/s

IEC 60870-5-103 communication is asynchronous. Two baud rates are supported by


the relay, ‘9600 bits/s’ and ‘19200 bits/s’. It is important that whatever baud rate is
selected on the relay is the same as that set on the IEC 60870-5-103 master station.
The next cell down controls the period between IEC 60870-5-103 measurements:

Measure’t period
30.00 s

The IEC 60870-5-103 protocol allows the relay to supply measurements at regular
intervals. The interval between measurements is controlled by this cell, and can be
set between 1 and 60 seconds.
The following cell is not currently used but is available for future expansion

Inactive timer

The next cell down the column controls the physical media used for the
communication:
Note: *May vary according to relay type/model
Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 23/28

Physical link
EIA(RS)485

The default setting is to select the electrical EIA(RS)485 connection. If the optional
fibre optic connectors are fitted to the relay, then this setting can be changed to ‘Fibre
optic’. This cell is also invisible if second rear comms port is fitted as it is mutually
exclusive with the fibre optic connectors.
The next cell down can be used for monitor or command blocking:

CS103 Blocking

There are three settings associated with this cell; these are:
• Disabled - No blocking selected.
• Monitor Blocking - When the monitor blocking DDB Signal is active high, either
by energising an opto input or control input, reading of the
status information and disturbance records is not permitted.
When in this mode the relay returns a “Termination of
general interrogation” message to the master station.
• Command Blocking - When the command blocking DDB signal is active high, either
by energising an opto input or control input, all remote
commands will be ignored (i.e. CB Trip/Close, change setting
group etc.). When in this mode the relay returns a “negative
acknowledgement of command” message to the master
station.

3.8.4 DNP 3.0 Communication


The DNP 3.0 protocol is defined and administered by the DNP User Group.
Information about the user group, DNP 3.0 in general and protocol specifications
can be found on their website: www.dnp.org
The relay operates as a DNP 3.0 slave and supports subset level 2 of the protocol
plus some of the features from level 3. DNP 3.0 communication is achieved via a
twisted pair connection to the rear port and can be used over a distance of 1000m
with up to 32 slave devices.
To use the rear port with DNP 3.0 communication, the relay’s communication settings
must be configured. To do this use the keypad and LCD user interface. In the relay
menu firstly check that the ‘Comms setting’ cell in the ‘Configuration’ column is set to
‘Visible’, then move to the ‘Communications’ column. Four settings apply to the rear
port using DNP 3.0, which are described below. Move down the ‘Communications’
column from the column heading to the first cell which indicates the communications
protocol:

Protocol
DNP 3.0

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model


P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction

Page 24/28 MiCOM P342, P343

The next cell controls the DNP 3.0 address of the relay:

DNP 3.0 address


232

Upto 32 relays can be connected to one DNP 3.0 spur, and therefore it is necessary
for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the master control
station are accepted by only one relay. DNP 3.0 uses a decimal number between 1
and 65519 for the relay address. It is important that no two relays have the same
DNP 3.0 address. The DNP 3.0 address is then used by the master station to
communicate with the relay.
The next cell down the column controls the baud rate to be used:

Baud rate
9600 bits/s

DNP 3.0 communication is asynchronous. Six baud rates are supported by the relay
‘1200bits/s’, ‘2400bits/s’, ‘4800bits/s’, ’9600bits/s’, ‘19200bits/s’ and
‘38400bits/s’. It is important that whatever baud rate is selected on the relay is the
same as that set on the DNP 3.0 master station.
The next cell down the column controls the parity format used in the data frames:

Parity
None

The parity can be set to be one of ‘None’, ‘Odd’ or ‘Even’. It is important that
whatever parity format is selected on the relay is the same as that set on the DNP 3.0
master station.
The next cell down the column sets the time synchronisation request from the master
by the relay:

Time Synch
Enabled

The time synch can be set to either enabled or disabled. If enabled it allows the DNP
3.0 master to synchronise the time.
3.9 Second rear communication port
For relays with Courier, MODBUS, IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol on the first
rear communications port there is the hardware option of a second rear
communications port, which will run the Courier language. This can be used over
one of three physical links: twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity sensitive), twisted pair
EIA(RS)485 (connection polarity sensitive) or EIA(RS)232.

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model


Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 25/28

The settings for this port are located immediately below the ones for the first port as
described in previous sections of P34x/EN IT/E33. Move down the settings until the
following sub heading is displayed.

REAR PORT2 (RP2)

The next cell down indicates the language, which is fixed at Courier for RP2.

RP2 Protocol
Courier

The next cell down indicates the status of the hardware, e.g.

RP2 Card Status


EIA(RS)232 OK

The next cell allows for selection of the port configuration.

RP2 Port Config


EIA(RS)232

The port can be configured for EIA(RS)232, EIA(RS)485 or K-Bus.


In the case of EIA(RS)232 and EIA(RS)485 the next cell selects the communication
mode.

RP2 Comms Mode


IEC60870 FT1.2

The choice is either IEC60870 FT1.2 for normal operation with 11-bit modems, or
10-bit no parity.
The next cell down controls the comms port address.

RP2 Address
255

Since up to 32 relays can be connected to one K-bus spur, as indicated in Figure 7, it


is necessary for each relay to have a unique address so that messages from the
master control station are accepted by one relay only. Courier uses an integer
number between 0 and 254 for the relay address which is set with this cell. It is
important that no two relays have the same Courier address. The Courier address is
then used by the master station to communicate with the relay.
The next cell down controls the inactivity timer.
Note: *May vary according to relay type/model
P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction

Page 26/28 MiCOM P342, P343

RP2 Inactivity Timer


15 mins

The inactivity timer controls how long the relay will wait without receiving any
messages on the rear port before it reverts to its default state, including revoking any
password access that was enabled. For the rear port this can be set between 1 and
30 minutes.
In the case of EIA(RS)232 and EIA(RS)485 the next cell down controls the baud rate.
For K-Bus the baud rate is fixed at 64kbit/second between the relay and the KITZ
interface at the end of the relay spur.

RP2 Baud Rate


19200

Courier communications is asynchronous. Three baud rates are supported by the


relay, ‘9600 bits/s’, ‘19200 bits/s’ and ‘38400 bits/s’.

“K-Bus Application” example


Master 1 Master 2
st
Note: 1 RP could be any chosen protocol, 2nd RP is always Courier To SCADA

CENTRAL PROCESSOR
POWER SUPPLY

modem modem R.T.U.


EIA(RS)232 K-Bus KITZ102 EIA(RS)232

EIA(RS)232 1st RP (Courier)


port 1

Master 3 KITZ K-Bus


201 port 3

EIA(RS)232
port 0
2nd RP (Courier)

3 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via


KITZ101, K-Bus 2nd rear port via remote PC and S/S PC
P2084ENA

Figure 8: Second rear port K-Bus application

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model


Introduction P34x/EN IT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 27/28

“EIA(RS)485 Application” example


Master 2
Master 1
Note: 1st RP could be any chosen protocol,nd2 RP is always Courier To SCADA

CE
PO NT
WE RAL
R PR
SU OC
ESS
modem modem PPL
Y OR R.T.U.
EIA232 EIA232 EIA232
EIA485
CK222

1st RP (Modbus/ IEC103)


KITZ202/4

CK222

EIA485
Front port

EIA232
2nd RP (EIA485)
MiCOMS1

2 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via CK222, EIA485 2nd
rear port via remote PC, Px40 & Px30 mixture plus front access P2085ENA

Figure 9: Second rear port EIA(RS)485 example

“EIA(RS)232 Application” example


Master 2
Master 1
Note: 1st RP could be any chosen protocol, 2nd RP is always Courier CENTRAL PROCESSOR To SCADA
POWER SUPPLY

EIA232
modem modem R.T.U.
EIA232 EIA232
EIA485 CK222

EIA232
splitter 1st RP (Modbus / DNP/ IEC103)
EIA232
15 a x
m
m

Front port

EIA232
2nd RP (EIA232)
MiCOMS1

2 Master stations configuration: SCADA (Px40 1st RP) via CK222, EIA232 2nd rear P2086ENA

port via remote PC, max EIA232 bus distance 15m, PC local front/rear access

Figure 10: Second rear port EIA(RS)232 example

Note: *May vary according to relay type/model


P34x/EN IT/F33 Introduction

Page 28/28 MiCOM P342, P343


Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343

APPLICATION NOTES
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

MiCOM P342, P343


Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 1/176

CONTENT

1. INTRODUCTION 11
1.1 Protection of generators 11
1.2 MiCOM Generator protection relays 12
1.2.1 Protection features 13
1.2.2 Non-protection features 14

2. APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 14


2.1 Configuration column 14
2.2 CT and VT ratios 17
2.3 Generator differential protection 17
2.3.1 Biased differential protection 19
2.3.2 Setting guidelines for biased differential protection 20
2.3.3 High impedance differential protection 21
2.3.4 Setting guidelines for high impedance differential protection 22
2.3.5 Interturn (split phase) protection 26
2.3.5.1 Differential interturn protection 26
2.3.5.2 Application of biased differential protection for interturn protection 27
2.3.5.3 Application of overcurrent protection for interturn protection 29
2.3.5.4 Interturn protection by zero sequence voltage measurement 30
2.4 Phase fault overcurrent protection 32
2.4.1 RI curve 34
2.4.2 Application of timer hold facility 34
2.4.3 Setting guidelines for overcurrent protection 35
2.5 System back-up protection 35
2.5.1 Voltage dependant overcurrent protection 38
2.5.1.1 Voltage controlled overcurrent protection 38
2.5.1.2 Voltage restrained overcurrent protection 40
2.5.1.3 Setting guidelines for voltage controlled overcurrent function 41
2.5.2 Under impedance protection 43
2.5.2.1 Setting guidelines for under impedance function 44
2.6 Undervoltage protection function (27) 44
2.6.1 Setting guidelines for undervoltage protection 46
2.7 Overvoltage protection 47
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 2/176 MiCOM P342, P343

2.7.1 Setting guidelines for overvoltage protection 48


2.8 Underfrequency protection 49
2.8.1 Setting guidelines for underfrequency protection 50
2.9 Overfrequency protection function 52
2.9.1 Setting guidelines for overfrequency protection 52
2.10 Field failure protection function (40) 53
2.10.1 Setting guidelines for field failure protection 55
2.10.1.1 Impedance element 1 55
2.10.1.2 Impedance element 2 56
2.10.1.3 Power factor element 56
2.11 Negative phase sequence thermal protection 57
2.11.1 Setting guidelines for negative phase sequence thermal protection 60
2.12 Reverse power/over power/low forward power 62
2.12.1 Sensitive power protection function 63
2.12.2 Low forward power protection function 65
2.12.2.1 Low forward power setting guideline 66
2.12.3 Reverse power protection function 66
2.12.3.1 Reverse power setting guideline 67
2.12.4 Over power protection 68
2.12.4.1 Over power setting guideline 68
2.13 Stator earth fault protection function 68
2.13.1 IDG curve 70
2.13.2 Setting guidelines for stator earth fault potection 71
2.14 Residual overvoltage/neutral voltage displacement protection function 72
2.14.1 Setting guidelines for residual overvoltage/neutral voltage displacement
protection 74
2.15 Sensitive earth fault protection function 75
2.15.1 Setting guidelines for sensitive earth fault protection 77
2.16 Restricted earth fault protection 77
2.16.1 Low impedance biased differential REF protection 78
2.16.1.1 Setting guidelines for low impedance biased REF protection 81
2.16.2 High impedance restricted earth fault protection 81
2.16.2.1 Setting guidelines for high impedance REF protection 83
2.17 100% stator earth fault protection 86
2.17.1 Setting guidelines for 100% stator earth fault protection 90
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 3/176

2.18 Overfluxing protection 91


2.18.1 Setting guidelines for overfluxing protection 92
2.19 Dead machine/unintentional energisation at standstill protection 93
2.19.1 Setting guidelines for dead machine protection 94
2.20 Resistive temperature device (RTD) thermal protection 94
2.20.1 Setting guidelines for RTD thermal protection 96
2.21 P342 pole slipping protection 97
2.21.1 Reverse power protection 97
2.21.2 System back-up protection function 97
2.21.3 Field failure protection function 98
2.22 P343 pole slipping protection 99
2.22.1 Introduction 99
2.22.2 Loss of synchronism characteristics 100
2.22.3 Generator pole slipping characteristics 103
2.22.3.1 What happens if EG / ES has different values less than one (1)? 103
2.22.3.2 What happens if different system impedances are applied? 103
2.22.3.3 How to determine the generator reactance during a pole slipping condition? 103
2.22.3.4 How to determine the slip rate of pole slipping? 104
2.22.4 General requirements for pole slipping protection 104
2.22.5 Lenticular scheme 104
2.22.5.1 Characteristic 104
2.22.5.2 Generating and motoring modes 105
2.22.6 Pole slipping protection operation 106
2.22.6.1 State machine 106
2.22.6.2 Protection functions and logic structure 109
2.22.6.3 Motoring mode 110
2.22.6.4 Generating and motoring mode 110
2.22.7 Setting guidelines for pole slipping protection 111
2.22.7.1 Settings 114
2.22.7.2 DDB output 115
2.22.7.3 Pole slipping setting examples 115
2.22.8 Example calculation 115
2.23 Thermal overload protection 116
2.23.1 Introduction 116
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 4/176 MiCOM P342, P343

2.23.2 Thermal replica 117


2.23.3 Setting guidelines 119
2.24 Circuit breaker failure protection 120
2.24.1 Breaker failure protection configurations 120
2.24.2 Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers 121
2.24.3 Typical settings 123
2.24.3.1 Breaker fail timer settings 123
2.24.4 Breaker fail undercurrent settings 123
2.25 Breaker flashover protection 124
2.26 Blocked overcurrent protection 126
2.27 Current loop inputs and outputs 127
2.27.1 Current loop inputs 127
2.27.2 Setting guidelines for current loop inputs 129
2.27.3 Current loop outputs 130
2.27.4 Setting guidelines for current loop outputs 135

3. APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 135


3.1 VT supervision 135
3.1.1 Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions 136
3.1.2 Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation 136
3.1.2.1 Inputs 138
3.1.2.2 Outputs 138
3.1.3 Menu settings 139
3.2 CT supervision 140
3.2.1 The CT supervision feature 140
3.2.2 Setting the CT supervision element 141
3.3 Circuit breaker state monitoring 141
3.3.1 Circuit breaker state monitoring features 141
3.4 Pole dead logic 143
3.5 Circuit breaker condition monitoring 144
3.5.1 Circuit breaker condition monitoring features 145
3.5.2 Setting guidelines 146
3.5.2.1 Setting the Σ Ι^ thresholds 146
3.5.2.2 Setting the number of operations thresholds 146
3.5.2.3 Setting the operating time thresholds 147
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 5/176

3.5.2.4 Setting the excessive fault frequency thresholds 147


3.5.3 Circuit breaker state monitoring features 147
3.6 Trip circuit supervision (TCS) 148
3.6.1 TCS scheme 1 148
3.6.1.1 Scheme description 148
3.6.2 Scheme 1 PSL 149
3.6.3 TCS scheme 2 150
3.6.3.1 Scheme description 150
3.6.4 Scheme 2 PSL 150
3.6.5 TCS scheme 3 151
3.6.5.1 Scheme description 151
3.6.6 Scheme 3 PSL 152
3.7 Event & fault records 152
3.7.1 Change of state of opto-isolated inputs 153
3.7.2 Change of state of one or more output relay contacts 153
3.7.3 Relay alarm conditions 154
3.7.4 Protection element starts and trips 155
3.7.5 General events 155
3.7.6 Fault records 155
3.7.7 Maintenance reports 155
3.7.8 Setting changes 155
3.7.9 Resetting of event/fault records 156
3.7.10 Viewing event records via MiCOM S1 support software 156
3.7.11 Event filtering 158
3.8 Disturbance recorder 159
3.9 Measurements 160
3.9.1 Measured voltages and currents 160
3.9.2 Sequence voltages and currents 161
3.9.3 Power and energy quantities 161
3.9.4 Rms. voltages and currents 161
3.9.5 Demand values 161
3.9.5.1 Fixed demand values 162
3.9.5.2 Rolling demand values 162
3.9.5.3 Peak demand values 162
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 6/176 MiCOM P342, P343

3.9.6 Settings 162


3.9.6.1 Default display 162
3.9.6.2 Local values 162
3.9.6.3 Remote values 163
3.9.6.4 Measurement REF 163
3.9.6.5 Measurement mode 163
3.9.6.6 Fixed demand period 163
3.9.6.7 Rolling sub-period and number of sub-periods 163
3.10 Changing setting groups 163
3.11 Control inputs 164
3.12 VT connections 164
3.12.1 Open delta (vee connected) VT's 164
3.12.2 VT single point earthing 165
3.13 PSL DATA column 165
3.14 Auto reset of trip LED indication 165

4. CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS 166


4.1 Generator differential function 166
4.1.1 Biased differential protection 166
4.1.2 High impedance differential protection 167
4.2 Voltage dependent overcurrent, field failure and negative phase
sequence protection functions 167
4.3 Sensitive directional earth fault protection function residual current
input 168
4.3.1 Line current transformers 168
4.3.2 Core balanced current transformers 168
4.4 Stator earth fault protection function 169
4.4.1 Non-directional definite time/IDMT earth fault protection 169
4.4.2 Non-directional instantaneous earth fault protection 169
4.5 Restricted earth fault protection 169
4.5.1 Low impedance 169
4.5.2 High impedance 170
4.6 Reverse and low forward power protection functions 170
4.6.1 Protection class current transformers 170
4.6.2 Metering class current transformers 170
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 7/176

4.7 Converting an IEC185 current transformer standard protection


classification to a kneepoint voltage 171
4.8 Converting IEC185 current transformer standard protection classification
to an ANSI/IEEE standard voltage rating 172

5. COMMISSIONING TEST MENU 172


5.1 Opto I/P status 173
5.2 Relay O/P status 173
5.3 Test port status 174
5.4 LED status 174
5.5 Monitor bits 1 to 8 174
5.6 Test mode 174
5.7 Test pattern 175
5.8 Contact test 175
5.9 Test LEDs 175
5.10 Using a monitor/download port test box 175

Figure 1: Principle of circulating current differential protection 18


Figure 2: Biased differential protection operating characteristic 19
Figure 3: Relay connections for biased differential protection 20
Figure 4: Principle of high impedance differential protection 21
Figure 5: Relay connections for high impedance differential protection 22
Figure 6: Generator interturn protection using separate CTs 26
Figure 7: Generator interturn protection using core balance (window) CTs 27
Figure 8: Transverse biased differential protection for double wound machines 28
Figure 9: Generator differential and interturn protection 29
Figure 10: Overcurrent interturn protection 30
Figure 11: Interturn protection by zero sequence voltage measurement 31
Figure 12: Typical generator fault current decrement curve 36
Figure 13: Modification of current pickup level for voltage controlled overcurrent
protection 38
Figure 14: Modification of current pickup level for voltage restrained overcurrent
protection 41
Figure 15: Under impedance element tripping characteristic 43
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 8/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Figure 16: Co-ordination of underfrequency protection function with system load shedding 51
Figure 17: Field failure protection characteristics 53
Figure 18: Negative phase sequence thermal characteristic 59
Figure 19: Effective coverage of stator earth fault protection 69
Figure 20: IDG characteristic 71
Figure 21: Alternative relay connections for residual overvoltage/NVD protection 73
Figure 22: Relay connections for biased REF protection 79
Figure 23: Biased REF protection operating characteristic 79
Figure 24: Neutral scaling for biased REF protection 80
Figure 25: Principle of high impedance differential protection 82
Figure 26: Relay connections for high impedance REF protection 82
Figure 27: Distribution of the 3rd harmonic component along the stator winding of a
large generator, (a) normal operation, (b) stator earth fault at the star point
(c), stator earth fault at the terminals 87
Figure 28: 100% Stator earth fault protection block diagram 88
Figure 29: Connection for 3rd harmonic undervoltage and overvoltage for 100% stator
earth fault protection 89
Figure 30: Fixed scheme logic for unintentional energisation of standstill protection 93
Figure 31: Connection for RTD thermal probes 95
Figure 32: Field failure protection function characteristics (small co-generator) 98
Figure 33: Simplified two machine system 101
Figure 34: Apparent impedance loci viewed at the generator terminal (point A) 102
Figure 35: Pole slipping protection using blinder and lenticular characteristic 105
Figure 36: State machine 106
Figure 37: Regions and zones definition (generating mode) 107
Figure 39: Regions and zones definition (motoring mode) 110
Figure 40: Lenticular scheme characteristic 111
Figure 41: Pole slipping protection using blinder and lenticular characteristic 113
Figure 42: Example system configuration 115
Figure 43: CB fail logic 124
Figure 44: Breaker flashover protection for directly connected machine 125
Figure 45: Breaker flashover protection for indirectly connected machine 125
Figure 46a: Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer) 126
Figure 46b: Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer) 127
Figure 47: Relationship between the transducer measuring quantity and the current
input range 128
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 9/176

Figure 48: Relationship between the current output and the relay measurement 131
Figure 49: VTS logic 137
Figure 50: CT supervision function block diagram 140
Figure 51: CB state monitoring 143
Figure 52: Pole dead logic 144
Figure 53: TCS scheme 1 148
Figure 54: PSL for TCS schemes 1 and 3 149
Figure 55: TCS scheme 2 150
Figure 56: PSL for TCS scheme 2 151
Figure 57: TCS scheme 2 151
Figure 58: Trip LED logic diagram 166
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 10/176 MiCOM P342, P343


Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 11/176

1. INTRODUCTION

1.1 Protection of generators


An ac generator forms the electromechanical stage of an overall energy conversion
process that results in the production of electrical power. A reciprocating engine, or
one of many forms of turbine, acts as a prime mover to provide the rotary
mechanical input to the alternator.
There are many forms of generating plant that utilise a variety of sources of energy
available, e.g. combustion of fossil fuels, hydro dams and nuclear fission.
Generation schemes may be provided for base-load production, peak-lopping or for
providing standby power.
Electrical protection should quickly detect and initiate shutdown for major electrical
faults associated with the generating plant and, less urgently, to detect abnormal
operating conditions which may lead to plant damage.
Abnormal electrical conditions can arise as a result of a failure within the generating
plant itself, but can also be externally imposed on the generator. Common
categories of faults and abnormal conditions which can be detected electrically are
listed as follows: (Not all conditions have to be detected for all applications.)
Major electrical faults
• Insulation failure of stator windings or connections
Secondary electrical faults
• Insulation failure of excitation system
• Failure of excitation system
• Unsynchronised over voltage
Abnormal prime mover or control conditions
• Failure of prime mover
• Over frequency
• Over fluxing
• Dead machine energisation
• Breaker flashover
System related
• Feeding an uncleared fault
• Prolonged or heavy unbalanced loading
• Prolonged or heavy overload
• Loss of synchronism
• Over frequency
• Under frequency
• Synchronised over voltage
• Over fluxing
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 12/176 MiCOM P342, P343

• Undervoltage
In addition various types of mechanical protection may be necessary, such as
vibration detection, lubricant and coolant monitoring, temperature detection etc.
The action required following response of an electrical or mechanical protection is
often categorised as follows:
• Urgent shutdown
• Non-urgent shutdown
• Alarm only
An urgent shutdown would be required, for example, if a phase to phase fault
occurred within the generator electrical connections. A non-urgent shutdown might
be sequential, where the prime mover may be shutdown prior to electrically
unloading the generator, in order to avoid over speed. A non-urgent shutdown may
be initiated in the case of continued unbalanced loading. In this case, it is desirable
that an alarm should be given before shutdown becomes necessary, in order to allow
for operator intervention to remedy the situation.
For urgent tripping, it may be desirable to electrically maintain the shutdown
condition with latching protection output contacts, which would require manual
resetting. For a non-urgent shutdown, it may be required that the output contacts are
self-reset, so that production of power can be re-started as soon as possible.
The P342/3 is able to maintain all protection functions in service over a wide range
of operating frequency due to its frequency tracking system (5-70 Hz). The P343
frequency tracking capability is of particular interest for pumped storage generation
schemes, where synchronous machines can be operated from a variable frequency
supply when in pumping mode. Additionally, in the case of combined cycle
generating plant, it may be necessary to excite and synchronise a steam turbine
generating set with a gas turbine set at low frequency, prior to running up to nominal
frequency and synchronising with the power system.
When the P342/3 protection functions are required to operate accurately at low
frequency, it will be necessary to use CTs with larger cores. In effect, the CT
requirements need to be multiplied by fn/f, where f is the minimum required
operating frequency and fn is the nominal operating frequency.

1.2 MiCOM Generator protection relays


MiCOM relays are a new range of products from AREVA T&D. Using the latest
numerical technology the range includes devices designed for the application to a
wide range of power system plant such as motors, generators, feeders, overhead
lines and cables.
Each relay is designed around a common hardware and software platform in order
to achieve a high degree of commonality between products. One such product in the
range is the P340 Generator protection relays. The relays have been designed to
cater for the protection of a wide range of generators from small machines, providing
standby power on industrial sites, to large machines in power stations providing for
the base load on the grid transmission network.
The relays also include a comprehensive range of non-protection features to aid with
power system diagnosis and fault analysis. All these features can be accessed
remotely from one of the relays remote serial communications options.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 13/176

1.2.1 Protection features


The P340 relays contain a wide variety of protection functions for the protection of
generators. There are 2 separate models available to cover a wide range of
applications. The protection features of each model are summarised below:
• Generator differential protection - Phase segregated differential protection
operating on a biased or high impedance principle. Provides high speed,
discriminative protection for all fault types. {P343 only}
• Phase fault overcurrent protection - Two stage non-directional back-up protection.
• Voltage dependent overcurrent/under impedance protection - Back-up protection
for generators with limited fault current capacity.
• Earth fault overcurrent protection - Two stage non-directional back-up protection.
• Neutral voltage displacement protection - Two stage element providing protection
against earth faults on high impedance earthed systems.
• Sensitive directional earth fault protection - Discriminative earth fault protection
for parallel connected generators.
• 100% Stator earth fault protection - Provides protection against earth faults close
to the generator star point. {P343 only}
• Under/overvoltage protection - Two stage undervoltage and two stage
overvoltage protection.
• Under/over frequency protection - Four stage under frequency and two stage over
frequency protection.
• Reverse power - Protection against loss of prime mover.
• Low forward power - Provides an interlock for non urgent tripping.
• Over power - Back-up overload protection.
• Field failure - Two stage element for protection against loss of excitation.
• Negative phase sequence protection - Provides protection against unbalanced
loading which can cause overheating of the generator.
• Overfluxing - Provides protection for the generator/transformer against
unusual voltage or frequency conditions.
• Pole slipping – Provides protection against loss of synchronisation between the
generation and the system {P343 only}
• Unintentional energisation at standstill (dead machine) protection - Protection
against inadvertent closing of the generator circuit breaker when the machine is
not running. {P343 only}
• Voltage transformer supervision - To prevent mal-operation of voltage dependent
protection elements upon loss of a VT input signal.
• Thermal protection via RTD inputs - Thermal protection for the machine provided
by measuring the temperature of winding/bearings etc. via resistive thermal
devices embedded within the machine. 10 RTD inputs can be provided.
• Programmable scheme logic - Allowing user defined protection and control logic
to suit particular customer applications.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 14/176 MiCOM P342, P343

1.2.2 Non-protection features


Below is a summary of the P340 relay non-protective features.
• Measurements - Various measurements of value for display on the relay or
accessed from the serial communications, e.g. Currents, voltages, temperature
etc.
• Fault/event/disturbance records - Available from the serial communications or on
the relay display (fault and event records only on relay display).
• Real time clock / time synchronisation - Time synchronisation possible from relay
IRIG-B input.
• Four setting groups - Independent setting groups to cater for alternative power
system arrangements or customer specific applications.
• Remote serial communications - To allow remote access to the relays. The
following communications protocols are supported; Courier, MODBUS, IEC870-
5-103 (VDEW) and DNP3.0.
• Continuous self monitoring - Power on diagnostics and self checking routines to
provide maximum relay reliability and availability.
• Circuit breaker state monitoring - Provides indication of discrepancy between
circuit breaker auxiliary contacts.
• Circuit breaker condition monitoring - Provides records / alarm outputs regarding
the number of CB operations, sum of the interrupted current and the breaker
operating time.
• Commissioning test facilities.

2. APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS


The following sections detail the individual protection functions in addition to where
and how they may be applied. Each section also gives an extract from the respective
menu columns to demonstrate how the settings are actually applied to the relay.

2.1 Configuration column


The P340 relays include a column in the menu called the “CONFIGURATION”
column. This affects the operation of each of the individual protection functions. The
aim of this column is to allow general configuration of the relay from a single point in
the menu. Any of the functions that are disabled or made invisible from this column
do not then appear within the main relay menu.
The following table shows the relay menu for the configuration column, with default
settings. The brief description of the function of each setting is also provided.

Menu Text Default Setting Available Setting Function


CONFIGURATION
No Operation
All Settings Restore default
Setting Group 1 settings to any or
Restore Defaults No Operation
Setting Group 2 all group of
Setting Group 3 settings
Setting Group 4
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 15/176

Menu Text Default Setting Available Setting Function


CONFIGURATION
Select via Menu Change setting
Setting Group Select via Menu
Select via Optos groups by?
Group 1 Select active
Group 2 setting group used
Active Settings Group 1
Group 3 for protection
Group 4 settings
Saves all setting
No Operation
changes from
Save Changes No Operation Save
buffer memory
Abort
into stored settings
Selects a group of
settings to copy to
Copy From Group 1 Group1, 2, 3 or 4 the group
designated in
“Copy to” cell
Copies the group
of settings selected
in the “Copy
Copy To No Operation Group1,2,3 or 4
from” cell to the
selected setting
group
Selects if Group 1
settings are
Setting Group 1 Enabled Enabled or Disabled
available on the
relay
Selects if Group 2
settings are
Setting Group 2 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
available on the
relay
Selects if Group 3
settings are
Setting Group 3 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
available on the
relay
Selects if Group 4
settings are
Setting Group 4 Disabled Enabled or Disabled
available on the
relay
Enables protection
Gen Differential Enabled Enabled or Disabled element in the
relay
Power Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
Field Failure Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
NPS Thermal Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
System Backup Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
Overcurrent Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 16/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Menu Text Default Setting Available Setting Function


CONFIGURATION
Thermal
Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
Overload
Standard E/F Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
Disabled or SEF/REF
SEF/REF SPower SEF/REF “
or Sensitive Power
Residual O/V
Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
NVD
100% Stator E/F Disabled Enabled or Disabled “
V/Hz Disabled Enabled or Disabled “
Dead Machine Disabled Enabled or Disabled “
Volt Protection Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
Freq Protection Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
RTD Inputs Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
CB Fail Disabled Enabled or Disabled “
Pole Slipping Enabled Enabled or Disabled “
Supervision Disabled Enabled or Disabled “
Makes settings
Input Labels Visible Invisible or Visible visible in the relay
menu
Output Labels Visible Invisible or Visible “
RTD Labels Visible Invisible or Visible “
CT & VT Ratios Visible Invisible or Visible “
Event Recorder Invisible Invisible or Visible “
Disturb Recorder Invisible Invisible or Visible “
Measure’t Setup Invisible Invisible or Visible “
Comms Settings Visible Invisible or Visible “
Commission
Visible Invisible or Visible “
Tests
Selects if relay
protection settings
are displayed in
Setting Values Primary Primary or Secondary primary or
secondary
current/voltage
values
Makes settings
Control Inputs Visible Invisible or Visible visible in the relay
menu
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 17/176

Menu Text Default Setting Available Setting Function


CONFIGURATION
Enables protection
CLIO Inputs Enabled Enabled or Disabled element in the
relay
CLIO Outputs Enabled Enabled or Disabled “

2.2 CT and VT ratios


The P340 relay allows the current, voltage and impedance settings to be applied to
the relay in either primary or secondary quantities. This is done by programming the
“Setting Values” cell of the “CONFIGURATION” column to either ‘Primary’ or
‘Secondary’. When this cell is set to ‘Primary’, all current, voltage and impedance
setting values are scaled by the programmed CT and VT ratios. These are found in
the “VT & CT RATIOS” column, settings for which are shown below.

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
CT AND VT RATIOS
Main VT Primary 110V 100V 1000000V 1V
110V 80V 14V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
Main VT Sec’y 400V 360V 480V 4V
(Vn=380/480) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

NVD VT Primary 110V 100V 1000000V 1V


110V 80V 140V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
NVD VT Sec'y 400V 360V 480V 4V
(Vn=380/480) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

Phase CT Primary 1 1 30000 1


Phase CT Sec’y 1 1 5 4
E/F CT Primary 1 1 30000 1
E/F CT Secondary 1 1 5 4
SEF CT Primary 1 1 30000 1
SEF CT Secondary 1 1 5 4

2.3 Generator differential protection


Failure of stator windings, or connection insulation, can result in severe damage to
the windings and the stator core. The extent of the damage will depend upon the
fault current level and the duration of the fault. Protection should be applied to limit
the degree of damage in order to limit repair costs. For primary generating plant,
high-speed disconnection of the plant from the power system may also be necessary
to maintain system stability.
For generators rated above 1 MVA, it is common to apply generator differential
protection. This form of unit protection allows discriminative detection of winding
faults, with no intentional time delay, where a significant fault current arises.
The zone of protection, defined by the location of the CTs, should be arranged to
overlap protection for other items of plant, such as a busbar or a step-up
transformer.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 18/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Circulating current differential protection operates on the principle that current


entering and leaving a zone of protection will be equal. Any difference between
these currents is indicative of a fault being present in the zone. If CTs are connected
as shown in Figure 1 it can be seen that current flowing through the zone of
protection will cause current to circulate around the secondary wiring. If the CTs are
of the same ratio and have identical magnetising characteristics they will produce
identical secondary currents and hence zero current will flow through the relay. If a
fault exists within the zone of protection there will be a difference between the output
from each CT; this difference flowing through the relay causing it to operate.

Protected zone

Differential relay

P2157ENa

Figure 1: Principle of circulating current differential protection


Heavy through current, arising from an external fault condition, can cause one CT to
saturate more than the other, resulting in a difference between the secondary current
produced by each CT. It is essential to stabilise the protection for these conditions.
Two methods are commonly used. A biasing technique, where the relay setting is
raised as through current increases. Alternatively, a high impedance technique,
where the relay impedance is such that under maximum through fault conditions, the
current in the differential element is insufficient for the relay to operate.
The generator differential protection function available in the P343 relay can be used
in either biased differential or high impedance differential mode. Both modes of
operation are equally valid; users may have a preference for one over the other. The
operating principle of each is described in the following sections.
The generator differential protection may also be used for interturn protection which
is described in the following sections.
A DDB (Digital Data Bus) signal is available to indicate the tripping of each phase of
differential protection (DDB 419, DDB 420, DDB 421), in addition a 3 phase trip
DDB signal is provided (DDB 418). These signals are used to operate the output
relays and trigger the disturbance recorder as programmed into the Programmable
Scheme Logic (PSL). The state of the DDB signals can also be programmed to be
viewed in the “Monitor Bit x” cells of the “COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
The following table shows the relay menu for the Differential protection element,
including the available setting ranges and factory defaults:
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 19/176

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
GEN DIFF
Disabled, Biased,
GenDiff Function Biased N/A
High Impedance, Interturn
Gen Diff Ιs1 0.1 0.05 Ιn A 0.5 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
Gen Diff k1 0 0 20% 5%
Gen Diff Ιs2 1.5 1.0 Ιn A 5.0 Ιn A 0.1 Ιn A
Gen Diff k2 150 20% 150% 10%
Interturn Is_A 0.1 0.05 Ιn A 2 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
Interturn Is_B 0.1 0.05 Ιn A 2 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
Interturn Is_C 0.1 0.05 Ιn A 2 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
Interturn
0.1 s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
ITimeDelay

2.3.1 Biased differential protection


In a biased differential relay, the through current is used to increase the setting of the
differential element. For heavy through faults, it is unlikely that the CT outputs at
each zone end will be identical, due to the effects of CT saturation. In this case a
differential current can be produced. However, the biasing will increase the relay
setting, such that the differential spill current is insufficient to operate the relay.
The through current is calculated as the average of the scalar sum of the current
entering and leaving the zone of protection. This calculated through current is then
used to apply a percentage bias to increase the differential setting. The percentage
bias can be varied to give the operating characteristic shown in Figure 2.

I1 I2
I DIFF
= I 1+ I 2

Operate
K2

Restrain
I s1 K1

I s2 I BIAS = I 1+ I 2
2
P2158ENa

Figure 2: Biased differential protection operating characteristic


P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 20/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Two bias settings are provided in the P343 relay. The initial bias slope,
“Gen Diff k1”, is applied for through currents upto “G en D iff Ιs2”. The second bias
slope, “Gen Diff k2”, is applied for through currents above the "Gen Diff Ιs2" setting.
The operating current of the biased differential element, for any value of through
current, can be calculated using the following formulae:
Ι1 + Ι2
ΙBIAS = 2

ΙDIFF > K2.ΙBIAS – (K2 – K1) Ιs2 + Ιs1 where ΙBIAS > Ιs2

ΙDIFF > K1.ΙBIAS + Ιs1 where ΙBIAS ™Ιs2


The Biased differential protection function uses the two sets of three phase current
measurement inputs (ΙA, ΙB, ΙC , ΙA2, ΙB2, ΙC 2), connected to measure the phase
current at the neutral end and terminals of the machine, as shown in Figure 3. The
bias and differential currents are calculated by the relay software, providing a phase
segregated differential protection function, and may be viewed in the
“MEASUREMENTS” columns in the relay menu.

I A2
I B2
I C2
MiCOM
IA P343

IB
IC

P2159ENa

Figure 3: Relay connections for biased differential protection


2.3.2 Setting guidelines for biased differential protection
To select biased differential protection the “GenDiff Function” cell should be set to
‘Biased’.
The differential current setting, “Gen Diff Ιs1”, should be set to a low setting to
protect as much of the machine winding as possible. A setting of 5% of rated current
of the machine is generally considered to be adequate. “Gen Diff Ιs2”,the threshold
above which the second bias setting is applied, should be set to 120% of the machine
rated current.
The initial bias slope setting, “Gen Diff k1”, should be set to 0% to provide optimum
sensitivity for internal faults. The second bias slope may typically be set to 150% to
provide adequate stability for external faults.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 21/176

These settings may be increased where low accuracy class CTs are used to supply the
protection.
2.3.3 High impedance differential protection
The high impedance principle is best explained by considering a differential scheme
where one CT is saturated for an external fault, as shown in Figure 4.

Healthy CT Saturated CT
Protected zone

Zm

R CT1 R CT2

R L1 If R L3

R ST
Vs

R L2 R
R L4

Voltage across relay circuit


Vs = KI f (R CT + 2R L ) - where K = 1.5

Stabilising resistor,R ST, limits spill current to Is (relay setting)


R ST = Vs
– RR
Is
IF = Maximum secondary through fault current
Where RR = Relay burden
RCT = Current transformer secondary winding resistance
RL = Resistance of a single lead from the relay to the current transformer
P0115ENd

Figure 4: Principle of high impedance differential protection


If the relay circuit is considered to be a very high impedance, the secondary current
produced by the healthy CT will flow through the saturated CT. If the magnetising
impedance of the saturated CT is considered to be negligible, the maximum voltage
across the relay circuit will be equal to the secondary fault current multiplied by the
connected impedance, (RL3 + RL4 + RCT2).
The relay can be made stable for this maximum applied voltage by increasing the
overall impedance of the relay circuit, such that the resulting current through the relay
is less than its current setting. As the impedance of the relay input alone is relatively
low, a series connected external resistor is required. The value of this resistor, RST, is
calculated by the formula shown in Figure 4. An additional non linear resistor,
metrosil, may be required to limit the peak secondary circuit voltage during internal
fault conditions.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 22/176 MiCOM P342, P343

To ensure that the protection will operate quickly during an internal fault the CTs used
to operate the protection must have a kneepoint voltage of at least 2Vs.
The high impedance differential protection function uses the ΙA2, ΙB2, ΙC 2 current
inputs connected to measure the differential current in each phase, as shown in
Figure 5.

RST = Stabilising resistor


NLR = Non-linear resistance
(Metrosil)

MiCOM
P343
NLR RST

I A2
I B2
I C2

P2161ENa

Figure 5: Relay connections for high impedance differential protection


2.3.4 Setting guidelines for high impedance differential protection
To select high impedance differential protection the “GenDiff Function” cell should be
set to ‘High Impedance’.
The differential current setting, “G en D iff Ιs1”, should be set to a low setting to
protect as much of the machine winding as possible. A setting of 5% of rated current
of the machine is generally considered to be adequate. This setting may need to be
increased where low accuracy class CTs are used to supply the protection. A check
should be made to ensure that the primary operating current of the element is less
than the minimum fault current for which the protection should operate.
The primary operating current (Ιop) will be a function of the current transformer ratio,
the relay operating current (Gen Diff Ιs1), the number of current transformers in
parallel with a relay element (n) and the magnetising current of each current
transformer (Ιe) at the stability voltage (Vs). This relationship can be expressed in
three ways:
1. To determine the maximum current transformer magnetising current to achieve
a specific primary operating current with a particular relay operating current.

1 æ Ιop ö
Ιe < x
ç - Gen diff REF > Ιs1
÷
n ç CT ratio ÷
è ø
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 23/176

2. To determine the maximum relay current setting to achieve a specific primary


operating current with a given current transformer magnetising current.

æ Ιop ö
Gen diff Ιs1 < ç
ç ÷
- nΙe ÷
è CT ratio ø
3. To express the protection primary operating current for a particular relay
operating current and with a particular level of magnetising current.
Ιop = (CT ratio) x (Gen diff Ιs1 + nΙe)

In order to achieve the required primary operating current with the current
transformers that are used, a current setting (Gen Diff Ιs1) must be selected for the
high impedance element, as detailed in expression (ii) above. The setting of the
stabilising resistor (RST) must be calculated in the following manner, where the setting
is a function of the required stability voltage setting (Vs) and the relay current setting
(Gen Diff Ιs1).

Vs 1.5 ΙF (RCT + 2RL)


RST = Gen diff Ι =
s1 Gen diff Ιs1

Note: The above formula assumes negligible relay burden

USE OF “METROSIL” NON-LINEAR RESISTORS


Metrosils are used to limit the peak voltage developed by the current transformers
under internal fault conditions, to a value below the insulation level of the current
transformers, relay and interconnecting leads, which are normally able to withstand
3000V peak.
The following formulae should be used to estimate the peak transient voltage that
could be produced for an internal fault. The peak voltage produced during an
internal fault will be a function of the current transformer kneepoint voltage and the
prospective voltage that would be produced for an internal fault if current transformer
saturation did not occur. This prospective voltage will be a function of maximum
internal fault secondary current, the current transformer ratio, the current transformer
secondary winding resistance, the current transformer lead resistance to the common
point, the relay lead resistance and the stabilising resistor value.

Vp = 2 2Vk ( Vf - Vk )

Vf = Ι'f (RCT + 2RL + RST)


where
Vp = peak voltage developed by the CT under internal fault conditions.
Vk = current transformer knee-point voltage.
Vf = maximum voltage that would be produced if CT saturation did not
occur.
Ι‘f = maximum internal secondary fault current.
RCT = current transformer secondary winding resistance.
RL = maximum lead burden from current transformer to relay.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 24/176 MiCOM P342, P343

RST = relay stabilising resistor.


When the value given by the formulae is greater than 3000V peak, metrosils should
be applied. They are connected across the relay circuit and serve the purpose of
shunting the secondary current output of the current transformer from the relay in
order to prevent very high secondary voltages.
Metrosils are externally mounted and take the form of annular discs. Their operating
characteristics follow the expression:

V = CΙ 0.25
where
V = Instantaneous voltage applied to the non-linear resistor (“metrosil” )
C = constant of the non-linear resistor (“metrosil” )
Ι = instantaneous current through the non-linear resistor (“metrosil” ).
With a sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil, the RMS current would be
approximately 0.52x the peak current. This current value can be calculated as
follows:

æ Vs (rms) x 2 ö 4
ç
Ι(rms) = 0.52 ç
÷
÷
è C ø
where
Vs(rms) = rms value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil.
This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the non-linear resistor
(“metrosil”) is not sinusoidal but appreciably distorted.
For satisfactory application of a non-linear resistor (“metrosil”), it’s characteristic
should be such that it complies with the following requirements:
1. At the relay voltage setting, the non-linear resistor (“metrosil”) current should
be as low as possible, but no greater than approximately 30mA rms. for 1A
current transformers and approximately 100mA rms. for 5A current
transformers.
2. At the maximum secondary current, the non-linear resistor (“metrosil”) should
limit the voltage to 1500V rms or 2120V peak for 0.25 second. At higher
relay voltage settings, it is not always possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V
rms., so higher fault voltages may have to be tolerated.
The following tables show the typical Metrosil types that will be required, depending
on relay current rating, REF voltage setting etc.
Metrosil Units for Relays with a 1 Amp CT
The Metrosil units with 1 Amp CTs have been designed to comply with the following
restrictions:
1. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should less than 30mA rms.
2. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit
the voltage to 1500V rms if possible.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 25/176

The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 1Amp CTs are as shown in the
following table:

Relay Voltage Nominal Characteristic Recommended Metrosil Type


Setting C β Single Pole Relay Triple Pole Relay
Up to 125V rms 450 0.25 600A/S1/S256 600A/S3/1/S802
125 to 300V rms 900 0.25 600A/S1/S1088 600A/S3/1/S1195

Note : Single pole Metrosil units are normally supplied without


mounting brackets unless otherwise specified by the customer.
Metrosil Units for Relays with a 5 Amp CT
These Metrosil units have been designed to comply with the following requirements:-
1. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should less than 100mA rms
(the actual maxium currents passed by the units shown below their type
description.
2. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit
the voltage to 1500V rms for 0.25secs. At the higher relay settings, it is not
possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms hence higher fault voltages have
to be tolerated (indicated by *, **, ***).
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs and single pole
relays are as shown in the following table:
Secondary Recommended METROSIL Type
Internal
Fault Current Relay Voltage Setting
Amps rms Up to 200V rms 250V rms 275V rms 300V rms
600A/S1/S1213 600A/S1/S1214 600A/S1/S1214 600A/S1/S1223
50A C = 540/640 C = 670/800 C = 670/800 C = 740/870*
35mA rms 40mA rms 50mA rms 50mA rms
600A/S2/P/S1217 600A/S2/P/S1215 600A/S2/P/S1215 600A/S2/P/S1196
100A C = 470/540 C = 570/670 C = 570/670 C = 620/740
70mA rms 75mA rms 100mA rms 100mA rms *
600A/S3/P/S1219 600A/S3/P/S1220 600A/S3/P/S1221 600A/S3/P/S1222
150A C = 430/500 C = 520/620 C= 570/670** C = 620/740***
100mA rms 100mA rm 100mA rms 100mA rms

Note: *2400V peak **2200V peak ***2600V peak


In some situations single disc assemblies may be acceptable, contact AREVA T&D for
detailed applications.
1. The Metrosil units recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs can also be applied
for use with triple pole relays and consist of three single pole units mounted on
the same central stud but electrically insulated for each other. To order these
units please specify "Triple Pole Metrosil Type", followed by the single pole type
reference.
2. Metrosil units for higher relay voltage settings and fault currents can be
supplied if required.
For further advice and guidance on selecting METROSILS please contact the
Applications department at AREVA T&D.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 26/176 MiCOM P342, P343

2.3.5 Interturn (split phase) protection


For generators with multi-turn stator windings, there is the possibility of a winding
inter-turn fault occurring. Unless such a fault evolves to become a stator earth fault,
it will not otherwise be detected with conventional protection arrangements.
Hydrogenerators usually involve multi-stator windings with parallel windings.
2.3.5.1 Differential interturn protection
One differential scheme using bushing type CTs that is commonly used for interturn
protection is shown in Figure 6. In this scheme the circuits in each phase of the stator
winding are split into two equal groups and the current of each group are compared.
A difference in these currents indicates an unbalance caused by an interturn fault.
Since there is normally some current unbalance between windings the protection is
set so that it will not respond to this normal unbalance but will pick-up for the
unbalance caused by a single turn fault. In some cases the generator may run with a
faulted turn until it is repaired and therefore the current pick-up level should be
increased to allow operation but still be able to detect a second fault. The P343
IA2/IB2/IC2 current inputs can be used for this type of application and has
independent settings per phase (Interturn Is_A, Interturn Is_B, Interturn Is_C).
Therefore, the current setting can be increased on the faulted phase only without
affecting the sensitivity of the protection on the other unfaulted phases. A time delay
is used to prevent operation on CT transient error currents that may occur during
external faults. The problem of CT transient error currents can be eliminated by using
core balance (window) type CTs (see Figure 7).
This method of interturn protection will detect phase and some ground faults in the
stator winding. However, because of the slow operating time of this protection it is
common practice to provide standard high speed differential protection for each
phase and separate earth fault protection. If there are main 1 and main 2 P343
protection relays, the IA2/IB2/IC2 inputs could be used for interturn protection on the
one relay and used for standard differential protection across the generator in the
other relay.

I1
IL
IA2 IR

I2

IB2

IC2

P2073ENa

Figure 6: Generator interturn protection using separate CTs


Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 27/176

P2074ENb

Figure 7: Generator interturn protection using core balance (window)


CTs
2.3.5.1.1 Setting guidelines for differential interturn protection
To select interturn differential protection the “GenDiff Function” cell should be set to
‘Interturn’.
The differential current settings, “Interturn Ιs_A, Interturn Ιs_B, Interturn Ιs_C ”,should
be set to a low setting to protect as much of the machine winding as possible. A
setting of 5% of rated current of the machine is generally considered to be adequate.
This setting may need to be increased where low accuracy class CTs are used to
supply the protection.
The time delay setting “Interturn ΙTim eD elay” should be set to prevent operation on
CT transient error currents that may occur during external faults. A typical time
setting would be 0.1s.
2.3.5.2 Application of biased differential protection for interturn protection
For inter-turn protection applications where the generator stator is wound with 2 or
more identical 3 phase windings connected in parallel, provided the windings are
brought out separately, biased differential protection can be used connected to CTs in
the line ends of the 2 or more windings, see Figure 8. In this type of application a
biased system should always be used as it is not possible to guarantee in advance
that exact current sharing between the windings will take place. A small error in this
sharing current would produce instability in an unbiased system at high levels of
through fault current. Balanced current in the two windings produces a circulation of
current in the current transformer secondary circuit, but any in zone fault, including
an interturn fault, will result in a circulation of current between the windings
producing an output in the relay operating circuit.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 28/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Note, the biased differential protection in the P343 uses both sets of 3 phase current
inputs and so if the P343 differential protection was used for inter-turn protection no
other protection function in the P343 would be available. As normally differential
protection plus the many other protection functions in the P343 are required for the
generator protection in addition to the interturn protection it is advisable to use a
separate biased differential relay for the interturn protection in this application.
Another scheme that could be used on this type of generator is shown in Figure 9.
This arrangement is an attempt to get the benefits of inter-turn and differential
protection with a saving in CTs and relays. However, this arrangement is not as
sensitive as other schemes using separate inter-turn relays or differential relays. The
scheme in Figure 9 requires the neutral end CTs having half the turns ratio of the
terminal end CTs. The sensitivity of the protection for inter-turn faults is limited by the
fact that the two CT ratios applied must be selected in accordance with the generator
rated current. A P343 could be used for this application with the IA/IB/IC inputs
connected to the terminal side CTs as these see the full rated current. Note, the
IA/IB/IC inputs feed the current, impedance and power based protection. However,
in the case of a single generator feeding an isolated system, back-up protection
should use CTs at the neutral end of the machine to ensure internal faults on the
generator windings are detected. Thus, for this type of application it is advised that a
separate biased differential protection is used for the inter-turn protection. A P342
from separate CTs at the neutral end of the generator could then be used for the rest
of the protection.

Stator Windings A
B
C

Bias elements

87G 87G 87G Operating


elements

P2069ENa

Figure 8: Transverse biased differential protection for double wound


machines
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 29/176

I P : 1A

Inter-turn
fault
87G

0.5xI P:1A

CT’s for other


protection functions

Note: Bias slope of differential protection must be low up to I flc to give inter-turn fault sensitivity.
P2070ENa

Figure 9: Generator differential and interturn protection


2.3.5.3 Application of overcurrent protection for interturn protection
Another method that could be used for inter-turn protection is to use the current
operated stator earth fault protection function using an additional single CT as shown
in Figure 10. In this application the neutral voltage displacement protection (59N)
would act as the main stator earth fault protection even though the current based
stator earth fault protection could still respond to some stator earth fault conditions.
This form of interturn fault protection, using the 51N stator earth fault current
operated element (IN>1/2 or ISEF>1) offers the possibility of greater sensitivity
compared to the technique shown in Figure 9. This is due to the fact that the
required ratio of the single CT for this application is arbitrary. The current setting of
the main current operated element (IN>1/2 or ISEF>1) should be set in accordance
with the selected CT ratio to provide adequate primary sensitivity for the minimum
interturn fault current. For similar reasons the time delay applied should be set
similar to that recommended for applications of the main current operated element of
normal stator earth fault protection.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 30/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Fault 87G

CT’s for
other
protection
functions

51N

Note: The inter-turn fault protection will also respond to some earth faults.
P2071ENa

Figure 10: Overcurrent interturn protection


2.3.5.4 Interturn protection by zero sequence voltage measurement
Interturn faults in a generator with a single winding can be detected by observing the
zero sequence voltage across the machine. Normally, no zero sequence voltage
should exist but a short circuit of one or more turns on one phase will cause the
generated e.m.f. to contain some zero sequence component. This method of
interturn protection can be provided using the neutral voltage displacement
protection in the P342/3, see section 2.14.
External earth faults will also produce a zero sequence voltage on a directly
connected generator. Most of the voltage will be dropped across the earthing
resistor, the drop on the generator being small and the zero sequence component
being limited to one or two percent. It is preferable, therefore, to measure the
voltage drop across the winding, rather than the zero sequence voltage to earth at
the line terminals. This can be done using a voltage transformer connected to the
line side of the generator, with the neutral point of the primary winding connected to
the generator neutral, above the earthing resistor or earthing transformer. This
arrangement is shown in Figure 11. The zero sequence voltage can be measured
directly from the voltage transformer broken delta winding connected to the neutral
voltage input, Vn, on the P342/3. Alternatively, the zero sequence voltage can be
derived from the 3 phase voltage inputs, VA, VB, VC, to the relay.
The 3rd harmonic component of the emf may be larger than the required setting,
however, there is no danger of maloperation as the 3rd harmonic component is
filtered by the relay’s Fourier filter.
With a direct-connected machine it is still possible that a close up earth fault will
produce a zero sequence voltage drop greater than that produced by the short
circuiting of one turn. It is therefore necessary to apply a short time delay to the
tripping element. With a generator-transformer unit an external earth fault can not
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 31/176

draw zero sequence current through the delta winding of the transformer. Therefore,
no residual voltage will be produced from the voltage transformer and so no time
delay is required in this case for the trip element.
With this type of VT connection the zero sequence voltage from the VT is small for an
external fault. Also, the output from the star connected secondary winding of the VT
will not be able to correctly represent phase-ground voltages (for external faults), only
phase-phase voltages will remain accurate. Therefore, the sensitive directional earth
fault protection and CT supervision element, which use zero sequence voltage, may
not operate and so should be disabled. The under and over voltage protection can
be set as phase-to-phase measurement with this type of VT connection. The
underimpedance and the voltage dependent overcurrent use phase-phase voltages
anyway, therefore the accuracy should not be affected. The protection functions
which use phase-neutral voltages are the power, the loss of excitation and pole
slipping protection; all are for detecting abnormal generator operation under 3-
phase balanced conditions, therefore the accuracy of these protection functions
should not be affected.
If the neutral voltage displacement element is required for 95% stator earth fault
protection as well as interturn protection a separate VT connection at the terminals of
the generator or a distribution transformer at the generator earth is required to obtain
the correct zero sequence voltage. Note, the neutral voltage displacement protection
in the P342/3 relay can use the measured residual voltage from the Vn input or the
derived residual voltage from the 3 phase voltage inputs but not both. So, if the
derived residual voltage is used for interturn protection as shown in Figure 11, then
the measured residual voltage from a distribution transformer at the generator
neutral point can not be used for 95% stator earth fault protection using one relay.
See section 2.14 for more information on the P342/3 neutral voltage displacement
protection.

Voltage transformer

Vn VA VB VC

MiCOM P343

1 Derived from phase-neutral voltages


2 Measured from broken delta VT
P2072ENa

Figure 11: Interturn protection by zero sequence voltage measurement


P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 32/176 MiCOM P342, P343

2.4 Phase fault overcurrent protection


A two stage non directional overcurrent element is provided in the P340 relays. This
element can be used to provide time delayed back-up protection for the system and
high set protection providing fast operation for machine faults.
The first stage has a time delayed characteristic that can be set as either Inverse
Definite Minimum Time (IDMT) or Definite Time (DT). The second stage has a definite
time delay, which can be set to zero to produce instantaneous operation. Each stage
can be selectively enabled or disabled.
This element uses the ΙA, ΙB, and ΙC relay inputs and can be fed from CTs at the
terminal or neutral end of the generator, depending on the application.
Each stage can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL (DDB
354, DDB 355). DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and trip of each
phase of each stage of protection, (Starts: DDB 597-604, Trips: DDB 477-484). The
state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the “Monitor Bit x” cells
of the “COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1:
OVERCURRENT
Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse,
IEC V Inverse, IEC E Inverse,
Ι>1 Function Disabled UK LT Inverse, UK Rectifier, RI, IEEE M
Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E Inverse,
US Inverse, US ST Inverse
Ι>1 Current Set 1 x Ιn A 0.08 x Ιn A 4 x Ιn A 0.01 x Ιn A
Ι>1 Time Delay 1s 0 100 s 0.01 s
Ι>1 TMS 1 0.025 1.2 0.025
Ι>1 Time Dial 1 0.01 100 0.01
Ι>1 K(RI) 1 0.1 10 0.05
Ι>1 Reset Char DT DT or Inverse N/A
Ι>1 tRESET 0s 0s 100 s 0.01s
Ι>2 Function DT Disabled or DT N/A
Ι>2 Current Set 0.08 x Ιn A 0.08 x Ιn A 10 x Ιn A 0.01 x Ιn A
Ι>2 Time Delay 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s

For inverse time delayed characteristics, the following options are available. Note
that all IDMT curves conform to the following formula:
IEC Curves

æ K ö
ç + L÷
t =Txç
(Ι/Ιs) α - 1 ÷
è ø
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 33/176

IEEE Curves

æ K ö
t
ç
= TD x ç
+ L÷
(Ι/Ιs) α - 1 ÷
è ø
t = operation time
K = constant
Ι = measured current
Ιs = current threshold setting
α = constant
L = ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC curves)
T = Time multiplier setting
TD = Time dial setting for IEEE curves

Curve Description Standard K constant α constant L constant


Standard Inverse IEC 0.14 0.02 0
Very Inverse IEC 13.5 1 0
Extremely Inverse IEC 80 2 0
Long Time Inverse UK 120 1 0
Rectifier UK 45900 5.6 0
Moderately Inverse IEEE 0.0515 0.02 0.114
Very Inverse IEEE 19.61 2 0.491
Extremely Inverse IEEE 28.2 2 0.1217
Inverse US 5.95 2 0.18
Short Time Inverse US 0.16758 0.02 0.11858

Note that the IEEE and US curves are set differently to the IEC/UK curves, with regard
to the time setting. A time multiplier setting (TMS) is used to adjust the operating time
of the IEC curves, whereas a time dial setting is employed for the IEEE/US curves.
Both the TMS and Time Dial settings act as multipliers on the basic characteristics but
the scaling of the time dial is approximately 10 times that of the TMS, as shown in the
previous menu. The menu is arranged such that if an IEC/UK curve is selected, the
“Ι>1 Time Dial” cell is not visible and vice versa for the TMS setting. The UK rectifier
curve is not required for generator protection applications but it is included for
consistency with other MiCOM products which use overcurrent protection.
Note, that the IEC/UK inverse characteristics can be used with a definite time reset
characteristic, however, the IEEE/US curves may have an inverse or definite time reset
characteristic. The following equation can be used to calculate the inverse reset time
for IEEE/US curves:
TD x S
tRESET = in seconds
(1 - M2)
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 34/176 MiCOM P342, P343

where:
TD = Time dial setting for IEEE curves
S = Constant
M = Ι / Ιs

Curve Description Standard S Constant


Moderately Inverse IEEE 4.85
Very Inverse IEEE 21.6
Extremely Inverse IEEE 29.1
Inverse US 5.95
Short Time Inverse US 2.261

2.4.1 RI curve
The RI curve (electromechanical) has been included in the first stage characteristic
setting options for Phase Overcurrent and Earth Fault protections. The curve is
represented by the following equation:

æ 1 ö
ç ÷
t = K x ç 0.339 - æ0.236/ ö ÷ in seconds
è è Mø ø
With K adjustable from 0.1 to 10 in steps of 0.05
M = Ι / Ιs
2.4.2 Application of timer hold facility
The first stage of overcurrent protection in the P340 relays are provided with a timer
hold facility.
Setting the hold timer to zero means that the overcurrent timer for that stage will reset
instantaneously once the current falls below 95% of the current setting. Setting the
hold timer to a value other than zero, delays the resetting of the protection element
timers for this period. This may be useful in certain applications, for example when
grading with electromechanical overcurrent relays which have inherent reset time
delays. It will also enable the element to become sensitive to a pole slipping
condition where the element will cyclically operate as the machine slips successive
poles.
If an IEC inverse or DT operating characteristic is chosen for, this time delay is set via
the “Ι>1 tRESET” setting.
If an IEEE/US operate curve is selected, the reset characteristic may be set to either
definite time or inverse time as selected in cell “Ι>1 Reset Char”. If definite time
(‘DT’) is selected the “Ι>1 tRESET” cell may be used to set the time delay. If inverse
time reset (‘Inverse’) is selected the reset time will follow the inverse time operating
characteristic, modified by the time dial setting, selected for “Ι>1 Function”.
Another situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault clearance
times is where intermittent faults may be experienced. When the reset time of the
overcurrent relay is instantaneous the relay will be repeatedly reset and not be able to
trip until the fault becomes permanent. By using the timer hold facility the relay will
integrate the fault current pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 35/176

2.4.3 Setting guidelines for overcurrent protection


The first stage of overcurrent protection can be selected by setting “Ι>1 Function” to
any of the inverse or DT settings. The first stage is disabled if “Ι>1 Function” is set to
‘Disabled’.
The first stage can provide back-up protection for faults on the generator and the
system. As such it should be co-ordinated with downstream protection to provide
discrimination for system faults, setting the current threshold (“I>1 Current Set”), and
the time delay.
“Ι>1 TMS” – for IEC curves;
“Ι>1 Time Dial” – for US/IEEE curves;
“Ι>1 Time Delay” – for definite time accordingly.
In order to provide back-up protection for the generator and system, the element
must be supplied from CTs connected in the generator tails. If terminal end CTs are
used, the element will provide protection for the system only, unless the generator is
connected in parallel to a second source of supply.
The second stage of overcurrent protection can be enabled by setting “Ι>2 Function”
to DT, providing a definite time operating characteristic. The second stage is
disabled if “Ι>2 Function” is set to ‘Disabled’. Where terminal CTs are used, the
second stage can be set as an instantaneous overcurrent protection, providing
protection against internal faults on the machine. The current setting of the second
stage, “Ι>2 Current Set”, could be set to 120% of the maximum fault rating of the
generator, typically 8 x full load current. The operating time, “Ι>2 Time Delay”,
should be set to 0s to give instantaneous operation. The stage will therefore be
stable for external faults where the fault current from the generator will be below the
stage current setting. For faults within the machine, the fault current will be supplied
from the system and will be above the second stage current setting, resulting in fast
clearance of the internal fault.

2.5 System back-up protection


A generator is a source of electrical power and will supply system faults until they are
cleared by system protection. Back-up protection must be applied at the generator so
that faults are cleared in the event of downstream protection/circuit breakers failing
to operate.
The fault current supplied by a generator will vary during a fault condition as
indicated by the generator decrement curve, shown in Figure 12. The fault current
response is determined by the action of the automatic voltage regulator on the
machine. With some generators, fault current initiates an AVR ‘boost’ circuit which
maintains the fault current at a relatively high level. If the voltage regulator is set to
manual control or no boost circuit exists, the fault current can be severely restricted,
leading to slow operation of back-up protection for system faults. In the worst case
the fault current will fall below the full load rating of the machine, so simple
overcurrent protection with a setting above full load current, cannot operate.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 36/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Full load
current

0.25s 0.5s t
P2162ENa

Figure 12: Typical generator fault current decrement curve


System back-up protection must operate quickly during a fault and must not operate
for load conditions. To achieve these two objectives, two methods of system back-up
protection are commonly used:
1. Voltage dependant overcurrent protection. The presence of a fault is detected
by an under voltage element and the relay setting is adjusted accordingly.
Voltage dependant overcurrent protection can beoperated in a ‘voltage
controlled’ or ‘voltage restrained’ mode.
2. Under impedance protection. This element is set to monitor the system
impedance at the terminals of the machine. If the impedance measured falls
below a set threshold then the element will operate.
Customer preference will determine the mode of operation. However, subtle
application benefits can be claimed for one form of protection over the other in
certain circumstances.
A single protection element, that can be configured as either voltage dependant
overcurrent or under impedance, is provided in the P340 relay for system back-up
protection. The operation of the element is described in the following sections.
The function operates from the phase currents measured by the ΙA, ΙB and ΙC
measurement inputs on the relay.
The voltage dependent overcurrent and underimpedance System Backup protection
elements can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the PSL, (VDepOC
Timer Block, DDB 352 and UnderZ Timer Block, DDB 353). DDB signals are also
available to indicate a 3 phase and per phase start and trip, (Voltage dependent
overcurrent Starts: DDB 639-642, Voltage dependent overcurrent Trips: DDB 425-
428, Underimpedance Starts: DDB 650-657, Underimpedance Trips: DDB 500-507).
The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the “Monitor Bit x”
cells of the “COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table:
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 37/176

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1:
SYSTEM BACK-UP
Disabled, Voltage Controlled,
Voltage
Back-up Function Voltage Restrained,
Controlled
Under Impedance
Vector Rotation None None, Delta-Star N/A
DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse,
IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, UK Rectifier, RI,
V Dep OC Char IEC S Inverse
IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse, IEEE E
Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse
V Dep OC Ι> Set 1 x Ιn A 0.8 x Ιn A 4 x Ιn A 0.01 x Ιn A
V Dep OC T Dial 1 0.01 100 0.01
V Dep OC Reset DT DT or Inverse N/A
V Dep OC Delay 1s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
V Dep OC TMS 1 0.025 1.2 0.025
V Dep OC K(RI) 1 0.1 10 0.05
V Dep OC tRESET 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
80V 5V 120V 1V
V Dep OC (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
V<1Set 320 V 80V 480V 4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
60V 5V 120V 1V
V Dep OC (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
V<2Set 240V 80V 480V 4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

V Dep OC k Set 0.25 0.1 1 0.05s


70/ΙnΩ 2/ΙnΩ 120/ΙnΩ 0.5/ΙnΩ
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
Z<1 Setting
120/ΙnΩ 2/ΙnΩ 480/ΙnΩ 2/ΙnΩ
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

Z<1 Time Delay 5s 0s 100 s 0.01 s


Z<1 tRESET 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
Z< Stage 2 Disabled Disabled, Enabled
70/ΙnΩ 2/ΙnΩ 120/ΙnΩ 0.5/ΙnΩ
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
Z<2 Setting
120/ΙnΩ 2/ΙnΩ 480/ΙnΩ 2/ΙnΩ
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

Z<2 Time Delay 5s 0s 100 s 0.01 s


Z<2 tRESET 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s

For inverse time delayed characteristics refer to the phase overcurrent elements,
section 2.4.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 38/176 MiCOM P342, P343

2.5.1 Voltage dependant overcurrent protection


The generator terminal voltage will drop during fault conditions and so a voltage
measuring element can be used to control the current setting of this element. On
detection of a fault the current setting is reduced by a factor K. This ensures faults are
cleared in spite of the presence of the generator decrement characteristic. Line
voltages are used to control each phase overcurrent element as shown below.

Phase Current Control Voltage


Ιa Vab
Ιb Vbc
Ιc Vca

A single stage, non directional overcurrent element is provided. The element has a
time delayed characteristic that can be set as either Inverse Definite Minimum Time
(IDMT) or Definite Time (DT). The element can be selectively enabled or disabled and
can be blocked via a relay input so that the element can be integrated into a blocked
overcurrent protection scheme.
The element can be fed from CTs at the terminal or neutral end of the generator.
If voltage dependant overcurrent operation is selected, the element can be set in one
of two modes, voltage controlled overcurrent or voltage restrained overcurrent.
2.5.1.1 Voltage controlled overcurrent protection
In this mode of operation, the under voltage detector is used to produce a step
change in the relay current setting (from “V Dep OC Ι> Set” to
“V Dep OC k Set” x “V Dep OC Ι> Set”), when voltage falls below the voltage
setting, “V Dep OC V>1 Set”. Under load conditions the relay can have a high
current setting greater than full load current. Under fault conditions the relay is
switched to a more sensitive setting leading to fast fault clearance. The operating
characteristic of the current setting when voltage controlled mode is selected is shown
in Figure 13.

Current
setting

I> Set

KI> Set

V<1 Set Measured voltage


P2163ENa

Figure 13: Modification of current pickup level for voltage controlled


overcurrent protection
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 39/176

Where the generator is directly connected to a busbar, voltage controlled overcurrent


protection may be preferred.Setting guidelines for voltage controlled overcurrent
function
Voltage controlled overcurrent protection can be selected by setting
“Backup Function” to ‘Voltage controlled’. The protection is disabled if “Backup
Function” is set to ‘Disabled’.
The current setting, “V Dep OC Ι> Set”, should be set to have a primary operating
value in excess of the maximum generator load current.
The current setting multiplying factor, “V Dep OC k Set”, governs the protection
function setting under low voltage conditions. This should be set to give a primary
operating current less than 50% of the minimum steady-state fault current for a multi-
phase fault at the remote end of a feeder, with the generator being the only source.
This ensures the element will provide adequate back-up protection for an uncleared
fault on that feeder.
The voltage-controlled protection fault characteristic should co-ordinate with outgoing
feeder protection for a feeder fault under minimum plant conditions. The operating
characteristic, “V Dep OC Char” and the time delay (“V Dep OC TMS” – for IEC
curves; “V Dep OC T Dial” – for US/IEEE curves; “V Dep OC Delay” for definite time)
should be selected accordingly.
Where parallel sources are present, a remote feeder fault may not result in a
sufficient voltage reduction to enable the fault characteristic. For such applications a
time undervoltage element can be used to clear the fault (see section 2.6).
Alternatively, negative sequence thermal protection could be used (see section 2.11).
The voltage setting for switching between load and fault characteristics,
“V Dep OC V<1 Set”, should be greater than the terminal voltage for a fault where
back-up protection is required. On a solidly earthed system the element can be
made insensitive to earth faults by ensuring that the voltage setting is below 57%Vn
(minimum phase to phase voltage for a single phase to earth fault). A typical setting
would be 30%Vn. A voltage setting higher than 57%Vn will allow the relay operating
characteristic to change for both phase and earth faults.
More accurate settings may be determined with reference to the following equations.
The minimum fault current for a remote-end multi-phase fault on a feeder can be
determined as follows. This calculation is based on no-load excitation being applied
and no field-forcing or AVR action during the fault.
En
Three-phase fault: Ιf =
(nRf)2 + (Xs + nXf)2

3En
Phase to phase fault: Ιf =
(2nRf)2 + (Xs + X2 + 2nXf)2

where
Ιf = Minimum generator primary current seen for a multi-phase feeder-end fault

En = No-load phase-neutral internal e.m.f. of generator

Xs = Direct-axis synchronous reactance of the generator


P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 40/176 MiCOM P342, P343

X2 = Negative phase sequence reactance of the generator


Rf = Feeder positive phase sequence resistance
Xf = Feeder positive phase sequence reactance
n = Number of parallel generators
The steady-state voltage seen by the relay under external fault conditions can be
deduced as follows:

En 3 ((nRf)2 + (nXf)2)
Three-phase fault: Vø-ø =
(nRf)2 + (Xs + nXf)2

2En 3 ((nRf)2 + (nXf)2)


Phase-phase fault: Vø-ø =
(2nRf)2 + (Xs + 2nXf)2

The current setting multiplier, “V Dep OC k Set”, must be set such that
“V Dep OC k Set” x “V Dep OC Ι Set” is less than Ιf as calculated above. The
voltage setting, “V Dep OC V<1 Set”, must be greater than. Vø-ø as calculated
above.
The voltage controlled overcurrent protection is provided with a timer hold facility, as
described in section 2.5.1.1. Setting the hold timer to a value other than zero delays
the resetting of the protection element timers for this period.
If an IEC inverse or DT operating characteristic is chosen, this hold time delay is set
via the “V Dep OC tRESET” setting.
If an IEEE/US operate curve is selected, the reset characteristic may be set to either
definite time or inverse time as selected in cell “V Dep OC Reset Char”. If definite
time (‘DT’) is selected the “V Dep OC tRESET” cell may be used to set the time delay,
as above. If inverse time reset (‘Inverse’) is selected the reset time will follow the
inverse time operating characteristic, modified by the time dial setting, selected for “V
Dep OC Function”.
2.5.1.2 Voltage restrained overcurrent protection
In voltage restrained mode the effective operating current of the protection element is
continuously variable as the applied voltage varies between two voltage thresholds,
“V Dep OC V<1 Set” and “V Dep OC V<2 Set”, as shown in Figure 14. In this
mode, it is quite difficult to determine the behaviour of the protection function during
a fault. This protection mode is, however, considered to be better suited to
applications where the generator is connected to the system via a generator
transformer. With indirect connection of the generator, a solid phase-phase fault on
the local busbar will result in only a partial phase-phase voltage collapse at the
generator terminals.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 41/176

Current
setting

I> Set

KI> Set

V<2 Set V<1 Set Measured voltage


P2164ENa

Figure 14: Modification of current pickup level for voltage restrained


overcurrent protection
To improve the sensitivity of the voltage-restrained overcurrent protection function, for
HV phase-phase faults fed via a Yd1 or Yd11 step-up transformer, the appropriate
voltage signal transformation facility should be switched in as part of the P340
settings. In the past, such correction of voltage signals has been addressed by
adopting phase-neutral voltage measurement or the use of a star/delta interposing
VT. Such an approach cannot be adopted with P340 since the relay voltage inputs
are common to other protection and measurement functions that would be
undesirably affected by voltage signal correction.
The P340 voltage-restrained current setting is related to measured voltage as follows:
For V > Vs1: Current setting (Ιs) = Ι>

æ V - Vs2 ö
For Vs2 < V < Vs1: Current setting (Ιs) =
ç
K.Ι> + ( Ι > - K. Ι> ) ç
÷
÷
è Vs1 - Vs2 ø
For V < Vs2: Current setting (Ιs) = K.Ι>
where:
Ι> = “V Dep OC Ι> Set”
Ιs = Current setting at voltage V
V = Voltage applied to relay element
Vs1 = “V Dep OC V<1 Set”
Vs2 = “V Dep OC V<2 Set”
2.5.1.3 Setting guidelines for voltage controlled overcurrent function
Voltage restrained overcurrent protection can be selected by setting
“Backup Function” to ‘Voltage Restrained’. The protection is disabled if
“Backup Function” is set to ‘Disabled’.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 42/176 MiCOM P342, P343

The performance criteria on which the settings of the voltage-restrained overcurrent


protection function should be based are similar to those discussed for the voltage
controlled mode in section 2.5.1.2. Co-ordination with downstream protection
should be ensured when the relay is on its most sensitive settings i.e. for voltages less
than the “V Dep OC V<2 Set” setting. Current threshold, characteristic and time
delay can be selected as described for the Voltage Controlled function described in
section 2.5.1.2.
The voltage restrained overcurrent function should be able to respond to a remote-
end fault on an outgoing feeder. Where the generator is connected via a step up
transformer, zero sequence quantities will not be present at the relay location for HV
side earth faults. Therefore, it would be normal to use negative sequence thermal
protection for back-up protection in this case. The negative phase sequence thermal
element will also provide back-up protection for phase to phase faults. For this
reason, consideration will only be given to the detection of a remote-end three-phase
feeder fault, with the protected machine as the only source.
For a remote-end, three-phase fault, it is possible to calculate the level of current and
voltage at the relay location. It should be ensured that the relay current setting, “V
Dep OC k Set” x “V Dep OC Ι Set”, should be set to less than 50% of the fault
current. It must also be ensured that the voltage threshold, “V Dep OC V<2 Set”, is
set to a value above the voltage measured at the relay. There would be no need for
further reduction in the current setting for closer faults, which would yield higher
currents and lower voltages. Further reduction in the current setting for closer faults
may make co-ordination with local feeder overcurrent protection more difficult (if this
is not already a problem).
The steady-state primary current and voltage magnitudes seen for a feeder remote-
end three-phase fault are given as follows:
where:
Ιf = Minimum generator primary current seen for a multi-phase feeder-end fault
En = No-load phase-neutral internal e.m.f. of generator
Xs = Direct-axis synchronous reactance of the generator
X2 = Negative phase sequence reactance of the generator

Xt = Step-up transformer reactance


Rf = Feeder positive phase sequence resistance
Xf = Feeder positive phase sequence reactance
n = Number of parallel generators
All above quantities are to referred to the generator side of the transformer.
The upper voltage threshold setting, “V Dep OC V<1 Set”, should be set below the
minimum corrected phase-phase voltage level for a close-up HV earth fault, to ensure
that the element is insensitive to the fault. In the case of HV solid earthing, this
voltage would be a minimum of 57% of the nominal operating voltage.
The voltage restrained overcurrent protection is provided with a timer hold facility, as
described in section 2.5.1.1. Setting the hold timer to a value other than zero, delays
the resetting of the protection element timers for this period.
If an IEC inverse or DT operating characteristic is chosen, this hold time delay is set
via the “V Dep OC tRESET” setting.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 43/176

If an IEEE/US operate curve is selected, the reset characteristic may be set to either
definite time or inverse time as selected in cell “V Dep OC Reset Char”. If definite
time (‘DT’) is selected the “V Dep OC tRESET” cell may be used to set the time delay,
as above. If inverse time reset (‘Inverse’) is selected the reset time will follow the
inverse time operating characteristic, modified by the time dial setting, selected for “V
Dep OC Function”.
2.5.2 Under impedance protection
When the element is set to under impedance mode the element operates with a time
delayed three phase non directional impedance characteristic, shown in Figure 15.

Trip

P2165ENa

Figure 15: Under impedance element tripping characteristic


Impedance for each phase is calculated as shown:

Vab Vbc Vca


Za = Zb = Zc
Ιa Ιb Ιc
With rated voltage applied, the element operates as a definite time overcurrent relay.
It operates at a lower current as the voltage reduces, hence the element is similar to a
voltage restrained overcurrent element, operating with a definite time characteristic.
Under impedance protection is an alternative to voltage dependent overcurrent
protection and is often preferred due to its ease of setting. The definite time delay
may be difficult to provide co-ordination with downstream inverse time overcurrent
protections but will be easier to co-ordinate with distance protection.
The impedance measurement is based on phase-phase voltage and phase-neutral
current. This is to make the protection immune to earth faults on the low voltage side
of the generator-transformer or for a machine directly connected to the busbars. The
main purpose is to provide back-up protection for phase-phase and 3 phase faults.
Earth fault protection should be allowed to clear earth faults.
The underimpedance protection has 2 stages of impedance protection. For
generator transformer applications one stage could be used to reach into the step-up
transformer and one stage to reach further into the power system to provide 2 zones
of protection.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 44/176 MiCOM P342, P343

The minimum phase current and the line voltage required for the P342/P343 under
impedance protection to work is 20mA and 2V (Ιn = 1A, Vn = 100/120V) and
100mA and 8V (Ιn = 5A, Vn = 380/480V). Note, that the under impedance consists
of separate three phase elements and the checking is done on a per phase basis, i.e.
the inhibition of one phase will not affect the other phases.
2.5.2.1 Setting guidelines for under impedance function
Under impedance protection can be selected by setting “Backup Function” to
‘Under Impedance’. The protection is disabled if “Backup Function” is set to
‘Disabled’. As phase-phase voltage is used in the measurement of impedance the
impedance settings should be increased by a factor of √3 to account for this.
The first stage impedance setting, “Z<1 Setting”, should be set to 70% of the
maximum load impedance. This gives an adequate margin for short time overloads,
voltage variation etc., whilst giving adequate back-up protection for generator,
generator-transformer and busbar faults.

æ Vph - n ö
ç
For example Z<1 = 3 x 0.7 x ç
÷
Ι x 1.2 ÷
è flc ø
allowing for a 20% overload of the generator full load current.
The second stage impedance setting “Z<2 Setting”, could be set to 50 – 60% of the
generator-transformer impedance. This stage can then be used to obtain faster
operation for faults closer to the generator.
The time delay, “Z<1 Time Delay” should allow co-ordination with downstream
overcurrent and distance protection devices and with the zone 2 underimpedance
protection. The time delay, “Z<2 Time Delay” should allow co-ordination with
generator and transfomer LV phase fault protection.
The under impedance protection is provided with a timer hold facility, as described in
section 2.5.1.1. Setting the hold timer, “Z< tRESET”, to a value other than zero,
delays the resetting of the protection element timer for this period.

2.6 Undervoltage protection function (27)


Under voltage protection is not a commonly specified requirement for generator
protection schemes. However, under voltage elements are sometimes used as
interlocking elements for other types of protection, such as field failure. In the P340,
this type of interlocking can be arranged via the relay scheme logic. Undervoltage
protection may also be used for back-up protection where it may be difficult to
provide adequate sensitivity with voltage dependant/underimpedance/negative phase
sequence elements.
For an isolated generator, or isolated set of generators, a prolonged undervoltage
condition could arise for a number of reasons. One reason would be failure of
automatic voltage regulation (AVR) equipment. Where an auxiliary transformer is
used to supply generator ancillary equipment, such as boiler-feed pumps, air-
blowers, lubrication pumps etc., a prolonged undervoltage condition could adversely
affect the performance of the machine. If such a situation is envisaged, the
application of time-delayed undervoltage protection might be a consideration.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 45/176

A two stage undervoltage element is provided. The element can be set to operate
from phase-phase or phase-neutral voltages. Each stage has an independent time
delay which can be set to zero for instantaneous operation. Selectable, fixed Logic is
included within the relay to allow the operation of the element to be inhibited during
periods when the machine is isolated from the external system.
Each stage of undervoltage protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB
signal via the PSL, (DDB 158, DDB 159). DDB signals are also available to indicate
a 3 phase and per phase start and trip, (Starts: DDB 579-586, Trips: DDB 453-460).
Note: If the undervoltage protection is set for phase-phase operation then the
DDB signals V<1/2 Start/Trip A/AB, V<1/2 Start/Trip B/BC, V<1/2
Start/ Trip C/CA refer to V<1/2 Start/Trip AB and V<1/2 Start/Trip BC
and V<1/2 Start/Trip CA. If set for phase-neutral then the DDB signals
V<1/2 Start/Trip A/AB, V<1/2 Start/Trip B/BC, V<1/2 Start/Trip C/CA
refer to V<1/2 Start/Trip A and V<1/2 Start/Trip B and V<1/2
Start/Trip C.
The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the “Monitor Bit x”
cells of the “COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1:
VOLTAGE PROTECTION
Undervoltage Sub Heading
V< Measur’t Mode Phase-Neutral Phase-Phase, Phase-Neutral
V< Operate Mode Any-phase Any Phase, Three phase
V<1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IDMT
80V 10V 120V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
V<1 Voltage Set
320V 40V 480V 4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

V<1 Time Delay 1s 0s 100 s 0.01 s


V<1 TMS 1 0.5 100 0.5
V<1 Poledead Inh Enabled Disabled Enabled
V<2 Function DT Disabled DT
80V 10V 120V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
V<2 Voltage Set
320V 40V 480V 4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

V<2 Time Delay 1s 0s 100 s 0.01 s


V<1 Poledead Inh Enabled Disabled, Enabled

The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following
formula:
t = K / (1 – M)
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 46/176 MiCOM P342, P343

where
K = Time Multiplier Setting (V<1 TMS)
t = Operating Time in Seconds
M = Measured Voltage /Relay Setting Voltage (V<1 Voltage Set)
2.6.1 Setting guidelines for undervoltage protection
Stage 1 may be selected as either ‘IDMT’ (for inverse time delayed operation), ‘DT’
(for definite time delayed operation) or ‘Disabled’, within the “V<1 Function” cell.
Stage 2 is definite time only and is Enabled/Disabled in the “V<2 Status” cell. The
time delay (“V<1 TMS” - for IDMT curve; “V<1 Time Delay”, “V<2 Time Delay” - for
definite time) should be adjusted accordingly.
The undervoltage protection can be set to operate from phase-phase or phase-
neutral voltage as selected by “V< Measur’t Mode”. Single or three phase operation
can be selected in “V<1 Operate Mode”. When ‘Any Phase’ is selected, the element
will operate if any phase voltage falls below setting, when ‘Three Phase’ is selected
the element will operate when all three phase voltages are below the setting.
If the undervoltage protection function is to be used for back-up protection, the
voltage setting, ”V<1 Voltage Set”, should be set above the steady-state phase-phase
voltage seen by the relay for a three-phase fault at the remote end of any feeder
connected to the generator bus. Allowances should be made for the fault current
contribution of parallel generators, which will tend to keep the generator voltage up.
If the element is set to operate from phase to phase voltages operation for earth
faults can be minimised, i.e. set “V< Measur’t Mode” to ‘Phase-Phase’. To allow
detection of any phase to phase fault, “V< Operate Mode” should be set to ‘Any-
Phase’. Equations for determining the phase-phase voltage seen by the relay under
such circumstances are given in section 2.5.1.2.
The operating characteristic would normally be set to definite time, set
“V<1 Function” to ‘DT’. The time delay, “V<1 Time Delay”, should be set to co-
ordinate with downstream protections and the System Back-up protection of the relay,
if enabled. Additionally, the delay should be long enough to prevent unwanted
operation of the under voltage protection for transient voltage dips. These may occur
during clearance of faults further into the power system or by starting of local
machines. The required time delay would typically be in excess of 3s-5s.
The second stage can be used as an alarm stage to warn the user of unusual voltage
conditions so that corrections can be made. This could be useful if the machine is
being operated with the AVR selected to manual control.
Where the relay is used to provide the protection required for connecting the
generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (e.g. requirements of G59
in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the element.
The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the system with
voltage outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority.
To prevent operation of any under voltage stage during normal shutdown of the
generator “poledead” logic is included in the relay. This is facilitated by selecting “V
Poledead Inh” to ‘Enabled’. This will ensure that when a poledead condition is
detected (i.e. all phase currents below the undercurrent threshold or CB Open, as
determined by an opto isolator and the PSL) the undervoltage element will be
inhibited.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 47/176

2.7 Overvoltage protection


A generator terminal overvoltage condition could arise when the generator is running
but not connected to a power system, or where a generator is providing power to an
islanded power system. Such an over voltage could arise in the event of a fault with
automatic voltage regulating equipment or if the voltage regulator is set for manual
control and an operator error is made. Overvoltage protection should be set to
prevent possible damage to generator insulation, prolonged overfluxing of the
generating plant, or damage to power system loads.
When a generator is synchronised to a power system with other sources, an
overvoltage could arise if the generator is lightly loaded supplying a high level of
power system capacitive charging current. An overvoltage condition might also be
possible following a system separation, where a generator might experience full-load
rejection whilst still being connected to part of the original power system. The
automatic voltage regulating equipment and machine governor should quickly
respond to correct the overvoltage condition in these cases. However, over voltage
protection is advisable to cater for a possible failure of the voltage regulator or for
the regulator having been set to manual control. In the case of Hydro generators, the
response time of the speed governing equipment can be so slow that transient over
speeding up to 200% of nominal speed could occur. Even with voltage regulator
action, such over speeding can result in a transient over voltage as high as 150%.
Such a high voltage could result in rapid insulation damage.
A two stage overvoltage element is provided. The element can be set to operate from
phase-phase or phase-neutral voltages. Each stage has an independent time delay
which can be set to zero for instantaneous operation.
Each stage of overvoltage protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB
signal via the PSL, (DDB 368, DDB 369). DDB signals are also available to indicate
a 3 phase and per phase start and trip, (Starts: DDB 587-594, Trips: DDB 461-468).
Note: If the overvoltage protection is set for phase-phase operation then the
DDB signals V>1/2 Start/Trip A/AB, V>1/2 Start/Trip B/BC, V>1/2
Start/Trip C/CA refer to V>1/2 Start/Trip AB and V>1/2 Start/Trip BC
and V>1/2 Start/Trip CA. If set for phase-neutral then the DDB signals
V>1/2 Start/Trip A/AB, V>1/2 Start/Trip B/BC, V>1/2 Start/Trip C/CA
refer to V>1/2 Start/Trip A and V>1/2 Start/Trip B and V>1/2
Start/Trip C.
Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1:
VOLTAGE PROTECTION
Overvoltage Sub Heading
V> Measur’t Mode Phase-Neutral Phase-Phase, Phase-Neutral
V> Operate Mode Any-phase Any Phase, Three phase
V>1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IDMT
150V 60V 185V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
V>1 Voltage Set
600V 240V 740V 4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

V>1 Time Delay 1s 0s 100 s 0.01 s


P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 48/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1:
VOLTAGE PROTECTION
V>1 TMS 1 0.5 100 0.5
V>2 Status DT Disabled DT
130V 60V 185V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
V>2 Voltage Set
520V 240V 740V 4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

V>2 Time Delay 1s 0s 100 s 0.01 s

The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following
formula:
t = K / (M - 1)
where
K = Time Multiplier Setting (“V>1 TMS”)
t = Operating Time in Seconds
M = Measured Voltage/Relay Setting Voltage (“V>1 Voltage Set”)
2.7.1 Setting guidelines for overvoltage protection
Stage 1 may be selected as either ‘IDMT’ (for inverse time delayed operation),
‘DT’ (for definite time delayed operation) or ‘Disabled’, within the “V>1 Function”
cell. Stage 2 has a definite time delayed characteristic and is Enabled/Disabled in
the “V>2 Status” cell. The time delay (“V>1 TMS” - for IDMT curve;
“V>1 Time Delay”, “V>2 Time Delay” - for definite time) should be selected
accordingly.
The undervoltage protection can be set to operate from Phase-Phase or Phase-
Neutral voltage as selected by “V> Measur’t Mode” cell. Single or three phase
operation can be selected in “V> Operate Mode” cell. When ‘Any Phase’ is selected
the element will operate if any phase voltage falls below setting, when ‘Three Phase’
is selected the element will operate when all three phase voltages are above the
setting.
Generators can typically withstand a 5% overvoltage condition continuously.
The withstand times for higher overvoltages should be declared by the generator
manufacturer.
To prevent operation during earth faults, the element should operate from the phase-
phase voltages, to achieve this “V>1 Measur’t Mode” can be set to ‘Phase-Phase’
with “V>1 Operating Mode” set to ‘Three-Phase’. The overvoltage threshold, “V>1
Voltage Set”, should typically be set to 100%-120% of the nominal phase-phase
voltage seen by the relay. The time delay, “V>1 Time Delay”, should be set to
prevent unwanted tripping of the delayed overvoltage protection function due to
transient over voltages that do not pose a risk to the generating plant; e.g. following
load rejection where correct AVR/Governor control occurs. The typical delay to be
applied would be 1s-3s, with a longer delay being applied for lower voltage
threshold settings.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 49/176

The second stage can be used to provide instantaneous high-set over voltage
protection. The typical threshold setting to be applied, “V>2 Voltage Set”, would be
130-150% of the nominal phase-phase voltage seen by the relay, depending on
plant manufacturers’ advice. For instantaneous operation, the time delay,
“V>2 Time Delay”, should be set to 0s.
Where the relay is used to provide the protection required for connecting the
generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (e.g. requirements of G59
in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the element.
The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the system with
voltages outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority.
If phase to neutral operation is selected, care must be taken to ensure that the
element will grade with downstream protections during earth faults, where the phase-
neutral voltage can rise significantly.

2.8 Underfrequency protection


Underfrequency operation of a generator will occur when the power system load
exceeds the prime mover capability of an islanded generator or group of generators.
Power system overloading can arise when a power system becomes split, with load
left connected to a set of ‘islanded’ generators that is in excess of their capacity. Such
events could be compensated for by automatic load shedding. In this case,
underfrequency operation would be a transient condition. In the event of the load
shedding being unsuccessful, the generators should be provided with back-up
underfrequency protection.
An underfrequency condition, at nominal voltage, may result in some over fluxing of
a generator and its associated electrical plant. However, the more critical
considerations would be in relation to blade stresses being incurred with high-speed
turbine generators; especially steam-driven sets. When not running at nominal
frequency, abnormal blade resonance’s can be set up which, if prolonged, could
lead to turbine disc component fractures. Such effects can be accumulative and so
operation at frequencies away from nominal should be limited as much as possible,
to avoid the need for early plant inspections/overhaul. Underfrequency running is
difficult to contend with, since there is little action that can be taken at the generating
station in the event of overloading, other than to shut the generator down.
Four independent definite time-delayed stages of underfrequency protection are
offered. Two additional overfrequency stages can also be reconfigured as
underfrequency protection by reprogramming the Programmable Scheme Logic. As
well as being able to initiate generator tripping, the underfrequency protection can
also be arranged to initiate local load-shedding, where appropriate. Selectable fixed
scheme logic is provided to allow each stage of underfrequency protection to be
disabled when the outgoing CB is open, to prevent unnecessary load tripping.
Each stage of underfrequency protection can also be blocked by energising the
relevant DDB signal via the PSL, (DDB 374 - DDB 377). DDB signals are also
available to indicate start and trip of each stage, (Starts: DDB 622-625, Trips: DDB
469-472). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the
“Monitor Bit x” cells of the “COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table:
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 50/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1:
FREQUENCY PROTECTION
Under frequency Sub Heading
F<1 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
F<1 Setting 49.5 Hz 45 Hz 65 Hz 0.01 Hz
F<1 Time Delay 4s 0.1 s 100 s 0.1 s
F<2 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
F<2 Setting 49.5 Hz 45 Hz 65 Hz 0.01 Hz
F<2 Time Delay 4s 0.1 s 100 s 0.1 s
F<3 Status Enabled Disabled Enabled
F<3 Setting 49.5 Hz 45 Hz 65 Hz 0.01 Hz
F<3 Time Delay 4s 0.1 s 100 s 0.1 s
F<4 Status Enabled Disabled Enabled
F<4 Setting 49.5 Hz 45 Hz 65 Hz 0.01 Hz
F<4 Time Delay 4s 0.1 s 100 s 0.1 s
Bit 0 - Enable Block F<1 during Poledead
Bit 1 - Enable Block F<2 during Poledead
F< Function Link 1111
Bit 2 - Enable Block F<3 during Poledead
Bit 3 - Enable Block F<4 during Poledead

2.8.1 Setting guidelines for underfrequency protection


Each stage of under frequency protection may be selected as ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’,
within the “F<x Status” cells. The frequency pickup setting, “F<x Setting”, and time
delays, “F<x Time Delay”, for each stage should be selected accordingly.
The protection function should be set so that declared frequency-time limits for the
generating set are not infringed. Typically, a 10% under frequency condition should
be continuously sustainable.
For industrial generation schemes, where generation and loads may be under
common control/ownership, the P340 under frequency protection function could be
used to initiate local system load-shedding. Four stage under frequency/load
shedding can be provided. The final stage of underfrequency protection should be
used to trip the generator.
Where separate load shedding equipment is provided, the underfrequency protection
should co-ordinate with it. This will ensure that generator tripping will not occur in
the event of successful load shedding following a system overload. Two stages of
under frequency protection could be set-up, as illustrated in Figure 16, to co-ordinate
with multi-stage system load-shedding.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 51/176

Frequency

fn

A
F1<

F2<

Turbine prohibited area

t2 t1 Time

A System frequency response with


minimum load shed for recovery

B System frequency response with


under shedding of load

C Optimum underfrequency
protection characteristic P2047ENa

Figure 16: Co-ordination of underfrequency protection function with


system load shedding
To prevent operation of any underfrequency stage during normal shutdown of the
generator “poledead” logic is included in the relay. This is facilitated for each stage
by setting the relevant bit in “F< Function Link”. For example if “F< Function Link” is
set to 0111, Stage 1, 2 and 3 of underfrequency protection will be blocked when the
generator CB is open. Selective blocking of the frequency protection stages in this
way will allow a single stage of protection to be enabled during synchronisation or
offline running to prevent unsynchronised overfluxing of the machine. When the
machine is synchronised, and the CB closed, all stages of frequency protection will be
enabled providing a multi stage load shed scheme if desired.
Where the relay is used to provide the protection required for connecting the
generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (e.g. requirements of G59
in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the element.
The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the system with
frequency outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority. Where the
local external load exceeds the generator capacity, underfrequency protection may be
used to provide ‘Loss of Mains’ protection.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 52/176 MiCOM P342, P343

2.9 Overfrequency protection function


Overfrequency running of a generator arises when the mechanical power input to the
alternator is in excess of the electrical load and mechanical losses. The most
common occurrence of overfrequency is after substantial loss of load. When a rise in
running speed occurs, the governor should quickly respond to reduce the mechanical
input power, so that normal running speed is quickly regained. Overfrequency
protection may be required as a back-up protection function to cater for governor or
throttle control failure following loss of load or during unsynchronised running.
Moderate overfrequency operation of a generator is not as potentially threatening to
the generator and other electrical plant as underfrequency running. Action can be
taken at the generating plant to correct the situation without necessarily shutting down
the generator.
Severe overfrequency operation of a high-speed generating set could result in plant
damage, as described in section 2.12, as a result of the high centrifugal forces that
would be imposed on rotating components.
Two independent time-delayed stages of overfrequency protection are provided.
Each stage of protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the
PSL, (DDB 378, DDB 379). DDB signals are also available to indicate start and trip
of each stage, (Starts: DDB 626-627, Trips: DDB 473-474). A further DDB ‘Field Fail
Alarm’ signal is generated from the field failure alarm stage (DDB 309). The state of
the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the “Monitor Bit x” cells of the
“COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
Setting ranges for this element are shown in the following table:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1:
FREQUENCY PROTECTION
Overfrequency Sub Heading
F>1 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
F>1 Setting 49.5 Hz 45 Hz 68 Hz 0.01 Hz
F>1 Time Delay 4s 0.1 s 100 s 0.1 s
F>2 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
F>2 Setting 49.5 Hz 45 Hz 68 Hz 0.01 Hz
F>2 Time Delay 4s 0.1 s 100 s 0.1 s

2.9.1 Setting guidelines for overfrequency protection


Each stage of overfrequency protection may be selected as Enabled or Disabled,
within the “F>x Status” cells. The frequency pickup setting, “F>x Setting”, and time
delays, “F>x Time Delay”, for each stage should be selected accordingly.
The P340 overfrequency settings should be selected to co-ordinate with normal,
transient overfrequency excursions following full-load rejection. The generator
manufacturer should declare the expected transient overfrequency behaviour, which
should comply with international governor response standards. A typical
overfrequency setting would be 10% above nominal.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 53/176

Where the relay is used to provide the protection required for connecting the
generator in parallel with the local electricity supply system (e.g. requirements of G59
in the UK), the local electricity supply authority may advise settings for the element.
The settings must prevent the generator from exporting power to the system with
frequency outside of the statutory limits imposed on the supply authority.

2.10 Field failure protection function (40)


Complete loss of excitation may arise as a result of accidental tripping of the
excitation system, an open circuit or short circuit occurring in the excitation DC circuit,
flashover of any slip rings or failure of the excitation power source. The field failure
protection of the P340 consists of two elements, an impedance element with two time
delayed stages and a power factor alarm element, illustrated below in Figure 17.
The elements operate from A phase current and A phase voltage signals measured
by the ΙA and VA inputs on the relay. The minimum phase current and voltage
required for P342/P343 field failure protection to work is 20mA and 1V (Ιn = 1A, Vn
= 100/120V) and 100mA and 4V (Ιn = 5A, Vn = 380/480V).

X
Normal machine operating impedance
R
–Xa2 –Xa1
Alarm angle

Xb2 Xb1

P2167ENa

Figure 17: Field failure protection characteristics


When the excitation of a synchronous generator fails, its internal e.m.f. will decay.
This results in the active power output of the machine falling and in an increasing
level of reactive power being drawn from the power system. As the active power
output falls, the mechanical drive can accelerate the machine so that it will gently
pole slip and run at a super synchronous speed. This results in slip frequency
currents being induced in the rotor body, damper windings and in the field windings.
The slip-induced, low-frequency rotor currents will result in a rotor flux being
produced. The machine would then be excited from the power system and hence be
operating as an induction generator. The ability to reach such a stabilised state will
be dependent on the machine’s effective speed-torque characteristic when operating
as an induction generator, and also on the power system being able to supply the
required reactive power without severe voltage depression.
Stable operation as an induction generator might be achieved at low slip (0.1-0.2%
above synchronous speed), particularly in the case of salient pole machines. The
machine may be able to maintain an active power output (perhaps 20-30% of rating)
whilst drawing reactive power from the power system (generating at a highly leading
power factor). This condition could probably be sustained for many minutes without
rotor damage being incurred and may not be detectable by traditional field failure
impedance characteristic elements. The P340, however, offers a power factor alarm
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 54/176 MiCOM P342, P343

element in the field failure protection which can operate when the generator is
running in this condition.
Cylindrical rotor machines have a much lower output capability when operating as
an induction generator under excitation failure conditions. They are more likely to be
pushed over the peak torque level of their induction generator speed-torque
characteristic. If the peak induction generator torque level is exceeded, a machine
can stabilise at a much higher level of slip (perhaps 5% above synchronous speed).
When this happens, the machine will draw a very high reactive current from the
power system and a stator winding current as high as 2.0 p.u. may be reached. The
slip-frequency rotor currents could lead to rotor core or winding damage if the
condition is sustained.
Operation as an induction generator under field failure conditions relies upon the
ability of the rest of the system being able to supply the required reactive power to the
machine. If the system cannot supply enough reactive power the system voltage will
drop and the system may become unstable. This could occur if a large generator
running at high power suffers a loss of field when connected to a relatively weak
system. To ensure fast tripping under this condition one of the impedance elements
can be used with a short time delay. This can trip the machine quickly to preserve
system stability. This element should have a small diameter to prevent tripping under
power swinging conditions. The second impedance element, set with a larger
diameter, can provide detection of field failure under lightly loaded conditions. This
second element should be time delayed to prevent operation during power swing
conditions.
The Field Failure protection impedance elements are also provided with an adjustable
delay on reset (delayed drop off) timer. This time delay can be set to avoid delayed
tripping that may arise as a result of cyclic operation of the impedance measuring
element, during the period of pole slipping following loss of excitation. Some care
would need to be exercised in setting this timer, since it could make the Field Failure
protection function more likely to give an unwanted trip in the case of stable power
swinging. The impedance element trip time delay should therefore be increased
when setting the reset time delay.
The delay on reset timer might also be set to allow the field failure protection function
to be used for detecting pole slipping of the generator when excitation is not fully lost;
e.g. following time-delayed clearance of a nearby power system fault. This subject is
discussed in more detail in section 2.21.
DDB signals are available to indicate the start and tripping of each stage (Starts:
DDB 637, DDB 638, Trips: DDB 422, DDB 423). The state of the DDB signals can
be programmed to be viewed in the “Monitor Bit x” cells of the “COMMISSION
TESTS” column in the relay.
Setting ranges for the field failure elements are shown in the following table:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
FIELD FAILURE
FFail Alm Status Disabled Disabled Enabled
FFail Alm Angle 15° 15° 75° 1°
FFail Alm Delays 5s 0s 100s 0.1s
FFail1 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 55/176

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
FIELD FAILURE
20/Ιn Ω 0/Ιn Ω 40/Ιn Ω 0.5/Ιn Ω
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
FFail1 –Xa1
80/Ιn Ω 0/Ιn Ω 160/Ιn Ω 2/Ιn Ω
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
220/Ιn Ω 25/Ιn Ω 325/Ιn Ω 1/Ιn Ω
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
FFail1 Xb1
880/Ιn Ω 100/Ιn Ω 1300/Ιn Ω 4/Ιn Ω
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

FFail1 TimeDelay 5s 0s 100 s 0.1 s


FFail1 DO Timer 0s 0s 10 s 0.1 s
FFail2 Status Enabled Disabled, Enabled
20/Ιn Ω 0/Ιn Ω 40/Ιn Ω 0.5/Ιn Ω
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
FFail2 –Xa2
80/Ιn Ω 0/Ιn Ω 160/Ιn Ω 2/Ιn Ω
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

220/Ιn Ω 25/Ιn Ω 325/Ιn Ω 1/Ιn Ω


(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
FFail2 Xb2
880/Ιn Ω 100/Ιn Ω 1300/Ιn Ω 4/Ιn Ω
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

FFail2 TimeDelay 5s 0s 100 s 0.1 s


FFail2 DO Timer 0s 0s 10 s 0.1 s

2.10.1 Setting guidelines for field failure protection


Each stage of field failure protection may be selected as ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’,
within the “FFail1 Status”, “FFail2 Status” cells. The power factor alarm element may
be selected as Enabled or Disabled within the “FFail Alm Status” cell.
2.10.1.1Impedance element 1
To quickly detect a loss-of field condition, the diameter of the field failure impedance
characteristic (“FFail1 Xb1”) should be set as large as possible, without conflicting
with the impedance that might be seen under normal stable conditions or during
stable power swing conditions.
Where a generator is operated with a rotor angle of less than 90° and never at a
leading power factor, it is recommended that the diameter of the impedance
characteristic, “FFail1 Xb1”, is set equal to the generator direct-axis synchronous
reactance. The characteristic offset, “FFail1 -Xa1” should be set equal to half the
direct-axis transient reactance (0.5Xd’) in secondary ohms.
“FFail1 Xb1” = Xd
“FFail1 -Xa1” = 0.5 Xd’
where
Xd = Generator direct-axis synchronous reactance in ohms
Xd’ = Generator direct-axis transient reactance in ohms
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 56/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Where high-speed voltage regulation equipment is used it may be possible to operate


generators at rotor angles up to 120°. In this case, the impedance characteristic
diameter, “FFail1 Xb1”, should be set to 50% of the direct-axis synchronous reactance
(0.5Xd) and the offset, “FFail1 -Xa1”, should be set to 75% of the direct axis transient
reactance (0.75Xd’).
“FFail1 Xb1” = 0.5 Xd
“FFail1 -Xa1” = 0.75 Xd’
The field failure protection time delay, “FFail1 Time Delay”, should be set to minimise
the risk of operation of the protection function during stable power swings following
system disturbances or synchronisation. However, it should be ensured that the time
delay is not so long that stator winding or rotor thermal damage will occur. A typical
stator winding should be able to withstand a current of 2.0 p.u. for the order of 15s.
It may also take some time for the impedance seen at the generator terminals to
enter the characteristic of the protection. A time delay less than 10s would typically
be applied. The minimum permissible delay, to avoid problems of false tripping due
to stable power swings with the above impedance settings, would be of the order of
0.5s.
The protection reset (delayed drop off) timer, “FFail1 DO Timer”, would typically be
set to 0s to give instantaneous reset of the stage. A setting other than 0s can be used
to provide an integrating function for instances when the impedance may cyclically
enter and exit the characteristic. This can allow detection of pole slipping conditions,
for more information see section 2.21. When settings other than 0s are used the
protection pick-up time delay, “FFail1 Time Delay”, should be increased to prevent
mal-operation during stable power swing conditions.
2.10.1.2Impedance element 2
The second impedance element can be set to give fast operation when the field fails
under high load conditions. The diameter of the characteristic, “FFail2 Xb2”, should
be set to 1 p.u. The characteristic offset, “FFail2 -Xa2”, should be set equal to half
the direct-axis transient reactance (0.5Xd’).

kV2
FFail2 Xb2 =
MVA

FFail2 -Xa2 = 0.5 Xd’


This setting will detect a field failure condition from full load to about 30% load.
The time delay, “FFail2 Time Delay”, can be set to instantaneous, i.e. 0s.
The protection reset (delayed drop off) timer, “FFail2 DO Timer”, would typically be
set to 0s to give instantaneous reset of the stage. A setting other than 0s can be used
to provide an integrating function for instances when the impedance may cyclically
enter and exit the characteristic. This can allow detection of pole slipping conditions,
for more information see section 2.21. When settings other than 0s are used the
protection pick-up time delay, “FFail2 Time Delay”, should be increased to prevent
maloperation during stable power swing conditions.
2.10.1.3Power factor element
Salient pole machines can run continuously as induction generators generating
significant power and operation under these conditions may not be detectable by an
impedance characteristic. The power factor alarm can be used to signal to the
operator that excitation has failed under these conditions.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 57/176

The angle setting, “FFail Alm Angle”, should be set to greater than any angle that the
machine could be operated at in normal running. A typical setting would be 15°,
equivalent to a power factor of 0.96 leading. The power factor element time delay,
“FFail Alm Delay”, should be set longer than the impedance element time delay
setting (“FFail1 Time Delay”). This is to prevent operation of the alarm element under
transient conditions such as power swinging and to provide discrimination where a
field failure condition may not be detected by conventional field failure impedance
elements.

2.11 Negative phase sequence thermal protection


The Negative Phase Sequence (NPS) protection provided by the P340 is a true
thermal replica with a definite-time alarm stage. The relay derives the negative
phase sequence operating quantity from the following equation:

Ιa + a2 Ιb + aΙc
Ι2 = where a = 1.0 ∠120°
3
Unbalanced loading results in the flow of positive and negative sequence current
components. Load unbalance can arise as a result of single phase loading, non-
linear loads (involving power electronics or arc furnaces, etc.), uncleared or repetitive
asymmetric faults, fuse operation, single-pole tripping and reclosing on transmission
systems, broken overhead line conductors and asymmetric failures of switching
devices. Any negative phase sequence component of stator current will set up a
reverse-rotating component of stator flux that passes the rotor at twice synchronous
speed. Such a flux component will induce double frequency eddy currents in the
rotor, which can cause overheating of the rotor body, main rotor windings, damper
windings etc.
Where a machine has a high continuous negative phase sequence current withstand
level (Ι2 amp), as in the case of typical salient-pole machines, it would not be
essential to enable the NPS protection function. The NPS protection function can,
however, offer a better method of responding to an uncleared asymmetric fault
remote from the generator bus. As mentioned in section 2.5.1.2, it may be difficult to
set the voltage dependant overcurrent protection function to detect a remote fault and
co-ordinate with feeder backup protection for a close-up 3-phase fault.
For high levels of negative phase sequence current, eddy current heating can be
considerably in excess of the heat dissipation rate. Thus, virtually all the heat
acquired during the period of unbalance will be retained within the rotor. With this
assumption, the temperature attained within any critical rotor component will be
dependent on the duration of the unbalance (t seconds) and the level of NPS current
(I2 per unit) and is proportional to I22t. Synchronous generators are assigned a per-
unit I22t thermal capacity constant (Kg) to define their short time NPS current withstand
ability, see column 3 in Table 1. Various rotor components have different short time
thermal capacities and the most critical (lowest value of I22t) should form the basis of
the generator manufacturer’s short time I22t withstand claim.
Many traditional forms of generator NPS thermal protection relays have been
designed with an extremely inverse (Ι22t) operating time characteristic. Where the
operating time of the characteristic is dependent solely on the instantaneous
magnitude of negative phase sequence current present. This characteristic would be
set to match the claimed generator thermal capacity. This is satisfactory when
considering the effects of high values of negative phase sequence current.
For intermediate levels of NPS current, the rate of heating is slower. As a result, heat
dissipation should be considered.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 58/176 MiCOM P342, P343

The basic expression of t = K/Ι2cmr does not cater for the effects of heat dissipation or
for low standing levels of negative phase sequence current. The latter resulting in an
increase in rotor temperature which remains within the machines design limits. An
existing, tolerable, level of negative phase sequence current (Ι2<Ι2cmr), has the effect
of reducing the time to reach the critical temperature level, if the negative phase
sequence current level should increase beyond Ι2cmr. The P340 NPS thermal replica is
designed to overcome these problems by modelling the effects of low standing levels
of negative phase sequence currents.
The temperature rise in critical rotor components is related to the negative phase
sequence current (I2 per unit) and to time (t seconds) as follows. This assumes no
preceding negative phase sequence current:
θ°C ∝ I22 (1 - e-t/τ)
where
τ = the thermal time constant, τ = Kg/I2CMR2
Kg is the generator’s per-unit thermal capacity constant in seconds.
I2CMR is the generator’s per-unit continuous maximum I2 rating.
The limiting continuous maximum temperature (θCMR) would be reached according to
the following current-time relationship:
θ°C = θCMR Þ I22 (1 - e-t/τ) = I2CMR2
From the above, the time for which a level of negative phase sequence current in
excess of I2CMR can be maintained is expressed as follows:
t = - (Kg/I2CMR2) loge (1- (I2CMR/I2))
The P340 negative phase sequence element offers a true thermal characteristic
according to the following formula:

(Ι2>2 k Setting) æ æ (Ι2>2 Current set) ö2ö


ç ç ÷ ÷
t=- 2 Loge 1 -
( Ι2>2 Current set ) ç ç Ι2
÷ ÷
è è ø ø
Note: All current terms are in per-unit, based on the relay rated
current, Ιn.
When the protected generator sees a reduction in negative phase sequence current,
metallic rotor components will decrease in temperature. The relay is provided with a
separate thermal capacity setting (Ι2>2 KRESET), used when there is a reduction in
Ι2.
The negative sequence protection element will respond to system phase to earth and
phase to phase faults. Therefore, the element must be set to grade with downstream
earth and phase fault protections. To aid grading with downstream devices a definite
minimum operating time for the operating characteristic can be set. The definite
minimum time setting should be set to provide an adequate margin between the
operation of the negative phase sequence thermal protection function and external
protection. The co-ordination time margin used should be in accordance with the
usual practice adopted by the customer for backup protection co-ordination.
For levels of negative phase sequence current that are only slightly in excess of the
thermal element pick-up setting, there will be a noticeable deviation between the
P340 negative phase sequence thermal protection current-time characteristic and that
of the simple Ι22t characteristic. For this reason, a maximum negative phase
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 59/176

sequence protection trip time setting is provided. This maximum time setting also
limits the tripping time of the negative phase sequence protection for levels of
unbalance where there may be uncertainty about the machine’s thermal withstand.
A time delayed negative sequence overcurrent alarm stage is provided to give the
operator early warning of an unbalanced condition that may lead to generator
tripping. This can allow corrective action to be taken to reduce the unbalance in the
load.
The Negative Sequence element uses the current measured at the ΙA, ΙB, ΙC inputs on
the relay.
Thermal state of the machine can be viewed in the “NPS Thermal” cell in the
“MEASUREMENTS 3” column. The thermal state can be reset by selecting ‘Yes’ in the
“Reset NPS Thermal” cell in “Measurements 3”. Alternatively the thermal state can be
reset by energising DDB 389 “Reset Ι2 Thermal” via the relay PSL.
A DDB signal is also available to indicate tripping of the element (DDB 424). A
further DDB ‘NPS Alarm’ signal is generated from the NPS thermal alarm stage (DDB
306). The state of the DDB signal can be programmed to be viewed in the
“Monitor Bit x” cells of the “COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.

I 2>2 tMAX

I 2>2 k Setting

I 2>2 tMIN

I 2>2 Current set I2

P2247ENa

Figure 18: Negative phase sequence thermal characteristic


P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 60/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Setting ranges for the negative phase sequence thermal element are shown in the
following table:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1:
NPS THERMAL
Ι2>1 Alarm Enabled Disabled, Enabled
Ι2>1 Current Set 0.05 Ιn A 0.03 Ιn A 0.5 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
Ι2>1 Time Delay 20 s 2s 60 s 0.1 s
Ι2>2 Trip Enabled Disabled, Enabled
Ι2>2 Current set 0.1 Ιn A 0.05 Ιn A 0.5 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
Ι2>2 k Setting 15 2 40 0.1
Ι2>2 kRESET 15 2 40 0.1
Ι2>2 tMAX 1000 s 500 s 2000 s 10 s
Ι2>2 tMIN 0.25 s 0.25 s 40 s 0.25 s

2.11.1 Setting guidelines for negative phase sequence thermal protection


The alarm and trip stages of the negative phase sequence thermal protection may be
selected as ‘Enabled’ or ‘Disabled’, within the “Ι2>1 Alarm” and “Ι2>2 Trip” cells
respectively.
Synchronous machines will be able to withstand a certain level of negative phase
sequence stator current continuously. All synchronous machines will be assigned a
continuous maximum negative phase sequence current (Ι2cmr per-unit) rating by the
manufacturer. For various categories of generator, minimum negative phase
sequence current withstand levels have been specified by international standards,
such as IEC60034-1 and ANSI C50.13-1977 [1]. The IEC60034-1 figures are given
in Table 1.

Maximum (Ι2/Ιn)2t for


Maximum Ι2/Ιn for
Generator type operation under fault
continuous operation
conditions, Kg
Salient-pole:
Indirectly cooled 0.08 20
Directly cooled
(inner cooled) stator 0.05 15
and/or field
Cylindrical rotor synchronous:
Indirectly cooled rotor
Air cooled 0.1 15
Hydrogen cooled 0.1 10
Directly cooled
(inner cooled) rotor
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 61/176

Maximum (Ι2/Ιn)2t for


Maximum Ι2/Ιn for
Generator type operation under fault
continuous operation
conditions, Kg
≤ 350MVA 0.08 8
350 > ≤ 900MVA * **
900 > ≤ 1250MVA * 5
1250 ≤ 1600MVA 0.05 5
* For these generators, the value of Ι2/Ιn is calculated as follows:
Ι2 Sn - 350
= 0.8 - 4
Ιn 3 x 10

** For these generators, the value of (Ι2/Ιn)2t is calculated as follows:


2
æ Ι2 ö
ç ÷
ç Ιn ÷ t = 8 - 0.00545 (Sn - 350)
è ø
where Sn is the rated power in MVA

Table 1: IEC60034-1 Minimum negative sequence current withstand levels.


To obtain correct thermal protection, the relay thermal current setting, “Ι2>2 Current
Set”, and thermal capacity setting, “Ι2>2 k Setting”, should be set as follows:

æ Ιflc ö
ç
Ι2 > 2 Current set = Ι2cmr x ç
÷ x Ιn
Ι ÷
è p ø

2
æ Ιflc ö
ç
Ι2 > 2 k Setting = Kg x ç
÷
Ι ÷
è p ø
where
Ι2cmr = Generator per unit Ι2 maximum withstand.
Kg = Generator thermal capacity constant(s), see Table 1 for guidance.

Ιflc = Generator primary full-load current (A).


Ιp = CT primary current rating (A).

Ιn = Relay rated current (A).


Unless otherwise specified, the thermal capacity constant setting used when I2 is
reducing, “Ι2>2 kRESET”, should be set equal to the main time constant setting,
“Ι2>2 k Setting”. A machine manufacturer may be able to advise a specific thermal
capacity constant when I2 is reducing for the protected generator.
The current threshold of the alarm stage, “Ι2>1 Current Set”, should be set below the
thermal trip setting, “Ι2>2 Current Set”, to ensure that the alarm operates before
tripping occurs. A typical alarm current setting would be 70% of the trip current
setting. The alarm stage time setting, “Ι2>1 Time Delay”, must be chosen to prevent
operation during system fault clearance and to ensure that unwanted alarms are not
generated during normal running. A typical setting for this time delay would be 20s.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 62/176 MiCOM P342, P343

To aid grading with downstream devices a definite minimum operating time for the
operating characteristic can be set, “Ι2>2 tMIN”. This definite minimum time setting
should be set to provide an adequate margin between the operation of the negative
phase sequence thermal protection function and external protection. The co-
ordination time margin used should be in accordance with the usual practice adopted
by the customer for back-up protection co-ordination.
A maximum operating time for the negative phase sequence thermal characteristic
may be set, “Ι2>2 tMAX”. This definite time setting can be used to ensure that the
thermal rating of the machine is never exceeded.

2.12 Reverse power/over power/low forward power


The standard power protection elements of the P340 relay calculate the three phase
active power based on the following formula, using the current measured at the Ιa,
Ιb, Ιc inputs on the relay.
P = Vala cosφa + Vblb cosφb + Vclc cosφc
Two stages of power protection are provided, these can be independently selected as
either reverse power, over power, low forward power or disabled, operation in each
mode is described in the following sections. The power elements may be selectively
disabled, via fixed logic, so that they can be inhibited when the protected machines
CB is open, this will prevent mal-operation and nuisance flagging of any stage
selected to operate as low forward power.
The P340 relay is connected with the convention that the forward current is the
current flowing from the generator to the busbar. This corresponds to positive values
of the active power flowing in the forward direction. When a generator is operating
in the motoring mode, the machine is consuming active power from the power
system. The motoring active power therefore flows in the reverse direction. The
“Operating Mode” setting for the power protection allows the user to set the
operating mode to either “Generating” or “Motoring”. If the mode is set to
“Motoring”, the polarity of the calculated active power is inverted. The operating
mode setting can be useful in applications involving pumped storage generators.
DDB signals are available to indicate starting and tripping of each stage (Starts: DDB
595, DDB 596, Trips: DDB 475, 476). The state of the DDB signals can be
programmed to be viewed in the “Monitor Bit x” cells of the “COMMISSION TESTS”
column in the relay.
Setting ranges for the Power elements are shown in the following table:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
Group 1: Power
Operating Mode Generating Generating, Motoring
Power1 Function Reverse Disabled, Reverse, Low Forward, Over
5 x Ιn W 4 x Ιn W 300 x Ιn W 0.5 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
–P>1 Setting
20 x Ιn W 16 x Ιn W 1200 x Ιn W 2 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

5 x Ιn W 4 x Ιn W 300 x Ιn W 0.5 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
P<1 Setting
20 x Ιn W 16 x Ιn W 1200 x Ιn W 2 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 63/176

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
Group 1: Power
5 x Ιn W 4 x Ιn W 300 x Ιn W 0.5 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
P>1 Setting
20 x Ιn W 16 x Ιn W 1200 x Ιn W 2 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

Power1 Time Delay 5s 0s 100 s 0.1 s


Power1 DO Timer 0s 0s 10 s 0.1 s
P1 Poledead Inh Enabled Enabled, Disabled
Power2 Function Low Forward Disabled, Reverse, Low Forward, Over
5 x Ιn W 4 x Ιn W 300 x Ιn W 0.5 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
–P>2 Setting
20 x Ιn W 16 x Ιn W 1200 x Ιn W 2 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

5 x Ιn W 4 x Ιn W 300 x Ιn W 0.5 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
P<2 Setting
20 x Ιn W 16 x Ιn W 1200 x Ιn W 2 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

5 x Ιn W 4 x Ιn W 300 x Ιn W 0.5 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
P>2 Setting
20 x Ιn W 16 x Ιn W 1200 x Ιn W 2 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

Power2 Time Delay 5s 0s 100 s 0.1 s


Power2 DO Timer 0s 0s 10 s 0.1 s
P2 Poledead Inh Enabled Enabled, Disabled

2.12.1 Sensitive power protection function


The minimum standard 3 phase power protection setting (2%Pn for P342/P343) can
be restrictive for some applications. For example for steam turbine generators and
some hydro generators a reverse power setting as low as 0.5%Pn is required. A
sensitive setting for low forward power protection may also be required, especially for
steam turbine generators which have relatively low over speed design limits.
If a power setting less than 2% Pn is required then the sensitive power protection
should be used.
To improve the power protection sensitivity, a sensitive CT input is used. The CT input
is the same as that of the sensitive earth fault and restricted earth fault protection
elements, so the user can only select either sensitive power or SEF/REF in the
“Configuration” menu, but not both.
The sensitive power protection measures only A-phase active power, as the abnormal
power condition is a 3-phase phenomenon. Having a separate CT input also means
that a correctly loaded metering class CT can be used which can provide the required
angular accuracy for the sensitive power protection function. A compensation angle
setting θC is also be provided to compensate for the angle error introduced by the
system CT and VT.
The A-phase power is calculated based on the following formula:
PA = ΙA VA cos (φ - θC)
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 64/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Where φ is the angle of ΙA with respect to VA and θC is the compensation angle


setting.
Therefore, rated single phase power, Pn, for a 1A rated CT and 110V rated VT is
Pn = Ιn x Vn = 1 x 110/√3 = 63.5 W
The minimum setting is 0.3 W = 0.47% Pn
Two stages of sensitive power protection are provided, these can be independently
selected as either reverse power, over power, low forward power or disabled,
operation in each mode is described in the following sections. The power elements
may be selectively disabled, via fixed logic, so that they can be inhibited when the
protected machine’s CB is open, this will prevent maloperation and nuisance flagging
of any stage selected to operate as low forward power.
The P340 relay is connected with the convention that the forward current is the
current flowing from the generator to the busbar. This corresponds to positive values
of the active power flowing in the forward direction. When a generator is operating
in the motoring mode, the machine is consuming active power from the power
system. The motoring active power therefore flows in the reverse direction. The
“Operating Mode” setting for the sensitive power protection allows the user to set the
operating mode to either “Generating” or “Motoring”. If the mode is set to
“Motoring”, the polarity of the calculated active power is inverted. The operating
mode setting can be useful in applications involving pumped storage generators.
Measurement displays of A Phase sensitive active power, reactive power and power
factor angle “APh Sen Watts, Aph Sen Vars and APh Power Angle” are provided in
the “MEASUREMENTS 3” menu to aid testing and commissioning.
DDB signals are available to indicate starting and tripping of each stage (Starts: DDB
643, DDB 644, Trips: DDB 495, 496). The state of the DDB signals can be
programmed to be viewed in the “Monitor Bit x” cells of the “COMMISSION TESTS”
column in the relay.
Setting ranges for the Sensitive Power elements are shown in the following table:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
Group 1: Sensitive Power
Comp Angle 0° -5° 5° 0.1°
Operating Mode Generating Generating, Motoring
Sen Power1 Func Reverse Disabled, Reverse, Low Forward, Over
0.5 x Ιn W 0.3 x Ιn W 100 x Ιn W 0.1 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
Sen –P>1 Setting
2 x Ιn W 1.2 x Ιn W 400 x Ιn W 0.4 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

0.5 x Ιn W 0.3 x Ιn W 100 x Ιn W 0.1 x Ιn W


(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
Sen P<1 Setting
2 x Ιn W 1.2 x Ιn W 400 x Ιn W 0.4 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

50 x Ιn W 0.3 x Ιn W 100 x Ιn W 0.1 x Ιn W


(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
Sen P>1 Setting
200 x Ιn W 1.2 x Ιn W 400 x Ιn W 0.4 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

Sen Power1 Delay 5s 0s 100 s 0.1 s


Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 65/176

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
Group 1: Sensitive Power
Power1 DO Timer 0s 0s 10 s 0.1 s
P1 Poledead Inh Enabled Enabled, Disabled
Sen Power2 Func Low Forward Disabled, Reverse, Low Forward, Over
0.5 x Ιn W 0.3 x Ιn W 100 x Ιn W 0.1 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
Sen –P>2 Setting
2 x Ιn W 1.2 x Ιn W 400 x Ιn W 0.4 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

0.5 x Ιn W 0.3 x Ιn W 100 x Ιn W 0.1 x Ιn W


(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
Sen P<2 Setting
2 x Ιn W 1.2 x Ιn W 400 x Ιn W 0.4 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

50 x Ιn W 0.3 x Ιn W 100 x Ιn W 0.1 x Ιn W


(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
Sen P>2 Setting
200 x Ιn W 1.2 x Ιn W 400 x Ιn W 0.4 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

Sen Power2 Delay 2s 0s 100 s 0.1 s


Power2 DO Timer 0s 0s 10 s 0.1 s
P2 Poledead Inh Enabled Enabled, Disabled

2.12.2 Low forward power protection function


When the machine is generating and the CB connecting the generator to the system
is tripped, the electrical load on the generator is cut. This could lead to generator
over-speed if the mechanical input power is not reduced quickly. Large turbo-
alternators, with low-inertia rotor designs, do not have a high over speed tolerance.
Trapped steam in the turbine, downstream of a valve that has just closed, can rapidly
lead to over speed. To reduce the risk of over speed damage to such sets, it is
sometimes chosen to interlock non-urgent tripping of the generator breaker and the
excitation system with a low forward power check. This ensures that the generator set
circuit breaker is opened only when the output power is sufficiently low that over
speeding is unlikely. The delay in electrical tripping, until prime mover input power
has been removed, may be deemed acceptable for ‘non-urgent’ protection trips; e.g.
stator earth fault protection for a high impedance earthed generator. For ‘urgent’
trips, e.g. stator current differential protection the low forward power interlock should
not be used. With the low probability of ‘urgent’ trips, the risk of over speed and
possible consequences must be accepted.
The low forward power protection can be arranged to interlock ‘non-urgent’
protection tripping using the relay scheme logic. It can also be arranged to provide a
contact for external interlocking of manual tripping, if desired.
To prevent unwanted relay alarms and flags, a low forward power protection element
can be disabled when the circuit breaker is opened via ‘poledead’ logic.
The low forward power protection can also be used to provide loss of load protection
when a machine is motoring. It can be used for example to protect a machine which
is pumping from becoming unprimed or to stop a motor in the event of a failure in
the mechanical transmission. A typical application would be for pump storage
generators operating in the motoring mode, where there is a need to prevent the
machine becoming unprimed which can cause blade and runner cavitation. During
motoring conditions, it is typical for the relay to switch to another setting group with
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 66/176 MiCOM P342, P343

the low forward power enabled and correctly set and the protection operating mode
set to Motoring.
2.12.2.1Low forward power setting guideline
Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as a low forward power
stage by selecting the “Power1 Function/Sen Power1 Func” or “Power2 Function/Sen
Power 2 Func” cell to ‘Low Forward’.
When required for interlocking of non urgent tripping applications, the threshold
setting of the low forward power protection function, “P<1 Setting/Sen P<1 Setting”
or “P<2 Setting/Sen P<2 Setting”, should be less than 50% of the power level that
could result in a dangerous over speed transient on loss of electrical loading. The
generator set manufacturer should be consulted for a rating for the protected
machine. The operating mode should be set to “Generating” for this application.
When required for loss of load applications, the threshold setting of the low forward
power protection function, “P<1 Setting/Sen P<1 Setting” or “P<2 Setting/Sen P<2
Setting”, is system dependent, however, it is typically set to 10-20% below the
minimum load. For example, for a minimum load of 70%Pn, the setting needs to be
set at 63%-56%Pn. The operating mode should be set to “Motoring” for this
application.
For interlocking non urgent trip applications the time delay associated with the low
forward power protection function, “Power1 TimeDelay/Sen Power1 Delay” or
“Power2 TimeDelay/Sen Power2 Delay”, could be set to zero. However, some delay
is desirable so that permission for a non-urgent electrical trip is not given in the event
of power fluctuations arising from sudden steam valve/throttle closure. A typical time
delay for this reason is 2s.
For loss of load applications the pick up time delay, “Power1 TimeDelay/Sen Power1
Delay” or “Power2 TimeDelay/Sen Power2 Delay”, is application dependent but is
normally set in excess of the time between motor starting and the load being
established. Where rated power can not be reached during starting (for example
where the motor is started with no load connected) and the required protection
operating time is less than the time for load to be established then it will be necessary
to inhibit the power protection during this period. This can be done in the PSL using
AND logic and a pulse timer triggered from the motor starting to block the power
protection for the required time.
The delay on reset timer, “Power1 DO Timer” or “Power2 DO Timer”, would
normally be set to zero when selected to operate low forward power elements.
To prevent unwanted relay alarms and flags, a low forward power protection element
can be disabled when the circuit breaker is open via ‘poledead’ logic. This is
controlled by setting the power protection inhibit cells, “P1 Poledead Inh” or “P2
Poledead Inh”, to ‘Enabled’.
2.12.3 Reverse power protection function
A generator is expected to supply power to the connected system in normal
operation. If the generator prime mover fails, a generator that is connected in
parallel with another source of electrical supply will begin to ‘motor’. This reversal of
power flow due to loss of prime mover can be detected by the reverse power element.
The consequences of generator motoring and the level of power drawn from the
power system will be dependent on the type of prime mover. Typical levels of
motoring power and possible motoring damage that could occur for various types of
generating plant are given in the following table.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 67/176

Possible Damage
Prime Mover Motoring Power
(Percentage Rating)
Risk of fire or explosion from
Diesel Engine 5% – 25%
unburned fuel
Motoring level depends on compression ratio and cylinder bore stiffness.
Rapid disconnection is required to limit power loss and risk of damage.
10% – 15%
(Split-shaft) With some gear-driven sets,
Gas Turbine damage may arise due to reverse
>50% torque on gear teeth.
(Single-shaft)
Compressor load on single shaft machines leads to a high motoring power
compared to split-shaft machines. Rapid disconnection is required to limit power
loss or damage.
0.2 – >2%
(Blades out of water) Blade and runner cavitation may
Hydraulic Turbines occur with a long period of
>2.0% motoring
(Blades in water)
Power is low when blades are above tail-race water level. Hydraulic flow
detection devices are often the main means of detecting loss of drive. Automatic
disconnection is recommended for unattended operation.

0.5% – 3% Thermal stress damage may be


(Condensing sets) inflicted on low-pressure turbine
Steam Turbines blades when steam flow is not
3% - 6% available to dissipate windage
(Non-condensing sets) losses.
Damage may occur rapidly with non-condensing sets or when vacuum is lost with
condensing sets. Reverse power protection may be used as a secondary method
of detection and might only be used to raise an alarm.

Table showing motor power and possible damage for various types of prime mover.
In some applications, the level of reverse power in the case of prime mover failure
may fluctuate. This may be the case for a failed diesel engine. To prevent cyclic
initiation and reset of the main trip timer, and consequent failure to trip, an
adjustable reset time delay is provided (“Power1 DO Timer/Power2 DO Timer”). This
delay would need to be set longer than the period for which the reverse power could
fall below the power setting (“P<1 Setting/Sen P<1 Setting”). This setting needs to be
taken into account when setting the main trip time delay. It should also be noted that
a delay on reset in excess of half the period of any system power swings could result
in operation of the reverse power protection during swings.
Reverse power protection may also be used to interlock the opening of the generator
set circuit breaker for ‘non-urgent’ tripping, as discussed in 2.12.1. Reverse power
interlocks are preferred over low forward power interlocks by some utilities.
2.12.3.1Reverse power setting guideline
Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as a reverse power stage
by selecting the “Power1 Function/Sen Power1 Func” or “Power2 Function/Sen
Power2 Func” cell to ‘Reverse’.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 68/176 MiCOM P342, P343

The power threshold setting of the reverse power protection, “-P>1 Setting/Sen -P>1
Setting” or “-P>2 Setting/Sen -P>2 Setting”, should be less than 50% of the motoring
power, typical values for the level of reverse power for generators are given in
previous table.
For applications to detect the loss of the prime mover or for applications to provide
interlocking of non urgent trips the reverse power protection operating mode should
be set to “Generating”.
The reverse power protection function should be time-delayed to prevent false trips or
alarms being given during power system disturbances or following synchronisation.
A time delay setting, “Power1 TimeDelay/Sen Power1 Delay” or “Power2
TimeDelay/Sen Power2 Delay” of 5s should be applied typically.
The delay on reset timer, “Power1 DO Timer” or “Power2 DO Timer”, would
normally be set to zero. When settings of greater than zero are used for the reset
time delay, the pick up time delay setting may need to be increased to ensure that
false tripping does not result in the event of a stable power swinging event.
2.12.4 Over power protection
The overpower protection can be used as overload indication, as a back-up
protection for failure of governor and control equipment, and would be set above the
maximum power rating of the machine.
2.12.4.1Over power setting guideline
Each stage of power protection can be selected to operate as an over power stage by
selecting the “Power1 Function/Sen Power1 Func” or “Power2 Function/Sen Power2
Func” cell to ‘Over’.
The power threshold setting of the over power protection, “P>1 Setting/Sen P>1
Setting” or “P>2 Setting/Sen P>2 Setting”, should be set greater than the machine
full load rated power.
A time delay setting, “Power1 TimeDelay/Sen Power1 Delay” or “Power2
TimeDelay/Sens Power2 Delay” should be applied.
The operating mode should be set to “Motoring” or “Generating” depending on the
operating mode of the machine.
The delay on reset timer, “Power1 DO Timer” or “Power2 DO Timer”, would
normally be set to zero.

2.13 Stator earth fault protection function


Low voltage generators will be solidly earthed, however to limit the damage that can
be caused due to earth faults, it is common for HV generators to be connected to
earth via an impedance. This impedance may be fitted on the secondary side of a
distribution transformer earthing arrangement. The earthing impedance is generally
chosen to limit earth fault current to full load current or less.
There is a limit on the percentage of winding that can be protected by a stator earth
fault element. For earth faults close to the generator neutral, the driving voltage will
be low, and hence the value of fault current will be severely reduced. In practice,
approximately 95% of the stator winding can be protected. For faults in the last 5%
of the winding, the earth fault current is so low that it cannot be detected by this type
of earth fault protection. In most applications this limitation is accepted as the
chances of an earth fault occurring in the last 5% of the winding, where the voltage to
earth is low, is small.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 69/176

The percentage of winding covered by the earth fault protection can be calculated as
shown below, with reference to Figure 19.

x
If
Is

R If = xV/R
x min = Is R/V

% covered = (1 – x min ) x 100%


P2168ENa

Figure 19: Effective coverage of stator earth fault protection


A two stage non-directional earth fault element is provided. The first stage has an
inverse time or definite time delay characteristic and can incorporate a reset time
delay to improve detection of intermittent faults. The second stage has a definite time
characteristic which can be set to 0s to provide instantaneous operation.
Where impedance or distribution transformer earthing is used the second stage of
protection may be used to detect flashover of the earthing impedance. The second
stage may also be used to provide instantaneous protection where grading with
system protection is not required. See setting guidelines for more details.
Each stage of protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the
PSL (DDB 358, DDB 359). This allows the earth fault protection to be integrated into
busbar protection schemes as shown in section 2.24, or can be used to improve
grading with downstream devices. DDB signals are also available to indicate the
start and trip of each stage of protection, (Starts: DDB 613, DDB 614, Trips: DDB
442, DDB 443). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in
the “Monitor Bit x” cells of the “COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
The Stator Earth Fault element is powered from the IN CT input on the relay. This
input should be supplied from a CT fitted into the generator earth path so that the
element provides earth fault protection for the generator and back-up protection for
system faults. Alternatively, the element may be supplied from a CT fitted on the
secondary side of a distribution transformer earthing system.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 70/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Setting ranges and default settings for this element are shown in the following table:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
EARTH FAULT
Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V
Inverse, IEC E Inverse, UK LT Inverse, RI,
ΙN>1 Function Disabled IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V Inverse,
IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse,
US ST Inverse, IDG
ΙN>1 Current 0.1 x Ιn A 0.02 x Ιn A 4 x Ιn A 0.01 x Ιn A
ΙN1>1 IDG Ιs 1.5 1 4 0.1
ΙN>1 Time Delay 1s 0s 200 s 0.01 s
ΙN>1 TMS 1 0.025 1.2 0.025
ΙN>1 Time Dial 1 0.01 100 0.01
ΙN>1 K(RI) 1 0.1 10 0.05
ΙN>1 IDG Time 1.2 1 2 0.01
ΙN>1 Reset Char DT DT, Inverse N/A
ΙN>1 tRESET 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
ΙN>2 Function DT Disabled, DT N/A
ΙN>2 Current Set 0.45 x Ιn A 0.02 x Ιn A 10 x Ιn A 0.01 x Ιn A
ΙN>2 Time Delay 0s 0s 200 s 0.01 s

For further details regarding the inverse time characteristics refer to the Overcurrent
Protection, section 2.4.
2.13.1 IDG curve
The IDG curve is commonly used for time delayed earth fault protection in the
Swedish market. This curve is available in stages 1 and 2 of Earth Fault protection.
The IDG curve is represented by the following equation:

æ Ι ö
t = 5.8 - 1.35 loge ç ÷ in seconds
è ΙN > Setting ø
where
Ι = measured current
ΙN>Setting = an adjustable setting which defines the start point of the characteristic
Although the start point of the characteristic is defined by the “ΙN>” setting, the
actual relay current threshold is a different setting called “IDG Ιs”. The “IDG Ιs”
setting is set as a multiple of “ΙN>”.
An additional setting “IDG Time” is also used to set the minimum operating time at
high levels of fault current.
Figure 20 illustrates how the IDG characteristic is implemented.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 71/176

10

8 IDG Is Setting Range

Operating time (seconds)


7

3
IDG Time Setting Range
2

0
1 10 100
I/IN>
P2242ENa

Figure 20: IDG characteristic


2.13.2 Setting guidelines for stator earth fault potection
The first stage of earth fault protection can be selected by setting “ΙN>1 Function” to
any of the inverse or DT settings. The first stage is disabled if “ΙN>1 Function” is set
to ‘Disabled’. The second stage of earth fault protection can be selected by setting
“ΙN>2 Function” to ‘Enabled’. The second stage is disabled if “ΙN>2 Function” is set
to ‘Disabled’.
For a directly connected machine the stator earth fault protection must co-ordinate
with any downstream earth fault protections. The first stage current setting, “ΙN>1
Current”, should typically be set to less than 33% of the machine earth fault
contribution or full load current, whichever is lower. The time delay characteristic of
the element (selected via “ΙN>1 Function” and “ΙN>1 Time Delay”, “ΙN>1 TMS” or
“ΙN>1 Time Dial”) should be set to time grade with any downstream earth fault
protection. Where the element is required to protect 95% of the generator winding a
current setting of 5% of the limited earth fault current should be used.
Where impedance or distribution transformer earthing is used the second stage may
be used to detect flashover of the earthing impedance. In such a case the second
stage current setting, “ΙN>2 Current”, could be set to approximately 150% of the
limited earth fault current and the time delay, “ΙN>2 Time Delay”, would be set to 0s,
to provide instantaneous operation.
For a machine connected to the system via a step-up transformer there is no need to
grade the stator earth fault element with system earth fault protections. In this case
the first stage should be set to 5% of the limited earth fault current to provide
protection for 95% of the machine winding. The time delay characteristic of the stage
should grade with VT fuses for VT earth faults. A transient generator earth fault
current may also occur for a HV earth fault due to transformer inter-winding
capacitance. Correct grading under these conditions can be provided by using a
definite time delay of between 0.5-3s. Experience has shown that it is possible to
apply an instantaneous stator earth fault element on a indirectly connected machine if
a current setting of ≥10% of the limited earth fault current is used. Therefore the
second stage can be set to give this instantaneous protection.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 72/176 MiCOM P342, P343

2.14 Residual overvoltage/neutral voltage displacement protection function


On a healthy three phase power system, the addition of each of the three phase to
earth voltages is nominally zero, as it is the vector addition of three balanced vectors
at 120° to one another. However, when an earth fault occurs on the primary system
this balance is upset and a ‘residual’ voltage is produced.
This could be measured, for example, at the secondary terminals of a voltage
transformer having a “broken delta” secondary connection. Hence, a residual
voltage measuring relay can be used to offer earth fault protection on such a system.
Note that this condition causes a rise in the neutral voltage with respect to earth
which is commonly referred to as “neutral voltage displacement” or NVD.
Alternatively, if the system is impedance or distribution transformer earthed, the
neutral displacement voltage can be measured directly in the earth path via a single
phase VT. This type of protection can be used to provide earth fault protection
irrespective of whether the generator is earthed or not, and irrespective of the form of
earthing and earth fault current level. For faults close to the generator neutral the
resulting residual voltage will be small. Therefore, as with stator earth fault
protection, only 95% of the stator winding can be reliably protected.
It should be noted that where residual overvoltage protection is applied to a directly
connected generator, such a voltage will be generated for an earth fault occurring
anywhere on that section of the system and hence the NVD protection must co-
ordinate with other earth fault protections.
The neutral voltage displacement protection function of the P340 relay consists of two
stages with adjustable time delays.
Two stages are included for the element to account for applications which require
both alarm and trip stages, for example, an insulated system. It is common in such a
case for the system to have been designed to withstand the associated healthy phase
overvoltages for a number of hours following an earth fault. In such applications, an
alarm is generated soon after the condition is detected, which serves to indicate the
presence of an earth fault on the system. This gives time for system operators to
locate and isolate the fault. The second stage of the protection can issue a trip signal
if the fault condition persists.
A dedicated voltage input is provided for this protection function, this may be used to
measure the residual voltage supplied from either an open delta connected VT or the
voltage measured on the secondary side of a distribution transformer earth
connection, as shown in Figure 21. Alternatively, the residual voltage may be derived
internally from the three phase to neutral voltage measurements. Where derived
measurement is used the 3 phase to neutral voltage must be supplied from either a
5-limb or three single phase VTs. These types of VT design allow the passage of
residual flux and consequently permit the relay to derive the required residual
voltage. In addition, the primary star point of the VT must be earthed. A three limb
VT has no path for residual flux and is therefore unsuitable to supply the relay when
residual voltage is required to be derived from the phase to neutral voltage
measurement.
The residual voltage signal also provides a polarising voltage signal for the sensitive
directional earth fault protection function.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 73/176

1
3
Va
Vb
Vc

Vn
1 Derived from phase neutral voltages MiCOM
2 Measured from earth impedance P343
3 Measured from broken delta VT
P2169ENa

Figure 21: Alternative relay connections for residual overvoltage/NVD


protection
Each stage of protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the
PSL (DDB 368, DDB 369), this can be used to improve grading with downstream
devices. DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and trip of each stage of
protection, (Starts: DDB 577, DDB 578, Trips: DDB 451, DDB 452). The state of the
DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the “Monitor Bit x” cells of the
“COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
Setting ranges and default settings for this element are shown in the following table:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
RESIDUAL O/V NVD
VN Input Measured Measured, Derived
VN>1 Function DT Disabled, DT, IDMT
1V 80V 1V
5V (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
VN>1 Voltage Set
20V (Vn=380/480V) 4V 320V 4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

VN>1 Time Delay 1s 0s 100 s 0.01 s


VN>1 TMS 1 0.5 100 0.5
VN>1 tRESET 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
VN>2 Status DT Disabled or DT
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 74/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
RESIDUAL O/V NVD
1V 80V 1V
5V (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
VN>2 Voltage Set
20V (Vn=380/480V) 4V 320V 4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

VN>2 Time Delay 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s

The IDMT characteristic available on the first stage is defined by the following
formula:
t = K / (M – 1)
where
K = Time Multiplier Setting (“VN>1 TMS”)
t = Operating Time in Seconds
M = Measured Residual Voltage/Relay Setting Voltage (“VN>1 Voltage Set”)
2.14.1 Setting guidelines for residual overvoltage/neutral voltage displacement protection
Stage 1 may be selected as either ‘IDMT’ (inverse time operating characteristic), ‘DT’
(definite time operating characteristic) or ‘Disabled’, within the “VN>1 Function” cell.
Stage 2 operates with a definite time characteristic and is Enabled/Disabled in the
“VN>2 Status” cell. The time delay. (“VN>1 TMS” - for IDMT curve;
“V>1 Time Delay”, “V>2 Time Delay”- for definite time) should be selected in
accordance with normal relay co-ordination procedures to ensure correct
discrimination for system faults.
The residual overvoltage protection can be set to operate from the voltage measured
at the Vn input VT terminals or the residual voltage derived from the phase-neutral
voltage inputs as selected by “VN Input”.
For a directly connected machine the neutral voltage displacement protection must
co-ordinate with any downstream earth fault protections. To ensure co-ordination the
voltage setting of the neutral voltage displacement protection function should be set
higher than the effective setting of current operated earth fault protection in the same
earth fault zone. The effective voltage setting of a current operated earth fault
protection may be established from the following equations:

Veff = (Ιpoc x Ze) / (1/3 x V1/V2) for an open delta VT

Veff = (Ιpoc x Ze) / (V1/V2) for a single phase star point VT

where
Veff = effective voltage setting of current operated protection
Ιpoc = primary operating current of current operated protection
Ze = earthing impedance
V1/ = VT turns ratio
V2
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 75/176

It must also be ensured that the voltage setting of the element is set above any
standing level of residual voltage that is present on the system. A typical setting for
residual overvoltage protection is 5V.
The second stage of protection can be used as an alarm stage on unearthed or very
high impedance earthed systems where the system can be operated for an
appreciable time under an earth fault condition.
Where the generator is connected to the system via a transformer, co-ordination with
system earth fault protections is not required. In these applications the NVD voltage
setting should typically be set to 5% of rated voltage. This will provide protection for
95% of the stator winding.

2.15 Sensitive earth fault protection function


If a generator is earthed through a high impedance, or is subject to high ground fault
resistance, the earth fault level will be severely limited. Consequently, the applied
earth fault protection requires both an appropriate characteristic and a suitably
sensitive setting range in order to be effective. A separate sensitive earth fault
element is provided within the P340 relay for this purpose, this has a dedicated CT
input allowing very low current setting thresholds to be used.
An alternative use for the sensitive earth fault input is on a multiple earthed system
where it is advantageous to apply a directional earth fault relay at the machine
terminals. The directional relay, operating for current flowing into the machine, will
be stable for external faults but can operate quickly for generator faults when fault
current is fed from the system.
Where several machines are connected in parallel, it is common for only one
machine to be earthed at any time. This prevents the flow of third harmonic currents
which could overheat the machine. This may be the only earth connection for this
part of the system. Non directional earth fault protection could be applied at the
terminals of the unearthed machines in such cases since an unearthed generator
cannot source earth fault current. However, as any of the machines can be earthed,
it is prudent to apply directional protection at the terminals of all the machines.
There is also a risk that transient spill current can cause operation of a non
directional, terminal fed, earth fault relay for an external phase fault, hence
directional elements have an added degree of security. When applied in this way the
directional earth fault elements will operate for faults on the unearthed machines but
not the earthed machine. Therefore, additional stator earth fault or residual
overvoltage/NVD protection should be used to protect the earthed machine. Such a
scheme will provide stable, fast, earth fault protection for all machines, no matter
which generator is earthed.
A single stage definite time sensitive earth fault protection element is provided in the
P340 relay, this element can be set to operate with a directional characteristic when
required. When directional earth fault protection is required the operating current
should be derived from either a core balanced CT or the residual connection of 3
phase CTs at the terminals of the machine. Direction of the earth fault current for this
element is determined with reference to the polarising signal, the residual voltage.
The polarising signal is taken from the residual overvoltage/NVD protection input or
derived from the 3 phase-neutral voltage inputs on the relay.
A polarising voltage threshold is also provided. The element cannot operate unless
voltage exceeds this threshold. This helps to restrain the element during phase/phase
faults when transient CT saturation produces spill current in the residual connection of
the phase CTs. No residual voltage will be present during such non earth fault
conditions hence the DEF element cannot operate. The element will therefore be
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 76/176 MiCOM P342, P343

enabled only during genuine earth fault conditions when significant residual voltage
will be present. To prevent the element from mal-operating due to VT fuse failure the
element can be blocked from the VT supervision logic by setting the ISEF Func Link -
Block ISEF from VTS to 1. If the ISEF Func Link is set to 0 the SEF element will revert
to non directional upon operation of the VTS.
Where Petersen Coil earthing is used, users may wish to use Wattmetric Directional
Earth Fault protection or an Ιcosφ characteristic. Settings to enable the element to
operate as a wattmetric element are also provided. For insulated earth applications,
it is common to use the Ιsinφ characteristic. See the P140 technical guide
P14x/EN T/A22, section 2.6 for more details on the application of directional earth
fault protection on insulated and Petersen coil systems.
The Sensitive Earth Fault protection can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB
signal via the PSL (DDB 362). This allows the protection to be integrated into busbar
protection schemes as shown in section 2.24, or can be used to improve grading with
downstream devices. DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and trip of
the protection, (Start: DDB 617, Trips: DDB 447). The state of the DDB signals can
be programmed to be viewed in the “Monitor Bit x” cells of the
“COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
Setting ranges for the Sensitive Earth Fault element are shown in the following table:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
SEF/REF PROTECTION
SEF, SEF Cos (PHI), SEF Sin (PHI), Wattmetric,
SEF/REF Options SEF Hi Z REF, Lo Z REF, Lo Z REF + SEF,
Lo Z REF + Watt
ΙSEF>1 Function DT Disabled, DT
Non- Non-Directional, Directional Fwd,
ΙSEF>1 Directional
Directional Directional Rev
ΙSEF>1 Current 0.05 Ιn A 0.005 Ιn A 0.1 Ιn A 0.00025 Ιn A

ΙSEF>1 Delay 1s 0s 200 s 0.01 s


ΙSEF> Func Link 1 Bit 0 - Block ΙSEF> from VTS
ΙSEF DIRECTIONAL Sub Heading
ΙSEF> Char Angle 90° –95° 95° 1°
ΙSEF> VNpol Input Measured Measured, Derived
5V 0.5 V 80 V 0.5 V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
ΙSEF> Vnpol Set
20 V 2V 320 V 2V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

WATTMETRIC SEF Sub Heading


9 x Ιn W 20 x Ιn W 0.05 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
PN> Setting 0W
36 x Ιn W 80 x Ιn W 0.2 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

For further details regarding the inverse time characteristics refer to the Overcurrent
Protection, section 2.4.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 77/176

2.15.1 Setting guidelines for sensitive earth fault protection


The operating function of the sensitive earth fault protection can be selected by setting
“SEF/REF Options” cell. The SEF protection is selected by setting “ΙSEF>1 Function”
to ‘Enabled’. To provide sensitive earth fault or sensitive directional earth fault
protection the “SEF/REF Options” cell should be set to ‘SEF’. For SEF cosφ and SEF
sinφ earth fault protection “SEF/REF Options” cell should be set to to ‘SEF Cos (PHI) or
SEF Sin (PHI)’. The SEF cosφ and SEF sinφ options are not available with low
impedance REF protection. For wattmetric earth fault protection “SEF/REF Options”
cell should be set to ‘Wattmetric’. The other options for “SEF/REF Options” relate to
restricted earth fault protection, for more details see section 2.16.
The directionality of the element is selected in the “ΙSEF> Direction” setting. If
“ΙSEF> Direction” is set to ‘Directional Fwd’ the element will operate with a
directional characteristic and will operate when current flows in the forward direction,
i.e. when current flows into the machine with the relay connected as shown in the
standard relay connection diagram. If “ΙSEF> Direction” is set to ‘Directional Rev’
the element will operate with a directional characteristic and will operate when
current flows in the opposite direction, i.e. current flow out of the machine into the
system. If “ΙSEF> Direction” is set to ‘Non-Directional’ the element will operate as a
simple overcurrent element. If either of the directional options are chosen additional
cells to select the characteristic angle of the directional characteristic and polarising
voltage threshold will become visible.
The operating current threshold of the Sensitive Earth Fault protection function,
“ΙSEF>1 Current”, should be set to give a primary operating current down to 5% or
less of the minimum earth fault current contribution to a generator terminal fault.
The directional element characteristic angle setting, “ΙSEF> Char Angle”, should be
set to match as closely as possible the angle of zero sequence source impedance
behind the relaying point. If this impedance is dominated by an earthing resistor, for
example, the angle setting would be set to 0°. On insulated or very high impedance
earthed systems the earth fault current measured by a SDEF element is predominantly
capacitive hence the RCA should be set to –90°.
The polarising voltage threshold setting, “ΙSEF> VNpol Set”, should be chosen to give
a sensitivity equivalent to that of the operating current threshold. This current level
can be translated into a residual voltage as described for the residual overvoltage
protection in section 2.14.
When the element is set as a non directional element the definite time delay setting
“ΙSEF>1 Delay” should be set to co-ordinate with downstream devices that may
operate for external earth faults. For an indirectly connected generator the SEF
element should co-ordinate with the measurement VT fuses, to prevent operation for
VT faults. For directional applications when the element is fed from the residual
connection of the phase CTs a short time delay is desirable to ensure stability for
external earth faults or phase/phase faults. A time delay of 0.5s will be sufficient to
provide stability in the majority of applications. Where a dedicated core balance CT
is used for directional applications an instantaneous setting may be used.

2.16 Restricted earth fault protection


Earth faults occurring on a machine winding or terminal may be of limited
magnitude, either due to the impedance present in the earth path or by the
percentage of stator winding that is involved in the fault. As stated in section 2.13, it
is common to apply stator earth fault protection fed from a single CT in the machine
earth connection - this can provide time delayed protection for a stator winding or
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 78/176 MiCOM P342, P343

terminal fault. On larger machines, typically >2MW, where phase CTs can be fitted
to both neutral end and terminal ends of the stator winding, phase differential
protection may be fitted. For small machines, however, only one set of phase CTs
may be available making phase differential protection impractical. For smaller
generators earth fault differential protection can be applied to provide instantaneous
tripping for any stator or terminal earth fault. In application the operating zone of
earth fault differential protection is restricted to faults within the boundaries of the CTs
supplying the relay, hence this type of element is referred to as restricted earth fault
protection.
When applying differential protection such as REF, some suitable means must be
employed to give the protection stability under external fault conditions, thus ensuring
that relay operation only occurs for faults on the transformer winding/connections.
Two methods are commonly used; percentage bias or high impedance. The biasing
technique operates by measuring the level of through current flowing and altering the
relay sensitivity accordingly. The high impedance technique ensures that the relay
circuit is of sufficiently high impedance such that the differential voltage that may
occur under external fault conditions is less than that required to drive setting current
through the relay.
The REF protection in the P340 relays may be configured to operate as either a high
impedance differential or a low impedance biased differential element. The following
sections describe the application of the relay in each mode.
Note that the high impedance REF element of the relay shares the same CT input as
the SEF protection. Hence, only one of these elements may be selected.
A DDB signals are also available to indicate the tripping of the REF protection, (DDB
446). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed in the “Monitor
Bit x” cells of the “COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
The REF settings can be found in the ‘SEF/REF PROT’N’ column and are shown
below:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
SEF/REF PROT'N
SEF, Wattmetric, Hi Z REF, Lo Z REF,
SEF/REF Options SEF
Lo Z REF + SEF, Lo Z REF + Watt
REF PROTECTION Sub Heading
ΙREF> k1 20% 0 20% 1%
ΙREF> k2 150% 0 150% 1%
ΙREF> Ιs1 0.2 Ιn A 0.05 Ιn A 1 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
ΙREF> Ιs2 1 Ιn A 0.1 Ιn A 1.5 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
ΙREF> Ιs 0.2 Ιn A 0.05 Ιn A 1 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A

Note that CT requirements for REF protection are included in section 4.


2.16.1 Low impedance biased differential REF protection
In a biased differential relay, the through current is measured and used to increase
the setting of the differential element. For heavy through faults, one CT in the
scheme can be expected to become more saturated than the other and hence
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 79/176

differential current can be produced. However, biasing will increase the relay setting
such that the resulting differential current is insufficient to cause operation of the
relay.
Figures 22 and 23 show the appropriate relay connections and operating
characteristic for the P340 relay applied for biased REF protection, respectively:

Ia
Ib
Ic

In
MiCOM
P343

P2170ENa

Figure 22: Relay connections for biased REF protection

I DIFF

Operate

k2

Restrain
IS1 k1

I S2 I BIAS
P2171ENa

Figure 23: Biased REF protection operating characteristic


P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 80/176 MiCOM P342, P343

As can be seen in Figure 22, the three line CTs are connected to the three phase CTs
in the normal manner. The neutral CT is then connected to the stator earth fault CT
input. These currents are then used internally to derive both a bias and a differential
current quantity for use by the low impedance biased differential REF protection.
The advantage of this method of connection is that the line and neutral CTs are not
differentially connected and so the neutral CT can also be used to drive the stator
earth fault protection. Also, no external equipment such as stabilising resistors or
metrosils are required, unlike the case with high impedance protection.
The formula used by the relay to calculate the required bias quantity is therefore as
follows:
Ιbias = {(Highest of Ιa, Ιb or Ιc) + (Ιneutral x Scaling Factor)} / 2
The reason for the scaling factor included on the neutral current is explained by
referring to Figure 24:

Phase CT ratio 1000/1


Phase A
Phase B
Phase C

Neutral CT ratio
200/1

IA
IB
IC

IN
MiCOM
IBIAS = (highest of IA , IB , IC ) + ( I N x scaling factor) P343
2

Neutral CT ratio 200


Where the scaling factor = = = 0.2
Phase CT ratio 1000

IDIFF = IA + IB + IC + (scaling factor x I N )


P2172ENa

Figure 24: Neutral scaling for biased REF protection


Where it is required that the neutral CT also drives the stator earth fault protection
element, it may be a requirement that the neutral CT has a lower ratio than the line
CTs in order to provide better earth fault sensitivity. The relay automatically scales
the level of neutral current used in the bias calculation by a factor equal to the ratio
of the neutral to line CT primary ratings to compensate for any mismatch.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 81/176

2.16.1.1Setting guidelines for low impedance biased REF protection


To select low impedance biased REF protection “SEF/REF Option” should be selected
to ‘Lo Z REF’. If REF protection is required to operate alongside sensitive earth fault
protection, “SEF/REF Option” should be selected to ‘Lo Z REF + SEF’ or ‘Lo Z REF +
Wattmet’ (if Wattmetric earth fault protection is required).
As can be seen from Figure 23, two bias settings are provided in the REF
characteristic of the P340. The “ΙREF> k1” level of bias is applied up to through
currents of “ΙREF> Ιs2”, which is normally set to the rated current of the machine.
“ΙREF> k1” should normally be set to 0% to give optimum sensitivity for internal
faults. However, if any differential spill current is present under normal conditions
due to CT mismatch, then “ΙREF> k1” may be increased accordingly, to compensate.
“ΙREF> k2” bias is applied for through currents above “ΙREF> Ιs2” and may typically
be set to 150% to ensure adequate restraint for external faults.
The neutral current scaling factor which automatically compensates for differences
between neutral and phase CT ratios relies upon the relay having been programmed
with the correct CT ratios. It must therefore be ensured that these CT ratios are
entered into the relay, in the “CT RATIOS” menu, in order for the scheme to operate
correctly.
The differential current setting “ΙREF> Ιs1” should typically be set to 5% of the limited
earth fault current level.
2.16.2 High impedance restricted earth fault protection
The high impedance principle is best explained by considering a differential scheme
where one CT is saturated for an external fault, as shown in Figure 25.
If the relay circuit is considered to be a very high impedance, the secondary current
produced by the healthy CT will flow through the saturated CT. If CT magnetising
impedance of the saturated CT is considered to be negligible, the maximum voltage
across the relay circuit will be equal to the secondary fault current multiplied by the
connected impedance, (RL3 + RL4 + RCT2).
The relay can be made stable for this maximum applied voltage by increasing the
overall impedance of the relay circuit, such that the resulting current through the relay
is less than its current setting. As the impedance of the relay input alone is relatively
low, a series connected external resistor is required. The value of this resistor, RST, is
calculated by the formula shown in Figure 25.
An additional non linear resistor, metrosil, may be required to limit the peak
secondary circuit voltage during internal fault conditions.
To ensure that the protection will operate quickly during an internal fault the CT’s
used to operate the protection must have a kneepoint voltage of at least 4Vs.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 82/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Healthy CT Saturated CT
Protected zone

Zm

R CT1 R CT2

R L1 If R L3

R ST
Vs

R L2 R
R L4

Voltage across relay circuit


Vs = KI f (R CT + 2R L ) - where K = 0.7

Stabilising resistor,R ST, limits spill current to Is (relay setting)


R ST = Vs
– RR
Is
IF = Maximum secondary through fault current
Where RR = Relay burden
RCT = Current transformer secondary winding resistance
RL = Resistance of a single lead from the relay to the current transformer
P0115ENf

Figure 25: Principle of high impedance differential protection

RST = Stabilising resistor


NLR = Non-linear resistance
(Metrosil)

NLR RST

MiCOM
P343
I SEF

P2174ENa

Figure 26: Relay connections for high impedance REF protection


Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 83/176

The necessary relay connections for high impedance REF are shown in Figure 26:
As can be seen from Figure 26, the high impedance protection uses an external
differential connection between the line CTs and neutral CT. The SEF input is then
connected to the differential circuit with a stabilising resistor in series.
2.16.2.1Setting guidelines for high impedance REF protection
From the “Sens E/F Options” cell, ‘Hi Z REF’ must be selected to enable High
Impedance REF protection. The only setting cell then visible is “ΙREF> Ιs”, which may
be programmed with the required differential current setting. This would typically be
set to give a primary operating current of either 30% of the minimum earth fault level
for a resistance earthed system or between 10 and 60% of rated current for a solidly
earthed system.
The primary operating current (Ιop) will be a function of the current transformer ratio,
the relay operating current (“ΙREF> Ιs”), the number of current transformers in
parallel with a relay element (n) and the magnetising current of each current
transformer (Ιe) at the stability voltage (Vs). This relationship can be expressed in
three ways:
1. To determine the maximum current transformer magnetising current to achieve
a specific primary operating current with a particular relay operating current.

1æ Ιop ö
Ιe < x
ç - Gen diff REF > Ιs1
÷
n ç CT ratio ÷
è ø
2. To determine the maximum relay current setting to achieve a specific primary
operating current with a given current transformer magnetising current.

æ Ιop ö
ç
ΙREF Ιs1 < ç
÷
- nΙe ÷
è CT ratio ø
3. To express the protection primary operating current for a particular relay
operating current and with a particular level of magnetising current.
Ιop = (CT ratio) x (ΙREF > Ιs1 + nΙe)
In order to achieve the required primary operating current with the current
transformers that are used, a current setting “ΙREF> Ιs” must be selected for the high
impedance element, as detailed in expression (ii) above. The setting of the stabilising
resistor (RST) must be calculated in the following manner, where the setting is a
function of the required stability voltage setting (VS) and the relay current setting
“ΙREF> Ιs”.

Vs 0.7 ΙF (RCT + 2RL)


RST = =
ΙREF > Ιs1 ΙREF > Ιs1
See Figure 25 for reference.
Note: The above equation assumes negligible relay impedance.
The stabilising resistor supplied is continuously adjustable up to its maximum
declared resistance.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 84/176 MiCOM P342, P343

USE OF “METROSIL” NON-LINEAR RESISTORS


Metrosils are used to limit the peak voltage developed by the current transformers
under internal fault conditions, to a value below the insulation level of the current
transformers, relay and interconnecting leads, which are normally able to withstand
3000V peak.
The following formulae should be used to estimate the peak transient voltage that
could be produced for an internal fault. The peak voltage produced during an
internal fault will be a function of the current transformer kneepoint voltage and the
prospective voltage that would be produced for an internal fault if current transformer
saturation did not occur. This prospective voltage will be a function of maximum
internal fault secondary current, the current transformer ratio, the current transformer
secondary winding resistance, the current transformer lead resistance to the common
point, the relay lead resistance and the stabilising resistor value.

Vp = 2 2 Vk ( Vf - Vk )

Vf = Ι'f (RCT + 2RL + RST)


where
Vp = peak voltage developed by the CT under internal fault conditions.
Vk = current transformer knee-point voltage.
Vf = maximum voltage that would be produced if CT saturation did not
occur.
Ι‘f = maximum internal secondary fault current.
RCT = current transformer secondary winding resistance.

RL = maximum lead burden from current transformer to relay.


RST = relay stabilising resistor.
When the value given by the formulae is greater than 3000V peak, metrosils should
be applied. They are connected across the relay circuit and serve the purpose of
shunting the secondary current output of the current transformer from the relay in
order to prevent very high secondary voltages.
Metrosils are externally mounted and take the form of annular discs. Their operating
characteristics follow the expression:
V = CΙ 0.25
where
V = Instantaneous voltage applied to the non-linear resistor (“metrosil”)
C = constant of the non-linear resistor (“metrosil”)
Ι = instantaneous current through the non-linear resistor (“metrosil”)
With a sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil, the RMS current would be
approximately 0.52x the peak current. This current value can be calculated as
follows:

æ Vs (rms) x 2 ö 4
Ι(rms) = 0.52 ç
ç ÷
÷
è C ø
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 85/176

where
Vs(rms) = rms value of the sinusoidal voltage applied across the metrosil.
This is due to the fact that the current waveform through the non-linear resistor
(“metrosil”) is not sinusoidal but appreciably distorted.
For satisfactory application of a non-linear resistor (“metrosil”), it’s characteristic
should be such that it complies with the following requirements:
1. At the relay voltage setting, the non-linear resistor (“metrosil”) current should be
as low as possible, but no greater than approximately 30mA rms for 1A current
transformers and approximately 100mA rms for 5A current transformers.
2. At the maximum secondary current, the non-linear resistor (“metrosil”) should
limit the voltage to 1500V rms or 2120V peak for 0.25 second. At higher relay
voltage settings, it is not always possible to limit the fault voltage to 500V rms,
so higher fault voltages may have to be tolerated.
The following tables show the typical Metrosil types that will be required, depending
on relay current rating, REF voltage setting etc.
Metrosil Units for Relays with a 1 Amp CT
The Metrosil units with 1 Amp CTs have been designed to comply with the following
restrictions:
1. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should less than 30mA rms
2. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit
the voltage to 1500V rms if possible.
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 1Amp CTs are as shown in the
following table:

Nominal
Relay Voltage Recommended Metrosil Type
Characteristic
Setting
C β Single Pole Relay Triple Pole Relay
Up to 125V rms 450 0.25 600A/S1/S256 600A/S3/1/S802
125 to 300V rms 900 0.25 600A/S1/S1088 600A/S3/1/S1195

Note: Single pole Metrosil units are normally supplied without


mounting brackets unless otherwise specified by the customer
Metrosil Units for Relays with a 5 Amp CT
These Metrosil units have been designed to comply with the following requirements:-
1. At the relay voltage setting, the Metrosil current should less than 100mA rms
(the actual maxium currents passed by the units shown below their type
description).
2. At the maximum secondary internal fault current the Metrosil unit should limit
the voltage to 1500V rms for 0.25secs. At the higher relay settings, it is not
possible to limit the fault voltage to 1500V rms hence higher fault voltages have
to be tolerated (indicated by *, **, ***).
The Metrosil units normally recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs and single pole
relays are as shown in the following table:
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 86/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Secondary Recommended METROSIL Type


internal
fault Relay Voltage Setting
current
Amps rms Up to 200V rms 250V rms 275V rms 300V rms
600A/S1/S1213 600A/S1/S1214 600A/S1/S1214 600A/S1/S1223
50A C = 540/640 C = 670/800 C =670/800 C = 740/870*
35mA rms 40mA rms 50mA rms 50mA rms
600A/S2/P/S1217 600A/S2/P/S1215 600A/S2/P/S1215 600A/S2/P/S1196
100A C = 470/540 C = 570/670 C = 570/670 C =620/740*
70mA rms 75mA rms 100mA rms 100mA rms
600A/S3/P/S1219 600A/S3/P/S1220 600A/S3/P/S1221 600A/S3/P/S1222
150A C = 430/500 C = 520/620 C = 570/670** C =620/740***
100mA rms 100mA rms 100mA rms 100mA rm

Note: *2400V peak **2200V peak ***2600V peak


In some situations single disc assemblies may be acceptable, contact AREVA T&D for
detailed applications.
1. The Metrosil units recommended for use with 5 Amp CTs can also be applied
for use with triple pole relays and consist of three single pole units mounted on
the same central stud but electrically insulated for each other. To order these
units please specify "Triple Pole Metrosil Type", followed by the single-pole type
reference.
2. Metrosil units for higher relay voltage settings and fault currents can be
supplied if required.
For further advice and guidance on selecting METROSILS please contact the
Applications department at AREVA T&D.

2.17 100% stator earth fault protection


As stated in sections 2.13 and 2.14, standard residual current or residual overvoltage
protection elements can provide earth fault protection for 95% of the generator stator
winding. Earth faults in the final 5% of the winding will result in such a low fault
current or such a small imbalance in voltage that conventional protection cannot be
relied upon to detect the fault. In most applications this limitation is accepted due to
the low probability of a fault occurring in the 5% of the stator winding closest to the
star point, where the voltage to earth is lowest. However, for large generators 100%
stator earth fault protection is commonly specified to cover all winding earth faults.
Faults close to the star point can occur as a consequence of mechanical damage
such as creepage of the conductors and loosening of bolts.
Most generators will produce third harmonic voltage to some degree due to non
linearities in the magnetic circuits of the generator design. Under normal operating
conditions the distribution of the third harmonic voltage along the stator windings
corresponds to Figure 27a. It can be seen that the maxima occur at the star point N
and the terminal T. The values increase with generator load. For a stator earth fault
at the star point, Figure 27b, the amplitude of the third harmonic in the voltage at the
terminals is approximately doubled both when the generator is off load prior the fault
(U’TE) and when it is fully loaded (U”TE). The same third harmonic values can be
measured in the star point voltages U’NE and U”NE for an earth fault at the generator
terminals, Figure 27c.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 87/176

a) U’’TE
G
U’TE
N T 0
N T
50% 100%
U’NE m

U’’NE

b) U’’TE
G
U’TE
N T 0 T
N
50% 100%
m

c)

G 0 50% 100%
N T N

U’NE
m
U’’NE
P2175ENa

Figure 27: Distribution of the 3rd harmonic component along the stator
winding of a large generator, (a) normal operation, (b) stator
earth fault at the star point (c), stator earth fault at the
terminals
m = relative number of turns
To detect faults in the last 5% of the generator winding, the P343 relay is provided
with a third harmonic undervoltage and overvoltage element. These, together with
the residual overvoltage or stator earth fault protection elements, will provide
protection for faults over the complete winding.
The third harmonic neutral under voltage element is applicable when the neutral
voltage measurement is available at the neutral end of the generator. It is supervised
by a three-phase under voltage element, which inhibits the protection when all the
phase-phase voltages at the generator terminal are below the threshold, to prevent
operation when the machine is dead. Interlocking may also be required to prevent
false operation during certain conditions. For example, some machines do not
produce substantial third harmonic voltage until they are loaded. In this case, the
power supervision elements (active, reactive and apparent power) could be used to
detect load to prevent false tripping under no load conditions. These power
thresholds can be individually enabled and disabled and the setting range is from 2-
100%Pn.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 88/176 MiCOM P342, P343

For applications where the neutral voltage measurement can only be obtained at the
generator terminals, from a broken delta VT for example, the under voltage
technique cannot be applied. Therefore, the third harmonic neutral over voltage
element can be used for this application. The blocking features of the under voltage
and power elements are not required for the 3rd harmonic neutral over voltage
element.
Note: The relay can only select 3rd harmonic neutral under voltage or
3rd harmonic neutral over voltage, but not both.
The logic diagrams of the two protection schemes are shown in Figure 28.

VN 3rd Harmonic <

Vab<

100% Stator EF Start


Vbc< &

Vca<

& Time delay 100% Stator EF Trip

P 3ph <

Q 3ph <

S 3ph <

Third harmonic neutral under voltage scheme

Note: 3Ph W, 3ph VAR and 3ph VA inhibits can be individually disabled.

100% Stator EF Start

VN 3rd Harmonic < Time delay 100% Stator EF Trip

Third harmonic neutral over voltage scheme

P1253ENa

Figure 28: 100% Stator earth fault protection block diagram


A normal level of third harmonic voltage of 1% is sufficient to ensure that third
harmonic undervoltage or overvoltage and residual overvoltage protection functions
will overlap hence providing 100% coverage for earth faults on the stator winding. In
general, third harmonic undervoltage protection alone can provide coverage for
faults on 30% of the generator winding.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 89/176

The 3rd harmonic undervoltage element operates from the same input as the neutral
voltage displacement protection and must be supplied from a VT connected in the
generator earth connection as shown in Figure 29. The 3rd harmonic overvoltage
element operates from the neutral voltage measurement at the generator terminals,
via an open-delta VT, for example as shown in Figure 29.
For applications where parallel machines are directly connected to the busbars
discrimination of an earth fault between the machines usually can not be achieved.
For applications where machines are connected to the busbars via a delta/star
transformer the delta winding blocks the 3rd harmonic currents from other machines
so correct discrimination can be achieved for earth faults.

2
Va
Vb
Vc

Vn

1 Measured from earth impedance MiCOM


P343
2 Measured from broken delta VT
P2176ENa

Figure 29: Connection for 3rd harmonic undervoltage and overvoltage


for 100% stator earth fault protection
DDB signals are available to indicate the start and trip of the protection, (Start: DDB
621, Trip: DDB 416). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed to be viewed
in the “Monitor Bit x” cells of the “COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
Setting ranges for the 100% stator earth fault third harmonic undervoltage protection
element are shown in the following table:
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 90/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
Group 1: 100% EF
Disabled, VN3H< Enabled,
100% St EF Status Enabled
VN3H> Enabled
1V 0.3V 20V 0.1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
100% St EF VN3H<
4V 1.2V 80V 0.4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

VN3H< Delay 5s 0s 100 s 0.01 s


80V 30V 120V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
V<Inhibit set
320V 120V 480V 4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

P<Inhibit Disabled Enabled, Disabled


4 x Ιn W 4 x Ιn W 200 x Ιn W 0.5 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
P<Inhibit set
16 x Ιn W 16 x Ιn W 800 x Ιn W 2 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

Q<Inhibit Disabled Enabled, Disabled


4 x Ιn W 4 x Ιn W 200 x Ιn W 0.5 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
Q<Inhibit set
16 x Ιn W 16 x Ιn W 800 x Ιn W 2 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

S<Inhibit Disabled Enabled, Disabled


4 x Ιn W 4 x Ιn W 200 x Ιn W 0.5 x Ιn W
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
S<Inhibit set
16 x Ιn W 16 x Ιn W 800 x Ιn W 2 x Ιn W
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)
1V 0.3V 20V 0.1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
100% St EF VN3H>
4V 1.2V 80V 0.4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

VN3H> Delay 5s 0s 100 s 0.01 s

2.17.1 Setting guidelines for 100% stator earth fault protection


The 100% stator earth fault protection element can be selected by setting the
“100% St EF Status” cell to ‘Enabled’.
The third harmonic undervoltage threshold, “100% St EF VN3H<”, must be set below
the level of third harmonic voltage present under normal conditions. This voltage can
be determined by viewing the “VN 3rd Harmonic” cell in the “MEASUREMENTS 3”
menu. A typical value for this threshold could be 0.5V.
The third harmonic overrvoltage threshold, “100% St EF VN3H>”, must be set above
the level of third harmonic voltage present under normal conditions. This voltage can
be determined by viewing the “VN 3rd Harmonic” cell in the “MEASUREMENTS 3”
menu. A typical value for this threshold could be 1V.
A time delay for these elements can be set in the “VN3H< Delay and VN3H> Delay”
cells.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 91/176

The terminal voltage interlock threshold, used to prevent operation of the element
when the machine is not running, “100% St EF V<Inh”, should typically be set to 80%
of machine rated voltage.
The power interlock thresholds, used to prevent operation of the element until there is
sufficient load current, “P<Inhibit set, Q<Inhibit set, S<Inhibit”, should be enabled if
required to prevent operation under no load conditions. One or more of the
thresholds can be used as an interlock. They should be set during commissioning by
increasing the load current until the 3rd harmonic undervoltage element is reset and
setting the power thresholds above the measured power values. The power values
can be determined by viewing the “3 phase Watts, 3 phase VArs, 3 phase VA” cells
in the “MEASUREMENTS 2” menu.
Note: Other earth fault protection (residual overvoltage or current
operated stator earth fault protection) must also be enabled to
provide coverage for earth faults across the complete stator
winding.

2.18 Overfluxing protection


Overfluxing or overexcitation of a generator, or transformer connected to the
terminals of a generator, can occur if the ratio of voltage to frequency exceeds certain
limits. High voltage or low frequency, causing a rise in the V/Hz ratio, will produce
high flux densities in the magnetic core of the machine or transformer. This could
cause the core of the generator or transformer to saturate and stray flux to be
induced in un-laminated components that have not been designed to carry flux. The
resulting eddy currents in solid components (e.g. core bolts and clamps) and end of
core laminations can cause rapid overheating and damage.
Overfluxing is most likely to occur during machine start up or shut down whilst the
generator is not connected to the system. Failures in the automatic control of the
excitation system, or errors in the manual control of the machine field circuit, could
allow excessive voltage to be generated. It is also possible for overfluxing to occur
during parallel operation when the generator has been synchronised with the local
supply network. Sudden loss of load could cause an overvoltage condition, in such
circumstances, if the generator excitation system does not respond correctly.
The P342/343 relays provide a two stage overfluxing element. The element
measures the ratio of voltage, (VAB), to frequency, V/Hz, and will operate when this
ratio exceeds the setting. One stage can be set to operate with a definite time or
inverse time delay, this stage can be used to provide the protection trip output. The
other stage has a definite time delay characteristic and can be used as an alarm
stage to indicate unhealthy conditions before damage has occurred to the machine.
DDB signals are also available to indicate the start and trip of the protection, (Start:
DDB 636, Trip: DDB 429). A further DDB ‘V/Hz Alarm’ signal is generated from the
overfluxing alarm stage (DDB 308). The state of the DDB signals can be
programmed to be viewed in the “Monitor Bit x” cells of the “COMMISSION TESTS”
column in the relay.
Setting ranges for the Overfluxing protection element are shown in the following
table:
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 92/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1: VOLTS/HZ
V/f Alarm Status Enabled Enabled, Disabled
2.31 V/Hz 1.5 V/Hz 3.5 V/Hz 0.01 V/Hz
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
V/f Alarm Set
9.24 V/Hz 6 V/Hz 14 V/Hz 0.04 V/Hz
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

V/f Alarm Delay 0s 0s 100 s 0.01 s


V/f Trip Func DT Disabled, DT, IDMT
2.42 V/Hz 1.5 V/Hz 3.5 V/Hz 0.01 V/Hz
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
V/f Trip Setting
9.24 V/Hz 6 V/Hz 14 V/Hz 0.04 V/Hz
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

V/f Trip TMS 1 1 63 1


V/f Trip Delay 1s 0s 100 s 0.01 s

The inverse time characteristic has the following formula:

0.18 * TMS
t = 0.8 +
(M - 1)2
V/f
Where M =
( V/f Trip Setting )

V = measured voltage
F = measured frequency
2.18.1 Setting guidelines for overfluxing protection
The overfluxing protection element trip stage can be selected by setting the “V/f Trip
Func” cell to the required time delay characteristic; ‘DT’ for definite time operation,
‘IDMT’, for inverse time operation. The overfluxing protection trip stage is disabled if
“V/f Trip Func” is set to ‘Disabled’.
The overfluxing protection alarm stage may be Enabled/Disabled in the “V/f Alarm
Status” cell.
In general, a generator or generator transformer overflux condition will occur if the
V/Hz ratio exceeds 1.05p.u. i.e. a 5% overvoltage condition at rated frequency.
The element is set in terms of the actual ratio of voltage to frequency; the overfluxing
threshold setting, “V/f Trip Setting”, can therefore be calculated as shown below:
where
− the VT secondary voltage at rated primary volts is 110V
− the rated frequency is 50Hz
The overfluxing alarm stage threshold setting, “V/f Alarm Set”, can be set lower than
the trip stage setting to provide an indication that abnormal conditions are present
and alert an operator to adjust system parameters accordingly.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 93/176

The time delay settings should be chosen to match the withstand characteristics of the
protected generator or generator/transformer. If an inverse time characteristic is
selected, the time multiplier setting, “V/f Trip TMS”, should be chosen so the
operating characteristic closely matches the withstand characteristic of the generator
or generator/transformer. If a definite time setting is chosen for the trip stage the
time delay is set in the “V/f Trip Delay” cell. The alarm stage time delay is set in the
“V/f Alarm Delay” cell.
Reference should be made to manufacturers withstand characteristics before
formulating these settings.
2.19 Dead machine/unintentional energisation at standstill protection
Accidental energisation of a generator when the machine is not running can cause
severe damage to the machine. If the breaker is closed, when the machine is at
standstill, the generator will begin to act as an induction motor with the surface of the
rotor core and the rotor winding slot wedges acting as the rotor current conductors.
This abnormal current in the rotor can cause arcing between components, e.g. slot
wedge to core, and results in rapid overheating and damage.
To provide fast protection for this condition, the P343 relay provides an instantaneous
overcurrent element that is gated with a three phase undervoltage detector. The
scheme logic of this function is shown in Figure 30.
The element is enabled when the machine is not running, i.e. not generating any
voltage, or when the breaker is open. Therefore the element can have a low current
setting, resulting in high speed operation when required. For the element to operate
correctly the relay voltage input must be from a machine side VT; busbar VTs cannot
be used.

50

& Trip
27
tPU
& tDO
VTS

50 = instantaneous overcurrent detector


27 = 3 phase undervoltage detector
VTS = VT fail output from voltage transformer supervision logic
P2177ENa

Figure 30: Fixed scheme logic for unintentional energisation of standstill


protection
Setting ranges for the Dead Machine/Unintentional Energisation protection element
are shown in the following table:
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 94/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
DEAD MACHINE
Dead Mach Status Enabled Enabled, Disabled
Dead Mach Ι> 0.1 Ιn A 0.08 Ιn A 4 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
80 V 10V 120V 1V
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
Dead Mach V<
320V 40V 480V 4V
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

Dead Mach tPU 5s 0s 10 s 0.1 s


Dead Mach tDO 0s 0s 10 s 0.1 s

2.19.1 Setting guidelines for dead machine protection


The dead machine protection element can be selected by setting the
“Dead Mach Status” cell to ‘Enabled’.
The overcurrent threshold, “Dead Mach Ι>”, can be set to less than full load current
as the element will not be enabled during normal machine operation. A setting of
10% of full load current can typically be used.
The undervoltage threshold, “Dead Mach V<”, should typically be set at 85% of the
nominal voltage to ensure that the element is enabled when the machine is not
running.
The pick-up time delay, “Dead Mach tPU”, which provides a small time delay to
prevent initialisation of the element during system faults, should typically be set to 5s,
or at least in excess of the protection clearance time for a close up phase to phase
fault.
The drop off time delay, “Dead Mach tDO”, ensures that the element remains
initialised following accidental closure of the circuit breaker, when the undervoltage
detector could reset. A delay of 500ms will ensure that the element can operate
when required.

2.20 Resistive temperature device (RTD) thermal protection


Prolonged overloading of generators may cause their windings to overheat, resulting
in premature ageing of the insulation, or in extreme cases, insulation failure. Worn
or unlubricated bearings can also generate localised heating within the bearing
housing. To protect against any general or localised overheating, the P343 relay has
the ability to accept inputs from up to 10 – 3 wire Type A PT100 resistive temperature
sensing devices (RTD). These are connected as shown in Figure 31 below.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 95/176

3 wire PT100 RTD 2 wire PT100 RTD

RTD 1 RTD 1

RTD 2 RTD 2

RTD 10 RTD 10
MiCOM P343 MiCOM P343
P2178ENa

Figure 31: Connection for RTD thermal probes


Such probes can be strategically placed in areas of the machine which are
susceptible to overheating or heat damage. Where power transformers are located
close to the protected machine, certain RTD probes could be assigned to provide
overtemperature protection for the transformer(s). This could protect against winding
hot spot overheating or overtemperature in the bulk of the insulating oil.
Typically a PT100 RTD probe can measure temperature within the range –40° to
+300°C. The resistance of these devices changes with temperature, at 0°C they have
a resistance of 100Ω. The temperature at each probe location can be determined by
the relay, and is available for:
• Temperature monitoring, displayed locally, or remotely via the relay
communications.
• Alarming, should a temperature threshold be exceeded for longer than a set time
delay.
• Tripping, should a temperature threshold be exceeded for longer than a set time
delay.
Should the measured resistance be outside of the permitted range, an RTD failure
alarm will be raised, indicating an open or short circuit RTD input. These conditions
are signalled via DDB signals available within the PSL (DDB 310-314) and are also
shown in the measurements 3 menu.
DDB signals are also available to indicate the alarm and trip of the each RTD,
(Alarm: DDB 743-752 Trip: DDB 430-439). The state of the DDB signals can be
programmed to be viewed in the “Monitor Bit x” cells of the “COMMISSION TESTS”
column in the relay.
Note that direct temperature measurement can provide more reliable thermal
protection than devices which use a thermal replica energised from phase current.
The latter is susceptible to inaccuracies in time constants used by the replica model,
and also inaccuracies due to the variation in ambient temperature.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 96/176 MiCOM P342, P343

See the Installation section (P34x/EN IN) of the Operating Guide, for
recommendations on RTD connections and cables.
Setting ranges for the RTD Thermal protection are shown in the following table:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
RTD PROTECTION
Bit 0 - Select RTD 1
Bit 1 - Select RTD 2
Bit 2 - Select RTD 3
Bit 3 - Select RTD 4
Bit 4 - Select RTD 5
Select RTD 0000000000
Bit 5 - Select RTD 6
Bit 6 - Select RTD 7
Bit 7 - Select RTD 8
Bit 8 - Select RTD 9
Bit 9 - Select RTD 10
RTD x Alarm Set 80°C 0°C 200°C 1°C
RTD x Alarm Dly 10s 0 100s 1s
RTD x Trip Set 85°C 0°C 200°C 1°C
RTD x Trip Dly 1s 0 100s 1s

Where x = 1 to 10
2.20.1 Setting guidelines for RTD thermal protection
Each RTD can be enabled by setting the relevant bit in “Select RTD”. For example if
Select RTD is set to 0000000111, then RTD1, RTD2 and RTD3 would be enabled and
the associated settings would be visible in the menu.
The temperature setting for the alarm stage for each RTD can be set in the
“RTD x Alarm Set” cells and the alarm time delay in the “RTD x Alarm Dly” cell.
The temperature setting for the trip stage for each RTD can be set in the
“RTD x Trip Set” cells and the trip stage time delay in the “RTD x Trip Dly” cell.
Typical operating temperatures for protected plant are given in the table below.
These are provided as a guide, actual figures MUST be obtained from the equipment
manufacturers:

Short Term Overloading


Parameter Typical Service Temperature
at Full Load
Bearing
60 – 80°C, depending on the type of
temperature 60 – 80°C+
bearing.
generators
A temperature gradient
from winding
Top oil
temperature is usually
temperature of 80°C (50 – 60°C above ambient).
assumed, such that top
transformers
oil RTDs can provide
winding protection.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 97/176

Short Term Overloading


Parameter Typical Service Temperature
at Full Load
Winding hot 98°C for normal ageing of
140°C+ during
spot insulation. Cyclic overloading might
emergencies
temperature give

Table showing typical operating temperatures of plant.

2.21 P342 pole slipping protection


A generator might pole slip, or fall out-of-step with other power system sources, in the
event of failed or abnormally weak excitation or as a result of delayed system fault
clearance. This can be further aggravated when there is a weak (high reactance)
transmission link between the generator and the rest of the power system.
The process of pole slipping following excitation failure is discussed in section 2.10.
The P342 field failure protection function should respond to such situations to give a
time delayed trip. The electrical/mechanical power/torque oscillations following
excitation failure may be relatively gentle. If pole slipping occurs with maximum
excitation (generator emf >2.0 p.u.), the power/torque oscillations and power system
voltage fluctuations following loss of stability can be much more severe. For large
machines there may be a requirement to provide protection to trip the generator
under such circumstances, to prevent plant damage or remove the disturbance to the
power system.
Pole slipping protection is frequently requested for relatively small generators running
in parallel with strong public supplies. This might be where a co-generator runs in
parallel with the distribution system of a public utility, which may be a relatively strong
source, but where high-speed protection for distribution system faults is not provided.
The delayed clearance of system faults may pose a stability threat for the
co-generation plant.
With the P342 relay there is no specific pole slipping protection function, but a
number of the protection functions provided can offer a method of ensuring delayed
tripping, if appropriately applied.
2.21.1 Reverse power protection
During a pole slipping event the machine will cyclically absorb and export power as
the machine rotor slips with respect to the power system. Therefore, any power
element selected to operate from reverse power can pick-up during the pole slip.
Reverse power protection tripping is usually time delayed and this time delay will
prevent the element from tripping during a pole slip. However, each power
protection stage in the P342 relay has an associated delay on drop off, or reset, timer
(“Power1 DO Timer”, “Power2 DO Timer”). This can be used to prevent resetting of
the reverse power stage during a pole slipping event, leading to eventual tripping if
the event continues.
2.21.2 System back-up protection function
In a similar manner to the power protection function, the system back-up protection
function would operate cyclically with the periodic high levels of stator current that
would arise during pole slipping. These peaks of current may also be accompanied
by coincident drops in generator terminal voltage, if the generator is near the
electrical centre of swinging. As discussed in section 2.5, the system back-up
protection function is provided with a timer characteristic timer-hold setting, “V Dep
OC tRESET”, “Z< tRESET”, which can be used to ensure that the protection function
will respond to cyclic operation during pole slipping. In a similar manner, some
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 98/176 MiCOM P342, P343

operators of small, unmanned hydro-generators have relied on the integrating action


of induction disc overcurrent protection to ensure disconnection of a persistently
slipping machine.
2.21.3 Field failure protection function
Slightly faster pole slipping protection might be assured in many applications by
appropriately applying the field failure protection function and associated scheme
logic timers.
Where the power system source impedance is relatively small in relation to the
impedance of a generator during pole slipping, the electrical centre of slipping is
likely to lie within the generator. This would be ‘behind’ the relaying point, as
defined by the location of the voltage transformer. Such a situation is likely to exist
for co-generation schemes and might also be the case for some fairly large utility
generation schemes connected to a densely interconnected transmission system. The
dynamic impedance of the generator during pole slipping (Xg) should lie between the
average value of the direct and quadrature axis transient reactance’s (Xd’ and Xq’)
and the average value of the direct/quadrature axis synchronous reactance’s (Xd and
Xq). However neither extreme would actually be reached. During low-slip periods of
a pole slip cycle, the synchronous reactance’s would apply, whereas the transient
impedance’s would apply during periods of relatively high slip.
Figure 32 illustrates how the impedance seen at the generator protection relaying
point may vary during pole slipping for a relatively small co-generator directly
connected to a relatively strong distribution power system. It should be noted that the
behaviour of a generator during pole slipping may be further complicated by
intervention of an automatic voltage regulator and by the response of any speed-
dependent excitation source (e.g. shaft-driven exciter).

Eg Es

Zg Ir Zs

Base MVA = 15 MVA R


Xd = 130%
Xd' = 34%
Xs = 4.3% (18.37kA at 11kV)

jX
Eg/Es = 2.8 (>max)
Xs R

Eg/Es = 1.2
0.5Xd'
Eg/Es = 1.0

Xg Diameter = Xd

Case: 15 MVA GT Eg/Es = 0.8


Condition: Xg = Xd

Eg/Es = 0.19 (<min)

P2179ENa

Figure 32: Field failure protection function characteristics (small


co-generator)
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 99/176

It can be seen from the simple analysis of Figure 32 that the field failure protection
function may respond to the variation in impedance seen during pole slipping for
some applications. However the impedance characteristic offset might have to be
reduced to guarantee response for the theoretical lower range of dynamic generator
impedance (Xg). The lack of the normally recommended characteristic offset should
not pose any problem of unwanted protection function response during the normal
range of operation of a machine (with rotor angles kept below 90°), but a longer trip
time delay might be required to prevent unwanted protection response during stable
power swings caused by system disturbances. The most marginal condition to detect
is where the generator is fully loaded, with maximum excitation applied. Even if the
impedance characteristic offset is not reduced, impedance element pick up should
still occur during part of a slip cycle, when the machine impedance is high and where
the rotor angle is high. More careful consideration might have to be given to the
reset time delay setting (“FFail1 DO Timer”) required in such circumstances.
During pole slipping, any operation of the field failure protection function will be
cyclic and so it would be necessary to set the reset time delay (“FFail1 DO Timer”) to
be longer than the time for which the impedance seen will cyclically lie outside the
field failure characteristic. A typical delay setting might be 0.6s, to cover slip
frequencies in excess of 2Hz. When the timer “FFail1 DO Timer” is set, the field
failure trip time delay (“FFail1 Time Delay”) must be increased to be greater than the
setting of “FFail1 DO Timer”.
Sometimes pole slipping protection must be guaranteed, especially in the case of a
larger utility generator connected to a relatively weak transmission system. In such
applications, and where fast tripping is required, or where the pole slipping response
of field failure protection function is otherwise uncertain, a stand-alone protection
scheme, such as used in the P343 should be used. The delayed detection and
tripping offered by the P340 Field Failure protection function should, however, be
adequate for many applications.
For further details regarding setting of field failure protection for time delayed pole
slipping detection, contact AREVA T&D.

2.22 P343 pole slipping protection


2.22.1 Introduction
Sudden changes or shocks in an electrical power system such as line switching
operations, large jumps in load or faults may lead to power system oscillations which
appear as regular variations of the currents, voltages and angular separation
between systems. This phenomenon is referred to as a power swing.
In a recoverable situation, the power swing will decay and finally disappear in a few
seconds. Synchronism will be regained and the power system will recover to stable
operation. In a non-recoverable situation, the power swing becomes so severe that
synchronism is lost between the generator and system, a condition recognised as out-
of-step or pole slipping from the view of a generator. If such a loss of synchronism
does occur, it is imperative to separate the asynchronous areas from the rest of the
system before generators are damaged or before a widespread outage can occur.
Pole slipping occurs when the prime mover input power of a generator exceeds the
electrical power absorbed by the system. The condition results from the mismatch in
the operating frequencies of two or more machines. During pole slipping the
machine produces alternatively generating and motoring torque of high magnitudes
with corresponding current peaks and voltage dips.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 100/176 MiCOM P342, P343

During normal system operation the following events can lead to the generator pole
slipping condition.
• The occurrence of an abnormality such as:
A transient system fault.
The failure of the generator governor.
The failure of the generator excitation control (asynchronous running).
Reconnection of an 'islanded' system without synchronisation.
• The transient change in the system requirements of real and reactive power
components sets the generator rotor to oscillate around the new equilibrium point.
• If the initial transient disturbance is severe enough and for a sufficiently long
duration the rotor swing may exceed the maximum stability limit causing the
generator to slip poles.
• For a weak system switching transients may also result in pole slipping.
Nowadays, with the advent of EHV systems, large conductor-cooled generators and
with the expansion of the transmission system, system and generator impedances
have changed considerably. System impedances have decreased while generator
and step-up transformer impedances have increased. This trend has resulted in the
impedance centre during a power swing appearing inside the step-up transformer or
inside the generator, which is generally out of the protection zone of conventional
out-of-step relays installed in the system. Therefore, separate relaying should be
applied to protect the machine against pole slipping.
Relays employing impedance-measuring elements for the detection of the pole
slipping condition utilise the generator terminal voltage and current signals as inputs.
During a generator pole slip the system voltage and current go through slip frequency
variations of extremely high amplitude. These variations are reflective of the
corresponding apparent changes in the generator terminal impedance. The relay will
be able to detect the condition only after the generator has actually slipped poles.
The conventional technique employs measurement of generator terminal impedance
to determine pole slipping conditions. Directional and blinder elements are used
together with a mho element to obtain the desired relay characteristics.
2.22.2 Loss of synchronism characteristics
Before any further discussion, it is necessary to have a brief review of the loss of
synchronism characteristic which is used in the analysis of generator pole slipping.
A common method used to detect a loss of synchronism is to analyse the apparent
impedance as measured at the generator terminals. According to the simplified
representation of a machine and system shown in Figure 33, the impedance
presented to the relay ZR (installed at point A) under a loss of synchronism
(recoverable power swing or pole slipping) condition can be described by equation1:
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 101/176

P1254ENa

Where:

EG = the generator terminal voltage

ZG = the generator impedance

ZT = the impedance of step-up transform

ZS = the impedance of the power system connected to the generation unit

ES = the system voltage

(ZG + ZT + ZS) n (n - cosδ - j sinδ)


ZR = - ZG --------------------- Equation 1
2 2
(n - cosδ) + sin δ

Where:

EG
n = E = magnitude ratio of generator terminal voltage to the system voltage
S

ĖG
δ = arg Ė = rotor angle by which generator terminal voltage leads system voltage
S

Figure 33: Simplified two machine system


The apparent impedance as viewed at the generator terminals (Point A) will vary as a
function of the ratio n and the angular separation δ between the machine and the
system. With the aid of the R/X impedance diagram, a set of impedance loci
representing a loss of synchronism along with the system impedances are plotted as
shown in Figure 34.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 102/176 MiCOM P342, P343

P1255ENa

Figure 34: Apparent impedance loci viewed at the generator terminal


(point A)
It has been well proven that the locus of the impedance as measured at the generator
terminals (point A) is either a straight line or circular depending on whether EG and
ES are of equal or different magnitudes. The impedance locus is a straight line which
is a perpendicular bisector of the total system impedance between G and S when EG
/ ES = 1. When EG / ES > 1, the circular locus is located above the bisector with its
centre on the extension of the total impedance line GS. When EG / ES < 1, the
impedance locus is situated below the bisector with its centre on the extension of the
total impedance line SG.
The diameters and centres of these circles are a function of the voltage ratio EG / ES
and the total impedance, as shown in Figure 34. It is not always necessary to go into
the detail of plotting the circular characteristic to identify the loss of synchronism. In
most cases, it is only necessary to simply draw the perpendicular bisector to the total
impedance line to locate the point on the system where the swing will traverse which
is sufficiently accurate for relaying purposes.
It should be noted that the angle formed by the intersection of lines SL and GL on line
ML is the angle of separation δ between the generator and system. During an
unrecoverable power swing, δ oscillates between 0 and 360 degrees according to the
points L and M on the bisector. There are several points of interest along line LM.
The first is the point where the separation reaches 90 degrees. If we draw a circle
whose diameter is the total impedance, line GS, the intersection of the circle and line
LM will be the point where δ=90 degrees. If the swing locus does not go beyond this
point the system will be able to regain synchronism. However, if the locus reaches
120 degrees or more, the system is not likely to recover. When the impedance locus
intersects the total impedance, line GS, the generator and system are 180 degree out
of phase, which is known as the electrical centre or impedance centre of the system.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 103/176

As the locus crosses this point and enters the left hand side of the line GS, the
generator and system will become more in phase. A slip cycle has been completed
when the locus reaches the point where the swing started.
Note that the following assumptions have been made in this simplified approach:
• EG/ ES is assumed to remain constant during the swing.

• Initial transients and effects of generator saliency are neglected.


• Transient changes in impedance due to a fault or clearance of fault have
subsided.
• Effect of regulator and governor are neglected.
2.22.3 Generator pole slipping characteristics
As noted previously, generator and system impedances have changed in the past few
decades. In many instances, the electrical centre or impedance centre lies within the
generator or step-up transformer. Also, for most machine loadings, the equivalent
internal machine voltage will be less than 1.0 per unit and so less than the equivalent
system voltage. Therefore, the pole slipping characteristics viewed at the generator
terminals will generally follow the loss of synchronism characteristic where the voltage
ratio EG/ ES < 1 which is below the impedance centre. See the locus EG/ ES < 1 in
Figure 34 for example.
In reality the impedance loci as viewed at the generator terminals may be distorted
compared with the ideal loci. The following discussion illustrates the impact on the
pole slipping characteristic when other factors are taken into account.
2.22.3.1What happens if EG / ES has different values less than one (1)?
For a given total impedance, as the voltage ratio decreases below one (1), the circle
also decreases in diameter and the centre moves closer to the origin. Therefore, a
decreased internal voltage results in the impedance loci having a smaller diameter.
The radius and circular centre calculations using the equation shown in Figure 34
shows these trends.
During a fault, if the voltage regulator is out of service the internal machine voltage
will decay and will remain at the resulting lower level after the fault is cleared. If the
effects of the voltage regulator during a fault is included, the impedance locus circles
are larger in diameter but will still be in the generator zone.
2.22.3.2What happens if different system impedances are applied?
System impedance also plays a part in the determination of the circle diameter and
location. If the system impedance decreases, the locus decreases in diameter and
moves closer to the origin.
It should be noted that the impedance centre of the system is not a fixed point due to
the variation of system impedance under different operating conditions. Therefore,
the impedance loci should be determined at the maximum and minimum systems
impedances.
2.22.3.3How to determine the generator reactance during a pole slipping condition?
Since the generator reactance plays a role in the determination of the pole slipping
impedance locus, it is crucial to use proper reactance values when we plot these loci.
At zero slip XG is equal to the synchronous reactance (Xd), and at 100% slip XG is
equal to sub-transient reactance (X’’d). The impedance in a typical case has been
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 104/176 MiCOM P342, P343

shown to be equal to the transient reactance X’d at 50% slip, and to 2X’d with a slip
of 0.33%. As most slips are likely to be experienced at low asynchronous speed
running, perhaps 1%, it is sufficient to take the value XG=2X’d when assessing pole
slipping.
2.22.3.4How to determine the slip rate of pole slipping?
The rate of slip between the generator and power system is a function of the
accelerating torque and inertia of the systems. In general, the slip rate can not be
obtained analytically. It is recommended to determine the slip rate by transient
stability studies where the angular excursion of the system is plotted versus time.
Although the slip rate will not be constant during a pole slipping condition, it is
reasonable to assume a constant for the first half slip cycle which is of interest to the
relay. For the tandem generator, it is in the range of 250 to 400 degrees/sec. Whilst
for the cross compound units, the average initial slip will be 400 to 800 degrees/sec.
2.22.4 General requirements for pole slipping protection
Having got some ideas about the characteristics of pole slipping, general rules for
pole slipping protection could be obtained as listed below:
• On the whole, the pole slipping protection must remain stable under all fault
conditions and recoverable power swings other than a genuine non-recoverable
pole slipping condition.
• For a particular loss of synchronism condition, if the impedance centre happens to
lie in the generator/step-up transformer zone, it is recommended the generator
be tripped without delay, preferably during the first half slip cycle of a loss of
synchronism condition. If the centre lies outside of the zone, then the pole
slipping relay should not trip immediately, but should allow time for tripping to
take place at some other location external to the power station. Only if this
should fail must the pole slipping protection respond in stage II, i.e. after a pre-set
number of slips, to isolate the generator.
• In order to reduce the damage to the generator during a pole slip, it must reliably
detect the first and subsequent slips of a synchronous machine within a wide
range (slipping frequency 0.1% to 10% of fn).
• The tripping should avoid the point where the generator and the system are 180
degrees out-of-phase, when the currents reach the maximum value and subject
the circuit breaker to a maximum recovery voltage during interruption.
• Since pole slipping is essentially a balanced three-phase phenomenon, only a
single phase element need be implemented in the protection relay.
2.22.5 Lenticular scheme
2.22.5.1Characteristic
The P343 pole slipping characteristic consists of three parts as shown in the R/X
diagram of Figure 35. The first part is the lenticular (lens) characteristic. The second
is a straight line referred to as the blinder that bisects the lens and divides the
impedance plane into the left and right halves. The third is a reactance line which is
perpendicular to the blinder.
The inclination of the lens and the blinder, θ, is determined by the angle of the total
system impedance. The equivalent impedance of the system and the step-up
transformer determines the forward reach of the lens, ZA, whereas the generator’s
transient reactance determines the reverse reach ZB. The width of the lens is varied
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 105/176

by the setting of the angle α. A reactance line, perpendicular to the axis of the lens,
is used to distinguish whether the impedance centre of the swing is located in the
power system or in the generator. It is set by the value of Zc along the axis of the
lens, as shown in Figure 35. The reactance line splits the lens into Zone 1 (below the
line) and Zone 2 (above the line).
For the pole slipping protection element the minimum operating current is 2% Ιn and
the minimum voltage is 1 V for 100/120 and 4V for 380/480 V ratings. The pole
slipping protection operates from the ΙA and VA current and voltage inputs to the
relay.

Blinder
X
ZA
ZC
Reactance Line

α
θ
R

Lens

ZB

P1256ENa

Figure 35: Pole slipping protection using blinder and lenticular


characteristic
2.22.5.2Generating and motoring modes
When a generator is out of step with the system, the impedance locus is expected to
traverse from right to left across the lens and the blinder. However, if the generator is
running as a motor, as in the pumping mode of a pump storage generator, the
impedance locus is expected to swing from the left to the right. A setting is provided
to determine whether the protection operates in a generating mode or in a motoring
mode or both.
If the protection is running in the generating mode, the impedance is expected to be
at the right hand side of the lens under normal load conditions. During a pole slip
the impedance locus traverses across the right half and the left half of the lens. The
minimum time spent in each half of the lens can be set with timers T1 for the right
hand side and T2 for the left hand side. The relay registers a pole slipping cycle
when the locus finally leaves the lens at the opposite end.
If the protection is running in the motoring mode, the impedance is expected to be at
the left hand side of the lens under normal load conditions. During a pole slip the
impedance locus traverses across the left half and the right half of the lens, again
spending at least the time T1 and T2 respectively in each half and leaves the lens at
the opposite end.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 106/176 MiCOM P342, P343

2.22.6 Pole slipping protection operation


The pole slipping protection algorithm is executed 4 times per power system cycle to
obtain accurate timing of the impedance locus traversing the lens.
2.22.6.1State machine

(Reset_Timer Time Out)


Actions are the same as State Machine Entry
State Machine Entry Reset Trip_ Signals;
No Signal Condition* Reset Start_ Signals;
Reset Flag_Zone1;
Actions are the same as
Reset All Counters;
State Machine Entry
Reset All Timers;

VTS-FAST-BLOCK
Actions are the same as Zm = R1 or R3
State Machine Entry
Zm = R4
IF(Mode_Both)
IDLE Flag_Mode=!Flag_Mode;

Zm = R1 .
Reset Start_Signals;
Reset Flag_Zone1; Zm = R2
Start Timer1
IF(Any Trip_Signal)
Reset Counters;
Reset Trip_Signals; Zm = R1 or R4
Reset Timer1
Zm = R3 but Timer1<T1
Reset Timer1

Zm = R1 or R2
Reset Flag_Zone1; Zm = R2
Zm = R4 but Timer2 < T2 Reset Timer2;
Reset Flag_Zone1;
Zm = R4 or R2 or R3 DETECTED Reset Timer2; START

(Zm = R4) & Timer2 > T2)


If (C2==0) Start Reset_Timer;
C2++;
Set Zone2_Start; (Zm = R3) & Timer1 > T1)
if(C2>=Count2) Set Zone2_Trip ; Flag_Zone1=Zone1Pu();
If (Flag_Zone1) Reset Timer1;
C1++; Start Timer2;
Set Zone1_Start;
if(C1>=Count1) Set Zone1_Trip;
Reset Timer2;
CONFIRM

*No Signal Condition


(VA<1V or I <0.02A)
Zm = R3

P0421ENa

Figure 36: State machine


Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 107/176

X Blinder

Zone2
Reactance Line

Zone1

R4 R3 R2 R1
R

Lens

R represents Region

P1257ENa

Figure 37: Regions and zones definition (generating mode)


Note, that the regions shown in Figure 37 are independent of the reactance line
although it is shown in the same diagram (zones are independent of the lens and the
blinder).
In order to track the impedance locus under a pole slipping condition, a ‘State
Machine’ approach is adopted. There are 4 states ‘Idle’, ‘Start’, ‘Confirm’ and
‘Detected’ used to describe the movement of the impedance locus. Each state has
one entrance and one or several exit terminals depending on the state. Exit terminals
fall into two categories: ‘normal exit’ and ‘abnormal exit’. There is only one ‘normal
exit’ which leads to the next state when the impedance locus moves into the desired
region. Unexpected impedance movement will result in a return to the ‘Idle’ State or
will be ignored depending on where the impedance stays.
• Idle: This is the normal state when the measured impedance is the normal load
impedance. The impedance locus of any pole slip should start from here. In this
state the ‘normal exit’ is when the measured impedance moves from R1 to R2.
Timer 1, which is used to time the duration of the impedance locus remaining in
R2, is started when this change is detected.
If the impedance locus moves to R4 and ‘Both’ is selected in the ‘Mode’ setting, a flag
(Flag_Mode) indicating the generator operating mode is toggled to indicate
‘Motoring’. Note, this does not cause a state transition, Refer to section 2.22.6.4 for
details about the ‘Flag_Mode’.
In this state impedance locus changes to R3 will be ignored.
• Start: This is the state when the impedance locus stays inside R2. Normal exit is
taken only if the impedance has stayed in R2 longer than the T1 time delay and
moves to R3. Three actions are carried out along with this transition: check the
operating status of the reactance line, start Timer 2 and reset Timer 1. The
purpose of checking the operating status of the reactance line at this point is to
decide whether the pole slip belongs to Zone1 or Zone2. A flag (Flag_Zone1) is
latched if Zone1 picks up, which is used later on to differentiate whether counters
are incremented for pole slips in zone1 or zone2. Theoretically, this flag is
generated at the point where the impedance locus intersects the blinder, which is
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 108/176 MiCOM P342, P343

called the electrical centre. Timer2 is used to time the duration of the impedance
locus remaining in R3;
If the impedance moves to R1 or R4 or moves to R3 but stays in R2 less than T1,
the state machine will be reset to the ‘Idle’ state. Timer 1 is reset when the
impedance leaves R2 via these abnormal exits. Besides pole slipping, a stable
power swing or fault occurrence could enter this state as well. The state machine
is designed to differentiate these conditions.
• Confirm: This state is reached when the impedance has crossed the blinder and
arrived at Region3. Further confirmation is required to see if the impedance stays
for at least time T2 and is bound to leave for R4. Otherwise, an abnormal exit
will reset the state machine to the ‘Idle’ state. Actions on abnormal transition
include resetting Flag_Zone1 and Timer 2. Note, that as soon as the impedance
locus leaves the lens through the normal exit counters of different zones will be
updated, depending on the Flag_Zone1 and if the pole slip has completed the
pre-set slip cycles setting a trip signal is given. If Flag_Zone1 is set then the Zone
1 counter (C1) will be incremented. Zone 2 is the backup pole slipping stage and
so all pole slips increment the Zone2 counter (C2).
The Reset_Timer and reset Timer 2 are started when the normal transition occurs.
The Reset_Timer is started only when the first pole slip is detected and will be reset in
its time delay (see Reset_Timer time out actions in the state machine diagram).
• Detected: This is the stage where the impedance locus has to complete it’s full
cycle although the counter is updated in the previous confirm stage. Abnormal
movements of the impedance locus in this stage will be ignored and this state is
kept until the impedance moves to R1 indicating completion of a pole slip cycle.
If a trip signal has not been given for this pole slip, only the Start_Signals and
Flag_Zone1 are reset in preparation for the next pole slip cycle. However, if a trip
signal has been issued, then the Trip_Signals and the counters are both reset.
In general, once the measured impedance has traversed all the ‘States’ in the normal
exit sequence, a pole slip is confirmed. For a stable power swing or fault condition
the measured impedance will not satisfy all the exit transition criteria.
The ‘State Machine’ diagram has been simplified to present an overview of how to
detect pole slipping. There are also several supporting protection functions which are
explained in the following sections.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 109/176

2.22.6.2Protection functions and logic structure

Flag_Zone1

poleslz_RegionCal

& R1

poleslz_Zone1Pu( )
IAi,IAj Zone1 Start

poleslz_BlinderPu()

&
(Generating Mode - Pick-up zone left of blinder; Zone1
Motoring Mode - Pick-up zone right of blinder) Zone 1 Trip
Count++

VAi, VAj & R2

poleslz_LensPu() Genuine
Pole Slipping
Pole Slipping State Machine
Zone2 Start

Zone2

&
Zone 2 Trip
Count++
R3

& R4

P1258ENa

Figure 38: Logic structure of pole slipping module


There are several protection functions called in sequence in the pole slipping
detection, as shown in the above diagram, they are
• poleslz_Zone1Pu
• poleslz_LensPu
• poleslz_BlinderPu
• poleslz_RegionCal
Function poleslz_Zone1Pu(), poleslz_LensPu() and Poleslz_BlinderPu() calculate
whether the Reactance Line, Lens and Blinder characteristics have picked up
respectively. At the end of each function, DDBs associated with each characteristic
are mapped according to the elements operating status. Outputs from
poleslz_LensPu() and Poleslz_BlinderPu() feed into the poleslz_RegionCal() to
determine in which ‘Region’ the locus is present. After the region and zone have
been determined the state machine can be evaluated.
For the purpose of discriminating the pole slipping zone, Zone1 or Zone2, it is
important to check the result of poleslz_Zone1Pu() when the impedance locus leaves
the ‘Start’ state by the ‘normal exit’. A flag is latched if Zone1 picks up, which is used
to identify the pole slipping zone later on.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 110/176 MiCOM P342, P343

2.22.6.3Motoring mode
When the ‘pole slip mode’ setting is set to ‘motoring’ the protection algorithm is
switched to motoring mode. Motoring mode is essentially the same for generating
mode except that the pick-up zone for the blinder is changed from the left hand side
to the right hand side, as shown in Figure 39. This requires changes to the blinder
algorithm in poleslz_BlinderPu().
This automatically changes the region definition on the impedance plane. For
example, under normal motoring conditions, both the blinder, which picks up from
the left hand side for motoring, and the lens will not be picked up. Therefore, the
poleslz_RegionCal() will output a region number R1.

X Blinder
Pick-Up Zone
Zone2
Reactance Line

Zone1

R1 R2 R3 R4
R

Lens

R represents Region

P1257ENb

Figure 39: Regions and zones definition (motoring mode)


2.22.6.4Generating and motoring mode
For a pump storage generator, its operation can switch from generating mode to
motoring mode and vice versa. Therefore, a facility is provided for the protection to
detect the normal running mode of the machine (generating or motoring) and to
perform pole slipping detection in either mode.
This facility is enabled when the ‘pole slip mode’ setting is set to ‘Both’.
Also, when a generator is running at low load, <30% load, due to the presence of
heavy system damping during a fault the generator can slow down and result in a
motor like slip (negative slip). To detect pole slips for this condition then the ‘pole slip
mode’ should be set to ‘Both’.
In the state machine, a flag called ‘Flag_Mode’ is used to deal with the mode
change. During the initialisation, the flag is set to ‘generating’, with the pick up zone
of the blinder on the left-hand side. If the impedance traverses the blinder from R1 to
R4 in the ‘Idle’ state, the ‘Flag_Mode’ is toggled to ‘Motoring’. This causes the
blinder pick-up zone to change from the left-hand side to right-hand side, thus
automatically redefining the regions numbering on the impedance plane, as
discussed previously. Subsequent crossing of the blinder from R1 to R4 in the ‘Idle’
mode will cause the ‘Flag_Mode’ to toggle, thus tracking the normal running
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 111/176

operation of the pump storage generator, irrespective of whether it is in generating or


motoring mode.
2.22.7 Setting guidelines for pole slipping protection

X Z
A
Left-Len Right-Len
A B
Reactance Line Zs
Power Swing In System

Zc

Q
N SXT
a M
P
Ang
T R
2 T
1
Pole Slipping
Characteristic
XG
Stable Power Swing

Z
B
Blinder

P2180ENa

Figure 40: Lenticular scheme characteristic


1. Forward reach and reverse reach ZA, ZB.

As noted previously, the best setting for the lens is when the point ZA and ZB
coincide with the system impedance (ZT+ZS) and the generator reactance (XG),
see Figure 34. The angle α of the lens corresponds in this case to the angle α
between the emfs EG and ES at which the impedance enters the lens, see
Figure 34.
As most slips are likely to be experienced at low asynchronous speed running,
perhaps 1%, it is sufficient to take the value XG=2X’d when assessing pole
slipping, see section 2.22.3.3.
Where the values of ZS and the generator reactance XG vary, ZAand ZB should
be set according to the corresponding maximum values.
Large differences between EG and ES, see Figure 34 and sections 2.22.3.1,
can cause the loci of impedance circle to becomes smaller and smaller.
Therefore, there is the possibility of the circular loci of the pole slip crossing the
blinder and lens twice with large ZA and ZB settings producing a long lens.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 112/176 MiCOM P342, P343

However, the state machine logic will prevent 2 pole slips from being counted
for this condition and so there is no maximum limit to the ZA and ZB settings.

2. Lens inclination θ
The inclination of the lens should be kept consistent with the system impedance
angle, vector GS in Figure 34.
3. angle α.
The width of the lens is proportional to the angle α. Two factors should be
considered to determine the proper angle α:
• Under all conditions, the load impedance remains safely outside the lens.
• The tripping point, limited by the left side of the lens for generating should
be the point when the angular separation between the system and the
generator is small. Although CBs are rated to break twice the system
voltage i.e. when the machines are in anti-phase, it is recommended that
the trip command is issued at the smallest phase shift possible. For this
reason the angle α should be chosen as small as possible (setting range is
90o to 150o).
The construction of the lens can be seen in Figure 40, ZR is the maximum width of
half the lens. The minimum resistive component of the load should be at least 130%
of the reach of the lens, ZR, in the transverse direction. ZR can be determined by
calculation as follows:

ZR = (ZA + ZB) /2 x tan (90o - α/2)

For a given minimal load resistance RLmin the minimum permissible setting of α is:

αmin = 180o – 2 x tan-1 (1.54 x RLmin / ( ZA + ZB))

RLmin is then at least 1.3 ZR

Note: The minimum relay setting for α is 90o as this defines the largest
size of the characteristic, a circle.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 113/176

X Blinder
Pick-Up Zone
Zone2
Reactance Line

Zone1

R1 R2 R3 R4
R

Lens

R represents Region

P1256ENb

Figure 41: Pole slipping protection using blinder and lenticular


characteristic
4. Reactance setting
The value of Zc
The value of Zc determines the distance of the reactance line from the origin.
The reactance line provides a means of discrimination of the pole slipping
within the generator or power swing within the HV power system. It should be
set to encompass the step-up transformer and generator reactance with
sufficient margin.
5. Pole slipping counters
Counters are available for both Zone1 and Zone2 to count the number of pole
slip cycles before the trip signal is issued. A user-settable reset timer is
available to reset the counters when the pole slipping condition is cleared by
other relays in the system.
6. Timers T1 and T2
During a pole slip the impedance locus traverses across the lens spending at
least time T1 in region 2 and time T2 in region 3, see Figures 37 and 39. From
simulation testing it has been proved that pole slips up to 10 Hz can be
detected with an angle α setting of 120o and time settings of 15 ms for T1 and
T2. Therefore, it is recommended that T1 and T2 be set to 15 ms.
7. Reset timer
The reset time should be set longer than the maximum expected time for the
machine to go through the set number of pole slips for zone1 or zone2 . The
reset time is required to reset the counters for pole slips that are cleared by
external protection. For example if the Z2 counter is set to operate after 2 pole
slips in the power system and after a count of 1 the condition is cleared by
other protection in the system the counters will need to be reset to zero.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 114/176 MiCOM P342, P343

8. Pole slip mode


When a generator is out of step with the system, the impedance locus is
expected to traverse from right to left across the lens and the blinder. However,
if the generator is running as a motor, as in the pumping mode of a pump
storage generator, the impedance locus is expected to swing from the left to the
right. A pole slip mode setting is provided to determine whether the protection
operates in a ‘generating’ mode or in a ‘motoring’ mode or ‘both’.
For a pump storage generator, its operation can switch from generating mode
to motoring mode and vice versa. Therefore, a facility is provided for the
protection to detect the normal running mode of the machine, generating or
motoring and to perform pole slipping detection in either mode. This facility is
enabled when the pole slip mode setting is set to ‘Both’.
Also, when a generator is running at low load, <30% load, due to the presence
of heavy system damping during a fault the generator can slow down and
result in a motor like slip (negative slip). To detect pole slips for low load and
normal load conditions then the pole slip mode should be set to ‘Both’.
2.22.7.1Settings

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1 POLE SLIPPING
Pslip Function Enabled Disabled, Enabled
Pole Slip Mode Generating Motoring, Generating, Both
0.5/Ιn Ω 350/Ιn Ω 0.5/Ιn Ω
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
Pslip Za Forward 100/Ιn Ω
2/Ιn Ω 1400/Ιn Ω 2/Ιn Ω
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

0.5/Ιn Ω 350/Ιn Ω 0.5/Ιn Ω


(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
Pslip Zb Reverse 150/In Ω
2/Ιn Ω 1400/Ιn Ω 2/Ιn Ω
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

Lens Angle 120° 90° 150° 1°


PSlip Timer T1 0.015 s 0s 1s 0.005 s
PSlip Timer T2 0.015 s 0s 1s 0.005 s
Blinder Angle 75° 20° 90° 1°
0.5/Ιn Ω 350/Ιn Ω 0.5/Ιn Ω
(Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V) (Vn=100/120V)
PSlip Zc 50/In Ω
2/Ιn Ω 1400/Ιn Ω 2/Ιn Ω
(Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V) (Vn=380/480V)

Zone1 Slip Count 1 1 20 1


Zone2 Slip Count 2 1 20 1
PSlip Reset Time 30 s 0s 100 s 0.01 s
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 115/176

2.22.7.2DDB output
Apart from the Zone1 and Zone2 start and trip signals, each measuring element also
outputs its ‘status’ onto the DDB. These signals can be used during commissioning
testing to determine the shape and the accuracy of the characteristics.

DDB Name Description


DDB 497 PSlipz Z1 Trip Pole slipping tripped in Zone1
DDB 498 PSlipz Z2 Trip Pole slipping tripped in Zone2
DDB 645 PSlipz Z1 Start Pole slipping detected in Zone1
DDB 646 PSlipz Z2 Start Pole slipping detected in Zone2
DDB 647 PSlipz LensStart Measured Impedance is within the Lens
DDB 648 Pslipz BlindStrt Impedance lies left hand side of Blinder
Impedance lies in Zone 1 distinguished by Reactance
DDB 649 PSlipz ReactStrt
line

2.22.7.3Pole slipping setting examples


The impedances in the P343 can be set in terms of primary or secondary quantities,
however, for simplicity all the impedance values used in the examples are in primary
quantities.
2.22.8 Example calculation

360 MVA 360 MVA X1 = 0.2


X’d = 0.25 XT = 0.15
18 kV
P1259ENa

Figure 42: Example system configuration


Data of the generator and step up transformer:
Base power Pn = 360 MVA
Base voltage Vn = 18000 kV
Min load resistance RLmin = 0.77 Ω

System impedance angle ≥ 80°


Generator impedance 0.25 pu
Transformer impedance 0.15 pu
System impedance 0.2 pu
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 116/176 MiCOM P342, P343

The location of the pole slipping relay is at the generator terminals. The direction of
ZA and Zc is towards the step up transformer and the rest of the system. The
reactance line is required to distinguish between power swings with electrical centres
within the generator/transformer zone and those outside.
The base impedance is
Zbase = Vn2/Pn = 182/360 = 0.9 Ω

ZA = (XT + X1) Zbase = (0.15+0.2) x 0.9 = 0.315 Ω

ZB = 2X’d x Zbase = 2 x 0.25 x 0.9= 0.45 Ω

Zc is set to 90% of the transformer reactance


Zc = 0.9 x (XT) Zbase = 0.9 x 0.15 x 0.9 = 0.122 Ω

The minimum suitable angle α which defines the lens limit in relation to the minimum
load resistance is
αmin = 180° – 2 x tan-1 (1.54 x RLmin / ( ZA + ZB))

αmin = 180° – 2 x tan-1 (1.54 x 0.77 / ( 0.315 + 0.45))

αmin = 65.7o
The minimum setting for α on the relay is 90° so this is the setting used.
T1 and T2 are set to 15 ms and θ is set to the system impedance angle of 80°

2.23 Thermal overload protection


2.23.1 Introduction
Overloads can result in stator temperature rises which exceed the thermal limit of the
winding insulation. Empirical results suggest that the life of insulation is
approximately halved for each 10°C rise in temperature above the rated value.
However, the life of insulation is not wholly dependent upon the rise in temperature
but on the time the insulation is maintained at this elevated temperature. Due to the
relatively large heat storage capacity of an electrical machine, infrequent overloads of
short duration may not damage the machine. However, sustained overloads of a few
percent may result in premature ageing and failure of insulation.
The physical and electrical complexity of generator construction result in a complex
thermal relationship. It is not therefore possible to create an accurate mathematical
model of the true thermal characteristics of the machine.
However, if a generator is considered to be a homogeneous body, developing heat
internally at a constant rate and dissipating heat at a rate directly proportional to its
temperature rise, it can be shown that the temperature at any instant is given by:
T = Tmax (1-e-t/τ)
Where
Tmax = final steady state temperature
τ = heating time constant
This assumes a thermal equilibrium in the form:
Heat developed = Heat stored + Heat dissipated
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 117/176

Temperature rise is proportional to the current squared:


T = K ΙR2 (1-e-t/τ)
T = Tmax = K ΙR2 if t = ∞
Where
ΙR = the continuous current level which would produce a temperature Tmax in
the generator
For an overload current of ‘Ι’ the temperature is given by:
T = KΙ2 (1-e-t/τ)
For a machine not to exceed Tmax, the rated temperature, then the time ‘t’ for which
the machine can withstand the current ‘Ι’ can be shown to be given by:
Tmax = K ΙR2 = KΙ2 (1-e-t/τ)
t = τ. Loge (1/(1-(ΙR/Ι)2))
An overload protection element should therefore satisfy the above relationship. The
value of ΙR may be the full load current or a percentage of it depending on the design.
As previously stated it is an oversimplification to regard a generator as an
homogeneous body. The temperature rise of different parts or even of various points
in the same part may be very uneven. However, it is reasonable to consider that the
current-time relationship follows an inverse characteristic. A more accurate
representation of the thermal state of the machine can be obtained through the use
of temperature monitoring devices (RTDs) which target specific areas. Also, for short
time overloads the application of RTDs and overcurrent protection can provide better
protection. Note, that the thermal model does not compensate for the effects of
ambient temperature change. So if there is an unusually high ambient temperature
or if the machine cooling is blocked RTDs will also provide better protection.
2.23.2 Thermal replica
The P343 relay models the time-current thermal characteristic of a generator by
internally generating a thermal replica of the machine. The thermal overload
protection can be selectively enabled or disabled. The positive and negative
sequence components of the generator current are measured independently and are
combined together to form an equivalent current, Ιeq, which is supplied to the replica
circuit. The heating effect in the thermal replica is produced by Ιeq2 and therefore
takes into account the heating effect due to both positive and negative sequence
components of current.
Unbalanced phase currents will cause additional rotor heating that may not be
accounted for by some thermal protection relays based on the measured current only.
Unbalanced loading results in the flow of positive and negative sequence current
components. Load unbalance can arise as a result of single phase loading, non-
linear loads (involving power electronics or arc furnaces, etc.), uncleared or repetitive
asymmetric faults, fuse operation, single-pole tripping and reclosing on transmission
systems, broken overhead line conductors and asymmetric failures of switching
devices. Any negative phase sequence component of stator current will set up a
reverse-rotating component of stator flux that passes the rotor at twice synchronous
speed. Such a flux component will induce double frequency eddy currents in the
rotor, which can cause overheating of the rotor body, main rotor windings, damper
windings etc. This extra heating is not accounted for in the thermal limit curves
supplied by the generator manufacturer as these curves assume positive sequence
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 118/176 MiCOM P342, P343

currents only that come from a perfectly balanced supply and generator design. The
P340 thermal model may be biased to reflect the additional heating that is caused by
negative sequence current when the machine is running. This biasing is done by
creating an equivalent heating current rather than simply using the phase current.
The M factor is a constant that relates negative sequence rotor resistance to positive
sequence rotor resistance. If an M factor of 0 is used the unbalance biasing is
disabled and the overload curve will time out against the measured generator
positive sequence current. Note, the P340 also includes a negative sequence
overcurrent protection function based on Ι22t specifically for thermal protection of the
rotor.
The equivalent current for operation of the overload protection is in accordance with
the following expression:
Ιeq = √(Ι12 + MΙ22)
where
Ι1 = positive sequence current
Ι2 = negative sequence current
M = a user settable constant proportional to the thermal capacity of the
machine
As previously described, the temperature of a generator will rise exponentially with
increasing current. Similarly, when the current decreases, the temperature also
decreases in a similar manner. Therefore, in order to achieve close sustained
overload protection, the P343 relay incorporates a wide range of thermal time
constants for heating and cooling.
Furthermore, the thermal withstand capability of the generator is affected by heating
in the winding prior to the overload. The thermal replica is designed to take account
the extremes of zero pre-fault current, known as the ‘cold’ condition and the full rated
pre-fault current, known as the ‘hot’ condition. With no pre-fault current the relay will
be operating on the ‘cold curve’. When a generator is or has been running at full
load prior to an overload the ‘hot curve’ is applicable. Therefore, during normal
operation the relay will be operating between these two limits.
The following equation is used to calculate the trip time for a given current. Note that
the relay will trip at a value corresponding to 100% of it’s thermal state.
The thermal time characteristic is given by:
t = τ loge (Ιeq2 – ΙP2)/(Ιeq2 – (Thermal Ι>)2
where
t = time to trip, following application of the overload current, Ι
τ = heating time constant of the protected plant
Ιeq = equivalent current
Thermal Ι> = relay setting current
ΙP = steady state pre-load current before application of the overload
The time to trip varies depending on the load current carried before application of the
overload, i.e. whether the overload was applied from 'hot” or “cold”.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 119/176

The thermal time constant characteristic may be rewritten as:


exp(–t/τ) = (θ – 1) / (θ – θ p)
where
θ = Ιeq2/(Thermal Ι>)2
and
θp = Ιp2/ (Thermal Ι>)2
where θ is the thermal state and is θp the prefault thermal state.
Note, that the thermal model does not compensate for the effects of ambient
temperature change.
t = τ. Loge (K2-A2/(K2-1))
Where
K = Ιeq/Thermal Ι>
A = ΙP /Thermal Ι>
The Thermal state of the machine can be viewed in the “Thermal Overload” cell in
the “MEASUREMENTS 3” column. The thermal state can be reset by selecting ‘Yes’ in
the “Reset ThermalO/L” cell in “Measurements 3”. Alternatively the thermal state can
be reset by energising DDB 390 “Reset ThermalO/L” via the relay PSL.
A DDB signal “Thermal O/L Trip” is also available to indicate tripping of the element
(DDB 499). A further DDB signal “Thermal Alarm” is generated from the thermal
alarm stage (DDB 399). The state of the DDB signal can be programmed to be
viewed in the “Monitor Bit x” cells of the “COMMISSION TESTS” column in the relay.
Setting ranges for the thermal overload element are shown in the following table:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1:
THERMAL OVERLOAD
ΙThermal Enabled Disabled, Enabled
Thermal Ι> 1.2 Ιn A 0.5 Ιn A 2.5 Ιn A 0.01 Ιn A
Thermal Alarm 90% 20% 100% 1%
T-heating 60 mins 1 min 200 mins 1 min
T-cooling 60 mins 1 min 200 mins 1 min
M Factor 0 0 10 1

2.23.3 Setting guidelines


The current setting is calculated as:
Thermal Trip = Permissible continuous loading of the plant item/CT ratio.
The heating thermal time constant should be chosen so that the overload curve is
always below the thermal limits provided by the manufacturer. This will ensure that
the machine is tripped before the thermal limit is reached. The relay setting,
"T-heating", is in minutes.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 120/176 MiCOM P342, P343

The cooling thermal time constant should be provided by the manufacturer.


However, unless otherwise specified, the cooling time constant, "T-cooling", setting
should be set equal to the main heating time constant setting, T-heating”. The
cooling time constant is applied when the machine is running and the load current is
decreasing. It is therefore practical to assume the cooling time constant is similar to
the heating time constant if information is not available from the manufacturer.
When the machine is not turning the machine will normally cool significantly slower
than when the rotor is turning. The relay setting, "T-cooling", is in minutes.
An alarm can be raised on reaching a thermal state corresponding to a percentage
of the trip threshold. A typical setting might be "Thermal Alarm" = 70% of thermal
capacity. The thermal alarm could also be used to prevent restarting of the generator
until the alarm level resets. For this application a typical setting may be 20%.
The “M Factor” is used to increase the influence of negative sequence current on the
thermal replica protection due to unbalanced currents. If it is required to account for
the heating effect of unbalanced currents then this factor should be set equal to the
ratio of negative phase sequence rotor resistance to positive sequence rotor resistance
at rated speed. When an exact setting can not be calculated a setting of 3 should be
used. This is a typical setting and will suffice for the majority of applications. If an M
factor of 0 is used the unbalance biasing is disabled and the overload curve will time
out against the measured generator positive sequence current. Note, the extra
heating caused by unbalanced phase currents is not accounted for in the thermal
limit curves supplied by the generator manufacturer as these curves assume positive
sequence currents only that come from a perfectly balanced supply and generator
design, so the default setting is 0.

2.24 Circuit breaker failure protection


Following inception of a fault one or more main protection devices will operate and
issue a trip output to the circuit breaker(s) associated with the faulted circuit.
Operation of the circuit breaker is essential to isolate the fault, and prevent
damage/further damage to the power system. For transmission/sub-transmssion
systems, slow fault clearance can also threaten system stability. It is therefore
common practice to install circuit breaker failure protection, which monitors that the
circuit breaker has opened within a reasonable time. If the fault current has not been
interrupted following a set time delay from circuit breaker trip initiation, breaker
failure protection (CBF) will operate.
CBF operation can be used to back-trip upstream circuit breakers to ensure that the
fault is isolated correctly. CBF operation can also reset all start output contacts,
ensuring that any blocks asserted on upstream protection are removed.
2.24.1 Breaker failure protection configurations
The circuit breaker failure protection incorporates two timers, ‘CB Fail 1 Timer’ and
‘CB Fail 2 Timer’, allowing configuration for the following scenarios:
• Simple CBF, where only ‘CB Fail 1 Timer’ is enabled. For any protection trip, the
‘CB Fail 1 Timer’ is started, and normally reset when the circuit breaker opens to
isolate the fault. If breaker opening is not detected, ‘CB Fail 1 Timer’ times out
and closes an output contact assigned to breaker fail (using the programmable
scheme logic). This contact is used to backtrip upstream switchgear, generally
tripping all infeeds connected to the same busbar section.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 121/176

• A re-tripping scheme, plus delayed backtripping. Here, ‘CB Fail 1 Timer’ is used
to route a trip to a second trip circuit of the same circuit breaker. This requires
duplicated circuit breaker trip coils, and is known as re-tripping. Should re-
tripping fail to open the circuit breaker, a backtrip may be issued following an
additional time delay. The backtrip uses ‘CB Fail 2 Timer’, which is also started at
the instant of the initial protection element trip.
CBF elements ‘CB Fail 1 Timer’ and ‘CB Fail 2 Timer’ can be configured to operate
for trips triggered by protection elements within the relay or via an external protection
trip. The latter is acheived by allocating one of the relay opto-isolated inputs to
‘External Trip’ using the programmable scheme logic.
2.24.2 Reset mechanisms for breaker fail timers
It is common practice to use low set undercurrent elements in protection relays to
indicate that circuit breaker poles have interrupted the fault or load current, as
required. This covers the following situations:
• Where circuit breaker auxiliary contacts are defective, or cannot be relied upon to
definitely indicate that the breaker has tripped.
• Where a circuit breaker has started to open but has become jammed. This may
result in continued arcing at the primary contacts, with an additional arcing
resistance in the fault current path. Should this resistance severely limit fault
current, the initiating protection element may reset. Thus, reset of the element
may not give a reliable indication that the circuit breaker has opened fully.
For any protection function requiring current to operate, the relay uses operation of
undercurrent elements (Ι<) to detect that the necessary circuit breaker poles have
tripped and reset the CB fail timers. However, the undercurrent elements may not be
reliable methods of resetting circuit breaker fail in all applications. For example:
• Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage or
under/overfrequency, derives measurements from a line connected voltage
transformer. Here, Ι< only gives a reliable reset method if the protected circuit
would always have load current flowing. Detecting drop-off of the initiating
protection element might be a more reliable method.
• Where non-current operated protection, such as under/overvoltage or
under/overfrequency, derives measurements from a busbar connected voltage
transformer. Again using Ι< would rely upon the feeder normally being loaded.
Also, tripping the circuit breaker may not remove the initiating condition from the
busbar, and hence drop-off of the protection element may not occur. In such
cases, the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts may give the best reset
method.
Resetting of the CBF is possible from a breaker open indication (from the relay’s pole
dead logic) or from a protection reset. In these cases resetting is only allowed
provided the undercurrent elements have also reset. The resetting options are
summarised in the following table:
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 122/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Initiation (Menu Selectable) CB Fail Timer Reset Mechanism


The resetting mechanism is fixed.
[ΙA< operates] &
Current based protection -
[ΙB< operates] &
(e.g. 50/51/46/21/87..)
[ΙC< operates] &
[ΙN< operates]
The resetting mechanism is fixed.
Sensitive earth fault element
[ΙSEF< operates]
Three options are available.
The user can select from the following
options.
Non-current based protection [All Ι< and ΙN< elements operate]
(e.g. 27/59/81/32L..) [Protection element reset] AND
[All Ι< and ΙN< elements operate]
CB open (all 3 poles) AND
[All Ι< and ΙN< elements operate]
Three options are available. The user can
select any or all of the options.
[All Ι< and ΙN< elements operate]
External protection [External trip reset] AND
[All Ι< and ΙN< elements operate]
CB open (all 3 poles) AND[All Ι< and ΙN<
elements operate]

The selection in the relay menu is grouped as follows:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
CB FAIL + Ι<
Breaker Fail {Sub-Heading}
CB Fail 1 Status Enabled Enabled, Disabled
CB Fail 1 Timer 0.2s 0s 10s 0.01s
CB Fail 2 Status Disabled Enabled, Disabled
CB Fail 2 Timer 0.4s 0s 10s 0.01s
CBF Non Ι Reset CB Open & Ι< Ι< Only, CB Open & Ι<, Prot Reset & Ι<
CBF Ext Reset CB Open & Ι< Ι< Only, CB Open & Ι<, Prot Reset & Ι<
Under Current {Sub-Heading}
Ι< Current Set 0.1Ιn 0.02Ιn 3.2Ιn 0.01Ιn
ΙN< Current Set 0.1Ιn 0.02Ιn 3.2Ιn 0.01Ιn
ΙSEF< Current 0.02Ιn 0.001Ιn 0.8Ιn 0.00025Ιn
Blocked O/C {Sub-Heading}
Remove Ι> Start Disabled Enabled, Disabled
Remove ΙN> Start Disabled Enabled, Disabled
Ι< Current Input IA-1, IB-1, IC-1 IA-1, IB-1, IC-1 / IA-2, IB-2, IC-2
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 123/176

The ‘Remove Ι> Start‘ and ‘Remove ΙN> Start‘ settings are used to remove starts
issued from the overcurrent and earth elements respectively following a breaker fail
time out (DDB 628 Ι> Block Start, DDB 629 ΙN/SEF > Blk Start). The start is
removed when the cell is set to Enabled. This can be used to remove a blocking
signal from an upstream relay to back trip and clear the fault.
2.24.3 Typical settings
2.24.3.1Breaker fail timer settings
Typical timer settings to use are as follows:

Typical Delay for 2½


CB Fail Reset Mechanism tBF Time Delay
Cycle Circuit Breaker
CB interrupting time +
element reset time (max.) 50 + 50 + 10 + 50 =
Initiating element reset
+ error in tBF timer + 160 ms
safety margin
CB auxiliary contacts
opening/closing time 50 + 10 + 50 =
CB open
(max) + error in tBF 110 ms
timer + safety margin
CB interrupting time+
undercurrent element 50 + 12 + 50 =
Undercurrent elements
(max.) + safety margin 112 ms
operating time

Note that all CB Fail resetting involves the operation of the undercurrent elements.
Where element reset or CB open resetting is used the undercurrent time setting
should still be used if this proves to be the worst case.
The examples above consider direct tripping of a 2½ cycle circuit breaker. Note that
where auxiliary tripping relays are used, an additional 10 – 15 ms must be added to
allow for trip relay operation.
2.24.4 Breaker fail undercurrent settings
The phase undercurrent settings (Ι<) must be set less than load current, to ensure that
Ι< operation indicates that the circuit breaker pole is open. A typical setting for
overhead line or cable circuits is 20% Ιn, with 5% Ιn common for generator circuit
breaker CBF.
The sensitive earth fault protection (SEF) and standby earth fault (SBEF) undercurrent
elements must be set less than the respective trip setting, typically as follows:
ΙSEF< = (ΙSEF> trip) / 2
ΙN< = (ΙN> trip) / 2
For generator applications the undercurrent elements should be measuring current
from CTs on the terminal side of the generator. This is because for an internal fault
on the generator after the CB has tripped the generator will still be supplying some
fault current which will be seen by undercurrent elements measuring current from CTs
on the neutral side of the generator. This could thus give false indication of a
breaker fail condition.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 124/176 MiCOM P342, P343

The voltage dependent overcurrent protection and underimpedance protection used


for back-up protection of system faults are usually connected to the neutral side CTs
so that the generator is in the zone of protection. These protection functions use the
IA, IB, IC current inputs in the P343. Therefore, if the IA, IB, IC inputs are connected
to neutral side CTs then the IA-2, IB-2, IC-2 inputs should be selected for the
undercurrent elements using the setting ‘I< Current Input - IA-1, IB-1, IC-1/ IA-2,
IB-2, IC-2’.

SETTING [4503] :
DDB #162 : Any Trip (RL3)
CB Fail 1 Timer
OR S
SETTING [4502] :
DDB #380 : Ext. Trip 3ph Q tbf1
CB Fail 1 Status
R
AND DDB #493 : Bfail1 Trip 3ph
DDB #631 : IA< Start G37-0 : Disabled

0s
G37-1 : Enabled
DDB #632 : IB< Start

AND SETTING [4505] :

DDB #633 : IC< Start CB Fail 2 Timer

SETTING [4504] :
tbf2
CB Fail 2 Status
DDB #635 : IN< Start
AND DDB #494 : Bfail2 Trip 3ph
G37-0 : Disabled
DDB #447 : ISEF>1 Trip OR
0s
G37-1 : Enabled

OR DDB #294 : CB Fail Alarm


AND

DDB #162 : Any Trip (RL3) S

Q
DDB #634 : ISEF< Start R
x 2 Stages

DDB #453, 457 : V< Trip


x 2 Stages AND S OR

DDB #461, 465 : V> Trip Q


x 2 Stages R

DDB #451, 457 : VN> Trip


x 4 Stages

DDB #469 - 472 : F< Trip

x 2 Stages

DDB #497, 498 : PSlipz Trip

DDB #416 : 100% ST EF Trip

x 2 Stages

DDB #475, 476 : Power Trip OR S


x 2 Stages Q
DDB #495, 496 : SPower Trip R
x 2 Stages

DDB #422, 423 : Field Fail Trip SETTING [4506] : SETTING [4507] :
AND AND
Volt Prot Reset Ext Prot Reset
DDB #429 : V/Hz Trip
x10 Stages
G68-0 : I< Only OR G68-0 : I< Only OR

DDB #430 - 439 : RTD Trip G68-1 : CB Open & I< G68-1 : CB Open & I<

x 2 Stages AND AND


G68-2 : Prot Reset & I< G68-2 : Prot Reset & I<
DDB #473, 474 : F > Trip

DDB #757 : All Poles Dead

DDB #380 : Ext. Trip 3ph


P2181ENa

Figure 43: CB fail logic

2.25 Breaker flashover protection


Prior to generator synchronisation, or just following generator tripping, where the
protected generator could be slipping with respect to a power system, it is possible to
establish at least twice rated phase-neutral voltage across the generator circuit
breaker. An even higher voltage might briefly be established just after generator
tripping for prime mover failure, where the pre-failure level of excitation might be
maintained until AVR action takes place. Whilst generator circuit breakers must be
designed to handle such situations, the probability of breaker interrupter breakdown
or breakdown of open terminal switch gear insulators is increased and such failures
have occurred.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 125/176

This mode of breaker failure is most likely to occur on one phase initially and can be
detected by a neutral current measuring element. If the generator is directly
connected to the power system, the second stage of stator earth fault protection
(“ΙN>2 ...”) could be applied as an instantaneous element by setting the time delay
“ΙN>2 TimeDelay” to 0s, to quickly detect the flashover. To prevent loss of
co-ordination this stage must be blocked when the circuit breaker is closed. This can
be programmed by correct configuration of the programmable scheme logic and can
be integrated into the circuit breaker fail logic, as shown in Figure 44.
Where the machine is connected to the system via a step-up transformer a similar
scheme can be arranged. The P340 relay standby earth fault protection element can
be connected to measure the transformer HV earth fault current to provide the
breaker flashover protection, via suitable scheme logic. The machine earth fault
protection can be provided by the P340 sensitive earth fault protection element, as
shown in Figure 44.

Scheme logic in PSL


DDB 39
L8 52-B

& DDB 168


Extern Trip 3ph
IN>2 Trip
DDB 205

IN
DDB 310
Bfail1 Trip 3ph
ISEF R5 CD fail trip DW 100

MiCOM
P343

P2182ENa

Figure 44: Breaker flashover protection for directly connected machine

Scheme logic in PSL


DDB 39
L8 52-B

& DDB 168


Extern Trip 3ph
IN>2 Trip
DDB 205

IN
DDB 310
Bfail1 Trip 3ph
ISEF R5 CD fail trip DW 100

MiCOM
P343

P2183ENa

Figure 45: Breaker flashover protection for indirectly connected machine


P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 126/176 MiCOM P342, P343

2.26 Blocked overcurrent protection


Blocked overcurrent protection involves the use of start contacts from downstream
relays wired onto blocking inputs of upstream relays. This allows identical current
and time settings to be employed on each of the relays involved in the scheme, as the
relay nearest to the fault does not receive a blocking signal and hence trips
discriminatively. This type of scheme therefore reduces the amount of required
grading stages and consequently fault clearance times.
The principle of blocked overcurrent protection may be extended by setting fast acting
overcurrent elements on the incoming feeders to a substation which are then
arranged to be blocked by start contacts from the relays protecting the outgoing
feeders. The fast acting element is thus allowed to trip for a fault condition on the
busbar but is stable for external feeder faults by means of the blocking signal. This
type of scheme therefore provides much reduced fault clearance times for busbar
faults than would be the case with conventional time graded overcurrent protection.
The availability of multiple overcurrent and earth fault stages means that back-up
time graded overcurrent protection is also provided. This is shown in Figures 46a
and 46b.

Generator

Block highset element

CB fail backtrip

O/P CB
from fail
start backtrip
contact

Feeder 1 Feeder 2 Feeder 3 Feeder 4


P2184ENb

Figure 46a: Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer)


Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 127/176

10.0

1.0
Time P3xx IDMT element
(secs) IDMT margin
0.1 Feeder IDMT element
P3xx high set element
0.08
Time to block
Feeder start contact
0.01
1.0 10.0 100.0
Current (kA)
P2185ENb

Figure 46b: Simple busbar blocking scheme (single incomer)


The P140/P340 relays have start outputs available from each stage of each of the
overcurrent and earth fault elements, including sensitive earth fault. These start
signals may then be routed to output contacts by programming accordingly. Each
stage is also capable of being blocked by being programmed to the relevant opto-
isolated input.
Note that the P340 relays provide a 50V field supply for powering the opto-inputs.
Hence, in the unlikely event of the faulure of this supply, blocking of that relay would
not be possible. For this reason, the field supply is supervised and if a failure is
detected, it is possible, via the relays programmable scheme logic, to provide an
output alarm contact. This contact can then be used to signal an alarm within the
substation. Alternatively, the relays scheme logic could be arranged to block any of
the overcurrent/earth fault stages that would operate non-discriminatively due to the
blocking signal failure.
For further guidance on the use of blocked overcurrent schemes refer to AREVA T&D.

2.27 Current loop inputs and outputs


2.27.1 Current loop inputs
Four analogue (or current loop) inputs are provided for transducers with ranges of 0-
1mA, 0-10mA, 0-20mA or 4-20mA. The analogue inputs can be used for various
transducers such as vibration monitors, tachometers and pressure transducers.
Associated with each input there are two protection stages, one for alarm and one for
trip. Each stage can be individually enabled or disabled and each stage has a
definite time delay setting. The Alarm and Trip stages can be set for operation when
the input value falls below the Alarm/Trip threshold ‘Under’ or when the input current
is above the input value ‘Over’. The sample interval is nominally 50ms per input.
The relationship between the transducer measuring range and the current input
range is linear. The maximum and minimum settings correspond to the limits of the
current input range. This relationship is shown in Figure 47.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 128/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Figure 47 also shows the relationship between the measured current and the
analogue to digital conversion (ADC) count. The hardware design allows for over-
ranging, with the maximum ADC count (4095 for a 12-bit ADC) corresponding to
1.0836mA for the 0-1mA range, and 22.7556mA for the 0-10mA, 0-20mA and
4-20mA ranges. The relay will therefore continue to measure and display values
beyond the Maximum setting, within its numbering capability (-9999 to 9999).

Transducer Transducer
Value Value

Maximum

Maximum

Minimum Minimum
ADC ADC
Count Count
0 4095 0 4095
Current I/P Current I/P
0mA 1mA 1.0836mA 0mA 10mA 22.7556mA

Transducer 0-1mA Transducer 0-10mA


Value Value
Maximum Maximum

Minimum

Minimum
ADC ADC
Count Count
0 4095 0 4095
Current I/P Current I/P
0mA 20mA 22.7556mA 0mA 4mA 20mA 22.7556mA
0-20mA 4-20mA
P1417ENa

Figure 47: Relationship between the transducer measuring quantity and


the current input range
Note, if the Maximum is set less than the Minimum, the slopes of the graphs will be
negative. This is because the mathematical relationship remains the same
irrespective of how Maximum and Minimum are set, e.g., for 0-1mA range,
Maximum always corresponds to 1mA and Minimum corresponds to 0mA.
Power-on diagnostics and continuous self-checking are provided for the hardware
associated with the current loop inputs. When a failure is detected, the protection
associated with all the current loop inputs is disabled and a single alarm signal (CL
Card I/P Fail, DDB 320) is set and an alarm (CL Card I/P Fail) is raised. A
maintenance record with an error code is also recorded with additional details about
the type of failure.
For the 4-20mA input range, a current level below 4mA indicates that there is a fault
with the transducer or the wiring. An instantaneous under current alarm element is
available, with a setting range from 0 to 4mA. This element controls an output signal
(CLI1/2/3/4 I< Fail Alm, DDB 326-329) which can be mapped to a user defined
alarm if required.
Hysteresis is implemented for each protection element. For ‘Over’ protection, the
drop-off/pick-up ratio is 95%, for ‘Under’ protection, the ratio is 105%.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 129/176

Each current loop input can be blocked by energising the relevant DDB signal via the
PSL, (CL Input 1/2/3/4 Blk, DDB 393-396). If a current loop input is blocked the
protection and alarm stages and 4-20mA undercurrent alarm associated with that
input are blocked. The blocking signals may be useful for blocking the current loop
inputs when the CB is open for example.
DDB signals are available to indicate starting an operation of the alarm and trip
stages of the each current loop inputs, (CLI1/2/3/4 Alarm Start: DDB 658-661,
CLI1/2/3/4 Trip Start: DDB 662-665, CL Input 1/2/3/4 Alarm: DDB 322-325, CLI
Input1/2/3/4 Trip: DDB 508-511). The state of the DDB signals can be programmed
to be viewed in the “Monitor Bit x” cells of the “COMMISSION TESTS” column in the
relay.
Setting ranges for the current loop inputs are shown in the following table:

Default Setting Range


Menu Text Step Size
Setting Min Max
GROUP 1
CLIO PROTECTION
CLIO Input 1 Disabled Disabled/Enabled
CLI1 Input Type 4-20mA 0-1mA, 0-10mA, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
CLI1 Input Label CLIO Input 1 16 characters
CLI1 Minimum 0 -9999 9999 0.1
CLI1 Maximum 100 -9999 9999 0.1
CLI1 Alarm Disabled Disabled/Enabled
CLI1 Alarm Fn Over Over/Under
Min (CLI1 Max (CLI1
CLI1 Alarm Set 50 0.1
Min, Max) Min, Max)
CLI1 Alarm Delay 1 0 100s 0.1s
CLI1 Trip Disabled Disabled/Enabled
CLI1 Trip Fn Over Over/Under
Min (CLI1 Max (CLI1
CLI1 Trip Set 50 0.1
Min, Max) Min, Max)
CLI1 Trip Delay 1 0 100s 0.1s
CLI1 I< Alarm (4-
Disabled Disabled/Enabled
20 mA input only)
CLI1 I< Alm Set (4-
3.5 mA 0 4 mA 0.1 mA
20 mA input only)
Repeat for current loop inputs 2, 3 and 4

2.27.2 Setting guidelines for current loop inputs


For each analogue input, the user can define the following:
• The current input range: 0-1mA, 0-10mA, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
• The Analogue Input function and unit, this is in the form of a 16-character Input
Label
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 130/176 MiCOM P342, P343

• Analogue Input Minimum Value (setting range from –9999 to 9999)


• Analogue Input Maximum Value (setting range from –9999 to 9999)
• Alarm threshold, range within the Maximum and Minimum set values
• Alarm Function – Over or Under
• Alarm Delay
• Trip Threshold, range within Maximum and Minimum set values
• Trip Function – Over or Under
• Trip delay
Each current loop input can be selected as Enabled or Disabled as can the Alarm and
Trip stage of each of the current loop input. The Alarm and Trip stages can be set for
operation when the input value falls below the Alarm/Trip threshold ‘Under’ or when
the input current is above the input value ‘Over’ depending on the application. One
of four types of analogue inputs can be selected for transducers with ranges of
0-1mA, 0-10mA, 0-20mA or 4-20mA.
The Maximum and Minimum settings allow the user to enter the range of physical or
electrical quantities measured by the transducer. The settings are unit-less; however,
the user can enter the transducer function and the unit of the measurement using the
16-character user defined CLI Input Label. For example, if the Analogue Input is
used to monitor a power measuring transducer, the appropriate text could be “Active
Power(MW)”.
The alarm and trip threshold settings should be set within the range of physical or
electrical quantities defined by the user. The relay will convert the current input value
into its corresponding transducer measuring value for the protection calculation. For
example if the CLI Minimum is –1000 and the CLI Maximum is 1000 for a 0-10mA
input, an input current of 10mA is equivalent to a measurement value of 1000, 5mA
is 0 and 1mA is –800. If the CLI Minimum is 1000 and the CLI Maximum is -1000
for a 0-10mA input, an input current of 10mA is equivalent to a measurement value
of –1000, 5mA is 0 and 1mA is 800. These values are available for display in the
‘CLIO Input 1/2/3/4’ cells in the ‘MEASUREMENTS 3’ menu. The top line shows the
CLI Input Label and the bottom line shows the measurement value.
2.27.3 Current loop outputs
Four analogue current outputs are provided with ranges of 0-1mA, 0-10mA, 0-20mA
or 4-20mA which can alleviate the need for separate transducers. These may be
used to feed standard moving coil ammeters for analogue indication of certain
measured quantities or into a SCADA using an existing analogue RTU.
The CLIO output conversion task runs every 50ms and the refresh interval for the
output measurements is nominally 50ms. The exceptions are marked with an asterisk
in the table of current loop output parameters below. Those exceptional
measurements are updated once every second.
The outputs can be assigned to any of the following relay measurements:
• Magnitudes of IA, IB, IC, IN, IN Derived, I Sensitive
• Magnitudes of I1, I2, I0
• IA RMS, IB RMS, IC RMS
• Magnitudes of VAB, VBC, VCA, VAN, VBN, VCN, VN Measured, VN Derived
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 131/176

• Magnitudes of V1, V2 and V0


• VAN RMS, VBN RMS, VCN RMS
• Frequency
• Single Phase Active, reactive and apparent power, single phase power factor
• 3 phase active, reactive and apparent power, single phase power factor
• VN 3rd Harmonic (P343 only)
• Stator thermal state
• Rotor (NPS) thermal state (P342/P343 only)
• RTD temperatures (P342/P343 only)
• Analogue Inputs
The user can set the measuring range for each analogue output. The range limits
are defined by the Maximum and Minimum settings. This allows the user to “zoom
in” and monitor a restricted range of the measurements with the desired resolution.
For voltage, current and power quantities, these settings can be set in either primary
or secondary quantities, depending on the ‘CLO1/2/3/4 Set Values – Primary /
Secondary’ setting associated with each current loop output.
The output current of each analogue output is linearly scaled to its range limits, as
defined by the Maximum and Minimum settings. The relationship is shown in Figure
48.

Current Current
Output Output

1mA 10mA

0mA 0mA
Minimum Maximum Relay Minimum Maximum Relay
Measure- Measure-
0-1mA ment 0-10mA ment

Current Current
Output Output

20mA 20mA

4mA

0mA 0mA
Minimum Maximum Relay Minimum Maximum Relay
Measure- Measure-
0-20mA ment 4-20mA ment

P1418ENa

Figure 48: Relationship between the current output and the relay
measurement
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 132/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Note, if the Maximum is set less than the Minimum, the slopes of the graphs will be
negative. This is because the mathematical relationship remains the same
irrespective of how Maximum and Minimum are set, e.g., for 0-1mA range,
Maximum always corresponds to 1mA and Minimum corresponds to 0mA.
The P340 transducers are of the current output type. This means that the correct
value of output will be maintained over the load range specified. The range of load
resistance varies a great deal, depending on the design and the value of output
current. Transducers with a full scale output of 10mA will normally feed any load up
to a value of 1000Ω (compliance voltage of 10V). This equates to a cable length of
15km (approximately) for lightweight cable (1/0.6mm cable). A screened cable
earthed at one end only is recommended to reduce interference on the output current
signal. The table below gives typical cable impedances/km for common cables. The
compliance voltage dictates the maximum load that can be fed by a transducer
output. Therefore, the 20mA output will be restricted to a maximum load of 500Ω
approximately.

Cable 1/0.6mm 1/0.85mm 1/1.38mm


CSA (mm2) 0.28 0.57 1.50
R (Ω/km) 65.52 32.65 12.38

The receiving equipment, whether it be a simple moving-coil (DC milli-ammeter)


instrument or a remote terminal unit forming part of a SCADA system, can be
connected at any point in the output loop and additional equipment can be installed
at a later date (provided the compliance voltage is not exceeded) without any need
for adjustment of the transducer output.
Where the output current range is used for control purposes, it is sometimes
worthwhile to fit appropriately rated diodes, or Zener diodes, across the terminals of
each of the units in the series loop to guard against the possibility of their internal
circuitry becoming open circuit. In this way, a faulty unit in the loop does not cause
all the indications to disappear because the constant current nature of the transducer
output simply raises the voltage and continues to force the correct output signal round
the loop.
Power-on diagnostics and continuous self-checking are provided for the hardware
associated with the current loop outputs. When failure is detected, all the current
loop output functions are disabled and a single alarm signal (CL Card O/P Fail,
DDB 321) is set and an alarm (CL Card O/P Fail) is raised. A maintenance record
with an error code is also recorded with additional details about the type of failure.
Setting ranges for the Current Loop Outputs are shown in the following table:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
CLIO PROTECTION
CLIO Output 1 Disabled Enabled, Disabled
CLO1 Output Type 4-20mA 0-1mA, 0-10mA, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
CLO1 Set Values Primary Primary, Secondary
A list of parameters are shown in the
CLO1 Parameter IA Magnitude
table below
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 133/176

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
Range, step size and unit corresponds to
CLO1 Minimum 0
the selected parameter in the table below
Range, step size and unit corresponds to
CLO1 Maximum 1.2 In
the selected parameter in the table below
Repeat for current loop inputs 2, 3 and 4

Current loop output parameters are shown in the following table:

Current Loop
Default Default
Output Abbreviation Units Range Step
Min Max
Parameter
Current Magnitude IA Magnitude A 0 to 16A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
IB Magnitude
IC Magnitude
IN Measured Mag
Sensitive Current I Sen Magnitude A 0 to 2A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
Input Magnitude
Phase Sequence I1 Magnitude A 0 to 16A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
Current I2 Magnitude
Components I0 Magnitude
RMS Phase IA RMS* A 0 to 16A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
Currents IB RMS*
IC RMS*
P-P Voltage VAB Magnitude V 0 to 0.1V 0V 140V
Magnitude VBC Magnitude 200V
VCA Magnitude
P-N voltage VAN Magnitude V 0 to 0.1V 0V 80V
Magnitude VBN Magnitude 200V
VCN Magnitude
Neutral Voltage VN Measured Mag V 0 to 0.1V 0V 80V
Magnitude VN Derived Mag 200V
3rd Harmonic VN 3rd Harmonic V 0 to 0.1V 0V 80V
Neutral Voltage 200V
Phase Sequence V1 Magnitude* V 0 to 0.1V 0V 80V
Voltage V2 Magnitude 200V
Components V0 Magnitude
RMS Phase VAN RMS* V 0 to 0.1V 0V 80V
Voltages VBN RMS* 200V
VCN RMS*
Frequency Frequency Hz 0 to 0.01Hz 45Hz 65Hz
70Hz
3 Ph Active Power 3 Phase Watts* W -6000W 1W 0W 300W
to
6000W
3 Ph Reactive 3 Phase Vars* Var -6000Var 1Var 0Var 300Var
Power to
6000Var
3 Ph Apparent 3 Phase VA* VA 0 1VA 0VA 300VA
Power to
6000VA
3 Ph Power Factor 3Ph Power Factor* - -1 to 1 0.01 0 1
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 134/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Current Loop
Default Default
Output Abbreviation Units Range Step
Min Max
Parameter
Single Phase Active A Phase Watts* W -2000W 1W 0W 100W
Power B Phase Watts* to
C Phase Watts* 2000W
Single Phase A Phase Vars* Var -2000Var 1Var 0Var 100Var
Reactive Power B Phase Vars* to
C Phase Vars* 2000Var
Single Phase A Phase VA* VA 0 1VA 0VA 100VA
Apparent Power B Phase VA* to
C Phase VA* 2000VA
Single Phase Power APh Power Factor* -1 to 1 0.01 0 1
Factor BPh Power Factor*
CPh Power Factor*
3 Phase Current IA Fixed Demand* A 0 to 16A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
Demands IB Fixed Demand*
IC Fixed Demand*
IA Roll Demand*
IB Roll Demand*
IC Roll Demand*
IA Peak Demand*
IB Peak Demand*
IC Peak Demand*
3Ph Active Power 3Ph W Fix W -6000W 1W 0W 300W
Demands Demand* to
3Ph W Roll Dem* 6000W
3Ph W Peak Dem*
3Ph Reactive Power 3Ph Vars Fix Dem* Var -6000Var 1Var 0Var 300Var
Demands 3Ph Var Roll Dem* to
3Ph Var Peak Dem* 6000Var
Rotor Thermal NPS Thermal % 0 to 200 0.01 0 120
State
Stator Thermal Thermal Overload % 0 to 200 0.01 0 120
State
RTD Temperatures RTD 1* °C -40°C 0.1°C 0°C 200°C
RTD 2* to
RTD 3* 300°C
RTD 4*
RTD 5*
RTD 6*
RTD 7*
RTD 8*
RTD 9*
RTD 10*
Current Loop CL Input 1 - -9999 0.1 0 9999
Inputs CL Input 2 to
CL Input 3 9999
CL input 4

Note 1: For measurements marked with an asterisk, the internal refresh


rate is nominally 1s, others are 0.5 power system cycle or less.
Note 2: The polarity of Watts, Vars and power factor is affected by the
Measurements Mode setting.
Note 3: These settings are for nominal 1A and 100/120V versions only.
For other nominal versions they need to be multiplied
accordingly.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 135/176

Note 4: For the P343, the IA/IB/IC Current magnitudes are IA-1
Magnitude, IB-1 Magnitude, IC-1 Magnitude.
2.27.4 Setting guidelines for current loop outputs
Each current loop output can be selected as Enabled or Disabled. One of four types
of analogue output can be selected for transducers with ranges of 0-1mA, 0-10mA,
0-20mA or 4-20mA. The 4-20mA range is often used so that an output current is still
present when the measured value falls to zero. This is to give a fail safe indication
and may be used to distinguish between the analogue transducer output becoming
faulty and the measurement falling to zero.
The Maximum and Minimum settings allow the user to enter the measuring range for
each analogue output. The range, step size and unit corresponding to the selected
parameter is shown in the table above. This allows the user to “zoom in” and
monitor a restricted range of the measurements with the desired resolution. For
voltage, current and power quantities, these settings can be set in either primary or
secondary quantities, depending on the ‘CLO1/2/3/4 Set Values – Primary /
Secondary’ setting associated with each current loop output.
The relationship of the output current to the value of the measurand is of vital
importance and needs careful consideration. Any receiving equipment must, of
course, be used within its rating but, if possible, some kind of standard should be
established.
One of the objectives must be to have the capability to monitor the voltage over a
range of values, so an upper limit must be selected, typically 120%. However, this
may lead to difficulties in scaling an instrument.
The same considerations apply to current transducers outputs and with added
complexity to watt transducers outputs, where both the voltage and current
transformer ratios must be taken into account.
Some of these difficulties do not need to be considered if the transducer is only
feeding, for example, a SCADA outstation. Any equipment which can be
programmed to apply a scaling factor to each input individually can accommodate
most signals. The main consideration will be to ensure that the transducer is capable
of providing a signal right up to the full-scale value of the input, that is, it does not
saturate at the highest expected value of the measurand.

3. APPLICATION OF NON-PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

3.1 VT supervision
The voltage transformer supervision (VTS) feature is used to detect failure of the ac
voltage inputs to the relay. This may be caused by internal voltage transformer faults,
overloading, or faults on the interconnecting wiring to relays. This usually results in
one or more VT fuses blowing. Following a failure of the ac voltage input there
would be a misrepresentation of the phase voltages on the power system, as
measured by the relay, which may result in maloperation.
The VTS logic in the relay is designed to detect the voltage failure, and automatically
adjust the configuration of protection elements whose stability would otherwise be
compromised. A time-delayed alarm output is also available.
There are three main aspects to consider regarding the failure of the VT supply.
These are defined below:
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 136/176 MiCOM P342, P343

1. Loss of one or two phase voltages


2. Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions
3. Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation
The VTS feature within the relay operates on detection of negative phase sequence
(nps) voltage without the presence of negative phase sequence current. This gives
operation for the loss of one or two phase voltages. Stability of the VTS function is
assured during system fault conditions, by the presence of nps current. The use of
negative sequence quantities ensures correct operation even where three-limb or ‘V’
connected VT’s are used.
Negative sequence VTS element:
The negative sequence thresholds used by the element are V2 = 10V
(Vn = 100/120V) or 40V (Vn = 380/480V), and Ι2 = 0.05 to 0.5Ιn settable
(defaulted to 0.05Ιn).
3.1.1 Loss of all three phase voltages under load conditions
Under the loss of all three phase voltages to the relay, there will be no negative
phase sequence quantities present to operate the VTS function. However, under such
circumstances, a collapse of the three phase voltages will occur. If this is detected
without a corresponding change in any of the phase current signals (which would be
indicative of a fault), then a VTS condition will be raised. In practice, the relay detects
the presence of superimposed current signals, which are changes in the current
applied to the relay. These signals are generated by comparison of the present value
of the current with that exactly one cycle previously. Under normal load conditions,
the value of superimposed current should therefore be zero. Under a fault condition
a superimposed current signal will be generated which will prevent operation of the
VTS.
The phase voltage level detectors are fixed and will drop off at 10V
(Vn = 100/120V), 40V (Vn = 380/480V) and pick-up at 30V (Vn = 100/120V),
120V (Vn = 380/480V).
The sensitivity of the superimposed current elements is fixed at 0.1Ιn.
3.1.2 Absence of three phase voltages upon line energisation
If a VT were inadvertently left isolated prior to line energisation, incorrect operation of
voltage dependent elements could result. The previous VTS element detected three
phase VT failure by absence of all 3 phase voltages with no corresponding change in
current. On line energisation there will, however, be a change in current (as a result
of load or line charging current for example). An alternative method of detecting 3
phase VT failure is therefore required on line energisation.
The absence of measured voltage on all 3 phases on line energisation can be as a
result of 2 conditions. The first is a 3 phase VT failure and the second is a close up
three phase fault. The first condition would require blocking of the voltage
dependent function and the second would require tripping. To differentiate between
these 2 conditions an overcurrent level detector (VTS Ι> Inhibit) is used which will
prevent a VTS block from being issued if it operates. This element should be set in
excess of any non-fault based currents on line energisation (load, line charging
current, transformer inrush current if applicable) but below the level of current
produced by a close up 3 phase fault. If the line is now closed where a 3 phase VT
failure is present the overcurrent detector will not operate and a VTS block will be
applied. Closing onto a three phase fault will result in operation of the overcurrent
detector and prevent a VTS block being applied.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 137/176

This logic will only be enabled during a live line condition (as indicated by the relays
pole dead logic) to prevent operation under dead system conditions i.e. where no
voltage will be present and the VTS Ι> Inhibit overcurrent element will not be picked
up.

ALL POLE DEAD

1
IA>

&
IB> tVTS
IC> S
0
Q
VA>
VB>
& 1 R 1 & SLOW BLOCK

&
VC>

V2>

&
I2

ANY POLE DEAD


240ms 1 & FAST BLOCK

DIA>
DIB>
DIC> 1 & S
Q
R

1 &
VTS_MANRESET

VTS_AUTORESET

MCB / VTS OPTO

VTS_BLOCKING

& 1 INDICATION

ANY VOLTAGE 1 S

&
DEPENDENT FUNCTION
S Q
Q R
R
&
20ms

ACCELERATE IND & 0

P2226ENa

Note: The accelerated ind input is not used in the generator protection.

Figure 49: VTS logic


Required to drive the VTS logic are a number of dedicated level detectors as follows:
• ΙA>, ΙB>, ΙC>, these level detectors operate in less than 20ms and their settings
should be greater than load current. This setting is specified as the VTS current
threshold. These level detectors pick-up at 100% of setting and drop-off at 95%
of setting.
• Ι2>, this level detector operates on negative sequence current and has a user
setting. This level detector picks-up at 100% of setting and drops-off at 95% of
setting.
• ∆ΙIA>, ∆ΙB>, ∆ΙC>, these level detectors operate on superimposed phase
currents and have a fixed setting of 10% of nominal. These level detectors are
subject to a count strategy such that 0.5 cycle of operate decisions must have
occured before operation.
• VA>, VB>, VC>, these level detectors operate on phase voltages and have a
fixed setting, Pick-up level = 30V (Vn = 100/120V), 120V (Vn = 380/480V),
Drop Off level = 10V (Vn = 100/120V), 40V (Vn = 380/480V).
• V2>, this level detector operates on negative sequence voltage, it has a fixed
setting of 10V/40V depending on VT rating (100/120 or 380/480) with pick-up at
100% of setting and drop-off at 95% of setting.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 138/176 MiCOM P342, P343

3.1.2.1 Inputs

Signal Name Description


ΙA>, ΙB>, ΙC> Phase current levels (Fourier Magnitudes)
Ι2> Ι2 level (Fourier Magnitude).
Phase current samples (current and one cycle
∆ΙA, ∆ΙB, ∆ΙC
previous)
VA>, VB>, VC> Phase voltage signals (Fourier Magnitudes)
Negative Sequence voltage (Fourier
V2>
Magnitude)
Breaker is open for all phases (driven from
ALL POLE DEAD
auxiliary contact or pole dead logic).
A VTS reset performed via front panel or
VTS_MANRESET
remotely.
A setting to allow the VTS to automatically
VTS_AUTORESET
reset after this delay.
To remotely initiate the VTS blocking via an
MCB/VTS OPTO
opto.
Outputs from any function that utilises the
system voltage, if any of these elements
Any Voltage Dependent Function operate before a VTS is detected the VTS is
blocked from operation. The outputs include
starts and trips.
Signal from a fast tripping voltage dependent
Accelerate Ind function used to accelerate indications when
the indicate only option is selected.
Breaker is open on one or more than one
Any Pole Dead phases (driven from auxiliary contact or pole
dead logic).
tVTS The VTS timer setting for latched operation.

3.1.2.2 Outputs

Signal Name Description


VTS Fast Block Used to block voltage dependent functions.
VTS Slow block Used to block the Any Pole dead signal.
VTS Indication Signal used to indicate a VTS operation.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 139/176

3.1.3 Menu settings


The VTS settings are found in the ‘SUPERVISION’ column of the relay menu. The
relevant settings are detailed below:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
SUPERVISION
VTS Status Blocking Blocking, Indication
VTS Reset Mode Manual Manual, Auto
VTS Time Delay 5s 1s 10s 0.1s
VTS Ι> Inhibit 10Ιn 0.08Ιn 32Ιn 0.01Ιn
VTS Ι2> Inhibit 0.05Ιn 0.05Ιn 0.5Ιn 0.01Ιn

The relay may respond as follows, an operation of any VTS element:


• VTS set to provide alarm indication only (DDB 292 VT Fail Alarm);
• Optional blocking of voltage dependent protection elements (DDB 736 VTS Fast
Block, DDB 737 VTS Slow Block);
• Optional conversion of directional SEF elements to non-directional protection
(available when set to blocking mode only). These settings are found in the
function links cell of the relevant protection element columns in the menu.
Time delayed protection elements (Directional SEF, Power, Sensitive Power, Field
Failure) are blocked after the VTS Time Delay on operation of the VTS Slow Block.
Fast operating protection elements (Neutral Voltage Displacement, System Backup,
Undervoltage, Dead Machine, Pole Slipping) are blocked on operation of the VTS
Fast Block. Note, the directional SEF and neutral voltage displacement protection are
only blocked by VTS if the neutral voltage input is set to Derived and not Measured.
Other protections can be selectively blocked by customising the PSL, integrating DDB
736 VTS Fast Block and DDB 737 VTS Slow Block with the protection function logic.
The VTS Ι> Inhibit or VTS Ι2> Inhibit elements are used to overide a VTS block in
event of a fault occurring on the system which could trigger the VTS logic. Once the
VTS block has been established, however, then it would be undesirable for
subsequent system faults to override the block. The VTS block will therefore be
latched after a user settable time delay ‘VTS Time Delay’. Once the signal has
latched then two methods of resetting are available. The first is manually via the front
panel interface (or remote communications) provided the VTS condition has been
removed and secondly, when in ‘Auto’ mode, by the restoration of the 3 phase
voltages above the phase level detector settings mentioned previously.
A VTS indication will be given after the VTS Time Delay has expired. In the case
where the VTS is set to indicate only the relay may potentially maloperate, depending
on which protection elements are enabled. In this case the VTS indication will be
given prior to the VTS time delay expiring if a trip signal is given.
Where a miniature circuit breaker (MCB) is used to protect the voltage transformer ac
output circuits, it is common to use MCB auxiliary contacts to indicate a three phase
output disconnection. As previously described, it is possible for the VTS logic to
operate correctly without this input. However, this facility has been provided for
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 140/176 MiCOM P342, P343

compatibility with various utilities current practices. Energising an opto-isolated input


assigned to “MCB Open” on the relay will therefore provide the necessary block.
Where directional SEF elements are converted to non-directional protection on VTS
operation, it must be ensured that the current pick-up setting of these elements is
higher than full load current.

3.2 CT supervision
The current transformer supervision feature is used to detect failure of one or more of
the ac phase current inputs to the relay. Failure of a phase CT or an open circuit of
the interconnecting wiring can result in incorrect operation of any current operated
element. Additionally, interruption in the ac current circuits risks dangerous CT
secondary voltages being generated.
3.2.1 The CT supervision feature
The CT supervision feature operates on detection of derived residual current, in the
absence of corresponding derived or measured residual voltage that would normally
accompany it.
The CT supervision can be set to operate from the residual voltage measured at the
VNEUTRAL input or the residual voltage derived from the 3 phase-neutral voltage
inputs as selected by the ‘CTS Vn Input’ setting.
The voltage transformer connection used must be able to refer residual voltages from
the primary to the secondary side. Thus, this element should only be enabled where
the 3 phase VT is of five limb construction, or comprises three single phase units, and
has the primary star point earthed. A derived residual voltage or a measured
residual voltage is available.
Operation of the element will produce a time-delayed alarm visible on the LCD and
event record (plus DDB 293: CT Fail Alarm), with an instantaneous block (DDB 738:
CTS Block) for inhibition of protection elements. Protection elements operating from
derived quantities, (Neg Seq O/C) are always blocked on operation of the CT
supervision element; other protections can be selectively blocked by customising the
PSL, integrating DDB 738: CTS Block with the protection function logic.

CTS block
I N>
& Time delay t CTS alarm

V N<
P2130ENa

Figure 50: CT supervision function block diagram


The following table shows the relay menu for the CT supervision element, including
the available setting ranges and factory defaults:
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 141/176

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
GROUP 1
SUPERVISION
CT Supervision Sub Heading
CTS Status Disabled Enabled/Disabled N/A
CTS VN Input Derived Derived/Measured N/A
0.5/2V For 110/440V respectively
CTS VN< Inhibit 1 22/88V For 110/440V respectively 0.5/2V
For 110/440V respectively
CTS ΙN> Set 0 0.08 x Ιn 4 x Ιn 0.01 x Ιn
CTS Time Delay 5 0s 10s 1s

3.2.2 Setting the CT supervision element


The residual voltage setting, "CTS Vn< Inhibit" and the residual current setting,
"CTS Ιn> set", should be set to avoid unwanted operation during healthy system
conditions. For example "CTS Vn< Inhibit" should be set to 120% of the maximum
steady state residual voltage. The "CTS Ιn> set" will typically be set below minimum
load current. The time-delayed alarm, "CTS Time Delay", is generally set to 5
seconds.
Where the magnitude of residual voltage during an earth fault is unpredictable, the
element can be disabled to prevent a protection elements being blocked during fault
conditions.

3.3 Circuit breaker state monitoring


An operator at a remote location requires a reliable indication of the state of the
switchgear. Without an indication that each circuit breaker is either open or closed,
the operator has insufficient information to decide on switching operations. The relay
incorporates circuit breaker state monitoring, giving an indication of the position of
the circuit breaker, or, if the state is unknown, an alarm is raised.
3.3.1 Circuit breaker state monitoring features
MiCOM relays can be set to monitor normally open (52a) and normally closed (52b)
auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker. Under healthy conditions, these contacts will
be in opposite states. Should both sets of contacts be open, this would indicate one
of the following conditions:
• Auxiliary contacts/wiring defective
• Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective
• CB is in isolated position
Should both sets of contacts be closed, only one of the following two conditions would
apply:
• Auxiliary contacts/wiring defective
• Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 142/176 MiCOM P342, P343

If any of the above conditions exist, an alarm will be issued after a 5s time delay. A
normally open / normally closed output contact can be assigned to this function via
the programmable scheme logic (PSL). The time delay is set to avoid unwanted
operation during normal switching duties.
In the CB CONTROL column of the relay menu there is a setting called ‘CB Status
Input’. This cell can be set at one of the following four options:
None
52A
52B
Both 52A and 52B
Where ‘None’ is selected no CB status will be available. This will directly affect any
function within the relay that requires this signal, for example CB control, auto-
reclose, etc. Where only 52A is used on its own then the relay will assume a 52B
signal from the absence of the 52A signal. Circuit breaker status information will be
available in this case but no discrepancy alarm will be available. The above is also
true where only a 52B is used. If both 52A and 52B are used then status information
will be available and in addition a discrepancy alarm will be possible, according to
the following table. 52A and 52B inputs are assigned to relay opto-isolated inputs
via the PSL. The CB State Monitoring logic is shown in Figure 51).

Auxiliary Contact Position


CB State Detected Action
52A 52B
Open Closed Breaker Open Circuit breaker healthy
Closed Open Breaker Closed Circuit breaker healthy
Closed Closed CB Failure Alarm raised if the
condition persists for
greater than 5s
Open Open State Unknown Alarm raised if the
condition persists for
greater than 5s
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 143/176

SETTING [0711] :
CB Status Input

G118-0 : None
G118-1 : 52A
G118-2 : 52B
G118-3 : Both 52A & 52B

AND
DDB #381 : CB Aux 3ph(52-A)

AND OR DDB #755 : CB Closed 3ph

AND OR

DATA [000C] :
Plant Status
XOR
Bit 0 : CB1 Open
Bit 1 : CB1 Closed

AND OR

AND OR DDB #754 : CB Open 3ph

AND

5s
AND DDB #302 : CB Status Alarm
0s

XOR
DDB #382 : CB Aux 3ph(52-B)

P2227ENa

Figure 51: CB state monitoring

3.4 Pole dead logic


The Pole Dead Logic can be used to give an indication if one or more phases of the
line are dead. It can also be used to selectively block operation of both the under
frequency, under voltage and power elements. The under voltage protection will be
blocked by a pole dead condition provided the “Pole Dead Inhibit” setting is enabled.
Any of the four under frequency elements can be blocked by setting the relevant “F<
function links”. The Power and Senistive Power protection will be blocked by a pole
dead condition provided the “Pole Dead Inhibit” setting is enabled.
A pole dead condition can be determined by either monitoring the status of the circuit
breaker auxiliary contacts or by measuring the line currents and voltages. The status
of the circuit breaker is provided by the “CB State Monitoring” logic. If a “CB Open”
signal (DDB 794) is given the relay will automatically initiate a pole dead condition
regardless of the current and voltage measurement. Similarly if both the line current
and voltage fall below a pre-set threshold the relay will also initiate a pole dead
condition. This is necessary so that a pole dead indication is still given even when an
upstream breaker is opened. The under voltage (V<) and under current (Ι<)
thresholds have the following, fixed, pickup and drop-off levels:
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 144/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Settings Range Step Size


10V and 30V (100/120V)
V< Pick-up and drop off Fixed
40V and 120V (380/480V)
Ι< Pick-up and drop off 0.05 Ιn and 0.055Ιn Fixed

If one or more poles are dead the relay will indicate which phase is dead and will
also assert the ANY POLE DEAD DDB signal (DDB 758). If all phases were dead the
ANY POLE DEAD signal would be accompanied by the ALL POLE DEAD DDB signal
(DDB 757).
In the event that the VT fails a signal is taken from the VTS logic (DDB 737 – Slow
Block) to block the pole dead indications that would be generated by the under
voltage and undercurrent thresholds. However, the VTS logic will not block the pole
dead indications if they are initiated by a “CB Open” signal (DDB 754).
The pole dead logic diagram is shown below:

20ms
Ia< t Pole A Dead
& 1
Va< 0 DDB 759

20ms
Ib< t Pole B Dead
& 1
Vb< 0 DDB 760

20ms
Ic< t Pole C Dead
& 1
Vc< 0 DDB 761

From VTS Logic


VTS Slow Block Any Pole Dead
DDB 737 1
DDB 758
From CB Status
Monitoring Logic
CB Open
DDB 754
& All Poles Dead
DDB 757

P2186ENa

Figure 52: Pole dead logic

3.5 Circuit breaker condition monitoring


Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is necessary to ensure that the trip circuit and
mechanism operate correctly, and also that the interrupting capability has not been
compromised due to previous fault interruptions. Generally, such maintenance is
based on a fixed time interval, or a fixed number of fault current interruptions. These
methods of monitoring circuit breaker condition give a rough guide only and can
lead to excessive maintenance.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 145/176

The P340 relays record various statistics related to each circuit breaker trip operation,
allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be
determined. These monitoring features are discussed in the following section.
3.5.1 Circuit breaker condition monitoring features
For each circuit breaker trip operation the relay records statistics as shown in the
following table taken from the relay menu. The menu cells shown are counter values
only. The Min/Max values in this case show the range of the counter values. These
cells can not be set:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
CB CONDITION
CB operations
0 0 10000 1
{3 pole tripping}
Total ΙA Broken 0 0 25000Ιn^ 1
Total ΙB Broken 0 0 25000Ιn^ 1
Total ΙC Broken 0 0 25000Ιn^ 1Ιn^
CB operate time 0 0 0.5s 0.001
Reset CB Data No Yes, No

The above counters may be reset to zero, for example, following a maintenance
inspection and overhaul.
The following table, detailing the options available for the CB condition monitoring, is
taken from the relay menu. It includes the set up of the current broken facility and
those features which can be set to raise an alarm or CB lockout.

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
CB MONITOR SETUP
Broken Ι^ 2 1 2 0.1
Ι^ Maintenance Alarm disabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
Ι^ Maintenance 1000Ιn^ 1Ιn^ 25000Ιn^ 1Ιn^
Ι^ Lockout Alarm disabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
Ι^ Lockout 2000Ιn^ 1Ιn^ 25000Ιn^ 1Ιn^
No CB Ops. Maint. Alarm disabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
No CB Ops. Maint. 10 1 10000 1
No CB Ops. Lock Alarm disabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
No CB Ops. Lock 20 1 10000 1
CB Time Maint. Alarm disabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
CB Time Maint. 0.1s 0.005s 0.5s 0.001s
CB Time Lockout Alarm disabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
CB Time Lockout 0.2s 0.005s 0.5s 0.001s
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 146/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
Fault Freq. Lock Alarm disabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
Fault Freq. Count 10 1 9999 1
Fault Freq. Time 3600s 0 9999s 1s

The circuit breaker condition monitoring counters will be updated every time the relay
issues a trip command. In cases where the breaker is tripped by an external
protection device it is also possible to update the CB condition monitoring. This is
achieved by allocating one of the relays opto-isolated inputs (via the programmable
scheme logic) to accept a trigger from an external device. The signal that is mapped
to the opto is called ‘Ext Trip 3Ph’, DDB 380.
Note that when in Commissioning test mode the CB condition monitoring counters
will not be updated.
3.5.2 Setting guidelines
3.5.2.1 Setting the Σ Ι^ thresholds
Where overhead lines are prone to frequent faults and are protected by oil circuit
breakers (OCB’s), oil changes account for a large proportion of the life cycle cost of
the switchgear. Generally, oil changes are performed at a fixed interval of circuit
breaker fault operations. However, this may result in premature maintenance where
fault currents tend to be low, and hence oil degradation is slower than expected. The
Σ Ι^ counter monitors the cumulative severity of the duty placed on the interrupter
allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition to be made.
For OCB’s, the dielectric withstand of the oil generally decreases as a function of
Σ Ι2t. This is where ‘Ι’ is the fault current broken, and ‘t’ is the arcing time within the
interrupter tank (not the interrupting time). As the arcing time cannot be determined
accurately, the relay would normally be set to monitor the sum of the broken current
squared, by setting ‘Broken Ι^’ = 2.
For other types of circuit breaker, especially those operating on higher voltage
systems, practical evidence suggests that the value of ‘Broken Ι^’ = 2 may be
inappropriate. In such applications ‘Broken Ι^’ may be set lower, typically 1.4 or
1.5. An alarm in this instance may be indicative of the need for gas/vacuum
interrupter HV pressure testing, for example.
The setting range for ‘Broken Ι^’ is variable between 1.0 and 2.0 in 0.1 steps. It is
imperative that any maintenance programme must be fully compliant with the
switchgear manufacturer’s instructions.
3.5.2.2 Setting the number of operations thresholds
Every operation of a circuit breaker results in some degree of wear for its
components. Thus, routine maintenance, such as oiling of mechanisms, may be
based upon the number of operations. Suitable setting of the maintenance threshold
will allow an alarm to be raised, indicating when preventative maintenance is due.
Should maintenance not be carried out, the relay can be set to lockout the
autoreclose function on reaching a second operations threshold. This prevents
further reclosure when the circuit breaker has not been maintained to the standard
demanded by the switchgear manufacturer’s maintenance instructions.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 147/176

Certain circuit breakers, such as oil circuit breakers (OCB’s) can only perform a
certain number of fault interruptions before requiring maintenance attention. This is
because each fault interruption causes carbonising of the oil, degrading its dielectric
properties. The maintenance alarm threshold "No CB Ops Maint" may be set to
indicate the requirement for oil sampling for dielectric testing, or for more
comprehensive maintenance. Again, the lockout threshold "No CB Ops Lock" may be
set to disable autoreclosure when repeated further fault interruptions could not be
guaranteed. This minimises the risk of oil fires or explosion.
3.5.2.3 Setting the operating time thresholds
Slow CB operation is also indicative of the need for mechanism maintenance.
Therefore, alarm and lockout thresholds (CB Time Maint/CB Time Lockout) are
provided and are settable in the range of 5 to 500ms. This time is set in relation to
the specified interrupting time of the circuit breaker.
3.5.2.4 Setting the excessive fault frequency thresholds
A circuit breaker may be rated to break fault current a set number of times before
maintenance is required. However, successive circuit breaker operations in a short
period of time may result in the need for increased maintenance. For this reason it is
possible to set a frequent operations counter on the relay which allows the number of
operations "Fault Freq Count" over a set time period "Fault Freq Time" to be
monitored. A separate alarm and lockout threshold can be set.
3.5.3 Circuit breaker state monitoring features
MiCOM relays can be set to monitor normally open (52a) and normally closed (52b)
auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker. Under healthy conditions, these contacts will
be in opposite states. Should both sets of contacts be open, this would indicate one
of the following conditions:
• Auxiliary contacts / wiring defective
• Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective
• CB is in isolated position
Should both sets of contacts be closed, only one of the following two conditions would
apply:
• Auxiliary contacts / wiring defective
• Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
CB Time Maint 0.1s 0.005s 0.5s 0.001s
CB Time Lockout Alarm disabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
CB Time Lockout 0.2s 0.005s 0.5s 0.001s
Fault Freq Lock Alarm disabled Alarm disabled, Alarm enabled
Fault Freq Count 10 0 9999 1
Fault Freq Time 3600s 0 9999s 1s

The circuit breaker condition monitoring counters will be updated every time the relay
issues a trip command. In cases where the breaker is tripped by an external
protection device it is also possible to update the CB condition monitoring. This is
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 148/176 MiCOM P342, P343

achieved by allocating one of the relays opto-isolated inputs (via the programmable
scheme logic) to accept a trigger from an external device. The signal that is mapped
to the opto is called ‘External Trip’.
Note that when in Commissioning test mode the CB condition monitoring counters
will not be updated.
3.6 Trip circuit supervision (TCS)
The trip circuit, in most protective schemes, extends beyond the relay enclosure and
passes through components such as fuses, links, relay contacts, auxiliary switches and
other terminal boards. This complex arrangement, coupled with the importance of
the trip circuit, has led to dedicated schemes for its supervision.
Several trip circuit supervision schemes with various features can be produced with
the P340 range. Although there are no dedicated settings for TCS, in the P340, the
following schemes can be produced using the programmable scheme logic (PSL). A
user alarm is used in the PSL to issue an alarm message on the relay front display. If
necessary, the user alarm can be re-named using the menu text editor to indicate that
there is a fault with the trip circuit.
3.6.1 TCS scheme 1
3.6.1.1 Scheme description

Optional

P2228ENa

Figure 53: TCS scheme 1


This scheme provides supervision of the trip coil with the breaker open or closed,
however, pre-closing supervision is not provided. This scheme is also incompatible
with latched trip contacts, as a latched contact will short out the opto for greater than
the recommended DDO timer setting of 400ms. If breaker status monitoring is
required a further 1 or 2 opto inputs must be used. Note, a 52a CB auxiliary contact
follows the CB position and a 52b contact is the opposite.
When the breaker is closed, supervision current passes through the opto input,
blocking diode and trip coil. When the breaker is open current still flows through the
opto input and into the trip coil via the 52b auxiliary contact. Hence, no supervision
of the trip path is provided whilst the breaker is open. Any fault in the trip path will
only be detected on CB closing, after a 400ms delay.
Resistor R1 is an optional resistor that can be fitted to prevent mal-operation of the
circuit breaker if the opto input is inadvertently shorted, by limiting the current to
<60mA. The resistor should not be fitted for auxiliary voltage ranges of 30/34 volts
or less, as satisfactory operation can no longer be guaranteed. The table below
shows the appropriate resistor value and voltage setting (OPTO CONFIG menu) for
this scheme.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 149/176

This TCS scheme will function correctly even without resistor R1, since the opto input
automatically limits the supervision current to less that 10mA. However, if the opto is
accidentally shorted the circuit breaker may trip.

Opto Voltage Setting with


Auxiliary Voltage (Vx) Resistor R1 (ohms)
R1 Fitted
24/27 - -
30/34 - -
48/54 1.2k 24/27
110/250 2.5k 48/54
220/250 5.0k 110/125

Note: When R1 is not fitted the opto voltage setting must be set equal
to supply voltage of the supervision circuit.
3.6.2 Scheme 1 PSL
Figure 54 shows the scheme logic diagram for the TCS scheme 1. Any of the
available opto inputs can be used to indicate whether or not the trip circuit is healthy.
The delay on drop off timer operates as soon as the opto is energised, but will take
400ms to drop off / reset in the event of a trip circuit failure. The 400ms delay
prevents a false alarm due to voltage dips caused by faults in other circuits or during
normal tripping operation when the opto input is shorted by a self-reset trip contact.
When the timer is operated the NC (normally closed) output relay opens and the LED
and user alarms are reset.
The 50ms delay on pick-up timer prevents false LED and user alarm indications
during the relay power up time, following an auxiliary supply interruption.

0 0
Opto Input Drop-Off Straight NC Output Relay
400 0

Latching LED
50
& Pick-up
0
User Alarm

P2229ENa

Figure 54: PSL for TCS schemes 1 and 3


P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 150/176 MiCOM P342, P343

3.6.3 TCS scheme 2


3.6.3.1 Scheme description

Optional

Optional

P2230ENa

Figure 55: TCS scheme 2


Much like scheme 1, this scheme provides supervision of the trip coil with the breaker
open or closed and also does not provide pre-closing supervision. However, using
two opto inputs allows the relay to correctly monitor the circuit breaker status since
they are connected in series with the CB auxiliary contacts. This is achieved by
assigning Opto A to the 52a contact and Opto B to the 52b contact. Provided the
“Circuit Breaker Status” is set to “52a and 52b” (CB CONTROL column) and opto’s A
and B are connected to CB Aux 3ph (52a) (DDB 381) and CB Aux 3ph (52b) (DDB
382) the relay will correctly monitor the status of the breaker. This scheme is also
fully compatible with latched contacts as the supervision current will be maintained
through the 52b contact when the trip contact is closed.
When the breaker is closed, supervision current passes through opto input A and the
trip coil. When the breaker is open current flows through opto input B and the trip
coil. As with scheme 1, no supervision of the trip path is provided whilst the breaker
is open. Any fault in the trip path will only be detected on CB closing, after a 400ms
delay.
As with scheme 1, optional resistors R1 and R2 can be added to prevent tripping of
the CB if either opto is shorted. The resistor values of R1 and R2 are equal and can
be set the same as R1 in scheme 1.
3.6.4 Scheme 2 PSL
The PSL for this scheme (Figure 56) is practically the same as that of scheme 1. The
main difference being that both opto inputs must be off before a trip circuit fail alarm
is given.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 151/176

DDB381
CB Aux 3ph (52a)

Opto Input A
0 0
1 Drop-Off Straight Output Relay
400 0
Opto Input B
DDB382
CB Aux 3ph (52b)

Latching LED
0
& Pick-Up
50
User Alarm

P2187ENa

Figure 56: PSL for TCS scheme 2


3.6.5 TCS scheme 3
3.6.5.1 Scheme description

P2231ENa

Figure 57: TCS scheme 2


Scheme 3 is designed to provide supervision of the trip coil with the breaker open or
closed, but unlike schemes 1 and 2, it also provides pre-closing supervision. Since
only one opto input is used, this scheme is not compatible with latched trip contacts.
If circuit breaker status monitoring is required a further 1 or 2 opto inputs must be
used.
When the breaker is closed, supervision current passes through the opto input,
resistor R1 and the trip coil. When the breaker is open current flows through the opto
input, resistors R1 and R2 (in parallel), resistor R3 and the trip coil. Unlike schemes 1
and 2, supervision current is maintained through the trip path with the breaker in
either state, thus giving pre-closing supervision.
As with schemes 1 and 2, resistors R1 and R2 are used to prevent false tripping, if the
opto-input is accidentally shorted. However, unlike the other two schemes, this
scheme is dependent upon the position and value of these resistors. Removing them
would result in incomplete trip circuit monitoring. The table below shows the resistor
values and voltage settings required for satisfactory operation.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 152/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Auxiliary Voltage Resistor R1 & R2 Opto Voltage


Resistor R3 (ohms)
(Vx) (ohms) Setting
24/27 - - -
30/34 - - -
48/54 1.2k 0.6k 24/27
110/250 2.5k 1.2k 48/54
220/250 5.0k 2.5k 110/125

Note: Scheme 3 is not compatible with auxiliary supply voltages of


30/34 volts and below.
3.6.6 Scheme 3 PSL
The PSL for scheme 3 is identical to that of scheme 1 (see Figure 53).

3.7 Event & fault records


The relay records and time tags up to 250 events and stores them in non-volatile
(battery backed up) memory. This enables the system operator to establish the
sequence of events that occurred within the relay following a particular power system
condition, switching sequence etc. When the available space is exhausted, the oldest
event is automatically overwritten by the new one.
The real time clock within the relay provides the time tag to each event, to a
resolution of 1ms.
The event records are available for viewing either via the frontplate LCD or remotely,
via the communications ports.
Local viewing on the LCD is achieved in the menu column entitled ‘VIEW RECORDS’.
This column allows viewing of event, fault and maintenance records and is shown
below:

VIEW RECORDS
LCD Reference Description
Setting range from 0 to 249. This selects the required event
Select Event record from the possible 250 that may be stored. A value of
0 corresponds to the latest event and so on.
Time & Date Stamp for the event given by the internal Real
Time & Date
Time Clock
Up to 32 Character description of the Event (refer to
Event Text
following sections)
Up to 32 Bit Binary Flag representative of the Event (refer to
Event Value
following sections)
Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required fault
Select Fault record from the possible 5 that may be stored. A value of 0
corresponds to the latest fault and so on.
The following cells show all the fault flags, protection starts,
protection trips, fault location, measurements etc. associated
with the fault, i.e. the complete fault record.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 153/176

VIEW RECORDS
LCD Reference Description
Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required
Select Maint. maintenance record from the possible 5 that may be stored.
A value of 0 corresponds to the latest record and so on.
Up to 32 Character description of the occurrence (refer to
Maint. Text
following sections).
These cells are numbers representative of the occurrence.
Maint. Type They form a specific error code which should be quoted in
any related correspondence to AREVA T&D.
Maint. Data
Either Yes or No. This serves to reset the trip LED indications
Reset Indication
provided that the relevant protection element has reset.

For extraction from a remote source via communications, refer to SCADA


Communications (P34x/EN CT/E33), where the procedure is fully explained.
Note that a full list of all the event types and the meaning of their values is given in
document P34x/EN GC/E33.
Types of Event
An event may be a change of state of a control input or output relay, an alarm
condition, setting change etc. The following sections show the various items that
constitute an event:
3.7.1 Change of state of opto-isolated inputs
If one or more of the opto (logic) inputs has changed state since the last time that the
protection algorithm ran, the new status is logged as an event. When this event is
selected to be viewed on the LCD, three applicable cells will become visible as shown
below:

Time & Date of Event


“LOGIC INPUTS”
“Event Value
0101010101010101”

The Event Value is an 8 or 16 bit word showing the status of the opto inputs, where
the least significant bit (extreme right) corresponds to opto input 1 etc. The same
information is present if the event is extracted and viewed via PC.
3.7.2 Change of state of one or more output relay contacts
If one or more of the output relay contacts has changed state since the last time that
the protection algorithm ran, then the new status is logged as an event. When this
event is selected to be viewed on the LCD, three applicable cells will become visible
as shown below:
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 154/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Time & Date of Event


“OUTPUT CONTACTS”
“Event Value
010101010101010101010”

The Event Value is a 7, 14 or 21 bit word showing the status of the output contacts,
where the least significant bit (extreme right) corresponds to output contact 1 etc. The
same information is present if the event is extracted and viewed via PC.
3.7.3 Relay alarm conditions
Any alarm conditions generated by the relays will also be logged as individual events.
The following table shows examples of some of the alarm conditions and how they
appear in the event list:

Resulting Event
Alarm Condition
Event Text Event Value
Alarm Status 1 (Alarms 1-32) (32 bits)
Setting Group Via Opto
Setting Grp Invalid ON/OFF Bit position 2 in 32 bit field
Invalid
Protection Disabled Prot’n Disabled ON/OFF Bit position 3 in 32 bit field

Frequency Out of Range Freq out of Range ON/OFF Bit position 13 in 32 bit field

VTS Alarm VT Fail Alarm ON/OFF Bit position 4 in 32 bit field

CB Trip Fail Protection CB Fail ON/OFF Bit position 6 in 32 bit field

Alarm Status 2 (Alarms 1-32) (32 bits)


Bit position 17-31 in 32 bit
SR User Alarm 1-4 (Self Reset) SR User Alarm 1-4 ON/OFF
field

MR User Alarm 5-16 (Manual MR User Alarm 5-16 Bit position 16-27 in 32 bit
Reset) ON/OFF field

Alarm Status 3 (Alarms 1-32) (32 bits)


Battery Fail Battery Fail ON/OFF Bit position 0 in 32 bit field

Field Voltage Fail Field V Fail ON/OFF Bit position 1 in 32 bit field

The previous table shows the abbreviated description that is given to the various
alarm conditions and also a corresponding value which displays alarms as bit
positions in a 32 bit field. The bit will be set to 1 if the alarm is ON and 0 if it is OFF.
This value is appended to each alarm event in a similar way as for the input and
output events previously described. It is used by the event extraction software, such as
MiCOM S1, to identify the alarm and is therefore invisible if the event is viewed on
the LCD. Either ON or OFF is shown after the description to signify whether the
particular condition has become operated or has reset.
The User Alarms can be operated from an opto input or a control input using the PSL.
They can thus be useful to give an alarm led and message on the LCD display and
an alarm indication via the communications of an external condition, for example trip
circuit supervision alarm, rotor earth fault alarm. The menu text editor in MiCOM S1
can be used to edit the user alarm text to give a more meaningful description on the
LCD display.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 155/176

3.7.4 Protection element starts and trips


Any operation of protection elements, (either a start or a trip condition), will be
logged as an event record, consisting of a text string indicating the operated element
and an event value. Again, this value is intended for use by the event extraction
software, such as MiCOM S1, rather than for the user, and is therefore invisible when
the event is viewed on the LCD.
3.7.5 General events
A number of events come under the heading of ‘General Events’ – an example is
shown below:

Displayed Text in Event


Nature of Event Displayed Value
Record
Level 1 password
modified, either from user PW1 modified UI, F or R 6, 11, 16 respectively
interface, front or rear port

A complete list of the ‘General Events’ is given in document P34x/EN GC/E33.


3.7.6 Fault records
Each time a fault record is generated, an event is also created. The event simply
states that a fault record was generated, with a corresponding time stamp.
Note that viewing of the actual fault record is carried out in the ‘Select Fault’ cell
further down the ‘VIEW RECORDS’ column, which is selectable from up to 5 records.
These records consist of fault flags, fault measurements etc. Also note that the time
stamp given in the fault record itself will be more accurate than the corresponding
stamp given in the event record as the event is logged some time after the actual fault
record is generated.
The fault record is triggered from the ‘Fault REC TRIG’ signal assigned in the default
programmable scheme logic to relay 3, protection trip. Note, the fault measurements
in the fault record are given at the time of the protection start. Also, the fault recorder
does not stop recording until any start or relay 3 (protection trip) resets in order to
record all the protection flags during the fault.
It is recommended that the triggering contact (relay 3 for example) be ‘self reset’ and
not latching. If a latching contact was chosen the fault record would not be
generated until the contact had fully reset.
3.7.7 Maintenance reports
Internal failures detected by the self monitoring circuitry, such as watchdog failure,
field voltage failure etc. are logged into a maintenance report. The Maintenance
Report holds up to 5 such ‘events’ and is accessed from the ‘Select Maint.’ cell at the
bottom of the ‘VIEW RECORDS’ column.
Each entry consists of a self explanatory text string and a ‘Type’ and ‘Data’ cell, which
are explained in the menu extract at the beginning of this section and in further detail
in document P34x/EN GC/E33.
Each time a Maintenance Report is generated, an event is also created. The event
simply states that a report was generated, with a corresponding time stamp.
3.7.8 Setting changes
Changes to any setting within the relay are logged as an event. Two examples are
shown in the following table:
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 156/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Displayed Text in Event


Type of Setting Change Displayed Value
Record
Control/Support Setting C & S Changed 22
Group 1 Change Group 1 Changed 24

Note: Control/Support settings are communications, measurement,


CT/VT ratio settings etc. which are not duplicated within the four
setting groups. When any of these settings are changed, the
event record is created simultaneously. However, changes to
protection or disturbance recorder settings will only generate an
event once the settings have been confirmed at the ‘setting trap’.
3.7.9 Resetting of event/fault records
If it is required to delete either the event, fault or maintenance reports, this may be
done from within the ‘RECORD CONTROL’ column.
3.7.10 Viewing event records via MiCOM S1 support software
When the event records are extracted and viewed on a PC they look slightly different
than when viewed on the LCD. The following shows an example of how various
events appear when displayed using MiCOM S1:
- Monday 08 January 2001 18:45:28.633 GMT V<1 Trip A/AB ON
ALSTOM : MiCOM P343
Model Number: P343314B2A0020A
Address: 001 Column: 0F Row: 26
Event Type: Setting event
Event Value: 00000001000000000000000000000000
- Monday 08 January 2001 18:45:28.634 GMT Output Contacts
ALSTOM : MiCOM P343
Model Number: P343314B2A0020A
Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 21
Event Type: Device output changed state
Event Value: 00000000001100
OFF 0 R1 Trip CB
OFF 1 R2 Trip PrimeMov
ON 2 R3 Any Trip
ON 3 R4 General Alarm
OFF 4 R5 CB Fail
OFF 5 R6 E/F Trip
OFF 6 R7 Volt Trip
OFF 7 R8 Freq Trip
OFF 8 R9 Diff Trip
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 157/176

OFF 9 R10 SysBack Trip


OFF 10 R11 NPS Trip
OFF 11 R12 FFail Trip
OFF 12 R13 Power Trip
OFF 13 R14 V/Hz Trip
- Monday 08 January 2001 18:45:28.633 GMT Voltage Prot Alm ON
ALSTOM : MiCOM P343
Model Number: P343314B2A0020A
Address: 001 Column: 00 Row: 22
Event Type: Alarm event
Event Value: 00001000000000000000000000000000
OFF 0 Battery Fail
OFF 1 Field Volt Fail
OFF 2 SG-opto Invalid
OFF 3 Prot'n Disabled
OFF 4 VT Fail Alarm
OFF 5 CT Fail Alarm
OFF 6 CB Fail Alarm
OFF 7 Ι^ Maint Alarm
OFF 8 Ι^ Lockout Alarm
OFF 9 CB OPs Maint
OFF 10 CB OPs Lockout
OFF 11 CB Op Time Maint
OFF 12 CB Op Time Lock
OFF 13 Fault Freq Lock
OFF 14 CB Status Alarm
OFF 15 Not Used
OFF 16 Not Used
OFF 17 Not Used
OFF 18 NPS Alarm
OFF 19 V/Hz Alarm
OFF 20 Field Fail Alarm
OFF 21 RTD Thermal Alm
OFF 22 RTD Open Cct
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 158/176 MiCOM P342, P343

OFF 23 RTD short Cct


OFF 24 RTD Data Error
OFF 25 RTD Board Fail
OFF 26 Freq Prot Alm
ON 27 Voltage Prot Alm
OFF 28 User Alarm 1
OFF 29 User Alarm 2
OFF 30 User Alarm 3
OFF 31 User Alarm 4
3.7.11 Event filtering
It is possible to disable the reporting of events from any user interface that supports
setting changes. The settings which control the various types of events are in the
Record Control column. The effect of setting each to disabled is as follows:

None of the occurrences that produce an alarm will result in


an event being generated.
The presence of any alarms is still reported by the alarm LED
Alarm Event flashing and the alarm bit being set in the communications
status byte.
Alarms can still be read using the Read key on the relay front
panel.
No event will be generated for any change in relay output
Relay O/P Event
state.
No event will be generated for any change in logic input
Opto Input Event
state.
General Event No General Events will be generated.
No event will be generated for any fault that produces a fault
record.
Fault Rec Event
The fault records can still be viewed by operating the “Select
Fault” setting in column 0100.
No event will be generated for any occurrence that produces
a maintenance record.
Maint Rec Event
The maintenance records can still be viewed by operating the
“Select Maint” setting in column 0100.
Any operation of protection elements will not be logged as an
Protection Event
event.

Note that some occurrences will result in more than one type of event, e.g. a battery
failure will produce an alarm event and a maintenance record event.
If the Protection Event setting is Enabled a further set of settings is revealed which
allow the event generation by individual DDB signals to be enabled ‘1’ or disabled
‘0’.
As can be seen, the first line gives the description and time stamp for the event, whilst
the additional information that is displayed below may be collapsed via the +/–
symbol.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 159/176

For further information regarding events and their specific meaning, refer to
document P34x/EN GC/E33.

3.8 Disturbance recorder


The integral disturbance recorder has an area of memory specifically set aside for
record storage. The number of records that may be stored by Courier, MODBUS and
DNP3.0 relays is dependent upon the selected recording duration but the relays
typically have the capability of storing a minimum of 20 records, each of 10.5 second
duration. VDEW relays, which have an un-compressed disturbance recorder, can
only store 8 records of typically 1.8 seconds at 50 Hz or 8 records of approximately
1.5 seconds duration at 60 Hz. Disturbance records continue to be recorded until the
available memory is exhausted, at which time the oldest record(s) are overwritten to
make space for the newest one.
The recorder stores actual samples which are taken at a rate of 12 samples per cycle.
Each disturbance record consists of eight analogue data channels and thirty-two
digital data channels. Note that the relevant CT and VT ratios for the analogue
channels are also extracted to enable scaling to primary quantities. Note that if a CT
ratio is set less than unity, the relay will choose a scaling factor of zero for the
appropriate channel.
The ‘DISTURBANCE RECORDER’ menu column is shown below:

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
DISTURBANCE RECORDER
Duration 1.5s 0.1s 10.5s 0.01s
Trigger Position 33.3% 0 100% 0.1%
Trigger Mode Single Single or Extended
VAN, VBN, VCN, VCHECK SYNC, ΙA, ΙB,
Analog Channel 1 VAN
ΙC, ΙN, ΙN SEF
Analog Channel 2 VBN As above
Analog Channel 3 VCN As above
Analog Channel 4 ΙA As above
Analog Channel 5 ΙB As above
Analog Channel 6 ΙC As above
Analog Channel 7 ΙN As above
Analog Channel 8 ΙN SEF As above
Relays 1 to 7/14
Any of 7 or 14 O/P Contacts
Digital Inputs 1 to and/or Opto’s 1 to 8/16
32 Any of 8 or 16 Opto Inputs
or
Internal Digital Signals
No Trigger, Trigger L/H except
Inputs 1 to 32
No Trigger Dedicated Trigger H/L Trip Relay
Trigger
O/P’s which are set to Trigger L/H
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 160/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Note: The available analogue and digital signals will differ between
relay types and models and so the individual courier database in
SCADA Communications (P34x/EN CT/E33) should be referred
to when determining default settings etc.
The pre and post fault recording times are set by a combination of the ‘Duration’ and
‘Trigger Position’ cells. ‘Duration’ sets the overall recording time and the ‘Trigger
Position’ sets the trigger point as a percentage of the duration. For example, the
default settings show that the overall recording time is set to 1.5s with the trigger
point being at 33.3% of this, giving 0.5s pre-fault and 1s post fault recording times.
If a further trigger occurs whilst a recording is taking place, the recorder will ignore
the trigger if the ‘Trigger Mode’ has been set to ‘Single’. However, if this has been
set to ‘Extended’, the post trigger timer will be reset to zero, thereby extending the
recording time.
As can be seen from the menu, each of the analogue channels is selectable from the
available analogue inputs to the relay. The digital channels may be mapped to any
of the opto isolated inputs or output contacts, in addition to a number of internal
relay digital signals, such as protection starts, LED’s etc. The complete list of these
signals may be found by viewing the available settings in the relay menu or via a
setting file in MiCOM S1. Any of the digital channels may be selected to trigger the
disturbance recorder on either a low to high or a high to low transition, via the ‘Input
Trigger’ cell. The default trigger settings are that any dedicated trip output contacts
(e.g. relay 3) will trigger the recorder.
It is not possible to view the disturbance records locally via the LCD; they must be
extracted using suitable software such as MiCOM S1. This process is fully explained
in SCADA Communications (P34x/EN CT/E33).

3.9 Measurements
The relay produces a variety of both directly measured and calculated power system
quantities. These measurement values are updated on a per second basis and are
summarised below:
Phase Voltages and Currents
Phase to Phase Voltage and Currents
Sequence Voltages and currents
Power and Energy Quantities
Rms. Voltages and Currents
Peak, Fixed and Rolling Demand Values
There are also measured values from the protection functions, which also displayed
under the measurement columns of the menu; these are described in the section on
the relevant protection function.
3.9.1 Measured voltages and currents
The relay produces both phase to ground and phase to phase voltage and current
values. The are produced directly from the DFT (Discrete Fourier Transform) used by
the relay protection functions and present both magnitude and phase angle
measurement.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 161/176

3.9.2 Sequence voltages and currents


Sequence quantities are produced by the relay from the measured Fourier values;
these are displayed as magnitude values.
3.9.3 Power and energy quantities
Using the measured voltages and currents the relay calculates the apparent, real and
reactive power quantities. These are produced on a phase by phase basis together
with three-phase values based on the sum of the three individual phase values. The
signing of the real and reactive power measurements can be controlled using the
measurement mode setting. The four options are defined in the table below:

Measurement Mode Parameter Signing


Export Power +
Import Power –
0 (Default)
Lagging Vars +
Leading Vars –
Export Power –
Import Power +
1
Lagging Vars +
Leading Vars –
Export Power +
Import Power –
2
Lagging Vars –
Leading Vars +
Export Power –
Import Power +
3
Lagging Vars –
Leading Vars +

In addition to the measured power quantities the relay calculates the power factor on
a phase by phase basis in addition to a three-phase power factor.
These power values are also used to increment the total real and reactive energy
measurements. Separate energy measurements are maintained for the total exported
and imported energy. The energy measurements are incremented up to maximum
values of 1000GWhr or 1000GVARhr at which point they will reset to zero, it is also
possible to reset these values using the menu or remote interfaces using the Reset
Demand cell.
3.9.4 Rms. voltages and currents
Rms. Phase voltage and current values are calculated by the relay using the sum of
the samples squared over a cycle of sampled data.
3.9.5 Demand values
The relay produces fixed, rolling and peak demand values, using the Reset Demand
menu cell it is possible to reset these quantities via the User Interface or the remote
communications.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 162/176 MiCOM P342, P343

3.9.5.1 Fixed demand values


The fixed demand value is the average value of a quantity over the specified interval;
values are produced for each phase current and for three phase real and reactive
power. The fixed demand values displayed by the relay are those for the previous
interval, the values are updated at the end of the fixed demand period.
3.9.5.2 Rolling demand values
The rolling demand values are similar to the fixed demand values, the difference
being that a sliding window is used. The rolling demand window consists of a
number of smaller sub-periods. The resolution of the sliding window is the sub-
period length, with the displayed values being updated at the end of each of the sub-
periods.
3.9.5.3 Peak demand values
Peak demand values are produced for each phase current and the real and reactive
power quantities. These display the maximum value of the measured quantity since
the last reset of the demand values.
3.9.6 Settings
The following settings under the heading Measurement Setup can be used to
configure the relay measurement function.

Measurement Setup Default Value Options/Limits


Description/Plant Reference/
Default Display Description Frequency/Access Level/3Ph + N
Current/3Ph Voltage/Power/Date and time
Local Values Primary Primary/Secondary
Remote Values Primary Primary/Secondary
Measurement Ref VA VA/VB/VC/ΙA/ΙB/ΙC
Measurement Mode 0 0 to 3 Step 1
Fix Dem Period 30 minutes 1 to 99 minutes step 1 minute
Roll Sub Period 30 minutes 1 to 99 minutes step 1 minute
Num Sub Periods 1 1 to 15 step 1
Distance Unit* Km Km/miles
Fault Location* Distance Distance/Ohms/% of Line

* Note these settings are available for products with integral fault location.
3.9.6.1 Default display
This setting can be used to select the default display from a range of options, note
that it is also possible to view the other default displays whilst at the default level
using the 8 and 2 keys. However once the 15 minute timeout elapses the default
display will revert to that selected by this setting.
3.9.6.2 Local values
This setting controls whether measured values via the front panel user interface and
the front Courier port are displayed as primary or secondary quantities.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 163/176

3.9.6.3 Remote values


This setting controls whether measured values via the rear communication port are
displayed as primary or secondary quantities.
3.9.6.4 Measurement REF
Using this setting the phase reference for all angular measurements by the relay can
be selected.
3.9.6.5 Measurement mode
This setting is used to control the signing of the real and reactive power quantities; the
signing convention used is defined in section 3.9.3.
3.9.6.6 Fixed demand period
This setting defines the length of the fixed demand window.
3.9.6.7 Rolling sub-period and number of sub-periods
These two settings are used to set the length of the window used for the calculation of
rolling demand quantities and the resolution of the slide for this window.

3.10 Changing setting groups


The setting groups can be changed either via opto inputs or via a menu selection. In
the Configuration column if 'Setting Group- select via optos' is selected then optos 1
and 2, which are dedicated for setting group selection, can be used to select the
setting group as shown in the table below. If 'Setting Group- select via menu' is
selected then in the Configuration column the 'Active Settings - Group1/2/3/4' can be
used to select the setting group. If this option is used then opto inputs 1 and 2 can be
used for other functions in the programmable scheme logic.

OPTO 1 OPTO 2 Selected Setting Group


0 0 1
1 0 2
0 1 3
1 1 4

Note: Setting groups comprise both Settings and Programmable Scheme


Logic. Each is independent per group - not shared as common. The
settings are generated in the Settings and Records application within
MiCOM S1, or can be applied directly from the relay front panel menu.
The programmable scheme logic can only be set using the PSL Editor
application within MiCOM S1, generating files with extension ".psl". It is
essential that where the installation needs application-specific PSL, that
the appropriate .psl file is downloaded (sent) to the relay, for each and
every setting group that will be used. If the user fails to download the
required .psl file to any setting group that may be brought into service,
then factory default PSL will still be resident. This may have severe
operational and safety consequences.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 164/176 MiCOM P342, P343

3.11 Control inputs

Menu Text Default Setting Setting Range Step Size


CONTROL INPUTS
Ctrl I/P Status 00000000000000000000000000000000
Control Input 1 No Operation No Operation, Set, Reset
Control Input 2
No Operation No Operation, Set, Reset
to 32

The Control Input commands can be found in the ‘Control Input’ menu. In the ‘Ctrl
Ι/P status’ menu cell there is a 32 bit word which represent the 32 control input
commands. The status of the 32 control inputs can be read from this 32 bit word.
The 32 control inputs can also be set and reset from this cell by setting a 1 to set or 0
to reset a particular control input. Alternatively, each of the 32 Control Inputs can
can be set and reset using the individual menu setting cells ‘Control Input 1, 2, 3, etc.
The Control Inputs are available through the relay menu as described above and also
via the rear communications.
In the programmable scheme logic editor 32 Control Input signals, DDB 832-863,
which can be set to a logic 1 or On state, as described above, are available to
perform control functions defined by the user.
The status of the Control Inputs are held in non-volatile memory (battery backed
RAM) such that when the relay is power-cycled, the states are restored upon power-
up.

3.12 VT connections
3.12.1 Open delta (vee connected) VT's
The P342/3 relay can be used with vee connected VTs by connecting the VT
secondaries to C19, C20 and C21 input terminals, with the C22 input left
unconnected (see Figures 2 and 17 in document P34x/EN CO/E33).
This type of VT arrangement cannot pass zero-sequence (residual) voltage to the
relay, or provide any phase to neutral voltage quantities. Therefore any protection
that is dependent upon zero sequence voltage measurements should be disabled
unless a direct measurement can be made via the measured VN input (C23-C24).
Therefore, neutral displacement protection, sensitive directional earth fault protection
and CT supervision should be disabled unless the residual voltage is measured
directly from the secondary of the earthing transformer or from a broken delta VT
winding on a 5 limb VT.
The under and over voltage protection can be set as phase-to-phase measurement
with vee connected VTs. The underimpedance and the voltage dependent
overcurrent use phase-phase voltages anyway, therefore the accuracy should not be
affected. The protection functions which use phase-neutral voltages are the power,
the loss of excitation and pole slipping protection; all are for detecting abnormal
generator operation under 3-phase balanced conditions, therefore the 'neutral' point,
although 'floating' will be approximately at the centre of the three phase voltage
vectors.
The accuracy of single phase voltage measurements can be impaired when using vee
connected VT’s. The relay attempts to derive the phase to neutral voltages from the
phase to phase voltage vectors. If the impedance of the voltage inputs were perfectly
matched the phase to neutral voltage measurements would be correct, provided the
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 165/176

phase to phase voltage vectors were balanced. However, in practice there are small
differences in the impedance of the voltage inputs, which can cause small errors in
the phase to neutral voltage measurements. This may give rise to an apparent
residual voltage. This problem also extends to single phase power and impedance
measurements that are also dependent upon their respective single phase voltages.
The phase to neutral voltage measurement accuracy can be improved by connecting
3, well matched, load resistors between the phase voltage inputs (C19, C20, C21)
and neutral C22, thus creating a ‘virtual’ neutral point. The load resistor values must
be chosen so that their power consumption is within the limits of the VT. It is
recommended that 10kΩ ±1% (6W) resistors are used for the 110V (Vn) rated relay,
assuming the VT can supply this burden.
3.12.2 VT single point earthing
The P340 range will function correctly with conventional 3 phase VT’s earthed at any
one point on the VT secondary circuit. Typical earthing examples being neutral
earthing and yellow phase earthing.

3.13 PSL DATA column


The MiCOM P34x range of relays contains a PSL DATA column that can be used to
track PSL modifications. A total of 12 cells are contained in the PSL DATA column, 3
for each setting group. The function for each cell is shown below:

Grp PSL Ref When downloading a PSL to the relay, the user will be
prompted to enter which groups the PSL is for and a
reference ID. The first 32 characters of the reference ID
will be displayed in this cell. The 4 and 6 keys can be
used to scroll through 32 characters as only 16 can be
displayed at any one time.

18 Nov 2002 This cell displays the date and time when the PSL was
down loaded to the relay.
08:59:32.047

Grp 1 PSL ID This is a unique number for the PSL that has been entered.
- 2062813232 Any change in the PSL will result in a different number
being displayed.

Note: The above cells are repeated for each setting group.

3.14 Auto reset of trip LED indication


The trip LED can be reset when the flags for the last fault are displayed. The flags are
displayed automatically after a trip occurs, or can be selected in the fault record
menu. The reset of trip LED and the fault records is performed by pressing the 0 key
once the fault record has been read.
Setting “Sys Fn Links” (SYSTEM DATA Column) to logic “1” sets the trip LED to
automatic reset. Resetting will occur when the circuit is reclosed and the “Any Pole
Dead” signal (DDB 758) has been reset for three seconds. Resetting, however, will
be prevented if the “Any start” signal is active after the breaker closes.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 166/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Tr3Ph (Any Trip) S


Q Trip LED
Reset (Command) R
Reset (Logic Input)

SETTING: ENABLE 3s
1
& 0
SELF RESET DISABLE

Any Pole Dead


Any Start
P2129ENa

Figure 58: Trip LED logic diagram

4. CURRENT TRANSFORMER REQUIREMENTS


The current transformer requirements for each current input will depend on the
protection function with which they are related and whether the line current
transformers are being shared with other current inputs. Where current transformers
are being shared by multiple current inputs, the kneepoint voltage requirements
should be calculated for each input and the highest calculated value used.
The P342/3 is able to maintain all protection functions in service over a wide range
of operating frequency due to its frequency tracking system (5-70 Hz).
When the P342/3 protection functions are required to operate accurately at low
frequency, it will be necessary to use CT’s with larger cores. In effect, the CT
requirements need to be multiplied by fn/f, where f is the minimum required
operating frequency and fn is the nominal operating frequency.

4.1 Generator differential function


4.1.1 Biased differential protection
The kneepoint voltage requirements for the current transformers used for the current
inputs of the generator differential function, with settings of Ιs1 = 0.05Ιn, k1 = 0%,
Ιs2 = 1.2Ιn, k2 = 150%, and with a boundary condition of through fault current
≤ 10Ιn, is:
60
Vk ≥ 50Ιn (Rct + 2RL + Rr) with a minimum of for X/R <120
Ιn

60
Vk ≥ 30Ιn (Rct + 2RL + Rr) with a minimum of for X/R < 40
Ιn

Where the generator is impedance earthed and the maximum secondary earth fault
current is less than Ιn then the CT knee point voltage requirements are:

60
Vk ≥ 25Ιn (Rct + 2RL + Rr) with a minimum of for X/R <120
Ιn

where
Vk = Minimum current transformer kneepoint voltage for through fault
stability.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 167/176

Ιn = Relay rated current.

Rct = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (Ω).

RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (Ω).


Rr = Resistance of any other protective relays sharing the current
transformer (Ω).
For Class-X current transformers, the excitation current at the calculated kneepoint
voltage requirement should be less than 2.5Ιn (<5% of the maximum perspective fault
current 50 Ιn, on which these CT requirements are based). For IEC standard
protection class current transformers, it should be ensured that class 5P are used.
4.1.2 High impedance differential protection
If the generator differential protection function is to be used to implement high
impedance differential protection, then the current transformer requirements will be
as follows:
Rs = [1.5 * (Ιf) * (RCT + 2RL)] /ΙS1

VK ≥ 2 * Ιs1 * Rs
where
Rs = Value of stabilising resistor (ohms)
Ιf = Maximum through fault current level (amps)
VK = CT knee point voltage (volts)

ΙS1 = Current setting of differential element (amps)


RCT = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms)
RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms)

4.2 Voltage dependent overcurrent, field failure and negative phase sequence
protection functions
When determining the current transformer requirements for an input that supplies
several protection functions, it must be ensured that the most onerous condition is
met. This has been taken into account in the formula given below. The formula is
equally applicable for current transformers mounted at either the neutral-tail end or
terminal end of the generator.
Vk ≥ 20Ιn (Rct + 2RL + Rr)
where
Vk = Minimum current transformer kneepoint voltage for through fault
stability.
Ιn = Relay rated current.

Rct = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (Ω).

RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (Ω).


Rr = Resistance of any other protective relays sharing the current
transformer (Ω).
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 168/176 MiCOM P342, P343

For class-X current transformers, the excitation current at the calculated kneepoint
voltage requirement should be less than 1.0Ιn. For IEC standard protection class
current transformers, it should be ensured that class 5P are used.

4.3 Sensitive directional earth fault protection function residual current input
4.3.1 Line current transformers
With reference to section 2.15, the sensitive directional earth fault input current
transformer could be driven by three residually connected line current transformers.
It has been assumed that the sensitive directional earth fault protection function will
only be applied when the stator earth fault current is limited to the stator winding
rated current or less. Also assumed is that the maximum X/R ratio for the impedance
to a bus earth fault will be no greater than 10. The required minimum kneepoint
voltage will therefore be:
Vk ≥ 6 Ιn (Rct + 2RL + Rr)
where
Vk = Minimum current transformer kneepoint voltage for through fault
stability.
Ιn = Relay rated current.

Rct = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (Ω).

RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (Ω).


Rr = Resistance of any other protective relays sharing the current
transformer (Ω).
For class-X current transformers, the excitation current at the calculated kneepoint
voltage requirement should be less than 0.3Ιn (<5% of the maximum perspective fault
current 20Ιn, on which these CT requirements are based). For IEC standard
protection class current transformers, it should be ensured that class 5P are used.
4.3.2 Core balanced current transformers
Unlike a line current transformer, the rated primary current for a core balanced
current transformer may not be equal to the stator winding rated current. This has
been taken into account in the formula:
Vk > 6NΙn (Rct + 2RL + Rr)
where
Vk = Minimum current transformer kneepoint voltage for through fault
stability.
Stator earth fault current
N = Core balanced current transformer rated primary current

Ιn = Relay rated current.

Rct = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (Ω).

RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (Ω).


Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 169/176

Rr = Resistance of any other protective relays sharing the current


transformer (Ω).
Note: N should not be greater than 2. The core balance current
transformer ratio should be selected accordingly.

4.4 Stator earth fault protection function


The earth fault Ιn current input is used by the stator earth fault protection function.
4.4.1 Non-directional definite time/IDMT earth fault protection
CT requirements for time-delayed earth fault overcurrent elements
VK ≥ Ιcn/2 * (RCT + 2RL + Rrn)
4.4.2 Non-directional instantaneous earth fault protection
CT requirements for instantaneous earth fault overcurrent elements
VK ≥ Ιsn (RCT + 2RL + Rrn)
where
VK = Required CT knee-point voltage (volts),
Ιcn = Maximum prospective secondary earth fault current or 31 times Ι>
setting (whichever is lower) (amps),
Ιsn = Earth fault setting (amps),
RCT = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms)
RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms),
Rrn = Impedance of the relay neutral current input at Ιn (ohms).

4.5 Restricted earth fault protection


4.5.1 Low impedance
VK ≥ 24 * Ιn * (RCT + 2RL) for X/R < 40 and Ιf < 15Ιn

VK ≥ 48 * Ιn * (RCT + 2RL) for X/R < 40, 15Ιn < Ιf < 40Ιn

and 40 <X/R < 120, Ιf < 15Ιn


where

VA x ALF
Vk = + ALF x Ιn x Rct
Ιn
VK = Required CT knee point voltage (volts),

Ιn = rated secondary current (amps),

RCT = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (Ω)

RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (Ω)

Ιf = Maximum through fault current level (amps).


P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 170/176 MiCOM P342, P343

4.5.2 High impedance


The High Impedance Restricted Earth Fault element shall maintain stability for
through faults and operate in less than 40ms for internal faults provided the following
equations are met in determining CT requirements and the value of the associated
stabilising resistor:
Rs = [0.7 * (Ιf) * (RCT + 2RL)] /ΙS1

VK ≥ 4 * Ιs1 * Rs
where
Rs = Value of Stabilising resistor (ohms),
Ιf = Maximum through fault current level (amps).
VK = CT knee point voltage (volts),

ΙS1 = Current setting of REF element (amps),

RCT = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (ohms)


RL = Resistance of a single lead from relay to current transformer (ohms).

4.6 Reverse and low forward power protection functions


For both reverse and low forward power protection function settings greater than 3%
Pn, the phase angle errors of suitable protection class current transformers will not
result in any risk of mal-operation or failure to operate. However, for the sensitive
power protection if settings less than 3% are used, it is recommended that the current
input is driven by a correctly loaded metering class current transformer.
4.6.1 Protection class current transformers
For less sensitive power function settings (>3%Pn), the phase current input of the
P340 should be driven by a correctly loaded class 5P protection current transformer.
To correctly load the current transformer, its VA rating should match the VA burden
(at rated current) of the external secondary circuit through which it is required to drive
current.
4.6.2 Metering class current transformers
For low Power settings (<3%Pn), the Ιn Sensitive current input of the P340 should be
driven by a correctly loaded metering class current transformer. The current
transformer accuracy class will be dependent on the reverse power and low forward
power sensitivity required. The table below indicates the metering class current
transformer required for various power settings below 3%Pn.
To correctly load the current transformer, its VA rating should match the VA burden
(at rated current) of the external secondary circuit through which it is required to drive
current. Use of the P340 sensitive power phase shift compensation feature will help
in this situation.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 171/176

Reverse and Low Forward Power


Metering CT Class
Settings %Pn
0.5
0.1
0.6
0.8
1.0
0.2
1.2
1.4
1.6
1.8
2.0
2.2 0.5
2.4
2.6
2.8
3.0 1.0

Sensitive power current transformer requirements

4.7 Converting an IEC185 current transformer standard protection classification


to a kneepoint voltage
The suitability of an IEC standard protection class current transformer can be checked
against the kneepoint voltage requirements specified previously.
If, for example, the available current transformers have a 15VA 5P 10 designation,
then an estimated kneepoint voltage can be obtained as follows:

VA x ALF
Vk = + ALF x Ιn x Rct
Ιn
where
Vk = Required kneepoint voltage
VA = Current transformer rated burden (VA)
ALF = Accuracy limit factor
Ιn = Current transformer secondary rated current (A)

Rct = Resistance of current transformer secondary winding (Ω)


If Rct is not available, then the second term in the above equation can be ignored.

Example: 400/5A, 15VA 5P 10, Rct = 0.2Ω

15 x 10
Vk = + 10 x 5 x 0.2
5
= 40V
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 172/176 MiCOM P342, P343

4.8 Converting IEC185 current transformer standard protection classification to


an ANSI/IEEE standard voltage rating
MiCOM Px40 series protection is compatible with ANSI/IEEE current transformers as
specified in the IEEE C57.13 standard. The applicable class for protection is class
"C", which specifies a non air-gapped core. The CT design is identical to IEC class P,
or British Standard class X, but the rating is specified differently.

The ANSI/IEEE “C” Class standard voltage rating required will be lower than
an IEC knee point voltage. This is because the ANSI/IEEE voltage rating is
defined in terms of useful output voltage at the terminals of the CT, whereas
the IEC knee point voltage includes the voltage drop across the internal
resistance of the CT secondary winding added to the useful output. The
IEC/BS knee point is also typically 5% higher than the ANSI/IEEE knee point.
Therefore
Vc = [ Vk - Internal voltage drop ] / 1.05
= [ Vk - (In . RCT . ALF) ] / 1.05
Where
Vc = “C” Class standard voltage rating
Vk = IEC Knee point voltage required
Ιn = CT rated current = 5A in USA
RCT = CT secondary winding resistance
(for 5A CTs, the typical resistance is 0.002 ohms/secondary turn)
ALF = The CT accuracy limit factor, the rated dynamic current output of a "C"
class CT (Kssc) is always 20 x In
The IEC accuracy limit factor is identical to the 20 times secondary current ANSI/IEEE
rating.
Therefore
Vc = [ Vk - (100 . RCT ) ] / 1.05

5. COMMISSIONING TEST MENU


To help minimise the time required to test MiCOM relays the relay provides several
test facilities under the ‘COMMISSION TESTS’ menu heading. There are menu cells
which allow the status of the opto-isolated inputs, output relay contacts, internal
digital data bus (DDB) signals and user-programmable LEDs to be monitored.
Additionally there are cells to test the operation of the output contacts and user-
programmable LEDs.
The following table shows the relay menu of commissioning tests, including the
available setting ranges and factory defaults:
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 173/176

Menu Text Default Setting Settings


COMMISSION TESTS
Opto I/P Status - -
Relay O/P Status - -
Test Port Status - -
LED Status - -
Monitor Bit 1 64 (LED 1) 0 to 511
Monitor Bit 2 65 (LED 2) See document
P34x/EN GC/E33 for
Monitor Bit 3 66 (LED 3)
details of digital data
Monitor Bit 4 67 (LED 4) bus signals
Monitor Bit 5 68 (LED 5)
Monitor Bit 6 69 (LED 6)
Monitor Bit 7 70 (LED 7)
Monitor Bit 8 71 (LED 8)
Disabled
Test Mode Disabled Test Mode
Contacts Blocked
0 = Not Operated
Test Pattern All bits set to 0
1 = Operated
No Operation
Contact Test No Operation Apply Test
Remove Test
No Operation
Test LEDs No Operation
Apply Test

Table 37

5.1 Opto I/P status


This menu cell displays the status of the relay’s opto-isolated inputs as a binary string,
a ‘1’ indicating an energised opto-isolated input and a ‘0’ a de-energised one. If the
cursor is moved along the binary numbers the corresponding label text will be
displayed for each logic input.
It can be used during commissioning or routine testing to monitor the status of the
opto-isolated inputs whilst they are sequentially energised with a suitable dc voltage.

5.2 Relay O/P status


This menu cell displays the status of the digital data bus (DDB) signals that result in
energisation of the output relays as a binary string, a ‘1’ indicating an operated state
and ‘0’ a non-operated state. If the cursor is moved along the binary numbers the
corresponding label text will be displayed for each relay output.
The information displayed can be used during commissioning or routine testing to
indicate the status of the output relays when the relay is ‘in service’. Additionally fault
finding for output relay damage can be performed by comparing the status of the
output contact under investigation with it’s associated bit.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 174/176 MiCOM P342, P343

Note: When the ‘Test Mode’ cell is set to ‘Enabled’ this cell will
continue to indicate which contacts would operate if the relay
was in-service, it does not show the actual status of the output
relays.

5.3 Test port status


This menu cell displays the status of the eight digital data bus (DDB) signals that have
been allocated in the ‘Monitor Bit’ cells. If the cursor is moved along the binary
numbers the corresponding DDB signal text string will be displayed for each monitor
bit.
By using this cell with suitable monitor bit settings, the state of the DDB signals can be
displayed as various operating conditions or sequences are applied to the relay.
Thus the programmable scheme logic can be tested.
As an alternative to using this cell, the optional monitor/download port test box can
be plugged into the monitor/download port located behind the bottom access cover.
Details of the monitor/download port test box can be found in section 5.10 of this
document (P34x/EN AP/E33).

5.4 LED status


The ‘LED Status’ cell is an eight bit binary string that indicates which of the
user-programmable LEDs on the relay are illuminated when accessing the relay from
a remote location, a ‘1’ indicating a particular LED is lit and a ‘0’ not lit.

5.5 Monitor bits 1 to 8


The eight ‘Monitor Bit’ cells allow the user to select the status of which digital data bus
signals can be observed in the ‘Test Port Status’ cell or via the monitor/download
port.
Each ‘Monitor Bit’ is set by entering the required digital data bus (DDB) signal
number (0 – 511) from the list of available DDB signals in document P34x/EN
GC/E33 of this guide. The pins of the monitor/download port used for monitor bits
are given in the table overleaf. The signal ground is available on pins 18, 19, 22
and 25.

Monitor Bit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Monitor/ Download Port Pin 11 12 15 13 20 21 23 24

Table 38
THE MONITOR/DOWNLOAD PORT DOES NOT HAVE ELECTRICAL ISOLATED
AGAINST INDUCED VOLTAGES ON THE COMMUNICATIONS CHANNEL. IT
SHOULD THEREFORE ONLY BE USED FOR LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS.

5.6 Test mode


This menu cell is used to allow secondary injection testing to be performed on the
relay without operation of the trip contacts. It also enables a facility to directly test the
output contacts by applying menu controlled test signals. To select test mode this cell
should be set to ‘Enabled’ which takes the relay out of service causing an alarm
condition to be recorded and the yellow ‘Out of Service’ LED to illuminate. Once
testing is complete the cell must be set back to ‘Disabled’ to restore the relay back to
service.
Application Notes P34x/EN AP/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 175/176

WHEN THE ‘TEST MODE’ CELL IS SET TO ‘ENABLED’ THE RELAY SCHEME
LOGIC DOES NOT DRIVE THE OUTPUT RELAYS AND HENCE THE
PROTECTION WILL NOT TRIP THE ASSOCIATED CIRCUIT BREAKER IF A FAULT
OCCURS.
HOWEVER, THE COMMUNICATIONS CHANNELS WITH REMOTE RELAYS
REMAIN ACTIVE WHICH, IF SUITABLE PRECAUTIONS ARE NOT TAKEN,
COULD LEAD TO THE REMOTE ENDS TRIPPING WHEN CURRENT
TRANSFORMERS ARE ISOLATED OR INJECTION TESTS ARE PERFORMED.

5.7 Test pattern


The ‘Test Pattern’ cell is used to select the output relay contacts that will be tested
when the ‘Contact Test’ cell is set to ‘Apply Test’. The cell has a binary string with
one bit for each user-configurable output contact which can be set to ‘1’ to operate
the output under test conditions and ‘0’ to not operate it.

5.8 Contact test


When the ‘Apply Test’ command in this cell is issued the contacts set for operation
(set to ‘1’) in the ‘Test Pattern’ cell change state. After the test has been applied the
command text on the LCD will change to ‘No Operation’ and the contacts will remain
in the Test State until reset issuing the ‘Remove Test’ command. The command text on
the LCD will again revert to ‘No Operation’ after the ‘Remove Test’ command has
been issued.
Note: When the ‘Test Mode’ cell is set to ‘Enabled’ the ‘Relay O/P
Status’ cell does not show the current status of the output relays
and hence can not be used to confirm operation of the output
relays. Therefore it will be necessary to monitor the state of each
contact in turn.

5.9 Test LEDs


When the ‘Apply Test’ command in this cell is issued the eight user-programmable
LEDs will illuminate for approximately 2 seconds before they extinguish and the
command text on the LCD reverts to ‘No Operation’.

5.10 Using a monitor/download port test box


A monitor/download port test box containing 8 LED’s and a switchable audible
indicator is available from AREVA T&D, or one of their regional sales offices. It is
housed in a small plastic box with a 25-pin male D-connector that plugs directly into
the relay’s monitor/download port. There is also a 25-pin female D-connector which
allows other connections to be made to the monitor/download port whilst the
monitor/download port test box is in place.
Each LED corresponds to one of the monitor bit pins on the monitor/download port
with ‘Monitor Bit 1’ being on the left hand side when viewing from the front of the
relay. The audible indicator can either be selected to sound if a voltage appears any
of the eight monitor pins or remain silent so that indication of state is by LED alone.
P34x/EN AP/F33 Application Notes

Page 176/176 MiCOM P342, P343


Relay Description P34x/EN HW/F33

MiCOM P342, P343

RELAY DESCRIPTION
P34x/EN HW/F33 Relay Description

MiCOM P342, P343


Relay Description P34x/EN HW/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 1/20

CONTENT

1. RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW 3


1.1 Hardware overview 3
1.1.1 Processor board 3
1.1.2 Input module 3
1.1.3 Power supply module 3
1.1.4 RTD board 3
1.1.5 IRIG-B board 3
1.1.6 Second rear comms board 3
1.2 Software overview 4
1.2.1 Real-time operating system 5
1.2.2 System services software 5
1.2.3 Platform software 5
1.2.4 Protection and control software 5
1.2.5 Disturbance recorder 5

2. HARDWARE MODULES 5
2.1 Processor board 5
2.2 Internal communication buses 6
2.3 Input module 6
2.3.1 Transformer board 6
2.3.2 Input board 6
2.3.3 Universal opto isolated logic inputs 8
2.4 Power supply module (including output relays) 8
2.4.1 Power supply board (including EIA(RS)485 communication interface) 8
2.4.2 Output relay board 9
2.5 RTD board 9
2.6 IRIG-B board 9
2.7 Mechanical layout 10
2.8 Second rear communications board 10
2.9 Current loop input output board (CLIO) 11

3. RELAY SOFTWARE 13
3.1 Real-time operating system 13
P34x/EN HW/F33 Relay Description

Page 2/20 MiCOM P342, P343

3.2 System services software 13


3.3 Platform software 14
3.3.1 Record logging 14
3.3.2 Settings database 14
3.3.3 Database interface 14
3.4 Protection & control software 14
3.4.1 Overview - protection & control scheduling 15
3.4.2 Signal processing 15
3.4.3 Programmable scheme logic 16
3.4.3.1 PSL data 16
3.4.4 Event, fault & maintenance recording 16
3.4.5 Disturbance recorder 17

4. SELF TESTING & DIAGNOSTICS 17


4.1 Start-up self-testing 18
4.1.1 System boot 18
4.1.2 Initialisation software 18
4.1.3 Platform software initialisation & monitoring 18
4.2 Continuous self-testing 19

Figure 1: Relay modules and information flow 4


Figure 2: Main input board 7
Figure 3: Second rear comms port 11
Figure 4: Current loop input output board 12
Figure 5: Relay software structure 13
Relay Description P34x/EN HW/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 3/20

1. RELAY SYSTEM OVERVIEW


1.1 Hardware overview
The relay hardware is based on a modular design whereby the relay is made up of
an assemblage of several modules which are drawn from a standard range. Some
modules are essential while others are optional depending on the user’s
requirements.
The different modules that can be present in the relay are as follows:
1.1.1 Processor board
The processor board performs all calculations for the relay and controls the operation
of all other modules within the relay. The processor board also contains and controls
the user interfaces (LCD, LEDs, keypad and communication interfaces).
1.1.2 Input module
The input module converts the information contained in the analogue and digital
input signals into a format suitable for processing by the processor board. The
standard input module consists of two boards: a transformer board to provide
electrical isolation and a main input board which provides analogue to digital
conversion and the isolated digital inputs.
1.1.3 Power supply module
The power supply module provides a power supply to all of the other modules in the
relay, at three different voltage levels. The power supply board also provides the
EIA(RS)485 electrical connection for the rear communication port. On a second
board the power supply module contains the relays which provide the output
contacts.
1.1.4 RTD board
This optional board can be used to process the signals from up to 10 resistance
temperature detectors (RTDs) to measure the winding and ambient temperatures.
1.1.5 IRIG-B board
This board, which is optional, can be used where an IRIG-B signal is available to
provide an accurate time reference for the relay. There is also an option on this
board to specify a fibre optic rear communication port, for use with IEC60870
communication only.
All modules are connected by a parallel data and address bus which allows the
processor board to send and receive information to and from the other modules as
required. There is also a separate serial data bus for conveying sample data from
the input module to the processor. Figure 1 shows the modules of the relay and the
flow of information between them.
1.1.6 Second rear comms board
The optional second rear port is designed typically for dial-up modem access by
protection engineers/operators, when the main port is reserved for SCADA traffic.
Communication is via one of three physical links: K-Bus, EIA(RS)485 or EIA(RS)232.
The port supports full local or remote protection and control access by MiCOM S1
software.
P34x/EN HW/F33 Relay Description

Page 4/20 MiCOM P342, P343

Present Executable software


Alarm, event, fault,
values code & data, setting Default settings &
disturbance &
of all database data parameters, language text,
maintenance
settings software code
records

Battery
Flash
backed-up E 2PROM SRAM
EPROM
SRAM

Front LCD panel RS232 Front comms port

Parallel test port


CPU

LEDs Main processor board

Timing data

IRIG-B signal IRIG-B board


optional Serial data bus
(sample data)

Fibre optic
rear comms
port optional

Power supply, rear comms Parallel data bus


data, output relay status Digital input values
Output relay contacts (x7)

Digital inputs (x8)


Output relays

Opto-isolated
inputs
Relay board ADC Input
board

Power supply (3 voltages),


rear comms data Analogue input signals

Power supply board Transformer board

Power Watchdog Field Rear RS485


Current & voltage inputs up to 9 (for feeder)
supply contacts voltage communication port

P0126ENa

Figure 1: Relay modules and information flow


1.2 Software overview
The software for the relay can be conceptually split into four elements: the real-time
operating system, the system services software, the platform software and the
protection and control software. These four elements are not distinguishable to the
user, and are all processed by the same processor board. The distinction between
the four parts of the software is made purely for the purpose of explanation here:
Relay Description P34x/EN HW/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 5/20

1.2.1 Real-time operating system


The real-time operating system is used to provide a framework for the different parts
of the relay’s software to operate within. To this end the software is split into tasks.
The real-time operating system is responsible for scheduling the processing of these
tasks such that they are carried out in the time available and in the desired order of
priority. The operating system is also responsible for the exchange of information
between tasks, in the form of messages.
1.2.2 System services software
The system services software provides the low-level control of the relay hardware. For
example, the system services software controls the boot of the relay’s software from
the non-volatile flash EPROM memory at power-on, and provides driver software for
the user interface via the LCD and keypad, and via the serial communication ports.
The system services software provides an interface layer between the control of the
relay’s hardware and the rest of the relay software.
1.2.3 Platform software
The platform software deals with the management of the relay settings, the user
interfaces and logging of event, alarm, fault and maintenance records. All of the
relay settings are stored in a database within the relay which provides direct
compatibility with Courier communications. For all other interfaces (i.e. the front
panel keypad and LCD interface, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103 and DNP3.0) the
platform software converts the information from the database into the format
required. The platform software notifies the protection & control software of all
settings changes and logs data as specified by the protection & control software.
1.2.4 Protection and control software
The protection and control software performs the calculations for all of the protection
algorithms of the relay. This includes digital signal processing such as Fourier
filtering and ancillary tasks such as the disturbance recorder. The protection &
control software interfaces with the platform software for settings changes and
logging of records, and with the system services software for acquisition of sample
data and access to output relays and digital opto-isolated inputs.
1.2.5 Disturbance recorder
The disturbance recorder software is passed the sampled analogue values and logic
signals from the protection and control software. This software compresses the data
to allow a greater number of records to be stored. The platform software interfaces
to the disturbance recorder to allow extraction of the stored records.

2. HARDWARE MODULES
The relay is based on a modular hardware design where each module performs a
separate function within the relay’s operation. This section describes the functional
operation of the various hardware modules.
2.1 Processor board
The relay is based around a TMS320C32 floating point, 32-bit digital signal
processor (DSP) operating at a clock frequency of 20MHz. This processor performs
all of the calculations for the relay, including the protection functions, control of the
data communication and user interfaces including the operation of the LCD, keypad
and LEDs.
P34x/EN HW/F33 Relay Description

Page 6/20 MiCOM P342, P343

The processor board is located directly behind the relay’s front panel which allows the
LCD and LEDs to be mounted on the processor board along with the front panel
communication ports. These comprise the 9-pin D-connector for EIA(RS)232 serial
communications (e.g. using MiCOM S1 and Courier communications) and the 25-pin
D-connector relay test port for parallel communication. All serial communication is
handled using a two-channel 85C30 serial communications controller (SCC).
The memory provided on the main processor board is split into two categories,
volatile and non-volatile: the volatile memory is fast access (zero wait state) SRAM
which is used for the storage and execution of the processor software, and data
storage as required during the processor’s calculations. The non-volatile memory is
sub-divided into 3 groups: 2MB of flash memory for non-volatile storage of software
code and text together with default settings, 256kB of battery backed-up SRAM for the
storage of disturbance, event, fault and maintenance record data, and 32kB of
E2PROM memory for the storage of configuration data, including the present setting
values.
2.2 Internal communication buses
The relay has two internal buses for the communication of data between different
modules. The main bus is a parallel link which is part of a 64-way ribbon cable. The
ribbon cable carries the data and address bus signals in addition to control signals
and all power supply lines. Operation of the bus is driven by the main processor
board which operates as a master while all other modules within the relay are slaves.
The second bus is a serial link which is used exclusively for communicating the digital
sample values from the input module to the main processor board. The DSP
processor has a built-in serial port which is used to read the sample data from the
serial bus. The serial bus is also carried on the 64-way ribbon cable.
2.3 Input module
The input module provides the interface between the relay processor board(s) and the
analogue and digital signals coming into the relay. The input module of P342
consists of two PDBs; the main input board and the transformer board. This relay
provides four voltage inputs and five current inputs. The P343 input module contains
an additional transformer board, providing a total of four voltage inputs and eight
current inputs.
2.3.1 Transformer board
The standard transformer board holds up to four voltage transformers (VTs) and up
to five current transformers (CTs). The auxiliary transformer board adds up to four
more CTs. The current inputs will accept either 1A or 5A nominal current (menu and
wiring options) and the voltage inputs can be specified for either 110V or 440V
nominal voltage (order option). The transformers are used both to step-down the
currents and voltages to levels appropriate to the relay’s electronic circuitry and to
provide effective isolation between the relay and the power system. The connection
arrangements of both the current and voltage transformer secondaries provide
differential input signals to the main input board to reduce noise.
2.3.2 Input board
The main input board is shown as a block diagram in Figure 2. It provides the
circuitry for the digital input signals and the analogue-to-digital conversion for the
analogue signals. Hence it takes the differential analogue signals from the CTs and
VTs on the transformer board(s), converts these to digital samples and transmits the
samples to the main processor board via the serial data bus. On the input board the
analogue signals are passed through an anti-alias filter before being multiplexed into
Relay Description P34x/EN HW/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 7/20

a single analogue-to-digital converter chip. The A-D converter provides 16-bit


resolution and a serial data stream output. The digital input signals are optically
isolated on this board to prevent excessive voltages on these inputs causing damage
to the relay's internal circuitry.

Anti-alias filters
Low 8 digital inputs
Diffn Optical Optical
VT to pass 8
single isolator isolator
filter
3/4 voltage inputs

Transformer board

Noise 8 Noise
4 4 4 filter filter
board
Input

Parallel bus
Buffer
Diffn Low
VT to pass
single filter

Diffn Low
CT to pass Multiplexer
single filter
16-bit Serial
16:1

Buffer
ADC interface
Serial sample
data bus
Up to 5 current inputs

Sample
control Trigger from processor
Up to 5 Up to 5 Up to 5 board

Calibration
E2 PROM
Parallel bus

Diffn Low
CT to pass
single filter

P0127ENa

Figure 2: Main input board


The signal multiplexing arrangement provides for 16 analogue channels to be
sampled. This allows for up to 9 current inputs and 4 voltage inputs to be
accommodated. The 3 spare channels are used to sample 3 different reference
voltages for the purpose of continually checking the operation of the multiplexer and
the accuracy of the A-D converter. The sample rate is maintained at 24 samples per
cycle of the power waveform by a logic control circuit which which is driven by the
frequency tracking function on the main processor board. The calibration E2PROM
holds the calibration coefficients which are used by the processor board to correct for
any amplitude or phase error introduced by the transformers and analogue circuitry.
The other function of the input board is to read the state of the signals present on the
digital inputs and present this to the parallel data bus for processing. The input
board holds 8 optical isolators for the connection of up to eight digital input signals.
The opto-isolators are used with the digital signals for the same reason as the
transformers with the analogue signals; to isolate the relay’s electronics from the
power system environment. A 48V ‘field voltage’ supply is provided at the back of
the relay for use in driving the digital opto-inputs. The input board provides some
hardware filtering of the digital signals to remove unwanted noise before buffering
the signals for reading on the parallel data bus. Depending on the relay model,
more than 8 digital input signals can be accepted by the relay. This is achieved by
the use of an additional opto-board which contains the same provision for 8 isolated
digital inputs as the main input board, but does not contain any of the circuits for
analogue signals which are provided on the main input board.
P34x/EN HW/F33 Relay Description

Page 8/20 MiCOM P342, P343

2.3.3 Universal opto isolated logic inputs


The P340 series relays are fitted with universal opto isolated logic inputs that can be
programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of which they are a part.
They nominally provide a Logic 1 or On value for Voltages ≥80% of the set lower
nominal voltage and a Logic 0 or Off value for the voltages ≤60% of the set higher
nominal voltage. This lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during
a battery earth fault, when stray capacitance may present up to 50% of battery
voltage across an input.
Each input also has a pre-set filter of ½ cycle which renders the input immune to
induced noise on the wiring: although this method is secure it can be slow,
particularly for intertripping.
For the P342 and P343 generator protection relays, the protection task is executed
four times per cycle, i.e. after every 6 samples for the sample rate of 24 samples per
power cycle used by the relay. Therefore, the time taken to register a change in the
state of an opto input can vary between a half to three quarters of a cycle. The time
to register the change of state will depend on if the opto input changes state at the
start or end of a protection task cycle with the additional half cycle filtering time.
In the Opto Config menu the nominal battery voltage can be selected for all opto
inputs by selecting one of the five standard ratings in the Global Nominal V settings.
If Custom is selected then each opto input can individually be set to a nominal
voltage value.

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
OPTO CONFIG
24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250,
Global Nominal V 24-27
Custom
Opto Input 1 24-27 24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250
Opto Input 2-32 24-27 24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250

2.4 Power supply module (including output relays)


The power supply module contains two PCBs, one for the power supply unit itself and
the other for the output relays. The power supply board also contains the input and
output hardware for the rear communication port which provides an EIA(RS)485
communication interface.
2.4.1 Power supply board (including EIA(RS)485 communication interface)
One of three different configurations of the power supply board can be fitted to the
relay. This will be specified at the time of order and depends on the nature of the
supply voltage that will be connected to the relay. The three options are shown in
table 1 below.

Nominal dc Range Nominal ac Range


24/48V dc only
48/110V 30/100Vrms
110/250V 100/240Vrms

Table 1: Power supply options


Relay Description P34x/EN HW/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 9/20

The output from all versions of the power supply module are used to provide isolated
power supply rails to all of the other modules within the relay. Three voltage levels
are used within the relay, 5.1V for all of the digital circuits, ±16V for the analogue
electronics, e.g. on the input board, and 22V for driving the output relay coils and the
RTD board if fitted. All power supply voltages including the 0V earth line are
distributed around the relay via the 64-way ribbon cable. One further voltage level is
provided by the power supply board which is the field voltage of 48V. This is brought
out to terminals on the back of the relay so that it can be used to drive the optically
isolated digital inputs.
The two other functions provided by the power supply board are the EIA(RS)485
communications interface and the watchdog contacts for the relay. The EIA(RS)485
interface is used with the relay’s rear communication port to provide communication
using one of either Courier, Modbus, or IEC60870-5-103, DNP3.0 protocols. The
EIA(RS)485 hardware supports half-duplex communication and provides optical
isolation of the serial data being transmitted and received. All internal
communication of data from the power supply board is conducted via the output
relay board which is connected to the parallel bus.
The watchdog facility provides two output relay contacts, one normally open and one
normally closed which are driven by the main processor board. These are provided
to give an indication that the relay is in a healthy state.
2.4.2 Output relay board
There are 2 versions of the output relay board one with seven relays, three normally
open contacts and four changeover contacts and one with eight relays, six normally
open contacts and two changeover contacts.
For relay models with suffix A hardware, only the 7 output relay boards were
available. For equivalent relay models in suffix B hardware or greater the base
numbers of output contacts, using the 7 output relay boards, is being maintained for
compatibility. The 8 output relay board is only used for new relay models or existing
relay models available in new case sizes or to provide additional output contacts to
existing models for suffix issue B or greater hardware. Note, the model number suffix
letter refers to the hardware version.
The relays are driven from the 22V power supply line. The relays’ state is written to
or read from using the parallel data bus. Depending on the relay model, more than
seven output contacts may be provided, through the use of up to three extra relay
boards. Each additional relay board provides a further seven or eight output relays.
2.5 RTD board
The RTD (Resistance Temperature Detector) board is an order option. It is used to
monitor the temperature readings from up to ten PT100 RTDs which are each
connected using a 3-wire connection. The board is powered from the 22V power rail
that is used to drive the output relays. The RTD board includes two redundant
channels which are connected to high stability resistors to provide reference readings.
These are used to check the operation of the RTD board. The temperature data is
read by the processor via the parallel data bus, and is used to provide thermal
protection of the generator windings.
2.6 IRIG-B board
The IRIG-B board is an order option which can be fitted to provide an accurate timing
reference for the relay. This can be used wherever an IRIG-B signal is available. The
IRIG-B signal is connected to the board via a BNC connector on the back of the relay.
The timing information is used to synchronise the relay’s internal real-time clock to an
P34x/EN HW/F33 Relay Description

Page 10/20 MiCOM P342, P343

accuracy of 1ms. The internal clock is then used for the time tagging of the event,
fault maintenance and disturbance records.
The IRIG-B board can also be specified with a fibre optic transmitter/receiver which
can be used for the rear communication port instead of the EIA(RS)485 electrical
connection (IEC60870 only).
2.7 Mechanical layout
The case materials of the relay are constructed from pre-finished steel which has a
conductive covering of aluminium and zinc. This provides good earthing at all joints
giving a low impedance path to earth which is essential for performance in the
presence of external noise. The boards and modules use a multi-point earthing
strategy to improve the immunity to external noise and minimise the effect of circuit
noise. Ground planes are used on boards to reduce impedance paths and spring
clips are used to ground the module metalwork.
Heavy duty terminal blocks are used at the rear of the relay for the current and
voltage signal connections. Medium duty terminal blocks are used for the digital
logic input signals, the output relay contacts, the power supply and the rear
communication port. A BNC connector is used for the optional IRIG-B signal. 9-pin
and 25-pin female D-connectors are used at the front of the relay for data
communication.
Inside the relay the PCBs plug into the connector blocks at the rear, and can be
removed from the front of the relay only. The connector blocks to the relay’s CT
inputs are provided with internal shorting links inside the relay which will
automatically short the current transformer circuits before they are broken when the
board is removed.
The front panel consists of a membrane keypad with tactile dome keys, an LCD and
12 LEDs mounted on an aluminium backing plate.
2.8 Second rear communications board
For relays with Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol on the first rear
communications port there is the hardware option of a second rear communications
port, which will run the Courier language. This can be used over one of three
physical links: twisted pair K-Bus (non polarity sensitive), twisted pair EIA(RS)485
(connection polarity sensitive) or EIA(RS)232.
The second rear comms board and IRIG-B board are mutually exclusive since they
use the same hardware slot. For this reason two versions of second rear comms
board are available; one with an IRIG-B input and one without. The physical layout
of the second rear comms board is shown in Figure 3.
Relay Description P34x/EN HW/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 11/20

Optional IRIG-B Language:

Courier always

Courier Port Physical links:


SK4 EIA 232
(EIA232/EIA485)
or
EIA 485 (polarity sensitive)
or
Not used (EIA232) SK5 K-Bus (non polarity sensitive)

Physical links are s/w selectable


P2083ENa

Figure 3: Second rear comms port


2.9 Current loop input output board (CLIO)
The current loop input output (CLIO) board is an order option. The CLIO board is
powered from the 22V power rail that is used to drive the output relays.
Four analogue (or current loop) inputs are provided for transducers with ranges of
0-1mA, 0-10mA, 0-20mA or 4-20mA. The input current data is read by the
processor via the parallel data bus, and is used to provide measurements from
various transducers such as vibration monitors, tachometers and pressure
transducers.
For each of the four current loop inputs there are two separate input circuits, 0-1mA
and 0-20mA (which is also used for 0-10mA and 4-20mA transducer inputs). The
anti-alias filters have a nominal cut-off frequency (3dB point) of 23Hz to reduce
power system interference from the incoming signals.
Four analogue current outputs are provided with ranges of 0-1mA, 0-10mA, 0-20mA
or 4-20mA which can alleviate the need for separate transducers. These may be
used to feed standard moving coil ammeters for analogue indication of certain
measured quantities or into a SCADA using an existing analogue RTU.
Each of the four current loop outputs provides one 0 –1mA output, one 0-20mA
output and one common return. Suitable software scaling of the value written to the
board allows the 0-20mA output to also provide 0-10mA and 4-20mA. Screened
leads are recommended for use on the current loop output circuits.
The refresh interval for the outputs is nominally 50ms. The exceptions are shown in
section 2.27.3 of P34x/EN AP/E33. Those exceptional measurements are updated
once every second.
All external connections to the current loop I/O board are made via the same 15 way
light duty I/O connector SL3.5/15/90F used on the RTD board. Two such connectors
are used, one for the current loop outputs and one for the current loop inputs.
P34x/EN HW/F33 Relay Description

Page 12/20 MiCOM P342, P343

The I/O connectors accommodate wire sizes in the range 1/0.85mm (0.57mm2) to
1/1.38mm (1.5mm2) and their multiple conductor equivalents. The use of screened
cable is recommended. The screen terminations should be connected to the case
earth of the relay.
Basic Insulation (300V) is provided between analogue inputs/outputs and earth and
between analogue inputs and outputs. However, there is no insulation between one
input and another or one output and another.

Connection IO Blocks Connection


Outputs
0-10/0-20/4-20mA channel 1
0-1mA channel 1
Screen channel 1 Common return channel 1

0-10/0-20/4-20mA channel 2
0-1mA channel 2
Screen channel 2 Common return channel 2

0-10/0-20/4-20mA channel 3
0-1mA channel 3
Screen channel 3
Common return channel 3

0-10/0-20/4-20mA channel 4
Screen channel 4 0-1mA channel 4
Common return channel 4

Inputs
0-10/0-20/4-20mA channel 1
0-1mA channel 1
Screen channel 1 Common channel 1

0-10/0-20/4-20mA channel 2
0-1mA channel 2
Screen channel 2 Common channel 2

0-10/0-20/4-20mA channel 3
0-1mA channel 3
Screen channel 3
Common channel 3

0-10/0-20/4-20mA channel 4
Screen channel 4 0-1mA channel 4
Common channel 4

Figure 4: Current loop input output board


Relay Description P34x/EN HW/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 13/20

3. RELAY SOFTWARE
The relay software was introduced in the overview of the relay at the start of this
section. The software can be considered to be made up of four sections:
• the real-time operating system
• the system services software
• the platform software
• the protection & control software
This section describes in detail the latter two of these, the platform software and the
protection & control software, which between them control the functional behaviour of
the relay. Figure 5 shows the structure of the relay software.

Protection & Control


Measurements and event, fault
Software
& disturbance records
Disturbance
recorder task

Protection
Programable & task
fixed scheme logic

Platform Software
Fourier signal Protection
Event, fault, Remote
processing algorithms
disturbance, communications
maintenance record interface -
logging IEC60870-5-103
Supervisor task
Protection & control settings

Settings Remote
communications
database
interface - Modbus

Sampling function -
copies samples into
2 cycle buffer Control of output contacts and Front panel Local & Remote
programmable LEDs interface - LCD & communications
keypad interface - Courier

Sample data & digital


logic inputs Control of interfaces to keypad, LCD,
LEDs, front & rear comms ports.
Self-checking maintenance records

System services software

Relay hardware

P0128ENa

Figure 5: Relay software structure


3.1 Real-time operating system
The software is split into tasks; the real-time operating system is used to schedule the
processing of the tasks to ensure that they are processed in the time available and in
the desired order of priority. The operating system is also responsible in part for
controlling the communication between the software tasks through the use of
operating system messages.
3.2 System services software
As shown in Figure 5, the system services software provides the interface between the
relay’s hardware and the higher-level functionality of the platform software and the
protection & control software. For example, the system services software provides
drivers for items such as the LCD display, the keypad and the remote communication
ports, and controls the boot of the processor and downloading of the processor code
into SRAM from non-volatile flash EPROM at power up.
P34x/EN HW/F33 Relay Description

Page 14/20 MiCOM P342, P343

3.3 Platform software


The platform software has three main functions:
• to control the logging of all records that are generated by the protection software,
including alarms and event, fault, disturbance and maintenance records.
• to store and maintain a database of all of the relay’s settings in non-volatile
memory.
• to provide the internal interface between the settings database and each of the
relay’s user interfaces, i.e. the front panel interface and the front and rear
communication ports, using whichever communication protocol has been
specified (Courier, Modbus, IEC60870-5-103, DNP 3.0).
3.3.1 Record logging
The logging function is provided to store all alarms, events, faults and maintenance
records. The records for all of these incidents are logged in battery backed-up SRAM
in order to provide a non-volatile log of what has happened. The relay maintains
four logs: one each for up to 32 alarms, 250 event records, 5 fault records and 5
maintenance records. The logs are maintained such that the oldest record is
overwritten with the newest record. The logging function can be initiated from the
protection software or the platform software.
The logging function can be initiated from the protection software or the platform
software is responsible for logging of a maintenance record in the event of a relay
failure. This includes errors that have been detected by the platform software itself or
error that are detected by either the system services or the protection software
functions. See also the section on supervision and diagnostics later in this section.
3.3.2 Settings database
The settings database contains all of the settings and data for the relay, including the
protection, disturbance recorder and control & support settings. The settings are
maintained in non-volatile E2PROM memory. The platform software’s management
of the settings database includes the responsibility of ensuring that only one user
interface modifies the settings of the database at any one time. This feature is
employed to avoid confusion between different parts of the software during a setting
change. For changes to protection settings and disturbance recorder settings, the
platform software operates a ‘scratchpad’ in SRAM memory. This allows a number of
setting changes to be made in any order but applied to the protection elements,
disturbance recorder and saved in the database in E2PROM, at the same time (see
also section P34x/EN IT/E33 on the user interface). If a setting change affects the
protection & control task, the database advises it of the new values.
3.3.3 Database interface
The other function of the platform software is to implement the relay’s internal
interface between the database and each of the relay’s user interfaces. The database
of settings and measurements must be accessible from all of the relay’s user
interfaces to allow read and modify operations. The platform software presents the
data in the appropriate format for each user interface.
3.4 Protection & control software
The protection and control software task is responsible for processing all of the
protection elements and measurement functions of the relay. To achieve this it has to
communicate with both the system services software and the platform software as well
as organise its own operations. The protection software has the highest priority of
Relay Description P34x/EN HW/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 15/20

any of the software tasks in the relay in order to provide the fastest possible protection
response. The protection & control software has a supervisor task which controls the
start-up of the task and deals with the exchange of messages between the task and
the platform software.
3.4.1 Overview - protection & control scheduling
After initialisation at start-up, the protection & control task is suspended until there
are sufficient samples available for it to process. The acquisition of samples is
controlled by a ‘sampling function’ which is called by the system services software
and takes each set of new samples from the input module and stores them in a two-
cycle buffer. The protection & control software resumes execution when the number
of unprocessed samples in the buffer reaches a certain number. For the P342 and
P343 generator protection relays, the protection task is executed four times per cycle,
i.e. after every 6 samples for the sample rate of 24 samples per power cycle used by
the relay. However, the protection elements are split into groups so that different
elements are processed each time, with every element being processed at least once
per cycle. The protection and control software is suspended again when all of its
processing on a set of samples is complete. This allows operations by other software
tasks to take place.
3.4.2 Signal processing
The sampling function provides filtering of the digital input signals from the opto-
isolators and frequency tracking of the analogue signals. The digital inputs are
checked against their previous value over a period of half a cycle. Hence a change
in the state of one of the inputs must be maintained over at least half a cycle before it
is registered with the protection & control software.
The frequency tracking of the analogue input signals is achieved by a recursive
Fourier algorithm which is applied to one of the input signals, and works by detecting
a change in the measured signal’s phase angle. The calculated value of the
frequency is used to modify the sample rate being used by the input module so as to
achieve a constant sample rate of 24 samples per cycle of the power waveform. The
value of the frequency is also stored for use by the protection & control task.
When the protection & control task is re-started by the sampling function, it calculates
the Fourier components for the analogue signals. The Fourier components are
calculated using a one-cycle, 24-sample Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). The DFT
is always calculated using the last cycle of samples from the 2-cycle buffer, i.e. the
most recent data is used. The DFT used in this way extracts the power frequency
fundamental component from the signal and produces the magnitude and phase
angle of the fundamental in rectangular component format. The DFT provides an
accurate measurement of the fundamental frequency component, and effective
filtering of harmonic frequencies and noise. This performance is achieved in
conjunction with the relay input module which provides hardware anti-alias filtering
to attenuate frequencies above the half sample rate, and frequency tracking to
maintain a sample rate of 24 samples per cycle. The Fourier components of the
input current and voltage signals are stored in memory so that they can be accessed
by all of the protection elements’ algorithms. The samples from the input module are
also used in an unprocessed form by the disturbance recorder for waveform
recording and to calculate true rms values of current, voltage and power for metering
purposes.
P34x/EN HW/F33 Relay Description

Page 16/20 MiCOM P342, P343

3.4.3 Programmable scheme logic


The purpose of the programmable scheme logic (PSL) is to allow the relay user to
configure an individual protection scheme to suit their own particular application.
This is achieved through the use of programmable logic gates and delay timers.
The input to the PSL is any combination of the status of the digital input signals from
the opto-isolators on the input board, the outputs of the protection elements, e.g.
protection starts and trips, and the outputs of the fixed protection scheme logic. The
fixed scheme logic provides the relay’s standard protection schemes. The PSL itself
consists of software logic gates and timers. The logic gates can be programmed to
perform a range of different logic functions and can accept any number of inputs.
The timers are used either to create a programmable delay, and/or to condition the
logic outputs, e.g. to create a pulse of fixed duration on the output regardless of the
length of the pulse on the input. The outputs of the PSL are the LEDs on the front
panel of the relay and the output contacts at the rear.
The execution of the PSL logic is event driven; the logic is processed whenever any of
its inputs change, for example as a result of a change in one of the digital input
signals or a trip output from a protection element. Also, only the part of the PSL logic
that is affected by the particular input change that has occurred is processed. This
reduces the amount of processing time that is used by the PSL. The protection &
control software updates the logic delay timers and checks for a change in the PSL
input signals every time it runs.
This system provides flexibility for the user to create their own scheme logic design.
However, it also means that the PSL can be configured into a very complex system,
and because of this setting of the PSL is implemented through the PC support
package MiCOM S1.
3.4.3.1 PSL data
In the PSL editor in MiCOM S1 when a PSL file is downloaded to the relay the user
can specify the group to download the file and a 32 character PSL reference
description. This PSL reference is shown in the ‘Grp1/2/3/4 PSL Ref’ cell in the ‘PSL
DATA’ menu in the relay. The download date and time and file checksum for each
groups PSL file is also shown in the ‘PSL DATA’ menu in cells ‘Date/Time’ and ‘Grp
1/2/3/4 PSL ID’. The PSL data can be used to indicate if a PSL has been changed
and thus be useful in providing information for version control of PSL files.
The default PSL Reference description is “Default PSL” followed by the model number
e.g. “Default PSL P34x??????0yy0?” where x refers to the model e.g. 1, 2, 3 and yy
refers to the software version e.g. 05. This is the same for all protection setting
groups (since the default PSL is the same for all groups). Since the LCD display
(bottom line) only has space for 16 characters the display must be scrolled to see all
32 characters of the PSL Reference description.
The default date and time is the date and time when the defaults were loaded from
flash into EEPROM.
NOTE: The PSL DATA column information is only supported by Courier
and Modbus, but not DNP3 or IEC60870-5-103.
3.4.4 Event, fault & maintenance recording
A change in any digital input signal or protection element output signal is used to
indicate that an event has taken place. When this happens, the protection & control
task sends a message to the supervisor task to indicate that an event is available to
be processed and writes the event data to a fast buffer in SRAM which is controlled by
the supervisor task. When the supervisor task receives either an event or fault record
Relay Description P34x/EN HW/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 17/20

message, it instructs the platform software to create the appropriate log in battery
backed-up SRAM. The operation of the record logging to battery backed-up SRAM is
slower than the supervisor’s buffer. This means that the protection software is not
delayed waiting for the records to be logged by the platform software. However, in
the rare case when a large number of records to be logged are created in a short
period of time, it is possible that some will be lost if the supervisor’s buffer is full
before the platform software is able to create a new log in battery backed-up SRAM.
If this occurs then an event is logged to indicate this loss of information.
Maintenance records are created in a similar manner with the supervisor task
instructing the platform software to log a record when it receives a maintenance
record message. However, it is possible that a maintenance record may be triggered
by a fatal error in the relay in which case it may not be possible to successfully store a
maintenance record, depending on the nature of the problem. See also the section
on self supervision & diagnostics later in this section.
3.4.5 Disturbance recorder
The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection & control
task. It can record the waveforms for up to 8 analogue channels and the values of
up to 32 digital signals. The recording time is user selectable up to a maximum of
10 seconds. The disturbance recorder is supplied with data by the protection &
control task once per cycle. The disturbance recorder collates the data that it receives
into the required length disturbance record. It attempts to limit the demands it places
on memory space by saving the analogue data in compressed format whenever
possible. This is done by detecting changes in the analogue input signals and
compressing the recording of the waveform when it is in a steady-state condition.
The compressed disturbance records can be decompressed by MiCOM S1 which can
also store the data in COMTRADE format, thus allowing the use of other packages to
view the recorded data.

4. SELF TESTING & DIAGNOSTICS


The relay includes a number of self-monitoring functions to check the operation of its
hardware and software when it is in service. These are included so that if an error or
fault occurs within the relay’s hardware or software, the relay is able to detect and
report the problem and attempt to resolve it by performing a re-boot. This involves
the relay being out of service for a short period of time which is indicated by the
‘Healthy’ LED on the front of the relay being extinguished and the watchdog contact
at the rear operating. If the restart fails to resolve the problem, then the relay will
take itself permanently out of service. Again this will be indicated by the LED and
watchdog contact.
If a problem is detected by the self-monitoring functions, the relay attempts to store a
maintenance record in battery backed-up SRAM to allow the nature of the problem to
be notified to the user.
The self-monitoring is implemented in two stages: firstly a thorough diagnostic check
which is performed when the relay is booted-up, e.g. at power-on, and secondly a
continuous self-checking operation which checks the operation of the relay’s critical
functions whilst it is in service.
P34x/EN HW/F33 Relay Description

Page 18/20 MiCOM P342, P343

4.1 Start-up self-testing


The self-testing which is carried out when the relay is started takes a few seconds to
complete, during which time the relay’s protection is unavailable. This is signalled by
the ‘Healthy’ LED on the front of the relay which will illuminate when the relay has
passed all of the tests and entered operation. If the testing detects a problem, the
relay will remain out of service until it is manually restored to working order.
The operations that are performed at start-up are as follows:
4.1.1 System boot
The integrity of the flash EPROM memory is verified using a checksum before the
program code and data stored in it is copied into SRAM to be used for execution by
the processor. When the copy has been completed the data then held in SRAM is
compared to that in the flash EPROM to ensure that the two are the same and that no
errors have occurred in the transfer of data from flash EPROM to SRAM. The entry
point of the software code in SRAM is then called which is the relay initialisation code.
4.1.2 Initialisation software
The initialisation process includes the operations of initialising the processor registers
and interrupts, starting the watchdog timers (used by the hardware to determine
whether the software is still running), starting the real-time operating system and
creating and starting the supervisor task. In the course of the initialisation process the
relay checks:
• the status of the battery.
• the integrity of the battery backed-up SRAM that is used to store event, fault and
disturbance records.
• the voltage level of the field voltage supply which is used to drive the opto-isolated
inputs.
• the operation of the LCD controller.
• the watchdog operation.
At the conclusion of the initialisation software the supervisor task begins the process
of starting the platform software.
4.1.3 Platform software initialisation & monitoring
In starting the platform software, the relay checks the integrity of the data held in
E2PROM with a checksum, the operation of the real-time clock, and the IRIG-B, RTD
and CLIO board if fitted. The final test that is made concerns the input and output of
data; the presence and healthy condition of the input board is checked and the
analogue data acquisition system is checked through sampling the reference voltage.
At the successful conclusion of all of these tests the relay is entered into service and
the protection started-up.
Relay Description P34x/EN HW/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 19/20

4.2 Continuous self-testing


When the relay is in service, it continually checks the operation of the critical parts of
its hardware and software. The checking is carried out by the system services
software (see section on relay software earlier in this section) and the results reported
to the platform software. The functions that are checked are as follows:
• the flash EPROM containing all program code and language text is verified by a
checksum.
• the code and constant data held in SRAM is checked against the corresponding
data in flash EPROM to check for data corruption.
• the SRAM containing all data other than the code and constant data is verified
with a checksum.
• the E2PROM containing setting values is verified by a checksum, whenever its
data is accessed.
• the battery status.
• the level of the field voltage.
• the integrity of the digital signal I/O data from the opto-isolated inputs and the
relay contacts, is checked by the data acquisition function every time it is executed.
The operation of the analogue data acquisition system is continuously checked by
the acquisition function every time it is executed, by means of sampling the
reference voltage on a spare multiplexed channel.
• the operation of the RTD board is checked by reading the temperature indicated
by the reference resistors on the two spare RTD channels.
• the operation of the IRIG-B board is checked, where it is fitted, by the software
that reads the time and date from the board.
• The correct operation of the CLIO board is checked, where it is fitted.
In the unlikely event that one of the checks detects an error within the relay’s
subsystems, the platform software is notified and it will attempt to log a maintenance
record in battery backed-up SRAM. If the problem is with the battery status, the RTD
board, CLIO board or the IRIG-B board, the relay will continue in operation.
However, for problems detected in any other area the relay will initiate a shutdown
and re-boot. This will result in a period of up to 5 seconds when the protection is
unavailable, but the complete restart of the relay including all initialisations should
clear most problems that could occur. As described above, an integral part of the
start-up procedure is a thorough diagnostic self-check. If this detects the same
problem that caused the relay to restart, i.e. the restart has not cleared the problem,
then the relay will take itself permanently out of service. This is indicated by the
‘Healthy’ LED on the front of the relay, which will extinguish, and the watchdog
contact which will operate.
P34x/EN HW/F33 Relay Description

Page 20/20 MiCOM P342, P343


Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343

TECHNICAL DATA
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

MiCOM P342, P343


Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 1/52

CONTENT

1. RATINGS 7
1.1 Currents 7
1.2 Voltages 7
1.3 Auxiliary voltage 7
1.4 Frequency 8
1.5 ‘Universal’ logic inputs (P340 range) 8
1.6 Output relay contacts 8
1.7 Field voltage 9
1.8 Loop through connections 9
1.9 Wiring requirements 9

2. BURDENS 10
2.1 Current circuit 10
2.2 Voltage circuit 10
2.3 Auxiliary supply 10
2.4 Optically-isolated inputs 10

3. ACCURACY 10
3.1 Reference conditions 10
3.2 Influencing quantities 11

4. HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND 12


4.1 Dielectric withstand 12
4.2 Impulse 12
4.3 Insulation resistance 12
4.4 ANSI dielectric withstand 12

5. ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT 12
5.1 Performance criteria 12
5.1.1 Class A 13
5.1.2 Class B 13
5.1.3 Class C 13
5.2 Auxiliary supply tests, dc interruption, etc. 13
5.2.1 DC voltage interruptions 13
5.2.2 DC voltage fluctuations 13
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 2/52 MiCOM P342, P343

5.3 AC voltage dips and short interruptions 14


5.3.1 AC voltage short interruptions 14
5.3.2 AC voltage dips 14
5.4 High frequency disturbance 14
5.5 Fast transients 15
5.6 Conducted/radiated emissions 15
5.6.1 Conducted emissions 15
5.6.2 Radiated emissions 15
5.7 Conducted/radiated immunity 15
5.7.1 Conducted immunity 15
5.7.2 Radiated immunity 15
5.7.3 Radiated immunity from digital radio telephones 15
5.8 Electrostatic discharge 16
5.9 Surge immunity 16
5.10 Power frequency magnetic field 16
5.11 Power frequency interference 16
5.12 Surge withstand capability (SWC) 17
5.13 Radiated immunity 17

6. ATMOSPHERIC ENVIRONMENT 17
6.1 Temperature 17
6.2 Humidity 17
6.3 Enclosure protection 17

7. MECHANICAL ENVIRONMENT 18
7.1 Performance criteria 18
7.1.1 Severity classes 18
7.1.2 Vibration (sinusoidal) 18
7.1.3 Shock and bump 19
7.1.4 Seismic 19

8. EC EMC COMPLIANCE 19

9. EC LVD COMPLIANCE 19

10. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS 20


10.1 Generator differential protection (87G) {P343} 20
10.1.1 Setting ranges 20
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 3/52

10.1.2 Accuracy 20
10.2 2-Stage non-directional overcurrent (50/51) 20
10.2.1 Reset characteristics 22
10.2.2 RI curve 22
10.2.3 Accuracy 23
10.3 Restricted earth fault (low impedance) 26
10.3.1 Accuracy 26
10.4 2-Stage non-directional earth fault (50N/51N) 26
10.4.1 Setting ranges 26
10.4.2 Time delay settings 26
10.4.2.1 Accuracy 27
10.4.3 IDG curve 27
10.5 Neutral displacement/residual overvoltage (59N) 28
10.5.1 Setting ranges 28
10.5.2 Time delay settings 28
10.5.3 Accuracy 29
10.6 Sensitive directional earth fault (67N) 29
10.6.1 SEF accuracy 29
10.6.2 Wattmetric SEF accuracy 29
10.6.3 Polarising quantities accuracy 30
10.7 100% Stator earth fault {P343} 30
10.7.1 Accuracy 31
10.8 Voltage dependent overcurrent (51V) 31
10.8.1 Accuracy 32
10.9 Transient overreach and overshoot 32
10.9.1 Accuracy 32
10.10 Under impedance (21) 32
10.10.1 Accuracy 32
10.11 Under voltage (27) 33
10.11.1 Level settings 33
10.11.2 Under voltage protection time delay characteristics 33
10.11.3 Accuracy 33
10.12 Over voltage (59) 34
10.12.1 Level settings 34
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 4/52 MiCOM P342, P343

10.12.2 Over voltage protection time delay characteristics 34


10.12.3 Accuracy 34
10.13 Under frequency (81U) 35
10.13.1 Accuracy 35
10.14 Over frequency (81O) 35
10.14.1 Accuracy 35
10.15 Reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R /32L /32O) 35
10.15.1 Accuracy 36
10.16 Sensitive reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R /32L /32O) 36
10.16.1 Accuracy 37
10.17 Field failure (40) 37
10.17.1 Accuracy 38
10.18 Negative phase sequence thermal (46) 38
10.18.1 Accuracy 38
10.19 Volts/Hz (24) 38
10.19.1 Accuracy 39
10.20 Unintentional energisation at standstill (dead machine) {P343} 39
10.20.1 Accuracy 39
10.21 Resistive temperature detectors 39
10.21.1 Accuracy 39
10.22 Pole slipping (78) {P343} 40
10.22.1 Accuracy 40
10.22.2 Hysteresis 41
10.23 Thermal overload (49) 41
10.23.1 Accuracy 42

11. SUPERVISORY FUNCTIONS 42


11.1 Voltage transformer supervision 42
11.1.1 Accuracy 42
11.2 Current transformer supervision 42
11.2.1 Accuracy 43

12. PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC 43


12.1 Level settings 43
12.2 Accuracy 43
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 5/52

13. MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING FACILITIES 43


13.1 Measurements 43
13.2 IRIG-B and real time clock 44
13.2.1 Features 44
13.2.2 Performance 44
13.3 Current loop input and outputs (CLIO) 44
13.3.1 Accuracy 47
13.3.2 Performance 47

14. DISTURBANCE RECORDS 48


14.1 Level settings 48
14.2 Accuracy 48

15. PLANT SUPERVISION 48


15.1 CB state monitoring control and condition monitoring 48
15.1.1 CB monitor settings 48
15.1.2 CB control settings 48
15.1.3 Accuracy 48
15.2 CB fail and backtrip breaker fail 49
15.2.1 Timer settings 49
15.2.2 Timer accuracy 49
15.2.3 Undercurrent settings 49
15.2.4 Undercurrent accuracy 49

16. INPUT AND OUTPUT SETTING RANGES 49


16.1 CT and VT ratio settings 49

17. BATTERY LIFE 50

18. FREQUENCY RESPONSE 50

19. LOCAL AND REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS 51


19.1 Front Port 51
19.2 Rear Port 51
19.2.1 Performance 51
19.3 Second rear communications port 52
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 6/52 MiCOM P342, P343

Figure 1: IEC inverse time curves 24


Figure 2: American inverse time curves 25
Figure 3: IDG characteristic 28
Figure 4: Hysteresis of the pole slipping characteristic 41
Figure 5: Frequency response 50
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 7/52

1. RATINGS

1.1 Currents
In = 1A or 5A ac rms.
Separate terminals are provided for the 1A and 5A windings, with the neutral input of
each winding sharing one terminal.

CT Type Operating Range


Standard 0 to 16 Ιn
Sensitive 0 to 2 Ιn

Duration Withstand
Continuous rating 4 Ιn
10 minutes 4.5 Ιn
5 minutes 5 Ιn
3 minutes 6 Ιn
2 minutes 7 Ιn
10 seconds 30 Ιn
1 second 100 Ιn

1.2 Voltages
Maximum rated voltage relate to earth 300Vdc or 300Vrms.

Nominal Voltage Vn Short Term Above Vn (Operating Range)


100 – 120Vph - ph rms 0 to 200Vph - ph rms
380 – 480Vph - ph rms 0 to 800Vph - ph rms

Withstand Withstand
Duration
(Vn = 100/120V) (Vn = 380/480V)
Continuous (2Vn) 240Vph - ph rms 880Vph - ph rms
10 seconds (2.6Vn) 312Vph - ph rms 1144Vph - ph rms

1.3 Auxiliary voltage


The relay is available in three auxiliary voltage versions, these are specified in the
table below:

Operative dc Operative ac
Nominal Ranges
Range Range
24 – 48V dc 19 to 65V -
48 – 110V dc (30 – 100V ac rms) ** 37 to 150V 24 to 110V
110 – 240V dc (100 – 240V ac rms) ** 87 to 300V 80 to 265V

** rated for ac or dc operation.


P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 8/52 MiCOM P342, P343

1.4 Frequency
The nominal frequency (Fn) is dual rated at 50 – 60Hz, the operate range is
5Hz – 70Hz.

1.5 ‘Universal’ logic inputs (P340 range)


The P340 series relays are fitted with universal opto isolated logic inputs that can be
programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of which they are a part.
They nominally provide a Logic 1 or On value for Voltages ≥80% of the set lower
nominal voltage and a Logic 0 or Off value for the voltages ≤60% of the set higher
nominal voltage. This lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during
a battery earth fault, when stray capacitance may present up to 50% of battery
voltage across an input. Each input also has a pre-set filter of ½ cycle which renders
the input immune to induced noise on the wiring.
In the Opto Config menu the nominal battery voltage can be selected for all opto
inputs by selecting one of the five standard ratings in the Global Nominal V settings.
If Custom is selected then each opto input can individually be set to a nominal
voltage value.

Setting Range
Menu Text Default Setting Step Size
Min Max
OPTO CONFIG
24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250,
Global Nominal V 24-27
Custom
Opto Input 1 24-27 24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250
Opto Input 2-32 24-27 24-27, 30-34, 48-54, 110-125, 220-250

Battery Voltage (V dc) Logical “off” (V dc) Logical “on” (V dc)


24/27 <16.2 >19.2
30/34 <20.4 >24
48/54 <32.4 >38.4
110/125 <75 >88
220/250 <150 >176

All the logic inputs are independent and isolated. Relay type P342 has a base
number of opto inputs of 8 in the 40TE case and 16 in the 60TE case. Relay type
P343 has a base number of opto inputs of 16 in the 60TE case and 24 in the 80TE
case. One optional opto input board or one output relay relay board can be added
to each relay model to increase the number of opto inputs by 8 or relay contacts by
8.

1.6 Output relay contacts


There are 2 versions of the output relay board one with seven relays, three normally
open contacts and four changeover contacts and one with eight relays, six normally
open contacts and two changeover contacts.
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 9/52

For relay models with suffix A hardware, only the 7 output relay boards were
available. For equivalent relay models in suffix B hardware or greater the base
numbers of output contacts, using the 7 output relay boards, is being maintained for
compatibility. The 8 output relay board is only used for new relay models or existing
relay models available in new case sizes or to provide additional output contacts to
existing models for suffix issue B or greater hardware. Note, the model number suffix
letter refers to the hardware version.
Relay type P342 has a base number of relay contacts of 7 in the 40TE case and 16 in
the 60TE case. Relay type P343 has a base number of relay output contacts of 14 in
the 60TE case and 24 in the 80TE case. One optional output relay board or one
opto input board can be added to each relay model to increase the number of relay
contacts by 8 or opto inputs by 8.

Make & Carry 30A for 3s


250A for 30ms
Carry
10A continuous
dc: 50W resistive
dc: 62.5W inductive (L/R = 50ms)
ac: 2500VA resistive (P.F. =1)
Break
ac: 2500VA inductive (P.F. =0.7)

ac: 1250VA inductive (P.F. = 0.5)


Maxima: 10A and 300V
Loaded Contact: 10,000 operation minimum
Unloaded Contact: 100,000 operations minimum

Watchdog Contact
dc: 30W resistive
Break dc: 15W inductive (L/R = 40ms)
ac: 375VA inductive (P.F. = 0.7)

1.7 Field voltage


The field voltage provided by the relay is nominally 48V dc with a current limit of
112mA. The operating range shall be 40V to 60V with an alarm raised at <35V.

1.8 Loop through connections


Terminals D17 – D18 and F17 – F18 are internally connected together for
convenience when wiring, maxima 5A and 300V.

1.9 Wiring requirements


The requirements for the wiring of the relay and cable specifications are detailed in
the installation section of the Operation Guide (Volume 2, P34x/EN O/E33).
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 10/52 MiCOM P342, P343

2. BURDENS

2.1 Current circuit

CT burden (At Nominal Current)


Phase <0.15 VA
Earth <0.2VA

2.2 Voltage circuit

Reference Voltage (Vn)


Vn = 100 – 120V <0.06VA rms at 110V
Vn = 380 – 480V <0.06VA rms at 440V

2.3 Auxiliary supply

Case Size Minimum*


Size 8 /40TE 11W or 24 VA
Size 12 /60TE 11W or 24 VA
Size 16 /80TE 11W or 24 VA

* no output contacts or optos energised

Each additional energised opto input 0.09W (24/27, 30/34, 48/54 V)


Each additional energised opto input 0.12W (110/125 V)
Each additional energised opto input 0.19W (220/250 V)
Each additional energised output relay 0.13W

2.4 Optically-isolated inputs


Peak current of opto inputs when energised is 3.5 mA (0-300V).
Maximum input voltage 300 V dc (any setting).

3. ACCURACY
For all accuracies specified, the repeatability is ±2.5% unless otherwise specified.
If no range is specified for the validity of the accuracy, then the specified accuracy is
valid over the full setting range.

3.1 Reference conditions

Quantity Reference Conditions Test Tolerance


General
Ambient temperature 20 °C ±2°C
Atmospheric pressure 86kPa to 106kPa –
Relative humidity 45 to 75 % –
Input energising quantity
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 11/52

Quantity Reference Conditions Test Tolerance


General
Current Ιn ±5%
Voltage Vn ±5%
Frequency 50 or 60Hz ±0.5%
DC 48V or 110V
Auxiliary supply ±5%
AC 63.5V or 110V

Settings Reference value


Time multiplier setting 1.0
Time dial 7
Phase angle 0°

3.2 Influencing quantities


No additional errors will be incurred for any of the following influencing quantities:

Quantity Operative Range (Typical Only)


Environmental
Temperature –25°C to +55°C
According to
Mechanical (Vibration, Shock, IEC 60255-21-1:198
Bump, Seismic) IEC 60255-21-2:1988
IEC 60255-21-3:1995
Quantity Operative range
Electrical
Frequency 5 Hz to 70 Hz
Harmonics (single) 5% over the range 2nd to 17th
Auxiliary voltage range 0.8 LV to 1.2 HV (dc) 0.8 LV to 1.1 HV (ac)
Aux. supply ripple 12% Vn with a frequency of 2.fn
Point on wave of fault waveform 0 to 360°
DC offset of fault waveform No offset to fully offset
Phase angle –90° to + 90°
No operation with OC elements set to 35%
Magnetising inrush
of peak anticipated inrush level.
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 12/52 MiCOM P342, P343

4. HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND

4.1 Dielectric withstand


IEC60255-5:1997
2.0kVrms for one minute between all terminals and case earth.
2.0kVrms for one minute between all terminals of each independent circuit grouped
together, and all other terminals. This includes the output contacts and loop through
connections D17/D18 and F17/F18.
1.5kVrms for one minute across dedicated normally open contacts of output relays.
1.0kVrms for 1 minute across normally open contacts of changeover and watchdog
output relays.
1.0kVrms for 1 minute for all D-type connections between line and ground.

4.2 Impulse
IEC60255-5:1997
The product will withstand without damage impulses of 5kV peak, 1.2/50µs, 0.5J
across:
Each independent circuit and the case with the terminals of each independent circuit
connected together.
Independent circuits with the terminals of each independent circuit connected
together.
Terminals of the same circuit except normally open metallic contacts.

4.3 Insulation resistance


IEC60255-5:1997
The insulation resistance is greater than 100 MΩ at 500Vdc.

4.4 ANSI dielectric withstand


ANSI/IEEE C37.90. (1989) (Reaff. 1994)
1kV rms. for 1 minute across open contacts of the watchdog contacts.
1kV rms. for 1 minute across open contacts of changeover output contacts.
1.5kV rms. for 1 minute across normally open output contacts.

5. ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT

5.1 Performance criteria


The following three classes of performance criteria are used within sections 5.2 to
5.13 (where applicable) to specify the performance of the MiCOM relay when
subjected to the electrical interference. The performance criteria are based on the
performance criteria specified in EN 50082-2:1995.
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 13/52

5.1.1 Class A
During the testing the relay will not maloperate, upon completion of the testing the
relay will function as specified. A maloperation will include a transient operation of
the output contacts, operation of the watchdog contacts, reset of any of the relays
microprocessors or an alarm indication.
The relay communications and IRIG-B signal must continue uncorrupted via the
communications ports and IRIG-B port respectively during the test, however relay
communications and the IRIG-B signal may be momentarily interrupted during the
tests, provided that they recover with no external intervention.
5.1.2 Class B
During the testing the relay will not maloperate, upon completion of the testing the
relay will function as specified. A maloperation will include a transient operation of
the output contacts, operation of the watchdog contacts, reset of any of the relays
microprocessors or an alarm indication. A transitory operation of the output LEDs is
acceptable provided no permanent false indications are recorded.
The relay communications and IRIG-B signal must continue uncorrupted via the
communications ports and IRIG-B port respectively during the test, however relay
communications and the IRIG-B signal may be momentarily interrupted during the
tests, provided that they recover with no external intervention.
5.1.3 Class C
The relay will power down and power up again in a controlled manner within 5
seconds. The output relays are permitted to change state during the test as long as
they reset once the relay powers up.
Communications to relay may be suspended during the testing as long as
communication recovers with no external intervention after the testing.

5.2 Auxiliary supply tests, dc interruption, etc.


5.2.1 DC voltage interruptions
IEC 60255-11:1979.
DC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 2, 5, 10, 20ms.
Performance criteria - Class A.
DC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 50, 100, 200ms, 40s.
Performance criteria - Class C.
5.2.2 DC voltage fluctuations
IEC 60255-11:1979.
AC 100Hz ripple superimposed on DC max. and min. auxiliary supply at 12% of
highest rated DC.
Performance criteria - Class A.
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 14/52 MiCOM P342, P343

5.3 AC voltage dips and short interruptions


5.3.1 AC voltage short interruptions
IEC 61000-4-11:1994.
AC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 2, 5, 10, 20ms.
Performance criteria - Class A.
AC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 50, 100, 200ms, 1s, 40s.
Performance criteria - Class C.
5.3.2 AC voltage dips
IEC 61000-4-11:1994
AC Auxiliary Supply 100% Voltage Dips 2, 5, 10, 20ms.
Performance criteria –Class A.
AC Auxiliary Supply 100% Voltage Dips 50, 100, 200ms, 1s, 40s.
Performance criteria - Class C.
AC Auxiliary Supply 60% Voltage Dips 2, 5, 10, 20ms.
Performance criteria - Class A.
AC Auxiliary Supply 60% Voltage Dips 50, 100, 200ms, 1s, 40s.
Performance criteria - Class C.
AC Auxiliary Supply 30% Voltage Dips 2, 5, 10, 20ms.
Performance criteria - Class A.
AC Auxiliary Supply 30% Voltage Dips 50, 100, 200ms, 1s, 40s.
Performance criteria - Class C.

5.4 High frequency disturbance


IEC 60255-22-1:1988 Class III.
1MHz burst disturbance test.
2.5kV common mode.
Power supply, field voltage, CTs, VTs, opto inputs, output contacts, IRIG-B and
terminal block communications connections.
1kV differential mode.
Power supply, field voltage, CTs, VTs, opto inputs and output contacts.
Performance criteria Class A.
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 15/52

5.5 Fast transients


IEC 60255-22-4:1992 (EN 61000-4-4:1995), Class III and Class IV.
2kV 5kHz (Class III) and 4kV 2.5kHz (Class IV) direct coupling.
Power supply, field voltage, opto inputs, output contacts, CTs, VTs.
2kV 5kHz (Class III) and 4kV 2.5kHz (Class IV) capacitive clamp.
IRIG-B and terminal block communications connections.
Performance criteria Class A.

5.6 Conducted/radiated emissions


5.6.1 Conducted emissions
EN 55011:1998 Class A, EN 55022:1994 Class A.
0.15 - 0.5MHz, 79dBµV (quasi peak) 66dBµV (average).
0.5 - 30MHz, 73dBµV (quasi peak) 60dBµV (average).
5.6.2 Radiated emissions
EN 55011:1998 Class A, EN 55022:1994 Class A.
30 - 230MHz, 40dBµV/m at 10m measurement distance.
230 - 1000MHz, 47dBµV/m at 10m measurement distance.

5.7 Conducted/radiated immunity


5.7.1 Conducted immunity
EN 61000-4-6:1996 Level 3.
10V emf @ 1kHz 80% am, 150kHz to 80MHz. Spot tests at 27MHz, 68MHz.
Performance criteria Class A.
5.7.2 Radiated immunity
IEC 60255-22-3:1989 Class III (EN 61000-4-3: 1997 Level 3).
10 V/m 80MHz - 1GHz @ 1kHz 80% am.
Spot tests at 80MHz, 160MHz, 450MHz, 900MHz.
Performance criteria Class A.
5.7.3 Radiated immunity from digital radio telephones
ENV 50204:1995
10 V/m 900MHz ± 5 MHz and 1.89GHz ±5MHz, 200Hz rep. Freq., 50% duty cycle
pulse modulated.
Performance criteria Class A.
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 16/52 MiCOM P342, P343

5.8 Electrostatic discharge


IEC 60255-22-2:1996 Class 3 & Class 4.
Class 4: 15kV air discharge.
Class 3: 6kV contact discharge.
Tests carried out both with and without cover fitted.
Performance criteria Class A.

5.9 Surge immunity


IEC 61000-4-5:1995 Level 4.
4kV common mode 12Ω source impedance, 2kV differential mode 2Ω source
impedance.
Power supply, field voltage, VTs.
The CT inputs are immune to all levels of common mode surge as per IEC 61000-4-
5: 1995 Level 4. Total immunity to differential surges to Level 4 can be achieved by
adding a time delay of at least 20ms. Note, routing the CT wires as a pair reduces
the likelihood of a differential surge.
4kV common mode 42Ω source impedance, 2kV differential mode 42Ω source
impedance.
Opto inputs, output contacts.
4kV common mode 2Ω source impedance applied to cable screen.
Terminal block communications connections and IRIG-B.
Performance criteria Class A under reference conditions.

5.10 Power frequency magnetic field


IEC 61000-4-8:1994 Level 5.
100A/m field applied continuously in all planes for the EUT in a quiescent state and
tripping state
1000A/m field applied for 3s in all planes for the EUT in a quiescent state and
tripping state
Performance criteria Class A.

5.11 Power frequency interference


NGTS* 2.13 Issue 3 April 1998, section 5.5.6.9.
500V rms. common mode.
250V rms. differential mode.
Voltage applied to all non-mains frequency inputs. Permanently connected
communications circuits tested to Class 3 (100-1000m) test level 50mV
Performance criteria Class A.
* National Grid Technical Specification
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 17/52

5.12 Surge withstand capability (SWC)


ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 (1990) (Reaff. 1994)
Oscillatory SWC Test.
2.5kV – 3kV, 1 - 1.5MHz - common and differential mode – applied to all circuits
except for IRIG-B and terminal block communications, which are tested common
mode only via the cable screen.
Fast Transient SWC Tests
4 - 5kV crest voltage - common and differential mode - applied to all circuits except
for IRIG-B and terminal block communications, which are tested common mode only
via the cable screen.
Performance criteria Class A

5.13 Radiated immunity


ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 1995
35 V/m 25MHz - 1GHz no modulation applied to all sides.
35 V/m 25MHz - 1GHz, 100% pulse modulated, front only.
Performance criteria Class A.

6. ATMOSPHERIC ENVIRONMENT

6.1 Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1:1990/A2:1994 - Cold
IEC 60068-2-2:1974/A2:1994 - Dry heat
IEC 60255-6:1988.

Operating Temperature Range °C Storage Temperature Range °C


(Time Period in Hours) (Time Period in Hours)
Cold Dry Heat Cold Dry Heat
Temperature Temperature Temperature Temperature
-25 (96) 55 (96) -25 (96) 70 (96)

6.2 Humidity
IEC 60068-2-3:1969
Damp heat, steady state, 40° C ± 2° C and 93% relative humidity (RH) +2% -3%,
duration 56 days.
IEC 60068-2-30:1980.
Damp heat cyclic, six (12 + 12 hour cycles) of 55°C ±2°C 93% ±3% RH and 25°C
±3°C 93% ±3% RH.

6.3 Enclosure protection


IEC 60529:1989.
IP52 Category 2.
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 18/52 MiCOM P342, P343

IP5x – Protected against dust, limited ingress permitted.


IPx2 – Protected against vertically falling drops of water with the product in 4 fixed
positions of 15° tilt with a flow rate of 3mm/minute for 2.5 minutes.

7. MECHANICAL ENVIRONMENT

7.1 Performance criteria


The following two classes of performance criteria are used within sections to (where
applicable) to specify the performance of the MiCOM relay when subjected to
mechanical testing.
7.1.1 Severity classes
The following table details the Class and Typical Applications of the vibration, shock
bump and seismic tests detailed previously

Class Typical Application


Measuring relays and protection equipment for normal use in
1 power plants, substations and industrial plants and for normal
transportation conditions
Measuring relays and protection equipment for which a very high
security margin is required or where the vibration (shock and
2
bump) (seismic shock) levels are very high, e.g. shipboard
application and for severe transportation conditions.

7.1.2 Vibration (sinusoidal)


IEC 60255-21-1:1988
Cross over frequency - 58 to 60 Hz
Vibration response

Peak Displacement Peak Acceleration Number of


Severity Above Cross Over Frequency
Below Cross Over Sweeps in
Class Range (Hz)
Frequency (mm) Frequency (gn) Each Axis
2 0.075 1 1 10 – 150

Vibration endurance

Severity Peak Acceleration Number of Sweeps Frequency Range


Class (gn) in Each Axis (Hz)
2 2.0 20 10 – 150
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 19/52

7.1.3 Shock and bump


IEC 60255-21-2:1988
IEC 60255-21-2:1988

Type of Severity Peak Acceleration Duration of Number of Pulses


Test Class ( gn) Pulse ( ms ) in Each Direction
Shock
2 10 11 3
Response
Shock
1 15 11 3
withstand
Bump 1 10 16 1000

7.1.4 Seismic
IEC 60255-21-3:1993
Cross over frequency - 8 to 9Hz
x = horizontal axis, y = vertical axis

Peak Displacement Peak Acceleration


Below Cross Over Above Cross Number of Frequency
Severity Frequency (mm) Over Frequency Sweep Cycles Range
Class (gn) in Each Axis (Hz)
x y x y
2 7.5 3.5 2.0 1.0 1 1- 35

8. EC EMC COMPLIANCE
Compliance to the European Community Directive 89/336/EEC amended by
93/68/EEC is claimed via the Technical Construction File route.
The Competent Body has issued a Technical Certificate and a Declaration of
Conformity has been completed.
The following Generic Standards used to establish conformity:
EN 50081-2:1994
EN 50082-2:1995.

9. EC LVD COMPLIANCE
Compliance with European Community Directive on Low Voltage 73/23/EEC is
demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards:
EN 61010-1:1993/A2: 1995
EN 60950:1992/A11 1997
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 20/52 MiCOM P342, P343

10. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

10.1 Generator differential protection (87G) {P343}


10.1.1 Setting ranges

Settings Range
Step Size
Mode Percentage Bias/High Impedance/Interturn
Ιs1 0.05 Ιn – 0.5 Ιn 0.01Ιn
k1 0 – 20% 5%
Ιs2 1 Ιn – 5 Ιn 0.1Ιn
k2 20 – 150% 10%
Interturn Ιs_A 0.05 Ιn – 2 Ιn 0.01Ιn
Interturn Ιs_B 0.05 Ιn – 2 Ιn 0.01Ιn
Interturn Ιs_C 0.05 Ιn – 2 Ιn 0.01Ιn
Interturn time delay 0 to 100s 0.01s

10.1.2 Accuracy

Pick-up Formula ±5%


Drop-off 95% of setting ±5%
Operating time <30ms for currents applied at 4x pickup level or greater
Repeatability <7.5%
Disengagement time <40ms

10.2 2-Stage non-directional overcurrent (50/51)

Settings Range Step Size


1st Stage
Ι>1 0.08 - 4 Ιn 0.01 Ιn
DT, SI(IEC), VI(IEC), EI(IEC), LTI(IEC), UK
Characteristic Rectifier, RI, MI(IEEE), VI(IEEE), EI(IEEE),
Inv(US), STI(US)
DT 0 to 100s 0.01s
TMS (IEC/UK) 0.025 to 1.2 0.025
Ι>1 Time Dial 1 0.01 100 0.01
K(RI) 0.1 - 10 0.05
tRESET
0 to 100s 0.01s
(IEC/UK)
2nd Stage
Ι>2 0.08 – 10 Ιn 0.01 Ιn
DT 0 to 100s 0.01s

Inverse time (IDMT) characteristic


Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 21/52

IDMT characteristics are selectable from a choice of four IEC/UK and five IEEE/US
curves as shown in the table below.
The IEC/UK IDMT curves conform to the following formula:

æ K ö
ç
t = T x (Ι/Ι ) α - 1
+ L÷
ç s ÷
è ø
The IEEE/US IDMT curves conform to the following formula:

æ K ö
t = TD x ç (Ι/Ι ) α - 1
+ L÷
ç s ÷
è ø
where
t = operation time
K = constant
Ι = measured current
ΙS = current threshold setting

α = constant
L = ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC/UK curves)
T = Time multiplier setting for IEC/UK curves
TD = Time dial setting for IEEE/US curves
IDMT characteristics

K α L
IDMT Curve Description Standard
Constant Constant Constant
Standard inverse IEC 0.14 0.02 0
Very inverse IEC 13.5 1 0
Extremely inverse IEC 80 2 0
Long time inverse UK 120 1 0
Rectifier UK 45900 5.6 0
Moderately inverse IEEE 0.0515 0.02 0.114
Very inverse IEEE 19.61 2 0.491
Extremely inverse IEEE 28.2 2 0.1217
Inverse US-C08 5.95 2 0.18
Short time inverse US-C02 0.16758 0.02 0.11858

The IEC extremely inverse curve becomes definite time at currents greater than 20 x
setting. The IEC standard, very and long time inverse curves become definite time at
currents greater than 30 x setting.
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 22/52 MiCOM P342, P343

Time multiplier settings for IEC/UK curves

Settings Range Step Size


TMS 0.025 to 1.2 0.025

Time dial settings for IEEE/US curves

Settings Range Step Size


TD 0.01 to 100 0.01

10.2.1 Reset characteristics


For all IEC/UK curves, the reset characteristic is definite time only.
For all IEEE/US curves, the reset characteristic can be selected as either inverse curve
or definite time.
The definite time can be set (as defined in IEC) to zero. Range 0 to 100 seconds in
steps of 0.01 seconds.
The Inverse Reset characteristics are dependent upon the selected IEEE/US IDMT
curve as shown in the table below.
All inverse reset curves conform to the following formula:

TD x S
tRESET = in seconds
(1 - M2)

where
TD = Time dial setting for IEEE curves
S = Constant
M = Ι / Ιs

Curve Description Standard S Constant


Moderately Inverse IEEE 4.85
Very Inverse IEEE 21.6
Extremely Inverse IEEE 29.1
Inverse US 5.95
Short Time Inverse US 2.261

10.2.2 RI curve
The RI curve (electromechanical) has been included in the first stage characteristic
setting options for Phase Overcurrent and Earth Fault protections. The curve is
represented by the following equation:

æ 1 ö
ç ÷
t = K x ç 0.339 - æ0.236/ ö ÷ in seconds
è è Mø ø
With K adjustable from 0.1 to 10 in steps of 0.05
M = Ι / Ιs
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 23/52

10.2.3 Accuracy

Pick-up Setting ±5%


Drop-off 0.95 x Setting ±5%
Minimum trip level of IDMT elements 1.05 x Setting ±5%
±5% or 40ms whichever is greater
IDMT characteristic shape
(under reference conditions)*
IEEE reset ±5% or 50ms whichever is greater
DT operation ±2% or 50ms whichever is greater
DT reset ±5%
Directional boundary accuracy (RCA ±90°) ±2° hysteresis 2°
Characteristic UK curves IEC 60255-3 – 1998
US curves IEEE C37.112 – 1996
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 24/52 MiCOM P342, P343

IEC Curves

1000

100
Operating Time (s)

10

Curve 4

Curve 1

Curve 2

Curve 3

0.1
1.0 10.0 100.0
Current (Multiples of Is)

Curve 1 Standard inverse


Curve 2 Very inverse
Curve 3 Extremely inverse
Curve 4 UK long time inverse
P2136ENa

Figure 1: IEC inverse time curves


Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 25/52

Amercian Curves

100

10
Operating Time (s)

1
Curve 5

Curve 6

Curve 9

Curve 7

Curve 8

0.1 1.0 10.0 100.0

Current (Multiples of Is)

Curve 5 IEEE moderately inverse


Curve 6 IEEE very inverse
Curve 7 IEEE extremely inverse
Curve 8 US inverse
Curve 9 US short time inverse
P2137ENa

Figure 2: American inverse time curves


P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 26/52 MiCOM P342, P343

10.3 Restricted earth fault (low impedance)

Settings Range Step Size


K1 0% to 20% 1 % (minimum)
K2 0% to 150% 1 % (minimum)
Ιs1 0.05 Ιn to Ιn 0.01 Ιn
Ιs2 0.1 Ιn to 1.5 Ιn 0.1 Ιn

10.3.1 Accuracy

Pick-up Setting formula ±5%


Drop-off 0.80 (or better) of calculated differential current
Low impedance operating time <60ms
High impedance pick-up Setting ±5%
High impedance operating time <30ms

10.4 2-Stage non-directional earth fault (50N/51N)


10.4.1 Setting ranges

Settings Range Step Size


1st Stage
ΙN>1 0.02 – 4.0 Ιn 0.01 Ιn
ΙN>1 IDG Ιs 1–4 0.1
2nd Stage
ΙN>2 0.02 – 10 Ιn 0.01 Ιn

10.4.2 Time delay settings

Settings Range Step Size


1st Stage
DT, SI(IEC), VI(IEC), EI(IEC), LTI(IEC), RI,
Characteristic MI(IEEE), VI(IEEE), EI(IEEE), Inv(US), STI(US),
IDG
DT 0 to 200s 0.01 Ιn
TMS (IEC/UK) 0.025 to 1.2 0.025
K (RI) 0.1 to 10 0.05
IDG Time 1 to 2 0.01
TD (IEEE/US) 0.01 to 100 0.01
tRESET
0 to 100s 0.01s
(IEC/UK)
2nd Stage
DT 0 to 200s 0.01s
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 27/52

The earth fault elements are followed by an independently selectable time delay.
These time delays have an extended range of 0 to 200s, but are otherwise identical
to those of the phase overcurrent definite time delay. The reset time delay is the
same as the phase overcurrent reset time.
10.4.2.1 Accuracy

Pick-up Setting ±5%


Drop-off 0.95 x Setting ±5%
Minimum trip level of IDMT elements 1.05 x Setting ±5%
±5% or 40ms whichever is greater
IDMT characteristic shape
(under reference conditions)*
IEEE reset ±5% or 40ms whichever is greater
DT operation ±2% or 60ms whichever is greater
DT reset ±5%
Repeatability 2.5%

10.4.3 IDG curve


The IDG curve is commonly used for time delayed earth fault protection in the
Swedish market. This curve is available in stage 1 of the Earth Fault protection.
The IDG curve is represented by the following equation:

æ Ι ö
t = 5.8 - 1.35 loge ç ÷ in seconds
è ΙN > Setting ø
where
Ι = measured current
ΙN>Setting = an adjustable setting which defines the start point of the
characteristic
Although the start point of the characteristic is defined by the “ΙN>” setting, the
actual relay current threshold is a different setting called “IDG Ιs”. The “IDG Ιs”
setting is set as a multiple of “ΙN>”.
An additional setting “IDG Time” is also used to set the minimum operating time at
high levels of fault current.
Figure 3 illustrates how the IDG characteristic is implemented.
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 28/52 MiCOM P342, P343

10

Operating time (seconds) 8 IDG Is Setting Range

3
IDG Time Setting Range
2

0
1 10 100
I/IN>
P2242ENa

Figure 3: IDG characteristic

10.5 Neutral displacement/residual overvoltage (59N)


10.5.1 Setting ranges

Name Range Step Size


VN>1 (Vn 100/120V) 1 – 80V 1V
VN>2 (Vn 100/120V) 1 – 80V 1V
VN>1 (Vn 380/480V) 4 – 320V 4V
VN>2 (Vn 380/480V) 4 – 320V 4V

10.5.2 Time delay settings


The inverse characteristic for VN>1 shall be given by the following formula :
K
t =
(M - 1)

where
K = Time multiplier setting
t = operating time in seconds
M = Applied input voltage/relay setting voltage (Vs)

Range Step Size


TMS setting (K) 0.5 – 100s 0.5
DT reset setting 0 – 100s 0.01s
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 29/52

10.5.3 Accuracy

For DT Start Setting ±5%


Pick-up
For IDMT Start 1.05 x Setting ±5%
Drop-off 0.95 x Setting ±5%
IDMT characteristic shape ±5% or 60ms whichever is greater
±2% or 20ms whichever is greater
DT operation
Instantaneous operation <55ms
Reset <35ms
Repeatability <5%

10.6 Sensitive directional earth fault (67N)

Settings Range Step Size


Non directional/Directional Fwd/Directional
Directionality
Rev
ΙSEF>1 0.005 to 0.1 Ιn 0.00025 Ιn
0.5 to 80V (Vn=100/120V) 0.5V
ΙSEF>Vnpol 2 to 320V (Vn =380/480V) 2V

ΙSEF> Char Angle –95° to 95° 1°


DT 0 to 200s 0.01s
0 - 20W (Ιn=1A, Vn=100/120V) 0.05W
0 - 100W (Ιn=5A, Vn=100/120V) 0.25W
P N>
0 - 80W (Ιn=1A, Vn=380/480V) 0.20W
0 - 400W (Ιn=5A, Vn=380/480V) 1W

10.6.1 SEF accuracy

Pick-up Setting ±5%


Drop-off 0.95 x Setting ±5%
DT operation ±2% or 50ms whichever is greater
DT reset ±5%
Repeatability 5%

10.6.2 Wattmetric SEF accuracy

For P=0W ΙSEF> ±5%


Pick-up
For P>0W P> ±5%
For P=0W (0.95 x ΙSEF>) ±5%
Drop-off
For P>0W 0.9 x P> ±5%
Boundary accuracy ±5% with 1° hysteresis
Repeatability 5%
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 30/52 MiCOM P342, P343

10.6.3 Polarising quantities accuracy

Operating boundary pick-up ±2°of RCA ±90°


Hysteresis <3°
ΙSEF>Vnpol Pick-up Setting ±10%
ΙSEF>Vnpol Drop-off 0.9 x Setting or 0.7V (whichever is greater) ±10%

10.7 100% Stator earth fault {P343}

Settings Range Step Size


0.3 – 20V (Vn=100/120V) 0.1V
VN3H<
1.2 – 80V (Vn /440V) 0.4V
30 – 120V (Vn=100/120V) 1V
V< Inhibit
120 – 480V (Vn=380/440V) 4V
4W – 200W (Ιn=1A, Vn=100/120V) 0.5W
16W – 800W (Ιn=1A, Vn=380/480V) 2.0W
P< Inhibit 20W – 1000W (Ιn=5A, Vn=100/120V) 2.5W
80W – 4000W (Ιn=5A, Vn=380/480V) 10.0W
Equivalent Range in %Pn 2% - 105% 0.3%
4Var – 200Var (Ιn=1A, Vn=100/120V) 0.5Var
16Var – 800Var (Ιn=1A, Vn=380/480V) 2.0Var
Q< Inhibit 20Var – 1000Var (Ιn=5A, Vn=100/120V) 2.5Var
80Var – 4000Var (Ιn=5A, Vn=380/480V) 10.0Var
Equivalent Range in %Pn 2% - 105% 0.3%
4VA – 200VA (Ιn=1A, Vn=100/120V) 0.5VA
16VA – 800VA (Ιn=1A, Vn=380/480V) 2.0VA
S< Inhibit 20VA – 1000VA (Ιn=5A, Vn=100/120V) 2.5VA
80VA – 4000VA (Ιn=5A, Vn=380/480V) 10.0VA
Equivalent Range in %Pn 2% - 105% 0.3%
0.3V – 20V (Vn=100/120V) 0.1V
VN3H>
1.2V – 80V (Vn=380/480V) 0.4V
DT 0 – 100s 0.01s
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 31/52

10.7.1 Accuracy

VN3H</VN3H> Setting ±5%


Pick-up
V/P/Q/S<Ιnh Setting ±0.5%
VN3H< 105% of Pick-up ±5%
Drop-off
VN3H> 95% of Pick-up ±5%
V/P/Q/S<Ιnh 95% of Pick-up ±0.5%
Operating time ±0.5% or 50ms whichever is greater
Repeatability <0.5%
Disengagement / reset time <50ms

10.8 Voltage dependent overcurrent (51V)

Settings Range Step Size


Operating mode Voltage controlled/voltage restrained
Current threshold Ι>set 0.8 – 4 Ιn 0.01 Ιn
D T,SI(IEC ),VI(IEC ),EI(IEC ),LTI(IEC ),
Characteristic UK Rectifier, RI, M I(IEEE),VI(IEEE),
EI(IEEE),Inv(U S),STI(U S)
5 – 120V (Vn = 100/120V) 1V
Voltage threshold V<1
20 – 440V (Vn = 380/480V) 4V
5 – 120V (Vn = 100/120V) 1V
Voltage threshold V<2
20 – 440V (Vn = 380/480V) 4V
K factor 0.1 – 1.00 0.05
DT 0 –100s 0.01s
TMS 0.025 – 1.2 0.025
TD (IEEE/US) 0.01 to 100 0.01
K(RI) 0.1 - 10 0.05
tRESET 0 – 100s 0.01s

The reset time inverse time characteristics for IEEE/US curves are the same as the
phase overcurrent.
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 32/52 MiCOM P342, P343

10.8.1 Accuracy

VCO threshold Setting ±5%


Pick-up
Overcurrent formula ±5%
VCO threshold 1.05 x Setting ±5%
Drop-off
Overcurrent 0.95 x formula ±5%
Operating time <50ms
Repeatability <2.5%
IDMT operation ±5% or 40ms whichever is greater
Definite time operation ±5% or 50ms whichever is greater
tRESET ±5% or 50ms whichever is greater

10.9 Transient overreach and overshoot


10.9.1 Accuracy

Additional tolerance due to


±5% over the X/R ratio of 1 to 90
increasing X/R ratios
Overshoot of overcurrent elements <40ms
Disengagement time <60ms (65ms SEF)

10.10 Under impedance (21)

Settings Range Step Size


2 - 120 Ω (Vn=100/120V, Ιn=1A) 0.5W
Z<1
0.4 - 24 Ω (Vn=100/120V, Ιn=5A) 0.1W
&
8 - 480 Ω (Vn=380/440V, Ιn=1A) 2W
Z<2
1.6 - 96 Ω (Vn=380/440V, Ιn=5A) 0.4W
DT 0 - 100s 0.01s

10.10.1 Accuracy

Pick-up Setting ±5%


Drop-off 105% of setting ±5%
Operating time ±2% or 50ms whichever is greater
Repeatability <5%
Disengagement time <50ms
tRESET ±5%
Instantaneous operating time <50ms
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 33/52

10.11 Under voltage (27)


10.11.1 Level settings

Name Range Step Size


V<1 & V<2
10 – 120V 1V
(Vn = 100/120V)
V<1 & V<2
40 – 480V 4V
(Vn = 380/480V)

10.11.2 Under voltage protection time delay characteristics


Under voltage measuring elements are followed by an independently selectable time
delay.
The first element have time delay characteristics selectable as either Inverse Time or
Definite Time. The remaining element shall have an associated Definite Time delay
setting.
Each measuring element time delay is capable of being blocked by the operation of a
user defined logic (optical isolated) input.
The inverse characteristic shall be given by the following formula :
K
t =
(1 - M)

where
K = Time multiplier setting
t = operating time in seconds
M = Applied input voltage/relay setting voltage (Vs)

Range Step Size


DT setting 0 – 100s 0.01s
TMS Setting (K) 0.5 – 100 0.5

Definite time and TMS setting ranges.


10.11.3 Accuracy

For DT Start Setting ±5%


Pick-up
For IDMT Start 0.95 x Setting ±5%
Drop-off 1.05 x Setting ±5%
IDMT characteristic shape ±2% or 50ms whichever is greater
DT operation ±2% or 50ms whichever is greater
Reset <75ms
Repeatability <1%
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 34/52 MiCOM P342, P343

10.12 Over voltage (59)


10.12.1 Level settings

Name Range Step Size


V>1 & V>2
60 – 185V 1V
(Vn = 100/120V)
V>1 & V>2
240 – 740V 4V
(Vn = 380/480V)

10.12.2 Over voltage protection time delay characteristics


Over voltage measuring elements are followed by an independently selectable time
delay.
The first elements have time delay characteristics selectable as either Inverse Time or
Definite Time. The remaining element shall have an associated Definite Time delay
setting.
Each measuring element time delay is capable of being blocked by the operation of a
user defined logic (optical isolated) input.
The inverse characteristics are given by the following formula:
K
t =
(M - 1)

where
K = Time multiplier setting
T = Operating time in seconds
M = Applied input voltage/relay setting voltage (Vs)

Range Step Size


DT setting 0 – 100s 0.01s
TMS Setting (K) 0.5 – 100s 0.5

Definite time and TMS setting ranges


10.12.3 Accuracy

For DT Start Setting ±5%


Pick-up
For IDMT Start 1.05 x Setting ±5%
Drop-off 0.95 x Setting ±5%
IDMT characteristic shape ±2% or 50ms whichever is greater
DT operation ±2% or 50ms whichever is greater
Reset <75ms
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 35/52

10.13 Under frequency (81U)

Settings Range Step Size


f (for all stages) 45 – 65 Hz 0.01 Hz
t (for all stages) 0 – 100s 0.01s

10.13.1 Accuracy

Pick-up Setting ±0.01Hz


Drop-off (Setting + 0.025Hz) ±0.01Hz
DT operation ±2% or 50ms whichever is greater*

* The operating will also include a time for the relay to frequency track (20Hz/second)
10.14 Over frequency (81O)

Settings Range Step Size


f (for all stages) 45 – 68 Hz 0.01 Hz
t (for all stages) 0 – 100s 0.01s

10.14.1 Accuracy

Pick-up Setting ±0.01Hz


Drop-off (Setting - 0.025Hz) ±0.01Hz
DT operation ±2% or 50ms whichever is greater*

* The operating will also include a time for the relay to frequency track 20Hz/second)
10.15 Reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R /32L /32O)

Settings Range Step Size


Stage 1 Enable/disable
Operating Mode Generating/Motoring
Mode Reverse/low forward/over
4W – 300W (Ιn=1A, Vn=100/120V)
0.5W
16W – 1200W (Ιn=1A, Vn=380/480V) 2W
–P> (reverse power) 20W – 1500W (Ιn=5A, Vn=100/120V) 2.5W
6W
80W – 6000W (Ιn=5A, Vn=380/480V)
0.3%
Equivalent Range in %Pn 2% - 157%
4W – 300W (Ιn=1A, Vn=100/120V)
0.5W
16W – 1200W (Ιn=1A, Vn=380/480V) 2W
P< (low forward power) 20W – 1500W (Ιn=5A, Vn=100/120V) 2.5W
6W
80W – 6000W (Ιn=5A, Vn=380/480V)
0.3%
Equivalent Range in %Pn 2% - 157%
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 36/52 MiCOM P342, P343

Settings Range Step Size


4W – 300W (Ιn=1A, Vn=100/120V)
0.5W
16W – 1200W (Ιn=1A, Vn=380/480V) 2W
P> (over power) 20W – 1500W (Ιn=5A, Vn=100/120V) 2.5W
6W
80W – 6000W (Ιn=5A, Vn=380/480V)
0.3%
Equivalent Range in %Pn 2% - 157%
DT 0 – 100s 0.01s
DO Timer 0 – 100s 0.01s
Stage 2 Same as Stage 1

10.15.1 Accuracy

Pick-up Setting ±10%


Reverse/Over Power 0.95 of setting ±10%
Drop-off
Low forward Power 1.05 of setting ±10%
Pick-up (angle variation) Expected pick-up angle ±1 degree
Drop-off (angle variation) Expected drop-off angle ±2.5 degree
Operating time ±2% or 50ms whichever is greater
Repeatability <5%
Disengagement time <50ms
tRESET ±5%
Instantaneous operating time <50ms

10.16 Sensitive reverse power/low forward power/over power (32R /32L /32O)

Settings Range Step Size


Stage 1 Enable/Disable
Operating Mode Generating/Motoring
Mode Reverse/low forward/over
0.3W – 100W (Ιn=1A, Vn=100/120V) 0.1W
1.2W – 400W (Ιn=1A, Vn=380/480V) 0.4W
–P> (reverse power) 1.5W – 500W (Ιn=5A, Vn=100/120V) 0.5W
6.0W – 2000W (Ιn=5A, Vn=380/480V) 2.0W
Equivalent range in %Pn 0.5% – 157% 0.2%
0.3W – 100W (Ιn=1A, Vn=100/120V) 0.1W
1.2W – 400W (Ιn=1A, Vn=380/480V) 0.4W
P< (low forward power 1.5W – 500W (Ιn=5A, Vn=100/120V) 0.5W
6.0W – 2000W (Ιn=5A, Vn=380/480V) 2.0W
Equivalent range in %Pn 0.5% – 157% 0.2%
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 37/52

Settings Range Step Size


0.3W – 100W (Ιn=1A, Vn=100/120V) 0.1W
1.2W – 400W (Ιn=1A, Vn=380/480V) 0.4W
P> (over power) 1.5W – 500W (Ιn=5A, Vn=100/120V) 0.5W
6.0W – 2000W (Ιn=5A, Vn=380/480V) 2.0W
Equivalent range in %Pn 0.5% – 157% 0.2%
DT 0 – 100s 0.01s
DO Timer 0 – 100s 0.01s
Compensation angle θC -5° – 5° 0.1°
Stage 2 Same as Stage 1

10.16.1 Accuracy

Pick-up Setting ±10%


Reverse/Over Power 0.9 of setting ±10%
Drop-off
Low forward Power 1.1 of setting ±10%
Pick-up (angle variation) Expected pick-up angle ±2 degree
Drop-off (angle variation) Expected drop-off angle ±2.5 degree
Operating time ±2% or 50ms whichever is greater
Repeatability <5%
Disengagement time <50ms
tRESET ±5%
Instantaneous operating time <50ms

10.17 Field failure (40)

Settings Range Step Size

0 – 40 Ω (Ιn=1A, Vn=100/120V) 0.5Ω


0 – 8 Ω (Ιn=5A, Vn=100/120V) 0.1Ω
Mho offset (-Xa1, -Xa2)
0 - 160 Ω (Ιn=1A, Vn=380/480V) 2ý
0 – 32 Ω (Ιn=5A, Vn=380/480V) 0.4Ω

25 – 325 Ω (Ιn=1A, Vn=100/120V) 0.5Ω


5 – 65 Ω (Ιn=5A, Vn=100/120V) 0.1Ω
Diameter (Xb1, Xb2)
100 – 1300 Ω (Ιn=1A, Vn=380/480V) 2ý
20 – 260 Ω (Ιn=5A, Vn=380/480V) 0.4Ω
Ffail Alarm angle 15º – 75º 1º
Ffail Alarm delay 0 – 100s 0.01s
Ffail 1 & 2 time delay 0 – 100s 0.01s
Ffail 1& 2 drop off timer 0 – 100s 0.01s
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 38/52 MiCOM P342, P343

10.17.1 Accuracy

mho characteristic Characteristic shape ±5%


Pick-up
linear characteristic Characteristic shape ±10%
mho characteristic 105% of setting ±5%
Drop-off
linear characteristic 105% of setting ±10%
±2% or 50ms whichever is
Operating time
greater
Repeatability <1%
Disengagement
<50ms
time

10.18 Negative phase sequence thermal (46)

Settings Range Step Size


Ι2>1 alarm 0.03 – 0.5 Ιn 0.01 Ιn
Ι2>1 time delay 2 – 60s 0.1s
Ι2>2 trip 0.05 – 0.5 Ιn 0.01 Ιn
Ι2>2 K 2 – 40s 0.1s
Ι2>2 Kreset 2 – 40s 0.1s
Ι2>2 tmax 500 – 2000s 10s
Ι2>2 tmin 0 – 100 0.01s

10.18.1 Accuracy

Pick-up Formula ±5%


Drop-off 95% of Pick-up ±5%
Operating time ±5% or 55ms whichever is greater
Repeatability <5%
Disengagement time <30ms

10.19 Volts/Hz (24)

Settings Range Step Size


1.5 – 3.5V/Hz (Vn=100/120V) 0.01 V/Hz
V/f trip
6.0 – 14V/Hz (Vn=380/480V) 0.04 V/Hz
1.5 – 3.5V/Hz (Vn=100/120V) 0.01 V/Hz
V/f alarm
6.0 – 14V/Hz (Vn=380/480V) 0.04 V/Hz
V/f Trip TMS 1 – 63 1
V/f Trip Delay 0 – 100s 0.01s
V/f Alarm Delay 0 – 100s 0.01s

Note: V/Hz setting refers to secondary voltage and the nominal


frequency.
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 39/52

10.19.1 Accuracy

Pick-up Setting ±5%


Drop-off 95% of Pick-up ±5%
IDMT operating time ±5% or 60ms whichever is greater
Definite time ±2% or 30ms whichever is greater
Repeatability <1%

10.20 Unintentional energisation at standstill (dead machine) {P343}

Settings Range Step Size


Dead Mach Ι> 0.08 to 4 Ιn 0.1 Ιn
10 to 120V (Vn=100/120V) 0.01V
Dead Mach V<
40 to 480V (Vn=380/480V) 0.04V
Dead Mach tPU 0 to 10s 0.1s
Dead Mach tDO 0 to 10s 0.1s

10.20.1 Accuracy

Ι> Setting ±5%


Pick-up
V< Setting ±5%
Ι> 95% of setting ±5%
Drop-off
V< 105% of setting ±5%
Operating time ±2% or 50ms whichever is greater
Repeatability 2.5% or 10ms whichever is greater

10.21 Resistive temperature detectors

Setting Min Max Step


RTD# alarm temperature 0°C 200°C 1°C
RTD# trip temperature 0°C 200°C 1°C
RTD Alarm delay 0s 100 s 1s
RTD Trip delay 0s 100 s 1s

10.21.1 Accuracy

Pick up Setting ±1°C


Drop off (Setting - 1°C)
Operating time ±2% or <1100ms
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 40/52 MiCOM P342, P343

10.22 Pole slipping (78) {P343}

Settings Range Step Size


0.5 - 350Ω (Ιn=1A, Vn=100/120V) 0.5Ω
0.1 - 70Ω (Ιn=5A, Vn=100/120V) 0.1Ω
ZA (Lens Forward Reach)
2 - 1400Ω (Ιn=1A, Vn=380/480V) 2Ω
0.4 - 280Ω (Ιn=5A, Vn=380/480V) 0.4Ω
0.5 - 350Ω (Ιn=1A, Vn=100/120V) 0.5Ω
0.1 - 70Ω (Ιn=5A, Vn=100/120V) 0.1Ω
ZB (Lens Reverse reach)
2 - 1400Ω (Ιn=1A, Vn=380/480V) 2Ω
0.4 - 280Ω (Ιn=5A, Vn=380/480V) 0.4Ω
Lens Angle (α) 90° - 150° 1°
Timer T1 0 - 1s 0.01s
Timer T2 0 - 1s 0.01s
Blinder Angle (θ) 20° - 90° 1°
0.5 - 350Ω (Ιn=1A, Vn=100/120V) 0.5Ω
0.1 - 70Ω (Ιn=5A, Vn=100/120V) 0.1Ω
Zc (Reactance line)
2 - 1400Ω (Ιn=1A, Vn=380/480V) 2Ω
0.4 - 280Ω (Ιn=5A, Vn=380/480V) 0.4Ω
Zone1 Slip Count 1- 20 1
Zone2 Slip Count 1- 20 1
Reset Time 0 -100s 0.01s

10.22.1 Accuracy

Lens characteristic Setting ±5%


Pick-up Blinder ±1°
Reactance line Setting ±5%
Lens angle adjusted by -5°, forward and
Lens DO characteristic
reverse reach (ZA+ZB) + 5%
Lens DO Lens DO characteristic ±5%
Drop-off
Blinder DO
Blinder displaced by (ZA+ZB)/2 x tan 87.5°
characteristic
Blinder DO Blinder DO characteristic ±1°
Repeatability <2.5%
T1, T2 and Reset Timer ±2% or 10ms whichever is greater
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 41/52

10.22.2 Hysteresis
Hysteresis is applied to the lenticular characteristic and to the blinder as soon as they
pick up individually. Hysteresis is not required for the reactance line as Zone 1 or
Zone 2 is determined at a single point when the locus traverses the blinder.
For the lens, the hysteresis consists of an angle of 5° subtracted from the α setting to
increase the lens size and an increment of 5% applied to ZA and ZB to extend the
reach.
Hysteresis for the blinder is dependant on the mode of operation. For generating
mode, the blinder is adjusted to the right, for motoring mode, the blinder is adjusted
to the left, with a distance which is equivalent to an angle separation of 175°. This is
shown in Figure 4. This distance is equivalent to (ZA + ZB) / 2*tan87.5°.
For both characteristics the hysteresis is reset when the impedance locus leaves the
lens.

Blinder
X
Hysteresis for motoring mode

175°

Lens Impedance centre

Hysteresis for generating mode

P2190ENa

Figure 4: Hysteresis of the pole slipping characteristic

10.23 Thermal overload (49)

Settings Range Step Size


Thermal I> 0.5 - 2.5 Ιn 0.01 Ιn
Thermal Alarm 20 -100% 1%
T-heating 1 - 200 minutes 1 minute
T-cooling 1 - 200 minutes 1 minute
M Factor 0 - 10 1
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 42/52 MiCOM P342, P343

10.23.1 Accuracy

Pick-up Thermal alarm Calculated trip time ±5%


Thermal overload Calculated trip time ±5%
Cooling time accuracy ±5% of theoretical
Repeatability <2.5%

11. SUPERVISORY FUNCTIONS

11.1 Voltage transformer supervision

Name Range Step Size


Negative phase sequence Fixed
10V (100/120V) 40V (380/480V)
voltage threshold (V2)
P.U. 30V, D.O. 10V (100/120V) Fixed
Phase overvoltage
P.U.120V, D.O.40V (380/480V)
Superimposed current 0.1 Ιn Fixed
VTS Ι2> Inhibit 0.05 Ιn to 0.5 Ιn 0.01 Ιn
VTS Ι> Inhibit 0.08 Ιn to 32 Ιn 0.01 Ιn
VTS Time Delay 1.0 – 10s 0.1s

11.1.1 Accuracy

Fast block operation <25ms


Fast block reset <30ms
Time delay Setting ±2% or 20ms whichever is greater

11.2 Current transformer supervision


The ΙN and VN thresholds take the same values as set for the directional earth fault
element.

Settings Range Step Size


0.5 - 22V (Vn = 100/120V) 0.5V
VN <
2 - 88V (Vn = 380 / 440V) 2V
ΙN> 0.08Ιn - 4Ιn 0.01Ιn
Time delay t 0 - 10s 1s
CTS Time Delay 0 - 10s 1s
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 43/52

11.2.1 Accuracy

ΙN> Setting ±5%


Pick-up
VN < Setting ±5%
ΙN> 0.9 x Setting ±5%
Drop-off
VN < (1.05 x Setting) ±5% or 1V whichever is greater
Time delay operation Setting ±2% or 20ms whichever is greater
CTS block operation < 1 cycle
CTS reset < 35ms

12. PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC

12.1 Level settings

Settings Range Step Size


Time delay t 0-14400000ms (4 hrs) 1ms

12.2 Accuracy

Output conditioner timer Setting ±2% or 50ms whichever is greater


Dwell conditioner timer Setting ±2% or 50ms whichever is greater
Pulse conditioner timer Setting ±2% or 50ms whichever is greater

13. MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING FACILITIES

13.1 Measurements
Accuracy under reference conditions.

Measurand Range Accuracy


Current 0.05 to 3 Ιn ±1.0% of reading
Voltage 0.05 to 2 Vn ±1.0% of reading
0.2 to 2 Vn ±5% of reading at unity
Power (W)
0.05 to 3 Ιn power factor
0.2 to 2 Vn ±5% of reading at zero
Reactive Power (VArs)
0.05 to 3 Ιn power factor
0.2 to 2 Vn
Apparent Power (VA) ±5% of reading
0.05 to 3 Ιn
0.2 to 2 Vn ±5% of reading at zero
Energy (Wh)
0.2 to 3 Ιn power factor
0.2 to 2 Vn ±5% of reading at zero
Energy (Varh)
0.2 to 3 Ιn power factor
Phase accuracy 0° to 360° ±0.5°
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 44/52 MiCOM P342, P343

Measurand Range Accuracy


Frequency 5 to 70Hz ±0.025Hz

13.2 IRIG-B and real time clock


13.2.1 Features

Real time 24 hour clock settable in hours, minutes and seconds


Calendar settable from January 1994 to December 2092
Clock and calendar maintained via battery after loss of auxiliary supply
Internal clock synchronisation using IRIG-B
Interface for IRIG-B signal is BNC

13.2.2 Performance

Year 2000 Compliant


Real time clock accuracy < ±1 second / day
Modulation ratio 1/3 or 1/6
Input signal peak-peak amplitude 200 mV to 20 V
Input impedance at 1000 Hz 6000 Ω
Conforms to IRIG standard 200-98, format
External clock synchronisation
B12X

13.3 Current loop input and outputs (CLIO)


Current loop inputs

Settings Range Step Size


CLI1 Input Type 0-1mA, 0-10mA, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
CLI1 Minimum -9999 to +9999 0.1
CLI1 Maximum -9999 to +9999 0.1
CLI1 Alarm Fn Over/Under
CLI1 Alarm Set CLI1 Minimum - CLI1 Maximum
CLI1 Alarm Delay 0-100s 0.1s
CLI1 Trip Fn Over/Under
CLI1 Trip Set CLI1 Minimum - CLI1 Maximum
CLI1 Trip Delay 0-100s 0.1s
CLI1 I< Alm Set
0-4mA 0.1mA
(4-20 mA input only)
Stage 2/3/4 Same as stage 1
Repeat for current loop inputs 2, 3 and 4
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 45/52

Current loop outputs

Settings Range Step Size


CLO1 Output Type 0-1mA, 0-10mA, 0-20mA, 4-20mA
CLO1 Set Values Primary/Secondary
A list of parameters are shown in the table
CLO1 Parameter
below
Range, step size and unit corresponds to the
CLO1 Minimum
selected parameter in the table below
Range, step size and unit corresponds to the
CLO1 Maximum
selected parameter in the table below
Repeat for current loop outputs 2, 3 and 4

Current loop output parameters are shown in the following table:

Current Loop
Default Default
Output Abbreviation Units Range Step
Min Max
Parameter
Current Magnitude IA Magnitude A 0 to 16A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
IB Magnitude
IC Magnitude
IN Measured Mag
Sensitive Current I Sen Magnitude A 0 to 2A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
Input Magnitude
Phase Sequence I1 Magnitude A 0 to 16A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
Current I2 Magnitude
Components I0 Magnitude
RMS Phase Currents IA RMS* A 0 to 16A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
IB RMS*
IC RMS*
P-P Voltage VAB Magnitude V 0 to 200V 0.1V 0V 140V
Magnitude VBC Magnitude
VCA Magnitude
P-N voltage VAN Magnitude V 0 to 200V 0.1V 0V 80V
Magnitude VBN Magnitude
VCN Magnitude
Neutral Voltage VN Measured Mag V 0 to 200V 0.1V 0V 80V
Magnitude VN Derived Mag
3rd Harmonic VN 3rd Harmonic V 0 to 200V 0.1V 0V 80V
Neutral Voltage
Phase Sequence V1 Magnitude* V 0 to 200V 0.1V 0V 80V
Voltage V2 Magnitude
Components V0 Magnitude
RMS Phase Voltages VAN RMS* V 0 to 200V 0.1V 0V 80V
VBN RMS*
VCN RMS*
Frequency Frequency Hz 0 to 70Hz 0.01Hz 45Hz 65Hz
3 Ph Active Power 3 Phase Watts* W -6000W 1W 0W 300W
to
6000W
3 Ph Reactive Power 3 Phase Vars* Var -6000Var 1Var 0Var 300Var
to
6000Var
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 46/52 MiCOM P342, P343

Current Loop
Default Default
Output Abbreviation Units Range Step
Min Max
Parameter
3 Ph Apparent 3 Phase VA* VA 0 1VA 0VA 300VA
Power to
6000VA
3 Ph Power Factor 3Ph Power Factor* - -1 to 1 0.01 0 1
Single Phase Active A Phase Watts* W -2000W 1W 0W 100W
Power B Phase Watts* to
C Phase Watts* 2000W
Single Phase A Phase Vars* Var -2000Var 1Var 0Var 100Var
Reactive Power B Phase Vars* to
C Phase Vars* 2000Var
Single Phase A Phase VA* VA 0 1VA 0VA 100VA
Apparent Power B Phase VA* to
C Phase VA* 2000VA
Single Phase Power APh Power Factor* -1 to 1 0.01 0 1
Factor BPh Power Factor*
CPh Power Factor*
3 Phase Current IA Fixed Demand* A 0 to 16A 0.01A 0A 1.2A
Demands IB Fixed Demand*
IC Fixed Demand*
IA Roll Demand*
IB Roll Demand*
IC Roll Demand*
IA Peak Demand*
IB Peak Demand*
IC Peak Demand*
3Ph Active Power 3Ph W Fix Demand* W -6000W 1W 0W 300W
Demands 3Ph W Roll Dem* to
3Ph W Peak Dem* 6000W
3Ph Reactive Power 3Ph Vars Fix Dem* Var -6000Var 1Var 0Var 300Var
Demands 3Ph Var Roll Dem* to
3Ph Var Peak Dem* 6000Var
Rotor Thermal State NPS Thermal % 0 to 200 0.01 0 120
Stator Thermal Thermal Overload % 0 to 200 0.01 0 120
State
RTD Temperatures RTD 1* °C -40°C 0.1°C 0°C 200°C
RTD 2* to
RTD 3* 300°C
RTD 4*
RTD 5*
RTD 6*
RTD 7*
RTD 8*
RTD 9*
RTD 10*
Current Loop Inputs CL Input 1 - -9999 0.1 0 9999
CL Input 2 to
CL Input 3 9999
CL input 4

Note 1: For measurements marked with an asterisk, the internal refresh


rate is nominally 1s, others are 0.5 power system cycle or less.

Note 2: The polarity of Watts, Vars and power factor is affected by the
Measurements Mode setting.
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 47/52

Note 3: These settings are for nominal 1A and 100/120V versions only.
For other nominal versions they need to be multiplied
accordingly.

Note 4: For the P343, the IA/IB/IC Current magnitudes are IA-1
Magnitude, IB-1 Magnitude, IC-1 Magnitude.
13.3.1 Accuracy

Current loop input accuracy ±1% of full scale

Current loop input Under setting +1% of full scale


drop-off threshold Over setting -1% of full scale
Current loop input sampling interval 50ms
Current loop input instantaneous
< 250ms
operating time
±2% setting or 200ms whichever is the
Current loop input DT operating time
greater
Current loop output conversion interval 50ms
<1.07s or <70ms depending on the
CLIO output parameter’s internal
Current loop output latency
refresh rate – (1s or 0.5 cycle, see table
above)
Current loop output accuracy ±0.5% of full scale
Repeatability <5%

With the current loop input set to instantaneous operation, two consecutive
acquisitions of data are required for an operate decision to be made.
13.3.2 Other specifications

Current loop input load resistance 0-1mA <4kΩ


Current loop input load resistance 0-10mA/0-20mA/4-20mA <300Ω
Isolation between common input channels Zero
2kV rms for
Isolation between input channels and case earth/other circuits
1 minute
0-1mA/0-10mA 10V
Current loop output compliance voltage
0-20mA/4-20mA 8.8V
Current loop output open circuit voltage <25V
Isolation between common output channels Zero
2kV rms for
Isolation between output channels and case earth/other circuits
1 minute
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 48/52 MiCOM P342, P343

14. DISTURBANCE RECORDS

14.1 Level settings

Settings Range Step Size


Duration 0.1 – 10.5s 10ms
Trigger position 0 – 100% 0.1%
8 analogue channels, 32 digital channels, single or extended trigger modes

14.2 Accuracy

Magnitude and relative phases ±5% of applied quantities


Duration ±2%
Trigger position ±2% (minimum trigger 100ms)

15. PLANT SUPERVISION

15.1 CB state monitoring control and condition monitoring


15.1.1 CB monitor settings

Setting Range Step


Broken Ι^ (mult) 1–2 0.1
Ι^ Maintenance 1 – 25000 (x (CT ratio^mult)) A 1 (x (CT ratio^mult)) A
Ι^ Lockout 1 – 25000 (x (CT ratio^mult)) A 1 (x (CT ratio^mult)) A
No CB Ops maintenance 1 – 10000 1
No CB Ops lockout 1 – 10000 1
CB time maintenance 0.005 – 0.5s 0.001s
CB time lockout 0.005 – 0.5s 0.001s
Fault frequency count 0 – 9999 1
Fault frequency time 0 – 9999 1

15.1.2 CB control settings

Setting Range Step


Man close RstDly 0.01 – 600s 0.01s

15.1.3 Accuracy

Timers ±2% or 20ms whichever is greater


Broken current accuracy ±5%
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 49/52

15.2 CB fail and backtrip breaker fail


15.2.1 Timer settings

Setting Range Step


CB fail 1 timer 0 – 10s 0.01s
CB fail 2 timer 0 – 10s 0.01s

The timers are reset by:


• undercurrent elements operating, or
• initiating element drop-off (loss of external initiating signal), or
• circuit breaker open auxiliary contact. (If current operation/external device is not
applicable)
15.2.2 Timer accuracy

Timers ±2% or 40ms whichever is greater


Reset time <30ms

15.2.3 Undercurrent settings

Name Range Step Size


Phase Ι< 0.02 - 3.2 Ιn 0.01 Ιn
Earth ΙN< 0.02 - 3.2 Ιn 0.01 Ιn
Sensitive Earth ΙSEF< 0.001 - 0.8 Ιn 0.0005 Ιn

15.2.4 Undercurrent accuracy

Pick-up ±10% or 25mA whichever is the greater


Operating time <12ms (Typical <10ms)
Reset <15ms (Typical <10ms)

16. INPUT AND OUTPUT SETTING RANGES

16.1 CT and VT ratio settings


The primary and secondary rating can be independently set for each set of CT or VT
inputs, for example the earth fault CT ratio can be different to that used for the phase
currents.

Primary Range Secondary Range


1 to 30000 Amps
Current transformer 1 or 5 Amps
step size 1A
100V to 1000 kV 80 to 140V (Vn = 100/120V)
Voltage transformer
step size 1V 320 to 560V (Vn = 380/480V)
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 50/52 MiCOM P342, P343

17. BATTERY LIFE


Battery life (assuming relay energised for 90% of time) > 10 years
1/2 AA size 3.6 V lithium thionyl chloride battery (SAFT advanced battery reference
LS14250)

18. FREQUENCY RESPONSE


With the exception of the RMS measurements all other measurements and protection
functions are based on the Fourier derived fundamental component. The
fundamental component is extracted by using a 24 sample Discrete Fourier
Transform (DFT). This gives good harmonic rejection for frequencies up to the 23rd
harmonic. The 23rd is the first predominant harmonic that is not attenuated by the
Fourier filter and this is known as an ‘Alias’. However, the Alias is attenuated by
approximately 85% by an additional, analogue, ‘anti-aliasing’ filter (low pass filter).
The combined affect of the anti-aliasing and Fourier filters is shown below:

1.2
Power frequency (eg 50/60 Hz)
Magnitude (per unit)

1
Combined response of fourier
and anti-aliasing filters
0.8

0.6
Anti-aliasing filter response

0.4

0.2

0
0 5 10 15 20 25
Harmonic
P1124ENa

Figure 5: Frequency response


For power frequencies that are not equal to the selected rated frequency the
harmonics would not be attenuated to zero amplitude. For small deviations of ±1Hz,
this is not a problem but to allow for larger deviations, an improvement is obtained
by the addition of frequency tracking.
With frequency tracking the sampling rate of the analogue / digital conversion is
automatically adjusted to match the applied signal. In the absence of a suitable
signal to amplitude track, the sample rate defaults to the selected rated frequency
(Fn). In the presence of a signal within the tracking range (5 to 70Hz), the relay will
lock on to the signal and the measured frequency will coincide with the power
frequency as labelled in the diagram above. The resulting outputs for harmonics up
to the 23rd will be zero.
Technical Data P34x/EN TD/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 51/52

19. LOCAL AND REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS


The following claims for Local & Remote Communications are applicable to the P34x
range of generator relays.

19.1 Front Port

Setting
Protocol Courier
Message format IEC 60870-5 FT1.2
Baud rate 19 200 bits/s

19.2 Rear Port

Rear Port Settings Setting Options Setting Available For:


Physical links EIA(RS)485 or Fibre optic IEC 60870-5-CS103
EIA(RS)485 only only Courier, Modbus
and DNP3.0
Remote address 0 - 255 (step 1) IEC 60870-5-CS103
and Courier
Modbus address 1 - 247 (step 1) Modbus only
DNP3.0 address 1 - 65519 (step 1) DNP3.0 only
Baud rate 9600 or 19200 bits/s IEC 60870-5-CS103
only
9600/19200/38400 Modbus only
bits/s
64,000 bits/s Courier
1200/2400/4800/9600/ DNP3.0
19200/38400 bits/s
Inactivity timer 1 - 30 minutes (step 1) Not DNP3.0
Parity “Odd”, “Even” or “None” Modbus or DNP3.0
Measurement period 1 - 60 minutes (step 1) IEC only
Time sync Enabled / Disabled DNP3.0

19.2.1 Performance

Front and rear ports conforming to Courier communication protocol Compliant


Rear ports conforming to Modbus communication protocol Compliant
Rear ports conforming to IEC 60870-5-CS103 communication
Compliant
protocol
Rear ports conforming to DNP3.0 communication protocol Compliant
P34x/EN TD/F33 Technical Data

Page 52/52 MiCOM P342, P343

19.3 Second rear communications port

Setting Setting Options Setting Available For:


RP2 Port Config EIA(RS)232, EIA(RS)485
or kbus
RP2 Comms Mode IEC60870 FT1.2, 11bit EIA(RS)232 and
frame or EIA(RS)485
IEC60870, 10 bit frame
RP2 Address 0 – 255 (step 1) All
RP2 InactivTimer 1 – 30 minutes (step 1) All
RP2 Baud Rate 9600/19200/38400 EIA(RS)232 and
bits/s EIA(RS)485

Note: To avoid exceeding second rear communications port flash


clearances the length of the cable, between the port and
associated communications equipment should be limited to 300
metres. In situations where 300 metres may be insufficient it
must be ensured that the communications cable is not laid in
close proximity to high current carrying conductors. The
communications cable should be screened with screen earthed
at one end only.
SCADA Communications P34x/EN CT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343

SCADA COMMUNICATIONS
P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications

MiCOM P342, P343


SCADA Communications P34x/EN CT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 1/28

CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION 5
2 COURIER INTERFACE 5
2.1 Courier protocol 5
2.2 Front courier port 6
2.3 Supported command set 6
2.4 Relay courier database 7
2.5 Setting changes 8
2.5.1 Method 1 8
2.5.2 Method 2 8
2.5.3 Relay settings 8
2.5.4 Setting transfer mode 9
2.6 Event extraction 9
2.6.1 Automatic event extraction 9
2.6.2 Event types 9
2.6.3 Event format 10
2.6.4 Manual event record extraction 10
2.7 Disturbance record extraction 10
2.8 Programmable scheme logic settings 11

3 MODBUS INTERFACE 12
3.1 Communication link 12
3.2 MODBUS functions 12
3.3 Response codes 13
3.4 Register mapping 13
3.5 Event extraction 13
3.5.1 Manual selection 14
3.5.2 Automatic extraction 14
3.5.3 Record data 14
3.6 Disturbance record extraction 15
3.6.1 Manual selection 15
3.6.2 Automatic extraction 16
3.6.3 Record data 16
3.7 Setting changes 16
P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications

Page 2/28 MiCOM P342, P343

3.7.1 Password protection 17


3.7.2 Control and support settings 17
3.7.3 Protection and disturbance recorder settings 17
3.8 Date and time format (data type G12) 17
3.9 Power & energy measurement data formats (G29 & G125) 19
3.9.1 Data type G29 19
3.9.2 Data type G125 20

4 IEC60870-5-103 interface 21
4.1 Physical connection and link layer 21
4.2 Initialisation 21
4.3 Time synchronisation 21
4.4 Spontaneous events 22
4.5 General interrogation 22
4.6 Cyclic measurements 22
4.7 Commands 22
4.8 Test mode 22
4.9 Disturbance records 22
4.10 Blocking of monitor direction 23

5 DNP3 INTERFACE 23
5.1 DNP3 protocol 23
5.2 DNP3 menu setting 23
5.3 Object 1 binary inputs 23
5.4 Object 10 binary outputs 24
5.5 Object 20 binary counters 24
5.6 Object 30 analogue input 24
5.7 DNP3 configuration using MiCOM S1 25
5.7.1 Object 1 25
5.7.2 Object 20 25
5.7.3 Object 30 25

6 SECOND REAR COMMUNICATIONS PORT (COURIER) 26


6.1 Courier protocol 26
6.2 Event extraction 26
6.3 Disturbance record extraction 26
6.4 Connection to the second rear port 27
SCADA Communications P34x/EN CT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 3/28

7 SK5 PORT CONNECTION 27


P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications

Page 4/28 MiCOM P342, P343


SCADA Communications P34x/EN CT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 5/28

1 INTRODUCTION
This section describes the remote interfaces of the MiCOM relay in enough detail to
allow integration within a substation communication network. As has been outlined
in earlier sections, the relay supports a choice of one of four protocols via the rear
communication interface. This is in addition to the front serial interface and 2nd rear
communications port, which supports the Courier protocol only.
The rear EIA(RS)485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection
whichever protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to
32 relays can be ‘daisy chained’ together using a simple twisted pair electrical
connection.
For each of the protocol options, the supported functions/commands will be listed
together with the database definition. The operation of standard procedures such as
extraction of event, fault and disturbance records, or setting changes, will also be
described.
It should be noted that the descriptions contained within this section do not aim to
fully detail the protocol itself. The relevant documentation for the protocol should be
referred to for this information. This section serves to describe the specific
implementation of the protocol in the relay.

2 COURIER INTERFACE

2.1 Courier protocol


Courier is an AREVA T&D communication protocol. The concept of the protocol is
that a standard set of commands are used to access a database of settings and data
within the relay. This allows a generic master to be able to communicate with
different slave devices. The application specific aspects are contained within the
database itself rather than the commands used to interrogate it, i.e. the master
station does not need to be pre-configured.
The same protocol can be used via two physical links K-Bus or EIA(RS)232.
K-Bus is based on EIA(RS)485 voltage levels with HDLC FM0 encoded synchronous
signalling and its own frame format. The K-Bus twisted pair connection is
unpolarised, whereas the EIA(RS)485 and EIA(RS)232 interfaces are polarised.
The EIA(RS)232 interface uses the IEC60870-5 FT1.2 frame format.
The relay supports an IEC60870-5 FT1.2 connection on the front-port. This is
intended for temporary local connection and is not suitable for permanent
connection. This interface uses a fixed baud rate, 11-bit frame, and a fixed device
address.
The rear interface is used to provide a permanent connection for K-Bus and allows
multi-drop connection. It should be noted that although K-Bus is based on
EIA(RS)485 voltage levels it is a synchronous HDLC protocol using FM0 encoding. It
is not possible to use a standard EIA(RS)232 to EIA(RS)485 converter to convert
IEC60870-5 FT1.2 frames to K-Bus. Nor is it possible to connect K-Bus to an
EIA(RS)485 computer port. A protocol converter, such as the KITZ101, should be
employed for this purpose.
The following documentation should be referred to for a detailed description of the
Courier protocol, command-set and link description.
P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications

Page 6/28 MiCOM P342, P343

R6509 K-Bus Interface Guide


R6510 IEC60870 Interface Guide
R6511 Courier Protocol
R6512 Courier User Guide

2.2 Front courier port


The front EIA(RS)2321 9 pin port supports the Courier protocol for one to one
communication. It is designed for use during installation and
commissioning/maintenance and is not suitable for permanent connection. Since this
interface will not be used to link the relay to a substation communication system,
some of the features of Courier are not implemented. These are as follows:
Automatic extraction of Event Records:
− Courier Status byte does not support the Event flag
− Send Event/Accept Event commands are not implemented
Automatic extraction of Disturbance records:
− Courier Status byte does not support the Disturbance flag
Busy Response Layer:
− Courier Status byte does not support the Busy flag, the only response to a
request will be the final data
Fixed Address:
− The address of the front Courier port is always 1, the Change Device address
command is not supported.
Fixed Baud Rate:
− 19200 bps
It should be noted that although automatic extraction of event and disturbance
records is not supported it is possible to manually access this data via the front port.

2.3 Supported command set


The following Courier commands are supported by the relay:
Protocol Layer
Reset Remote Link
Poll Status
Poll Buffer*
Low Level Commands
Send Event*
Accept Event*

1 This port is actually compliant to EIA(RS)574; the 9-pin version of EIA(RS)232, see www.tiaonline.org.
SCADA Communications P34x/EN CT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 7/28

Send Block
Store Block Identifier
Store Block Footer
Menu Browsing
Get Column Headings
Get Column Text
Get Column Values
Get Strings
Get Text
Get Value
Get Column Setting Limits
Setting Changes
Enter Setting Mode
Preload Setting
Abort Setting
Execute Setting
Reset Menu Cell
Set Value
Control Commands
Select Setting Group
Change Device Address*
Set Real Time
Note: Commands indicated with a * are not supported via the front
Courier port.

2.4 Relay courier database


The Courier database is a two dimensional structure with each cell in the database
being referenced by a row and column address. Both the column and the row can
take a range from 0 to 255. Addresses in the database are specified as hexadecimal
values, e.g. 0A02 is column 0A (10 decimal) row 02. Associated settings/data will be
part of the same column, row zero of the column contains a text string to identify the
contents of the column, i.e. a column heading.
P34x/EN GC contains the complete database definition for the relay. For each cell
location the following information is stated:
− Cell Text
− Cell Datatype
− Cell value
− Whether the cell is settable, if so
P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications

Page 8/28 MiCOM P342, P343

• Minimum value
• Maximum value
• Step size
• Password Level required to allow setting changes
• String information (for Indexed String or Binary flag cells)

2.5 Setting changes


(See R6512, Courier User Guide - Chapter 9)
Courier provides two mechanisms for making setting changes, both of these are
supported by the relay. Either method can be used for editing any of the settings
within the relay database.
2.5.1 Method 1
This uses a combination of three commands to perform a settings change:
Enter Setting Mode - checks that the cell is settable and returns the limits
Preload Setting - Places a new value to the cell, this value is echoed to ensure that
setting corruption has not taken place, the validity of the setting is not checked by this
action.
Execute Setting - Confirms the setting change, if the change is valid then a positive
response will be returned, if the setting change fails then an error response will be
returned.
Abort Setting - This command can be used to abandon the setting change.
This is the most secure method and is ideally suited to on-line editors as the setting
limits are taken from the relay before the setting change is made. However this
method can be slow if many settings are being changed as three commands are
required for each change.
2.5.2 Method 2
The Set Value command can be used to directly change a setting, the response to this
command will be either a positive confirm or an error code to indicate the nature of a
failure. This command can be used to implement a setting more rapidly then the
previous method, however the limits are not extracted from the relay. This method is
most suitable for off-line setting editors such as MiCOM S1, or for the issuing of pre-
configured (SCADA) control commands.
2.5.3 Relay settings
There are three categories of settings within the relay database
− Control and Support
− Disturbance Recorder
− Protection Settings Group
Setting changes made to the control and support settings are implemented
immediately and stored in non-volatile memory. Changes made to either the
Disturbance recorder settings or the Protection Settings Groups are stored in a
‘scratchpad’ memory and are not immediately implemented by the relay.
SCADA Communications P34x/EN CT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 9/28

To action setting changes stored in the scratchpad the Save Changes cell in the
Configuration column must be written to. This allows the changes to either be
confirmed and stored in non-volatile memory, or the setting changes to be aborted.
2.5.4 Setting transfer mode
If it is necessary to transfer all of the relay settings to or from the relay a cell within the
Communication System Data column can be used. This cell (location BF03) when set
to 1 makes all of the relay settings visible. Any setting changes made, with the relay
set in this mode, are stored in scratchpad memory (including control and support
settings). When the value of BF03 is set back to 0 any setting changes are verified
and stored in non-volatile memory.
2.6 Event extraction
Events can be extracted either automatically (rear port only) or manually (either
Courier port). For automatic extraction all events are extracted in sequential order
using the standard Courier event mechanism, this includes fault/maintenance data if
appropriate. The manual approach allows the user to select events, faults, or
maintenance data at random from the stored records.
2.6.1 Automatic event extraction
(See Chapter 7 Courier User Guide, publication R6512)
This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information as it
is produced. It is only supported via the rear Courier port.
When new event information is created the Event bit is set within the Status byte, this
indicates to the Master device that event information is available. The oldest,
unextracted event can be extracted from the relay using the Send Event command.
The relay will respond with the event data, which will be either a Courier Type 0 or
Type 3 event. The Type 3 event is used for fault records and maintenance records.
Once an event has been extracted from the relay, the Accept Event can be used to
confirm that the event has been successfully extracted. If all events have been
extracted then the event bit will reset, if there are more events still to be extracted the
next event can be accessed using the Send Event command as before.
2.6.2 Event types
Events will be created by the relay under the following circumstances:
− Change of state of output contact
− Change of state of opto input
− Protection element operation
− Alarm condition
− Setting Change
− Password entered/timed-out
− Fault Record (Type 3 Courier Event)
− Maintenance record (Type 3 Courier Event)
P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications

Page 10/28 MiCOM P342, P343

2.6.3 Event format


The Send Event command results in the following fields being returned by the relay:
− Cell Reference
− Timestamp
− Cell Text
− Cell Value
The menu database, P34x/EN GC, contains a table of the events created by the relay
and indicates how the contents of the above fields are interpreted. Fault records and
Maintenance records will return a Courier Type 3 event, which contains the above
fields together with two additional fields:
− Event extraction column
− Event number
These events contain additional information that is extracted from the relay using the
referenced extraction column. Row 01 of the extraction column contains a setting
that allows the fault/maintenance record to be selected. This setting should be set to
the event number value returned within the record, the extended data can be
extracted from the relay by uploading the text and data from the column.
2.6.4 Manual event record extraction
Column 01 of the database can be used for manual viewing of event, fault, and
maintenance records. The contents of this column will depend on the nature of the
record selected. It is possible to select events by event number and to directly select a
fault record or maintenance record by number.
Event Record selection (Row 01) - This cell can be set to a value between 0 to 249 to
select which of the 250 stored events is selected, 0 will select the most recent record;
249 the oldest stored record. For simple event records, (Type 0) cells 0102 to 0105
contain the event details. A single cell is used to represent each of the event fields. If
the event selected is a fault or maintenance record (Type 3) then the remainder of the
column will contain the additional information.
Fault Record Selection (Row 05) – This cell can be used to directly select a fault record
using a value between 0 and 4 to select one of up to five stored fault records. (0 will
be the most recent fault and 4 will be the oldest). The column will then contain the
details of the fault record selected.
Maintenance Record Selection (Row F0) – This cell can be used to select a
maintenance record using a value between 0 and 4 and operates in a similar way to
the fault record selection.
It should be noted that if this column is used to extract event information from the
relay the number associated with a particular record will change when a new event or
fault occurs.

2.7 Disturbance record extraction


The stored disturbance records within the relay are accessible in a compressed format
via the Courier interface. The records are extracted using column B4. It should be
noted that cells required for extraction of uncompressed disturbance records are not
supported.
SCADA Communications P34x/EN CT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 11/28

Select Record Number (Row 01) - This cell can be used to select the record to be
extracted. Record 0 will be the oldest unextracted record, already extracted older
records will be assigned positive values, and negative values will be used for more
recent records. To facilitate automatic extraction via the rear port the Disturbance bit
of the Status byte is set by the relay whenever there are unextracted disturbance
records.
Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of the
record can be read from cell 02. The disturbance record itself can be extracted using
the block transfer mechanism from cell B00B. It should be noted that the file
extracted from the relay is in a compressed format. It will be necessary to use
MiCOM S1 to de-compress this file and save the disturbance record in the
COMTRADE format.
As has been stated, the rear Courier port can be used to automatically extract
disturbance records as they occur. This operates using the standard Courier
mechanism defined in Chapter 8 of the Courier User Guide. The front Courier port
does not support automatic extraction although disturbance record data can be
extracted manually from this port.

2.8 Programmable scheme logic settings


The programmable scheme logic (PSL) settings can be uploaded from and
downloaded to the relay using the block transfer mechanism defined in Chapter 12
of the Courier User Guide.
The following cells are used to perform the extraction:
− B204 Domain/: Used to select either PSL settings (Upload or download) or PSL
configuration data (Upload only)
− B208 Sub-Domain: Used to select the Protection Setting Group to be
uploaded/downloaded.
− B20C Version: Used on a download to check the compatibility of the file to be
downloaded with the relay.
− B21C Transfer Mode: Used to set-up the transfer process.
− B120 Data Transfer Cell: Used to perform upload/download.
The Programmable scheme-logic settings can be uploaded and downloaded to and
from the relay using this mechanism. If it is necessary to edit the settings MiCOM S1
must be used as the data format is compressed. MiCOM S1 also performs checks on
the validity of the settings before they are downloaded to the relay.
P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications

Page 12/28 MiCOM P342, P343

3 MODBUS INTERFACE
The MODBUS interface is a master/slave protocol and it is defined by MODBUS.org:
See
www.modbus.org
MODBUS Serial Protocol Reference Guide: PI-MBUS-300 Rev. E

3.1 Communication link


This interface also uses the rear EIA(RS)485 port for communication using ‘RTU’
mode communication rather than ‘ASCII’ mode as this provides more efficient use of
the communication bandwidth. This mode of communication is defined by the
MODBUS standard.
In summary, the character framing is 1 start bit, 8 bit data, either 1 parity bit and 1
stop bit, or two stop bits. This gives 11 bits per character.
The following parameters can be configured for this port using either the front panel
interface or the front Courier port:
− Baud Rate
− Device Address
− Parity
− Inactivity Time

3.2 MODBUS functions


The following MODBUS function codes are supported by the relay:
01 Read Coil Status
02 Read Input Status
03 Read Holding Registers
04 Read Input Registers
06 Preset Single Register
08 Diagnostics
11 Fetch Communication Event Counter
12 Fetch Communication Event Log
16 Preset Multiple Registers 127 max
These are interpreted by the MiCOM relay in the following way:
01 Read status of output contacts (0xxxx addresses)
02 Read status of opto inputs (1xxxx addresses)
03 Read Setting values (4xxxx addresses)
04 Read Measured values (3xxxx addresses
06 Write single setting value (4xxxx addresses)
16 Write multiple setting values (4xxxx addresses)
SCADA Communications P34x/EN CT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 13/28

3.3 Response codes

Code MODBUS Description MiCOM Interpretation


01 Illegal Function Code The function code transmitted is not
supported by the slave
02 Illegal Data Address The start data address in the request is
not an allowable value. If any of the
addresses in the range cannot be
accessed due to password protection then
all changes within the request are
discarded and this error response will be
returned. Note: If the start address is
correct but the range includes non –
implemented addresses this response is
not produced
03 Illegal Value A value referenced in the data field
transmitted by the master is not within
range. Other values transmitted within
the same packet will be executed if inside
range.
06 Slave Device Busy The write command cannot be
implemented due to the database being
locked by another interface. This
response is also produced if the relay
software is busy executing a previous
request.

3.4 Register mapping


The relay supports the following memory page references:
Memory Page Interpretation
0xxxx Read and write access of the Output Relays.
1xxxx Read only access of the Opto Inputs.
3xxxx Read only access of Data.
4xxxx Read and write access of Settings.
Where xxxx represents the addresses available in the page (0 to 9999)
Note that the “extended memory file” (6xxxx) is not supported.
A complete map of the MODBUS addresses supported by the relay is contained in
menu database, P34x/EN GC, of this service manual.
Note that MODBUS convention is to document register addresses as ordinal values
whereas the actual protocol addresses are literal values. The MiCOM relays begin
their register addresses at zero. Thus, the first register in a memory page is register
address zero. The second register is register address 1 and so on. Note that the
page number notation is not part of the address.

3.5 Event extraction


The relay supports two methods of event extraction providing either automatic or
manual extraction of the stored event, fault, and maintenance records.
P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications

Page 14/28 MiCOM P342, P343

3.5.1 Manual selection


There are three registers available to manually select stored records, there are also
three read only registers allowing the number of stored records to be determined.
40100 - Select Event, 0 to 249
40101 - Select Fault, 0 to 4
40102 - Select Maintenance Record, 0 to 4
For each of the above registers a value of 0 represents the most recent stored record.
The following registers can be read to indicate the numbers of the various types of
record stored.
30100 - Number of stored records
30101 - Number of stored fault records
30102 - Number of stored maintenance records
Each fault or maintenance record logged causes an event record to be created by the
relay. If this event record is selected the additional registers allowing the fault or
maintenance record details will also become populated.
3.5.2 Automatic extraction
The automatic extraction facilities allow all types of record to be extracted as they
occur. Event records are extracted in sequential order including any fault or
maintenance data that may be associated with the event.
The MODBUS master can determine whether the relay has any events stored that
have not yet been extracted. This is performed by reading the relay status register
30001 (G26 data type). If the event bit of this register is set then the relay has
unextracted events available. To select the next event for sequential extraction the
master station writes a value of 1 to the record selection register 40400 (G18 data
type). The event data together with any fault/maintenance data can be read from the
registers specified below. Once the data has been read the event record can be
marked as having been read by writing a value of 2 to register 40400.
3.5.3 Record data
The location and format of the registers used to access the record data is the same
whether they have been selected using either of the two mechanisms detailed above.

Event MODBUS
Length Comments
Description Address
Time and Date 30103 4 See G12 data type description in section
3.8.
Event Type 30107 1 See G13 data type. Indicates type of event
Event Value 30108 2 Nature of Value depends on Event Type.
This will contain the status as a binary flag
for Contact, Opto, Alarm, and protection
events.
SCADA Communications P34x/EN CT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 15/28

Event MODBUS
Length Comments
Description Address
MODBUS 30110 1 This indicates the MODBUS Register
Address address where the change occurred.
Alarm 30011
Relays 30723
Optos 30725
Protection events – Like the Relay and
Opto addresses this will map onto the
MODBUS address of the appropriate DDB
status register depending on which bit of
the DDB the change occurred. These will
range from 30727 to 30785.
For Platform events, Fault events and
Maintenance events the default is 0.
Event Index 30111 1 This register will contain the DDB ordinal
for protection events or the bit number for
alarm events. The direction of the change
will be indicated by the most significant bit;
1 for 0 – 1change and 0 for 1 – 0 change.
Additional 30112 1 0 means that there is no additional data.
Data Present 1 means fault record data can be read
from 30113 to 30199 (number of registers
depends on the product).
2 means maintenance record data can be
read from 30036 to 30039.
If a fault record or maintenance record is directly selected using the manual
mechanism then the data can be read from the register ranges specified above. The
event record data in registers 30103 to 30111 will not be available.
It is possible using register 40401(G6 data type) to clear independently the stored
relay event/fault and maintenance records. This register also provides an option to
reset the relay indications which has the same effect on the relay as pressing the clear
key within the alarm viewer using the front panel menu.

3.6 Disturbance record extraction


The relay provides facilities for both manual and automatic extraction of disturbance
records. The two methods differ only in the mechanism for selecting a disturbance
record, the method for extracting the data and the format of the data are identical.
3.6.1 Manual selection
Each disturbance record has a unique identifier which increments for each stored
record and resets at a value of 65535. The following registers can be used to
determine the identifiers for the stored records
30800 - The number of stored disturbance records
30801 - The identifier for the oldest stored record
A record can be selected by writing the required record identifier to register 40250. It
is possible to read the timestamp of the selected record and in this way produce a
chronological list of all the stored records.
P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications

Page 16/28 MiCOM P342, P343

3.6.2 Automatic extraction


The MODBUS master station can determine the presence of unread disturbance
records by polling register 30001 (G26 data type). When the disturbance bit of this
register is set, disturbance records are available for extraction. To select the next
disturbance record, write a value of 4 to register 40400 (G18 data type). Once the
disturbance record data has been read by the master station this record can be
marked as having been read by writing a value of 8 to register 40400.
3.6.3 Record data
The timestamp for a record selected using either of the above means can be read
from registers 30390 to 30393. The disturbance record data itself is stored in a
compressed format, due to the size of the disturbance record it must be read using a
paging system.
The number of pages required to extract a record will depend on the configured size
of the record.
When a record is first selected, the first page of data will be available in registers
30803 to 30929. (The number of registers required for the current page can be read
from register 30802. It will have a value of 127 for all but the last page in the
record). Once the first page has been read, the next page can be selected by writing
a value of 5 to register 40400. If this action is performed after the last page for the
disturbance record has been selected an illegal value error response will be returned.
This error response can be used by the MODBUS master to indicate that the last page
of the disturbance record has been read.

3.7 Setting changes


The relay settings can be split into two categories:
− control and support settings
− disturbance record settings and protection setting groups
Changes to settings within the control and support area are executed immediately.
Changes to the protection setting groups or the disturbance recorder settings are
stored in a temporary ‘scratchpad’ area and must be confirmed before they are
implemented. All the relay settings are 4xxxx page addresses. The following points
should be noted when changing settings:
− Settings implemented using multiple registers must be written to using a multi-
register write operation.
− The first address for a multi-register write must be a valid address, if there are
unmapped addresses within the range being written to then the data associated
with these addresses will be discarded.
− If a write operation is performed with values that are out of range then the
illegal data response will be produced. Valid setting values within the same
write operation will be executed.
− If a write operation is performed attempting to change registers that require a
higher level of password access than is currently enabled then all setting
changes in the write operation will be discarded.
SCADA Communications P34x/EN CT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 17/28

3.7.1 Password protection


As described in the introduction to this service manual, the relay settings can be
subject to Password protection. The level of password protection required to change
a setting is indicated in the relay setting database (P34x/EN GC). Level 2 is the
highest level of password access, level 0 indicates that no password is required.
The following registers are available to control Password protection:
40001&40002 Password Entry
40022 Default Password Level
40023&40024 Setting to Change password level 1
40025&40026 Setting to Change password level 2
30010 Can be read to indicate current access level
3.7.2 Control and support settings
Control and support settings are executed immediately on the write operation.
3.7.3 Protection and disturbance recorder settings
Setting changes to either of these areas are stored in a scratchpad area and will not
be used by the relay unless a confirm or an abort operation is performed. Register
40405 can be used either to confirm or abort the setting changes within the
scratchpad area. It should be noted that the relay supports four groups of protection
settings. The MODBUS addresses for each of the four groups are repeated within the
following address ranges:
− Group 1 41000-42999
− Group 2 43000-44999
− Group 3 45000-46999
− Group 4 47000-48999
In addition to the basic editing of the protection setting groups, the following
functions are provided:
− Default values can be restored to a setting group or to all of the relay settings
by writing to register 40402.
− It is possible to copy the contents of one setting group to another by writing the
source group to register 40406 and the target group to 40407.
It should be noted that the setting changes performed by either of the two operations
defined above are made to the scratchpad area. These changes must be confirmed
by writing to register 40405.
The active protection setting groups can be selected by writing to register 40404. An
illegal data response will be returned if an attempt is made to set the active group to
one that has been disabled.

3.8 Date and time format (data type G12)


The date-time data type G12 allows real date and time information to be conveyed
down to a resolution of 1ms. The structure of the data type is shown in Table 3-1
and is compliant with the IEC60870-5-4 “Binary Time 2a” format.
P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications

Page 18/28 MiCOM P342, P343

The seven bytes of the structure are packed into four 16-bit registers, such that byte 1
is transmitted first, followed by byte 2 through to byte 7, followed by a null (zero) byte
to make eight bytes in total. Since register data is usually transmitted in big-endian
format (high order byte followed by low order byte), byte 1 will be in the high-order
byte position followed by byte 2 in the low-order position for the first register. The
last register will contain just byte 7 in the high order position and the low order byte
will have a value of zero.

Bit Position
Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 m7 m6 m5 m4 m3 m2 m1 m0
2 m15 m14 m13 m12 m11 m10 m9 m8
3 IV R I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 I0
4 SU R R H4 H3 H2 H1 H0
5 W2 W1 W0 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0
6 R R R R M3 M2 M1 M0
7 R Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 Y0

Where:
− m = 0…59,999ms
− I = 0…59 minutes
− H = 0…23 Hours
− W = 1…7 Day of week; Monday to Sunday, 0 for not calculated
− D = 1…31 Day of Month
− M = 1…12 Month of year; January to December
− Y = 0…99 Years (year of century)
− R = Reserved bit = 0
− SU = summertime: 0=standard time, 1=summer time
− IV = invalid value: 0=valid, 1=invalid
− range = 0ms…99 years

Table 3-1 G12 Date & time data type structure


Since the range of the data type is only 100 years, the century must be deduced. The
century is calculated as the one that will produce the nearest time value to the current
date. For example: 30-12-99 is 30-12-1999 when received in 1999 & 2000, but is
30-12-2099 when received in 2050. This technique allows 2 digit years to be
accurately converted to 4 digits in a ±50 year window around the current datum.
The invalid bit has two applications:
1. It can indicate that the date-time information is considered inaccurate, but is the
best information available.
2. Date-time information is not available.
SCADA Communications P34x/EN CT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 19/28

The summertime bit is used to indicate that summertime (day light saving) is being
used and, more importantly, to resolve the alias and time discontinuity which occurs
when summertime starts and ends. This is important for the correct time correlation
of time stamped records.
The day of the week field is optional and if not calculated will be set to zero.
The concept of time zone is not catered for by this data type and hence by the relay.
It is up to the end user to determine the time zone utilised by the relay. Normal
practise is to use UTC (universal co-ordinated time), which avoids the complications
with day light saving time-stamp correlation’s.

3.9 Power & energy measurement data formats (G29 & G125)
The power and energy measurements are available in two data formats; G29 integer
format and G125 IEEE754 floating point format. For historical reasons the registers
listed in the main part of the “Measurements 2” column of the menu database (see
P34x/EN GC) are of the G29 format. The floating point, G125, versions appear at
the end of the column.
3.9.1 Data type G29
Data type G29 consists of three registers. The first register is the per unit power or
energy measurement and is of type G28, which is a signed 16 bit quantity. The
second and third registers contain a multiplier to convert the per unit value to a real
value. The multiplier is of type G27, which is an unsigned 32-bit quantity. Thus, the
overall value conveyed by the G29 data type must be calculated as G29=G28×G27.
The relay calculates the G28 per unit power or energy value as G28=((measured
secondary quantity) / (CT secondary) × (110V / (VT secondary)). Since data type G28
is a signed 16-bit integer, its dynamic range is constrained to ±32768. This
limitation should be borne in mind for the energy measurements, as the G29 value
will saturate a long time before the equivalent G125 does.
The associated G27 multiplier is calculated as G27=(CT primary) × (VT primary /
110V) when primary value measurements are selected, and as G27=(CT secondary)
× (VT secondary / 110V) when secondary value measurements are selected.
Due to the required truncations from floating point values to integer values in the
calculations of the G29 component parts and its limited dynamic range, the use of
the G29 values is only recommended when the MODBUS master cannot deal with
the G125 IEEE754 floating point equivalents.
Note that the G29 values must be read in whole multiples of three registers. It is not
possible to read the G28 and G27 parts with separate read commands.
Example:
For A-Phase Power (Watts) (registers 30300 - 30302) for a 110V relay, In = 1A, VT
ratio = 110V:110V and CT ratio = 1A:1A.
Applying A-phase 1A @ 63.51V
A-phase Watts = ((63.51V × 1A) / In=1A) × (110/Vn=110V) = 63.51 Watts
The G28 part of the value is the truncated per unit quantity, which will be equal to 64
(40h).
The multiplier is derived from the VT and CT ratios set in the relay, with the equation
((CT Primary) × (VT Primary) / 110V). Thus, the G27 part of the value will equal 1.
Hence the overall value of the G29 register set is 64×1 = 64W
P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications

Page 20/28 MiCOM P342, P343

The registers would contain:


30300 - 0040h
30301 - 0000h
30302 - 0001h
Using the previous example with a VT ratio = 110,000V:110V and CT ratio =
10,000A:1A the G27 multiplier would be 10,000A×110,000V/110 = 10,000,000.
The overall value of the G29 register set is 64 × 10,000,000 = 640MW. (Note that
there is an actual error of 49MW in this calculation due to loss of resolution.)
The registers would contain:
30300 - 0040h
30301 - 0098h
30302 - 9680h
3.9.2 Data type G125
Data type G125 is a short float IEEE754 floating point format, which occupies 32 bits
in two consecutive registers. The high order byte of the format is in the first (low
order) register and the low order byte in the second register.
The value of the G125 measurement is as accurate as the relay’s ability to resolve the
measurement after it has applied the secondary or primary scaling factors as require.
It does not suffer from the truncation errors or dynamic range limitations associated
with the G29 data format.
SCADA Communications P34x/EN CT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 21/28

4 IEC60870-5-103 interface
The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave
device. The relay conforms to compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not
supported.
The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:
− Initialisation (Reset)
− Time Synchronisation
− Event Record Extraction
− General Interrogation
− Cyclic Measurements
− General Commands
− Disturbance Record Extraction
− Private Codes

4.1 Physical connection and link layer


Two connection options are available for IEC60870-5-103, either the rear
EIA(RS)485 port or an optional rear fibre optic port. Should the fibre optic port be
fitted the selection of the active port can be made via the front panel menu or the
front Courier port, however the selection will only be effective following the next relay
power up.
For either of the two modes of connection it is possible to select both the relay
address and baud rate using the front panel menu/front Courier. Following a
change to either of these two settings a reset command is required to re-establish
communications, see reset command description below.

4.2 Initialisation
Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have
been changed a reset command is required to initialise the communications. The
relay will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the
difference being that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relay’s
transmit buffer.
The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message
ASDU 5, the Cause Of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU or
Reset FCB depending on the nature of the reset command. The content of ASDU 5 is
described in the IEC60870-5-103 section of the menu database, P34x/EN GC.
In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it
will also produce a power up event.

4.3 Time synchronisation


The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronisation feature of the
IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as
specified in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronisation message is sent as a
send/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirm. Whether the time-
P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications

Page 22/28 MiCOM P342, P343

synchronisation message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/no reply)


message, a time synchronisation Class 1 event will be generated/produced.
If the relay clock is being synchronised using the IRIG-B input then it will not be
possible to set the relay time using the IEC60870-5-103 interface. An attempt to set
the time via the interface will cause the relay to create an event with the current date
and time taken from the IRIG-B synchronised internal clock.

4.4 Spontaneous events


Events are categorised using the following information:
− Function Type
− Information number
The IEC60870-5-103 profile in the menu database, P34x/EN GC, contains a
complete listing of all events produced by the relay.

4.5 General interrogation


The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, and
information numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle are indicated in the
IEC60870-5-103 profile in the menu database, P34x/EN GC.

4.6 Cyclic measurements


The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be
read from the relay using a Class 2 poll (note ADSU 3 is not used). The rate at which
the relay produces new measured values can be controlled using the Measurement
Period setting. This setting can be edited from the front panel menu/front Courier
port and is active immediately following a change.
It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a
proportion of 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value.

4.7 Commands
A list of the supported commands is contained in the menu database, P34x/EN GC.
The relay will respond to other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of
transmission (COT) indicating ‘negative acknowledgement’.

4.8 Test mode


It is possible using either the front panel menu or the front Courier port to disable the
relay output contacts to allow secondary injection testing to be performed. This is
interpreted as ‘test mode’ by the IEC60870-5-103 standard. An event will be
produced to indicate both entry to and exit from test mode. Spontaneous events and
cyclic measured data transmitted whilst the relay is in test mode will have a COT of
‘test mode’.

4.9 Disturbance records


The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted
using the standard mechanisms described in IEC60870-5-103. Note, IEC60870-5-
103 only supports up to 8 records.
SCADA Communications P34x/EN CT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 23/28

4.10 Blocking of monitor direction


The relay supports a facility to block messages in the Monitor direction and also in
the Command direction. Messages can be blocked in the Monitor and Command
directions using the menu commands, Communications – CS103 Blocking –
Disabled/Monitor Blocking/Command Blocking or DDB signals Monitor Blocked and
Command Blocked.

5 DNP3 INTERFACE

5.1 DNP3 protocol


The DNP3 protocol is defined and administered by the DNP Users Group.
Information about the user group, DNP3 in general and the protocol specifications
can be found on their Internet site:
www.dnp.org
The descriptions given here are intended to accompany the device profile document
which is included in the menu database, P34x/EN GC. The DNP3 protocol is not
described here, please refer to the documentation available from the user group.
The device profile document specifies the full details of the DNP3 implementation for
the relay. This is the standard format DNP3 document that specifies which objects,
variations and qualifiers are supported. The device profile document also specifies
what data is available from the relay via DNP3. The relay operates as a DNP3 slave
and supports subset level 2 of the protocol, plus some of the features from level 3.
DNP3 communication uses the EIA(RS)485 communication port at the rear of the
relay. The data format is 1 start bit, 8 data bits, an optional parity bit and 1 stop bit.
Parity is configurable (see menu settings below).

5.2 DNP3 menu setting


The settings shown below are available in the menu for DNP3 in the
‘Communications’ column.

Setting Range Description


Remote Address 0 – 65534 DNP3 address of relay (decimal)
Baud Rate 1200, 2400, Selectable baud rate for DNP3
4800, 9600, communication
19200, 38400
Parity None, Odd, Parity setting
Even
Time Sync Enabled, Enables or disables the relay requesting
Disabled time sync from the master via IIN bit 4
word 1

5.3 Object 1 binary inputs


Object 1, binary inputs, contains information describing the state of signals within the
relay which mostly form part of the digital data bus (DDB). In general these include
the state of the output contacts and input optos, alarm signals and protection start
and trip signals. The ‘DDB number’ column in the device profile document provides
the DDB numbers for the DNP3 point data. These can be used to cross-reference to
the DDB definition list which is also found in the menu database, P34x/EN GC. The
P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications

Page 24/28 MiCOM P342, P343

binary input points can also be read as change events via object 2 and object 60 for
class 1-3 event data.

5.4 Object 10 binary outputs


Object 10, binary outputs, contains commands which can be operated via DNP3. As
such the points accept commands of type pulse on [null, trip, close] and latch on/off
as detailed in the device profile in the menu database, P34x/EN GC and execute the
command once for either command. The other fields are ignored (queue, clear,
trip/close, in time and off time).
Due to that fact that many of the relay’s functions are configurable, it may be the
case that some of the object 10 commands described below are not available for
operation. In the case of a read from object 10 this will result in the point being
reported as off-line and an operate command to object 12 will generate an error
response.
Examples of object 10 points that maybe reported as off-line are:
− Activate setting groups - Ensure setting groups are enabled
− CB trip/close - Ensure remote CB control is enabled
− Reset NPS thermal - Ensure NPS thermal protection is enabled
− Reset thermal O/L - Ensure thermal overload protection is enabled
− Reset RTD flags - Ensure RTD Inputs is enabled
− Control Inputs - Ensure control inputs are enabled

5.5 Object 20 binary counters


Object 20, binary counters, contains cumulative counters and measurements. The
binary counters can be read as their present ‘running’ value from object 20, or as a
‘frozen’ value from object 21. The running counters of object 20 accept the read,
freeze and clear functions. The freeze function takes the current value of the object
20 running counter and stores it in the corresponding object 21 frozen counter. The
freeze and clear function resets the object 20 running counter to zero after freezing its
value.

5.6 Object 30 analogue input


Object 30, analogue inputs, contains information from the relay’s measurements
columns in the menu. All object 30 points are reported as fixed-point values
although they are stored inside the relay in a floating point format. The conversion to
fixed point format requires the use of a scaling factor, which differs for the various
types of data within the relay e.g. current, voltage, phase angle etc. The data types
supported are listed at the end of the device profile document with each type
allocated a ‘D number’, i.e. D1, D2, etc. In the object 30 point list each data point
has a D number data type assigned to it which defines the scaling factor, default
deadband setting and the range and resolution of the deadband setting. The
deadband is the setting used to determine whether a change event should be
generated for each point. The change events can be read via object 32 or object 60
and will be generated for any point whose value has changed by more than the
deadband setting since the last time the data value was reported.
SCADA Communications P34x/EN CT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 25/28

Any analogue measurement that is unavailable at the time it is read will be reported
as offline, e.g. the frequency when the current and voltage frequency is outside the
tracking range of the relay or the thermal state when the thermal protection is
disabled in the configuration column. Note that all object 30 points are reported as
secondary values in DNP3 (with respect to CT and VT ratios).

5.7 DNP3 configuration using MiCOM S1


A PC support package for DNP3 is available as part of the Settings and Records
module of MiCOM S1. The S1 module allows configuration of the relay’s DNP3
response. The PC is connected to the relay via a serial cable to the 9-pin front part of
the relay – see Introduction (P34x/EN IT). The configuration data is uploaded from
the relay to the PC in a block of compressed format data and downloaded to the
relay in a similar manner after modification. The new DNP3 configuration takes
effect in the relay after the download is complete. The default configuration can be
restored at any time by choosing ‘All Settings’ from the ‘Restore Defaults’ cell in the
menu ‘Configuration’ column. In S1, the DNP3 data is displayed on a three tabbed
screen, one screen each for object1, 20 and 30. Object 10 is not configurable.
5.7.1 Object 1
For every point included in the device profile document there is a check box for
membership of class 0 and radio buttons for class 1, 2 or 3 membership. Any point
that is in class 0 must be a member of one of the change event classes 1, 2 or 3.
Points that are configured out of class 0 are by default not capable of generating
change events. Furthermore, points that are not part of class 0 are effectively
removed from the DNP3 response by renumbering the points that are in class 0 into
a contiguous list starting at point number 0. The renumbered point numbers are
shown at the left hand side of the screen in S1 and can be printed out to form a
revised device profile for the relay. This mechanism allows best use of available
bandwidth by only reporting the data points required by the user when a poll for all
points is made.
5.7.2 Object 20
The running counter value of object 20 points can be configured to be in or out of
class 0. Any running counter that is in class 0 can have its frozen value selected to be
in or out of the DNP3 response, but a frozen counter cannot be included without the
corresponding running counter. As with object 1, the class 0 response will be
renumbered into a contiguous list of points based on the selection of running
counters. The frozen counters will also be renumbered based on the selection; note
that if some of the counters that are selected as running are not also selected as
frozen then the renumbering will result in the frozen counters having different point
numbers to their running counterparts. For example, object 20 point 3 (running
counter) might have its frozen value reported as object 21 point 1.
5.7.3 Object 30
For the analogue inputs, object 30, the same selection options for classes 0, 1, 2 and
3 are available as for object 1. In addition to these options, which behave in exactly
the same way as for object 1, it is possible to change the deadband setting for each
point. The minimum and maximum values and the resolution of the deadband
settings are defined in the device profile document; MiCOM S1 will allow the
deadband to be set to any value within these constraints.
P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications

Page 26/28 MiCOM P342, P343

6 SECOND REAR COMMUNICATIONS PORT (COURIER)


Relays with Courier, MODBUS, IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3 protocol on the first rear
communications port have the option of a second rear port, running the Courier
language. The second port is designed typically for dial-up modem access by
protection engineers/operators, when the main port is reserved for SCADA
communication traffic. Communication is via one of three physical links: K-Bus,
EIA(RS)485 or EIA(RS)2321. The port supports full local or remote protection and
control access by MiCOM S1 software.
When changing the port configuration between K-Bus, EIA(RS)485 &
EIA(RS)232 it is necessary to reboot the relay to update the hardware
configuration of the second rear port.
There is also provision for the EIA(RS)485 & EIA(RS)232 protocols to be configured to
operate with a modem, using an IEC60870 10 bit frame.

Port Configuration Valid Communication Protocol


K-Bus K-Bus
IEC60870 FT1.2, 11bit frame
EIA(RS)232
IEC60870, 10 bit frame
IEC60870 FT1.2, 11bit frame
EIA(RS)485
IEC60870, 10 bit frame

If both rear communications ports are connected to the same bus, care should be
taken to ensure their address settings are not the same, to avoid message conflicts.

6.1 Courier protocol


The following documentation should be referred to for a detailed description of the
Courier protocol, command set and link description.
− R6509 K-Bus Interface Guide
− R6510 IEC60870 Interface Guide
− R6511 Courier Protocol
− R6512 Courier User Guide
The second rear communications port is functionally the same as detailed in section 2
for a Courier rear communications port, with the following exceptions:

6.2 Event extraction


Automatic event extraction is not supported when the first rear port protocol is
Courier, MODBUS or CS103. It is supported when the first rear port protocol is
DNP3.

6.3 Disturbance record extraction


Automatic disturbance record extraction is not supported when the first rear port
protocol is Courier, MODBUS or CS103. It is supported when the first rear port
protocol is DNP3.
SCADA Communications P34x/EN CT/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 27/28

6.4 Connection to the second rear port


The second rear Courier port connects via the 9-way female D-type connector (SK4)
in the middle of the card end plate (in between IRIG-B connector and lower D-type).
The connection is compliant to EIA(RS)574.
For IEC60870-5-2 over EIA(RS)232

Pin Connection
1 No Connection
2 RxD
3 TxD
4 DTR#
5 Ground
6 No Connection
7 RTS#
8 CTS#
9 No Connection

For K-bus or IEC60870-5-2 over EIA(RS)485

Pin* Connection
4 EIA(RS)485 – 1 (+ ve)
7 EIA(RS)485 – 2 (- ve)

* - All other pins unconnected.


#
- These pins are control lines for use with a modem.
NOTES:
1. Connector pins 4 and 7 are used by both the EIA(RS)232and EIA(RS)485
physical layers, but for different purposes. Therefore, the cables should be
removed during configuration switches.
2. For the EIA(RS)485 protocol an EIA(RS)485 to EIA(RS)232 converter will be
required to connect a modem or PC running MiCOM S1, to the relay. An
AREVA T&D CK222 is recommended.
3. EIA(RS)485 is polarity sensitive, with pin 4 positive (+) and pin 7 negative (-).
4. The K-Bus protocol can be connected to a PC via a KITZ101 or 102.

7 SK5 PORT CONNECTION


The lower 9-way D-type connector (SK5) is currently unsupported. Do not connect to
this port.
P34x/EN CT/F33 SCADA Communications

Page 28/28 MiCOM P342, P343


Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343

RELAY MENU DATABASE


P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Database

MiCOM P342, P343

MiCOM P342, P343 Guides


Generator Protection Relays

Relay Menu Database

This version of the Relay Menu Database is specific to the following


models

Model Number Software Number


P342------0070C P342------0070-A/B/C
P343------0070C P343------0070-A/B/C

For other models / software versions, please contact AREVA T&D for the
relevant information.
(Software versions P342------0010*, P342------0020*, P342------0030*,
P342------0040*, P342------0050*, P342------0060* and
P343------0010*, P343------0020*, P343------0030*, P343------0040*,
P343------0050*, P343------0060* are not supported by this menu
database, see TG8614A (0010), TG8614B (0020 – 0040),
P34x/EN T/C11 (0050) and P34x/EN T/D22 (0060) for information on
the menu database for these software versions).
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 1/170

RELAY MENU DATABASE


This Relay Menu Database is split into several sections, these are as follows:
• Menu Database for Courier, User Interface and MODBUS
• Menu Datatype Definition
• Event Data for Courier, User Interface and MODBUS
• IEC60870-5-103 Interoperability Guide
• Internal Digital Signals
• DNP3.0 Device Profile Document
• Default Programmable Logic
Menu database
This database defines the structure of the relay menu for the courier interface, the
front panel user interface and the MODBUS interface. This includes all the relay
settings and measurements. Datatypes for MODBUS and indexed strings for Courier
and the user interface are cross-referenced to the Menu Datatype Definition section
(using a G Number). For all settable cells the setting limits and default value are also
defined within this database.
Note: The following labels are used within the database
Label Description Value
V1 Main VT Rating 1 (120/110V) 4 (380/480V)
V2 Checksynch VT Rating 1 (100/110V) 4 (380/480V)
V3 NVD VT Rating 1 (100/110V) 4 (380/480V)
Ι1 Phase CT Rating 1 or 5 (Setting 0A08)
Ι2 Earth Fault CT Rating 1 or 5 (Setting 0A0A)
Ι3 Sensitive CT Rating 1 or 5 (Setting 0A0C)
Ι4 Mutual CT Rating 1 or 5 (Setting 0A0E)

Menu datatype definition


This table defines the datatypes used for MODBUS (the datatypes for the Courier and
user interface are defined within the Menu Database itself using the standard Courier
Datatypes). This section also defines the indexed string setting options for all
interfaces. The datatypes defined within this section are cross-referenced to from the
menu database using a G number.
Event data
This section specifies all the event information that can be produced by the relay. It
details exactly how each event will be presented via the Courier, User and MODBUS
interfaces.
IEC60870-5-103 interoperability guide
This table fully defines the operation of the IEC60870-5-103 (VDEW) interface for the
relay it should be read in conjunction with the relevant section of the Communications
section of this Manual (P34x/EN CT/E33).
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Database

Page 2/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Internal digital signals


This table defines all of the relay internal digital signals (opto inputs, output contacts
and protection inputs and outputs). A relay may have up to 1023 internal signals
each referenced by a numeric index as shown in this table. This numeric index is
used to select a signal for the commissioning monitor port. It is also used to explicitly
define protection events produced by the relay (see the Event Data section).
DNP3.0 device profile document
This table defines all of the objects, functions and/or qualifiers supported.
Default programmable logic
This section documents the default programmable logic for the various models of the
relay. This default logic for each model of the relay is supplied with the MiCOM S1
Scheme Logic Editor PC support software.
References
Introduction (P34x/EN IT/E33) : User Interface operation and connections to the relay
Communications (P34x/EN CT/E33) : Overview of communication interfaces
Courier User Guide R6512
Modicon MODBUS Protocol Reference Guide PI-MBUS-300 Rev E
IEC60870-5-103 Telecontrol Equipment and Systems – Transmission Protocols –
Companion Standard for the informative interface of Protection Equipment
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 3/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
SYSTEM DATA 00 00 * * *
Language 01 Indexed String G19 G19 English Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
Password 02 ASCII Password(4 chars) G20 40001 40002 G20 AAAA Setting 65 90 1 0 * * *
Binary Flag (8 bits)
Sys Fn Links 03 G95 40003 G95 Setting 1 1 1 2 * * *
Indexed Strings
ASCII Text(16 chars) * = 1 for Model 1, 2 for Model 2, 3 for Model
Description 04 G3 40004 40011 G3 MiCOM P34* Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
3
Plant Reference 05 ASCII Text(16 chars) G3 40012 40019 G3 ALSTOM Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Model Number 06 ASCII Text(32 chars) G3 30020 30035 G3 Model Number Data * * *
Serial Number 08 ASCII Text(7 chars) G3 30044 30051 G3 Serial Number Data * * *
Frequency 09 Unsigned Integer(8 bits) 40020 G1 50 Setting 50 60 10 2 * * *
Comms Level 0A Unsigned Integer(16 bits) 2 Data * * *
Needs to be address of interface
Relay Address 0B Unsigned Integer(16 bits) 255 Setting 0 255 1 1 * * *
Rear Courier Address available via LCD
Relay status (repeat of Courier Status byte
Binary Flag(16 bits) 30001 G26 Data * * *
without the busy flag)
Plant Status 0C Binary Flag(16 bits) G4 30002 G4 Data * * *
Control Status 0D Binary Flag(16 bits) G5 30004 G5 Data * * *
Active Group 0E Unsigned Integer(16 bits) 30006 G1 Data * * *
UNUSED 0F
CB Trip/Close 10 Indexed String(2) G55 No Operation Command 0 2 1 1 * Visible to LCD+Front Port
CB Trip/Close N/A 10 Indexed String(2) G55 40021 G55 No Operation Command 0 2 1 1 * Visible to Rear Port
Software Ref. 1 11 ASCII Text(16 chars) 30052 30059 G3 Data * * *
Binary Flag The original register 30007 is available for
Opto I/P Status 20 G8 30725 30726 G8 Data * * *
Indexed String opto inputs #1 to #16
Binary Flag
Relay O/P Status 21 G9 30008 30009 G9 Data * * *
Indexed String
Binary Flag
Alarm Status 1 22 G96 30011 30012 G96 Data * * *
Indexed String
UNUSED 23
Binary Flag
Opto I/P Status 30 G8 30725 30726 G8 Data * * * The original register 30007 is available
Indexed String
Binary Flag
Relay O/P Status 40 G9 30008 30009 G9 Data * * *
Indexed String
Binary Flag
Alarm Status 1 50 G96 30011 30012 G96 Data * * *
Indexed String
Binary Flag
Alarm Status 2 51 G128 30013 30014 G128 Data * * *
Indexed String
Binary Flag(32 bits)
Alarm Status 3 52 G228 30015 30016 G228 Data * * *
Indexed String
Access Level D0 Unsigned Integer(16 bits) 30010 G1 Data * * *
Password Control D1 Unsigned Integer(16 bits) G22 40022 G22 2 Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Password Level 1 D2 ASCII Password(4 chars) G20 40023 40024 G20 AAAA Setting 65 90 1 1 * * *
Password Level 2 D3 ASCII Password(4 chars) G20 40025 40026 G20 AAAA Setting 65 90 1 2 * * *
VIEW RECORDS 01 00 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 4/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
30100 G1 No of event records stored
30101 G1 Number of Fault records stored
30102 G1
Select Event 01 Unsigned Integer(16 bits) 40100 0 Setting 0 249 1 0 Max value is oldest record
Menu Cell Ref N/A 02 Cell Reference 30107 G13 (From Record) Data * * * Indicates type of event. See Event sheet.
Time & Date 03 IEC870 Time & Date 30103 30106 G12 (From Record) Data * * *
Event Text 04 Ascii String (32 chars) Data * * * See Event sheet
Note DTL depends on event type binary flag for
Event Value 05 Unsigned Int / Binary Flag (32 bits) 30108 30109 G27 Data * * * Contact, Opto, alarm & Protection. See Event
sheet of Spreadsheet.
Select Fault 06 Unsigned Integer (16 bits) 40101 Setting 0 4 1 2 * * * Allows Fault Record to be selected
Modbus address where change occurred.
Alarm 30011; Relay 30723; Opto 30725
30110 G1 Data * * * Protection 30727-30754. For platform events,
fault events and maintenance events the
default is 0.
This register will contain the DDB ordinal for
30111 G1 Data * * * protection events or the bit number for alarm
events.
0 means that there is no additional data
30112 G1 Data * * * 1 means that fault record data is available
2 means that maintenance data is available
Started Phase N/A Data * * *
ABCN A/B/C/N Visible if Start A/B/C/N
Tripped Phase N/A Data * * *
ABCN A/B/C/N Visible if Trip A/B/C/N
Gen Differential N/A Data *
Trip
Power N/A Data * * *
Start 1 2 1/2 visible if Start 1/2
Power N/A Data * * *
Trip 1 2 1/2 visible if Trip 1/2
Field Failure N/A Data * *
Alarm
Field Failure N/A Data * *
Start 1 2 1/2 visible if Start 1/2
Field Failure N/A Data * *
Trip 1 2 1/2 visible if Trip 1/2
NPS Thermal N/A Data * *
Alarm Trip
Volt Dep O/C N/A Data * *
Start Trip
Underimedance N/A Data * *
Start Z< 12 1/2 visible if Start Z< 1/2
Underimedance N/A Data * *
Trip Z< 12 1/2 visible if Trip Z< 1/2
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 5/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
Overcurrent N/A Data * * *
Start I> 1234 1/2/3/4 Visible if Start I>1/2/3/4
Overcurrent N/A Data * * *
Trip I> 1234 1/2/3/4 Visible if Trip I>1/2/3/4
Earth Fault N/A Data * * *
Start IN> 1234 1/2/3/4 visible if Start IN>1/2/3/4
Earth Fault N/A Data * * *
Trip IN> 1234 1/2/3/4 visible if Trip IN>1/2/3/4
Sensitive E/F N/A Data * * *
Start ISEF> 1234 1/2/3/4 visible if Start ISEF>1/2/3/4
Sensitive E/F N/A Data * * *
Trip ISEF> 1234 1/2/3/4 visible if Trip ISEF>1/2/3/4
Restricted E/F N/A Data * * *
Trip IREF>
Sensitive Power N/A Data * * *
Start 1 2 1/2 visible if Start 1/2
Sensitive Power N/A Data * * *
Trip 1 2 1/2 visible if trip 1/2
Residual O/V NVD N/A Data * * *
Start VN> 1 2 1/2 visible if Start VN>1/2
Residual O/V NVD N/A Data * * *
Trip VN> 1 2 1/2 visible if Trip VN>1/2
100% Stator EF N/A Data *
Start Trip
V/Hz N/A Data * *
Alarm Start Trip
df/dt N/A Data *
Start Trip
V Vector Shift N/A Data *
Trip
Dead Machine N/A Data *
Trip
U/Voltage start N/A Data * * * Ph-Ph or Ph-N
V< 1 2 AB BC CA 1/2 visible if Start V<1/2
U/Voltage Trip N/A Data * * * Ph-Ph or Ph-N
V< 1 2 AB BC CA 1/2 visible if Trip V<1/2
O/Voltage Start N/A Data * * * Ph-Ph or Ph-N
V> 1 2 AB BC CA 1/2 visible if Start V>1/2
O/Voltage Trip N/A Data * * * Ph-Ph or Ph-N
V> 1 2 AB BC CA 1/2 visible if Trip V>1/2
Underfrequency N/A Data * * *
Start F< 1234 1/2/3/4 visible if Start F<1/2/3/4
Underfrequency N/A Data * * *
Trip F< 1234 1/2/3/4 visible if Trip F<1/2/3/4
Overfrequency N/A Data * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 6/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
Start F> 1 2 1/2 visible if Start F>1/2
Overfrequency N/A Data * * *
Trip F> 1 2 1/2 visible if Trip F>1/2
RTD Alarm N/A Data * *
RTD 1
RTD Alarm N/A Data * *
RTD 2
RTD Alarm N/A Data * *
RTD 3
RTD Alarm N/A Data * *
RTD 4
RTD Alarm N/A Data * *
RTD 5
RTD Alarm N/A Data * *
RTD 6
RTD Alarm N/A Data * *
RTD 7
RTD Alarm N/A Data * *
RTD 8
RTD Alarm N/A Data * *
RTD 9
RTD Alarm N/A Data * *
RTD 10
RTD Trip N/A Data * *
RTD 1
RTD Trip N/A Data * *
RTD 2
RTD Trip N/A Data * *
RTD 3
RTD Trip N/A Data * *
RTD 4
RTD Trip N/A Data * *
RTD 5
RTD Trip N/A Data * *
RTD 6
RTD Trip N/A Data * *
RTD 7
RTD Trip N/A Data * *
RTD 8
RTD Trip N/A Data * *
RTD 9
RTD Trip N/A Data * *
RTD 10
CL I/P Alm Start N/A Data * * *
CLIO Input 1 Courier text = CLIO Input label setting
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 7/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
CL I/P Alm Start N/A Data * * *
CLIO Input 2 Courier text = CLIO Input label setting
CL I/P Alm Start N/A Data * * *
CLIO Input 3 Courier text = CLIO Input label setting
CL I/P Alm Start N/A Data * * *
CLIO Input 4 Courier text = CLIO Input label setting
CL Input Alarm N/A Data * * *
CLIO Input 1 Courier text = CLIO Input label setting
CL Input Alarm N/A Data * * *
CLIO Input 2 Courier text = CLIO Input label setting
CL Input Alarm N/A Data * * *
CLIO Input 3 Courier text = CLIO Input label setting
CL Input Alarm N/A Data * * *
CLIO Input 4 Courier text = CLIO Input label setting
CL I/P TripStart N/A Data * * *
CLIO Input 1 Courier text = CLIO Input label setting
CL I/P TripStart N/A Data * * *
CLIO Input 2 Courier text = CLIO Input label setting
CL I/P TripStart N/A Data * * *
CLIO Input 3 Courier text = CLIO Input label setting
CL I/P TripStart N/A Data * * *
CLIO Input 4 Courier text = CLIO Input label setting
CL Input Trip N/A Data * * *
CLIO Input 1 Courier text = CLIO Input label setting
CL Input Trip N/A Data * * *
CLIO Input 2 Courier text = CLIO Input label setting
CL Input Trip N/A Data * * *
CLIO Input 3 Courier text = CLIO Input label setting
CL Input Trip N/A Data * * *
CLIO Input 4 Courier text = CLIO Input label setting
Breaker Fail N/A Data * * *
CB Fail 1 2 1/2 visible if CB Fail 1/2
Supervision N/A Data * * *
VTS CTS VTS/CTS visible if AlarmVTS/CTS
PoleSlip z based N/A Data *
Start Z1 Z2
PoleSlip z based N/A Data *
Trip Z1 Z2
Thermal Overload N/A Data * *
Alarm Trip
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
Faulted Phase N/A 07 Binary Flag (8 Bits) G16 30113 G16 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
Start Elements1 N/A 08 Binary Flag (32 Bits) G84 30114 30115 G84 Data * * * For fault record use only. The Modbus register
cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
Indexed String selected
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 8/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
Start Elements2 N/A 09 Binary Flag (32 Bits) G107 30116 30117 G107 Data * * * For fault record use only. The Modbus register
cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
Indexed String selected
Trip Elements1 N/A 0A Binary Flag (32 Bits) G85 30118 30119 G85 Data * * * For fault record use only. The Modbus register
cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
Indexed String selected
Trip Elements2 N/A 0B Binary Flag (32 Bits) G86 30120 30121 G86 Data * * * For fault record use only. The Modbus register
cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
Indexed String selected
Fault Alarms N/A 0C Binary Flag (32 Bits) G87 30122 30123 G87 Data * * * For fault record use only. The Modbus register
cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
Indexed String selected
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
Fault Time 0D IEC870 Time & Date 30124 30127 G12 (From Record) Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
Active Group 0E Unsigned Integer 30128 G1 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
System Frequency 0F Courier Number (frequency) 30129 G30 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
Fault Duration 10 Courier Number (time) 30130 30131 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
CB Operate Time 11 Courier Number (time) 30132 G25 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
Relay Trip Time 12 Courier Number (time) 30133 30134 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
IA 13 Courier Number (current) 30135 30136 G24 Data * * For fault record use only. The Modbus register
cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
IA-1 * selected
IB 14 Courier Number (current) 30137 30138 G24 Data * * For fault record use only. The Modbus register
cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
IB-1 * selected
IC 15 Courier Number (current) 30139 30140 G24 Data * * For fault record use only. The Modbus register
cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
IC-1 * selected
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
VAB 16 Courier Number (voltage) 30141 30142 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
VBC 17 Courier Number (voltage) 30143 30144 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
VCA 18 Courier Number (voltage) 30145 30146 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
VAN 19 Courier Number (voltage) 30147 30148 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
VBN 1A Courier Number (voltage) 30149 30150 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 9/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
VCN 1B Courier Number (voltage) 30151 30152 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
IA-2 1C Courier Number (current) 30153 30154 G24 Data * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
IB-2 1D Courier Number (current) 30155 30156 G24 Data * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
IC-2 1E Courier Number (current) 30157 30158 G24 Data * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
IA Differential 1F Courier Number (current) 30159 30160 G24 Data * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
IB Differential 20 Courier Number (current) 30161 30162 G24 Data * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
IC Differential 21 Courier Number (current) 30163 30164 G24 Data * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
VN Measured 22 Courier Number (voltage) 30165 30166 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
VN Derived 23 Courier Number (voltage) 30167 30168 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
IN Measured 24 Courier Number (current) 30169 30170 G24 Data * * For fault record use only. The Modbus register
cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
IN Derived * selected.
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
I Sensitive 25 Courier Number (current) 30171 30172 G24 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
IREF Diff 26 Courier Number (current) 30173 30174 G24 Data * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
IREF Bias 27 Courier Number (current) 30175 30176 G24 Data * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
I2 28 Courier Number (current) 30177 30178 G24 Data * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
3 Phase Watts 29 Courier Number (Power) 30179 30180 G125 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
3 Phase VArs 2A Courier Number (VAr) 30181 30182 G125 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
3Ph Power Factor 2B Courier Number (Decimal) 30183 G30 Data * * * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
Courier text = RTD Label setting for fault
RTD 1 2C Courier Number (Temperature) 30184 G10 Data * *
record use only
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 10/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
Courier text = RTD Label setting for fault
RTD 2 2D Courier Number (Temperature) 30185 G10 Data * *
record use only
Courier text = RTD Label setting for fault
RTD 3 2E Courier Number (Temperature) 30186 G10 Data * *
record use only
Courier text = RTD Label setting for fault
RTD 4 2F Courier Number (Temperature) 30187 G10 Data * *
record use only
Courier text = RTD Label setting for fault
RTD 5 30 Courier Number (Temperature) 30188 G10 Data * *
record use only
Courier text = RTD Label setting for fault
RTD 6 31 Courier Number (Temperature) 30189 G10 Data * *
record use only
Courier text = RTD Label setting for fault
RTD 7 32 Courier Number (Temperature) 30190 G10 Data * *
record use only
Courier text = RTD Label setting for fault
RTD 8 33 Courier Number (Temperature) 30191 G10 Data * *
record use only
Courier text = RTD Label setting for fault
RTD 9 34 Courier Number (Temperature) 30192 G10 Data * *
record use only
Courier text = RTD Label setting for fault
RTD 10 35 Courier Number (Temperature) 30193 G10 Data * *
record use only
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
df/dt 36 Courier Number (Hz/s) 30194 G25 Data * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
For fault record use only. The Modbus register
V Vector Shift 37 Courier Number (Angle) 30195 G30 Data * cannot be accessed unless a fault record is
selected.
Courier text = CLIO Input label setting for fault
CLIO Input 1 38 Courier Number (Decimal) 30196 G125 Data * * *
record use only
Courier text = CLIO Input label setting for fault
CLIO Input 2 39 Courier Number (Decimal) 30197 G125 Data * * *
record use only
Courier text = CLIO Input label setting for fault
CLIO Input 3 3A Courier Number (Decimal) 30198 G125 Data * * *
record use only
Courier text = CLIO Input label setting for fault
CLIO Input 4 3B Courier Number (Decimal) 30199 G125 Data * * *
record use only
Manual override to
Select Maint F0 Unsigned Integer (16 bits) 40102 G1 Setting 0 4 1 0 * * * Allows Self Test Report to be selected
select a fault record
Maint Text F1 Ascii Text (32 chars) Data * * *
Maint Type F2 Unsigned integer (32 bits) 30036 30037 G27 Data * * *
Maint Data F3 Unsigned integer (32 bits) 30038 30039 G27 Data * * *
Reset Indication FF Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *
MEASUREMENTS 1 02 00 * * *
IA Magnitude 01 Courier Number (current) 30200 30201 G24 Data * *
IA-1 Magnitude 01 Courier Number (current) 30200 30201 G24 Data *
IA Phase Angle 02 Courier Number (angle) 30202 G30 Data * *
IA-1 Phase Angle 02 Courier Number (angle) 30202 G30 Data *
IB Magnitude 03 Courier Number (current) 30203 30204 G24 Data * *
IB-1 Magnitude 03 Courier Number (current) 30203 30204 G24 Data *
IB Phase Angle 04 Courier Number (angle) 30205 G30 Data * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 11/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
IB-1 Phase Angle 04 Courier Number (angle) 30205 G30 Data *
IC Magnitude 05 Courier Number (current) 30206 30207 G24 Data * *
IC-1 Magnitude 05 Courier Number (current) 30206 30207 G24 Data *
IC Phase Angle 06 Courier Number (angle) 30208 G30 Data * *
IC-1 Phase Angle 06 Courier Number (angle) 30208 G30 Data *
IN Measured Mag 07 Courier Number (current) 30209 30210 G24 Data * *
IN Measured Ang 08 Courier Number (angle) 30211 G30 Data * *
IN Derived Mag 09 Courier Number (current) 30212 30213 G24 Data *
IN Derived Angle 0A Courier Number (angle) 30214 G30 Data *
I Sen Magnitude 0B Courier Number (current) 30215 30216 G24 Data * * *
I Sen Angle 0C Courier Number (degrees) 30217 G30 Data * * *
I1 Magnitude 0D Courier Number (current) 30218 30219 G24 Data * * *
I2 Magnitude 0E Courier Number (current) 30220 30221 G24 Data * * *
I0 Magnitude 0F Courier Number (current) 30222 30223 G24 Data * * *
IA RMS 10 Courier Number (current) 30224 30225 G24 Data * * *
IB RMS 11 Courier Number (current) 30226 30227 G24 Data * * *
IC RMS 12 Courier Number (current) 30228 30229 G24 Data * * *
VAB Magnitude 14 Courier Number (voltage) 30230 30231 G24 Data * * *
VAB Phase Angle 15 Courier Number (angle) 30232 G30 Data * * *
VBC Magnitude 16 Courier Number (voltage) 30233 30234 G24 Data * * *
VBC Phase Angle 17 Courier Number (angle) 30235 G30 Data * * *
VCA Magnitude 18 Courier Number (voltage) 30236 30237 G24 Data * * *
VCA Phase Angle 19 Courier Number (angle) 30238 G30 Data * * *
VAN Magnitude 1A Courier Number (voltage) 30239 30240 G24 Data * * *
VAN Phase Angle 1B Courier Number (angle) 30241 G30 Data * * *
VBN Magnitude 1C Courier Number (voltage) 30242 30243 G24 Data * * *
VBN Phase Angle 1D Courier Number (angle) 30244 G30 Data * * *
VCN Magnitude 1E Courier Number (voltage) 30245 30246 G24 Data * * *
VCN Phase Angle 1F Courier Number (angle) 30247 G30 Data * * *
VN Measured Mag 20 Courier Number (voltage) 30248 30249 G24 Data * * *
VN Measured Ang 21 Courier Number (angle) 30250 G30 Data * * *
VN Derived Mag 22 Courier Number (voltage) 30251 30252 G24 Data * * *
VN Derived Ang 23 Courier Number (angle) 30252 G30 Data * * *
V1 Magnitude 24 Courier Number (voltage) 30253 30254 G24 Data * * *
V2 Magnitude 25 Courier Number (voltage) 30255 30256 G24 Data * * *
V0 Magnitude 26 Courier Number (voltage) 30257 30258 G24 Data * * *
VAN RMS 27 Courier Number (voltage) 30259 30260 G24 Data * * *
VBN RMS 28 Courier Number (voltage) 30261 30262 G24 Data * * *
VCN RMS 29 Courier Number (voltage) 30263 30264 G24 Data * * *
Frequency 2D Courier Number (frequency) 30265 G30 Data * * *
VBC Phase Angle 17 Courier Number (angle) 30235 G30 Data * * *
VCA Magnitude 18 Courier Number (voltage) 30236 30237 G24 Data * * *
VCA Phase Angle 19 Courier Number (angle) 30238 G30 Data * * *
VAN Magnitude 1A Courier Number (voltage) 30239 30240 G24 Data * * *
VAN Phase Angle 1B Courier Number (angle) 30241 G30 Data * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 12/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
VBN Magnitude 1C Courier Number (voltage) 30242 30243 G24 Data * * *
VBN Phase Angle 1D Courier Number (angle) 30244 G30 Data * * *
VCN Magnitude 1E Courier Number (voltage) 30245 30246 G24 Data * * *
VCN Phase Angle 1F Courier Number (angle) 30247 G30 Data * * *
VN Measured Mag 20 Courier Number (voltage) 30248 30249 G24 Data * * *
VN Measured Ang 21 Courier Number (angle) 30250 G30 Data * * *
VN Derived Mag 22 Courier Number (voltage) 30251 30252 G24 Data * * *
VN Derived Ang 23 Courier Number (angle) 30252 G30 Data * * *
V1 Magnitude 24 Courier Number (voltage) 30253 30254 G24 Data * * *
V2 Magnitude 25 Courier Number (voltage) 30255 30256 G24 Data * * *
V0 Magnitude 26 Courier Number (voltage) 30257 30258 G24 Data * * *
VAN RMS 27 Courier Number (voltage) 30259 30260 G24 Data * * *
VBN RMS 28 Courier Number (voltage) 30261 30262 G24 Data * * *
VCN RMS 29 Courier Number (voltage) 30263 30264 G24 Data * * *
Frequency 2D Courier Number (frequency) 30265 G30 Data * * *
I1 Magnitude 40 Courier Number (current) 30218 30219 G24 Data * * *
I1 Phase Angle 41 Courier Number (angle) 30266 G30 Data * * *
I2 Magnitude 42 Courier Number (current) 30220 30221 G24 Data * * *
I2 Phase Angle 43 Courier Number (angle) 30267 G30 Data * * *
I0 Magnitude 44 Courier Number (current) 30222 30223 G24 Data * * *
I0 Phase Angle 45 Courier Number (angle) 30268 G30 Data * * *
V1 Magnitude 46 Courier Number (voltage) 30253 30254 G24 Data * * *
V1 Phase Angle 47 Courier Number (angle) 30269 G30 Data * * *
V2 Magnitude 48 Courier Number (voltage) 30255 30256 G24 Data * * *
V2 Phase Angle 49 Courier Number (angle) 30270 G30 Data * * *
V0 Magnitude 4A Courier Number (voltage) 30257 30258 G24 Data * * *
V0 Phase Angle 4B Courier Number (angle) 30271 G30 Data * * *
MEASUREMENTS 2 03 00 * * *
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30391&
A Phase Watts 01 Courier Number (Power) 30300 30302 G29 Data * * * 30392 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30393 &
B Phase Watts 02 Courier Number (Power) 30303 30305 G29 Data * * * 30394 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30395 &
C Phase Watts 03 Courier Number (Power) 30306 30308 G29 Data * * * 30396 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30397 &
A Phase VArs 04 Courier Number (VAr) 30309 30311 G29 Data * * * 30398 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30399 &
B Phase VArs 05 Courier Number (VAr) 30312 30314 G29 Data * * * 30400 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30401 &
C Phase VArs 06 Courier Number (VAr) 30315 30317 G29 Data * * * 30402 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 13/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30403 &
A Phase VA 07 Courier Number (VA) 30318 30320 G29 Data * * * 30404 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30405 &
B Phase VA 08 Courier Number (VA) 30321 30323 G29 Data * * * 30406 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30407 &
C Phase VA 09 Courier Number (VA) 30324 30326 G29 Data * * * 30408 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30409 &
3 Phase Watts 0A Courier Number (Power) 30327 30329 G29 Data * * * 30410 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30411 &
3 Phase VArs 0B Courier Number (VAr) 30330 30332 G29 Data * * * 30412 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30413 &
3 Phase VA 0C Courier Number (VA) 30333 30335 G29 Data * * * 30414 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
3Ph Power Factor 0E Courier Number (decimal) 30339 G30 Data * * *
APh Power Factor 0F Courier Number (decimal) 30340 G30 Data * * *
BPh Power Factor 10 Courier Number (decimal) 30341 G30 Data * * *
CPh Power Factor 11 Courier Number (decimal) 30342 G30 Data * * *
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30415 &
3Ph WHours Fwd 12 Courier Number (Wh) 30343 30345 G29 Data * * * 30416 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30417 &
3Ph WHours Rev 13 Courier Number (Wh) 30346 30348 G29 Data * * * 30418 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30419 &
3Ph VArHours Fwd 14 Courier Number (VArh) 30349 30351 G29 Data * * * 30420 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30421 &
3Ph VArHours Rev 15 Courier Number (VArh) 30352 30354 G29 Data * * * 30422 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30423 &
3Ph W Fix Demand 16 Courier Number (Power) 30355 30357 G29 Data * * * 30424 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30425 &
3Ph VArs Fix Dem 17 Courier Number (Vars) 30358 30360 G29 Data * * * 30426 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
IA Fixed Demand 18 Courier Number (Current) 30361 30362 G24 Data * * *
IB Fixed Demand 19 Courier Number (Current) 30363 30364 G24 Data * * *
IC Fixed Demand 1A Courier Number (Current) 30365 30366 G24 Data * * *
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30427 &
3 Ph W Roll Dem 1B Courier Number (Power) 30367 30369 G29 Data * * * 30428 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30429 &
3Ph VArs RollDem 1C Courier Number (VAr) 30370 30372 G29 Data * * * 30430 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 14/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
IA Roll Demand 1D Courier Number (Current) 30373 30374 G24 Data * * *
IB Roll Demand 1E Courier Number (Current) 30375 30376 G24 Data * * *
IC Roll Demand 1F Courier Number (Current) 30377 30378 G24 Data * * *
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30431 &
3Ph W Peak Dem 20 Courier Number (Power) 30379 30381 G29 Data * * * 30432 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
Alternative Modbus register pairs 30433 &
3Ph VAr Peak Dem 21 Courier Number (VAr) 30382 30384 G29 Data * * * 30434 available with improved G125 floating
point data type
IA Peak Demand 22 Courier Number (Current) 30385 30386 G24 Data * * *
IB Peak Demand 23 Courier Number (Current) 30387 30388 G24 Data * * *
IC Peak Demand 24 Courier Number (Current) 30389 30390 G24 Data * * *
Reset Demand 25 Indexed String G11 40103 G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *
Recommended Modbus register pairs for power and energy measurements using G125 floating point data type. See Scada Communications section (P34x/EN CT) of the Technical Guide
N/A 30391 30392 G125 Data * * * A Phase Watts (see [0301])
N/A 30393 30394 G125 Data * * * B Phase Watts (see [0302])
N/A 30395 30396 G125 Data * * * C Phase Watts (see [0303])
N/A 30397 30398 G125 Data * * * A Phase VArs (see [0304])
N/A 30399 30400 G125 Data * * * B Phase VArs (see [0305])
N/A 30401 30402 G125 Data * * * C Phase VArs (see [0306])
N/A 30403 30404 G125 Data * * * A Phase VA (see [0307])
N/A 30405 30406 G125 Data * * * B Phase VA (see [0308])
N/A 30407 30408 G125 Data * * * C Phase VA (see [0309])
N/A 30409 30410 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase Watts (see [030A])
N/A 30411 30412 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase VArs (see [030B])
N/A 30413 30414 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase VA (see [030C])
N/A 30415 30416 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase WHours Fwd (see [0312])
N/A 30417 30418 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase WHours Rev (see [0313])
N/A 30419 30420 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase VArHours Fwd (see [0314])
N/A 30421 30422 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase VArHours Rev (see [0315])
N/A 30423 30424 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase W Fix Demand (see [0316])
N/A 30425 30426 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase VArs Fix Demand (see [0317])
N/A 30427 30428 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase W Roll Demand (see [031B])
N/A 30429 30430 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase VArs Roll Demand (see [031C])
N/A 30431 30432 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase W Peak Demand (see [0320])
N/A 30433 30434 G125 Data * * * 3 Phase VArs Peak Demand (see [0321])
MEASUREMENTS 3 04 00 *
IA-2 Magnitude 01 Courier Number (Current) 30435 30436 G24 Data *
IA-2 Phase Angle 02 Courier Number (Angle) 30437 G30 Data *
IB-2 Magnitude 03 Courier Number (Current) 30438 30439 G24 Data *
IB-2 Phase Angle 04 Courier Number (Angle) 30440 G30 Data *
IC-2 Magnitude 05 Courier Number (Current) 30441 30442 G24 Data *
IC-2 Phase Angle 06 Courier Number (Angle) 30443 G30 Data *
IA Differential 07 Courier Number (Current) 30444 30445 G24 Data *
IB Differential 08 Courier Number (Current) 30446 30447 G24 Data *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 15/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
IC Differential 09 Courier Number (Current) 30448 30449 G24 Data *
IA Bias 0A Courier Number (Current) 30450 30451 G24 Data *
IB Bias 0B Courier Number (Current) 30452 30453 G24 Data *
IC Bias 0C Courier Number (Current) 30454 30455 G24 Data *
IREF Diff 0D Courier Number (Current) 30456 30457 G24 Data * *
IREF Bias 0E Courier Number (Current) 30458 30459 G24 Data * *
VN 3rd Harmonic 0F Courier Number (Voltage) 30460 30461 G24 Data *
NPS Thermal 10 Courier Number (Percentage) 30462 G1 Data * *
Reset NPSThermal 11 Indexed String G11 40104 G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * *
RTD 1 12 Courier Number (Temperature) 30463 G10 Data * * Courier text = RTD label setting
RTD 2 13 Courier Number (Temperature) 30464 G10 Data * * Courier text = RTD label setting
RTD 3 14 Courier Number (Temperature) 30465 G10 Data * * Courier text = RTD label setting
RTD 4 15 Courier Number (Temperature) 30466 G10 Data * * Courier text = RTD label setting
RTD 5 16 Courier Number (Temperature) 30467 G10 Data * * Courier text = RTD label setting
RTD 6 17 Courier Number (Temperature) 30468 G10 Data * * Courier text = RTD label setting
RTD 7 18 Courier Number (Temperature) 30469 G10 Data * * Courier text = RTD label setting
RTD 8 19 Courier Number (Temperature) 30470 G10 Data * * Courier text = RTD label setting
RTD 9 1A Courier Number (Temperature) 30471 G10 Data * * Courier text = RTD label setting
RTD 10 1B Courier Number (Temperature) 30472 G10 Data * * Courier text = RTD label setting
Binary Flag (10 bits)
RTD Open Cct 1C G108 30473 G108 Data * *
Indexed String
Binary Flag (10 bits)
RTD Short Cct 1D G109 30474 G109 Data * *
Indexed String
Binary Flag (10 bits)
RTD Data Error 1E G110 30475 G110 Data * *
Indexed String
Reset RTD Flags 1F Indexed string G11 40105 G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * *
APh Sen Watts 20 Courier Number (Power) 30476 30477 G125 Data * * *
APh Sen Vars 21 Courier Number (Var) 30478 30479 G125 Data * * *
APh Power Angle 22 Courier Number (angle) 30480 G30 Data * * *
Thermal Overload 23 Courier Number (Percentage) 30481 G1 Data * * *
Reset ThermalO/L 24 Indexed String G11 40106 G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *
CLIO Input 1 25 Courier Number (Decimal) 30482 30483 G125 Data * * * Courier Text = CLIO label setting
CLIO Input 2 26 Courier Number (Decimal) 30484 30485 G125 Data * * * Courier Text = CLIO label setting
CLIO Input 3 27 Courier Number (Decimal) 30486 30487 G125 Data * * * Courier Text = CLIO label setting
CLIO Input 4 28 Courier Number (Decimal) 30488 30489 G125 Data * * * Courier Text = CLIO label setting
CB CONDITION 06 00 * * * CB CONDITION MONITORING
CB Operations 01 Unsigned Integer 30600 G1 Data * * * Number of Circuit Breaker Operations
Total IA Broken 02 Courier Number (current) 30601 30602 G24 Data * * * Broken Current A Phase
Total IB Broken 03 Courier Number (current) 30603 30604 G24 Data * * * Broken Current B Phase
Total IC Broken 04 Courier Number (current) 30605 30606 G24 Data * * * Broken Current C Phase
CB Operate Time 05 Courier Number (time) 30607 G25 Data * * * Circuit Breaker operating time
Reset CB Data 06 Indexed String G11 40150 G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * * Reset All Values
CB CONTROL 07 00 * * *
CB Control by 01 Indexed String G99 40200 G99 Disabled Setting 0 7 1 2 *
Close Pulse Time 02 Courier Number (Time) 40201 G2 0.5 Setting 0.1 10 0.01 2 *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 16/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
Trip Pulse Time 03 Courier Number (Time) 40202 G2 0.5 Setting 0.1 5 0.01 2 *
Man Close Delay 05 Courier Number (Time) 40203 G2 10 Setting 0.01 600 0.01 2 * Manual Close Delay
CB Healthy Time 06 Courier Number (Time) 40204 40205 G35 5 Setting 0.01 9999 0.01 2 *
Lockout Reset 08 Indexed String G11 40206 G11 No Command 0 1 1 2 * * *
Reset Lockout by 09 Indexed String G81 40207 G81 CB Close Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Man Close RstDly 0A Courier Number (Time) 40208 G2 5 Setting 0.01 600 0.01 2 * * * Manual Close Reset Delay
CB Status Input 11 Indexed String G118 40209 G118 None Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
DATE AND TIME 08 00 * * *
Date/Time N/A 01 IEC870 Time & Date 40300 40303 G12 Setting 0 * * *
Date N/A * * * Front Panel Menu only
12-Jan-98
Time N/A * * * Front Panel Menu only
12:00
IRIG-B Sync 04 Indexed String G37 40304 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
IRIG-B Status 05 Indexed String G17 30090 G17 Data * * *
Battery Status 06 Indexed String G59 30091 G59 Data * * *
Battery Alarm 07 Indexed String G37 40305 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CONFIGURATION 09 00 * * *
Restore Defaults 01 Indexed String G53 40402 G53 No Operation Command 0 5 1 2 * * *
Setting Group 02 Indexed String G61 40403 G61 Menu Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Active Settings 03 Indexed String G90 40404 G90 1 Setting 0 3 1 1 * * *
Save Changes 04 Indexed String G62 40405 G62 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Copy From 05 Indexed String G90 40406 G90 Group 1 Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
Copy To 06 Indexed String G98 40407 G98 No Operation Command 0 3 1 2 * * *
Setting Group 1 07 Indexed String G37 40408 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Setting Group 2 08 Indexed String G37 40409 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Setting Group 3 09 Indexed String G37 40410 G37 Disbaled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Setting Group 4 0A Indexed String G37 40411 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Gen Differential 0B Indexed String G37 40412 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Power 0C Indexed String G37 40413 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Field Failure 0D Indexed String G37 40414 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
NPS Thermal 0E Indexed String G37 40415 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
System Backup 0F Indexed String G37 40416 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
Overcurrent 10 Indexed String G37 40417 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Thermal Overload 11 Indexed String G37 40433 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
NOT USED 12
Earth Fault 13 Indexed String G37 40418 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
NOT USED 14
SEF/REF/SPower 15 Indexed String G114 40419 Disabled Setting 0 2 1 2 *
G114 SEF/REF * *
Residual O/V NVD 16 Indexed String G37 40420 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Residual Overvoltage
100% Stator EF 17 Indexed String G37 40421 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
V/Hz 18 Indexed String G37 40422 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
df/dt 19 Indexed String G37 40423 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
V Vector Shift 1A Indexed String G37 40424 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 17/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
Dead Machine 1B Indexed String G37 40425 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Reconnect Delay 1C Indexed String G37 40426 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Volt Protection 1D Indexed String G37 40427 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Freq Protection 1E Indexed String G37 40428 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
RTD Inputs 1F Indexed String G37 40429 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
CB Fail 20 Indexed String G37 40430 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Supervision 21 Indexed String G37 40431 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
NOT USED 22 NOT USED
NOT USED 23
Pole Slipping 24 Indexed String G37 40436 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Input Labels 25 Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Output Labels 26 Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
RTD Labels 27 Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * *
CT & VT Ratios 28 Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Record Control 29 Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Disturb Recorder 2A Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * * Disturbance recorder
Measure't Setup 2B Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Comms Settings 2C Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Commission Tests 2D Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Setting Values 2E Indexed String G54 Primary Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
Control Inputs 2F Indexed String G80 Visible Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLIO Inputs 30 Indexed String G37 40434 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLIO Outputs 31 Indexed String G37 40435 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLIO status (Hidden) 32 Cell value set to False if CLIO not fitted
(Note: No Courier text) Cell value set to True if CLIO is fitted
40400 G18 * * * Record selection command register
40401 G6 * * * Record control command register
CT AND VT RATIOS 0A 00 * * * values for multiplier see mult column
Main VT Primary 01 Courier Number (Voltage) 40500 40501 G35 110 Setting 100 1000000 1 2 * * * Label V1=Main VT Rating/110
Main VT Sec'y 02 Courier Number (Voltage) 40502 G2 110 Setting 80*V1 140*V1 1*V1 2 * * * Label M1=0A01/0A02
Neutral Displacement VT Primary Label
NVD VT Primary 05 Courier Number (Voltage) 40506 40507 G35 110 Setting 100 1000000 1 2 * * *
V3=Neutral Disp VT Rating/110
Neutral Displacement VT Secondary Label
NVD VT Secondary 06 Courier Number (Voltage) 40508 G2 110 Setting 80*V3 140*V3 1*V3 2 * * *
M3=0A05/0A06
Phase CT Primary 07 Courier Number (Current) 40509 G2 1 Setting 1 30000 1 2 * * * I1=Phase CT secondary rating
Phase CT Sec'y 08 Courier Number (Current) 40510 G2 1 Setting 1 5 4 2 * * * Label M4=0A07/0A08
E/F CT Primary 09 Courier Number (Current) 40511 G2 1 Setting 1 30000 1 2 * * Label I2=E/F CT secondary rating
E/F CT Secondary 0A Courier Number (Current) 40512 G2 1 Setting 1 5 4 2 * * Label M5=0A09/0A0A
SEF CT Primary 0B Courier Number (Current) 40513 G2 1 Setting 1 30000 1 2 * * * Label I3=SEF CT secondary rating
SEF CT Secondary 0C Courier Number (Current) 40514 G2 1 Setting 1 5 4 2 * * * Label M6=0A0B/0A0C
RECORD CONTROL 0B 00 * * *
Clear Events 01 Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *
Clear Faults 02 Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *
Clear Maint 03 Indexed String G11 No Command 0 1 1 1 * * *
Alarm Event 0B 04 Indexed String G37 40520 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 18/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
Output Event 0B 05 Indexed String G37 40521 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Opto Input Event 0B 06 Indexed String G37 40522 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Relay Sys Event 0B 07 Indexed String G37 40523 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Fault Rec Event 0B 08 Indexed String G37 40524 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Maint Rec Event 0B 09 Indexed String G37 40525 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Protection Event 0B 0A Indexed String G37 40526 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
DDB 31 - 0 0B 0B Binary Flag (32 bits) 40527 40528 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 63 - 32 0B 0C Binary Flag (32 bits) 40529 40530 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 95 - 64 0B 0D Binary Flag (32 bits) 40531 40532 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 127 - 96 0B 0E Binary Flag (32 bits) 40533 40534 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 159 - 128 0B 0F Binary Flag (32 bits) 40535 40536 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 191 - 160 0B 10 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40537 40538 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 223 - 192 0B 11 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40539 40540 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 255 - 224 0B 12 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40541 40542 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 287 - 256 0B 13 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40543 40544 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 319 - 288 0B 14 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40545 40546 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 351 - 320 0B 15 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40547 40548 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 383 - 352 0B 16 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40549 40550 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 415 - 384 0B 17 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40551 40552 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 447 - 416 0B 18 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40553 40554 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 479 - 448 0B 19 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40555 40556 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 511 - 480 0B 1A Binary Flag (32 bits) 40557 40558 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 543 - 512 0B 1B Binary Flag (32 bits) 40559 40560 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 575 - 544 0B 1C Binary Flag (32 bits) 40561 40562 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 607 - 576 0B 1D Binary Flag (32 bits) 40563 40564 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 639 - 608 0B 1E Binary Flag (32 bits) 40565 40566 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 671 - 640 0B 1F Binary Flag (32 bits) 40567 40568 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 703 - 672 0B 20 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40569 40570 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 735 - 704 0B 21 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40571 40572 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 767 - 736 0B 22 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40573 40574 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 799 - 768 0B 23 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40575 40576 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 831 - 800 0B 24 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40577 40578 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 863 - 832 0B 25 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40579 40580 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 895 - 864 0B 26 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40581 40582 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 927 - 896 0B 27 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40583 40584 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 959 - 928 0B 28 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40585 40586 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 991 - 960 0B 29 Binary Flag (32 bits) 40587 40588 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DDB 1022 - 992 0B 2A Binary Flag (32 bits) 40589 40590 G27 0xFFFFFFFF Setting 0xFFFFFFFF 32 1 2 * * *
DISTURB RECORDER 0C 00 * * * DISTURBANCE RECORDER
Duration 01 Courier Number (Time) 40600 G2 1.5 Setting 0.1 10.5 0.01 2 * * *
Trigger Position 02 Courier Number (%) 40601 G2 33.3 Setting 0 100 0.1 2 * * *
Trigger Mode 03 Indexed String G34 40602 G34 Single 0 1 1 2 * * *
** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2,
Analog Channel 1 04 Indexed String G31 40603 G31 VAN Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * *
11 for Model3
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 19/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2,
Analog Channel 2 05 Indexed String G31 40604 G31 VBN Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * *
11 for Model3
** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2,
Analog Channel 3 06 Indexed String G31 40605 G31 VCN Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * *
11 for Model3
** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2,
Analog Channel 4 07 Indexed String G31 40606 G31 VN Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * *
11 for Model3
** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2,
Analog Channel 5 08 Indexed String G31 40607 G31 IA Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * *
11 for Model3
** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2,
Analog Channel 6 09 Indexed String G31 40608 G31 IB Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * *
11 for Model3
** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2,
Analog Channel 7 0A Indexed String G31 40609 G31 IC Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * *
11 for Model3
** Max = 7 for Model1, 8 for Model2,
Analog Channel 8 0B Indexed String G31 40610 G31 IN SEF Setting 0 ** 1 2 * * *
11 for Model3
Digital Input 1 0C Indexed String G32 40611 G32 Relay 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * *
Input 1 Trigger 0D Indexed String G66 40612 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 2 0E Indexed String G32 40613 G32 Relay 2 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * *
Input 2 Trigger 0F Indexed String G66 40614 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 3 10 Indexed String G32 40615 G32 Relay 3 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * *
Input 3 Trigger 11 Indexed String G66 40616 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 4 12 Indexed String G32 40617 G32 Relay 4 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * *
Input 4 Trigger 13 Indexed String G66 40618 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 5 14 Indexed String G32 40619 G32 Relay 5 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * *
Input 5 Trigger 15 Indexed String G66 40620 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 6 16 Indexed String G32 40621 G32 Relay 6 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * *
Input 6 Trigger 17 Indexed String G66 40622 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 7 18 Indexed String G32 40623 G32 Relay 7 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * *
Input 7 Trigger 19 Indexed String G66 40624 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 8 1A Indexed String G32 40625 G32 Opto Input 1 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Relay 8 *
Input 8 Trigger 1B Indexed String G66 40626 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 9 1C Indexed String G32 40627 G32 Opto Input 2 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Relay 9 *
Input 9 Trigger 1D Indexed String G66 40628 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 10 1E Indexed String G32 40629 G32 Opto Input 3 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Relay 10 *
Input 10 Trigger 1F Indexed String G66 40630 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 11 20 Indexed String G32 40631 G32 Opto Input 4 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Relay 11 *
Input 11 Trigger 21 Indexed String G66 40632 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 12 22 Indexed String G32 40633 G32 Opto Input 5 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Relay 12 *
Input 12 Trigger 23 Indexed String G66 40634 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 13 24 Indexed String G32 40635 G32 Opto Input 6 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Relay 13 *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 20/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
Input 13 Trigger 25 Indexed String G66 40636 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 14 26 Indexed String G32 40637 G32 Opto Input 7 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Relay 14 *
Input 14 Trigger 27 Indexed String G66 40638 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 15 28 Indexed String G32 40639 G32 Opto Input 8 Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 1 *
Input 15 Trigger 29 Indexed String G66 40640 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 16 2A Indexed String G32 40641 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 2 *
Input 16 Trigger 2B Indexed String G66 40642 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 17 2C Indexed String G32 40643 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 3 *
Input 17 Trigger 2D Indexed String G66 40644 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 18 2E Indexed String G32 40645 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 4 *
Input 18 Trigger 2F Indexed String G66 40646 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 19 30 Indexed String G32 40647 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 5 *
Input 19 Trigger 31 Indexed String G66 40648 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 20 32 Indexed String G32 40649 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 6 *
Input 20 Trigger 33 Indexed String G66 40650 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 21 34 Indexed String G32 40651 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 7 *
Input 21 Trigger 35 Indexed String G66 40652 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 22 36 Indexed String G32 40653 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 8 *
Input 22 Trigger 37 Indexed String G66 40654 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 23 38 Indexed String G32 40655 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 9 *
Input 23 Trigger 39 Indexed String G66 40656 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 24 3A Indexed String G32 40657 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 10 *
Input 24 Trigger 3B Indexed String G66 40658 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 25 3C Indexed String G32 40659 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 11 *
Input 25 Trigger 3D Indexed String G66 40660 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 26 3E Indexed String G32 40661 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 12 *
Input 26 Trigger 3F Indexed String G66 40662 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 27 40 Indexed String G32 40663 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 13 *
Input 27 Trigger 41 Indexed String G66 40664 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 28 42 Indexed String G32 40665 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 14 *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 21/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
Input 28 Trigger 43 Indexed String G66 40666 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 29 44 Indexed String G32 40667 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 15 *
Input 29 Trigger 45 Indexed String G66 40668 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 30 46 Indexed String G32 40669 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * *
Opto Input 16 *
Input 30 Trigger 47 Indexed String G66 40670 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 31 48 Indexed String G32 40671 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * *
Input 31 Trigger 49 Indexed String G66 40672 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Digital Input 32 4A Indexed String G32 40673 G32 Not Used Setting 0 DDB Size 1 2 * * *
Input 32 Trigger 4B Indexed String G66 40674 G66 No Trigger Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
MEASURE'T SETUP 0D 00 * * * MEASUREMENT SETTINGS
Default Display 01 Indexed String G52 40700 G52 Description Setting 0 7 1 2 * * *
Local Values 02 Indexed String G54 40701 G54 Primary Setting 0 1 1 1 * * * Local Measurement Values
Remote Values 03 Indexed String G54 40702 G54 Primary Setting 0 1 1 1 * * * Remote Measurement Values
Measurement Ref 04 Indexed String G56 40703 G56 VA Setting 0 5 1 1 * * * Measurement Phase Reference
Measurement Mode 05 Unsigned Integer 40705 G1 0 Setting 0 3 1 1 * * *
Fix Dem Period 06 Courier Number (time-minutes) 40706 G2 15 Setting 1 99 1 2 * * * Fixed Demand Interval
Roll Sub Period 07 Courier Number (time-minutes) 40707 G2 1 Setting 1 99 1 2 * * * Rolling demand sub period
Num Sub Periods 08 Unsigned Integer 40708 G1 15 Setting 1 15 1 2 * * * Number of rolling sub-periods
Remote 2 Measurement Values visible when
Remote 2 Values 0B Indexed String G54 G54 Primary Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
model no. hardware option (Field 7) = 7 or 8
COMMUNICATIONS 0E 00 * * *
Rear Protocol 01 Indexed String G71 Data * * *
Remote Address 02 Unsigned integer (16 bits) 255 Setting 0 255 1 1 * * * Build = Courier

Remote Address 02 Unsigned integer (16 bits) 1 Setting 1 247 1 1 * * * Build = Modbus. Default Modbus address is 1

Remote Address 02 Unsigned integer (16 bits) 1 Setting 0 254 1 1 * * * Build = IEC60870-5-103
Remote Address 02 Unsigned integer (16 bits) 1 Setting 0 65534 1 1 * * * Build=DNP 3.0
Inactivity Timer 03 Courier Number (Time-minutes) 15 Setting 1 30 1 2 * * * Build = Courier
Inactivity Timer 03 Courier Number (Time-minutes) 15 Setting 1 30 1 2 * * * Build = Modbus
Inactivity Timer 03 Courier Number (Time-minutes) 15 Setting 1 30 1 2 * * * Build = IEC60870-5-103
Baud Rate 04 Indexed String G38m 19200 bits/s Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Build = Modbus
Baud Rate 04 Indexed String G38v 19200 bits/s Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Build = IEC60870-5-103
Baud Rate 04 Indexed String G38d 19200 bits/s Setting 0 5 1 2 * * * Build = DNP 3.0
Parity 05 Indexed String G39 None Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Build = Modbus
Parity 05 Indexed String G39 None Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Build = DNP 3.0
Measure't Period 06 Courier Number (Time) 15 Setting 1 60 1 2 * * * Build = IEC60870-5-103
Build=IEC60870-5-103 and Fibre Optic Board
Physical Link 07 Indexed String G21 RS485 Setting 0 1 1 1 * * *
fitted

Time Sync 08 Indexed String G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Build=DNP 3.0 visible when IRIG-B is disabled

CS103 Blocking 0A Indexed String G210 Disabled Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103


Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 22/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
Visible when Model no. Hardware option (Field
REAR PORT2 (RP2) 80 (Sub Heading) * * *
7) = 7 or 8

Visible when Model no. Hardware option (Field


RP2 Protocol 81 ASCII Text(16 chars) Courier Data * * *
7) = 7 or 8. Implemented as datatype G71

Visible when Model no. Hardware option (Field


RP2 Card Status 84 Indexed String G204 Data * * *
7) = 7 or 8
RP2 Port Config 88 Indexed String G205 EIA232 (RS232) Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Visible if RP2 Card status = OK
RP2 Comms Mode 8A Indexed String G206 IEC60870 FT1.2 Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Visible if RP2 Card status = OK and 0E88<2
RP2 Address 90 Unsigned Integer (16 bits) 255 Setting 0 255 1 1 * * * Visible if RP2 Card status = OK
RP2 InactivTimer 92 Courier Number (time-minutes) 15 Setting 1 30 1 2 * * * Visible if RP2 Card status = OK
RP2 Baud Rate 94 Indexed String G38c 19200 bits/s Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * Visible if RP2 Card status = OK and
COMMISSION TESTS 0F 00 * * *
Binary Flag(32 bits) The original register 30007 is available for
Opto I/P Status 01 G8 30725 30726 G8 Data * * *
Indexed String opto inputs #1 to #16
Binary Flag(32 bits)
Relay O/P Status 02 G9 30008 30009 G9 Data * * *
Indexed String
Binary Flag(8 bits)
Test Port Status 03 Data * * *
Indexed String
LED Status 04 Binary Flag(8 bits) Data * * *
Monitor Bit 1 05 Unsigned Integer 40850 G1 64 Setting 0 1022 1 1 * * *
Monitor Bit 2 06 Unsigned Integer 40851 G1 65 Setting 0 1022 1 1 * * *
Monitor Bit 3 07 Unsigned Integer 40852 G1 66 Setting 0 1022 1 1 * * *
Monitor Bit 4 08 Unsigned Integer 40853 G1 67 Setting 0 1022 1 1 * * *
Monitor Bit 5 09 Unsigned Integer 40854 G1 68 Setting 0 1022 1 1 * * *
Monitor Bit 6 0A Unsigned Integer 40855 G1 69 Setting 0 1022 1 1 * * *
Monitor Bit 7 0B Unsigned Integer 40856 G1 70 Setting 0 1022 1 1 * * *
Monitor Bit 8 0C Unsigned Integer 40857 G1 71 Setting 0 1022 1 1 * * *
Test Mode 0D Indexed String G119 40858 G119 Disabled Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * IEC60870 Test Mode Change
Binary Flag
Test Pattern 0E G9 40859 40860 G9 0 Setting 0 20 1 2 * * * IEC60870 Test Mode Change
Indexed String
Contact Test 0F Indexed String G93 40861 G93 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * * IEC60870 Test Mode Change
Binary Flag(8 bits)
Test LEDs 10 G94 40862 G94 No Operation Command 0 1 1 2 * * *
Indexed String
The following cells (0F20 to 0F3F) and Modbus addresses (30723 to 30786) are available to access real-time DDB status, including starts, trips and alarms
DDB 31 - 0 N/A 20 Binary Flag(32) 30723 30724 G27 Data * * * DDB Elements 0-31
DDB 63 - 32 N/A 21 Binary Flag(32) 30725 30726 G27 Data * * *
DDB 95 - 64 N/A 22 Binary Flag(32) 30727 30728 G27 Data * * *
DDB 127 - 96 N/A 23 Binary Flag(32) 30729 30730 G27 Data * * *
DDB 159 - 128 N/A 24 Binary Flag(32) 30731 30732 G27 Data * * *
DDB 191 - 160 N/A 25 Binary Flag(32) 30733 30734 G27 Data * * *
DDB 223 - 192 N/A 26 Binary Flag(32) 30735 30736 G27 Data * * *
DDB 255 - 224 N/A 27 Binary Flag(32) 30737 30738 G27 Data * * *
DDB 287 - 256 N/A 28 Binary Flag(32) 30739 30740 G27 Data * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 23/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
DDB 319 - 288 N/A 29 Binary Flag(32) 30741 30742 G27 Data * * *
DDB 351 - 320 N/A 2A Binary Flag(32) 30743 30744 G27 Data * * *
DDB 383 - 352 N/A 2B Binary Flag(32) 30745 30746 G27 Data * * *
DDB 415 - 384 N/A 2C Binary Flag(32) 30747 30748 G27 Data * * *
DDB 447 - 416 N/A 2D Binary Flag(32) 30749 30750 G27 Data * * *
DDB 479 - 448 N/A 2E Binary Flag(32) 30751 30752 G27 Data * * *
DDB 511 - 480 N/A 2F Binary Flag(32) 30753 30754 G27 Data * * *
DDB 543 - 512 N/A 30 Binary Flag(32) 30755 30756 G27 Data * * *
DDB 575 - 544 N/A 31 Binary Flag(32) 30757 30758 G27 Data * * *
DDB 607 - 576 N/A 32 Binary Flag(32) 30759 30760 G27 Data * * *
DDB 639 - 608 N/A 33 Binary Flag(32) 30761 30762 G27 Data * * *
DDB 671 - 640 N/A 34 Binary Flag(32) 30763 30764 G27 Data * * *
DDB 703 - 672 N/A 35 Binary Flag(32) 30765 30766 G27 Data * * *
DDB 735 - 704 N/A 36 Binary Flag(32) 30767 30768 G27 Data * * *
DDB 767 - 736 N/A 37 Binary Flag(32) 30769 30770 G27 Data * * *
DDB 799 - 768 N/A 38 Binary Flag(32) 30771 30772 G27 Data * * *
DDB 831 - 800 N/A 39 Binary Flag(32) 30773 30774 G27 Data * * *
DDB 863 - 832 N/A 3A Binary Flag(32) 30775 30776 G27 Data * * *
DDB 895 - 864 N/A 3B Binary Flag(32) 30777 30778 G27 Data * * *
DDB 927 - 896 N/A 3C Binary Flag(32) 30779 30780 G27 Data * * *
DDB 959 - 928 N/A 3D Binary Flag(32) 30781 30782 G27 Data * * *
DDB 991 - 960 N/A 3E Binary Flag(32) 30783 30784 G27 Data * * *
DDB 1022 - 992 N/A 3F Binary Flag(32) 30785 30786 G27 Data * * *
N/A Binary Flag(16) 30701 G26 Data * * * Relay Status (repeat of Courier status)
N/A Courier Number (current) 30702 30703 G24 Data * * * IA Magnitude
N/A Courier Number (current) 30704 30705 G24 Data * * * IB Magnitude
N/A Courier Number (current) 30706 30707 G24 Data * * * IC Magnitude
N/A Courier Number (voltage) 30708 30709 G24 Data * * * VAB Magnitude
N/A Courier Number (voltage) 30710 30711 G24 Data * * * VBC Magnitude
N/A Courier Number (voltage) 30712 30713 G24 Data * * * VCA Magnitude
N/A Courier Number (power) 30714 30716 G29 Data * * * 3 Phase Watts
N/A Courier Number (power) 30717 30719 G29 Data * * * 3 Phase VArs
N/A Courier Number (decimal) 30720 G30 Data * * * 3 Phase Power Factor
N/A Courier Number (frequency) 30721 G30 Data * * * Frequency
N/A Binary Flag(8) 30722 G1 Data * * * Relay Test Port Status
CB MONITOR SETUP 10 00 * * *
Broken I^ 01 Courier Number (Decimal) 40151 G2 2 Setting 1 2 0.1 2 * * * Broken Current Index
I^ Maintenance 02 Indexed String G88 40152 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Broken Current to cause maintenance alarm
I^ Maintenance 03 Courier Number (Current) 40153 40154 G35 1000 Setting 1 25000 1 2 * * * IX Maintenance Alarm
I^ Lockout 04 Indexed String G88 40155 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Broken Current to cause lockout alarm
I^ Lockout 05 Courier Number (Current) 40156 40157 G35 2000 Setting 1 25000 1 2 * * * IX Maintenance Lockout
Circuit Breaker Trips to cause maintenance
No. CB Ops Maint 06 Indexed String G88 40158 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
alarm
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 24/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
Number of Circuit Breaker Trips for
No. CB Ops Maint 07 Unsigned Integer 40159 G1 10 Setting 1 10000 1 2 * * *
maintenance alarm
No. CB Ops Lock 08 Indexed String G88 40160 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Circuit Breaker Trips to cause lockout alarm
Number of Circuit Breaker Trips for lockout
No. CB Ops Lock 09 Unsigned Integer 40161 G1 20 Setting 1 10000 1 2 * * *
alarm
Circuit Breaker Operating Time to cause
CB Time Maint 0A Indexed String G88 40162 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
maintenance alarm
Circuit Breaker Operating time for
CB Time Maint 0B Courier Number (Time) 40163 40164 G35 0.1 Setting 0.005 0.5 0.001 2 * * *
maintenance alarm
Circuit Breaker Operating Time to cause
CB Time Lockout 0C Indexed String G88 40165 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
lockout alarm
Circuit Breaker Operating time for lockout
CB Time Lockout 0D Courier Number (Time) 40166 40167 G35 0.2 Setting 0.005 0.5 0.001 2 * * *
alarm
Fault Freq Lock 0E Indexed String G88 40168 G88 Alarm Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Excessive fault frequency
Fault Freq Count 0F Unsigned Integer 40169 G1 10 Setting 1 9999 1 2 * * * Excessive Fault Frequency Counter
Fault Freq Time 10 Courier Number (Time) 40170 40171 G35 3600 Setting 0 9999 1 2 * * * Excessive Fault Frequency Time
Visible for Model Number design suffix 'B' and
OPTO CONFIG 11 00 * * *
beyond
Select Custom to select individual Opto
Global Nominal V 01 Indexed String G200 40900 G200 48-54V Setting 0 5 1 2 * * *
Threshold Voltages
Opto Input 1 02 Indexed String G201 40901 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 2 03 Indexed String G201 40902 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 3 04 Indexed String G201 40903 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 4 05 Indexed String G201 40904 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 5 06 Indexed String G201 40905 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 6 07 Indexed String G201 40906 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 7 08 Indexed String G201 40907 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 8 09 Indexed String G201 40908 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 9 0A Indexed String G201 40909 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 10 0B Indexed String G201 40910 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 11 0C Indexed String G201 40911 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 12 0D Indexed String G201 40912 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 13 0E Indexed String G201 40913 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 14 0F Indexed String G201 40914 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 15 10 Indexed String G201 40915 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 16 11 Indexed String G201 40916 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 17 12 Indexed String G201 40917 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 18 13 Indexed String G201 40918 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 19 14 Indexed String G201 40919 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 20 15 Indexed String G201 40920 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 21 16 Indexed String G201 40921 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 22 17 Indexed String G201 40922 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 23 18 Indexed String G201 40923 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 24 19 Indexed String G201 40924 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 25/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
Opto Input 25 1A Indexed String G201 40925 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 *
Opto Input 26 1B Indexed String G201 40926 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 *
Opto Input 27 1C Indexed String G201 40927 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 *
Opto Input 28 1D Indexed String G201 40928 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 *
Opto Input 29 1E Indexed String G201 40929 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 *
Opto Input 30 1F Indexed String G201 40930 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 *
Opto Input 31 20 Indexed String G201 40931 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 *
Opto Input 32 21 Indexed String G201 40932 G201 48-54V Setting 0 4 1 2 *
CONTROL INPUTS 12 00 * * *
Ctrl I/P Status 01 Binary Flag (32 bits) G202 40950 40951 G202 Setting 2 * * *
Control Input 1 02 Indexed String G203 40952 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 2 03 Indexed String G203 40953 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 3 04 Indexed String G203 40954 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 4 05 Indexed String G203 40955 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 5 06 Indexed String G203 40956 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 6 07 Indexed String G203 40957 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 7 08 Indexed String G203 40958 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 8 09 Indexed String G203 40959 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 9 0A Indexed String G203 40960 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 10 0B Indexed String G203 40961 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 11 0C Indexed String G203 40962 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 12 0D Indexed String G203 40963 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 13 0E Indexed String G203 40964 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 14 0F Indexed String G203 40965 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 15 10 Indexed String G203 40966 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 16 11 Indexed String G203 40967 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 17 12 Indexed String G203 40968 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 18 13 Indexed String G203 40969 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 19 14 Indexed String G203 40970 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 20 15 Indexed String G203 40971 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 21 16 Indexed String G203 40972 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 22 17 Indexed String G203 40973 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 23 18 Indexed String G203 40974 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 24 19 Indexed String G203 40975 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 25 1A Indexed String G203 40976 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 26 1B Indexed String G203 40977 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 27 1C Indexed String G203 40978 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 28 1D Indexed String G203 40979 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 29 1E Indexed String G203 40980 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 30 1F Indexed String G203 40981 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 31 20 Indexed String G203 40982 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
Control Input 32 21 Indexed String G203 40983 G203 No Operation Command 0 2 1 2 * * *
GROUP 1
30 00 *
GEN DIFF
GenDiff Function 01 Indexed String G101 41000 G101 Percentage Bias Setting 0 3 1 2 *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 26/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
Gen Diff Is1 02 Courier Number (Current) 41001 G2 0.1 Setting 0.05*I1 0.5*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
Gen Diff k1 03 Courier Number (Percentage) 41002 G2 0 Setting 0 20 5 2 *
Gen Diff Is2 04 Courier Number (Current) 41003 G2 1.2 Setting 1*I1 5*I1 0.1*I1 2 *
Gen Diff k2 05 Courier Number (Percentage) 41004 G2 150 Setting 20 150 10 2 *
Interturn Is_A 10 Courier Number (Current) 41005 G2 0.1 Setting 0.05*I1 2*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
Interturn Is_B 14 Courier Number (Current) 41006 G2 0.1 Setting 0.05*I1 2*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
Interturn Is_C 18 Courier Number (Current) 41007 G2 0.1 Setting 0.05*I1 2*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
Interturn Delay 1C Courier Number (Time) 41008 G2 0.1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
GROUP 1
31 00 * * *
POWER
Operating Mode 20 Indexed String G115 41064 G115 Generating Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Power1 Function 24 Indexed String G102 41050 G102 Over Setting 0 3 1 2 *
-P>1 Setting 28 Courier Number (Power) 41051 G2 20 Setting 14*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 *
5 4*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 * *
P<1 Setting 2C Courier Number (Power) 41052 G2 20 Setting 14*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 *
10 4*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 * *
P>1 Setting 30 Courier Number (Power) 41053 G2 120 Setting 14*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 *
120 4*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 * *
Power1 TimeDelay 34 Courier Number (Time) 41054 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
Power1 DO Timer 38 Courier Number (Time) 41055 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
P1 Poledead Inh 3C Indexed String G37 41056 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Power2 Function 40 Indexed String G102 41057 G102 Disabled Setting 0 3 1 2 *
Low Forward * *
-P>2 Setting 44 Courier Number (Power) 41058 G2 20 Setting 14*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 *
5 4*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 * *
P<2 Setting 48 Courier Number (Power) 41059 G2 20 Setting 14*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 *
10 4*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 * *
P>2 Setting 4C Courier Number (Power) 41060 G2 120 Setting 14*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 2*V1*I1 2 *
120 4*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 * *
Power2 TimeDelay 50 Courier Number (Time) 41061 G2 2 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
Power2 DO Timer 54 Courier Number (Time) 41062 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
P2 Poledead Inh 58 Indexed String G37 41063 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
GROUP 1
32 00 * *
FIELD FAILURE
FFail Alm Status 01 Indexed String G37 41100 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
FFail Alm Angle 02 Courier Number (Angle) 41101 G2 15 Setting 15 75 1 2 * *
FFail Alm Delay 03 Courier Number (Time) 41102 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
FFail1 Status 04 Indexed String G37 41103 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
FFail1 -Xa1 05 Courier Number (Impedance) 41104 G2 20 Setting 0 40*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2 * *
FFail1 Xb1 06 Courier Number (Impedance) 41105 G2 220 Setting 25*V1/I1 325*V1/I1 1*V1/I1 2 * *
FFail1 TimeDelay 07 Courier Number (Time) 41106 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
FFail1 DO Timer 08 Courier Number (Time) 41107 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
FFail2 Status 09 Indexed String G37 41108 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
FFail2 -Xa2 0A Courier Number (Impedance) 41109 G2 20 Setting 0 40*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2 * *
FFail2 Xb2 0B Courier Number (Impedance) 41110 G2 110 Setting 25*V1/I1 325*V1/I1 1*V1/I1 2 * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 27/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
FFail2 TimeDelay 0C Courier Number (Time) 41111 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
FFail2 DO Timer 0D Courier Number (Time) 41112 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
GROUP 1 Will include NPS Overcurrent (P341) and NPS
33 00 * *
NPS THERMAL overvoltage in Phase 2.20
I2>1 Alarm 01 Indexed String G37 41150 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
I2>1 Current Set 02 Courier Number (Current) 41151 G2 0.05 Setting 0.03*I1 0.5*I1 0.01*I1 2 * *
I2>1 Time Delay 03 Courier Number (Time) 41152 G2 20s Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
I2>2 Trip 04 Indexed String G37 41153 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
I2>2 Current Set 05 Courier Number (Current) 41154 G2 0.1 Setting 0.05*I1 0.5*I1 0.01*I1 2 * *
I2>2 k Setting 06 Courier Number (Time) 41155 G2 15 Setting 2 40 0.1 2 * *
I2>2 kRESET 07 Courier Number (Time) 41156 G2 15 Setting 2 40 0.1 2 * *
I2>2 tMAX 08 Courier Number (Time) 41157 G2 1000 Setting 500 2000 1 2 * *
I2>2 tMIN 09 Courier Number (Time) 41158 G2 0.25 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
GROUP 1
34 00 * *
SYSTEM BACKUP
Backup Function 01 Indexed String G103 41200 G103 Voltage controlled Setting 0 3 1 2 * *
Vector Rotation 02 Indexed String G104 41201 G104 None Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
V Dep OC Char 20 Indexed String G111 41202 G111 IEC S Inverse Setting 0 11 1 2 * *
V Dep OC I> Set 23 Courier Number (Current) 41203 G2 1 Setting 0.8*I1 4*I1 0.01*I1 2 * *
V Dep OC T Dial 25 Courier Number (Decimal) 41204 G2 1 Setting 0.01 100 0.01 2 * *
OC reset characteritic selection. Apply to US
V Dep OC Reset 26 Indexed String G60 41205 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
curves only
V Dep OC Delay 27 Courier Number (Time) 41206 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * Apply to DT trip characteristic only
V Dep OC TMS 28 Courier Number (Decimal) 41207 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 * *
V Dep OC K (RI) 29 Courier Number (Decimal) 41219 G2 1 Setting 0.1 10 0.05 2 * *
V Dep OC tRESET 2A Courier Number (Time) 41208 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
V Dep OC V<1 Set 2D Courier Number (Voltage) 41209 G2 80 Setting 5*V1 120*V1 1*V1 2 * *
V Dep OC V<2 Set 2E Courier Number (Voltage) 41210 G2 60 Setting 5*V1 120*V1 1*V1 2 * *
V Dep OC k Set 2F Courier Number (Decimal) 41211 G2 0.25 Setting 0.1 1 0.05 2 * *
Z<1 Setting 30 Courier Number (Impedance) 41212 G2 70 Setting 2*V1/I1 120*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2 * *
Z<1 Time Delay 31 Courier Number (Time) 41213 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
Z<1 tRESET 32 Courier Number (Time) 41214 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
Z< Stage 2 33 Indexed String G37 41215 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
Z<2 Setting 34 Courier Number (Impedance) 41216 G2 70 Setting 2*V1/I1 120*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2 * *
Z<2 Time Delay 35 Courier Number (Time) 41217 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
Z<2 tRESET 36 Courier Number (Time) 41218 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
GROUP 1
35 00 * * *
OVERCURRENT
I>1 Function 23 Indexed String G150 41250 G150 Disabled Setting 0 12 1 2 * *
IEC S Inverse *
I>1 Direction 24 Indexed String G44 41251 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
I>1 Current Set 27 Courier Number (Current) 41252 G2 1 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * * I>1 Current Setting
I>1 Time Delay 29 Courier Number (Time) 41253 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * * I>1 Definite Time
I>1 TMS 2A Courier Number (Decimal) 41254 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 * * *
I>1 Time Dial 2B Courier Number (Decimal) 41255 G2 1 Setting 0.01 100 0.01 2 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 28/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
I>1 K (RI) 2C Courier Number (Decimal) 41276 G2 1 Setting 0.1 10 0.05 2 * * *
I>1 Reset Char 2E Indexed String G60 41256 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
I>1 tRESET 2F Courier Number (Time) 41257 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
I>2 Function 32 Indexed String G150 41258 G150 Disabled Setting 0 12 1 2 * I>2 Overcurrent Status
G105 G105 DT 0 1 1 2 * *
I>2 Direction 33 Indexed String G44 41259 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
I>2 Current Set 36 Courier Number (Current) 41260 G2 1 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
10 0.08*I1 10.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 * *
I>2 Time Delay 38 Courier Number (Time) 41261 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
I>2 TMS 39 Courier Number (Decimal) 41262 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 *
I>2 Time Dial 3A Courier Number (Decimal) 41263 G2 1 Setting 0.01 100 0.01 2 *
I>2 K (RI) 3B Courier Number (Decimal) 41277 G2 1 Setting 0.1 10 0.05 2 *
I>2 Reset Char 3D Indexed String G60 41264 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 *
I>2 tRESET 3E Courier Number (Time) 41265 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
I>3 Status 40 Indexed String G37 41266 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
I>3 Direction 41 Indexed String G44 41267 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
I>3 Current Set 44 Courier Number (Current) 41268 G2 20 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
I>3 Time Delay 45 Courier Number (Time) 41269 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
I>4 Status 47 Indexed String G37 41270 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
I>4 Direction 48 Indexed String G44 41271 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
I>4 Current Set 4B Courier Number (Current) 41272 G2 20 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
I>4 Time Delay 4C Courier Number (Time) 41273 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
I> Char Angle 4E Courier Number (Angle) 41274 G2 30 Setting -95 95 1 2 * I> Characteristic Angle
I> Function Link 4F Binary Flag G14 41275 G14 15 Setting 15 4 1 2 *
GROUP 1
36 00 * * *
THERMAL OVERLOAD
Thermal 50 Indexed String G37 41308 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Thermal overload (I2t characteristic)
Thermal I> 55 Courier Number (Current) 41309 G2 1.2 Setting 0.5*I1 2.5*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *
Thermal Alarm 5A Courier Number (Percentage) 41310 G2 90 Setting 20 100 1 2 * * *
T-heating 5F Courier Number (Time, minutes) 41311 G2 60 Setting 1 200 1 2 * * *
T-cooling 64 Courier Number (Time, minutes) 41312 G2 60 Setting 1 200 1 2 * * *
M Factor 69 Courier Number (Decimal) 41313 G2 0 Setting 0 10 1 2 * * *
GROUP 1
37 00
Not Used
GROUP 1
38 00 * * *
EARTH FAULT
IN Input 01 Indexed String G49 G49 Derived Data *
IN>1 Function 25 Indexed String G151 41400 G151 IEC S Inverse Setting 0 12 1 2 * * *
IN>1 Direction 26 Indexed String G44 41401 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
IN>1 Current 29 Courier Number (Current) 41402 G2 0.2 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
0.1 0.02*I2 4.0*I2 0.01*I2 * * Change scaling factor for Models 2 & 3
IN>1 IDG Is 2A Courier Number (Decimal) 41431 G2 1.5 Setting 1 4 0.1 2 * * *
IN>1 Time Delay 2C Courier Number (Time) 41403 G2 1 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 * * * I>1 Definite Time
IN>1 TMS 2D Courier Number (Decimal) 41404 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 29/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
IN>1 Time Dial 2E Courier Number (Decimal) 41405 G2 1 Setting 0.01 100 0.01 2 * * *
IN>1 K (RI) 2F Courier Number (Decimal) 41432 G2 1 Setting 0.1 10 0.05 2 * * *
IN>1 IDG Time 30 Courier Number (Decimal) 41433 G2 1.2 Setting 1 2 0.01 2 * * *
IN>1 Reset Char 32 Indexed String G60 41406 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
IN>1 tRESET 33 Courier Number (Time) 41407 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
IN>2 Function 36 Indexed String G151 41408 G151 Disabled Setting 0 12 1 2 *
G105 G105 Disabled 1 1 1 2 * *
IN>2 Direction 37 Indexed String G44 41409 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
IN>2 Current 3A Courier Number (Current) 41410 G2 0.2 Setting 0.08*I1 4.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
0.45 0.02*I2 10.0*I2 0.01*I2 * * Change scaling factor for Models 2 & 3
IN>2 IDG Is 3B Courier Number (Decimal) 41434 G2 1.5 Setting 1 4 0.1 2 *
IN>2 Time Delay 3D Courier Number (Time) 41411 G2 1 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 *
0 * *
IN>2 TMS 3E Courier Number (Decimal) 41412 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 *
IN>2 Time Dial 3F Courier Number (Decimal) 41413 G2 1 Setting 0.01 100 0.01 2 *
IN>2 K (RI) 40 Courier Number (Decimal) 41435 G2 1 Setting 0.1 10 0.05 2 *
IN>2 IDG Time 41 Courier Number (Time) 41436 G2 1.2 Setting 1 2 0.01 2 *
IN>2 Reset Char 43 Indexed String G60 41414 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 *
IN>2 tRESET 44 Courier Number (Time) 41415 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
IN>3 Status 46 Indexed String G37 41416 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
IN>3 Direction 47 Indexed String G44 41417 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
IN>3 Current 4A Courier Number (Current) 41418 G2 0.5 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
IN>3 Time Delay 4B Courier Number (Time) 41419 G2 0 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 *
IN>4 Status 4D Indexed String G37 41420 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
IN>4 Direction 4E Indexed String G44 41421 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
IN>4 Current 51 Courier Number (Current) 41422 G2 0.5 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
IN>4 Time Delay 52 Courier Number (Time) 41423 G2 0 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 *
IN> Func Link 54 Binary Flags G63 41424 G63 15 Setting 15 4 1 2 *
IN> DIRECTIONAL 55 (Sub Heading) 2 *
IN> Char Angle 56 Courier Number(Angle) 41425 G2 -60 Setting -95 95 1 2 *
IN> Pol 57 Indexed String G46 41426 G46 Zero Sequence Setting 0 1 1 2 *
IN> VNpol Input 58 Indexed String G49 41427 G49 Measured Setting 0 1 1 2 *
IN> VNpol Set 59 Courier Number (Voltage) 41428 G2 5 Setting 0.5*V1 80*V1 0.5*V1 2 * IN> V0 Polarising Setting
0.5*V3 80*V3 0.5*V3 Change scaling factor
IN> V2pol Set 5A Courier Number (Voltage) 41429 G2 5 Setting 0.5*V1 25*V1 0.5*V1 2 * IN> V2 Polarising Setting
IN> I2pol Set 5B Courier Number (Current) 41430 G2 0.08 Setting 0.08*I1 1*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
GROUP 1
39 00
Not Used
GROUP 1
3A 00 * * *
SEF/REF PROT'N
SEF/REF Options 01 Indexed String G58 41500 G58 SEF Setting 0 4 1 2 * Protection Options
0 7 1 2 * *
ISEF>1 Function 2A Indexed String G152 41501 G152 DT Setting 0 11 1 2 *
G105 G105 0 1 1 * *
ISEF>1 Direction 2B Indexed String G44 41502 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 * * * ISEF>1 Directionality
ISEF>1 Current 2E Courier Number (Current) 41503 G2 0.05 Setting 0.005*I3 0.1*I3 0.00025*I3 2 * * * ISEF>1 Current Setting
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 30/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
ISEF>1 IDG Is 2F Courier Number (Decimal) 41535 G2 1.5 Setting 1 4 0.1 2 *
ISEF>1 Delay 31 Courier Number (Time) 41504 G2 1 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 * * * ISEF>1 Definite Time
ISEF>1 TMS 32 Courier Number (Decimal) 41505 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 *
ISEF>1 Time Dial 33 Courier Number (Decimal) 41506 G2 1 Setting 0.01 100 0.01 2 *
ISEF>1 IDG Time 34 Courier Number (Time) 41536 G2 1.2 Setting 1 2 0.01 2 *
ISEF>1 Reset Chr 36 Indexed String G60 41507 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 *
ISEF>1 tRESET 37 Courier Number (Time) 41508 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
ISEF>2 Function 3A Indexed String G152 41509 G152 Disabled Setting 0 11 1 2 *
ISEF>2 Direction 3B Indexed String G44 41510 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 *
ISEF>2 Current 3E Courier Number (Current) 41511 G2 0.05 Setting 0.005*I3 0.1*I3 0.00025*I3 2 *
ISEF>2 IDG Is 3F Courier Number (Decimal) 41537 G2 1.5 Setting 1 4 0.1 2 *
ISEF>2 Delay 41 Courier Number (Time) 41512 G2 1 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 *
ISEF>2 TMS 42 Courier Number (Decimal) 41513 G2 1 Setting 0.025 1.2 0.025 2 *
ISEF>2 Time Dial 43 Courier Number (Decimal) 41514 G2 1 Setting 0.01 100 0.01 2 *
ISEF>2 IDG Time 44 Courier Number (Time) 41538 G2 1.2 Setting 1 2 0.01 2 *
ISEF>2 Reset Chr 46 Indexed String G60 41515 G60 DT Setting 0 1 1 2 *
ISEF>2 tRESET 47 Courier Number (Time) 41516 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
ISEF>3 Status 49 Indexed String G37 41517 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
ISEF>3 Direction 4A Indexed String G44 41518 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 * ISEF>3 Directionality
ISEF>3 Current 4D Courier Number (Current) 41519 G2 0.4 Setting 0.005*I3 0.80*I3 0.001*I3 2 * ISEF>3 Current Setting
ISEF>3 Delay 4E Courier Number (Time) 41520 G2 0.5 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 * ISEF>3 Definite Time
ISEF>4 Status 50 Indexed String G37 41521 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
ISEF>4 Direction 51 Indexed String G44 41522 G44 Non-Directional Setting 0 2 1 2 * ISEF>4 Directionality
ISEF>4 Current 54 Courier Number (Current) 41523 G2 0.6 Setting 0.005*I3 0.80*I3 0.001*I3 2 * ISEF>4 Current Setting
ISEF>4 Delay 55 Courier Number (Time) 41524 G2 0.25 Setting 0 200 0.01 2 * ISEF>4 Definite Time
ISEF> Func Link 57 Binary Flags G64 41525 G64 15 Setting 15 4 1 2 *
ISEF DIRECTIONAL 58 (Sub Heading) 2 * * *
ISEF> Char Angle 59 Courier Number(Angle) 41526 G2 90 Setting -95 95 1 2 * * *
ISEF>VNpol Input 5A Indexed String G49 41527 G49 Measured Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
ISEF> VNpol Set 5B Courier Number (Voltage) 41528 G2 5 Setting 0.5*V1 80*V1 0.5*V1 2 * * * V3 applied when 3A5A=0, V1 applied when
0.5*V3 80*V3 0.5*V3 * * * 3A5A=1
WATTMETRIC SEF 5D (Sub Heading) * * *
PN> Setting 5E Courier Number (Power) 41529 G2 9 Setting 0.0*V1*I3 20*V1*I3 0.05*V1*I3 2 * * * V3 applied when 3A5A=0, V1 applied when
0.0*V3*I3 20*V3*I3 0.05*V3*I3 * * * 3A5A=1
RESTRICTED E/F 60 (Sub Heading) * * * Restricted Earth Fault
IREF> k1 61 Courier Number (Percentage) 41530 G2 20 Setting 0 20 1 2 * * REF K1, applied to L Impedance
IREF> k2 62 Courier Number (Percentage) 41531 G2 150 Setting 0 150 1 2 * * REF K2, applied to L impedance
IREF> Is1 63 Courier Number (Current) 41532 G2 0.2 Setting 0.05*I1 1.0*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * REF Is1, applied to L impedance
IREF> Is2 64 Courier Number (Current) 41533 G2 1 Setting 0.1*I1 1.5*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * REF Is2, applied to L impedance
IREF> Is 65 Courier Number (Current) 41534 G2 0.2 Setting 0.05*I3 1.0*I3 0.01*I3 2 * * * REF Is, applied to H impedance
GROUP 1
3B 00 * * *
RESIDUAL O/V NVD
VN Input 01 Indexed String G49 41550 G49 Measured Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
VN>1 Function 02 Indexed String G23 41551 G23 DT Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 31/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
VN>1 Voltage Set 03 Courier Number (Voltage) 41552 G2 5 Setting 1*V1 50*V1 1*V1 2 * * *
1*V3 50*V3 1*V3 Change scaling factor
VN>1 Time Delay 04 Courier Number (Time) 41553 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
VN>1 TMS 05 Courier Number (Decimal) 41554 G2 1 Setting 0.5 100 0.5 2 * * *
VN>1 tReset 06 Courier Number (Time) 41555 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
VN>2 Status 07 Indexed String G37 41556 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
VN>2 Voltage Set 08 Courier Number (Voltage) 41557 G2 10 Setting 1*V1 50*V1 1*V1 2 * * *
1*V3 50*V3 1*V3 Change scaling factor
VN>2 Time Delay 09 Courier Number (Time) 41558 G2 10 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
GROUP 1
3C 00 *
100% STATOR EF
100%St EF Status 01 Indexed String G112 41600 G112 1 (Undervoltage) Setting 0 2 1 2 *
100% St EF VN3H< 02 Courier Number (Voltage) 41601 G2 1 Setting 0.3*V3 20*V3 0.1*V3 2 *
VN3H< Delay 03 Courier Number (Time) 41602 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
V<Inhibit set 04 Courier Number (Voltage) 41603 G2 80 Setting 30*V1 120*V1 1*V1 2 *
P< Inhibit 05 Indexed String G37 41604 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
P<Inhibit set 06 Courier Number (Power) 41605 G2 4 Setting 4*V1*I1 200*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 *
Q< Inhibit 07 Indexed String G37 41606 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Q<Inhibit set 08 Courier Number (VAr) 41607 G2 4 Setting 4*V1*I1 200*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 *
S< Inhibit 09 Indexed String G37 41608 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
S<Inhibit set 0A Courier Number (VA) 41609 G2 4 Setting 4*V1*I1 200*V1*I1 0.5*V1*I1 2 *
100% St EF VN3H> 0B Courier Number (Voltage) 41610 G2 1 Setting 0.3*V3 20*V3 0.1*V3 2 *
VN3H> Delay 0C Courier Number (Time) 41611 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
GROUP 1
3D 00 * *
VOLTS/HZ
V/Hz Alm Status 01 Indexed String G37 41650 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * *
V/Hz Alarm Set 02 Courier Number (Volts/Hz) 41651 G2 2.31 Setting 1.5*V1 3.5*V1 0.01*V1 2 * *
V/Hz Alarm Delay 03 Courier Number (Time) 41652 G2 10 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
V/Hz Trip Func 04 Indexed String G23 41653 G23 DT Setting 0 2 1 2 * *
V/Hz Trip Set 05 Courier Number (Volts/Hz) 41654 G2 2.42 Setting 1.5*V1 3.5*V1 0.01*V1 2 * *
V/Hz Trip TMS 06 Courier Number (Decimal) 41655 G2 1 Setting 1 63 1 2 * *
V/Hz Trip Delay 07 Courier Number (Time) 41656 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * *
GROUP 1
3E 00 *
DF/DT
df/dt Status 01 Indexed String G37 41700 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
df/dt Setting 02 Courier Number (Hz/s) 41701 G2 0.2 Setting 0.1 10 0.01 2 *
df/dt Time Delay 03 Courier Number (Time) 41702 G2 0.5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
df/dt f Low 04 Courier Number (Frequency) 41703 G2 49.5 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 *
df/dt f High 05 Courier Number (Frequency) 41704 G2 50.5 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 *
GROUP 1
3F 00 *
V VECTOR SHIFT
V Shift Status 01 Indexed String G37 41750 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 32/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
V Shift Angle 02 Courier Number (Angle) 41751 G2 10 Setting 2 30 1 2 *
GROUP 1
40 00 *
DEAD MACHINE
Dead Mach Status 01 Indexed String G37 41800 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Dead Mach I> 02 Courier Number (Current) 41801 G2 0.1 Setting 0.08*I1 4*I1 0.01*I1 2 *
Dead Mach V< 03 Courier Number (Voltage) 41802 G2 80 Setting 10*V1 120*V1 1*V1 2 *
Dead Mach tPU 04 Courier Number (Time) 41803 G2 5 Setting 0 10 0.1 2 *
Dead Mach tDO 05 Courier Number (Time) 41804 G2 0.5 Setting 0 10 0.1 2 *
GROUP 1
41 00 *
RECONNECT DELAY
Reconnect Status 01 Indexed String G37 41850 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Reconnect Delay 02 Courier Number (Time) 41852 G2 60 Setting 0 300 0.01 2 *
Reconnect tPULSE 03 Courier Number (Time) 41853 G2 1 Setting 0.01 30 0.01 2 *
Modbus addresses 41900-41931 assigned for
CLIO labels
GROUP 1
42 00 * * *
VOLT PROTECTION
UNDER VOLTAGE 01 (Sub Heading) * * *
V< Measur't Mode 02 Indexed String G47 41950 G47 Phase-Neutral Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V< Operate Mode 03 Indexed String G48 41951 G48 Any Phase Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V<1 Function 04 Indexed String G23 41952 G23 DT Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
V<1 Voltage Set 05 Courier Number (Voltage) 41953 G2 50 Setting 10*V1 120*V1 1*V1 2 * * * Range covers Ph-N & Ph-Ph
V<1 Time Delay 06 Courier Number (Time) 41954 G2 10 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
V<1 TMS 07 Courier Number (Decimal) 41955 G2 1 Setting 0.5 100 0.5 2 * * *
V<1 Poledead Inh 08 Indexed String G37 41956 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V<2 Status 09 Indexed String G37 41957 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V<2 Voltage Set 0A Courier Number (Voltage) 41958 G2 38 Setting 10*V1 120*V1 1*V1 2 * * * Range covers Ph-N & Ph-Ph
V<2 Time Delay 0B Courier Number (Time) 41959 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
V<2 Poledead Inh 0C Indexed String G37 41960 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
OVERVOLTAGE 0D (Sub Heading) * * *
V> Measur't Mode 0E Indexed String G47 41961 G47 Phase-Phase Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V> Operate Mode 0F Indexed String G48 41962 G48 Any Phase Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V>1 Function 10 Indexed String G23 41963 G23 DT Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
V>1 Voltage Set 11 Courier Number (Voltage) 41964 G2 130 Setting 60*V1 185*V1 1*V1 2 * * *
V>1 Time Delay 12 Courier Number (Time) 41965 G2 10 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
V>1 TMS 13 Courier Number (Decimal) 41966 G2 1 Setting 0.5 100 0.5 2 * * *
V>2 Status 14 Indexed String G37 41967 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
V>2 Voltage Set 15 Courier Number (Voltage) 41968 G2 150 Setting 60*V1 185*V1 1*V1 2 * * *
V>2 Time Delay 16 Courier Number (Time) 41969 G2 0.5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
GROUP 1
43 00 * * *
FREQ PROTECTION
UNDER FREQUENCY 01 (Sub Heading) * * *
F<1 Status 02 Indexed String G37 42000 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
F<1 Setting 03 Courier Number (Frequency) 42001 G2 49.5 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 * * *
F<1 Time Delay 04 Courier Number (Time) 42002 G2 4 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
F<2 Status 05 Indexed String G37 42003 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 33/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
F<2 Setting 06 Courier Number (Frequency) 42004 G2 49 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 * * *
F<2 Time Delay 07 Courier Number (Time) 42005 G2 3 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
F<3 Status 08 Indexed String G37 42006 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
F<3 Setting 09 Courier Number (Frequency) 42007 G2 48.5 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 * * *
F<3 Time Delay 0A Courier Number (Time) 42008 G2 2 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
F<4 Status 0B Indexed String G37 42009 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
F<4 Setting 0C Courier Number (Frequency) 42010 G2 48 Setting 45 65 0.01 2 * * *
F<4 Time Delay 0D Courier Number (Time) 42011 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
F< Function Link 0E Binary Flag (4 bits) G65 42012 G65 16 Setting 15 4 1 2 * * *
OVER FREQUENCY 0F (Sub Heading) * * *
F>1 Status 10 Indexed String G37 42013 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
F>1 Setting 11 Courier Number (Frequency) 42014 G2 50.5 Setting 45 68 0.01 2 * * *
F>1 Time Delay 12 Courier Number (Time) 42015 G2 2 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
F>2 Status 13 Indexed String G37 42016 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
F>2 Setting 14 Courier Number (Frequency) 42017 G2 51 Setting 45 68 0.01 2 * * *
F>2 Time Delay 15 Courier Number (Time) 42018 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
GROUP 1
44 00 * *
RTD PROTECTION
Select RTD 01 Binary Flags(10 bits)Indexed String G50 42053 G50 0 Setting 1023 10 1 2 * *
RTD 1 Alarm Set 02 Courier Number (Temperature) 42054 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 1 Alarm Dly 03 Courier Number (Time) 42055 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 1 Trip Set 04 Courier Number (Temperature) 42056 G1 85 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 1 Trip Dly 05 Courier Number (Time) 42057 G1 1 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 2 Alarm Set 06 Courier Number (Temperature) 42058 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 2 Alarm Dly 07 Courier Number (Time) 42059 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 2 Trip Set 08 Courier Number (Temperature) 42060 G1 85 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 2 Trip Dly 09 Courier Number (Time) 42061 G1 1 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 3 Alarm Set 0A Courier Number (Temperature) 42062 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 3 Alarm Dly 0B Courier Number (Time) 42063 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 3 Trip Set 0C Courier Number (Temperature) 42064 G1 85 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 3 Trip Dly 0D Courier Number (Time) 42065 G1 1 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 4 Alarm Set 0E Courier Number (Temperature) 42066 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 4 Alarm Dly 0F Courier Number (Time) 42067 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 4 Trip Set 10 Courier Number (Temperature) 42068 G1 85 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 4 Trip Dly 11 Courier Number (Time) 42069 G1 1 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 5 Alarm Set 12 Courier Number (Temperature) 42070 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 5 Alarm Dly 13 Courier Number (Time) 42071 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 5 Trip Set 14 Courier Number (Temperature) 42072 G1 85 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 5 Trip Dly 15 Courier Number (Time) 42073 G1 1 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 6 Alarm Set 16 Courier Number (Temperature) 42074 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 6 Alarm Dly 17 Courier Number (Time) 42075 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 6 Trip Set 18 Courier Number (Temperature) 42076 G1 85 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 6 Trip Dly 19 Courier Number (Time) 42077 G1 1 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 7 Alarm Set 1A Courier Number (Temperature) 42078 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 7 Alarm Dly 1B Courier Number (Time) 42079 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 7 Trip Set 1C Courier Number (Temperature) 42080 G1 85 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 34/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
RTD 7 Trip Dly 1D Courier Number (Time) 42081 G1 1 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 8 Alarm Set 1E Courier Number (Temperature) 42082 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 8 Alarm Dly 1F Courier Number (Time) 42083 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 8 Trip Set 20 Courier Number (Temperature) 42084 G1 85 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 8 Trip Dly 21 Courier Number (Time) 42085 G1 1 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 9 Alarm Set 22 Courier Number (Temperature) 42086 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 9 Alarm Dly 23 Courier Number (Time) 42087 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 9 Trip Set 24 Courier Number (Temperature) 42088 G1 85 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 9 Trip Dly 25 Courier Number (Time) 42089 G1 1 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 10 Alarm Set 26 Courier Number (Temperature) 42090 G1 80 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 10 Alarm Dly 27 Courier Number (Time) 42091 G1 10 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
RTD 10 Trip Set 28 Courier Number (Temperature) 42092 G1 85 Setting 0 200 1 2 * *
RTD 10 Trip Dly 29 Courier Number (Time) 42093 G1 1 Setting 0 100 1 2 * *
GROUP 1
45 00 * * *
CB FAIL & I<
BREAKER FAIL 01 (Sub Heading) * * *
CB Fail 1 Status 02 Indexed String G37 42100 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CB Fail 1 Timer 03 Courier Number (Time) 42101 G2 0.2 Setting 0 10 0.01 2 * * *
CB Fail 2 Status 04 Indexed String G37 42102 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CB Fail 2 Timer 05 Courier Number (Time) 42103 G2 0.4 Setting 0 10 0.01 2 * * *
CBF Non I Reset 06 Indexed String G68 42104 G68 CB Open & I< Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
CBF Ext Reset 07 Indexed String G68 42105 G68 CB Open & I< Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
UNDER CURRENT 08 (Sub Heading) * * *
I< Current Set 09 Courier Number (Current) 42106 G2 0.1 Setting 0.02*I1 3.2*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *
IN< Current Set 0A Courier Number (Current) 42107 G2 0.1 Setting 0.02*I2 3.2*I2 0.01*I2 2 * * P341 does not have IN input
ISEF< Current 0B Courier Number (Current) 42108 G2 0.02 Setting 0.001*I3 0.8*I3 0.0005*I3 2 * * *
BLOCKED O/C 0C (Sub Heading) * Blocked Overcurrent Schemes
Remove I> Start 0D Indexed String G37 42109 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Remove IN> Start 0E Indexed String G37 42110 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
I< Current Input 15 Indexed String G116 42111 G116 IA-1, IB-1, IC-1 Setting 0 1 1 2 *
GROUP 1
46 00 * * *
SUPERVISION
VT SUPERVISION 01 (Sub Heading) * * *
VTS Status 02 Indexed String G7 42150 G7 Blocking Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
VTS Reset Mode 03 Indexed String G69 42151 G69 Manual Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
VTS Time Delay 04 Courier Number (Time) 42152 G2 5 Setting 1 10 0.1 2 * * *
VTS I> Inhibit 05 Courier Number (Current) 42153 G2 10 Setting 0.08*I1 32*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *
VTS I2> Inhibit 06 Courier Number (Current) 42154 G2 0.05 Setting 0.05*I1 0.5*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *
CT SUPERVISION 07 (Sub Heading) * * *
CTS Status 08 Indexed String G37 42155 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CTS VN Input 09 Indexed String G49 42156 G49 Derived Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CTS VN< Inhibit 0A Courier Number (Voltage) 42157 G2 5 Setting 0.5*V1 22*V1 0.5*V1 2 * * *
0.5*V3 22*V3 0.5*V3 Change scaling factor
CTS IN> Set 0B Courier Number (Current) 42158 G2 0.2 Setting 0.08*I1 4*I1 0.01*I1 2 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 35/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
CTS Time Delay 0C Courier Number (Time) 42159 G2 5 Setting 0 10 1 2 * * *
GROUP 1
47 00 * * *
SENSITIVE POWER
Comp Angle 20 Courier Number (Angle) 42175 G2 0 Setting -5 5 0.1 2 * * *
Operating Mode 24 Indexed String G115 42190 G115 Generating Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Sen Power1 Func 28 Indexed String G102 42176 G102 Reverse Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
Sen -P>1 Setting 2C Courier Number (Power) 42177 G2 0.5*V1*I3 Setting 0.3*V1*I3 100*V1*I3 0.1*V1*I3 2 * * *
Sen P<1 Setting 30 Courier Number (Power) 42178 G2 0.5*V1*I3 Setting 0.3*V1*I3 100*V1*I3 0.1*V1*I3 2 * * *
Sen P>1 Setting 34 Courier Number (Power) 42179 G2 50*V1*I3 Setting 0.3*V1*I3 100*V1*I3 0.1*V1*I3 2 * * *
Sen Power1 Delay 38 Courier Number (Time) 42180 G2 5 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
Power1 DO Timer 3C Courier Number (Time) 42181 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
P1 PoleDead Inh 40 Indexed String G37 42182 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Sen Power2 Func 44 Indexed String G102 42183 G102 Low Forward Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
Sen -P>2 Setting 48 Courier Number (Power) 42184 G2 0.5*V1*I3 Setting 0.3*V1*I3 100*V1*I3 0.1*V1*I3 2 * * *
Sen P<2 Setting 4C Courier Number (Power) 42185 G2 0.5*V1*I3 Setting 0.3*V1*I3 100*V1*I3 0.1*V1*I3 2 * * *
Sen P>2 Setting 50 Courier Number (Power) 42186 G2 50*V1*I3 Setting 0.3*V1*I3 100*V1*I3 0.1*V1*I3 2 * * *
Sen Power2 Delay 54 Courier Number (Time) 42187 G2 2 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
Power2 DO Timer 58 Courier Number (Time) 42188 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 * * *
P2 PoleDead Inh 5C Indexed String G37 42189 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
GROUP 1
48 00
NOT USED
GROUP 1
49 00 *
POLE SLIPPING
PSlip Function 01 Indexed String G37 42250 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 *
Z Based PoleSlip 02 (Sub Heading) *
Pole Slip Mode 03 Indexed String G113 42251 G113 Generating Setting 0 2 1 2 *
PSlip Za Forward 04 Courier Number (Impedance) 42252 G2 100*V1/I1 Setting 0.5*V1/I1 350*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2 *
PSlip Zb Reverse 05 Courier Number (Impedance) 42253 G2 150*V1/I1 Setting 0.5*V1/I1 350*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2 *
Lens Angle 06 Courier Number (Angle) 42254 G2 120 Setting 90 150 1 2 *
PSlip Timer T1 07 Courier Number (Time) 42255 G2 0.015 Setting 0 1 0.005 2 *
PSlip Timer T2 08 Courier Number (Time) 42256 G2 0.015 Setting 0 1 0.005 2 *
Blinder Angle 09 Courier Number (Angle) 42257 G2 75 Setting 20 90 1 2 *
PSlip Zc 0A Courier Number (Impedance) 42258 G2 50*V1/I1 Setting 0.5*V1/I1 350*V1/I1 0.5*V1/I1 2 *
Zone1 Slip Count 0B Unsigned Integer 42259 G1 1 Setting 1 20 1 2 *
Zone2 Slip Count 0C Unsigned Integer 42260 G1 2 Setting 1 20 1 2 *
PSlip Reset Time 0D Courier Number (Time) 42261 G2 30 Setting 0 100 0.01 2 *
GROUP 1
4A 00 * * *
INPUT LABELS
Opto Input 1 01 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42300 42307 G3 L1 Setting Group Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 2 02 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42308 42315 G3 L2 Setting Group Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 3 03 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42316 42323 G3 L3 Block IN>3&4 Setting 32 163 1 2 *
L3 Block IN>2 * *
Opto Input 4 04 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42324 42331 G3 L4 Block I>3&4 Setting 32 163 1 2 *
L4 Block I>2 * *
Opto Input 5 05 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42332 42339 G3 L5 Reset Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 6 06 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42340 42347 G3 L6 Ext Prot Trip Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 36/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
Opto Input 7 07 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42348 42355 G3 L7 52a Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 8 08 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42356 42363 G3 L8 52b Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 9 09 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42364 42371 G3 L9 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 10 0A ASCII Text (16 chars) 42372 42379 G3 L10 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 11 0B ASCII Text (16 chars) 42380 42387 G3 L11 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 12 0C ASCII Text (16 chars) 42388 42395 G3 L12 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 13 0D ASCII Text (16 chars) 42396 42403 G3 L13 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 14 0E ASCII Text (16 chars) 42404 42411 G3 L14 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 15 0F ASCII Text (16 chars) 42412 42419 G3 L15 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 16 10 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42420 42427 G3 L16 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 17 11 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42428 42435 G3 L17 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 18 12 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42436 42443 G3 L18 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 19 13 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42444 42451 G3 L19 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 20 14 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42452 42459 G3 L20 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 21 15 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42460 42467 G3 L21 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 22 16 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42468 42475 G3 L22 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 23 17 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42476 42483 G3 L23 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 24 18 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42484 42491 G3 L24 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Opto Input 25 19 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42492 42499 G3 L25 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 26 1A ASCII Text (16 chars) 42500 42507 G3 L26 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 27 1B ASCII Text (16 chars) 42508 42515 G3 L27 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 28 1C ASCII Text (16 chars) 42516 42523 G3 L28 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 29 1D ASCII Text (16 chars) 42524 42531 G3 L29 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 30 1E ASCII Text (16 chars) 42532 42539 G3 L30 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 31 1F ASCII Text (16 chars) 42540 42547 G3 L31 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Opto Input 32 20 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42548 42555 G3 L32 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
GROUP 1
4B 00 * * *
OUTPUT LABELS
Relay 1 01 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42556 42563 G3 R1 IN>1 Start Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
R1 Trip CB
Relay 2 02 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42564 42571 G3 R2 I>1 Start Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
R2 Trip PrimeMov
Relay 3 03 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42572 42579 G3 R3 Any Trip Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 4 04 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42580 42587 G3 R4 General Alarm Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 5 05 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42588 42595 G3 R5 CB Fail Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 6 06 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42596 42603 G3 R6 Control Close Setting 32 163 1 2 *
R6 E/F Trip * *
Relay 7 07 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42604 42611 G3 R7 Control Trip Setting 32 163 1 2 *
R7 V or F Trip *
R7 Volt Trip *
Relay 8 08 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42612 42619 G3 R8 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
R8 Freq Trip *
Relay 9 09 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42620 42627 G3 R9 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
R9 Diff Trip *
Relay 10 0A ASCII Text (16 chars) 42628 42635 G3 R10 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
R10 SysBack Trip *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 37/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
Relay 11 0B ASCII Text (16 chars) 42636 42643 G3 R11 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
R11 NPS Trip *
Relay 12 0C ASCII Text (16 chars) 42644 42651 G3 R12 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
R12 Ffail Trip *
Relay 13 0D ASCII Text (16 chars) 42652 42659 G3 R13 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
R13 Power Trip *
Relay 14 0E ASCII Text (16 chars) 42660 42667 G3 R14 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
R14 V/Hz Trip *
Relay 15 0F ASCII Text (16 chars) 42668 42675 G3 R15 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 16 10 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42676 42683 G3 R16 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 17 11 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42684 42691 G3 R17 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 18 12 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42692 42699 G3 R18 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 19 13 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42700 42707 G3 R19 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 20 14 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42708 42715 G3 R20 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 21 15 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42716 42723 G3 R21 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 22 16 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42724 42731 G3 R22 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 23 17 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42732 42739 G3 R23 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 24 18 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42740 42747 G3 R24 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
Relay 25 19 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42748 42755 G3 R25 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Relay 26 1A ASCII Text (16 chars) 42756 42763 G3 R26 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Relay 27 1B ASCII Text (16 chars) 42764 42771 G3 R27 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Relay 28 1C ASCII Text (16 chars) 42772 42779 G3 R28 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Relay 29 1D ASCII Text (16 chars) 42780 42787 G3 R29 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Relay 30 1E ASCII Text (16 chars) 42788 42795 G3 R30 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Relay 31 1F ASCII Text (16 chars) 42796 42803 G3 R31 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
Relay 32 20 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42804 42811 G3 R32 Not Used Setting 32 163 1 2 *
GROUP 1
4C 00 * *
RTD LABELS
RTD 1 01 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42812 42819 G3 RTD 1 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
RTD 2 02 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42820 42827 G3 RTD 2 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
RTD 3 03 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42828 42835 G3 RTD 3 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
RTD 4 04 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42836 42843 G3 RTD 4 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
RTD 5 05 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42844 42851 G3 RTD 5 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
RTD 6 06 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42852 42859 G3 RTD 6 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
RTD 7 07 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42860 42867 G3 RTD 7 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
RTD 8 08 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42868 42875 G3 RTD 8 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
RTD 9 09 ASCII Text (16 chars) 42876 42883 G3 RTD 9 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
RTD 10 0A ASCII Text (16 chars) 42884 42891 G3 RTD 10 Setting 32 163 1 2 * *
GROUP 1
4D 00 * * *
CLIO PROTECTION
CLIO Input 1 02 Indexed String G37 42895 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI1 Input Type 04 Indexed String G153 42896 G153 4-20mA Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
CLI1 Input Label 06 ASCII Text (16 chars) 41900 41907 G3 CLIO Input 1 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
CLI1 Minimum 08 Courier Number (Decimal) 42897 42898 G35 0 Setting -9999 9999 0.1 2 * * *
CLI1 Maximum 0A Courier Number (Decimal) 42899 42900 G35 100 Setting -9999 9999 0.1 2 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 38/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
CLI1 Alarm 0C Indexed String G37 42901 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI1 Alarm Fn 0E Indexed String G154 42902 G154 Over Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI1 Alarm Set 10 Courier Number (Decimal) 42903 42904 G35 50 Setting MIN(CLI1 MAX(CLI1 0.1 2 * * *
Min, Max) Min, Max)
CLI1 Alarm Delay 12 Courier Number (Time) 42905 G2 1 Setting 0 100 0.1 2 * * *
CLI1 Trip 14 Indexed String G37 42906 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI1 Trip Fn 16 Indexed String G154 42907 G154 Over Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI1 Trip Set 18 Courier Number (Decimal) 42908 42909 G35 60 Setting MIN(CLI1 MAX(CLI1 0.1 2 * * *
Min, Max) Min, Max)
CLI1 Trip Delay 1A Courier Number (Time) 42910 G2 0 Setting 0 100 0.1 2 * * *
CLI1 I< Alarm 1C Indexed String G37 42911 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Visible only when 4D04 = 4-20mA
CLI1 I< Alm Set 1E Courier Number (Current) 42912 G2 0.0035 Setting 0 0.004 0.0001 2 * * * Visible only when 4D04 = 4-20mA
CLIO Input 2 22 Indexed String G37 42913 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI2 Input Type 24 Indexed String G153 42914 G153 4-20mA Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
CLI2 Input Label 26 ASCII Text (16 chars) 41908 41915 G3 CLIO Input 2 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
CLI2 Minimum 28 Courier Number (Decimal) 42915 42916 G35 0 Setting -9999 9999 0.1 2 * * *
CLI2 Maximum 2A Courier Number (Decimal) 42917 42918 G35 100 Setting -9999 9999 0.1 2 * * *
CLI2 Alarm 2C Indexed String G37 42919 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI2 Alarm Fn 2E Indexed String G154 42920 G154 Over Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI2 Alarm Set 30 Courier Number (Decimal) 42921 42922 G35 50 Setting MIN(CLI2 MAX(CLI2 0.1 2 * * *
Min, Max) Min, Max)
CLI2 Alarm Delay 32 Courier Number (Time) 42923 G2 1s Setting 0 100 0.1 2 * * *
CLI2 Trip 34 Indexed String G37 42924 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI2 Trip Fn 36 Indexed String G154 42925 G154 Over Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI2 Trip Set 38 Courier Number (Decimal) 42926 42927 G35 60 Setting MIN(CLI2 MAX(CLI2 0.1 2 * * *
Min, Max) Min, Max)
CLI2 Trip Delay 3A Courier Number (Time) 42928 G2 0s Setting 0 100 0.1 2 * * *
CLI2 I< Alarm 3C Indexed String G37 42929 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Visible only when 4D24=4-20mA
CLI2 I< Alm Set 3E Courier Number (Current) 42930 G2 0.0035 Setting 0 0.004 0.0001 2 * * * Visible only when 4D24=4-20mA
CLIO Input 3 42 Indexed String G37 42931 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI3 Input Type 44 Indexed String G153 42932 G153 4-20mA Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
CLI3 Input Label 46 ASCII Text (16 chars) 41916 41923 G3 CLIO Input 3 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
CLI3 Minimum 48 Courier Number (Decimal) 42933 42934 G35 0 Setting -9999 9999 0.1 2 * * *
CLI3 Maximum 4A Courier Number (Decimal) 42935 42936 G35 100 Setting -9999 9999 0.1 2 * * *
CLI3 Alarm 4C Indexed String G37 42937 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI3 Alarm Fn 4E Indexed String G154 42938 G154 Over Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI3 Alarm Set 50 Courier Number (Decimal) 42939 42940 G35 50 Setting MIN(CLI3 MAX(CLI3 0.1 2 * * *
Min, Max) Min, Max)
CLI3 Alarm Delay 52 Courier Number (Time) 42941 G2 1s Setting 0 100 0.1 2 * * *
CLI3 Trip 54 Indexed String G37 42942 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI3 Trip Fn 56 Indexed String G154 42943 G154 Over Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI3 Trip Set 58 Courier Number (Decimal) 42944 42945 G35 60 Setting MIN(CLI3 MAX(CLI3 0.1 2 * * *
Min, Max) Min, Max)
CLI3 Trip Delay 5A Courier Number (Time) 42946 G2 0s Setting 0 100 0.1 2 * * *
CLI3 I< Alarm 5C Indexed String G37 42947 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Visible only when 4D44=4-20mA
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 39/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
CLI3 I< Alm Set 5E Courier Number (Current) 42948 G2 0.0035 Setting 0 0.004 0.0001 2 * * * Visible only when 4D44=4-20mA
CLIO Input 4 62 Indexed String G37 42949 G37 Enabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI4 Input Type 64 Indexed String G153 42950 G153 4-20mA Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
CLI4 Input Label 66 ASCII Text (16 chars) 41924 41931 G3 CLIO Input 4 Setting 32 163 1 2 * * *
CLI4 Minimum 68 Courier Number (Decimal) 42951 42952 G35 0 Setting -9999 9999 0.1 2 * * *
CLI4 Maximum 6A Courier Number (Decimal) 42953 42954 G35 100 Setting -9999 9999 0.1 2 * * *
CLI4 Alarm 6C Indexed String G37 42955 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI4 Alarm Fn 6E Indexed String G154 42956 G154 Over Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI4 Alarm Set 70 Courier Number (Decimal) 42957 42958 G35 50 Setting MIN(CLI4 MAX(CLI4 0.1 2 * * *
Min, Max) Min, Max)
CLI4 Alarm Delay 72 Courier Number (Time) 42959 G2 1s Setting 0 100 0.1 2 * * *
CLI4 Trip 74 Indexed String G37 42960 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI4 Trip Fn 76 Indexed String G154 42961 G154 Over Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLI4 Trip Set 78 Courier Number (Decimal) 42962 42963 G35 60 Setting MIN(CLI4 MAX(CLI4 0.1 2 * * *
Min, Max) Min, Max)
CLI4 Trip Delay 7A Courier Number (Time) 42964 G2 0s Setting 0 100 0.1 2 * * *
CLI4 I< Alarm 7C Indexed String G37 42965 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * Visible only when 4D64=4-20mA
CLI4 I< Alm Set 7E Courier Number (Current) 42966 G2 0.0035 Setting 0 0.004 0.0004 2 * * * Visible only when 4D64=4-20mA
CLIO Output 1 A0 Indexed String G37 42967 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLO1 Output Type A2 Indexed String G153 42968 G153 4-20mA Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
CLO1 Set Values A4 Indexed String G54 42969 G54 Primary Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLO1 Parameter A6 Indexed String G155 42970 G155 IA Magnitude Setting 0 See 1 2 * * *
G155
CLO1 Minimum A8 Courier Number 42971 42972 G35 See G155 table Setting See G155 Meas. Range Table 2 * * *
CLO1 Maximum AA Courier Number 42973 42974 G35 See G155 table Setting See G155 Meas. Range Table 2 * * *
CLIO Output 2 B0 Indexed String G37 42975 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLO2 Output Type B2 Indexed String G153 42976 G153 4-20mA Setting 0 2 1 2 * * *
CLO2 Set Values B4 Indexed String G54 42977 G54 Primary Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLO2 Parameter B6 Indexed String G155 42978 G155 IB Magnitude Setting 0 See 1 2 * * *
G155
CLO2 Minimum B8 Courier Number 42979 42980 G35 See G155 table Setting See G155 Meas. Range Table 2 * * *
CLO2 Maximum BA Courier Number 42981 42982 G35 See G155 table Setting See G155 Meas. Range Table 2 * * *
CLIO Output 3 C0 Indexed String G37 42983 G37 Disabled Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
CLO3 Output Type C2 Indexed String G153 42984 G153 4-20mA Setting 0 2 * * *
CLO3 Set Values C4 Indexed String G54 42985 G54 Primary Setting 0 2 * * *
CLO3 Parameter C6 Indexed String G155 42986 G155 IC Magnitude Setting 0 See 1 2 * * *
G155
CLO3 Minimum C8 Courier Number 42987 42988 G35 See G155 Table Setting See G155 Meas. Range Table 2 * * *
CLO3 Maximum CA Courier Number 42989 42990 G35 See G155 Table Setting See G155 Meas. Range Table 2 * * *
CLIO Output 4 D0 Indexed String G37 42991 G37 Disabled Setting 0 2 * * *
CLO4 Output Type D2 Indexed String G153 42992 G153 4-20mA Setting 0 2 * * *
CLO4 Set Values D4 Indexed String G54 42993 G54 Primary Setting 0 2 * * *
CLO4 Parameter D6 Indexed String G155 42994 G155 IN Measured Mag Setting 0 See 1 2 * *
IN Derived Mag G155 *
CLO4 Minimum D8 Courier Number 42995 42996 G35 See G155 Table Setting See G155 Meas. Range Table 2 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 40/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
CLO4 Maximum DA Courier Number 42997 42998 G35 See G155 Table Setting See G155 Meas. Range Table 2 * * *
GROUP 2 PROTECTION SETTINGS * * *
Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows 50 00 43000 44999 * * *
GROUP 3 PROTECTION SETTINGS * * *
Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows 70 00 45000 46999 * * *
GROUP 4 PROTECTION SETTINGS * * *
Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows 90 00 47000 48999 * * *
(No Header) N/A B0 00 Auto extraction Event Record Column * * *
Select Record 01 Unsigned Integer(2) Setting 0 65535 1 * * * Unique cyclical fault number(from event)
Faulted Phase 02 Binary Flag (8 bits) Indexed String G16 Data * * * Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
1 bit per elementLSB
Start Elements1 03 Binary Flag (32 Bits)Indexed String 0..31 G84 Data * * * Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
String..MSB String
1 bit per elementLSB
Start Elements2 04 Binary Flag (32 Bits)Indexed String 0..31 G107 Data * * *
String..MSB String
1 bit per elementLSB
Trip Elements1 05 Binary Flag (32 Bits)Indexed String 0..31 G85 Data * * * Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
String..MSB String
1 bit per elementLSB
Trip Elements2 06 Binary Flag (32 Bits)Indexed String 0..31 G86 Data * * * Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
String..MSB String
1 bit per elementLSB
Fault Alarms 07 Binary Flag (32 Bits)Indexed String 0..31 G87 Data * * * Product Specific Bit Flags Targetting
String..MSB String
Fault Time 08 IEC870 Time & Date Data * * *
Active Group 09 Unsigned Integer Data * * *
System Frequency 0A Courier Number (frequency) Data * * *
Fault Duration 0B Courier Number (time) Data * * *
CB Operate Time 0C Courier Number (time) Data * * *
Relay Trip Time 0D Courier Number (time) Data * * *
IA 0E Courier Number (current) Data * *
IA-1 0E Courier Number (current) Data *
IB 0F Courier Number (current) Data * *
IB-1 0F Courier Number (current) Data *
IC 10 Courier Number (current) Data * *
IC-1 10 Courier Number (current) Data *
VAB 11 Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *
VBC 12 Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *
VCA 13 Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *
VAN 14 Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *
VBN 15 Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *
VCN 16 Courier Number (voltage) Data * * *
IA-2 17 Courier Number (current) Data *
IB-2 18 Courier Number (current) Data *
IC-2 19 Courier Number (current) Data *
IA Differential 1A Courier Number (Current) Data *
IB Differential 1B Courier Number (Current) Data *
IC Differential 1C Courier Number (Current) Data *
VN Measured 1D Courier Number (Voltage) Data * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 41/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
VN Derived 1E Courier Number (Voltage) Data * * *
IN Measured 1F Courier Number (Voltage) Data * *
IN Derived 1F Courier Number (Current) Data *
I Sensitive 20 Courier Number (Current) Data * * *
IREF Diff 21 Courier Number (Current) Data * *
IREF Bias 22 Courier Number (Current) Data * *
I2 23 Courier Number (Current) Data * *
3 Phase Watts 24 Courier Number (Watts) Data * * *
3 Phase VARs 25 Courier Number (VARs) Data * * *
3 Phase Power Factor 26 Courier Number (No unit) Data * * *
RTD 1 27 Courier Number (Temperature) Data * * Courier Text = RTD label setting
RTD 2 28 Courier Number (Temperature) Data * * Courier Text = RTD label setting
RTD 3 29 Courier Number (Temperature) Data * * Courier Text = RTD label setting
RTD 4 2A Courier Number (Temperature) Data * * Courier Text = RTD label setting
RTD 5 2B Courier Number (Temperature) Data * * Courier Text = RTD label setting
RTD 6 2C Courier Number (Temperature) Data * * Courier Text = RTD label setting
RTD 7 2D Courier Number (Temperature) Data * * Courier Text = RTD label setting
RTD 8 2E Courier Number (Temperature) Data * * Courier Text = RTD label setting
RTD 9 2F Courier Number (Temperature) Data * * Courier Text = RTD label setting
RTD 10 30 Courier Number (Temperature) Data * * Courier Text = RTD label setting
df/dt 31 Courier Number (Hz/s) Data *
V Vector Shift 32 Courier Number (Angle) Data *
CLIO Input 1 33 Courier Number (Decimal) Data * * * Courier Text = CLIO label setting
CLIO Input 2 34 Courier Number (Decimal) Data * * * Courier Text = CLIO label setting
CLIO Input 3 35 Courier Number (Decimal) Data * * * Courier Text = CLIO label setting
CLIO Input 4 36 Courier Number (Decimal) Data * * * Courier Text = CLIO label setting
No Header N/A B1 00 * * *
Select Record 01 UINT16 Setting 0 65535 1 * * *
Time and Date 02 IEC Date and Time Data * * *
Record Text 03 ASCII Text Data * * * Text Description of Error
Error No1 04 UINT32 Data * * * Error Code
Error No2 05 UINT32 Data * * * Error Code
DATA TRANSFER N/A B2 00
Domain 04 Indexed String G57 PSL Settings Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
Sub-Domain 08 Indexed String G90 Group 1 Setting 0 3 1 2 * * *
Version 0C Unsigned Integer (2 Bytes) 256 Setting 0 65535 1 2 * * *
Start 10 Not Used * * *
Length 14 Not Used * * *
Data Transfer Reference 18 * * *
Transfer Mode 1C Unsigned Integer Indexed Strings G76 6 Setting 0 7 1 2 * * *
Data Transfer 20 Repeated groups of Unsigned Integers Setting * * * Only settable if Domain = PSL Settings
RECORDER CONTROL N/A B3 00 * * *
UNUSED 01 * * *
Recorder Source 02 Indexed String Samples Data * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 42/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
Reserved for future use 03-1F * * *
RECORDER EXTRACTION
N/A B4 00 * * *
COLUMN
Select Record 01 Unsigned Integer 0 Setting -199 199 1 0 * * *
Trigger Time 02 IEC870 Time & Date Data * * *
Active Channels 03 Binary Flag Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Channel Types 04 Binary Flag Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Channel Offsets 05 Courier Number (decimal) Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Channel Scaling 06 Courier Number (decimal) Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Channel SkewVal 07 Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Channel MinVal 08 Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Channel MaxVal 09 Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Format 0A Unsigned Integer Data * * * 0 = uncompressed, 1 = compressed
Upload 0B Unsigned Integer Data * * * Unused when Build=IEC60870-5-103
UNUSED 0C-0F
No. Of Samples 10 Unsigned Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Trig Position 11 Unsigned Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Time Base 12 Courier Number (time) Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
UNUSED 13
Sample Timer 14 Unsigned Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
UNUSED 15-1F
Dist. Channel 1 20 Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Dist. Channel 2 21 Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Dist. Channel 3 22 Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Dist. Channel 4 23 Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Dist. Channel 5 24 Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Dist. Channel 6 25 Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Dist. Channel 7 26 Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Dist. Channel 8 27 Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Dist. Channel 9 28 Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Dist. Channel 10 29 Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Dist. Channel 11 2A Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Dist. Channel 12 2B Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Dist. Channel 13 2C Integer Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
UNUSED 2D-3D
Dist. Channel 31 3E Binary Flag Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
Dist. Channel 32 3F Binary Flag Data * * * Build=IEC60870-5-103
30800 G1 Data Number of Disturbance Records (0 to 200)

30801 G1 Data Oldest Stored Disturbance Record (1 to 65535)

30802 G1 Data Number of Registers in Current Page


30803 30929 G1 Data Disturbance Record Page (0 to 65535)
40250 G1 Setting 1 65535 1 2 Select Disturbance Record
30930 30933 G12 Data Timestamp of selected record
Calibration Coefficients N/A B5 * * *
Cal Soft Version 01 ASCII text 16 chars * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 43/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
Cal Date and Time 02 IEC Date and time * * *
Channel Types 03 Repeated Group 16 * Binary Flag 8 bits * * *
Cal Coeffs 04 Block transfer Repeated Group of UINT32 (4 coeffs voltage channel, 8 coeffs current channel) * * *
Comms Diagnostics N/A B6 00 Note: No text in column text * * *
Bus Comms Err Count Front 01 UINT32 * * *
Bus Message Count Front 02 UINT32 * * *
Protocol Err Count Front 03 UINT32 * * *
Slave Message Count Front 04 UNIT32
Reset front count 05 (Reset Menu Cell cmd only) * * *
Bus Comms Err Count Rear 06 UINT32 * * *
Protocol Err Count Rear 07 UINT32 * * *
Slave Message Count Rear 08 UINT32
Busy Count Rear 09 UINT32 * * *
Reset Rear Count 0A (Reset Menu Cell cmd only) * * *
PSL DATA B7 00
Grp 1 PSL Ref 01 ASCII Text (32 Chars) 31000 31015 G3 Data * * *
Date/Time 02 IEC 870 Date & Time 31016 31019 G12 Data * * *
Grp 1 PSL ID 03 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) 31020 31021 G27 Data * * *
Grp 2 PSL Ref 11 ASCII Text (32 Chars) 31022 31037 G3 Data * * *
Date/Time 12 IEC 870 Date & Time 31038 31041 G12 Data * * *
Grp 2 PSL ID 13 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) 31042 31043 G27 Data * * *
Grp 3 PSL Ref 21 ASCII Text (32 Chars) 31044 31059 G3 Data * * *
Date/Time 22 IEC 870 Date & Time 31060 31063 G12 Data * * *
Grp 3 PSL ID 23 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) 31064 31065 G27 Data * * *
Grp 4 PSL Ref 31 ASCII Text (32 Chars) 31066 31079 G3 Data * * *
Date/Time 32 IEC 870 Date & Time 31082 31085 G12 Data * * *
Grp 4 PSL ID 33 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) 31086 31087 G27 Data * * *
COMMS SYS DATA N/A BF 00 * * *
Dist Record Cntrl Ref 01 Menu Cell(2) B300 Data * * *
Dist Record Extract Ref 02 Menu Cell(2) B400 Data * * *
Setting Transfer 03 Unsigned Integer Setting * * *
Reset Demand 04 None (Reset Menu Cell) Data(but supports Reset Menu cell) * * *
UNUSED 05 * * *
Block Xfer Ref 06 Menu Cell(2) B200 Data * * *
DIAGNOSTICS E0 00 * * *
Enable Column 01 Indexed String G11 0 (No) Setting 0 1 1 2 * * * CPU Load Measurements
CPU Load-Instant 11 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Data * * *
CPU Load-Average 12 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Data * * *
CPU Load-Min 13 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Data * * *
CPU Load-Max 14 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Data * * *
CPU Load Reset 1F Indexed String G11 0 (No) Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
DDB to set: 21 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Setting 0 1022 1 2 * * * Manual DDB Control for tests
DDB to reset: 22 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Setting 0 1022 1 2 * * *
DDB to pulse: 23 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Setting 0 1022 1 2 * * * Label unfitted IO
Name Unfitted IO 26 Indexed String G11 0 (No) Setting 0 1 1 2 * * *
UINT32 - 1 31 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Setting 0 2^32-1 1 2 * * * Debug variables - default: Not used
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 44/170

Courier Modbus Address Modbus Password Model


Menu Text UI Data Type Strings
Datagroup
Default Setting Cell Type Min Max Step Level
Comment
Col Row Start End P341 P342 P343
UINT32 - 2 32 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Setting 0 2^32-1 1 2 * * *
UINT32 - 3 33 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Setting 0 2^32-1 1 2 * * *
UINT32 - 4 34 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Setting 0 2^32-1 1 2 * * *
UINT32 - 5 35 Unsigned Integer (32 bits) Setting 0 2^32-1 1 2 * * *
INT32 -1 41 Signed Integer (32 bits) Data * * *
INT32 -2 42 Signed Integer (32 bits) Data * * *
INT32 -3 43 Signed Integer (32 bits) Data * * *
INT32 -4 44 Signed Integer (32 bits) Data * * *
INT32 -5 45 Signed Integer (32 bits) Data * * *
BIN32 -1 51 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
BIN32 -2 52 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
BIN32 -3 53 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
BIN32 -4 54 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
BIN32 -5 55 Binary Flag (32 bits) Data * * *
FLT32 -1 61 Courier Number (meters) Data * * *
FLT32 -2 62 Courier Number (meters) Data * * *
FLT32 -3 63 Courier Number (meters) Data * * *
FLT32 -4 64 Courier Number (meters) Data * * *
FLT32 -5 65 Courier Number (meters) Data * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 45/170

Data Types

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

G1 1 Register UNSIGNED INTEGER (16 Bits) * * *


G2 1 Register NUMERIC SETTING (Unsigned 16 bit) * * *

Used for floating point settings. The setting value is represented as the number of step
increments from the minimum value (see also G35)

i.e. Setting value = (setting minimum) + ((register value) x (setting step size))
G3 1 Register ASCII TEXT CHARACTERS (2 characters per register) * * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0xFF00 First character in high order 8 bits
0x00FF Second character in low order 8 bits
G4 2 Registers PLANT STATUS (32 Bits)
Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G27
0x00000001 CB1 Open (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000002 CB1 Closed (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000004 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000008 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000010 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000020 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000040 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000080 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000100 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000200 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000400 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00000800 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00001000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00002000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00004000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00008000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00010000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00020000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00040000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00080000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00100000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00200000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00400000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x00800000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x01000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x02000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x04000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x08000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x10000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x20000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x40000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
0x80000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On)
G5 2 Registers CONTROL STATUS (32 Bits)
Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G27
0x00000001 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000002 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000004 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 46/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

0x00000008 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *


0x00000010 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000020 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000040 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000080 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000100 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000200 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000400 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00000800 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00001000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00002000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00004000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00008000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00010000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00020000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00040000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00080000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00100000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00200000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00400000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x00800000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x01000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x02000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x04000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x08000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x10000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x20000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x40000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
0x80000000 Not Used (0 = Off, 1 = On) * * *
G6 1 Register RECORD CONTROL COMMAND REGISTER * * *
Value
0 No operation
1 Clear Event records
2 Clear Fault Record
3 Clear Maintenance Records
4 Reset Indications
G7 1 Register VTS INDICATE/BLOCK * * *
Value
0 Blocking
1 Indication
G8 2 Registers LOGIC INPUT STATUS (32 Bits)
Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G27
0x00000001 Opto 1 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00000002 Opto 2 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00000004 Opto 3 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00000008 Opto 4 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00000010 Opto 5 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00000020 Opto 6 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00000040 Opto 7 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00000080 Opto 8 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 47/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

0x00000100 Opto 9 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *


0x00000200 Opto 10 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00000400 Opto 11 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00000800 Opto 12 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00001000 Opto 13 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00002000 Opto 14 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00004000 Opto 15 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00008000 Opto 16 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00010000 Opto 17 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00020000 Opto 18 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00040000 Opto 19 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00080000 Opto 20 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00100000 Opto 21 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00200000 Opto 22 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00400000 Opto 23 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x00800000 Opto 24 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) * * *
0x01000000 Opto 25 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) *
0x02000000 Opto 26 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) *
0x04000000 Opto 27 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) *
0x08000000 Opto 28 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) *
0x10000000 Opto 29 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) *
0x20000000 Opto 30 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) *
0x40000000 Opto 31 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) *
0x80000000 Opto 32 Input State (0=Off, 1=Energised) *
G9 2 Registers RELAY OUTPUT STATUS (32 Bits)
Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G27
0x00000001 Relay 1 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00000002 Relay 2 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00000004 Relay 3 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00000008 Relay 4 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00000010 Relay 5 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00000020 Relay 6 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00000040 Relay 7 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00000080 Relay 8 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00000100 Relay 9 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00000200 Relay 10 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00000400 Relay 11 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00000800 Relay 12 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00001000 Relay 13 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00002000 Relay 14 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00004000 Relay 15 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00008000 Relay 16 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00010000 Relay 17 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00020000 Relay 18 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00040000 Relay 19 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00080000 Relay 20 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00100000 Relay 21 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00200000 Relay 22 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00400000 Relay 23 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
0x00800000 Relay 24 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 48/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

0x01000000 Relay 25 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) *


0x02000000 Relay 26 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) *
0x04000000 Relay 27 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) *
0x08000000 Relay 28 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) *
0x10000000 Relay 29 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) *
0x20000000 Relay 30 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) *
0x40000000 Relay 31 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) *
0x80000000 Relay 32 (0=Not Operated, 1=Operated) *
G10 1 Register SIGNED FIXED POINT NUMBER WITH 1 DECIMAL PLACE (16 Bits) * * *
i.e. divide register value by 10 to obtain actual value.
G11 1 Register YES/NO * * *
Value
0 No
1 Yes
G12 4 Registers TIME AND DATE * * *

IEC60870-5-4 "Binary Time 2a" format - see Section 3.8 of SCADA Communications
Bit Mask (hex)
(P34x/EN CT) of Technical Guide

0xFFFF First Register - Milli-seconds


0x9FBF Second Register - Summertime and hours / Validity and minutes
0x0FFF Third register - Month of year / Day of month / Day of week
0x007F Fourth register - Years
G13 1 Register EVENT RECORD TYPE * * *
Value
0 Latched alarm active
1 Latched alarm inactive
2 Self reset alarm active
3 Self reset alarm inactive
4 Relay event
5 Opto event
6 Protection event
7 Platform event
8 Fault logged event
9 Maintenance record logged event
G14 1 Register I> FUNCTION LINK
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 I>1 VTS Block *
0x0002 I>2 VTS Block *
0x0004 I>3 VTS Block *
0x0008 I>4 VTS Block *
0x0010 I>3 Block A/R
0x0020 I>4 Block A/R
0x0040 Not Used
0x0080 Not Used
G15 1 Register DISTURBANCE RECORD INDEX STATUS * * *
Value
0 No Record
1 Unextracted
2 Extracted
G16 1 Register FAULTED PHASE * * *
Bit Mask (hex)
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 49/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

0x0001 Start A
0x0002 Start B
0x0004 Start C
0x0008 Start N
0x0010 Trip A
0x0020 Trip B
0x0040 Trip C
0x0080 Trip N
G17 1 Register IRIG-B STATUS * * *
Value
0 Card not fitted
1 Card failed
2 Signal healthy
3 No signal
G18 1 Register RECORD SELECTION COMMAND REGISTER (MODBUS) * * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0000 No Operation
0x0001 Select next event
0x0002 Accept Event
0x0004 Select next Disturbance Record
0x0008 Accept disturbance record
0x0010 Select Next Disturbance record page
G19 1 Register LANGUAGE * * *
Value
0 English
1 Francais
2 Deutsch
3 Espanol
G20 2 Registers PASSWORD (4 Characters packed into 32 Bits) * * *
Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G3
0xFF00 First register, first password character
0x00FF First register, second password character
0xFF00 Second register, third password character
0x00FF Second register, fourth password character

NOTE THAT WHEN REGISTERS OF THIS TYPE ARE READ THE SLAVE WILL ALWAYS
INDICATE AN "*" IN EACH CHARACTER POSITION TO PRESERVE THE PASSWORD
SECURITY.

G21 1 Register IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE * * *


Value
0 EIA(RS)485
1 Fibre Optic
G22 1 Register PASSWORD CONTROL ACCESS LEVEL * * *
Value
0 Level 0 - Passwords required for levels 1 & 2
1 Level 1 - Password required for level 2
2 Level 2 - No passwords required
G23 1 Register VOLTAGE AND V/Hz CURVE SELECTION * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 DT
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 50/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

2 IDMT
G24 2 Registers UNSIGNED FIXED POINT NUMBER WITH 3 DECIMAL PLACES (32 Bits) * * *
Data formatted as per data type G27
i.e. divide 'G27' value by 1000 to obtain actual value
Current 0 - 4,000,000A Resolution 1mA
Voltage 0 - 4MV Resolution 1mV
G25 1 Register UNSIGNED FIXED POINT NUMBER WITH 3 DECIMAL PLACES (16 Bits) * * *
i.e. divide register value by 1000 to obtain actual value
Time Interval 0.000 - 655.000s Resolution 1ms
Frequency 0.000 - 655.000Hz Resolution 0.001Hz
G26 1 Register MODBUS RELAY STATUS REGISTER * * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 In Service Status (1= In service, 0= Out of service)
0x0002 Minor self test failure (=1, 0 otherwise)
0x0004 New auto-extraction event available (=1, 0 otherwise)

Time Synchronised (=1 after Modbus time synch. Resets to 0 after 5 minutes unless re-time
0x0008
synch'd. Other time synch sources do not affect this bit.)

0x0010 New auto-extraction disturbance record available (=1, 0 otherwise)


0x0020 Fault (not used, always zero)
0x0040 Trip LED status (1=LED On, 0 = LED Off)
0x0080 Alarm status summary (logical OR of all alarm status bits)
0x0100 Unused
0x0200 Unused
0x0400 Unused
0x0800 Unused
0x1000 Unused
0x2000 Unused
0x4000 Unused
0x8000 Unused
G27 2 Registers UNSIGNED LONG (32 Bit) VALUE * * *
High order word stored in 1st register
Low order word stored in 2nd register
G28 1 Register SIGNED INTEGER (16 Bit) * * *
G29 3 Registers INTEGER POWER/ENERGY WITH MULTIPLIER
First Register Per unit value formatted as a G28
Second & third registers Scalar, formatted as a G27

Overall value = 'G28'x'G27' see Section 3.9 of SCADA Communications


(P34x/EN CT) of Technical Guide for details

G30 1 Register SIGNED VALUE, 2 DECIMAL PLACES * * *


i.e. divide register value by 100 to obtain actual value
G31 1 Register ANALOGUE CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR (Generator specific)
Value
0 VAN * * *
1 VBN * * *
2 VCN * * *
3 VN * * *
4 IA * *
4 IA-1 *
5 IB * *
5 IB-1 *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 51/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

6 IC * *
6 IC-1 *
7 IN * *
8 IN Sensitive * * *
9 IA-2 *
10 IB-2 *
11 IC-2 *
G32 1 Register DISTURBANCE RECORD DIGITAL CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT SELECTOR * * *
Value
0 Not used (i.e. nothing recorded for the channel)
1 onwards See separate G32 DDB Table
G33 NOT USED
G34 1 Register TRIGGER MODE * * *
Value
0 Single
1 Extended
G35 2 Registers NUMERIC SETTING (Unsigned 32 Bit) * * *

Used for floating point settings. The setting value is represented as the number of step
increments from the minimum value (see also G2)

Data formatted as per data type G27


i.e. Setting value = (setting minimum) + (('G27' value) x (setting step size))
G36 1 Register REAL NUMBERS * * *
Value
0 Polar
1 Rectangular
G37 1 Register ENABLED / DISABLED * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 Enabled
G38c COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (COURIER) * * *
Value
0 9600 bits/s
1 19200 bits/s
2 38400 bits/s
G38m COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (MODBUS) * * *
Value
0 9600 bits/s
1 19200 bits/s
2 38400 bits/s
G38v COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (IEC60870-5-103) * * *
Value
0 9600 bits/s
1 19200 bits/s
G38d COMMUNICATION BAUD RATE (DNP 3.0) * * *
Value
0 1200 bits/s
1 2400 bits/s
2 4800 bits/s
3 9600 bits/s
4 19200 bits/s
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 52/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

5 38400 bits/s
G39 1 Register COMMUNICATIONS PARITY * * *
Value
0 Odd
1 Even
2 None
G40 1 Register CHECK SYNC INPUT SELECTION
Value
0 A-N
1 B-N
2 C-N
3 A-B
4 B-C
5 C-A
G41 1 Register CHECK SYNC VOLTAGE BLOCKING
Value
0 None
1 Undervoltage
2 Differential
3 Both
G42 1 Register CHECK SYNC SLIP CONTROL
Value
0 None
1 Timer
2 Frequency
3 Both
G43 1 Register IDMT CURVE TYPE * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 DT
2 IEC S Inverse
3 IEC V Inverse
4 IEC E Inverse
5 UK LT Inverse
6 IEEE M Inverse
7 IEEE V Inverse
8 IEEE E Inverse
9 US Inverse
10 US ST Inverse
G44 1 Register DIRECTION * * *
Value
0 Non-Directional
1 Directional Fwd
2 Directional Rev
G45 1 Register VTS BLOCK * * *
Value
0 Block
1 Non-Directional
G46 1 Register POLARISATION *
Value
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 53/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

0 Zero Sequence
1 Neg Sequence
G47 1 Register MEASURING MODE * * *
Value
0 Phase-Phase
1 Phase-Neutral
G48 1 Register OPERATION MODE * * *
Value
0 Any Phase
1 Three Phase
G49 1 Register VN OR IN INPUT * * *
Value
0 Measured
1 Derived
G50 1 Register RTD SELECT * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 RTD Input #1
0x0002 RTD Input #2
0x0004 RTD Input #3
0x0008 RTD Input #4
0x0010 RTD Input #5
0x0020 RTD Input #6
0x0040 RTD Input #7
0x0080 RTD Input #8
0x0100 RTD Input #9
0x0200 RTD Input #10
G51 1 Register FAULT LOCATION
Value
0 Distance
1 Ohms
2 % of Line
G52 1 Register DEFAULT DISPLAY * * *
Value
0 3Ph + N Current
1 3 Ph-neutral Voltage
2 Power
3 Date and Time
4 Description
5 Plant Reference
6 Frequency
7 Access Level
G53 1 Register SELECT FACTORY DEFAULTS * * *
Value
0 No Operation
1 All Settings
2 Setting Group 1
3 Setting Group 2
4 Setting Group 3
5 Setting Group 4
G54 1 Register SELECT PRIMARY SECONDARY MEASUREMENTS * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 54/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

Value
0 Primary
1 Secondary
G55 1 Register CIRCUIT BREAKER CONTROL *
Value
0 No Operation
1 Trip
2 Close
G56 1 Register PHASE MEASUREMENT REFERENCE * * *
Value
0 VA
1 VB
2 VC
3 IA
4 IB
5 IC
G57 1 Register DATA TRANSFER DOMAIN * * *
Value
0 PSL Settings
1 PSL Configuration
G58 1 Register SEF/REF SELECTION
Value
0 SEF * * *
1 SEF cos(PHI) * * *
2 SEF sin(PHI) * * *
3 Wattmetric * * *
4 Hi Z REF * * *
5 Lo Z REF * *
6 Lo Z REF+SEF * *
7 Lo Z REF+Wattmet * *
G59 1 Register BATTERY STATUS * * *
Value
0 Dead
1 Healthy
G60 1 Register TIME DELAY SELECTION * * *
Value
0 DT
1 Inverse
G61 1 Register ACTIVE GROUP CONTROL * * *
Value
0 Select via Menu
1 Select via Opto
G62 1 Register SAVE AS * * *
Value
0 No Operation
1 Save
2 Abort
G63 1 Register IN> FUNCTION LINK
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 IN>1 VTS Block *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 55/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

0x0002 IN>2 VTS Block *


0x0004 IN>3 VTS Block *
0x0008 IN>4 VTS Block *
0x0010 IN>3 Block A/R
0x0020 IN>4 Block A/R
0x0040 Not Used
0x0080 Not Used
G64 1 Register ISEF> FUNC LINK
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 ISEF>1 VTS Block * * *
0x0002 ISEF>2 VTS Block *
0x0004 ISEF>3 VTS Block *
0x0008 ISEF>4 VTS Block *
0x0010 ISEF>3 Block A/R
0x0020 ISEF>4 Block A/R
0x0040 Not Used
0x0080 Not Used
G65 1 Register F< FUNCTION LINK * * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 F<1 Poledead Blk
0x0002 F<2 Poledead Blk
0x0004 F<3 Poledead Blk
0x0008 F<4 Poledead Blk
0x0010 Not Used
0x0020 Not Used
0x0040 Not Used
0x0080 Not Used
G66 1 Register DISTURBANCE RECORDER DIGITAL CHANNEL TRIGGER * * *
Value
0 No Trigger
1 Trigger L/H
2 Trigger H/L
G67 1 Register THERMAL OVERLOAD * * *
Value
0 Single
1 Dual
G68 1 Register CB FAIL RESET OPTIONS * * *
Value
0 I< Only
1 CB Open & I<
2 Prot Reset & I<
G69 1 Register VTS RESET MODE * * *
Value
0 Manual
1 Auto
G70 1 Register AUTORECLOSE MODE
Value
0 Opto set
1 Auto
2 User Set
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 56/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

3 Pulse Set
G71 1 Register PROTOCOL * * *
Value
0 Courier
1 IEC870-5-103
2 Modbus
G72 1 Register START DEAD TIME
Value
0 Protection Reset
1 CB Trips
G73 1 Register RECLAIM TIME if PROTECTION START
Value
0 Suspend
1 Continue
G74 1 Register RESET LOCKOUT
Value
0 User Interface
1 Select NonAuto
G75 1 Register AUTO-RECLOSE AFTER CONTROL CLOSE
Value
0 Enabled
1 Inhibited
G76 1 Register TRANSFER MODE * * *
Value
0 Prepare Rx
1 Complete Rx
2 Prepare Tx
3 Complete Tx
4 Rx Prepared
5 Tx Prepared
6 OK
7 Error
G77 1 Register AUTO-RECLOSE
Value
0 Out of Service
1 In Service
G78 1 Register A/R TELECONTROL
Value
0 No Operation
1 Auto
2 Non-auto
G79 1 Register CUSTOM SETTINGS * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 Basic
2 Complete
G80 1 Register VISIBLE/INVISIBLE * * *
Value
0 Invisible
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 57/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

1 Visible
G81 1 Register RESET LOCKOUT BY * * *
Value
0 User Interface
1 CB Close
G82 1 Register A/R PROTECTION BLOCKING
Value
0 No Block
1 Block Inst Prot
G83 1 Register A/R STATUS
Value
0 Auto Mode
1 Non-auto Mode
2 Live Line
G84 2 Registers STARTED ELEMENTS - 1 (32 Bits)

(For fault record use only. The associated Modbus registers cannot be
accessed unless a fault record is selected)

Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G27


0x00000001 General Start * * *
0x00000002 Start Power1 * * *
0x00000004 Start Power2 * * *
0x00000008 Start FFail1 * *
0x00000010 Start FFail2 * *
0x00000020 Start V Dep O/C * *
0x00000040 Start I>1 * * *
0x00000080 Start I>2 * * *
0x00000100 Start I>3 *
0x00000200 Start I>4 *
0x00000400 Start IN>1 * * *
0x00000800 Start IN>2 * * *
0x00001000 Start IN>3 *
0x00002000 Start IN>4 *
0x00004000 Start ISEF>1 * * *
0x00008000 Start ISEF>2 *
0x00010000 Start ISEF>3 *
0x00020000 Start ISEF>4 *
0x00040000 Start NVD VN>1 * * *
0x00080000 Start NVD VN>2 * * *
0x00100000 Start 100% ST EF *
0x00200000 Start Sen Power1 * * *
0x00400000 Start Sen Power2 * * *
0x00800000 Start z PSlip Z1 *
0x01000000 Start z PSlip Z2 *
0x02000000 Start Z<1 * *
0x04000000 Start Z<2 * *
0x08000000
0x10000000
0x20000000
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 58/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

0x40000000
0x80000000
G85 2 Registers TRIPPED ELEMENTS - 1 (32 Bits)

(For fault record use only. The associated Modbus registers cannot be
accessed unless a fault record is selected)

Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G27


0x00000001 Any Trip * * *
0x00000002 Trip Gen Diff *
0x00000004 Trip Power1 * * *
0x00000008 Trip Power2 * * *
0x00000010 Trip FFail1 * *
0x00000020 Trip FFail2 * *
0x00000040 Trip NPS * *
0x00000080 Trip V Dep O/C * *
0x00000100 Trip I>1 * * *
0x00000200 Trip I>2 * * *
0x00000400 Trip I>3 *
0x00000800 Trip I>4 *
0x00001000 Trip IN>1 * * *
0x00002000 Trip IN>2 * * *
0x00004000 Trip IN>3 *
0x00008000 Trip IN>4 *
0x00010000 Trip ISEF>1 * * *
0x00020000 Trip ISEF>2 *
0x00040000 Trip ISEF>3 *
0x00080000 Trip ISEF>4 *
0x00100000 Trip IREF> * * *
0x00200000 Trip NVD VN>1 * * *
0x00400000 Trip NVD VN>2 * * *
0x00800000 Trip 100% ST EF *
0x01000000 Trip Dead Mach *
0x02000000 Trip Sen Power1 * * *
0x04000000 Trip Sen Power2 * * *
0x08000000 Trip z PSlip Z1 *
0x10000000 Trip z PSlip Z2 *
0x20000000 Trip Thermal O/L * * *
0x40000000 Trip Z<1 * *
0x80000000 Trip Z<2 * *
G86 2 Registers TRIPPED ELEMENTS - 2 (32 Bits)

(For fault record use only. The associated Modbus registers cannot be
accessed unless a fault record is selected)

Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G27


0x00000001 Trip V<1 * * *
0x00000002 Trip V<2 * * *
0x00000004 Trip V< A/AB * * *
0x00000008 Trip V< B/BC * * *
0x00000010 Trip V< C/CA * * *
0x00000020 Trip V>1 * * *
0x00000040 Trip V>2 * * *
0x00000080 Trip V> A/AB * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 59/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

0x00000100 Trip V> B/BC * * *


0x00000200 Trip V> C/CA * * *
0x00000400 Trip F<1 * * *
0x00000800 Trip F<2 * * *
0x00001000 Trip F<3 * * *
0x00002000 Trip F<4 * * *
0x00004000 Trip F>1 * * *
0x00008000 Trip F>2 * * *
0x00010000 Trip V/Hz * *
0x00010000 Trip V Shift *
0x00020000 Trip df/dt *
0x00040000 Trip RTD 1 * *
0x00080000 Trip RTD 2 * *
0x00100000 Trip RTD 3 * *
0x00200000 Trip RTD 4 * *
0x00400000 Trip RTD 5 * *
0x00800000 Trip RTD 6 * *
0x01000000 Trip RTD 7 * *
0x02000000 Trip RTD 8 * *
0x04000000 Trip RTD 9 * *
0x08000000 Trip RTD 10 * *
0x10000000 Trip CL Input 1 * * *
0x20000000 Trip CL Input 2 * * *
0x40000000 Trip CL Input 3 * * *
0x80000000 Trip CL Input 4 * * *
G87 2 Registers FAULT ALARMS (32 Bits)

(For fault record use only. The associated Modbus registers cannot be
accessed unless a fault record is selected)

Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G27


0x00000001 CB Fail 1 * * *
0x00000002 CB Fail 2 * * *
0x00000004 VTS * * *
0x00000008 CTS * * *
0x00000010 Alarm FFail * *
0x00000020 Alarm NPS * *
0x00000040 Alarm V/Hz * *
0x00000080 Alarm RTD 1 * *
0x00000100 Alarm RTD 2 * *
0x00000200 Alarm RTD 3 * *
0x00000400 Alarm RTD 4 * *
0x00000800 Alarm RTD 5 * *
0x00001000 Alarm RTD 6 * *
0x00002000 Alarm RTD 7 * *
0x00004000 Alarm RTD 8 * *
0x00008000 Alarm RTD 9 * *
0x00010000 Alarm RTD 10 * *
0x00020000 Alarm Thermal * * *
0x00040000 Alarm CL Input 1 * * *
0x00080000 Alarm CL Input 2 * * *
0x00100000 Alarm CL Input 3 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 60/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

0x00200000 Alarm CL Input 4 * * *


0x00400000
0x00800000
0x01000000
0x02000000
0x04000000
0x08000000
0x10000000
0x20000000
0x40000000
0x80000000
G88 1 Register ALARMS * * *
Value
0 Alarm Disabled
1 Alarm Enabled
G89 1 Register MAIN VT LOCATION
Value
0 Line
1 Bus
G90 1 Register GROUP SELECTION * * *
Value
0 Group 1
1 Group 2
2 Group 3
3 Group 4
G91 1 Register A/R PROTECTION BLOCKING
Value
0 Allow Tripping
1 Block Tripping
G92 1 Register LOCKOUT
Value
0 No Lockout
1 Lockout
G93 1 Register COMMISSION TEST * * *
Value
0 No Operation
1 Apply Test
2 Remove Test
G94 1 Register COMMISSION TEST * * *
Value
0 No Operation
1 Apply Test
G95 1 Register SYSTEM FN LINKS * * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 Trip led self reset (1 = enable self reset)
0x0002 Not Used
0x0004 Not Used
0x0008 Not used
0x0010 Not Used
0x0020 Not Used
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 61/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

0x0040 Not Used


0x0080 Not Used
G96 2 Registers ALARM STATUS 1 (ALARMS 1 - 32) (32 Bits)
Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G27
0x00000001 Not Used * * *
0x00000002 Not Used * * *
0x00000004 SG-opto Invalid * * *
0x00000008 Prot'n Disabled * * *
0x00000010 VT Fail Alarm * * *
0x00000020 CTS Fail Alarm * * *
0x00000040 CB Fail * * *
0x00000080 I^ Maint Alarm * * *
0x00000100 I^ Maint Lockout * * *
0x00000200 CB OPs Maint * * *
0x00000400 CB OPs Lock * * *
0x00000800 CB Time Maint * * *
0x00001000 CB Time Lockout * * *
0x00002000 Fault Freq Lock * * *
0x00004000 CB Status Alarm * * *
0x00008000 CB Trip Fail *
0x00010000 CB Close Fail *
0x00020000 Man CB Unhealthy *
0x00040000 F out of Range *
0x00040000 NPS Alarm * *
0x00080000 Thermal Alarm * * *
0x00100000 V/Hz Alarm * *
0x00200000 Field Fail Alarm * *
0x00400000 RTD Thermal Alm * *
0x00800000 RTD Open Cct * *
0x01000000 RTD short Cct * *
0x02000000 RTD Data Error * *
0x04000000 RTD Board Fail * *
0x08000000 Freq Prot Alm * * *
0x10000000 Voltage Prot Alm * * *
0x20000000 Not used
0x40000000 Not Used
0x80000000 Not Used
G97 1 Register DISTANCE UNIT
Value
0 Kilometres
1 Miles
G98 1 Register COPY TO * * *
Value
0 No Operation
1 Group 1
2 Group 2
3 Group 3
4 Group 4
G99 1 Register CB CONTROL *
Value
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 62/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

0 Disabled
1 Local
2 Remote
3 Local+Remote
4 Opto
5 Opto+local
6 Opto+Remote
7 Opto+Rem+local
G100 NOT USED
G101 1 Register GEN DIFF FUNCTION SELECT * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 Percentage Bias
2 High Impedance
3 Interturn
G102 1 Register POWER FUNCTION SELECT * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 Reverse
2 Low Forward
3 Over
G103 1 Register SYSTEM BACKUP FUNCTION SELECT * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 Underimpedance
2 Volt controlled
3 Volt restrained
G104 1 Register SYSTEM BACKUP VECTOR ROTATION * *
Value
0 None
1 Delta-Star
G105 1 Register DEFINITE TIME OVERCURRENT SELECTION * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 DT
G107 2 Registers STARTED ELEMENTS - 2 (32 Bits)

(For fault record use only. The associated Modbus registers cannot be
accessed unless a fault record is selected)

Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G27


0x00000001 Start V<1 * * *
0x00000002 Start V<2 * * *
0x00000004 Start V< A/AB * * *
0x00000008 Start V< B/BC * * *
0x00000010 Start V< C/CA * * *
0x00000020 Start V>1 * * *
0x00000040 Start V>2 * * *
0x00000080 Start V> A/AB * * *
0x00000100 Start V> B/BC * * *
0x00000200 Start V> C/CA * * *
0x00000400 Start F<1 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 63/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

0x00000800 Start F<2 * * *


0x00001000 Start F<3 * * *
0x00002000 Start F<4 * * *
0x00004000 Start F>1 * * *
0x00008000 Start F>2 * * *
0x00010000 Start V/Hz * *
0x00020000 Start df/dt *
0x00040000 Start CLI1 Alarm * * *
0x00080000 Start CLI2 Alarm * * *
0x00100000 Start CLI3 Alarm * * *
0x00200000 Start CLI4 Alarm * * *
0x00400000 Start CLI1 Trip * * *
0x00800000 Start CLI2 Trip * * *
0x01000000 Start CLI3 Trip * * *
0x02000000 Start CLI4 Trip * * *
0x04000000
0x08000000
0x10000000
0x20000000
0x40000000
0x80000000
G108 1 Register RTD OPEN CIRCUIT FLAGS * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 RTD 1 label
0x0002 RTD 2 label
0x0004 RTD 3 label
0x0008 RTD 4 label
0x0010 RTD 5 label
0x0020 RTD 6 label
0x0040 RTD 7 label
0x0080 RTD 8 label
0x0100 RTD 9 label
0x0200 RTD 10 label
G109 1 Register RTD SHORT CIRCUIT FLAGS * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 RTD 1 label
0x0002 RTD 2 label
0x0004 RTD 3 label
0x0008 RTD 4 label
0x0010 RTD 5 label
0x0020 RTD 6 label
0x0040 RTD 7 label
0x0080 RTD 8 label
0x0100 RTD 9 label
0x0200 RTD 10 label
G110 1 Register RTD DATA ERROR * *
Bit Mask (hex)
0x0001 RTD 1 label
0x0002 RTD 2 label
0x0004 RTD 3 label
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 64/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

0x0008 RTD 4 label


0x0010 RTD 5 label
0x0020 RTD 6 label
0x0040 RTD 7 label
0x0080 RTD 8 label
0x0100 RTD 9 label
0x0200 RTD 10 label
G111 1 Register SYSTEM BACKUP V DEP OC IDMT CURVE TYPE * *
Value
0 DT (DT)
1 IEC S Inverse (TMS)
2 IEC V Inverse (TMS)
3 IEC E Inverse (TMS)
4 UK LT Inverse (TMS)
5 Rectifier (TMS)
6 RI (K)
7 IEEE M Inverse (TD)
8 IEEE V Inverse (TD)
9 IEEE E Inverse (TD)
10 US Inverse (TD)
11 US ST Inverse (TD)
G112 1 Register 100% STATOR EARTH FAULT STATUS *
Value
0 Disabled
1 VN3H< Enabled
2 VN3H> Enabled
G113 1 Register POLE SLIPPING OPERATING MODE *
Value
0 Generating
1 Motoring
2 Both
G114 1 Register SEF/REF/SPOWER SELECTION * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 SEF/REF
2 Sensitive Power
G115 1 Register POWER PROTECTION OPERATING MODE * * *
Value
0 Generating
1 Motoring
G116 1 Register CB FAIL PHASE UNDERCURRENT CURRENT INPUTS * * *
Value
0 IA-1 IB-1 IC-1
1 IA-2 IB-2 IC-2
G118 1 Register CB CONTROL LOGIC INPUT ASSIGNMENTS * * *
Value
0 None
1 52A
2 52B
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 65/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

3 Both 52A and 52B


G119 1 Register TEST MODE * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 Test Mode
2 Blocked
G125 2 Registers IEEE FLOATING POINT FORMAT (Short float; 32 Bits) * * *
Bit 31 = sign
Bits 30-23 = e7 - e0
Implicit 1
Bits 22-0 = f22 - f0
(32 bit value formatted as per data type G27)
G128 2 Registers ALARM STATUS 2 (ALARMS 33 - 64) (32 Bits) * * *
Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G27
0x00000001 CL Card I/P Fail * * *
0x00000002 CL Card O/P Fail * * *
0x00000004 CL Input 1 Alarm * * *
0x00000008 CL Input 2 Alarm * * *
0x00000010 CL Input 3 Alarm * * *
0x00000020 CL Input 4 Alarm * * *
0x00000040 CLI1 I< Fail Alm * * *
0x00000080 CLI2 I< Fail Alm * * *
0x00000100 CLI3 I< Fail Alm * * *
0x00000200 CLI4 I< Fail Alm * * *
0x00000400 Not Used
0x00000800 Not Used
0x00001000 Not Used
0x00002000 Not Used
0x00004000 Not Used
0x00008000 Not Used
0x00010000 MR User Alarm 16 * * *
0x00020000 MR User Alarm 15 * * *
0x00040000 MR User Alarm 14 * * *
0x00080000 MR User Alarm 13 * * *
0x00100000 MR User Alarm 12 * * *
0x00200000 MR User Alarm 11 * * *
0x00400000 MR User Alarm 10 * * *
0x00800000 MR User Alarm 9 * * *
0x01000000 MR User Alarm 8 * * *
0x02000000 MR User Alarm 7 * * *
0x04000000 MR User Alarm 6 * * *
0x08000000 MR User Alarm 5 * * *
0x10000000 SR User Alarm 4 * * *
0x20000000 SR User Alarm 3 * * *
0x40000000 SR User Alarm 2 * * *
0x80000000 SR User Alarm 1 * * *
G150 1 Register POC IDMT CURVE TYPE * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 DT (DT)
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 66/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

2 IEC S Inverse (TMS)


3 IEC V Inverse (TMS)
4 IEC E Inverse (TMS)
5 UK LT Inverse (TMS)
6 Rectifier (TMS)
7 RI (K)
8 IEEE M Inverse (TD)
9 IEEE V Inverse (TD)
10 IEEE E Inverse (TD)
11 US Inverse (TD)
12 US ST Inverse (TD)
G151 1 Register EF IDMT CURVE TYPE * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 DT (DT)
2 IEC S Inverse (TMS)
3 IEC V Inverse (TMS)
4 IEC E Inverse (TMS)
5 UK LT Inverse (TMS)
6 RI (K)
7 IEEE M Inverse (TD)
8 IEEE V Inverse (TD)
9 IEEE E Inverse (TD)
10 US Inverse (TD)
11 US ST Inverse (TD)
12 IDG
G152 1 Register SEF IDMT CURVE TYPE * * *
Value
0 Disabled
1 DT (DT)
2 IEC S Inverse (TMS)
3 IEC V Inverse (TMS)
4 IEC E Inverse (TMS)
5 UK LT Inverse (TMS)
6 IEEE M Inverse (TD)
7 IEEE V Inverse (TD)
8 IEEE E Inverse (TD)
9 US Inverse (TD)
10 US ST Inverse (TD)
11 IDG
G153 1 Register CLIO INPUT RANGE * * *
Value
0 0-1mA
1 0-10mA
2 0-20mA
3 4-20mA
G154 1 Register CLIO TRIP / ALARM OPERATING MODE * * *
Value
0 Under
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 67/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

1 Over
G155 1 Register CLIO OUTPUT MEASUREMENT
Value Value Value
IA Magnitude 0 0 0
IB Magnitude 1 1 1
IC Magnitude 2 2 2
IN Measured Mag 3 3
IN Derived Mag 3
I Sen Magnitude 4 4 4
I1 Magnitude 5 5 5
I2 Magnitude 6 6 6
I0 Magnitude 7 7 7
IA RMS 8 8 8
IB RMS 9 9 9
IC RMS 10 10 10
VAB Magnitude 11 11 11
VBC Magnitude 12 12 12
VCA Magnitude 13 13 13
VAN Magnitude 14 14 14
VBN Magnitude 15 15 15
VCN Magnitude 16 16 16
VN Measured Mag 17 17 17
VN Derived Mag 18 18 18
V1 Magnitude 19 19 19
V2 Magnitude 20 20 20
V0 Magnitude 21 21 21
VAN RMS 22 22 22
VBN RMS 23 23 23
VCN RMS 24 24 24
Frequency 25 25 25
3 Phase Watts 26 26 26
A Phase Watts 27 27 27
B Phase Watts 28 28 28
C Phase Watts 29 29 29
3 Phase Vars 30 30 30
A Phase Vars 31 31 31
B Phase Vars 32 32 32
C Phase Vars 33 33 33
3 Phase VA 34 34 34
A Phase VA 35 35 35
B Phase VA 36 36 36
C Phase VA 37 37 37
3Ph Power Factor 38 38 38
APh Power Factor 39 39 39
BPh Power Factor 40 40 40
CPh Power Factor 41 41 41
3Ph W Fix Demand 42 42 42
3Ph Vars Fix Dem 43 43 43
IA Fixed Demand 44 44 44
IB Fixed Demand 45 45 45
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 68/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

IC Fixed Demand 46 46 46
3 Ph W Roll Dem 47 47 47
3Ph Vars RollDem 48 48 48
IA Roll Demand 49 49 49
IB Roll Demand 50 50 50
IC Roll Demand 51 51 51
3Ph W Peak Dem 52 52 52
3Ph Var Peak Dem 53 53 53
IA Peak Demand 54 54 54
IB Peak Demand 55 55 55
IC Peak Demand 56 56 56
VN 3rd Harmonic 57
NPS Thermal 57 58
Thermal Overload 57 58 59
RTD 1 59 60
RTD 2 60 61
RTD 3 61 62
RTD 4 62 63
RTD 5 63 64
RTD 6 64 65
RTD 7 65 66
RTD 8 66 67
RTD 9 67 68
RTD 10 68 69
CL Input 1 58 69 70
CL Input 2 59 70 71
CL Input 3 60 71 72
CL Input 4 61 72 73
G200 1 Register GLOBAL OPTO NOMINAL VOLTAGE SELECTION * * *
Value
0 24-27V
1 30-34V
2 48-54V
3 110-125V
4 220-250V
5 Custom
G201 1 Register SINGLE OPTO NOMINAL VOLTAGE SELECTION * * *
Value
0 24-27V
1 30-34V
2 48-54V
3 110-125V
4 220-250V
G202 2 Registers CONTROL INPUT STATUS (32 Bits) * * *
Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G27
0x00000001 Control Input 1 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00000002 Control Input 2 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00000004 Control Input 3 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00000008 Control Input 4 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00000010 Control Input 5 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 69/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

0x00000020 Control Input 6 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)


0x00000040 Control Input 7 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00000080 Control Input 8 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00000100 Control Input 9 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00000200 Control Input 10 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00000400 Control Input 11 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00000800 Control Input 12 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00001000 Control Input 13 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00002000 Control Input 14 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00004000 Control Input 15 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00008000 Control Input 16 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00010000 Control Input 17 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00020000 Control Input 18 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00040000 Control Input 19 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00080000 Control Input 20 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00100000 Control Input 21 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00200000 Control Input 22 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00400000 Control Input 23 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x00800000 Control Input 24 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x01000000 Control Input 25 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x02000000 Control Input 26 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x04000000 Control Input 27 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x08000000 Control Input 28 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x10000000 Control Input 29 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x20000000 Control Input 30 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x40000000 Control Input 31 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
0x80000000 Control Input 32 (0 = Reset, 1 = Set)
G203 1 Register VIRTUAL INPUT * * *
Value
0 No Operation
1 Set
2 Reset
G204 1 Register REAR COMMS CARD STATUS * * *
Value
0 Unsupported
1 Card not Fitted
2 EIA(RS)232 OK
3 EIA(RS)232 OK
4 K-Bus OK
G205 1 Register SECOND REAR COMMUNICATIONS PORT CONFIGURATION (model option) * * *
Value
0 EIA(RS)232
1 EIA(RS)485
2 K-Bus
G206 1 Register COMMS MODE (IEC60870-5-2) * * *
Value
0 IEC60870 FT1.2
1 10-bit no parity
G210 1 Register CS103 BLOCKING * * *
Value
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 70/170

Model
Type Value / Bit Mask Description
P341 P342 P343

0 Disabled
1 Monitor Blocking
2 Command Blocking
G228 2 Registers ALARM STATUS 3 (ALARMS 65 - 96) (32 Bits) * * *
Bit Mask (hex) Data formatted as per data type G27
0x00000001 Battery Fail
0x00000002 Field Volt Fail
0x00000004 Unused
0x00000008 GOOSE IED Absent
0x00000010 NIC not fitted
0x00000020 NIC no response
0x00000040 NIC fatal error
0x00000080 NIC Software Reload
0x00000100 Bad TCP/IP Configuration
0x00000200 Bad OSI Configuration
0x00000400 NIC Link Fail
0x00000800 NIC SW-Mismatch
0x00001000 IP addr conflict
0x00002000 Unused
0x00004000 Unused
0x00008000 Unused
0x00010000 Unused
0x00020000 Unused
0x00040000 Unused
0x00080000 Unused
0x00100000 Unused
0x00200000 Unused
0x00400000 Unused
0x00800000 Unused
0x01000000 Unused
0x02000000 Unused
0x04000000 Unused
0x08000000 Unused
0x10000000 Unused
0x20000000 Unused
0x40000000 Unused
0x80000000 Unused
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 71/170

G32 Digital Channel Assignment Selector

P341 P342 P343

0 Unused Unused Unused


1 see 4B01 see 4B01 see 4B01
2 see 4B02 see 4B02 see 4B02
3 see 4B03 see 4B03 see 4B03
4 see 4B04 see 4B04 see 4B04
5 see 4B05 see 4B05 see 4B05
6 see 4B06 see 4B06 see 4B06
7 see 4B07 see 4B07 see 4B07
8 see 4B08 see 4B08 see 4B08
9 see 4B09 see 4B09 see 4B09
10 see 4B0A see 4B0A see 4B0A
11 see 4B0B see 4B0B see 4B0B
12 see 4B0C see 4B0C see 4B0C
13 see 4B0D see 4B0D see 4B0D
14 see 4B0E see 4B0E see 4B0E
15 see 4B0F see 4B0F see 4B0F
16 see 4B10 see 4B10 see 4B10
17 see 4B11 see 4B11 see 4B11
18 see 4B12 see 4B12 see 4B12
19 see 4B13 see 4B13 see 4B13
20 see 4B14 see 4B14 see 4B14
21 see 4B15 see 4B15 see 4B15
22 see 4B16 see 4B16 see 4B16
23 see 4B17 see 4B17 see 4B17
24 see 4B18 see 4B18 see 4B18
25 see 4A01 see 4A01 see 4B19
26 see 4A02 see 4A02 see 4B1A
27 see 4A03 see 4A03 see 4B1B
28 see 4A04 see 4A04 see 4B1C
29 see 4A05 see 4A05 see 4B1D
30 see 4A06 see 4A06 see 4B1E
31 see 4A07 see 4A07 see 4B1F
32 see 4A08 see 4A08 see 4B20
33 see 4A09 see 4A09 see 4A01
34 see 4A0A see 4A0A see 4A02
35 see 4A0B see 4A0B see 4A03
36 see 4A0C see 4A0C see 4A04
37 see 4A0D see 4A0D see 4A05
38 see 4A0E see 4A0E see 4A06
39 see 4A0F see 4A0F see 4A07
40 see 4A10 see 4A10 see 4A08
41 see 4A11 see 4A11 see 4A09
42 see 4A12 see 4A12 see 4A0A
43 see 4A13 see 4A13 see 4A0B
44 see 4A14 see 4A14 see 4A0C
45 see 4A15 see 4A15 see 4A0D
46 see 4A16 see 4A16 see 4A0E
47 see 4A17 see 4A17 see 4A0F
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 72/170

P341 P342 P343

48 see 4A18 see 4A18 see 4A10


49 LED 1 LED 1 see 4A11
50 LED 2 LED 2 see 4A12
51 LED 3 LED 3 see 4A13
52 LED 4 LED 4 see 4A14
53 LED 5 LED 5 see 4A15
54 LED 6 LED 6 see 4A16
55 LED 7 LED 7 see 4A17
56 LED 8 LED 8 see 4A18
57 SG-opto Invalid SG-opto Invalid see 4A19
58 Prot'n Disabled Prot'n Disabled see 4A1A
59 VT Fail Alarm VT Fail Alarm see 4A1B
60 CT Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm see 4A1C
61 CB Fail Alarm CB Fail Alarm see 4A1D
62 I^ Maint Alarm I^ Maint Alarm see 4A1E
63 I^ Lockout Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm see 4A1F
64 CB Ops Maint CB Ops Maint see 4A20
65 CB Ops Lockout CB Ops Lockout LED 1
66 CB Op Time Maint CB Op Time Maint LED 2
67 CB Op Time Lock CB Op Time Lock LED 3
68 Fault Freq Lock Fault Freq Lock LED 4
69 CB Status Alarm CB Status Alarm LED 5
70 Man CB Trip Fail Man CB Trip Fail LED 6
71 Man CB Cls Fail Man CB Cls Fail LED 7
72 Man CB Unhealthy Man CB Unhealthy LED 8
73 F out of Range NPS Alarm SG-opto Invalid
74 Thermal Alarm Thermal Alarm Prot'n Disabled
75 Freq Prot Alm V/Hz Alarm VT Fail Alarm
76 Voltage Prot Alm Field Fail Alarm CT Fail Alarm
77 CL Card I/P Fail RTD Thermal Alm CB Fail Alarm
78 CL Card O/P Fail RTD Open Cct I^ Maint Alarm
79 CL Input 1 Alarm RTD short Cct I^ Lockout Alarm
80 CL Input 2 Alarm RTD Data Error CB Ops Maint
81 CL Input 3 Alarm RTD Board Fail CB Ops Lockout
82 CL Input 4 Alarm Freq Prot Alm CB Op Time Maint
83 CLI1 I< Fail Alm Voltage Prot Alm CB Op Time Lock
84 CLI2 I< Fail Alm CL Card I/P Fail Fault Freq Lock
85 CLI3 I< Fail Alm CL Card O/P Fail CB Status Alarm
86 CLI4 I< Fail Alm CL Input 1 Alarm Man CB Trip Fail
87 MR User Alarm 16 CL Input 2 Alarm Man CB Cls Fail
88 MR User Alarm 15 CL Input 3 Alarm Man CB Unhealthy
89 MR User Alarm 14 CL Input 4 Alarm NPS Alarm
90 MR User Alarm 13 CLI1 I< Fail Alm Thermal Alarm
91 MR User Alarm 12 CLI2 I< Fail Alm V/Hz Alarm
92 MR User Alarm 11 CLI3 I< Fail Alm Field Fail Alarm
93 MR User Alarm 10 CLI4 I< Fail Alm RTD Thermal Alm
94 MR User Alarm 9 MR User Alarm 16 RTD Open Cct
95 MR User Alarm 8 MR User Alarm 15 RTD short Cct
96 MR User Alarm 7 MR User Alarm 14 RTD Data Error
97 MR User Alarm 6 MR User Alarm 13 RTD Board Fail
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 73/170

P341 P342 P343

98 MR User Alarm 5 MR User Alarm 12 Freq Prot Alm


99 SR User Alarm 4 MR User Alarm 11 Voltage Prot Alm
100 SR User Alarm 3 MR User Alarm 10 CL Card I/P Fail
101 SR User Alarm 2 MR User Alarm 9 CL Card O/P Fail
102 SR User Alarm 1 MR User Alarm 8 CL Input 1 Alarm
103 df/dt Trip MR User Alarm 7 CL Input 2 Alarm
104 V Shift Trip MR User Alarm 6 CL Input 3 Alarm
105 IN>1 Trip MR User Alarm 5 CL Input 4 Alarm
106 IN>2 Trip SR User Alarm 4 CLI1 I< Fail Alm
107 IN>3 Trip SR User Alarm 3 CLI2 I< Fail Alm
108 IN>4 Trip SR User Alarm 2 CLI3 I< Fail Alm
109 IREF> Trip SR User Alarm 1 CLI4 I< Fail Alm
110 ISEF>1 Trip Field Fail1 Trip MR User Alarm 16
111 ISEF>2 Trip Field Fail2 Trip MR User Alarm 15
112 ISEF>3 Trip NPS Trip MR User Alarm 14
113 ISEF>4 Trip V Dep OC Trip MR User Alarm 13
114 VN>1 Trip V Dep OC Trip A MR User Alarm 12
115 VN>2 Trip V Dep OC Trip B MR User Alarm 11
116 V<1 Trip V Dep OC Trip C MR User Alarm 10
117 V<1 Trip A/AB V/Hz Trip MR User Alarm 9
118 V<1 Trip B/BC RTD 1 Trip MR User Alarm 8
119 V<1 Trip C/CA RTD 2 Trip MR User Alarm 7
120 V<2 Trip RTD 3 Trip MR User Alarm 6
121 V<2 Trip A/AB RTD 4 Trip MR User Alarm 5
122 V<2 Trip B/BC RTD 5 Trip SR User Alarm 4
123 V<2 Trip C/CA RTD 6 Trip SR User Alarm 3
124 V>1 Trip RTD 7 Trip SR User Alarm 2
125 V>1 Trip A/AB RTD 8 Trip SR User Alarm 1
126 V>1 Trip B/BC RTD 9 Trip 100% ST EF Trip
127 V>1 Trip C/CA RTD 10 Trip DeadMachine Trip
128 V>2 Trip Any RTD Trip Gen Diff Trip
129 V>2 Trip A/AB IN>1 Trip Gen Diff Trip A
130 V>2 Trip B/BC IN>2 Trip Gen Diff Trip B
131 V>2 Trip C/CA IREF> Trip Gen Diff Trip C
132 F<1 Trip ISEF>1 Trip Field Fail1 Trip
133 F<2 Trip VN>1 Trip Field Fail2 Trip
134 F<3 Trip VN>2 Trip NPS Trip
135 F<4 Trip V<1 Trip V Dep OC Trip
136 F>1 Trip V<1 Trip A/AB V Dep OC Trip A
137 F>2 Trip V<1 Trip B/BC V Dep OC Trip B
138 Power1 Trip V<1 Trip C/CA V Dep OC Trip C
139 Power2 Trip V<2 Trip V/Hz Trip
140 I>1 Trip V<2 Trip A/AB RTD 1 Trip
141 I>1 Trip A V<2 Trip B/BC RTD 2 Trip
142 I>1 Trip B V<2 Trip C/CA RTD 3 Trip
143 I>1 Trip C V>1 Trip RTD 4 Trip
144 I>2 Trip V>1 Trip A/AB RTD 5 Trip
145 I>2 Trip A V>1 Trip B/BC RTD 6 Trip
146 I>2 Trip B V>1 Trip C/CA RTD 7 Trip
147 I>2 Trip C V>2 Trip RTD 8 Trip
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 74/170

P341 P342 P343

148 I>3 Trip V>2 Trip A/AB RTD 9 Trip


149 I>3 Trip A V>2 Trip B/BC RTD 10 Trip
150 I>3 Trip B V>2 Trip C/CA Any RTD Trip
151 I>3 Trip C F<1 Trip IN>1 Trip
152 I>4 Trip F<2 Trip IN>2 Trip
153 I>4 Trip A F<3 Trip IREF> Trip
154 I>4 Trip B F<4 Trip ISEF>1 Trip
155 I>4 Trip C F>1 Trip VN>1 Trip
156 Bfail1 Trip 3ph F>2 Trip VN>2 Trip
157 Bfail2 Trip 3ph Power1 Trip V<1 Trip
158 SPower1 Trip Power2 Trip V<1 Trip A/AB
159 SPower2 Trip I>1 Trip V<1 Trip B/BC
160 Thermal O/L Trip I>1 Trip A V<1 Trip C/CA
161 CL Input 1 Trip I>1 Trip B V<2 Trip
162 CL Input 2 Trip I>1 Trip C V<2 Trip A/AB
163 CL Input 3 Trip I>2 Trip V<2 Trip B/BC
164 CL Input 4 Trip I>2 Trip A V<2 Trip C/CA
165 Any Start I>2 Trip B V>1 Trip
166 VN>1 Start I>2 Trip C V>1 Trip A/AB
167 VN>2 Start Bfail1 Trip 3ph V>1 Trip B/BC
168 V<1 Start Bfail2 Trip 3ph V>1 Trip C/CA
169 V<1 Start A/AB SPower1 Trip V>2 Trip
170 V<1 Start B/BC SPower2 Trip V>2 Trip A/AB
171 V<1 Start C/CA Thermal O/L Trip V>2 Trip B/BC
172 V<2 Start Z<1 Trip V>2 Trip C/CA
173 V<2 Start A/AB Z<1 Trip A F<1 Trip
174 V<2 Start B/BC Z<1 Trip B F<2 Trip
175 V<2 Start C/CA Z<1 Trip C F<3 Trip
176 V>1 Start Z<2 Trip F<4 Trip
177 V>1 Start A/AB Z<2 Trip A F>1 Trip
178 V>1 Start B/BC Z<2 Trip B F>2 Trip
179 V>1 Start C/CA Z<2 Trip C Power1 Trip
180 V>2 Start CL Input 1 Trip Power2 Trip
181 V>2 Start A/AB CL Input 2 Trip I>1 Trip
182 V>2 Start B/BC CL Input 3 Trip I>1 Trip A
183 V>2 Start C/CA CL Input 4 Trip I>1 Trip B
184 Power1 Start Any Start I>1 Trip C
185 Power2 Start VN>1 Start I>2 Trip
186 I>1 Start VN>2 Start I>2 Trip A
187 I>1 Start A V<1 Start I>2 Trip B
188 I>1 Start B V<1 Start A/AB I>2 Trip C
189 I>1 Start C V<1 Start B/BC Bfail1 Trip 3ph
190 I>2 Start V<1 Start C/CA Bfail2 Trip 3ph
191 I>2 Start A V<2 Start SPower1 Trip
192 I>2 Start B V<2 Start A/AB SPower2 Trip
193 I>2 Start C V<2 Start B/BC PSlipz Z1 Trip
194 I>3 Start V<2 Start C/CA PSlipz Z2 Trip
195 I>3 Start A V>1 Start Thermal O/L Trip
196 I>3 Start B V>1 Start A/AB Z<1 Trip
197 I>3 Start C V>1 Start B/BC Z<1 Trip A
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 75/170

P341 P342 P343

198 I>4 Start V>1 Start C/CA Z<1 Trip B


199 I>4 Start A V>2 Start Z<1 Trip C
200 I>4 Start B V>2 Start A/AB Z<2 Trip
201 I>4 Start C V>2 Start B/BC Z<2 Trip A
202 IN>1 Start V>2 Start C/CA Z<2 Trip B
203 IN>2 Start Power1 Start Z<2 Trip C
204 IN>3 Start Power2 Start CL Input 1 Trip
205 IN>4 Start I>1 Start CL Input 2 Trip
206 ISEF>1 Start I>1 Start A CL Input 3 Trip
207 ISEF>2 Start I>1 Start B CL Input 4 Trip
208 ISEF>3 Start I>1 Start C Any Start
209 ISEF>4 Start I>2 Start VN>1 Start
210 F<1 Start I>2 Start A VN>2 Start
211 F<2 Start I>2 Start B V<1 Start
212 F<3 Start I>2 Start C V<1 Start A/AB
213 F<4 Start IN>1 Start V<1 Start B/BC
214 F>1 Start IN>2 Start V<1 Start C/CA
215 F>2 Start ISEF>1 Start V<2 Start
216 I> BlockStart F<1 Start V<2 Start A/AB
217 IN/SEF>Blk Start F<2 Start V<2 Start B/BC
218 df/dt Start F<3 Start V<2 Start C/CA
219 IA< Start F<4 Start V>1 Start
220 IB< Start F>1 Start V>1 Start A/AB
221 IC< Start F>2 Start V>1 Start B/BC
222 ISEF< Start IA< Start V>1 Start C/CA
223 SPower1 Start IB< Start V>2 Start
224 SPower2 Start IC< Start V>2 Start A/AB
225 CLI1 Alarm Start ISEF< Start V>2 Start B/BC
226 CLI2 Alarm Start IN< Start V>2 Start C/CA
227 CLI3 Alarm Start V/Hz Start Power1 Start
228 CLI4 Alarm Start FFail1 Start Power2 Start
229 CLI1 Trip Start FFail2 Start I>1 Start
230 CLI2 Trip Start V Dep OC Start I>1 Start A
231 CLI3 Trip Start V Dep OC Start A I>1 Start B
232 CLI4 Trip Start V Dep OC Start B I>1 Start C
233 VTS Fast Block V Dep OC Start C I>2 Start
234 VTS Slow Block SPower1 Start I>2 Start A
235 CTS Block SPower2 Start I>2 Start B
236 Control Trip Z<1 Start I>2 Start C
237 Control Close Z<1 Start A IN>1 Start
238 Close in Prog Z<1 Start B IN>2 Start
239 Reconnection Z<1 Start C ISEF>1 Start
240 Lockout Alarm Z<2 Start 100% ST EF Start
241 CB Open 3 ph Z<2 Start A F<1 Start
242 CB Closed 3 ph Z<2 Start B F<2 Start
243 Field volts fail Z<2 Start C F<3 Start
244 All Poles Dead CLI1 Alarm Start F<4 Start
245 Any Pole Dead CLI2 Alarm Start F>1 Start
246 Pole Dead A CLI3 Alarm Start F>2 Start
247 Pole Dead B CLI4 Alarm Start IA< Start
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 76/170

P341 P342 P343

248 Pole Dead C CLI1 Trip Start IB< Start


249 CLI2 Trip Start IC< Start
250 CLI3 Trip Start ISEF< Start
251 CLI4 Trip Start IN< Start
252 VTS Fast Block V/Hz Start
253 VTS Slow Block FFail1 Start
254 CTS Block FFail2 Start
255 RTD 1 Alarm V Dep OC Start
256 RTD 2 Alarm V Dep OC Start A
257 RTD 3 Alarm V Dep OC Start B
258 RTD 4 Alarm V Dep OC Start C
259 RTD 5 Alarm SPower1 Start
260 RTD 6 Alarm SPower2 Start
261 RTD 7 Alarm PSlipz Z1 Start
262 RTD 8 Alarm PSlipz Z2 Start
263 RTD 9 Alarm PSlipz LensStart
264 RTD 10 Alarm PSlipz BlindStrt
265 Lockout Alarm PSlipz ReactStrt
266 CB Open 3 ph Z<1 Start
267 CB Closed 3 ph Z<1 Start A
268 Field volts fail Z<1 Start B
269 All Poles Dead Z<1 Start C
270 Any Pole Dead Z<2 Start
271 Pole Dead A Z<2 Start A
272 Pole Dead B Z<2 Start B
273 Pole Dead C Z<2 Start C
274 CLI1 Alarm Start
275 CLI2 Alarm Start
276 CLI3 Alarm Start
277 CLI4 Alarm Start
278 CLI1 Trip Start
279 CLI2 Trip Start
280 CLI3 Trip Start
281 CLI4 Trip Start
282 VTS Fast Block
283 VTS Slow Block
284 CTS Block
285 RTD 1 Alarm
286 RTD 2 Alarm
287 RTD 3 Alarm
288 RTD 4 Alarm
289 RTD 5 Alarm
290 RTD 6 Alarm
291 RTD 7 Alarm
292 RTD 8 Alarm
293 RTD 9 Alarm
294 RTD 10 Alarm
295 Lockout Alarm
296 CB Open 3 ph
297 CB Closed 3 ph
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 77/170

P341 P342 P343

298 Field volts fail


299 All Poles Dead
300 Any Pole Dead
301 Pole Dead A
302 Pole Dead B
303 Pole Dead C
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 78/170

Measurements Range for Each G155 Selection

CLIO Output Default Default Pri/Sec


Unit Minimum Maximum Step Size
Measurement Minimum Maximum Multiplier

IA Magnitude A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

IB Magnitude A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

IC Magnitude A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

IN Measured Mag A 0*I2 16*I2 0.01*I2 0*I2 1.2*I2 M5

IN Derived Mag A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

I Sen Magnitude A 0*I3 16*I3 0.01*I3 0*I3 1.2*I3 M6

I1 Magnitude A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

I2 Magnitude A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

I0 Magnitude A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

IA RMS A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

IB RMS A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

IC RMS A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

VAB Magnitude V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 140*V1 M1

VBC Magnitude V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 140*V1 M1

VCA Magnitude V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 140*V1 M1

VAN Magnitude V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 80*V1 M1

VBN Magnitude V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 80*V1 M1

VCN Magnitude V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 80*V1 M1

VN Measured Mag V 0*V3 200*V3 0.1*V3 0*V3 80*V3 M3

VN Derived Mag V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 80*V1 M1

V1 Magnitude V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 80*V1 M1

V2 Magnitude V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 80*V1 M1

V0 Magnitude V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 80*V1 M1

VAN RMS V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 80*V1 M1

VBN RMS V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 80*V1 M1

VCN RMS V 0*V1 200*V1 0.1*V1 0*V1 80*V1 M1

Frequency Hz 0 70 0.01 45 65

3 Phase Watts W -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4

A Phase Watts W -2000*V1*I1 2000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 100*V1*I1 M1*M4

B Phase Watts W -2000*V1*I1 2000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 100*V1*I1 M1*M4

C Phase Watts W -2000*V1*I1 2000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 100*V1*I1 M1*M4

3 Phase Vars Var -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4

A Phase Vars Var -2000*V1*I1 2000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 100*V1*I1 M1*M4

B Phase Vars Var -2000*V1*I1 2000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 100*V1*I1 M1*M4


Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 79/170

CLIO Output Default Default Pri/Sec


Unit Minimum Maximum Step Size
Measurement Minimum Maximum Multiplier

C Phase Vars Var -2000*V1*I1 2000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 100*V1*I1 M1*M4

3 Phase VA VA 0*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4

A Phase VA VA 0*V1*I1 2000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 100*V1*I1 M1*M4

B Phase VA VA 0*V1*I1 2000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 100*V1*I1 M1*M4

C Phase VA VA 0*V1*I1 2000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 100*V1*I1 M1*M4

3Ph Power Factor -1 1 0.01 0 1

APh Power Factor -1 1 0.01 0 1

BPh Power Factor -1 1 0.01 0 1

CPh Power Factor -1 1 0.01 0 1

3Ph W Fix Demand W -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4

3Ph Vars Fix Dem Var -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4

IA Fixed Demand A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

IB Fixed Demand A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

IC Fixed Demand A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

3 Ph W Roll Dem W -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4

3Ph Vars RollDem Var -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4

IA Roll Demand A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

IB Roll Demand A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

IC Roll Demand A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

3Ph W Peak Dem W -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4

3Ph Var Peak Dem Var -6000*V1*I1 6000*V1*I1 1*V1*I1 0*V1*I1 300*V1*I1 M1*M4

IA Peak Demand A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

IB Peak Demand A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

IC Peak Demand A 0*I1 16*I1 0.01*I1 0*I1 1.2*I1 M4

VN 3rd Harmonic V 0*V3 200*V3 0.1*V3 0*V3 80*V3 M3

NPS Thermal % 0 200 0.01 0 120

Thermal Overload % 0 200 0.01 0 120

RTD 1 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200

RTD 2 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200

RTD 3 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200

RTD 4 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200

RTD 5 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200

RTD 6 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200

RTD 7 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200

RTD 8 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200

RTD 9 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200


Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 80/170

CLIO Output Default Default Pri/Sec


Unit Minimum Maximum Step Size
Measurement Minimum Maximum Multiplier

RTD 10 °C -40 300 0.1 0 200

CL Input 1 -9999 9999 0.1 0 9999

CL Input 2 -9999 9999 0.1 0 9999

CL Input 3 -9999 9999 0.1 0 9999

CL Input 4 -9999 9999 0.1 0 9999


Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 81/170

Digital Data Bus

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

0 Output Condition Output Relay 1 see 4B01 * * *


1 Output Condition Output Relay 2 see 4B02 * * *
2 Output Condition Output Relay 3 see 4B03 * * *
3 Output Condition Output Relay 4 see 4B04 * * *
4 Output Condition Output Relay 5 see 4B05 * * *
5 Output Condition Output Relay 6 see 4B06 * * *
6 Output Condition Output Relay 7 see 4B07 * * *
7 Output Condition Output Relay 8 see 4B08 * * *
8 Output Condition Output Relay 9 see 4B09 * * *
9 Output Condition Output Relay 10 see 4B0A * * *
10 Output Condition Output Relay 11 see 4B0B * * *
11 Output Condition Output Relay 12 see 4B0C * * *
12 Output Condition Output Relay 13 see 4B0D * * *
13 Output Condition Output Relay 14 see 4B0E * * *
14 Output Condition Output Relay 15 see 4B0F * * *
15 Output Condition Output Relay 16 see 4B10 * * *
16 Output Condition Output Relay 17 see 4B11 * * *
17 Output Condition Output Relay 18 see 4B12 * * *
18 Output Condition Output Relay 19 see 4B13 * * *
19 Output Condition Output Relay 20 see 4B14 * * *
20 Output Condition Output Relay 21 see 4B15 * * *
21 Output Condition Output Relay 22 see 4B16 * * *
22 Output Condition Output Relay 23 see 4B17 * * *
23 Output Condition Output Relay 24 see 4B18 * * *
24 Output Condition Output Relay 25 see 4B19 *
25 Output Condition Output Relay 26 see 4B1A *
26 Output Condition Output Relay 27 see 4B1B *
27 Output Condition Output Relay 28 see 4B1C *
28 Output Condition Output Relay 29 see 4B1D *
29 Output Condition Output Relay 30 see 4B1E *
30 Output Condition Output Relay 31 see 4B1F *
31 Output Condition Output Relay 32 see 4B20 *
32 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 1 (setting group selector) see 4A01 * * *
33 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 2 (setting group selector) see 4A02 * * *
34 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 3 see 4A03 * * *
35 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 4 see 4A04 * * *
36 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 5 see 4A05 * * *
37 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 6 see 4A06 * * *
38 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 7 see 4A07 * * *
39 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 8 see 4A08 * * *
40 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 9 see 4A09 * * *
41 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 10 see 4A0A * * *
42 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 11 see 4A0B * * *
43 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 12 see 4A0C * * *
44 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 13 see 4A0D * * *
45 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 14 see 4A0E * * *
46 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 15 see 4A0F * * *
47 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 16 see 4A10 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 82/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

48 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 17 see 4A11 * * *


49 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 18 see 4A12 * * *
50 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 19 see 4A13 * * *
51 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 20 see 4A14 * * *
52 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 21 see 4A15 * * *
53 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 22 see 4A16 * * *
54 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 23 see 4A17 * * *
55 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 24 see 4A18 * * *
56 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 25 see 4A19 *
57 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 26 see 4A1A *
58 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 27 see 4A1B *
59 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 28 see 4A1C *
60 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 29 see 4A1D *
61 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 30 see 4A1E *
62 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 31 see 4A1F *
63 OPTO Opto Isolator Input 32 see 4A20 *
64 Output Condition LED 1 LED 1 * * *
65 Output Condition LED 2 LED 2 * * *
66 Output Condition LED 3 LED 3 * * *
67 Output Condition LED 4 LED 4 * * *
68 Output Condition LED 5 LED 5 * * *
69 Output Condition LED 6 LED 6 * * *
70 Output Condition LED 7 LED 7 * * *
71 Output Condition LED 8 LED 8 * * *
72 UNUSED
73 UNUSED
74 UNUSED
75 UNUSED
76 UNUSED
77 UNUSED
78 UNUSED
79 UNUSED
80 PSL LED Conditioner IN 1 LED Cond IN 1 * * *
81 PSL LED Conditioner IN 2 LED Cond IN 2 * * *
82 PSL LED Conditioner IN 3 LED Cond IN 3 * * *
83 PSL LED Conditioner IN 4 LED Cond IN 4 * * *
84 PSL LED Conditioner IN 5 LED Cond IN 5 * * *
85 PSL LED Conditioner IN 6 LED Cond IN 6 * * *
86 PSL LED Conditioner IN 7 LED Cond IN 7 * * *
87 PSL LED Conditioner IN 8 LED Cond IN 8 * * *
88 UNUSED
89 UNUSED
90 UNUSED
91 UNUSED
92 UNUSED
93 UNUSED
94 UNUSED
95 UNUSED
96 UNUSED
97 UNUSED
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 83/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

98 UNUSED
99 UNUSED
100 UNUSED
101 UNUSED
102 UNUSED
103 UNUSED
104 UNUSED
105 UNUSED
106 UNUSED
107 UNUSED
108 UNUSED
109 UNUSED
110 UNUSED
111 UNUSED
112 UNUSED
113 UNUSED
114 UNUSED
115 UNUSED
116 UNUSED
117 UNUSED
118 UNUSED
119 UNUSED
120 UNUSED
121 UNUSED
122 UNUSED
123 UNUSED
124 UNUSED
125 UNUSED
126 UNUSED
127 UNUSED
128 UNUSED
129 UNUSED
130 UNUSED
131 UNUSED
132 UNUSED
133 UNUSED
134 UNUSED
135 UNUSED
136 UNUSED
137 UNUSED
138 UNUSED
139 UNUSED
140 UNUSED
141 UNUSED
142 UNUSED
143 UNUSED
144 UNUSED
145 UNUSED
146 UNUSED
147 UNUSED
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 84/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

148 UNUSED
149 UNUSED
150 UNUSED
151 UNUSED
152 UNUSED
153 UNUSED
154 UNUSED
155 UNUSED
156 UNUSED
157 UNUSED
158 UNUSED
159 UNUSED
160 PSL Relay Conditioner 1 Relay Cond 1 * * *
161 PSL Relay Conditioner 2 Relay Cond 2 * * *
162 PSL Relay Conditioner 3 - Any Trip Any Trip * * *
163 PSL Relay Conditioner 4 Relay Cond 4 * * *
164 PSL Relay Conditioner 5 Relay Cond 5 * * *
165 PSL Relay Conditioner 6 Relay Cond 6 * * *
166 PSL Relay Conditioner 7 Relay Cond 7 * * *
167 PSL Relay Conditioner 8 Relay Cond 8 * * *
168 PSL Relay Conditioner 9 Relay Cond 9 * * *
169 PSL Relay Conditioner 10 Relay Cond 10 * * *
170 PSL Relay Conditioner 11 Relay Cond 11 * * *
171 PSL Relay Conditioner 12 Relay Cond 12 * * *
172 PSL Relay Conditioner 13 Relay Cond 13 * * *
173 PSL Relay Conditioner 14 Relay Cond 14 * * *
174 PSL Relay Conditioner 15 Relay Cond 15 * * *
175 PSL Relay Conditioner 16 Relay Cond 16 * * *
176 PSL Relay Conditioner 17 Relay Cond 17 * * *
177 PSL Relay Conditioner 18 Relay Cond 18 * * *
178 PSL Relay Conditioner 19 Relay Cond 19 * * *
179 PSL Relay Conditioner 20 Relay Cond 20 * * *
180 PSL Relay Conditioner 21 Relay Cond 21 * * *
181 PSL Relay Conditioner 22 Relay Cond 22 * * *
182 PSL Relay Conditioner 23 Relay Cond 23 * * *
183 PSL Relay Conditioner 24 Relay Cond 24 * * *
184 PSL Relay Conditioner 25 Relay Cond 25 *
185 PSL Relay Conditioner 26 Relay Cond 26 *
186 PSL Relay Conditioner 27 Relay Cond 27 *
187 PSL Relay Conditioner 28 Relay Cond 28 *
188 PSL Relay Conditioner 29 Relay Cond 29 *
189 PSL Relay Conditioner 30 Relay Cond 30 *
190 PSL Relay Conditioner 31 Relay Cond 31 *
191 PSL Relay Conditioner 32 Relay Cond 32 *
192 UNUSED
193 UNUSED
194 UNUSED
195 UNUSED
196 UNUSED
197 UNUSED
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 85/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

198 UNUSED
199 UNUSED
200 UNUSED
201 UNUSED
202 UNUSED
203 UNUSED
204 UNUSED
205 UNUSED
206 UNUSED
207 UNUSED
208 UNUSED
209 UNUSED
210 UNUSED
211 UNUSED
212 UNUSED
213 UNUSED
214 UNUSED
215 UNUSED
216 UNUSED
217 UNUSED
218 UNUSED
219 UNUSED
220 UNUSED
221 UNUSED
222 UNUSED
223 UNUSED
224 PSL Timer in 1 Timer in 1 * * *
225 PSL Timer in 2 Timer in 2 * * *
226 PSL Timer in 3 Timer in 3 * * *
227 PSL Timer in 4 Timer in 4 * * *
228 PSL Timer in 5 Timer in 5 * * *
229 PSL Timer in 6 Timer in 6 * * *
230 PSL Timer in 7 Timer in 7 * * *
231 PSL Timer in 8 Timer in 8 * * *
232 UNUSED
233 UNUSED
234 UNUSED
235 UNUSED
236 UNUSED
237 UNUSED
238 UNUSED
239 UNUSED
240 UNUSED
241 UNUSED
242 UNUSED
243 UNUSED
244 UNUSED
245 UNUSED
246 UNUSED
247 UNUSED
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 86/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

248 UNUSED
249 UNUSED
250 UNUSED
251 UNUSED
252 UNUSED
253 UNUSED
254 UNUSED
255 UNUSED
256 Auxiliary Timer Timer out 1 Timer out 1 * * *
257 Auxiliary Timer Timer out 2 Timer out 2 * * *
258 Auxiliary Timer Timer out 3 Timer out 3 * * *
259 Auxiliary Timer Timer out 4 Timer out 4 * * *
260 Auxiliary Timer Timer out 5 Timer out 5 * * *
261 Auxiliary Timer Timer out 6 Timer out 6 * * *
262 Auxiliary Timer Timer out 7 Timer out 7 * * *
263 Auxiliary Timer Timer out 8 Timer out 8 * * *
264 UNUSED
265 UNUSED
266 UNUSED
267 UNUSED
268 UNUSED
269 UNUSED
270 UNUSED
271 UNUSED
272 UNUSED
273 UNUSED
274 UNUSED
275 UNUSED
276 UNUSED
277 UNUSED
278 UNUSED
279 UNUSED
280 UNUSED
281 UNUSED
282 UNUSED
283 UNUSED
284 UNUSED
285 UNUSED
286 UNUSED
287 UNUSED
288 PSL Fault Record Trigger Input Fault REC TRIG * * *
289 UNUSED
290 Group Selection Setting Group via Opto Invalid SG-opto Invalid * * *
291 Commission Test Test Mode Enabled Prot'n Disabled * * *
292 VT Supervision VTS Indication VT Fail Alarm * * *
293 CT Supervision CTS Indication CT Fail Alarm * * *
294 Breaker Fail Breaker Fail Any Trip CB Fail Alarm * * *
295 CB Monitoring Broken Current Maintenance Alarm I^ Maint Alarm * * *
296 CB Monitoring Broken Current Lockout Alarm I^ Lockout Alarm * * *
297 CB Monitoring Number of CB Operations Maintenance Alarm CB Ops Maint * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 87/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

298 CB Monitoring Number of CB Operations Maintenance Lockout CB Ops Lockout * * *


299 CB Monitoring Excessive CB Operation Time Maintenance Alarm CB Op Time Maint * * *
300 CB Monitoring Excessive CB Operation Time Lockout Alarm CB Op Time Lock * * *
301 CB Monitoring Excessive Fault Frequency Lockout Alarm Fault Freq Lock * * *
302 CB Status CB Status Alarm CB Status Alarm * * *
303 CB Control CB Failed to Trip Man CB Trip Fail * * *
304 CB Control CB Failed to Close Man CB Cls Fail * * *
305 CB Control Control CB Unhealthy Man CB Unhealthy * * *
306 Frequency Tracking Frequency Out of Range F out of Range *
306 NPS Thermal Negative Phase Sequence Alarm NPS Alarm * *
307 Thermal Overload Thermal Overload Alarm Thermal Alarm * * *
308 Overfluxing Volts Per Hz Alarm V/Hz Alarm * *
309 Field Failure Field Failure Alarm Field Fail Alarm * *
310 RTD Thermal RTD Thermal Alarm RTD Thermal Alm * *
311 RTD Thermal RTD Open Circuit Failure RTD Open Cct * *
312 RTD Thermal RTD Short Circuit Failure RTD short Cct * *
313 RTD Thermal RTD Data Inconsistency Error RTD Data Error * *
314 RTD Thermal RTD Board Failure RTD Board Fail * *
315 PSL Frequency Protection Alarm Freq Prot Alm * * *
316 PSL Voltage Protection Alarm Voltage Prot Alm * * *
317 UNUSED
318 UNUSED
319 UNUSED
320 Current Loop Inputs CLIO Input Board Failure CL Card I/P Fail * * *
321 Current Loop Outputs CLIO Output Board Failure CL Card O/P Fail * * *
322 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 1 Alarm CL Input 1 Alarm * * *
323 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 2 Alarm CL Input 2 Alarm * * *
324 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 3 Alarm CL Input 3 Alarm * * *
325 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 4 Alarm CL Input 4 Alarm * * *
326 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 1 Undercurrent Fail Alarm CLI1 I< Fail Alm * * *
327 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 2 Undercurrent Fail Alarm CLI2 I< Fail Alm * * *
328 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 3 Undercurrent Fail Alarm CLI3 I< Fail Alm * * *
329 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 4 Undercurrent Fail Alarm CLI4 I< Fail Alm * * *
330 UNUSED
331 UNUSED
332 UNUSED
333 UNUSED
334 UNUSED
335 UNUSED
336 PSL User Definable Alarm 16 (Manual Reset) MR User Alarm 16 * * *
337 PSL User Definable Alarm 15 (Manual Reset) MR User Alarm 15 * * *
338 PSL User Definable Alarm 14 (Manual Reset) MR User Alarm 14 * * *
339 PSL User Definable Alarm 13 (Manual Reset) MR User Alarm 13 * * *
340 PSL User Definable Alarm 12 (Manual Reset) MR User Alarm 12 * * *
341 PSL User Definable Alarm 11 (Manual Reset) MR User Alarm 11 * * *
342 PSL User Definable Alarm 10 (Manual Reset) MR User Alarm 10 * * *
343 PSL User Definable Alarm 9 (Manual Reset) MR User Alarm 9 * * *
344 PSL User Definable Alarm 8 (Manual Reset) MR User Alarm 8 * * *
345 PSL User Definable Alarm 7 (Manual Reset) MR User Alarm 7 * * *
346 PSL User Definable Alarm 6 (Manual Reset) MR User Alarm 6 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 88/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

347 PSL User Definable Alarm 5 (Manual Reset) MR User Alarm 5 * * *


348 PSL User Definable Alarm 4 (Self Reset) SR User Alarm 4 * * *
349 PSL User Definable Alarm 3 (Self Reset) SR User Alarm 3 * * *
350 PSL User Definable Alarm 2 (Self Reset) SR User Alarm 2 * * *
351 PSL User Definable Alarm 1 (Self Reset) SR User Alarm 1 * * *
352 PSL Block Voltage Dependant Overcurrent time delay VDepOC Timer Blk * *
353 PSL Block Under Impedance time delay UnderZ Timer Blk * *
354 PSL Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 1 time delay I>1 Timer Block * * *
355 PSL Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 2 time delay I>2 Timer Block * * *
356 PSL Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 3 time delay I>3 Timer Block *
357 PSL Block Phase Overcurrent Stage 4 time delay I>4 Timer Block *
358 PSL Block Earth Fault Stage 1 time delay IN>1 Timer Blk * * *
359 PSL Block Earth Fault Stage 2 time delay IN>2 Timer Blk * * *
360 PSL Block Earth Fault Stage 3 time delay IN>3 Timer Blk *
361 PSL Block Earth Fault Stage 4 time delay IN>4 Timer Blk *
362 PSL Block SEF Stage 1 time delay ISEF>1 Timer Blk * * *
363 PSL Block SEF Stage 2 time delay ISEF>2 Timer Blk *
364 PSL Block SEF Stage 3 time delay ISEF>3 Timer Blk *
365 PSL Block SEF Stage 4 time delay ISEF>4 Timer Blk *
366 PSL Logic Input Trip CB Init Trip CB *
367 PSL Logic Input Close CB Init Close CB *
368 PSL Block Residual Overvoltage Stage 1 time delay VN>1 Timer Blk * * *
369 PSL Block Residual Overvoltage Stage 2 time delay VN>2 Timer Blk * * *
370 PSL Block Phase Undervoltage Stage 1 time delay V<1 Timer Block * * *
371 PSL Block Phase Undervoltage Stage 2 time delay V<2 Timer Block * * *
372 PSL Block Phase Overvoltage Stage 1 time delay V>1 Timer Block * * *
373 PSL Block Phase Overvoltage Stage 2 time delay V>2 Timer Block * * *
374 PSL Block Underfrequency Stage 1 Timer F<1 timer Block * * *
375 PSL Block Underfrequency Stage 2 Timer F<2 Timer Block * * *
376 PSL Block Underfrequency Stage 3 Timer F<3 Timer Block * * *
377 PSL Block Underfrequency Stage 4 Timer F<4 Timer Block * * *
378 PSL Block Overfrequency Stage 1 Timer F>1 Timer Block * * *
379 PSL Block Overfrequency Stage 2 Timer F>2 Timer Block * * *
380 PSL External Trip 3ph Ext. Trip 3ph * * *
381 PSL 52-A (3 phase) CB Aux 3ph(52-A) * * *
382 PSL 52-B (3 phase) CB Aux 3ph(52-B) * * *
383 PSL CB Healthy CB Healthy * * *
384 PSL MCB/VTS opto MCB/VTS * * *
385 PSL Reset Manual CB Close Time Delay Reset Close Dly * * *
386 PSL Reset Latched Relays & LED’s Reset Relays/LED * * *
387 PSL Reset Lockout Opto Input Reset Lockout * * *
388 PSL Reset CB Maintenance Values Reset All Values * * *
389 PSL Reset NPS Thermal State Reset I2 Thermal * *
390 PSL Reset Thermal Overload State Reset ThermalO/L * * *
391 PSL IEC60870-5-103 Monitor Blocking Monitor Blocked * * *
392 PSL IEC60870-5-103 Command Blocking Command Blocked * * *
393 PSL Block Current Loop Input 1 protection CL Input 1 Blk * * *
394 PSL Block Current Loop Input 2 protection CL Input 2 Blk * * *
395 PSL Block Current Loop Input 3 protection CL Input 3 Blk * * *
396 PSL Block Current Loop Input 4 protection CL Input 4 Blk * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 89/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

397 UNUSED
398 UNUSED
399 UNUSED
400 UNUSED
401 UNUSED
402 UNUSED
403 UNUSED
404 UNUSED
405 UNUSED
406 UNUSED
407 UNUSED
408 UNUSED
409 UNUSED
410 UNUSED
411 UNUSED
412 UNUSED
413 UNUSED
414 UNUSED
415 PSL Initiate Test Mode Test Mode * * *
416 100% Stator Earth Fault 100% Stator Earth Fault Trip 100% ST EF Trip *
417 Dead Machine Dead Machine Protection Trip DeadMachine Trip *
418 Generator Differential Generator Differential Trip 3ph Gen Diff Trip *
419 Generator Differential Generator Differential Trip A Gen Diff Trip A *
420 Generator Differential Generator Differential Trip B Gen Diff Trip B *
421 Generator Differential Generator Differential Trip C Gen Diff Trip C *
422 Field Failure Field Failure Stage 1 Trip Field Fail1 Trip * *
423 Field Failure Field Failure Stage 2 Trip Field Fail2 Trip * *
424 NPS Thermal Negative Phase Sequence Trip NPS Trip * *
425 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip 3ph V Dep OC Trip * *
426 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip A V Dep OC Trip A * *
427 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip B V Dep OC Trip B * *
428 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Trip C V Dep OC Trip C * *
429 Overfluxing Volts per Hz Trip V/Hz Trip * *
430 RTD Thermal RTD 1 Trip RTD 1 Trip * *
431 RTD Thermal RTD 2 Trip RTD 2 Trip * *
432 RTD Thermal RTD 3 Trip RTD 3 Trip * *
433 RTD Thermal RTD 4 Trip RTD 4 Trip * *
434 RTD Thermal RTD 5 Trip RTD 5 Trip * *
435 RTD Thermal RTD 6 Trip RTD 6 Trip * *
436 RTD Thermal RTD 7 Trip RTD 7 Trip * *
437 RTD Thermal RTD 8 Trip RTD 8 Trip * *
438 RTD Thermal RTD 9 Trip RTD 9 Trip * *
439 RTD Thermal RTD 10 Trip RTD 10 Trip * *
440 RTD Thermal Any RTD Trip Any RTD Trip * *
440 df/dt Rate Of Change Of Frequency Trip df/dt Trip *
441 Voltage Vector Shift Voltage Vector Shift Trip V Shift Trip *
442 Earth Fault 1st Stage EF Trip IN>1 Trip * * *
443 Earth Fault 2nd Stage EF Trip IN>2 Trip * * *
444 Earth Fault 3rd Stage EF Trip IN>3 Trip *
445 Earth Fault 4th Stage EF Trip IN>4 Trip *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 90/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

446 Restricted Earth Fault REF Trip IREF> Trip * * *


447 Sensitive Earth Fault 1st Stage SEF Trip ISEF>1 Trip * * *
448 Sensitive Earth Fault 2nd Stage SEF Trip ISEF>2 Trip *
449 Sensitive Earth Fault 3rd Stage SEF Trip ISEF>3 Trip *
450 Sensitive Earth Fault 4th Stage SEF Trip ISEF>4 Trip *
451 Neutral Displacement 1st Stage Residual O/V Trip VN>1 Trip * * *
452 Neutral Displacement 2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip VN>2 Trip * * *
453 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph V<1 Trip * * *
454 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB V<1 Trip A/AB * * *
455 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC V<1 Trip B/BC * * *
456 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA V<1 Trip C/CA * * *
457 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph V<2 Trip * * *
458 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB V<2 Trip A/AB * * *
459 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC V<2 Trip B/BC * * *
460 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA V<2 Trip C/CA * * *
461 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph V>1 Trip * * *
462 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB V>1 Trip A/AB * * *
463 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC V>1 Trip B/BC * * *
464 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA V>1 Trip C/CA * * *
465 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph V>2 Trip * * *
466 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB V>2 Trip A/AB * * *
467 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC V>2 Trip B/BC * * *
468 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA V>2 Trip C/CA * * *
469 Under Frequency Under Frequency Stage 1 Trip F<1 Trip * * *
470 Under Frequency Under Frequency Stage 2 Trip F<2 Trip * * *
471 Under Frequency Under Frequency Stage 3 Trip F<3 Trip * * *
472 Under Frequency Under Frequency Stage 4 Trip F<4 Trip * * *
473 Over Frequency Over Frequency Stage 1 Trip F>1 Trip * * *
474 Over Frequency Over Frequency Stage 2 Trip F>2 Trip * * *
475 Power Power Stage 1 Trip Power1 Trip * * *
476 Power Power Stage 2 Trip Power2 Trip * * *
477 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph I>1 Trip * * *
478 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Trip A I>1 Trip A * * *
479 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Trip B I>1 Trip B * * *
480 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Trip C I>1 Trip C * * *
481 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph I>2 Trip * * *
482 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Trip A I>2 Trip A * * *
483 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Trip B I>2 Trip B * * *
484 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Trip C I>2 Trip C * * *
485 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph I>3 Trip *
486 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Trip A I>3 Trip A *
487 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Trip B I>3 Trip B *
488 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Trip C I>3 Trip C *
489 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph I>4 Trip *
490 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Trip A I>4 Trip A *
491 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Trip B I>4 Trip B *
492 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Trip C I>4 Trip C *
493 Breaker failure tBF1 Trip 3ph Bfail1 Trip 3ph * * *
494 Breaker failure tBF2 Trip 3ph Bfail2 Trip 3ph * * *
495 Sensitive Power Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Trip SPower1 Trip * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 91/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

496 Sensitive Power Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 2 Trip SPower2 Trip * * *
497 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Trip PSlipz Z1 Trip *
498 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Trip PSlipz Z2 Trip *
499 Thermal Overload Thermal Overload Trip Thermal O/L Trip * * *
500 System Backup Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 1 Trip Z<1 Trip * *
501 System Backup Underimpedance Phase A Stage 1 Trip Z<1 Trip A * *
502 System Backup Underimpedance Phase B Stage 1 Trip Z<1 Trip B * *
503 System Backup Underimpedance Phase C Stage 1 Trip Z<1 Trip C * *
504 System Backup Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 2 Trip Z<2 Trip * *
505 System Backup Underimpedance Phase A Stage 2 Trip Z<2 Trip A * *
506 System Backup Underimpedance Phase B Stage 2 Trip Z<2 Trip B * *
507 System Backup Underimpedance Phase C Stage 2 Trip Z<2 Trip C * *
508 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 1 Trip CL Input 1 Trip * * *
509 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 2 Trip CL Input 2 Trip * * *
510 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 3 Trip CL Input 3 Trip * * *
511 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 4 Trip CL Input 4 Trip * * *
512 UNUSED
513 UNUSED
514 UNUSED
515 UNUSED
516 UNUSED
517 UNUSED
518 UNUSED
519 UNUSED
520 UNUSED
521 UNUSED
522 UNUSED
523 UNUSED
524 UNUSED
525 UNUSED
526 UNUSED
527 UNUSED
528 UNUSED
529 UNUSED
530 UNUSED
531 UNUSED
532 UNUSED
533 UNUSED
534 UNUSED
535 UNUSED
536 UNUSED
537 UNUSED
538 UNUSED
539 UNUSED
540 UNUSED
541 UNUSED
542 UNUSED
543 UNUSED
544 UNUSED
545 UNUSED
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 92/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

546 UNUSED
547 UNUSED
548 UNUSED
549 UNUSED
550 UNUSED
551 UNUSED
552 UNUSED
553 UNUSED
554 UNUSED
555 UNUSED
556 UNUSED
557 UNUSED
558 UNUSED
559 UNUSED
560 UNUSED
561 UNUSED
562 UNUSED
563 UNUSED
564 UNUSED
565 UNUSED
566 UNUSED
567 UNUSED
568 UNUSED
569 UNUSED
570 UNUSED
571 UNUSED
572 UNUSED
573 UNUSED
574 UNUSED
575 UNUSED
576 All protection Any Start Any Start * * *
577 Neutral displacement 1st Stage Residual O/V Start VN>1 Start * * *
578 Neutral displacement 2nd Stage Residual O/V Start VN>2 Start * * *
579 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph V<1 Start * * *
580 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB V<1 Start A/AB * * *
581 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC V<1 Start B/BC * * *
582 Under Voltage 1st Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA V<1 Start C/CA * * *
583 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph V<2 Start * * *
584 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB V<2 Start A/AB * * *
585 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC V<2 Start B/BC * * *
586 Under Voltage 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA V<2 Start C/CA * * *
587 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph V>1 Start * * *
588 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB V>1 Start A/AB * * *
589 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC V>1 Start B/BC * * *
590 Over Voltage 1st Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA V>1 Start C/CA * * *
591 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph V>2 Start * * *
592 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB V>2 Start A/AB * * *
593 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC V>2 Start B/BC * * *
594 Over Voltage 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA V>2 Start C/CA * * *
595 Power Power Stage 1 Start Power1 Start * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 93/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

596 Power Power Stage 2 Start Power2 Start * * *


597 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Start 3ph I>1 Start * * *
598 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Start A I>1 Start A * * *
599 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Start B I>1 Start B * * *
600 Over Current 1st Stage O/C Start C I>1 Start C * * *
601 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph I>2 Start * * *
602 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Start A I>2 Start A * * *
603 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Start B I>2 Start B * * *
604 Over Current 2nd Stage O/C Start C I>2 Start C * * *
605 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph I>3 Start *
606 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Start A I>3 Start A *
607 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Start B I>3 Start B *
608 Over Current 3rd Stage O/C Start C I>3 Start C *
609 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Start 3ph I>4 Start *
610 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Start A I>4 Start A *
611 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Start B I>4 Start B *
612 Over Current 4th Stage O/C Start C I>4 Start C *
613 Earth Fault 1st Stage EF Start IN>1 Start * * *
614 Earth Fault 2nd Stage EF Start IN>2 Start * * *
615 Earth Fault 3rd Stage EF Start IN>3 Start *
616 Earth Fault 4th Stage EF Start IN>4 Start *
617 Sensitive Earth Fault 1st Stage SEF Start ISEF>1 Start * * *
618 Sensitive Earth Fault 2nd Stage SEF Start ISEF>2 Start *
619 Sensitive Earth Fault 3rd Stage SEF Start ISEF>3 Start *
620 Sensitive Earth Fault 4th Stage SEF Start ISEF>4 Start *
621 100% Stator Earth Fault 100% Stator Earth Fault Start 100% ST EF Start *
622 Under Frequency Under Frequency Stage 1 Start F<1 Start * * *
623 Under Frequency Under Frequency Stage 2 Start F<2 Start * * *
624 Under Frequency Under Frequency Stage 3 Start F<3 Start * * *
625 Under Frequency Under Frequency Stage 4 Start F<4 Start * * *
626 Over Frequency Over Frequency Stage 1 Start F>1 Start * * *
627 Over Frequency Over Frequency Stage 2 Start F>2 Start * * *
628 Over Current I> Blocked O/C Start I> BlockStart *
629 Over Current IN/ISEF> Blocked O/C Start IN/SEF>Blk Start *
630 df/dt Rate Of Change Of Frequency Start df/dt Start *
631 Under Current IA< Operate IA< Start * * *
632 Under Current IB< Operate IB< Start * * *
633 Under Current IC< Operate IC< Start * * *
634 Under Current ISEF< Operate ISEF< Start * * *
635 Under Current IN< Operate IN< Start * *
636 Overfluxing Volts per Hz Start V/Hz Start * *
637 Field Failure Field Failure Stage 1 Start FFail1 Start * *
638 Field Failure Field Failure Stage 2 Start FFail2 Start * *
639 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start 3Ph V Dep OC Start * *
640 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start A V Dep OC Start A * *
641 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start B V Dep OC Start B * *
642 System Backup Voltage Dependant Overcurrent Start C V Dep OC Start C * *
643 Sensitive Power Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Start SPower1 Start * * *
644 Sensitive Power Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 2 Start SPower2 Start * * *
645 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Start PSlipz Z1 Start *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 94/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

646 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Start PSlipz Z2 Start *
647 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (impedance) Lens Start PSlipz LensStart *
648 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (impedance) Blinder Start PSlipz BlindStrt *
649 Z based Pole Slipping Pole Slip (impedance) Reactance Line Start PSlipz ReactStrt *
650 System Backup Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 1 Start Z<1 Start * *
651 System Backup Underimpedance Phase A Stage 1 Start Z<1 Start A * *
652 System Backup Underimpedance Phase B Stage 1 Start Z<1 Start B * *
653 System Backup Underimpedance Phase C Stage 1 Start Z<1 Start C * *
654 System Backup Underimpedance 3Phase Stage 2 Start Z<2 Start * *
655 System Backup Underimpedance Phase A Stage 2 Start Z<2 Start A * *
656 System Backup Underimpedance Phase B Stage 2 Start Z<2 Start B * *
657 System Backup Underimpedance Phase C Stage 2 Start Z<2 Start C * *
658 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 1 Alarm Start CLI1 Alarm Start * * *
659 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 2 Alarm Start CLI2 Alarm Start * * *
660 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 3 Alarm Start CLI3 Alarm Start * * *
661 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 4 Alarm Start CLI4 Alarm Start * * *
662 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 1 Trip Start CLI1 Trip Start * * *
663 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 2 Trip Start CLI2 Trip Start * * *
664 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 3 Trip Start CLI3 Trip Start * * *
665 Current Loop Inputs Current Loop Input 4 Trip Start CLI4 Trip Start * * *
666 UNUSED
667 UNUSED
668 UNUSED
669 UNUSED
670 UNUSED
671 UNUSED
672 UNUSED
673 UNUSED
674 UNUSED
675 UNUSED
676 UNUSED
677 UNUSED
678 UNUSED
679 UNUSED
680 UNUSED
681 UNUSED
682 UNUSED
683 UNUSED
684 UNUSED
685 UNUSED
686 UNUSED
687 UNUSED
688 UNUSED
689 UNUSED
690 UNUSED
691 UNUSED
692 UNUSED
693 UNUSED
694 UNUSED
695 UNUSED
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 95/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

696 UNUSED
697 UNUSED
698 UNUSED
699 UNUSED
700 UNUSED
701 UNUSED
702 UNUSED
703 UNUSED
704 UNUSED
705 UNUSED
706 UNUSED
707 UNUSED
708 UNUSED
709 UNUSED
710 UNUSED
711 UNUSED
712 UNUSED
713 UNUSED
714 UNUSED
715 UNUSED
716 UNUSED
717 UNUSED
718 UNUSED
719 UNUSED
720 UNUSED
721 UNUSED
722 UNUSED
723 UNUSED
724 UNUSED
725 UNUSED
726 UNUSED
727 UNUSED
728 UNUSED
729 UNUSED
730 UNUSED
731 UNUSED
732 UNUSED
733 UNUSED
734 UNUSED
735 UNUSED
736 VT Supervision VTS Fast Block VTS Fast Block * * *
737 VT Supervision VTS Slow Block VTS Slow Block * * *
738 CT Supervision CTS Block CTS Block * * *
739 CB Control Control Trip Control Trip *
740 CB Control Control Close Control Close *
741 CB Control Control Close in Progress Close in Prog *
742 Reconnection Reconnection Time Delay Output Reconnection *
743 RTD Thermal RTD 1 Alarm RTD 1 Alarm * *
744 RTD Thermal RTD 2 Alarm RTD 2 Alarm * *
745 RTD Thermal RTD 3 Alarm RTD 3 Alarm * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 96/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

746 RTD Thermal RTD 4 Alarm RTD 4 Alarm * *


747 RTD Thermal RTD 5 Alarm RTD 5 Alarm * *
748 RTD Thermal RTD 6 Alarm RTD 6 Alarm * *
749 RTD Thermal RTD 7 Alarm RTD 7 Alarm * *
750 RTD Thermal RTD 8 Alarm RTD 8 Alarm * *
751 RTD Thermal RTD 9 Alarm RTD 9 Alarm * *
752 RTD Thermal RTD 10 Alarm RTD 10 Alarm * *
753 CB Monitoring Composite Lockout Alarm Lockout Alarm * * *
754 CB Status Monitor 3 ph CB Open CB Open 3 ph * * *
755 CB Status Monitor 3 ph CB Closed CB Closed 3 ph * * *
756 Field Voltage Monitor Field Voltage Failure Field volts fail * * *
757 Poledead All Poles Dead All Poles Dead * * *
758 Poledead Any Pole Dead Any Pole Dead * * *
759 Poledead Phase A Pole Dead Pole Dead A * * *
760 Poledead Phase B Pole Dead Pole Dead B * * *
761 Poledead Phase C Pole Dead Pole Dead C * * *
762 VT Supervision VTS Accelerate Ind VTS Acc Ind * * *
763 VT Supervision Any Voltage Dependent VTS Volt Dep * * *
764 VT Supervision Ia Over Threshold VTS IA> * * *
765 VT Supervision Ib Over Threshold VTS IB> * * *
766 VT Supervision Ic Over Threshold VTS IC> * * *
767 VT Supervision Va Over Threshold VTS VA> * * *
768 VT Supervision Vb Over Threshold VTS VB> * * *
769 VT Supervision Vc Over Threshold VTS VC> * * *
770 VT Supervision I2 Over Threshold VTS I2> * * *
771 VT Supervision V2 Over Threshold VTS V2> * * *
772 VT Supervision Superimposed Ia Over Threshold VTS IA delta> * * *
773 VT Supervision Superimposed Ib Over Threshold VTS IB delta> * * *
774 VT Supervision Superimposed Ic Over Threshold VTS IC delta> * * *
775 CB Failure CBF Current Prot SEF Stage Trip BFail SEF Trip-1 * * *
776 CB Failure CBF Non Current Prot Stage Trip BFail Non I Tr-1 * * *
777 CB Failure CBF Current Prot SEF Trip BFail SEF Trip * * *
778 CB Failure CBF Non Current Prot Trip BFail Non I Trip * * *
779 Frequency tracking Freq High Freq High * * *
780 Frequency tracking Freq Low Freq Low * * *
781 Frequency tracking Freq Not Found Freq Not found * * *
782 Frequency tracking Stop Freq Track Stop Freq Track * * *
783 Reconnection Reconnect LOM (Unqualified) Recon LOM-1 *
784 Reconnection Reconnect Disable (Unqualified) Recon Disable-1 *
785 Reconnection Reconnect LOM Recon LOM *
786 Reconnection Reconnect Disable Recon Disable *
787 UNUSED
788 UNUSED
789 UNUSED
790 UNUSED
791 UNUSED
792 UNUSED
793 UNUSED
794 UNUSED
795 UNUSED
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 97/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

796 UNUSED
797 UNUSED
798 UNUSED
799 UNUSED
800 UNUSED
801 UNUSED
802 UNUSED
803 UNUSED
804 UNUSED
805 UNUSED
806 UNUSED
807 UNUSED
808 UNUSED
809 UNUSED
810 UNUSED
811 UNUSED
812 UNUSED
813 UNUSED
814 UNUSED
815 UNUSED
816 UNUSED
817 UNUSED
818 UNUSED
819 UNUSED
820 UNUSED
821 UNUSED
822 UNUSED
823 UNUSED
824 UNUSED
825 UNUSED
826 UNUSED
827 UNUSED
828 UNUSED
829 UNUSED
830 UNUSED
831 UNUSED
832 CONTROL Control Input 1 Control Input 1 * * *
833 CONTROL Control Input 2 Control Input 2 * * *
834 CONTROL Control Input 3 Control Input 3 * * *
835 CONTROL Control Input 4 Control Input 4 * * *
836 CONTROL Control Input 5 Control Input 5 * * *
837 CONTROL Control Input 6 Control Input 6 * * *
838 CONTROL Control Input 7 Control Input 7 * * *
839 CONTROL Control Input 8 Control Input 8 * * *
840 CONTROL Control Input 9 Control Input 9 * * *
841 CONTROL Control Input 10 Control Input 10 * * *
842 CONTROL Control Input 11 Control Input 11 * * *
843 CONTROL Control Input 12 Control Input 12 * * *
844 CONTROL Control Input 13 Control Input 13 * * *
845 CONTROL Control Input 14 Control Input 14 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 98/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

846 CONTROL Control Input 15 Control Input 15 * * *


847 CONTROL Control Input 16 Control Input 16 * * *
848 CONTROL Control Input 17 Control Input 17 * * *
849 CONTROL Control Input 18 Control Input 18 * * *
850 CONTROL Control Input 19 Control Input 19 * * *
851 CONTROL Control Input 20 Control Input 20 * * *
852 CONTROL Control Input 21 Control Input 21 * * *
853 CONTROL Control Input 22 Control Input 22 * * *
854 CONTROL Control Input 23 Control Input 23 * * *
855 CONTROL Control Input 24 Control Input 24 * * *
856 CONTROL Control Input 25 Control Input 25 * * *
857 CONTROL Control Input 26 Control Input 26 * * *
858 CONTROL Control Input 27 Control Input 27 * * *
859 CONTROL Control Input 28 Control Input 28 * * *
860 CONTROL Control Input 29 Control Input 29 * * *
861 CONTROL Control Input 30 Control Input 30 * * *
862 CONTROL Control Input 31 Control Input 31 * * *
863 CONTROL Control Input 32 Control Input 32 * * *
864 UNUSED
865 UNUSED
866 UNUSED
867 UNUSED
868 UNUSED
869 UNUSED
870 UNUSED
871 UNUSED
872 UNUSED
873 UNUSED
874 UNUSED
875 UNUSED
876 UNUSED
877 UNUSED
878 UNUSED
879 UNUSED
880 UNUSED
881 UNUSED
882 UNUSED
883 UNUSED
884 UNUSED
885 UNUSED
886 UNUSED
887 UNUSED
888 UNUSED
889 UNUSED
890 UNUSED
891 UNUSED
892 UNUSED
893 UNUSED
894 UNUSED
895 UNUSED
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 99/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

896 UNUSED
897 UNUSED
898 UNUSED
899 UNUSED
900 UNUSED
901 UNUSED
902 UNUSED
903 UNUSED
904 UNUSED
905 UNUSED
906 UNUSED
907 UNUSED
908 UNUSED
909 UNUSED
910 UNUSED
911 UNUSED
912 UNUSED
913 UNUSED
914 UNUSED
915 UNUSED
916 UNUSED
917 UNUSED
918 UNUSED
919 UNUSED
920 UNUSED
921 UNUSED
922 UNUSED
923 UNUSED
924 UNUSED
925 UNUSED
926 UNUSED
927 UNUSED
928 PSLINT PSL Int. 1 * * *
929 PSLINT PSL Int. 2 * * *
930 PSLINT PSL Int. 3 * * *
931 PSLINT PSL Int. 4 * * *
932 PSLINT PSL Int. 5 * * *
933 PSLINT PSL Int. 6 * * *
934 PSLINT PSL Int. 7 * * *
935 PSLINT PSL Int. 8 * * *
936 PSLINT PSL Int. 9 * * *
937 PSLINT PSL Int. 10 * * *
938 PSLINT PSL Int. 11 * * *
939 PSLINT PSL Int. 12 * * *
940 PSLINT PSL Int. 13 * * *
941 PSLINT PSL Int. 14 * * *
942 PSLINT PSL Int. 15 * * *
943 PSLINT PSL Int. 16 * * *
944 PSLINT PSL Int. 17 * * *
945 PSLINT PSL Int. 18 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 100/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

946 PSLINT PSL Int. 19 * * *


947 PSLINT PSL Int. 20 * * *
948 PSLINT PSL Int. 21 * * *
949 PSLINT PSL Int. 22 * * *
950 PSLINT PSL Int. 23 * * *
951 PSLINT PSL Int. 24 * * *
952 PSLINT PSL Int. 25 * * *
953 PSLINT PSL Int. 26 * * *
954 PSLINT PSL Int. 27 * * *
955 PSLINT PSL Int. 28 * * *
956 PSLINT PSL Int. 29 * * *
957 PSLINT PSL Int. 30 * * *
958 PSLINT PSL Int. 31 * * *
959 PSLINT PSL Int. 32 * * *
960 PSLINT PSL Int. 33 * * *
961 PSLINT PSL Int. 34 * * *
962 PSLINT PSL Int. 35 * * *
963 PSLINT PSL Int. 36 * * *
964 PSLINT PSL Int. 37 * * *
965 PSLINT PSL Int. 38 * * *
966 PSLINT PSL Int. 39 * * *
967 PSLINT PSL Int. 40 * * *
968 PSLINT PSL Int. 41 * * *
969 PSLINT PSL Int. 42 * * *
970 PSLINT PSL Int. 43 * * *
971 PSLINT PSL Int. 44 * * *
972 PSLINT PSL Int. 45 * * *
973 PSLINT PSL Int. 46 * * *
974 PSLINT PSL Int. 47 * * *
975 PSLINT PSL Int. 48 * * *
976 PSLINT PSL Int. 49 * * *
977 PSLINT PSL Int. 50 * * *
978 PSLINT PSL Int. 51 * * *
979 PSLINT PSL Int. 52 * * *
980 PSLINT PSL Int. 53 * * *
981 PSLINT PSL Int. 54 * * *
982 PSLINT PSL Int. 55 * * *
983 PSLINT PSL Int. 56 * * *
984 PSLINT PSL Int. 57 * * *
985 PSLINT PSL Int. 58 * * *
986 PSLINT PSL Int. 59 * * *
987 PSLINT PSL Int. 60 * * *
988 PSLINT PSL Int. 61 * * *
989 PSLINT PSL Int. 62 * * *
990 PSLINT PSL Int. 63 * * *
991 PSLINT PSL Int. 64 * * *
992 PSLINT PSL Int. 65 * * *
993 PSLINT PSL Int. 66 * * *
994 PSLINT PSL Int. 67 * * *
995 PSLINT PSL Int. 68 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 101/170

English Text
DDB No. Source Description P341 P342 P343
0123456789ABCDEF

996 PSLINT PSL Int. 69 * * *


997 PSLINT PSL Int. 70 * * *
998 PSLINT PSL Int. 71 * * *
999 PSLINT PSL Int. 72 * * *
1000 PSLINT PSL Int. 73 * * *
1001 PSLINT PSL Int. 74 * * *
1002 PSLINT PSL Int. 75 * * *
1003 PSLINT PSL Int. 76 * * *
1004 PSLINT PSL Int. 77 * * *
1005 PSLINT PSL Int. 78 * * *
1006 PSLINT PSL Int. 79 * * *
1007 PSLINT PSL Int. 80 * * *
1008 PSLINT PSL Int. 81 * * *
1009 PSLINT PSL Int. 82 * * *
1010 PSLINT PSL Int. 83 * * *
1011 PSLINT PSL Int. 84 * * *
1012 PSLINT PSL Int. 85 * * *
1013 PSLINT PSL Int. 86 * * *
1014 PSLINT PSL Int. 87 * * *
1015 PSLINT PSL Int. 88 * * *
1016 PSLINT PSL Int. 89 * * *
1017 PSLINT PSL Int. 90 * * *
1018 PSLINT PSL Int. 91 * * *
1019 PSLINT PSL Int. 92 * * *
1020 PSLINT PSL Int. 93 * * *
1021 PSLINT PSL Int. 94 * * *
1022 PSLINT PSL Int. 95 * * *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 102/170

This sheet contains all the text used in Events and all other messages

Courier Events: Cell Ref. Text Value (Binary Flag)


Opto Input Events: 0020 Logic inputs 32 bit binary flag value
Contact Events: 0021 Output Contacts 32 bit binary flag value
Alarm Status 1 Events (Alarms 1 - 32):
Not Used 0022 0 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000000001
Not Used 0022 1 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000000010
SG-opto Invalid 0022 2 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000000100
Prot'n Disabled 0022 3 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000001000
VT Fail Alarm 0022 4 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000010000
CTS Fail Alarm 0022 5 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000100000
CB Fail 0022 6 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000001000000
I^ Maint Alarm 0022 7 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000010000000
I^ Maint Lockout 0022 8 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000100000000
CB OPs Maint 0022 9 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000001000000000
CB OPs Lock 0022 10 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000010000000000
CB Time Maint 0022 11 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000100000000000
CB Time Lockout 0022 12 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000001000000000000
Fault Freq Lock 0022 13 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000010000000000000
CB Status Alarm 0022 14 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000100000000000000
CB Trip Fail 0022 15 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000001000000000000000
CB Close Fail 0022 16 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000010000000000000000
Man CB Unhealthy 0022 17 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000100000000000000000
F out of Range Model 1 only 0022 18 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000001000000000000000000
NPS Alarm Models 2 & 3 only 0022 18 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000001000000000000000000
Thermal Alarm 0022 19 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000010000000000000000000
V/Hz Alarm 0022 20 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000100000000000000000000
Field Fail Alarm 0022 21 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000001000000000000000000000
RTD Thermal Alm 0022 22 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000010000000000000000000000
RTD Open Cct 0022 23 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000100000000000000000000000
RTD short Cct 0022 24 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000001000000000000000000000000
RTD Data Error 0022 25 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000010000000000000000000000000
RTD Board Fail 0022 26 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000100000000000000000000000000
Freq Prot Alm 0022 27 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00001000000000000000000000000000
Voltage Prot Alm 0022 28 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00010000000000000000000000000000
Not Used 0022 29 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00100000000000000000000000000000
Not Used 0022 30 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 01000000000000000000000000000000
Not Used 0022 31 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 10000000000000000000000000000000
Alarm Status 2 Events (Alarms 33 - 64):
CL Card I/P Fail 0051 0 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000000001
CL Card O/P Fail 0051 1 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000000010
CL Input 1 Alarm 0051 2 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000000100
CL Input 2 Alarm 0051 3 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000001000
CL Input 3 Alarm 0051 4 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000010000
CL Input 4 Alarm 0051 5 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000100000
CLI1 I< Fail Alm 0051 6 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000001000000
CLI2 I< Fail Alm 0051 7 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000010000000
CLI3 I< Fail Alm 0051 8 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000100000000
CLI4 I< Fail Alm 0051 9 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000001000000000
Not Used 0051 10 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000010000000000
Not Used 0051 11 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000100000000000
Not Used 0051 12 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000001000000000000
Not Used 0051 13 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000010000000000000
Not Used 0051 14 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000100000000000000
Not Used 0051 15 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000001000000000000000
MR User Alarm 16 0051 16 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000010000000000000000
MR User Alarm 15 0051 17 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000100000000000000000
MR User Alarm 14 0051 18 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000001000000000000000000
MR User Alarm 13 0051 19 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000010000000000000000000
MR User Alarm 12 0051 20 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000100000000000000000000
MR User Alarm 11 0051 21 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000001000000000000000000000
MR User Alarm 10 0051 22 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000010000000000000000000000
MR User Alarm 9 0051 23 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000100000000000000000000000
MR User Alarm 8 0051 24 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000001000000000000000000000000
MR User Alarm 7 0051 25 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000010000000000000000000000000
MR User Alarm 6 0051 26 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000100000000000000000000000000
MR User Alarm 5 0051 27 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00001000000000000000000000000000
SR User Alarm 4 0051 28 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00010000000000000000000000000000
SR User Alarm 3 0051 29 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00100000000000000000000000000000
SR User Alarm 2 0051 30 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 01000000000000000000000000000000
SR User Alarm 1 0051 31 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 10000000000000000000000000000000
Alarm Status 3 Events (Alarms 65 - 96):
Battery Fail 0052 0 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000000001
Field Volt Fail 0052 1 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000000010
Not Used 0052 2 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000000100
GOOSE IED Absent 0052 3 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000001000
NIC not fitted 0052 4 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000010000
NIC no response 0052 5 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000000100000
NIC fatal error 0052 6 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000001000000
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 103/170

Alarm Status 3 Events (Alarms 65 - 96):


NIC Software Reload 0052 7 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000010000000
Bad TCP/IP Configuration 0052 8 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000000100000000
Bad OSI Configuration 0052 9 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000001000000000
NIC Link Fail 0052 10 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000010000000000
NIC SW-Mismatch 0052 11 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000000100000000000
IP addr conflict 0052 12 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000001000000000000
Not Used 0052 13 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000010000000000000
Not Used 0052 14 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000000100000000000000
Not Used 0052 15 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000001000000000000000
Not Used 0052 16 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000010000000000000000
Not Used 0052 17 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000000100000000000000000
Not Used 0052 18 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000001000000000000000000
Not Used 0052 19 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000010000000000000000000
Not Used 0052 20 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000000100000000000000000000
Not Used 0052 21 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000001000000000000000000000
Not Used 0052 22 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000010000000000000000000000
Not Used 0052 23 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000000100000000000000000000000
Not Used 0052 24 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000001000000000000000000000000
Not Used 0052 25 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000010000000000000000000000000
Not Used 0052 26 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00000100000000000000000000000000
Not Used 0052 27 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00001000000000000000000000000000
Not Used 0052 28 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00010000000000000000000000000000
Not Used 0052 29 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 00100000000000000000000000000000
Not Used 0052 30 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 01000000000000000000000000000000
Not Used 0052 31 Alarm Name + ON/OFF 10000000000000000000000000000000

Protection Events: Cell Ref. Text Value


0F26 - 0F3F DDB Signal Name ON/OFF 32bit Binary Flag of the revelant packed DDB
Fault Records: Cell Ref. Event Extraction Column Text Value Record Number
0100 B000 Fault Record 0 16bit UINT
Self Monitoring:
Cell Ref. Event Extraction Column Text Value (32bit UINT) Record Number
(List is not exhaustive)
Bus Check Failure FFFF B100 Bus Failure 1 16bit UINT
SRAM Failure FFFF SRAM Failure 2
BB RAM Failure FFFF BB RAM Failure 3
LCD Failure FFFF LCD Failure 4
Watchdog 1 Failure (Fast) FFFF Watchdog 1 Fail 5
Watchdog 2 Failure (Slow) FFFF Watchdog 2 Fail 6
Field Voltage Failure FFFF Field Volt Fail 7
Flash EPROM Failure FFFF FlashEEPROM Fail 8
EEPROM Failure FFFF EEPROM Fail 9
Cal EEPROM Failure FFFF Cal EEPROM Fail 10
Incorrect Hardware Configuration FFFF Invalid H/W 11
Power Up Boot FFFF Power Up Boot 12
Soft Reboot FFFF Soft Reboot 13
Setting Changes: Cell Ref. Text Value
C & S Change FFFF Settings Updated 0
Group 1 Change 0905 Group 1 Updated 1
Group 2 Change 0905 Group 2 Updated 2
Group 3 Change 0905 Group 3 Updated 3
Group 4 Change 0905 Group 4 Updated 4
Disturbance Recorder 0C01 Disturbance Settings 0
Active Group Change 0904 Active Group Changed (UINT of New Active Group)
General Events:
Time Sync
Password Unlocked 0002 Password Unlocked [New Access Level]
Password Invalid 0002 Password Invalid 0
Password Modified level 1 00D2 Password 1 Edit 0
Password Modified level 2 00D3 Password 2 Edit 0
Password Expired 0002 Password Expired [ Password Level]
IRIG-B Active 0803 IRIG-B Active 1
IRIG-B Inactive 0803 IRIG-B Inactive 0
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 104/170

IEC60870-5-103: Device Profile


Vendor Name: Alstom T&D - Energy, Automation & Information
Device Name: P340 Generator Protection
Models Covered: P341****3**07**
P342****3**07**
P343****3**07**
Compatibility
2
Level:
Physical Layer
Electrical Interface: EIA(RS)485
Number of Loads: 1 for one protection equipment
Optical Interface
Plastic fibre BFOC/2.5 type connector
(Order Option)
Transmission Speed: 9600 or 19200bps (User Setting)
Application Layer
Common Address of ASDU = Link Address

Compatible Range Information Numbers in Monitor Direction

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
System Functions
8 10 255 0 End of General Interrogration * * *
6 8 255 0 Time Synchronisation * * *
5 3 224 2 Reset FCB * * *
5 4 224 3 Reset CU * * *
5 5 224 4 Start/Restart * * *
5 6 224 5 Power On * * *

Note: Indentification message in ASDU 5: "ALSTOM P" + 16bit model + 8bit major version + 1 character minor version e.g. "ALSTOM P" + 343 + 06 + 'A'

Status Indications
1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 16 Auto-recloser active *
1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 17 Tele-protection active *
1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 18 Protection active *
1 1,7,11,12,20, 21 224 19 LED Reset * * * Reset Indications
1 9,11 224 20 Monitor direction blocked * * * * 391
1 9,11 224 21 Test mode * * * * Protection Disabled 291
1 9,11 224 22 Local parameter setting *
1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 23 Characteristic 1 * * * * PG1 Changed
1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 24 Characteristic 2 * * * * PG2 Changed
1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 25 Characteristic 3 * * * * PG3 Changed
1 1,7,9,11,12,20,21 224 26 Characteristic 4 * * * * PG4 Changed
1 1,7,9,11 224 27 Auxillary input 1 * * * * Opto Input 1 32
1 1,7,9,11 224 28 Auxillary input 2 * * * * Opto Input 2 33
1 1,7,9,11 224 29 Auxillary input 3 * * * * Opto Input 3 34
1 1,7,9,11 224 30 Auxillary input 4 * * * * Opto Input 4 35
Supervision Indications
1 1,7,9 224 32 Measurand supervision I *
1 1,7,9 224 33 Measurand supervision V *
1 1,7,9 224 35 Phase sequence supervision *
1 1,7,9 224 36 Trip circuit supervision *
1 1,7,9 224 37 I>> back-up supervision *
1 1,7,9 224 38 VT fuse failure * * * * VTS Indication 292
1 1,7,9 224 39 Teleprotection disturbed *
1 1,7,9 224 46 Group warning *
1 1,7,9 224 47 Group alarm *
Earth Fault Indications
1 1,7,9 224 48 Earth Fault L1 *
1 1,7,9 224 49 Earth Fault L2 *
1 1,7,9 224 50 Earth Fault L3 *
1 1,7,9 224 51 Earth Fault Fwd *
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 105/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1,7,9 224 52 Earth Fault Rev *
Fault Indications
2 1,7,9 224 64 Start /pickup L1 * * * * 1st Stage O/C Start A 598
2 1,7,9 224 65 Start /pickup L2 * * * * 1st Stage O/C Start B 599
2 1,7,9 224 66 Start /pickup L3 * * * * 1st Stage O/C Start C 600
2 1,7,9 224 67 Start /pickup N * * * * 1st Stage EF Start 613
2 1,7 224 68 General Trip * * * Any Trip 162
2 1,7 224 69 Trip L1 * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip A 478
2 1,7 224 70 Trip L2 * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip B 479
2 1,7 224 71 Trip L3 * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip C 480
2 1,7 224 72 Trip I>> (back up)
4 1,7 224 73 Fault Location in ohms
2 1,7 224 74 Fault forward
2 1,7 224 75 Fault reverse
2 1,7 224 76 Teleprotection signal sent
2 1,7 224 77 Teleprotection signal received
2 1,7 224 78 Zone 1
2 1,7 224 79 Zone 2
2 1,7 224 80 Zone 3
2 1,7 224 81 Zone 4
2 1,7 224 82 Zone 5
2 1,7 224 83 Zone 6
2 1,7,9 224 84 General Start * * * * Any Start 576
2 1,7 224 85 Breaker Failure * * * Breaker Fail Any Trip 294
2 1,7 224 86 Trip measuring system L1
2 1,7 224 87 Trip measuring system L2
2 1,7 224 88 Trip measuring system L3
2 1,7 224 89 Trip measuring system E
2 1,7 224 90 Trip I> * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph 477
2 1,7 224 91 Trip I>> * * * 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 481
2 1,7 224 92 Trip IN> * * * 1st Stage EF Trip 442
2 1,7 224 93 Trip IN>> * * * 2nd Stage EF Trip 443
Auto-Reclose Indications
1 1,7 224 128 CB 'on' by A/R
1 1,7 224 129 CB 'on' by long time A/R
1 1,7,9 224 130 AR blocked *
Measurands
3.1 2,7 224 144 Measurand I
3.2 2,7 224 145 Measurands I,V
3.3 2,7 224 146 Measurands I,V,P,Q
3.4 2,7 224 147 Measurands IN,VEN
Measurands
9 2,7 224 148 * * * Note unavailable measurands sent as invalid
IL1,2,3,VL1,2,3,P,Q,f
Generic Functions
10 42,43 224 240 Read Headings
Read attributes of all entries of a
10 42,43 224 241
group
10 42,43 224 243 Read directory of entry
1,2,7,9,11,12,
10 224 244 Real attribute of entry *
42,43
10 10 224 245 End of GGI
10 41,44 224 249 Write entry with confirm
10 40,41 224 250 Write entry with execute
10 40 224 251 Write entry aborted
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 106/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Compatible Range Information Numbers in Control Direction

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
System Functions
7 9 255 0 Init General Interrogation * * *
6 8 255 0 Time Synchronisation * * *
General Commands
20 20 224 16 Auto-recloser on/off Autoreclose in Service
20 20 224 17 Teleprotection on/off
20 20 224 18 Protection on/off
20 20 224 19 LED Reset * * * Reset Indications and Latches
20 20 224 23 Activate characteristic 1 * * * Activate Setting Group 1
20 20 224 24 Activate characteristic 2 * * * Activate Setting Group 2
20 20 224 25 Activate characteristic 3 * * * Activate Setting Group 3
20 20 224 26 Activate characteristic 4 * * * Activate Setting Group 4
Generic Functions
Read headings of all defined
21 42 224 240
groups
Read single attribute of all entries
21 42 224 241
of a group
21 42 224 243 Read directory of single entry
21 42 224 244 Read attribute of sngle entry
Generic General Interrogation
21 9 224 245
(GGI)
10 40 224 248 Write entry
10 40 224 249 Write with confirm
10 40 224 250 Write with execute
10 40 224 251 Write entry abort
Basic Application Functions
Test Mode * * * * *
Blocking of monitor direction * * * * *
Disturbance data * * * * *
Generic services * *
Private data * * * * *
Miscellaneous Max. MVAL = times rated value
Measurands 1.2 2.4
Current L1 *
Current L2 *
Current L3 *
Voltage L1-E *
Voltage L2-E *
Voltage L3-E *
Active Power P *
Reactive Power Q *
Frequency F *
Voltage L1-L2

Private Range Information Numbers in Monitor Direction

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Display Text (English) GI DDB Signal Description DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1,7,9 226 0 Contact 1 * * * * Output Relay 1 0
1 1,7,9 226 1 Contact 2 * * * * Output Relay 2 1
1 1,7,9 226 2 Contact 3 * * * * Output Relay 3 2
1 1,7,9 226 3 Contact 4 * * * * Output Relay 4 3
1 1,7,9 226 4 Contact 5 * * * * Output Relay 5 4
1 1,7,9 226 5 Contact 6 * * * * Output Relay 6 5
1 1,7,9 226 6 Contact 7 * * * * Output Relay 7 6
1 1,7,9 226 7 Contact 8 * * * * Output Relay 8 7
1 1,7,9 226 8 Contact 9 * * * * Output Relay 9 8
1 1,7,9 226 9 Contact 10 * * * * Output Relay 10 9
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 107/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1,7,9 226 10 Contact 11 * * * * Output Relay 11 10
1 1,7,9 226 11 Contact 12 * * * * Output Relay 12 11
1 1,7,9 226 12 Contact 13 * * * * Output Relay 13 12
1 1,7,9 226 13 Contact 14 * * * * Output Relay 14 13
1 1,7,9 226 14 Contact 15 * * * * Output Relay 15 14
1 1,7,9 226 15 Contact 16 * * * * Output Relay 16 15
1 1,7,9 226 16 Contact 17 * * * * Output Relay 17 16
1 1,7,9 226 17 Contact 18 * * * * Output Relay 18 17
1 1,7,9 226 18 Contact 19 * * * * Output Relay 19 18
1 1,7,9 226 19 Contact 20 * * * * Output Relay 20 19
1 1,7,9 226 20 Contact 21 * * * * Output Relay 21 20
1 1,7,9 226 21 Contact 22 * * * * Output Relay 22 21
1 1,7,9 226 22 Contact 23 * * * * Output Relay 23 22
1 1,7,9 226 23 Contact 24 * * * * Output Relay 24 23
1 1,7,9 226 24 Contact 25 * * Output Relay 25 24
1 1,7,9 226 25 Contact 26 * * Output Relay 26 25
1 1,7,9 226 26 Contact 27 * * Output Relay 27 26
1 1,7,9 226 27 Contact 28 * * Output Relay 28 27
1 1,7,9 226 28 Contact 29 * * Output Relay 29 28
1 1,7,9 226 29 Contact 30 * * Output Relay 30 29
1 1,7,9 226 30 Contact 31 * * Output Relay 31 30
1 1,7,9 226 31 Contact 32 * * Output Relay 32 31
1 1,7,9,11 224 27 Opto 1 * * * * Opto Input 1 32
1 1,7,9,11 224 28 Opto 2 * * * * Opto Input 2 33
1 1,7,9,11 224 29 Opto 3 * * * * Opto Input 3 34
1 1,7,9,11 224 30 Opto 4 * * * * Opto Input 4 35
1 1,7,9,11 226 36 Opto 5 * * * * Opto Input 5 36
1 1,7,9,11 226 37 Opto 6 * * * * Opto Input 6 37
1 1,7,9,11 226 38 Opto 7 * * * * Opto Input 7 38
1 1,7,9,11 226 39 Opto 8 * * * * Opto Input 8 39
1 1,7,9,11 226 40 Opto 9 * * * * Opto Input 9 40
1 1,7,9,11 226 41 Opto 10 * * * * Opto Input 10 41
1 1,7,9,11 226 42 Opto 11 * * * * Opto Input 11 42
1 1,7,9,11 226 43 Opto 12 * * * * Opto Input 12 43
1 1,7,9,11 226 44 Opto 13 * * * * Opto Input 13 44
1 1,7,9,11 226 45 Opto 14 * * * * Opto Input 14 45
1 1,7,9,11 226 46 Opto 15 * * * * Opto Input 15 46
1 1,7,9,11 226 47 Opto 16 * * * * Opto Input 16 47
1 1,7,9,11 226 48 Opto 17 * * * * Opto Input 17 48
1 1,7,9,11 226 49 Opto 18 * * * * Opto Input 18 49
1 1,7,9,11 226 50 Opto 19 * * * * Opto Input 19 50
1 1,7,9,11 226 51 Opto 20 * * * * Opto Input 20 51
1 1,7,9,11 226 52 Opto 21 * * * * Opto Input 21 52
1 1,7,9,11 226 53 Opto 22 * * * * Opto Input 22 53
1 1,7,9,11 226 54 Opto 23 * * * * Opto Input 23 54
1 1,7,9,11 226 55 Opto 24 * * * * Opto Input 24 55
1 1,7,9,11 226 56 Opto 25 * * Opto Input 25 56
1 1,7,9,11 226 57 Opto 26 * * Opto Input 26 57
1 1,7,9,11 226 58 Opto 27 * * Opto Input 27 58
1 1,7,9,11 226 59 Opto 28 * * Opto Input 28 59
1 1,7,9,11 226 60 Opto 29 * * Opto Input 29 60
1 1,7,9,11 226 61 Opto 30 * * Opto Input 30 61
1 1,7,9,11 226 62 Opto 31 * * Opto Input 31 62
1 1,7,9,11 226 63 Opto 32 * * Opto Input 32 63
226 64 LED 1 * * * Programmable LED 1 64
226 65 LED 2 * * * Programmable LED 2 65
226 66 LED 3 * * * Programmable LED 3 66
226 67 LED 4 * * * Programmable LED 4 67
226 68 LED 5 * * * Programmable LED 5 68
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 108/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
226 69 LED 6 * * * Programmable LED 6 69
226 70 LED 7 * * * Programmable LED 7 70
226 71 LED 8 * * * Programmable LED 8 71
226 72 72
226 73 73
226 74 74
226 75 75
226 76 76
226 77 77
226 78 78
226 79 79

Input to LED Output


226 80 LED Cond IN 1 * * * 80
Condition

Input to LED Output


226 81 LED Cond IN 2 * * * 81
Condition

Input to LED Output


226 82 LED Cond IN 3 * * * 82
Condition

Input to LED Output


226 83 LED Cond IN 4 * * * 83
Condition

Input to LED Output


226 84 LED Cond IN 5 * * * 84
Condition

Input to LED Output


226 85 LED Cond IN 6 * * * 85
Condition

Input to LED Output


226 86 LED Cond IN 7 * * * 86
Condition

Input to LED Output


226 87 LED Cond IN 8 * * * 87
Condition

226 88 88
226 89 89
226 90 90
226 91 91
226 92 92
226 93 93
226 94 94
226 95 95
226 96 96
226 97 97
226 98 98
226 99 99
226 100 100
226 101 101
226 102 102
226 103 103
226 104 104
226 105 105
226 106 106
226 107 107
226 108 108
226 109 109
226 110 110
226 111 111
226 112 112
226 113 113
226 114 114
226 115 115
226 116 116
226 117 117
226 118 118
226 119 119
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 109/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
226 120 120
226 121 121
226 122 122
226 123 123
226 124 124
226 125 125
226 126 126
226 127 127
226 128 128
226 129 129
226 130 130
226 131 131
226 132 132
226 133 133
226 134 134
226 135 135
226 136 136
226 137 137
226 138 138
226 139 139
226 140 140
226 141 141
226 142 142
226 143 143
226 144 144
226 145 145
226 146 146
226 147 147
226 148 148
226 149 149
226 150 150
226 151 151
226 152 152
226 153 153
226 154 154
226 155 155
226 156 156
226 157 157
226 158 158
226 159 159

Input to Relay Output


226 160 Relay Cond 1 * * * 160
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 161 Relay Cond 2 * * * 161
Condition

Input to Relay Output


2 1,7 224 68 Any Trip * * * 162
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 163 Relay Cond 4 * * * 163
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 164 Relay Cond 5 * * * 164
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 165 Relay Cond 6 * * * 165
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 166 Relay Cond 7 * * * 166
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 167 Relay Cond 8 * * * 167
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 168 Relay Cond 9 * * * 168
Condition
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 110/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

Input to Relay Output


226 169 Relay Cond 10 * * * 169
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 170 Relay Cond 11 * * * 170
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 171 Relay Cond 12 * * * 171
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 172 Relay Cond 13 * * * 172
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 173 Relay Cond 14 * * * 173
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 174 Relay Cond 15 * * * 174
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 175 Relay Cond 16 * * * 175
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 176 Relay Cond 17 * * * 176
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 177 Relay Cond 18 * * * 177
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 178 Relay Cond 19 * * * 178
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 179 Relay Cond 20 * * * 179
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 180 Relay Cond 21 * * * 180
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 181 Relay Cond 22 * * * 181
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 182 Relay Cond 23 * * * 182
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 183 Relay Cond 24 * * * 183
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 184 Relay Cond 25 * 184
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 185 Relay Cond 26 * 185
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 186 Relay Cond 27 * 186
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 187 Relay Cond 28 * 187
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 188 Relay Cond 29 * 188
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 189 Relay Cond 30 * 189
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 190 Relay Cond 31 * 190
Condition

Input to Relay Output


226 191 Relay Cond 32 * 191
Condition

226 192 192


226 193 193
226 194 194
226 195 195
226 196 196
226 197 197
226 198 198
226 199 199
226 200 200
226 201 201
226 202 202
226 203 203
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 111/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
226 204 204
226 205 205
226 206 206
226 207 207
226 208 208
226 209 209
226 210 210
226 211 211
226 212 212
226 213 213
226 214 214
226 215 215
226 216 216
226 217 217
226 218 218
226 219 219
226 220 220
226 221 221
226 222 222
226 223 223
226 224 Timer in 1 * * * Input to Auxiliary Timer 1 224
226 225 Timer in 2 * * * Input to Auxiliary Timer 2 225
226 226 Timer in 3 * * * Input to Auxiliary Timer 3 226
226 227 Timer in 4 * * * Input to Auxiliary Timer 4 227
226 228 Timer in 5 * * * Input to Auxiliary Timer 5 228
226 229 Timer in 6 * * * Input to Auxiliary Timer 6 229
226 230 Timer in 7 * * * Input to Auxiliary Timer 7 230
226 231 Timer in 8 * * * Input to Auxiliary Timer 8 231
226 232 232
226 233 233
226 234 234
226 235 235
226 236 236
226 237 237
226 238 238
226 239 239
226 240 240
226 241 241
226 242 242
226 243 243
226 244 244
226 245 245
226 246 246
226 247 247
226 248 248
226 249 249
226 250 250
226 251 251
226 252 252
226 253 253
226 254 254
226 255 255
227 0 Timer out 1 * * * Output from Auxiliary Timer 1 256
227 1 Timer out 2 * * * Output from Auxiliary Timer 2 257
227 2 Timer out 3 * * * Output from Auxiliary Timer 3 258
227 3 Timer out 4 * * * Output from Auxiliary Timer 4 259
227 4 Timer out 5 * * * Output from Auxiliary Timer 5 260
227 5 Timer out 6 * * * Output from Auxiliary Timer 6 261
227 6 Timer out 7 * * * Output from Auxiliary Timer 7 262
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 112/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
227 7 Timer out 8 * * * Output from Auxiliary Timer 8 263
227 8 264
227 9 265
227 10 266
227 11 267
227 12 268
227 13 269
227 14 270
227 15 271
227 16 272
227 17 273
227 18 274
227 19 275
227 20 276
227 21 277
227 22 278
227 23 279
227 24 280
227 25 281
227 26 282
227 27 283
227 28 284
227 29 285
227 30 286
227 31 287
227 32 Fault REC TRIG * * * Trigger for Fault Recorder 288
227 33 289
1 1,7,9 227 34 SG-opto Invalid * * * * Setting Group via opto invalid 290
1 9,11 224 21 Prot'n Disabled * * * * Test Mode Enabled Alarm 291
1 1,7,9 224 38 VT Fail Alarm * * * * VTS Indication 292
1 1,7,9 227 37 CT Fail Alarm * * * * CTS Indication 293
2 1,7 224 85 CB Fail Alarm * * * Breaker Fail Any Trip 294

Broken Current Maintenance


1 1,7,9 227 39 I^ Maint Alarm * * * * 295
Alarm

Broken Current Lockout


1 1,7,9 227 40 I^ Lockout Alarm * * * * 296
Alarm

No of CB Ops Maintenance
1 1,7,9 227 41 CB Ops Maint * * * * 297
Alarm

No of CB Ops Maintenance
1 1,7,9 227 42 CB Ops Lockout * * * * 298
Lockout

Excessive CB Op Time
1 1,7,9 227 43 CB Op Time Maint * * * * 299
Maintenance Alarm

Excessive CB Op Time
1 1,7,9 227 44 CB Op Time Lock * * * * 300
Lockout Alarm

Excessive Fault Frequency


1 1,7,9 227 45 Fault Freq Lock * * * * 301
Lockout Alarm

CB Status Alarm (Invalid CB


1 1,7,9 227 46 CB Status Alarm * * * * 302
auxilliary contacts)

1 1,7 227 47 Man CB Trip Fail * * * CB Failed to Trip Alarm 303


1 1,7 227 48 Man CB Cls Fail * * * CB Failed to Close Alarm 304

CB Unhealthy on Control
1 1,7 227 49 Man CB Unhealthy * * * 305
Close Alarm

1 1,7,9 227 50 F out of Range * * Frequency out of range 306

Negative Phase Sequence


1 1,7,9 227 50 NPS Alarm * * * 306
Alarm

1 1,7,9 227 51 Thermal Alarm * * * * Thermal Overload Alarm 307


1 1,7,9 227 52 V/Hz Alarm * * * Volts Per Hz Alarm 308
1 1,7,9 227 53 Field Fail Alarm * * * Field failure Alarm 309
1 1,7,9 227 54 RTD Thermal Alm * * * RTD thermal Alarm 310
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 113/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1,7,9 227 55 RTD Open Cct * * * RTD open circuit failure 311
1 1,7,9 227 56 RTD short Cct * * * RTD short circuit failure 312

1 1,7,9 227 57 RTD Data Error * * * RTD data inconsistency error 313

1 1,7,9 227 58 RTD Board Fail * * * RTD Board failure 314


1 1,7,9 227 59 Freq Prot Alm * * * * Frequency protection alarm 315
1 1,7,9 227 60 Voltage Prot Alm * * * * Voltage protection alarm 316
227 61 317
227 62 318
227 63 319
1 1,7,9 227 64 CL Card I/P Fail * * * * CLIO Card Input Failure 320
1 1,7,9 227 65 CL Card O/P Fail * * * * CLIO Card Output Failure 321
1 1,7,9 227 66 CL Input 1 Alarm * * * * Current Loop Input 1 Alarm 322
1 1,7,9 227 67 CL Input 2 Alarm * * * * Current Loop Input 2 Alarm 323
1 1,7,9 227 68 CL Input 3 Alarm * * * * Current Loop Input 3 Alarm 324
1 1,7,9 227 69 CL Input 4 Alarm * * * * Current Loop Input 4 Alarm 325

Current Loop Input 1


1 1,7,9 227 70 CLI1 I< Fail Alm * * * * 326
Undercurrent Fail Alarm

Current Loop Input 2


1 1,7,9 227 71 CLI2 I< Fail Alm * * * * 327
Undercurrent Fail Alarm

Current Loop Input 3


1 1,7,9 227 72 CLI3 I< Fail Alm * * * * 328
Undercurrent Fail Alarm

Current Loop Input 4


1 1,7,9 227 73 CLI4 I< Fail Alm * * * * 329
Undercurrent Fail Alarm

227 74 330
227 75 331
227 76 332
227 77 333
227 78 334
227 79 335

User Definable Alarm 16


1 1,7,9 227 80 MR User Alarm 16 * * * * 336
(Manual Reset)

User Definable Alarm 15


1 1,7,9 227 81 MR User Alarm 15 * * * * 337
(Manual Reset)

User Definable Alarm 14


1 1,7,9 227 82 MR User Alarm 14 * * * * 338
(Manual Reset)

User Definable Alarm 13


1 1,7,9 227 83 MR User Alarm 13 * * * * 339
(Manual Reset)

User Definable Alarm 12


1 1,7,9 227 84 MR User Alarm 12 * * * * 340
(Manual Reset)

User Definable Alarm 11


1 1,7,9 227 85 MR User Alarm 11 * * * * 341
(Manual Reset)

User Definable Alarm 10


1 1,7,9 227 86 MR User Alarm 10 * * * * 342
(Manual Reset)

User Definable Alarm 9


1 1,7,9 227 87 MR User Alarm 9 * * * * 343
(Manual Reset)

User Definable Alarm 8


1 1,7,9 227 88 MR User Alarm 8 * * * * 344
(Manual Reset)

User Definable Alarm 7


1 1,7,9 227 89 MR User Alarm 7 * * * * 345
(Manual Reset)

User Definable Alarm 6


1 1,7,9 227 90 MR User Alarm 6 * * * * 346
(Manual Reset)

User Definable Alarm 5


1 1,7,9 227 91 MR User Alarm 5 * * * * 347
(Manual Reset)

User Definable Alarm 4 (Self


1 1,7,9 227 92 SR User Alarm 4 * * * * 348
Reset)

User Definable Alarm 3 (Self


1 1,7,9 227 93 SR User Alarm 3 * * * * 349
Reset)
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 114/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

User Definable Alarm 2 (Self


1 1,7,9 227 94 SR User Alarm 2 * * * * 350
Reset)

User Definable Alarm 1 (Self


1 1,7,9 227 95 SR User Alarm 1 * * * * 351
Reset)

Block Voltage Dependent


227 96 VDepOC Timer Blk * * 352
time delay

Block Under Impedance time


227 97 UnderZ Timer Blk * * 353
delay

Block Phase Overcurrent


227 98 I>1 Timer Block * * * 354
Stage 1 time delay

Block Phase Overcurrent


227 99 I>2 Timer Block * * * 355
Stage 2 time delay

Block Phase Overcurrent


227 100 I>3 Timer Block * 356
Stage 3 time delay

Block Phase Overcurrent


227 101 I>4 Timer Block * 357
Stage 4 time delay

Block Earth Fault Stage 1 time


227 102 IN>1 Timer Blk * * * 358
delay

Block Earth Fault Stage 2 time


227 103 IN>2 Timer Blk * * * 359
delay

Block Earth Fault Stage 3 time


227 104 IN>3 Timer Blk * 360
delay

Block Earth Fault Stage 4 time


227 105 IN>4 Timer Blk * 361
delay

227 106 ISEF>1 Timer Blk * * * Block SEF Stage 1 time delay 362

227 107 ISEF>2 Timer Blk * Block SEF Stage 2 time delay 363

227 108 ISEF>3 Timer Blk * Block SEF Stage 3 time delay 364

227 109 ISEF>4 Timer Blk * Block SEF Stage 4 time delay 365

227 110 Init Trip CB * Logic Input Trip CB 366


227 111 Init Close CB * Logic Input Close CB 367

Block Residual Overvoltage


227 112 VN>1 Timer Blk * * * 368
Stage 1 time delay

Block Residual Overvoltage


227 113 VN>2 Timer Blk * * * 369
Stage 2 time delay

Block Phase Undervoltage


227 114 V<1 Timer Block * * * 370
Stage 1 time delay

Block Phase Undervoltage


227 115 V<2 Timer Block * * * 371
Stage 2 time delay

Block Phase Overvoltage


227 116 V>1 Timer Block * * * 372
Stage 1 time delay

Block Phase Overvoltage


227 117 V>2 Timer Block * * * 373
Stage 2 time delay

Block Underfrequency Stage


227 118 F<1 timer Block * * * 374
1 Timer

Block Underfrequency Stage


227 119 F<2 Timer Block * * * 375
2 Timer

Block Underfrequency Stage


227 120 F<3 Timer Block * * * 376
3 Timer

Block Underfrequency Stage


227 121 F<4 Timer Block * * * 377
4 Timer

Block Overfrequency Stage 1


227 122 F>1 Timer Block * * * 378
Timer
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 115/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

Block Overfrequency Stage 2


227 123 F>2 Timer Block * * * 379
Timer

227 124 Ext. Trip 3ph * * * External Trip 3ph 380


227 125 CB Aux 3ph(52-A) * * * 52-A (3 phase) 381
227 126 CB Aux 3ph(52-B) * * * 52-B (3 phase) 382
227 127 CB Healthy * * * CB Healthy 383
227 128 MCB/VTS * * * MCB/VTS opto 384

Reset Manual CB Close Time


227 129 Reset Close Dly * * * 385
Delay

227 130 Reset Relays/LED * * * Reset Latched Relays & LED’s 386
227 131 Reset Lockout * * * Reset Lockout Opto Input 387
227 132 Reset All Values * * * Reset CB Maintenance Values 388
227 133 Reset I2 Thermal * * Reset NPS Thermal State 389

227 134 Reset ThermalO/L * * * Reset Overload Thermal State 390

IEC60870-5-103 Monitor
1 9, 11 224 20 Monitor Blocked * * * * 391
Blocking

IEC60870-5-103 Command
1 9, 11 227 136 Command Blocked * * * * 392
Blocking

Block Current Loop Input 1


227 137 CL Input 1 Blk * * * 393
protection

Block Current Loop Input 2


227 138 CL Input 2 Blk * * * 394
protection

Block Current Loop Input 3


227 139 CL Input 3 Blk * * * 395
protection

Block Current Loop Input 4


227 140 CL Input 4 Blk * * * 396
protection

227 141 397


227 142 398
227 143 399
227 144 400
227 145 401
227 146 402
227 147 403
227 148 404
227 149 405
227 150 406
227 151 407
227 152 408
227 153 409
227 154 410
227 155 411
227 156 412
227 157 413
227 158 414
227 159 Test Mode * * * Input To Initiate Test Mode 415
2 1,7 227 160 100% ST EF Trip * 100% Stator Earth Fault Trip 416
2 1,7 227 161 DeadMachine Trip * Dead machine protection Trip 417

Generator Differential trip


2 1,7 227 162 Gen Diff Trip * 418
3ph

2 1,7 227 163 Gen Diff Trip A * Generator Differential Trip A 419
2 1,7 227 164 Gen Diff Trip B * Generator Differential Trip B 420
2 1,7 227 165 Gen Diff Trip C * Generator Differential Trip C 421
2 1,7 227 166 Field Fail1 Trip * * Field Failure Stage 1 Trip 422
2 1,7 227 167 Field Fail2 Trip * * Field Failure Stage 2 Trip 423

Negative Phase Sequence


2 1,7 227 168 NPS Trip * * 424
Trip

Voltage Dependent O/C Trip


2 1,7 227 169 V Dep OC Trip * * 425
3ph
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 116/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

Voltage Dependent O/C Trip


2 1,7 227 170 V Dep OC Trip A * * 426
A

Voltage Dependent O/C Trip


2 1,7 227 171 V Dep OC Trip B * * 427
B

Voltage Dependent O/C Trip


2 1,7 227 172 V Dep OC Trip C * * 428
C

2 1,7 227 173 V/Hz Trip * * Volts per Hz Trip 429


2 1,7 227 174 RTD 1 Trip * * RTD 1 TRIP 430
2 1,7 227 175 RTD 2 Trip * * RTD 2 TRIP 431
2 1,7 227 176 RTD 3 Trip * * RTD 3 TRIP 432
2 1,7 227 177 RTD 4 Trip * * RTD 4 TRIP 433
2 1,7 227 178 RTD 5 Trip * * RTD 5 TRIP 434
2 1,7 227 179 RTD 6 Trip * * RTD 6 TRIP 435
2 1,7 227 180 RTD 7 Trip * * RTD 7 TRIP 436
2 1,7 227 181 RTD 8 Trip * * RTD 8 TRIP 437
2 1,7 227 182 RTD 9 Trip * * RTD 9 TRIP 438
2 1,7 227 183 RTD 10 Trip * * RTD 10 TRIP 439
2 1,7 227 184 Any RTD Trip * * Any RTD Trip 440

Rate of change of frequency


2 1,7 227 184 df/dt Trip * 440
Trip

2 1,7 227 185 V Shift Trip * Voltage vector shift trip 441
2 1,7 224 92 IN>1 Trip * * * 1st Stage EF Trip 442
2 1,7 224 93 IN>2 Trip * * * 2nd Stage EF Trip 443
2 1,7 227 188 IN>3 Trip * 3rd Stage EF Trip 444
2 1,7 227 189 IN>4 Trip * 4th Stage EF Trip 445
2 1,7 227 190 IREF> Trip * * * REF Trip 446
2 1,7 227 191 ISEF>1 Trip * * * 1st Stage SEF Trip 447
2 1,7 227 192 ISEF>2 Trip * 2nd Stage SEF Trip 448
2 1,7 227 193 ISEF>3 Trip * 3rd Stage SEF Trip 449
2 1,7 227 194 ISEF>4 Trip * 4th Stage SEF Trip 450
2 1,7 227 195 VN>1 Trip * * * 1st Stage Residual O/V Trip 451
2 1,7 227 196 VN>2 Trip * * * 2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip 452

2 1,7 227 197 V<1 Trip * * * 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 453

1st Stage Phase U/V Trip


2 1,7 227 198 V<1 Trip A/AB * * * 454
A/AB

1st Stage Phase U/V Trip


2 1,7 227 199 V<1 Trip B/BC * * * 455
B/BC

1st Stage Phase U/V Trip


2 1,7 227 200 V<1 Trip C/CA * * * 456
C/CA

2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip


2 1,7 227 201 V<2 Trip * * * 457
3ph

2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip


2 1,7 227 202 V<2 Trip A/AB * * * 458
A/AB

2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip


2 1,7 227 203 V<2 Trip B/BC * * * 459
B/BC

2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip


2 1,7 227 204 V<2 Trip C/CA * * * 460
C/CA

2 1,7 227 205 V>1 Trip * * * 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 461

1st Stage Phase O/V Trip


2 1,7 227 206 V>1 Trip A/AB * * * 462
A/AB

1st Stage Phase O/V Trip


2 1,7 227 207 V>1 Trip B/BC * * * 463
B/BC

1st Stage Phase O/V Trip


2 1,7 227 208 V>1 Trip C/CA * * * 464
C/CA

2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip


2 1,7 227 209 V>2 Trip * * * 465
3ph
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 117/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip


2 1,7 227 210 V>2 Trip A/AB * * * 466
A/AB

2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip


2 1,7 227 211 V>2 Trip B/BC * * * 467
B/BC

2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip


2 1,7 227 212 V>2 Trip C/CA * * * 468
C/CA

2 1,7 227 213 F<1 Trip * * * Under frequency Stage 1 trip 469
2 1,7 227 214 F<2 Trip * * * Under frequency Stage 2 trip 470
2 1,7 227 215 F<3 Trip * * * Under frequency Stage 3 trip 471
2 1,7 227 216 F<4 Trip * * * Under frequency Stage 4 trip 472
2 1,7 227 217 F>1 Trip * * * Over frequency Stage 1 Trip 473
2 1,7 227 218 F>2 Trip * * * Over frequency Stage 2 Trip 474
2 1,7 227 219 Power1 Trip * * * Power stage 1 trip 475
2 1,7 227 220 Power2 Trip * * * Power stage 2 trip 476
2 1,7 224 90 I>1 Trip * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph 477
2 1,7 224 69 I>1 Trip A * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip A 478
2 1,7 224 70 I>1 Trip B * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip B 479
2 1,7 224 71 I>1 Trip C * * * 1st Stage O/C Trip C 480
2 1,7 224 91 I>2 Trip * * * 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 481
2 1,7 227 226 I>2 Trip A * * * 2nd Stage O/C Trip A 482
2 1,7 227 227 I>2 Trip B * * * 2nd Stage O/C Trip B 483
2 1,7 227 228 I>2 Trip C * * * 2nd Stage O/C Trip C 484
2 1,7 227 229 I>3 Trip * 3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 485
2 1,7 227 230 I>3 Trip A * 3rd Stage O/C Trip A 486
2 1,7 227 231 I>3 Trip B * 3rd Stage O/C Trip B 487
2 1,7 227 232 I>3 Trip C * 3rd Stage O/C Trip C 488
2 1,7 227 233 I>4 Trip * 4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph 489
2 1,7 227 234 I>4 Trip A * 4th Stage O/C Trip A 490
2 1,7 227 235 I>4 Trip B * 4th Stage O/C Trip B 491
2 1,7 227 236 I>4 Trip C * 4th Stage O/C Trip C 492
2 1,7 227 237 Bfail1 Trip 3ph * * * tBF1 Trip 3Ph 493
2 1,7 227 238 Bfail2 Trip 3ph * * * tBF2 Trip 3Ph 494

Sensitive A Phase Power Stage


2 1,7 227 239 SPower1 Trip * * * 495
1 Trip

Sensitive A Phase Power Stage


2 1,7 227 240 SPower2 Trip * * * 496
2 Trip

Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1


2 1,7 227 241 PSlipz Z1 Trip * 497
Trip

Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2


2 1,7 227 242 PSlipz Z2 Trip * 498
Trip

2 1,7 227 243 Thermal O/L Trip * * * Thermal Overload Trip 499

Under Impedance Stage 1


2 1,7 227 244 Z<1 Trip * * 500
Trip 3 Ph

Under Impedance Stage 1


2 1,7 227 245 Z<1 Trip A * * 501
Trip A

Under Impedance Stage 1


2 1,7 227 246 Z<1 Trip B * * 502
Trip B

Under Impedance Stage 1


2 1,7 227 247 Z<1 Trip C * * 503
Trip C

Under Impedance Stage 2


2 1,7 227 248 Z<2 Trip * * 504
Trip 3 Ph

Under Impedance Stage 2


2 1,7 227 249 Z<2 Trip A * * 505
Trip A

Under Impedance Stage 2


2 1,7 227 250 Z<2 Trip B * * 506
Trip B

Under Impedance Stage 2


2 1,7 227 251 Z<2 Trip C * * 507
Trip C

2 1,7 227 252 CL Input 1 Trip * * * Current Loop Input 1 Trip 508
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 118/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 1,7 227 253 CL Input 2 Trip * * * Current Loop Input 2 Trip 509
2 1,7 227 254 CL Input 3 Trip * * * Current Loop Input 3 Trip 510
2 1,7 227 255 CL Input 4 Trip * * * Current Loop Input 4 Trip 511
228 0 512
228 1 513
228 2 514
228 3 515
228 4 516
228 5 517
228 6 518
228 7 519
228 8 520
228 9 521
228 10 522
228 11 523
228 12 524
228 13 525
228 14 526
228 15 527
228 16 528
228 17 529
228 18 530
228 19 531
228 20 532
228 21 533
228 22 534
228 23 535
228 24 536
228 25 537
228 26 538
228 27 539
228 28 540
228 29 541
228 30 542
228 31 543
228 32 544
228 33 545
228 34 546
228 35 547
228 36 548
228 37 549
228 38 550
228 39 551
228 40 552
228 41 553
228 42 554
228 43 555
228 44 556
228 45 557
228 46 558
228 47 559
228 48 560
228 49 561
228 50 562
228 51 563
228 52 564
228 53 565
228 54 566
228 55 567
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 119/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
228 56 568
228 57 569
228 58 570
228 59 571
228 60 572
228 61 573
228 62 574
228 63 575
2 1,7,9 224 84 Any Start * * * * Any Start 576
2 1,7,9 228 65 VN>1 Start * * * * 1st Stage Residual O/V Start 577
2 1,7,9 228 66 VN>2 Start * * * * 2nd Stage Residual O/V Start 578
2 1,7,9 228 67 V<1 Start * * * * 1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 579

1st Stage Phase U/V Start


2 1,7,9 228 68 V<1 Start A/AB * * * * 580
A/AB

1st Stage Phase U/V Start


2 1,7,9 228 69 V<1 Start B/BC * * * * 581
B/BC

1st Stage Phase U/V Start


2 1,7,9 228 70 V<1 Start C/CA * * * * 582
C/CA

2nd Stage Phase U/V Start


2 1,7,9 228 71 V<2 Start * * * * 583
3ph

2nd Stage Phase U/V Start


2 1,7,9 228 72 V<2 Start A/AB * * * * 584
A/AB

2nd Stage Phase U/V Start


2 1,7,9 228 73 V<2 Start B/BC * * * * 585
B/BC

2nd Stage Phase U/V Start


2 1,7,9 228 74 V<2 Start C/CA * * * * 586
C/CA

1st Stage Phase O/V Start


2 1,7,9 228 75 V>1 Start * * * * 587
3ph

1st Stage Phase O/V Start


2 1,7,9 228 76 V>1 Start A/AB * * * * 588
A/AB

1st Stage Phase O/V Start


2 1,7,9 228 77 V>1 Start B/BC * * * * 589
B/BC

1st Stage Phase O/V Start


2 1,7,9 228 78 V>1 Start C/CA * * * * 590
C/CA

2nd Stage Phase O/V Start


2 1,7,9 228 79 V>2 Start * * * * 591
3ph

2nd Stage Phase O/V Start


2 1,7,9 228 80 V>2 Start A/AB * * * * 592
A/AB

2nd Stage Phase O/V Start


2 1,7,9 228 81 V>2 Start B/BC * * * * 593
B/BC

2nd Stage Phase O/V Start


2 1,7,9 228 82 V>2 Start C/CA * * * * 594
C/CA

2 1,7,9 228 83 Power1 Start * * * * Power Stage 1 start 595


2 1,7,9 228 84 Power2 Start * * * * Power stage 1 start 596
2 1,7,9 228 85 I>1 Start * * * * 1st Stage O/C Start 3ph 597
2 1,7,9 224 64 I>1 Start A * * * * 1st Stage O/C Start A 598
2 1,7,9 224 65 I>1 Start B * * * * 1st Stage O/C Start B 599
2 1,7,9 224 66 I>1 Start C * * * * 1st Stage O/C Start C 600
2 1,7,9 228 89 I>2 Start * * * * 2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph 601
2 1,7,9 228 90 I>2 Start A * * * * 2nd Stage O/C Start A 602
2 1,7,9 228 91 I>2 Start B * * * * 2nd Stage O/C Start B 603
2 1,7,9 228 92 I>2 Start C * * * * 2nd Stage O/C Start C 604
2 1,7,9 228 93 I>3 Start * * 3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph 605
2 1,7,9 228 94 I>3 Start A * * 3rd Stage O/C Start A 606
2 1,7,9 228 95 I>3 Start B * * 3rd Stage O/C Start B 607
2 1,7,9 228 96 I>3 Start C * * 3rd Stage O/C Start C 608
2 1,7,9 228 97 I>4 Start * * 4th Stage O/C Start 3ph 609
2 1,7,9 228 98 I>4 Start A * * 4th Stage O/C Start A 610
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 120/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
2 1,7,9 228 99 I>4 Start B * * 4th Stage O/C Start B 611
2 1,7,9 228 100 I>4 Start C * * 4th Stage O/C Start C 612
2 1,7,9 224 67 IN>1 Start * * * * 1st Stage EF Start 613
2 1,7,9 228 102 IN>2 Start * * * * 2nd Stage EF Start 614
2 1,7,9 228 103 IN>3 Start * * 3rd Stage EF Start 615
2 1,7,9 228 104 IN>4 Start * * 4th Stage EF Start 616
2 1,7,9 228 105 ISEF>1 Start * * * * 1st Stage SEF Start 617
2 1,7,9 228 106 ISEF>2 Start * * 2nd Stage SEF Start 618
2 1,7,9 228 107 ISEF>3 Start * * 3rd Stage SEF Start 619
2 1,7,9 228 108 ISEF>4 Start * * 4th Stage SEF Start 620
2 1,7,9 228 109 100% ST EF Start * * 100% Stator Earth Fault Start 621

Under frequency Stage 1


2 1,7,9 228 110 F<1 Start * * * * 622
START

Under frequency Stage 2


2 1,7,9 228 111 F<2 Start * * * * 623
START

Under frequency Stage 3


2 1,7,9 228 112 F<3 Start * * * * 624
START

Under frequency Stage 4


2 1,7,9 228 113 F<4 Start * * * * 625
START

Over frequency Stage 1


2 1,7,9 228 114 F>1 Start * * * * 626
START

Over frequency Stage 2


2 1,7,9 228 115 F>2 Start * * * * 627
START

I> Blocked O/C Start,


2 1,7,9 228 116 I> BlockStart * * 628
inhibited by CB Fail

IN/ISEF> Blocked O/C Start,


2 1,7,9 228 117 IN/SEF>Blk Start * * 629
inhibited by CB Fail

Rate of change of frequency


2 1,7,9 228 118 df/dt Start * * 630
Start

228 119 IA< Start * * * * IA< operate 631


228 120 IB< Start * * * * IB< operate 632
228 121 IC< Start * * * * IC< operate 633
228 122 ISEF< Start * * * * ISEF< operate 634
228 123 IN< Start * * * IN< operate 635
2 1,7,9 228 124 V/Hz Start * * * Volts per Hz Start 636
2 1,7,9 228 125 FFail1 Start * * * Field failure Stage 1 start 637
2 1,7,9 228 126 FFail2 Start * * * Field failure Stage 2 start 638

Voltage Dependent
2 1,7,9 228 127 V Dep OC Start * * * 639
Overcurrent Start

Voltage Dependent
2 1,7,9 228 128 V Dep OC Start A * * * 640
Overcurrent Start A

Voltage Dependent
2 1,7,9 228 129 V Dep OC Start B * * * 641
Overcurrent Start B

Voltage Dependent
2 1,7,9 228 130 V Dep OC Start C * * * 642
Overcurrent Start C

Sensitive A Phase Power Stage


2 1,7,9 228 131 SPower1 Start * * * * 643
1 Start

Sensitive A Phase Power Stage


2 1,7,9 228 132 SPower2 Start * * * * 644
2 Start

Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1


2 1,7,9 228 133 PSlipz Z1 Start * * 645
Start

Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2


2 1,7,9 228 134 PSlipz Z2 Start * * 646
Start

Pole Slip (impedance) Lens


2 1,7,9 228 135 PSlipz LensStart * * 647
Start

Pole Slip (impedance) Blinder


2 1,7,9 228 136 PSlipz BlindStrt * * 648
Start
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 121/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6

Pole Slip (impedance)


2 1,7,9 228 137 PSlipz ReactStrt * * 649
Reactance Line Start

Under Impedance Stage 1


2 1,7,9 228 138 Z<1 Start * * * 650
Start

Under Impedance Stage 1


2 1,7,9 228 139 Z<1 Start A * * * 651
Start A

Under Impedance Stage 1


2 1,7,9 228 140 Z<1 Start B * * * 652
Start B

Under Impedance Stage 1


2 1,7,9 228 141 Z<1 Start C * * * 653
Start C

Under Impedance Stage 2


2 1,7,9 228 142 Z<2 Start * * * 654
Start

Under Impedance Stage 2


2 1,7,9 228 143 Z<2 Start A * * * 655
Start A

Under Impedance Stage 2


2 1,7,9 228 144 Z<2 Start B * * * 656
Start B

Under Impedance Stage 2


2 1,7,9 228 145 Z<2 Start C * * * 657
Start C

Current Loop Input 1 Alarm


2 1,7,9 228 146 CLI1 Alarm Start * * * * 658
Start

Current Loop Input 2 Alarm


2 1,7,9 228 147 CLI2 Alarm Start * * * * 659
Start

Current Loop Input 3 Alarm


2 1,7,9 228 148 CLI3 Alarm Start * * * * 660
Start

Current Loop Input 4 Alarm


2 1,7,9 228 149 CLI4 Alarm Start * * * * 661
Start

Current Loop Input 1 Trip


2 1,7,9 228 150 CLI1 Trip Start * * * * 662
Start

Current Loop Input 2 Trip


2 1,7,9 228 151 CLI2 Trip Start * * * * 663
Start

Current Loop Input 3 Trip


2 1,7,9 228 152 CLI3 Trip Start * * * * 664
Start

Current Loop Input 4 Trip


2 1,7,9 228 153 CLI4 Trip Start * * * * 665
Start

228 154 666


228 155 667
228 156 668
228 157 669
228 158 670
228 159 671
228 160 672
228 161 673
228 162 674
228 163 675
228 164 676
228 165 677
228 166 678
228 167 679
228 168 680
228 169 681
228 170 682
228 171 683
228 172 684
228 173 685
228 174 686
228 175 687
228 176 688
228 177 689
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 122/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
228 178 690
228 179 691
228 180 692
228 181 693
228 182 694
228 183 695
228 184 696
228 185 697
228 186 698
228 187 699
228 188 700
228 189 701
228 190 702
228 191 703
228 192 704
228 193 705
228 194 706
228 195 707
228 196 708
228 197 709
228 198 710
228 199 711
228 200 712
228 201 713
228 202 714
228 203 715
228 204 716
228 205 717
228 206 718
228 207 719
228 208 720
228 209 721
228 210 722
228 211 723
228 212 724
228 213 725
228 214 726
228 215 727
228 216 728
228 217 729
228 218 730
228 219 731
228 220 732
228 221 733
228 222 734
228 223 735
228 224 VTS Fast Block * * * VTS Fast Block 736
228 225 VTS Slow Block * * * VTS Slow Block 737
228 226 CTS Block * * * CTS Block 738
1 1,7 228 227 Control Trip * Control Trip 739
1 1,7 228 228 Control Close * Control Close 740
1 1,7 228 229 Close in Prog * Control Close in Progress 741

Reconnection Time Delay


1 1,7 228 230 Reconnection * 742
Output

1 1,7,9 228 231 RTD 1 Alarm * * * RTD 1 Alarm 743


1 1,7,9 228 232 RTD 2 Alarm * * * RTD 2 Alarm 744
1 1,7,9 228 233 RTD 3 Alarm * * * RTD 3 Alarm 745
1 1,7,9 228 234 RTD 4 Alarm * * * RTD 4 Alarm 746
1 1,7,9 228 235 RTD 5 Alarm * * * RTD 5 Alarm 747
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 123/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 1,7,9 228 236 RTD 6 Alarm * * * RTD 6 Alarm 748
1 1,7,9 228 237 RTD 7 Alarm * * * RTD 7 Alarm 749
1 1,7,9 228 238 RTD 8 Alarm * * * RTD 8 Alarm 750
1 1,7,9 228 239 RTD 9 Alarm * * * RTD 9 Alarm 751
1 1,7,9 228 240 RTD 10 Alarm * * * RTD 10 Alarm 752
228 241 Lockout Alarm * * * * Composite lockout alarm 753
1 1,7,9 228 242 CB Open 3 ph * * * * 3 ph CB Open 754
1 1,7,9 228 243 CB Closed 3 ph * * * * 3 ph CB Closed 755

Field Voltage Failure (Alarm


1 1,7,9 228 244 Field volts fail * * * * 756
66)

228 245 All Poles Dead * * * All Poles Dead 757


228 246 Any Pole Dead * * * Any Pole Dead 758
228 247 Pole Dead A * * * Phase A Pole Dead 759
228 248 Pole Dead B * * * Phase B Pole Dead 760
228 249 Pole Dead C * * * Phase C Pole Dead 761
228 250 VTS Acc Ind * * * Accelerate Ind 762
228 251 VTS Volt Dep * * * Any Voltage Dependent 763
228 252 VTS IA> * * * Ia over threshold 764
228 253 VTS IB> * * * Ib over threshold 765
228 254 VTS IC> * * * Ic over threshold 766
228 255 VTS VA> * * * Va over threshold 767
229 0 VTS VB> * * * Vb over threshold 768
229 1 VTS VC> * * * Vc over threshold 769
229 2 VTS I2> * * * I2 over threshold 770
229 3 VTS V2> * * * V2 over threshold 771

Superimposed Ia over
229 4 VTS IA delta> * * * 772
threshold

Superimposed Ib over
229 5 VTS IB delta> * * * 773
threshold

Superimposed Ic over
229 6 VTS IC delta> * * * 774
threshold

CBF current prot SEF stage


229 7 BFail SEF Trip-1 * * * 775
trip

CBF non current prot stage


229 8 BFail Non I Tr-1 * * * 776
trip

229 9 BFail SEF Trip * * * CBF current Prot SEF Trip 777
229 10 BFail Non I Trip * * * CBF Non Current Prot Trip 778
229 11 Freq High * * * Freq High 779
229 12 Freq Low * * * Freq Low 780
229 13 Freq Not found * * * Freq Not found 781
229 14 Stop Freq Track * * * Stop Freq Track 782
1 1,7 229 15 Recon LOM-1 * Reconnect LOM (unqualified) 783

Reconnect Disable
1 1,7 229 16 Recon Disable-1 * 784
(unqualified)

1 1,7 229 17 Recon LOM * Reconnect LOM 785


1 1,7 229 18 Recon Disable * Reconnect Disable 786
229 19 787
229 20 788
229 21 789
229 22 790
229 23 791
229 24 792
229 25 793
229 26 794
229 27 795
229 28 796
229 29 797
229 30 798
229 31 799
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 124/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
229 32 800
229 33 801
229 34 802
229 35 803
229 36 804
229 37 805
229 38 806
229 39 807
229 40 808
229 41 809
229 42 810
229 43 811
229 44 812
229 45 813
229 46 814
229 47 815
229 48 816
229 49 817
229 50 818
229 51 819
229 52 820
229 53 821
229 54 822
229 55 823
229 56 824
229 57 825
229 58 826
229 59 827
229 60 828
229 61 829
229 62 830
229 63 831
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 64 Control Input 1 * * * * Control Input 832
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 65 Control Input 2 * * * * Control Input 833
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 66 Control Input 3 * * * * Control Input 834
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 67 Control Input 4 * * * * Control Input 835
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 68 Control Input 5 * * * * Control Input 836
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 69 Control Input 6 * * * * Control Input 837
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 70 Control Input 7 * * * * Control Input 838
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 71 Control Input 8 * * * * Control Input 839
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 72 Control Input 9 * * * * Control Input 840
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 73 Control Input 10 * * * * Control Input 841
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 74 Control Input 11 * * * * Control Input 842
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 75 Control Input 12 * * * * Control Input 843
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 76 Control Input 13 * * * * Control Input 844
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 77 Control Input 14 * * * * Control Input 845
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 78 Control Input 15 * * * * Control Input 846
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 79 Control Input 16 * * * * Control Input 847
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 80 Control Input 17 * * * * Control Input 848
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 81 Control Input 18 * * * * Control Input 849
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 82 Control Input 19 * * * * Control Input 850
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 83 Control Input 20 * * * * Control Input 851
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 84 Control Input 21 * * * * Control Input 852
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 85 Control Input 22 * * * * Control Input 853
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 86 Control Input 23 * * * * Control Input 854
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 87 Control Input 24 * * * * Control Input 855
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 88 Control Input 25 * * * * Control Input 856
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 89 Control Input 26 * * * * Control Input 857
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 90 Control Input 27 * * * * Control Input 858
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 125/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 91 Control Input 28 * * * * Control Input 859
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 92 Control Input 29 * * * * Control Input 860
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 93 Control Input 30 * * * * Control Input 861
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 94 Control Input 31 * * * * Control Input 862
1 9,11,12,20,21 229 95 Control Input 32 * * * * Control Input 863
229 96 GOOSE VIP 1 864
229 97 GOOSE VIP 2 865
229 98 GOOSE VIP 3 866
229 99 GOOSE VIP 4 867
229 100 GOOSE VIP 5 868
229 101 GOOSE VIP 6 869
229 102 GOOSE VIP 7 870
229 103 GOOSE VIP 8 871
229 104 GOOSE VIP 9 872
229 105 GOOSE VIP 10 873
229 106 GOOSE VIP 11 874
229 107 GOOSE VIP 12 875
229 108 GOOSE VIP 13 876
229 109 GOOSE VIP 14 877
229 110 GOOSE VIP 15 878
229 111 GOOSE VIP 16 879
229 112 GOOSE VIP 17 880
229 113 GOOSE VIP 18 881
229 114 GOOSE VIP 19 882
229 115 GOOSE VIP 20 883
229 116 GOOSE VIP 21 884
229 117 GOOSE VIP 22 885
229 118 GOOSE VIP 23 886
229 119 GOOSE VIP 24 887
229 120 GOOSE VIP 25 888
229 121 GOOSE VIP 26 889
229 122 GOOSE VIP 27 890
229 123 GOOSE VIP 28 891
229 124 GOOSE VIP 29 892
229 125 GOOSE VIP 30 893
229 126 GOOSE VIP 31 894
229 127 GOOSE VIP 32 895
229 128 GOOSE VOP 1 896
229 129 GOOSE VOP 2 897
229 130 GOOSE VOP 3 898
229 131 GOOSE VOP 4 899
229 132 GOOSE VOP 5 900
229 133 GOOSE VOP 6 901
229 134 GOOSE VOP 7 902
229 135 GOOSE VOP 8 903
229 136 InterLogic I/P 1 904
229 137 InterLogic I/P 2 905
229 138 InterLogic I/P 3 906
229 139 InterLogic I/P 4 907
229 140 InterLogic I/P 5 908
229 141 InterLogic I/P 6 909
229 142 InterLogic I/P 7 910
229 143 InterLogic I/P 8 911
229 144 InterLogic O/P 1 912
229 145 InterLogic O/P 2 913
229 146 InterLogic O/P 3 914
229 147 InterLogic O/P 4 915
229 148 InterLogic O/P 5 916
229 149 InterLogic O/P 6 917
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 126/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
229 150 InterLogic O/P 7 918
229 151 InterLogic O/P 8 919
229 152 Direct Ctrl 1 920
229 153 Direct Ctrl 2 921
229 154 Direct Ctrl 3 922
229 155 Direct Ctrl 4 923
229 156 Direct Ctrl 5 924
229 157 Direct Ctrl 6 925
229 158 Direct Ctrl 7 926
229 159 Direct Ctrl 8 927
229 160 PSL Int. 1 * * * PSL Internal Node 1 928
229 161 PSL Int. 2 * * * PSL Internal Node 2 929
229 162 PSL Int. 3 * * * PSL Internal Node 3 930
229 163 PSL Int. 4 * * * PSL Internal Node 4 931
229 164 PSL Int. 5 * * * PSL Internal Node 5 932
229 165 PSL Int. 6 * * * PSL Internal Node 6 933
229 166 PSL Int. 7 * * * PSL Internal Node 7 934
229 167 PSL Int. 8 * * * PSL Internal Node 8 935
229 168 PSL Int. 9 * * * PSL Internal Node 9 936
229 169 PSL Int. 10 * * * PSL Internal Node 10 937
229 170 PSL Int. 11 * * * PSL Internal Node 11 938
229 171 PSL Int. 12 * * * PSL Internal Node 12 939
229 172 PSL Int. 13 * * * PSL Internal Node 13 940
229 173 PSL Int. 14 * * * PSL Internal Node 14 941
229 174 PSL Int. 15 * * * PSL Internal Node 15 942
229 175 PSL Int. 16 * * * PSL Internal Node 16 943
229 176 PSL Int. 17 * * * PSL Internal Node 17 944
229 177 PSL Int. 18 * * * PSL Internal Node 18 945
229 178 PSL Int. 19 * * * PSL Internal Node 19 946
229 179 PSL Int. 20 * * * PSL Internal Node 20 947
229 180 PSL Int. 21 * * * PSL Internal Node 21 948
229 181 PSL Int. 22 * * * PSL Internal Node 22 949
229 182 PSL Int. 23 * * * PSL Internal Node 23 950
229 183 PSL Int. 24 * * * PSL Internal Node 24 951
229 184 PSL Int. 25 * * * PSL Internal Node 25 952
229 185 PSL Int. 26 * * * PSL Internal Node 26 953
229 186 PSL Int. 27 * * * PSL Internal Node 27 954
229 187 PSL Int. 28 * * * PSL Internal Node 28 955
229 188 PSL Int. 29 * * * PSL Internal Node 29 956
229 189 PSL Int. 30 * * * PSL Internal Node 30 957
229 190 PSL Int. 31 * * * PSL Internal Node 31 958
229 191 PSL Int. 32 * * * PSL Internal Node 32 959
229 192 PSL Int. 33 * * * PSL Internal Node 33 960
229 193 PSL Int. 34 * * * PSL Internal Node 34 961
229 194 PSL Int. 35 * * * PSL Internal Node 35 962
229 195 PSL Int. 36 * * * PSL Internal Node 36 963
229 196 PSL Int. 37 * * * PSL Internal Node 37 964
229 197 PSL Int. 38 * * * PSL Internal Node 38 965
229 198 PSL Int. 39 * * * PSL Internal Node 39 966
229 199 PSL Int. 40 * * * PSL Internal Node 40 967
229 200 PSL Int. 41 * * * PSL Internal Node 41 968
229 201 PSL Int. 42 * * * PSL Internal Node 42 969
229 202 PSL Int. 43 * * * PSL Internal Node 43 970
229 203 PSL Int. 44 * * * PSL Internal Node 44 971
229 204 PSL Int. 45 * * * PSL Internal Node 45 972
229 205 PSL Int. 46 * * * PSL Internal Node 46 973
229 206 PSL Int. 47 * * * PSL Internal Node 47 974
229 207 PSL Int. 48 * * * PSL Internal Node 48 975
229 208 PSL Int. 49 * * * PSL Internal Node 49 976
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 127/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
229 209 PSL Int. 50 * * * PSL Internal Node 50 977
229 210 PSL Int. 51 * * * PSL Internal Node 51 978
229 211 PSL Int. 52 * * * PSL Internal Node 52 979
229 212 PSL Int. 53 * * * PSL Internal Node 53 980
229 213 PSL Int. 54 * * * PSL Internal Node 54 981
229 214 PSL Int. 55 * * * PSL Internal Node 55 982
229 215 PSL Int. 56 * * * PSL Internal Node 56 983
229 216 PSL Int. 57 * * * PSL Internal Node 57 984
229 217 PSL Int. 58 * * * PSL Internal Node 58 985
229 218 PSL Int. 59 * * * PSL Internal Node 59 986
229 219 PSL Int. 60 * * * PSL Internal Node 60 987
229 220 PSL Int. 61 * * * PSL Internal Node 61 988
229 221 PSL Int. 62 * * * PSL Internal Node 62 989
229 222 PSL Int. 63 * * * PSL Internal Node 63 990
229 223 PSL Int. 64 * * * PSL Internal Node 64 991
229 224 PSL Int. 65 * * * PSL Internal Node 65 992
229 225 PSL Int. 66 * * * PSL Internal Node 66 993
229 226 PSL Int. 67 * * * PSL Internal Node 67 994
229 227 PSL Int. 68 * * * PSL Internal Node 68 995
229 228 PSL Int. 69 * * * PSL Internal Node 69 996
229 229 PSL Int. 70 * * * PSL Internal Node 70 997
229 230 PSL Int. 71 * * * PSL Internal Node 71 998
229 231 PSL Int. 72 * * * PSL Internal Node 72 999
229 232 PSL Int. 73 * * * PSL Internal Node 73 1000
229 233 PSL Int. 74 * * * PSL Internal Node 74 1001
229 234 PSL Int. 75 * * * PSL Internal Node 75 1002
229 235 PSL Int. 76 * * * PSL Internal Node 76 1003
229 236 PSL Int. 77 * * * PSL Internal Node 77 1004
229 237 PSL Int. 78 * * * PSL Internal Node 78 1005
229 238 PSL Int. 79 * * * PSL Internal Node 79 1006
229 239 PSL Int. 80 * * * PSL Internal Node 80 1007
229 240 PSL Int. 81 * * * PSL Internal Node 81 1008
229 241 PSL Int. 82 * * * PSL Internal Node 82 1009
229 242 PSL Int. 83 * * * PSL Internal Node 83 1010
229 243 PSL Int. 84 * * * PSL Internal Node 84 1011
229 244 PSL Int. 85 * * * PSL Internal Node 85 1012
229 245 PSL Int. 86 * * * PSL Internal Node 86 1013
229 246 PSL Int. 87 * * * PSL Internal Node 87 1014
229 247 PSL Int. 88 * * * PSL Internal Node 88 1015
229 248 PSL Int. 89 * * * PSL Internal Node 89 1016
229 249 PSL Int. 90 * * * PSL Internal Node 90 1017
229 250 PSL Int. 91 * * * PSL Internal Node 91 1018
229 251 PSL Int. 92 * * * PSL Internal Node 92 1019
229 252 PSL Int. 93 * * * PSL Internal Node 93 1020
229 253 PSL Int. 94 * * * PSL Internal Node 94 1021
229 254 PSL Int. 95 * * * PSL Internal Node 95 1022
1 1,7 229 255 Battery Fail * * * (Alarm 65)
230 0 Unused (Alarm 67)
1 1,7 230 1 GOOSE IED Absent * * * (Alarm 68)
1 1,7 230 2 NIC not fitted * * * (Alarm 69)
1 1,7 230 3 NIC no response * * * (Alarm 70)
1 1,7 230 4 NIC fatal error * * * (Alarm 71)
1 1,7 230 5 NIC Software Reload * * * (Alarm 72)
1 1,7 230 6 Bad TCP/IP Configuration * * * (Alarm 73)
1 1,7 230 7 Bad OSI Configuration * * * (Alarm 74)
1 1,7 230 8 NIC Link Fail * * * (Alarm 75)
1 1,7 230 9 NIC SW-Mismatch * * * (Alarm 76)
1 1,7 230 10 IP addr conflict * * * (Alarm 77)
230 11 Unused (Alarm 78)
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 128/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
230 12 Unused (Alarm 79)
230 13 Unused (Alarm 80)
230 14 Unused (Alarm 81)
230 15 Unused (Alarm 82)
230 16 Unused (Alarm 83)
230 17 Unused (Alarm 84)
230 18 Unused (Alarm 85)
230 19 Unused (Alarm 86)
230 20 Unused (Alarm 87)
230 21 Unused (Alarm 88)
230 22 Unused (Alarm 89)
230 23 Unused (Alarm 90)
230 24 Unused (Alarm 91)
230 25 Unused (Alarm 92)
230 26 Unused (Alarm 93)
230 27 Unused (Alarm 94)
230 28 Unused (Alarm 95)
230 29 Unused (Alarm 96)

Private Range Information Numbers in Control Direction

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Display Text (English) GI DDB Signal Description DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
20 20 229 64 Control Input 1 * * * Control Input 832
20 20 229 65 Control Input 2 * * * Control Input 833
20 20 229 66 Control Input 3 * * * Control Input 834
20 20 229 67 Control Input 4 * * * Control Input 835
20 20 229 68 Control Input 5 * * * Control Input 836
20 20 229 69 Control Input 6 * * * Control Input 837
20 20 229 70 Control Input 7 * * * Control Input 838
20 20 229 71 Control Input 8 * * * Control Input 839
20 20 229 72 Control Input 9 * * * Control Input 840
20 20 229 73 Control Input 10 * * * Control Input 841
20 20 229 74 Control Input 11 * * * Control Input 842
20 20 229 75 Control Input 12 * * * Control Input 843
20 20 229 76 Control Input 13 * * * Control Input 844
20 20 229 77 Control Input 14 * * * Control Input 845
20 20 229 78 Control Input 15 * * * Control Input 846
20 20 229 79 Control Input 16 * * * Control Input 847
20 20 229 80 Control Input 17 * * * Control Input 848
20 20 229 81 Control Input 18 * * * Control Input 849
20 20 229 82 Control Input 19 * * * Control Input 850
20 20 229 83 Control Input 20 * * * Control Input 851
20 20 229 84 Control Input 21 * * * Control Input 852
20 20 229 85 Control Input 22 * * * Control Input 853
20 20 229 86 Control Input 23 * * * Control Input 854
20 20 229 87 Control Input 24 * * * Control Input 855
20 20 229 88 Control Input 25 * * * Control Input 856
20 20 229 89 Control Input 26 * * * Control Input 857
20 20 229 90 Control Input 27 * * * Control Input 858
20 20 229 91 Control Input 28 * * * Control Input 859
20 20 229 92 Control Input 29 * * * Control Input 860
20 20 229 93 Control Input 30 * * * Control Input 861
20 20 229 94 Control Input 31 * * * Control Input 862
20 20 229 95 Control Input 32 * * * Control Input 863
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 129/170

Inf. Model Number


ASDU TYPE COT FUN Description GI Interpretation DDB Ordinal
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6
Disturbance Data Actual Channel Identifiers
ACC Standard Interpretation
0 Global Null Channel
1 IL1 IA
2 IL2 IB
3 IL3 IC
4 IN IN
5 VL1E VAN
6 VL2E VBN
7 VL3E VCN
8 VEN VN
64 - IN Sensitive
65 - IA-2
66 - IB-2
67 - IC-2
245 - SampleTime
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Database

Page 130/170 MiCOM P342, P343

1. INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this document is to describe the specific implementation of the
Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0 within P340 MiCOM relays.
The MiCOM P340 uses the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code
Library version 2.31.
This document, in conjunction with the DNP 3.0 Basic 4 Document Set, and the DNP
Subset Definitions Document, provides complete information on how to communicate
with P340 relays with the DNP 3.0 protocol.
This implementation of DNP 3.0 is fully compliant with DNP 3.0 Subset Definition
Level 2. It also contains many Subset Level 3 and above features.

2. DNP V3.0 DEVICE PROFILE


The following table provides a “Device Profile Document” in the standard format
defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions Document. While it is referred to in the
DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions as a “Document”, it is only a component of a total
interoperability guide. This table, in combination with the following should provide a
complete interoperability/configuration guide for the P340 range of MiCOM relays:
• The Implementation Table provided in Section §3
• The Point List Tables provided in Section §4
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 131/170

DNP 3.0
Device Profile Document
Vendor Name: ALSTOM T&D Ltd – Energy Automation and Information
Device Name: MiCOM P340 Generator Protection
Models Covered: • P341****4*0070*
• P342****4*0070*
• P343****4*0070*
Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:
For Requests: Level 2 ¨ Master
For Responses: Level 2 þ Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the highest DNP levels
supported (the complete list is described in the DNP 3.0 Implementation Table):
• For static (non-change event) object requests, request qualifier codes 00
and 01 (start-stop), 07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and 28 (index) are
supported in addition to the request qualifier code 06 (no range (all
points)).
• Static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08 will be
responded with qualifiers 00 or 01.
• Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with
qualifiers 17 or 28.
• For change-event object requests, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
• 16-bit and 32-bit analog change events with time may be requested.
• The read function code for Object 50 (time and date) variation 1 is
supported.
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets)
Transmitted: 292 Transmitted: 2048
Received: 292 Received: 249
Maximum Data Link Retries: Maximum Application Layer Retries:
¨ None þ None
þ Fixed at 2 ¨ Configurable
¨ Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation: Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
þ Never ¨ Never
¨ Always ¨ Always
¨ Sometimes þ When reporting event data
¨ Configurable þ When sending multi-fragment
responses
¨ Sometimes
¨ Configurable
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Database

Page 132/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Timeouts while waiting for:


Data Link Confirm: ¨ None þ Fixed at ¨ Variable ¨ Configurable
100ms
Complete Appl. Fragment: þ None ¨ Fixed at ___ ¨ Variable ¨ Configurable
¨ None þ Fixed at ¨ Variable ¨ Configurable
Application Confirm:
1s
Complete Appl. Response: þ None ¨ Fixed at ___ ¨ Variable ¨ Configurable
Others:
Inter-character Delay: 4 character times at selected baud rate
Select/Operate Arm Timeout: Default 10s
Need Time Interval: Configurable, 0 or 30min
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
Write Binary Outputs: þ Never ¨ Always ¨ Sometimes ¨ Configurable
Select/Operate: ¨ Never þ Always ¨ Sometimes ¨ Configurable
Direct Operate: ¨ Never þ Always ¨ Sometimes ¨ Configurable
Direct Operate – No Ack: ¨ Never þ Always ¨ Sometimes ¨ Configurable

Count > 1 þ Never ¨ Always ¨ Sometimes ¨ Configurable


Pulse On/NUL/Trip/Close ¨ Never ¨ Always þ Sometimes ¨ Configurable
Pulse Off/NUL/Trip/Close þ Never ¨ Always ¨ Sometimes ¨ Configurable
Latch On/NUL ¨ Never ¨ Always þ Sometimes ¨ Configurable
Latch Off/NUL ¨ Never ¨ Always þ Sometimes ¨ Configurable

Queue þ Never ¨ Always ¨ Sometimes ¨ Configurable


Clear Queue þ Never ¨ Always ¨ Sometimes ¨ Configurable
Note: The applicability of the Pulse On, Latch On, & Latch Off control operations is
specified in the Object10/12 point list table in section §4.2.
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change
specific variation requested: Events when no specific variation requested:
þ Never ¨ Never
þ Only time-tagged variation 2 þ Binary input change with time
¨ Only non-time-tagged ¨ Binary input change with relative time
¨ Configurable ¨ Configurable
Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
þ Never þ Never
¨ Configurable ¨ When device restarts
¨ Certain objects only ¨ When status flags changes
¨ Sometimes
¨ Enable/Disable unsolicited functions No other options are permitted.
codes supported
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 133/170

Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:


¨ No counters reported ¨ No counters reported
¨ Configurable ¨ Configurable
þ Default object: 20 ¨ 16 bits
þ Default variation: 5 þ 32 bits
þ Point-by-point list attached ¨ Other value: _____
þ Point-by-point list attached
Sends multi-fragment responses:
þ Yes
¨ No

3. IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported
by the P340 in both request and response messages.
For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or
08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with
qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event
objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
Object Request Response

Object Variation Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes


Description
Number Number (dec) (hex) Codes (dec) (hex)

1 0 Binary Input (Variation 0 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)


is used to request default
variation) 06 (no range, or all)

07, 08 limited qty)

17, 28 (index)

1 1 Binary Input without Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)

(default – 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –


see note 1) see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)

17, 28 (index)

1 2 Binary Input with Flag 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)

06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –


see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)

17, 28 (index)

2 0 Binary Input Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)


(Variation 0 is used to
request default variation) 07, 08 (limited qty)

2 1 Binary Input Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
without Time
07, 08 (limited qty)

2 2 Binary Input Change with 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Time
(default – 07, 08 (limited qty)
see note 1)

10 0 Binary Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)


(Variation 0 is used to
request default variation) 06 (no range, or all)

07, 08 limited qty)

17, 28 (index)

10 2 Binary Output Status 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)

(default – 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –


see note 1) see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)

17, 28 (index)
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Database

Page 134/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Object Request Response

Object Variation Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes


Description
Number Number (dec) (hex) Codes (dec) (hex)
12 1 Control Relay Output 3 (select) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) echo of request
Block
4 (operate) 06 (limited qty)

5 (direct op) 07, 08 (index)

6 (dir. op, no ack) 17, 28

20 0 Binary Counter (Variation 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)


0 is used to request
default variation) 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all)

8 (freeze no ack) 07, 08 limited qty)

9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)

10 (frz. cl. no ack)

20 1 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
with Flag
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 2)
8 (freeze no ack) 07, 08 limited qty)

9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)

10 (frz. cl. no ack)

20 2 16-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
with Flag
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 2)
8 (freeze no ack) 07, 08 limited qty)

9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)

10 (frz. cl. no ack)

20 5 32-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
without Flag
(default – 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 1) see note 2)
8 (freeze no ack) 07, 08 limited qty)

9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)

10 (frz. cl. no ack)

20 6 16-Bit Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
without Flag
7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 2)
8 (freeze no ack) 07, 08 limited qty)

9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)

10 (frz. cl. no ack)

21 0 Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)


(Variation 0 is used to
request default variation) 06 (no range, or all)

07, 08 limited qty)

17, 28 (index)

21 1 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
with Flag
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)

17, 28 (index)

21 2 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
with Flag
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)

17, 28 (index)

21 9 32-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
without Flag
(default – 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 1) see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)

17, 28 (index)

21 10 16-Bit Frozen Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
without Flag
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)

17, 28 (index)
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 135/170

Object Request Response

Object Variation Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes


Description
Number Number (dec) (hex) Codes (dec) (hex)

30 0 Analog Input (Variation 0 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)


is used to request default
variation) 06 (no range, or all)

07, 08 limited qty)

17, 28 (index)

30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)

06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –


see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)

17, 28 (index)

30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)

(default – 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –


see note 1) see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)

17, 28 (index)

30 3 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
without Flag
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)

17, 28 (index)

30 4 16-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
without Flag
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)

17, 28 (index)

32 0 Analog Change Event 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)


(Variation 0 is used to
request default variation) 07, 08 (limited qty)

32 1 32-Bit Analog Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Event without Time
07, 08 (limited qty)

32 2 16-Bit Analog Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Event without Time
(default – 07, 08 (limited qty)
see note 1)

32 3 32-Bit Analog Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Event with Time
07, 08 (limited qty)

32 4 16-Bit Analog Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Event with Time
07, 08 (limited qty)

50 0 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)

06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –


see note 2)
07, 08 limited qty)

17, 28 (index)

50 1 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)

(default – 2 (write) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –


see note 1) see note 2)
07 (limited qty = 1)

08 (limited qty)

17, 28 (index)

52 2 Time Delay Fine 129 (response) 07 (limited


qty)

(qty = 1)

60 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)


Data

60 1 Class 0 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)

60 2 Class 1 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)

07, 08 (limited qty)

60 3 Class 2 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)

07, 08 (limited qty)

60 4 Class 3 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)

07, 08 (limited qty)


P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Database

Page 136/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Object Request Response

Object Variation Function Codes Qualifier Codes Function Qualifier Codes


Description
Number Number (dec) (hex) Codes (dec) (hex)

80 1 Internal Indications 1 (write) 00 (start–stop)


(index must = 7)

No Object (function code 13 (cold restart)


only)

No Object (function code 1 (warm restart)


only)

No Object (function code 1 (delay meas.)


only)

Notes:
1. A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is
requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans.
2. For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded
when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static
object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded
with qualifiers 00 or 01. (For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are
always responded.)

4. POINT LIST
The tables in the following sections identify all the individual data points provided by
this implementation of DNP 3.0.
4.1 Binary input points
The Binary Input objects (1 & 2) provide read-only access to a sub-set of the P340’s
digital data bus (DDB).
By default, all the static object (object 1) points belong to the Class 0 data set. The
default allocation of the points in the change-event object (object 2) to a change-
event class (1, 2, 3) is indicated in the point-list table below. The MiCOM S1 setting
support software may be used to alter both of these assignments. However,
deselecting a point from class 0 also has the effect of removing the point from the
point-list of objects 1 & 2 and renumbering the remaining points to ensure the point
indices are contiguous.
The validity of each point is reported through the “online” bit in the “flag”, which is
supplied for each point with the “with flag” object variations. Points reported as
being offline, will typically be points that are invalid for the relay’s current
configuration, which is a product of its model number and current settings.
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 137/170

Binary Input Points


Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
DDB Initial
Point Point Point Name/Description Event Class
NO Value
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)

Output Relay Status


0 0 0 Output Relay 1 0 2 False
1 1 1 Output Relay 2 1 2 False
2 2 2 Output Relay 3 2 2 False
3 3 3 Output Relay 4 3 2 False
4 4 4 Output Relay 5 4 2 False
5 5 5 Output Relay 6 5 2 False
6 6 6 Output Relay 7 6 2 False
7 7 7 Output Relay 8 7 2 False
8 8 8 Output Relay 9 8 2 False
9 9 9 Output Relay 10 9 2 False
10 10 10 Output Relay 11 10 2 False
11 11 11 Output Relay 12 11 2 False
12 12 12 Output Relay 13 12 2 False
13 13 13 Output Relay 14 13 2 False
14 14 14 Output Relay 15 14 2 False
15 15 15 Output Relay 16 15 2 False
16 16 16 Output Relay 17 16 2 False
17 17 17 Output Relay 18 17 2 False
18 18 18 Output Relay 19 18 2 False
19 19 19 Output Relay 20 19 2 False
20 20 20 Output Relay 21 20 2 False
21 21 21 Output Relay 22 21 2 False
22 22 22 Output Relay 23 22 2 False
23 23 23 Output Relay 24 23 2 False
24 Output Relay 25 24 2 False
25 Output Relay 26 25 2 False
26 Output Relay 27 26 2 False
27 Output Relay 28 27 2 False
28 Output Relay 29 28 2 False
29 Output Relay 30 29 2 False
30 Output Relay 31 30 2 False
31 Output Relay 32 31 2 False
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Database

Page 138/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Binary Input Points


Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
DDB Initial
Point Point Point Name/Description Event Class
NO Value
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)

Opto Isolator Input Status


24 24 32 Opto Isolator Input 1 32 2 False
25 25 33 Opto Isolator Input 2 33 2 False
26 26 34 Opto Isolator Input 3 34 2 False
27 27 35 Opto Isolator Input 4 35 2 False
28 28 36 Opto Isolator Input 5 36 2 False
29 29 37 Opto Isolator Input 6 37 2 False
30 30 38 Opto Isolator Input 7 38 2 False
31 31 39 Opto Isolator Input 8 39 2 False
32 32 40 Opto Isolator Input 9 40 2 False
33 33 41 Opto Isolator Input 10 41 2 False
34 34 42 Opto Isolator Input 11 42 2 False
35 35 43 Opto Isolator Input 12 43 2 False
36 36 44 Opto Isolator Input 13 44 2 False
37 37 45 Opto Isolator Input 14 45 2 False
38 38 46 Opto Isolator Input 15 46 2 False
39 39 47 Opto Isolator Input 16 47 2 False
40 40 48 Opto Isolator Input 17 48 2 False
41 41 49 Opto Isolator Input 18 49 2 False
42 42 50 Opto Isolator Input 19 50 2 False
43 43 51 Opto Isolator Input 20 51 2 False
44 44 52 Opto Isolator Input 21 52 2 False
45 45 53 Opto Isolator Input 22 53 2 False
46 46 54 Opto Isolator Input 23 54 2 False
47 47 55 Opto Isolator Input 24 55 2 False
56 Opto Isolator Input 25 56 2 False
57 Opto Isolator Input 26 57 2 False
58 Opto Isolator Input 27 58 2 False
59 Opto Isolator Input 28 59 2 False
60 Opto Isolator Input 29 60 2 False
61 Opto Isolator Input 30 61 2 False
62 Opto Isolator Input 31 62 2 False
63 Opto Isolator Input 32 63 2 False
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 139/170

Binary Input Points


Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
DDB Initial
Point Point Point Name/Description Event Class
NO Value
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)

Alarm & Event Indications


48 48 64 Setting Group via Opto Invalid 290 2 False
49 49 65 Test Mode Enabled 291 2 False
50 50 66 VTS Indication 292 2 False
51 51 67 CTS Indication 293 2 False
52 52 68 Breaker Fail Any Trip 294 2 False
53 53 69 Broken Current Maintenance Alarm 295 2 False
54 54 70 Broken Current Lockout Alarm 296 2 False
55 55 71 Number of CB Operations Maintenance Alarm 297 2 False
Number of CB Operations Maintenance
56 56 72 298 2 False
Lockout
Excessive CB Operation Time Maintenance
57 57 73 299 2 False
Alarm
58 58 74 Excessive CB Operation Time Lockout Alarm 300 2 False
59 59 75 Excessive Fault Frequency Lockout Alarm 301 2 False
60 60 76 CB Status Alarm 302 2 False
61 CB Failed to Trip 303 2 False
62 CB Failed to Close 304 2 False
63 Control CB Unhealthy 305 2 False
64 Frequency Out of Range 306 2 False
61 77 Negative Phase Sequence Alarm 306 2 False
65 62 78 Thermal Overload Alarm 307 2 False
63 79 Volts Per Hz Alarm 308 2 False
64 80 Field Failure Alarm 309 2 False
65 81 RTD Thermal Alarm 310 2 False
66 82 RTD Open Circuit Failure 311 2 False
67 83 RTD Short Circuit Failure 312 2 False
68 84 RTD Data Inconsistency Error 313 2 False
69 85 RTD Board Failure 314 2 False
66 70 86 Frequency Protection Alarm 315 2 False
67 71 87 Voltage Protection Alarm 316 2 False
68 72 88 User Definable Alarm 1 (Self Reset) 351 2 False
69 73 89 User Definable Alarm 2 (Self Reset) 350 2 False
70 74 90 User Definable Alarm 3 (Self Reset) 349 2 False
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Database

Page 140/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Binary Input Points


Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
DDB Initial
Point Point Point Name/Description Event Class
NO Value
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)

75 91 RTD 1 Alarm 743 2 False


76 92 RTD 2 Alarm 744 2 False
77 93 RTD 3 Alarm 745 2 False
78 94 RTD 4 Alarm 746 2 False
79 95 RTD 5 Alarm 747 2 False
80 96 RTD 6 Alarm 748 2 False
81 97 RTD 7 Alarm 749 2 False
82 98 RTD 8 Alarm 750 2 False
83 99 RTD 9 Alarm 751 2 False
84 100 RTD 10 Alarm 752 2 False
71 85 101 Composite Lockout Alarm 753 2 False
72 86 102 Field Voltage Failure 756 2 False
Miscellaneous Indications
73 87 103 Battery Status N/A 2 False
74 88 104 IRIG-B Status N/A 2 False
Protection Operation Signals
75 89 105 Any Trip 162 2 False
76 90 106 External Trip 3ph 380 2 False
107 100% Stator Earth Fault Trip 416 2 False
108 Dead Machine Protection Trip 417 2 False
109 Generator Differential Trip 3ph 418 2 False
110 Generator Differential Trip A 419 2 False
111 Generator Differential Trip B 420 2 False
112 Generator Differential Trip C 421 2 False
91 113 Field Failure Stage 1 Trip 422 2 False
92 114 Field Failure Stage 2 Trip 423 2 False
93 115 Negative Phase Sequence Trip 424 2 False
94 116 Voltage Dependant Over Current Trip 3ph 425 2 False
95 117 Voltage Dependant Over Current Trip A 426 2 False
96 118 Voltage Dependant Over Current Trip B 427 2 False
97 119 Voltage Dependant Over Current Trip C 428 2 False
98 120 Volts per Hz Trip 429 2 False
99 121 RTD 1 Trip 430 2 False
100 122 RTD 2 Trip 431 2 False
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 141/170

Binary Input Points


Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
DDB Initial
Point Point Point Name/Description Event Class
NO Value
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)

101 123 RTD 3 Trip 432 2 False


102 124 RTD 4 Trip 433 2 False
103 125 RTD 5 Trip 434 2 False
104 126 RTD 6 Trip 435 2 False
105 127 RTD 7 Trip 436 2 False
106 128 RTD 8 Trip 437 2 False
107 129 RTD 9 Trip 438 2 False
108 130 RTD 10 Trip 439 2 False
109 131 Any RTD Trip 440 2 False
77 Rate Of Change Of Frequency Trip 440 2 False
78 Voltage Vector Shift Trip 441 2 False
79 110 132 1st Stage EF Trip 442 2 False
80 111 133 2nd Stage EF Trip 443 2 False
81 3rd Stage EF Trip 444 2 False
82 4th Stage EF Trip 445 2 False
83 112 134 REF Trip 446 2 False
84 113 135 1st Stage SEF Trip 447 2 False
85 2nd Stage SEF Trip 448 2 False
86 3rd Stage SEF Trip 449 2 False
87 4th Stage SEF Trip 450 2 False
88 114 136 1st Stage Residual O/V Trip 451 2 False
89 115 137 2nd Stage Residual O/V Trip 452 2 False
90 116 138 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 453 2 False
91 117 139 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB 454 2 False
92 118 140 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC 455 2 False
93 119 141 1st Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA 456 2 False
94 120 142 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip 3ph 457 2 False
95 121 143 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip A/AB 458 2 False
96 122 144 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip B/BC 459 2 False
97 123 145 2nd Stage Phase U/V Trip C/CA 460 2 False
98 124 146 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 461 2 False
99 125 147 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 462 2 False
100 126 148 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 463 2 False
101 127 149 1st Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA 464 2 False
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Database

Page 142/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Binary Input Points


Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
DDB Initial
Point Point Point Name/Description Event Class
NO Value
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)

102 128 150 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip 3ph 465 2 False
103 129 151 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip A/AB 466 2 False
104 130 152 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip B/BC 467 2 False
105 131 153 2nd Stage Phase O/V Trip C/CA 468 2 False
106 132 154 Under Frequency Stage 1 Trip 469 2 False
107 133 155 Under Frequency Stage 2 Trip 470 2 False
108 134 156 Under Frequency Stage 3 Trip 471 2 False
109 135 157 Under Frequency Stage 4 Trip 472 2 False
110 136 158 Over Frequency Stage 1 Trip 473 2 False
111 137 159 Over Frequency Stage 2 Trip 474 2 False
112 138 160 Power Stage 1 Trip 475 2 False
113 139 161 Power Stage 2 Trip 476 2 False
114 140 162 1st Stage O/C Trip 3ph 477 2 False
115 141 163 1st Stage O/C Trip A 478 2 False
116 142 164 1st Stage O/C Trip B 479 2 False
117 143 165 1st Stage O/C Trip C 480 2 False
118 144 166 2nd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 481 2 False
119 145 167 2nd Stage O/C Trip A 482 2 False
120 146 168 2nd Stage O/C Trip B 483 2 False
121 147 169 2nd Stage O/C Trip C 484 2 False
122 3rd Stage O/C Trip 3ph 485 2 False
123 3rd Stage O/C Trip A 486 2 False
124 3rd Stage O/C Trip B 487 2 False
125 3rd Stage O/C Trip C 488 2 False
126 4th Stage O/C Trip 3ph 489 2 False
127 4th Stage O/C Trip A 490 2 False
128 4th Stage O/C Trip B 491 2 False
129 4th Stage O/C Trip C 492 2 False
130 148 170 tBF1 Trip 3ph 493 2 False
131 149 171 tBF2 Trip 3ph 494 2 False
132 150 172 Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Trip 495 2 False
133 151 173 Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 2 Trip 496 2 False
174 Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Trip 497 2 False
175 Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Trip 498 2 False
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 143/170

Binary Input Points


Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
DDB Initial
Point Point Point Name/Description Event Class
NO Value
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)

134 152 176 Thermal Overload Trip 499 2 False


153 177 Under Impedance 3 Phase Stage 1 Trip 500 2 False
154 178 Under Impedance Phase A Stage 1 Trip 501 2 False
155 179 Under Impedance Phase B Stage 1 Trip 502 2 False
156 180 Under Impedance Phase C Stage 1 Trip 503 2 False
157 181 Under Impedance 3 Phase Stage 2 Trip 504 2 False
158 182 Under Impedance Phase A Stage 2 Trip 505 2 False
159 183 Under Impedance Phase B Stage 2 Trip 506 2 False
160 184 Under Impedance Phase C Stage 2 Trip 507 2 False
135 161 185 Any Start 576 2 False
136 162 186 1st Stage Residual O/V Start 577 2 False
137 163 187 2nd Stage Residual O/V Start 578 2 False
138 164 188 1st Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 579 2 False
139 165 189 1st Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB 580 2 False
140 166 190 1st Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC 581 2 False
141 167 191 1st Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA 582 2 False
142 168 192 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start 3ph 583 2 False
143 169 193 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start A/AB 584 2 False
144 170 194 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start B/BC 585 2 False
145 171 195 2nd Stage Phase U/V Start C/CA 586 2 False
146 172 196 1st Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph 587 2 False
147 173 197 1st Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB 588 2 False
148 174 198 1st Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC 589 2 False
149 175 199 1st Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA 590 2 False
150 176 200 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start 3ph 591 2 False
151 177 201 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start A/AB 592 2 False
152 178 202 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start B/BC 593 2 False
153 179 203 2nd Stage Phase O/V Start C/CA 594 2 False
154 180 204 Power Stage 1 Start 595 2 False
155 181 205 Power Stage 2 Start 596 2 False
156 182 206 1st Stage O/C Start 3ph 597 2 False
157 183 207 1st Stage O/C Start A 598 2 False
158 184 208 1st Stage O/C Start B 599 2 False
159 185 209 1st Stage O/C Start C 600 2 False
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Database

Page 144/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Binary Input Points


Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
DDB Initial
Point Point Point Name/Description Event Class
NO Value
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)

160 186 210 2nd Stage O/C Start 3ph 601 2 False
161 187 211 2nd Stage O/C Start A 602 2 False
162 188 212 2nd Stage O/C Start B 603 2 False
163 189 213 2nd Stage O/C Start C 604 2 False
164 3rd Stage O/C Start 3ph 605 2 False
165 3rd Stage O/C Start A 606 2 False
166 3rd Stage O/C Start B 607 2 False
167 3rd Stage O/C Start C 608 2 False
168 4th Stage O/C Start 3ph 609 2 False
169 4th Stage O/C Start A 610 2 False
170 4th Stage O/C Start B 611 2 False
171 4th Stage O/C Start C 612 2 False
172 190 214 1st Stage EF Start 613 2 False
173 191 215 2nd Stage EF Start 614 2 False
174 3rd Stage EF Start 615 2 False
175 4th Stage EF Start 616 2 False
176 192 216 1st Stage SEF Start 617 2 False
177 2nd Stage SEF Start 618 2 False
178 3rd Stage SEF Start 619 2 False
179 4th Stage SEF Start 620 2 False
217 100% Stator Earth Fault Start 621 2 False
180 193 218 Under Frequency Stage 1 Start 622 2 False
181 194 219 Under Frequency Stage 2 Start 623 2 False
182 195 220 Under Frequency Stage 3 Start 624 2 False
183 196 221 Under Frequency Stage 4 Start 625 2 False
184 197 222 Over Frequency Stage 1 Start 626 2 False
185 198 223 Over Frequency Stage 2 Start 627 2 False
186 I> Blocked O/C Start 628 2 False
187 IN/ISEF> Blocked O/C Start 629 2 False
188 Rate Of Change Of Frequency Start 630 2 False
199 224 Volts per Hz Start 636 2 False
200 225 Field Failure Stage 1 Start 637 2 False
201 226 Field Failure Stage 2 Start 638 2 False
202 227 Voltage Dependant Over Current Start 3Ph 639 2 False
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 145/170

Binary Input Points


Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
DDB Initial
Point Point Point Name/Description Event Class
NO Value
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)

203 228 Voltage Dependant Over Current Start A 640 2 False


204 229 Voltage Dependant Over Current Start B 641 2 False
205 230 Voltage Dependant Over Current Start C 642 2 False
189 206 231 Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 1 Start 643 2 False
190 207 232 Sensitive A Phase Power Stage 2 Start 644 2 False
233 Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone1 Start 645 2 False
234 Pole Slip (Impedance) Zone2 Start 646 2 False
235 Pole Slip (impedance) Lens Start 647 2 False
236 Pole Slip (impedance) Blinder Start 648 2 False
237 Pole Slip (impedance) Reactance Line Start 649 2 False
208 238 Under Impedance 3Phase Stage 1 Start 650 2 False
209 239 Under Impedance Phase A Stage 1 Start 651 2 False
210 240 Under Impedance Phase B Stage 1 Start 652 2 False
211 241 Under Impedance Phase C Stage 1 Start 653 2 False
212 242 Under Impedance 3Phase Stage 2 Start 654 2 False
213 243 Under Impedance Phase A Stage 2 Start 655 2 False
214 244 Under Impedance Phase B Stage 2 Start 656 2 False
215 245 Under Impedance Phase C Stage 2 Start 657 2 False
191 216 246 VTS Fast Block 736 2 False
192 217 247 VTS Slow Block 737 2 False
193 218 248 CTS Block 738 2 False
194 Control Trip 739 2 False
195 Control Close 740 2 False
196 Control Close in Progress 741 2 False
197 Reconnection Time Delay Output 742 2 False
CB Status
198 219 249 3 ph CB Open 754 2 False
199 220 250 3 ph CB Closed 755 2 False
200 221 251 IA< Operate 631 2 False
201 222 252 IB< Operate 632 2 False
202 223 253 IC< Operate 633 2 False
203 224 254 ISEF< Operate 634 2 False
225 255 IN< Operate 635 2 False
204 226 256 All Poles Dead 757 2 False
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Database

Page 146/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Binary Input Points


Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
DDB Initial
Point Point Point Name/Description Event Class
NO Value
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)

205 227 257 Any Pole Dead 758 2 False


206 228 258 Phase A Pole Dead 759 2 False
207 229 259 Phase B Pole Dead 760 2 False
208 230 260 Phase C Pole Dead 761 2 False
New in software version 07
Alarm Signals
209 231 261 CLIO Input Board Failure 320 2 False
210 232 262 CLIO Output Board Failure 321 2 False
211 233 263 Current Loop Input 1 Alarm 322 2 False
212 234 264 Current Loop Input 2 Alarm 323 2 False
213 235 265 Current Loop Input 3 Alarm 324 2 False
214 236 266 Current Loop Input 4 Alarm 325 2 False
215 237 267 Current Loop Input 1 Undercurrent Fail Alarm 326 2 False
216 238 268 Current Loop Input 2 Undercurrent Fail Alarm 327 2 False
217 239 269 Current Loop Input 3 Undercurrent Fail Alarm 328 2 False
218 240 270 Current Loop Input 4 Undercurrent Fail Alarm 329 2 False
219 241 271 User Definable Alarm 16 (Manual Reset) 336 2 False
220 242 272 User Definable Alarm 15 (Manual Reset) 337 2 False
221 243 273 User Definable Alarm 14 (Manual Reset) 338 2 False
222 244 274 User Definable Alarm 13 (Manual Reset) 339 2 False
223 245 275 User Definable Alarm 12 (Manual Reset) 340 2 False
224 246 276 User Definable Alarm 11 (Manual Reset) 341 2 False
225 247 277 User Definable Alarm 10 (Manual Reset) 342 2 False
226 248 278 User Definable Alarm 9 (Manual Reset) 343 2 False
227 249 279 User Definable Alarm 8 (Manual Reset) 344 2 False
228 250 280 User Definable Alarm 7 (Manual Reset) 345 2 False
229 251 281 User Definable Alarm 6 (Manual Reset) 346 2 False
230 252 282 User Definable Alarm 5 (Manual Reset) 347 2 False
231 253 283 User Definable Alarm 4 (Self Reset) 348 2 False
Trip Signals
232 254 284 Current Loop Input 1 Trip 508 2 False
233 255 285 Current Loop Input 2 Trip 509 2 False
234 256 286 Current Loop Input 3 Trip 510 2 False
235 257 287 Current Loop Input 4 Trip 511 2 False
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 147/170

Binary Input Points


Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
DDB Initial
Point Point Point Name/Description Event Class
NO Value
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)

Start Signals
236 258 288 Current Loop Input 1 Alarm Start 658 2 False
237 259 289 Current Loop Input 2 Alarm Start 659 2 False
238 260 290 Current Loop Input 3 Alarm Start 660 2 False
239 261 291 Current Loop Input 4 Alarm Start 661 2 False
240 262 292 Current Loop Input 1 Trip Start 662 2 False
241 263 293 Current Loop Input 2 Trip Start 663 2 False
242 264 294 Current Loop Input 3 Trip Start 664 2 False
243 265 295 Current Loop Input 4 Trip Start 665 2 False

4.2 Binary output status points and control relay output block
The following table lists both the Binary Output Status Points (Object 10) and the
Control Relay Output Block (Object 12).
Binary Output Status points are included in Class 0 data set. (Since there is not a
change-event object for the binary outputs, the binary output points are not part of
the class 1, 2, or 3 data sets). It is not possible to configure the class 0 membership
of this object with MiCOM S1.
The validity of each point is reported through the “online” bit in the “flag”, which is
supplied for each point with the “with flag” object variations. Points reported as
being offline, will typically be points that are invalid for the relay’s current
configuration, which is a product of its model number and current settings.
The Control Relay Output Block (CROB) implementation is compliant with the DNP
technical bulletin TB2000-006, which rescinds CROB behaviours specified in the
original four document set and addendum sub-set documents.
The following text is a brief summary of DNP technical bulletin TB2000-006:
Each control point in the CROB may be either a "complimentary control function" or a
"single function".
Examples of complimentary control functions are:
• Trip and close
• On and Off

Examples of single-function controls are:


• Trip
• Activate
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Database

Page 148/170 MiCOM P342, P343

A point index cannot support both complimentary and single-function methods of


operation.
Complimentary control function points require the use of a complementary control-
code pair. The CROB provides two sets of control pairs:
• Code 0316 "Latch On" and code 0416 "Latch Off"
• Code 4116 "Pulse On/Close" and code 8116 "Pulse On/Trip"
In DNP there is no significance to these codes; they do the same thing. A
complimentary-control point may "permit" either or both of these pairs. If a point
permits both pairs of codes then:
• Latch On and Pulse Close must perform the same function
• Latch Off and Pulse Trip must perform the same function
Single-function control points may permit one or more of the following control codes:
• Code 0116 "Pulse On"
• Code 0316 "Latch On"
• Code 0416 "Latch Off"
• Code 4116 "Pulse On/Close
• Code 8116 "Pulse On/Trip"

There is no significance to these codes; they do the same thing. Each of the
permitted single-function codes must perform the same function on a given single-
function point index.
The original DNP 3.0 specification for the CROB "exposes the details of the device
hardware to the protocol stack. This is unnecessary and creates interoperability
issues". Moreover, "some IED vendors have implemented points that do different
things based on the control code that is sent. " E.g. a point latches for the latch codes
and pulses for the pulse codes. "This perverts the original intent of the CROB and
makes it impossible for masters that statically configure control codes to be
interoperable with such [IEDs]. This type of implementation is also not transportable
across legacy protocol boundaries."
In the following table, point indices that are marked as “unpaired” will accept the
correspondingly marked control codes and treat them identically as a “trigger” for the
command action associated with the point. Unpaired points do not have a state
value that can be read and a read request, whilst completing successfully, will always
return a value of zero.
Points that are marked as “paired” behave as complimentary-controls and have a
state value that can be read. The Latch On and Pulse On/Close control-codes set the
specified output status point whilst the Latch Off and Pulse On/Trip codes reset it.
The Count field is not supported and must be either zero or one. The On-time, and
Off-time fields are ignored. The Queue and Clear bits in the Control-Code field are
not supported and must be zero. The “Pulse Off” control-code code is not supported.
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 149/170

Binary Output Status Points


Object Number: 10
Request Function Code supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
Control Relay Output Blocks (CROB)
Object Number: 12
Request Function Code supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, no ack)
Supported CROB Fields

Pulse On/Close

Pulse On/Trip
P341 P342 P343

Unpaired

Latch Off
Latch On

Pulse On
Point Point Point Name/Description

Paired
Index Index Index

Setting Group Control:


0 0 0 Activate Setting Group 1 * * * * *
1 1 1 Activate Setting Group 2 * * * * *
2 2 2 Activate Setting Group 3 * * * * *
3 3 3 Activate Setting Group 4 * * * * *
Control Commands:
4 Initiate CB Trip * * * * * *
5 Initiate CB Close * * * * * *
6 4 4 Reset Indication * * * * *
7 5 5 Reset Demand * * * * *
6 6 Reset Negative Phase Sequence Thermal Replica * * * * *
8 7 7 Reset Thermal Overload Replica * * * * *
9 8 8 Clear Event Records * * * * *
10 9 9 Clear Fault Records * * * * *
11 10 10 Clear Maintenance Records * * * * *
12 11 11 Test LEDs * * * * *
13 12 12 Reset Lockout * * * * *
14 13 13 Reset CB Data * * * * *
14 14 Reset RTD Flags * * * * *
Scheme Logic Control Input Signals:
15 15 15 Control Input 1 * * * * *
16 16 16 Control Input 2 * * * * *
17 17 17 Control Input 3 * * * * *
18 18 18 Control Input 4 * * * * *
19 19 19 Control Input 5 * * * * *
20 20 20 Control Input 6 * * * * *
21 21 21 Control Input 7 * * * * *
22 22 22 Control Input 8 * * * * *
23 23 23 Control Input 9 * * * * *
24 24 24 Control Input 10 * * * * *
25 25 25 Control Input 11 * * * * *
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Database

Page 150/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Binary Output Status Points


Object Number: 10
Request Function Code supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
Control Relay Output Blocks (CROB)
Object Number: 12
Request Function Code supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, no ack)
Supported CROB Fields

Pulse On/Close

Pulse On/Trip
P341 P342 P343

Unpaired

Latch Off
Latch On

Pulse On
Point Point Point Name/Description

Paired
Index Index Index

26 26 26 Control Input 12 * * * * *
27 27 27 Control Input 13 * * * * *
28 28 28 Control Input 14 * * * * *
29 29 29 Control Input 15 * * * * *
30 30 30 Control Input 16 * * * * *
31 31 31 Control Input 17 * * * * *
32 32 32 Control Input 18 * * * * *
33 33 33 Control Input 19 * * * * *
34 34 34 Control Input 20 * * * * *
35 35 35 Control Input 21 * * * * *
36 36 36 Control Input 22 * * * * *
37 37 37 Control Input 23 * * * * *
38 38 38 Control Input 24 * * * * *
39 39 39 Control Input 25 * * * * *
40 40 40 Control Input 26 * * * * *
41 41 41 Control Input 27 * * * * *
42 42 42 Control Input 28 * * * * *
43 43 43 Control Input 29 * * * * *
44 44 44 Control Input 30 * * * * *
45 45 45 Control Input 31 * * * * *
46 46 46 Control Input 32 * * * * *

4.3 Counters
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters
(Object 21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the
frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
By default the Binary Counters (object 20) and Frozen Counters (object 21) are
included in class 0 polls. The MiCOM S1 setting support software may be used to
alter both of these assignments. (Since there is not a change-event object for the
Binary Counters or Frozen Counters, the counter points are not part of the class 1, 2,
or 3 data sets). However, deselecting a point from class 0 also has the effect of
removing the point from the point-list of the associated object (20 or 21) and
renumbering the remaining points to ensure the point indices are contiguous.
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 151/170

Moreover, if a point is deselected from the running counter object (20) then it is also
deselected from the frozen counter object (21).
The validity of each point is reported through the “online” bit in the “flag”, which is
supplied for each point with the “with flag” object variations. Points reported as
being offline, will typically be points that are invalid for the relay’s current
configuration, which is a product of its model number and current settings.

Binary Counter Points


Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20
Request Function Code supported: 1(read), 7(freeze), 8(freeze no ack), 9(freeze and clear),
10(freeze and clear, no ack)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none – not supported
Frozen Counter Points
Static (Steady State) Object Number: 21
Request Function Code supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 9 (32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: none – not supported
P341 P342 P343
Point Point Point Name/Description Data Type
Index Index Index

0 0 0 3Ph WHours Fwd D10


1 1 1 3Ph WHours Rev D10
2 2 2 3Ph VArHours Fwd D10
3 3 3 3Ph VArHours Rev D10
4 4 4 CB Operations -

4.4 Analog inputs


The following table lists the Analog Inputs (Object 30).
For each point, the “Data Type” code refers to the points scaling information in
section §4.5; analog values are provided in a fixed-point integer format derived from
the relay’s internal per-unit quantities. The scaling information associated with each
data-type code, in section §4.5, will result in an equivalent secondary (i.e. relay input)
value. Additional scaling will be required to produce the primary (i.e. power system)
values.
By default, all the static object (object 30) points belong to the Class 0 data set. The
“Default Deadband”, and the “Default Change Event Assigned Class” columns are
used to represent the absolute amount by which the point must change before an
analog change event will be generated. The default allocation of the points in the
change-event object (object 32) to a change-event class (1, 2, 3) is also indicated.
The class 0, deadband, and event class values may be changed with the MiCOM S1
setting support software. However, deselecting a point from class 0 also has the
effect of removing the point from the point-list of objects 30 & 32 and renumbering
the remaining points to ensure the point indices are contiguous.
The validity of each point is reported through the “online” bit in the “flag”, which is
supplied for each point with the “with flag” object variations. Points reported as
being offline, will typically be points that are invalid for the relay’s current
configuration, which is a product of its model number and current settings.
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Database

Page 152/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Analog Inputs
Static (Steady State) Object Number: 30
Change Event Object Number: 32
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event without
Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
Data Default
Point Point Point Name/Description Valid Range Event Class
Type Deadband
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)

Active Group
0 0 0 Active Group D9 1…4 1 3

Measurements 1

1 1 IA Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

2 2 IA Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

3 3 IB Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3


4 4 IB Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

5 5 IC Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

6 6 IC Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3


1 IA-1 Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

2 IA-1 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

3 IB-1 Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3


4 IB-1 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
5 IC-1 Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
6 IC-1 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

7 7 IN Measured Mag D2 0.0000…2.0000 0.01 3

8 8 IN Measured Ang D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3


7 IN Derived Mag D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
8 IN Derived Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

9 9 9 I Sen Magnitude D2 0.0000…2.0000 0.01 3


10 10 10 I Sen Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
11 11 11 I1 Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

12 12 12 I2 Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3


13 13 13 I0 Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
14 14 14 IA RMS D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

15 15 15 IB RMS D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3


16 16 16 IC RMS D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
17 17 17 VAB Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3

18 18 18 VAB Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

19 19 19 VBC Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3

20 20 20 VBC Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3


21 21 21 VCA Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3

22 22 22 VCA Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

23 23 23 VAN Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3


24 24 24 VAN Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

25 25 25 VBN Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3


Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 153/170

Analog Inputs
Static (Steady State) Object Number: 30
Change Event Object Number: 32
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event without
Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
Data Default
Point Point Point Name/Description Valid Range Event Class
Type Deadband
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)

26 26 26 VBN Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3


27 27 27 VCN Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3

28 28 28 VCN Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3


29 29 29 VN Measured Mag D3 0.00…220.00 5 3

30 30 30 VN Measured Ang D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

31 31 31 VN Derived Mag D3 0.00…220.00 5 3


32 32 32 VN Derived Ang D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

33 33 33 V1 Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3

34 34 34 V2 Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3
35 35 35 V0 Magnitude D3 0.00…220.00 5 3

36 36 36 VAN RMS D3 0.00…220.00 5 3

37 37 37 VBN RMS D3 0.00…220.00 5 3


38 38 38 VCN RMS D3 0.00…220.00 5 3
39 39 39 Frequency D5 5.00…70.00 0.5 3
Measurements 2
40 40 40 A Phase Watts D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3

41 41 41 B Phase Watts D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3


42 42 42 C Phase Watts D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
43 43 43 A Phase VArs D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3

44 44 44 B Phase VArs D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3


45 45 45 C Phase VArs D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
46 46 46 A Phase VA D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3

47 47 47 B Phase VA D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
48 48 48 C Phase VA D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
49 49 49 3 Phase Watts D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3

50 50 50 3 Phase VArs D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3


51 51 51 3 Phase VA D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3
52 52 52 3Ph Power Factor D8 0.000…1.000 0.1 3

53 53 53 APh Power Factor D8 0.000…1.000 0.1 3

54 54 54 BPh Power Factor D8 0.000…1.000 0.1 3

55 55 55 CPh Power Factor D8 0.000…1.000 0.1 3


56 56 56 3Ph W Fix Demand D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3

57 57 57 3Ph VArs Fix Dem D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3

58 58 58 IA Fixed Demand D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3


59 59 59 IB Fixed Demand D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

60 60 60 IC Fixed Demand D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3


P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Database

Page 154/170 MiCOM P342, P343

Analog Inputs
Static (Steady State) Object Number: 30
Change Event Object Number: 32
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event without
Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
Data Default
Point Point Point Name/Description Valid Range Event Class
Type Deadband
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)

61 61 61 3 Ph W Roll Dem D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3


62 62 62 3Ph VArs RollDem D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3

63 63 63 IA Roll Demand D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3


64 64 64 IB Roll Demand D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

65 65 65 IC Roll Demand D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

66 66 66 3Ph W Peak Dem D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3


67 67 67 3Ph VAr Peak Dem D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3

68 68 68 IA Peak Demand D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

69 69 69 IB Peak Demand D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3


70 70 70 IC Peak Demand D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

Measurements 3

71 IA-2 Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3


72 IA-2 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
73 IB-2 Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
74 IB-2 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
75 IC-2 Magnitude D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

76 IC-2 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3


77 IA Differential D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
78 IB Differential D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

79 IC Differential D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3


80 IA Bias D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3
81 IB Bias D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3

82 IC Bias D1 0.000…65.534 0.1 3


71 83 IREF Diff D2 0.0000…2.0000 0.01 3
72 84 IREF Bias D2 0.0000…2.0000 0.01 3

85 VN 3rd Harmonic D3 0.00…220.00 5 3


73 86 NPS Thermal D7 0.00…327.67 10 3
74 87 RTD 1 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3

75 88 RTD 2 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3

76 89 RTD 3 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3

77 90 RTD 4 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3


78 91 RTD 5 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3

79 92 RTD 6 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3

80 93 RTD 7 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3


81 94 RTD 8 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3

82 95 RTD 9 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3


Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 155/170

Analog Inputs
Static (Steady State) Object Number: 30
Change Event Object Number: 32
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (16-Bit Analog Change Event without
Time)
Default
P341 P342 P343 Change
Data Default
Point Point Point Name/Description Valid Range Event Class
Type Deadband
Index Index Index (1, 2, 3, or
none)

83 96 RTD 10 D14 -40.0…300.0 1 3


71 84 97 APh Sen Watts D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3

72 85 98 APh Sen Vars D6 -3150.0…+3150.0 1 3


73 86 99 APh Power Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

74 87 100 Thermal Overload D7 0.00…327.67 10 3

New in software version


‘06’

75 88 101 I1 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

76 89 102 I2 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3


77 90 103 I0 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
78 91 104 V1 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3

79 92 105 V2 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3


80 93 106 V0 Phase Angle D4 -180.00…+180.00 1 3
New in software version
‘07’

81 94 107 CLIO Input 1 D16 -9999.9…+9999.9 10 3


82 95 108 CLIO Input 2 D16 -9999.9…+9999.9 10 3

83 96 109 CLIO Input 3 D16 -9999.9…+9999.9 10 3

84 97 110 CLIO Input 4 D16 -9999.9…+9999.9 10 3


Default

4.5
Standard
Data Change Change Event Change Event Change Event
Name/Description Scaling Numeric Range Units
Type Event Deadband MIN Deadband MAX Deadband STEP
Deadband

D1 Standard Phase, RMS, & Sequence Current x In / 500 0.1 0.05 In 64 In 0.01 In 0.000…65.534 A
Page 156/170

D2 Sensitive Current x In / 10000 0.01 0.01 In 2 In 0.001 In 0.0000…2.0000 A


P34x/EN GC/F33

D3 Voltage x Vn /(110 x 100) 5 0.1 Vn / 110 220 Vn / 110 0.1 Vn / 110 0.00…220.00 V

D4 Angle x 0.01 1 0.1 180 0.1 -180.00…+180.00 Degrees


Data type codes

D5 Frequency x 0.01 0.5 0.1 70 0.1 5.00…70.00 Hz

D6 Power x 0.1In x Vn / 110 1 0.1In .Vn / 110 3200 In x Vn / 110 0.1In x Vn / 110 -3150.0…+3150.0 W/VAr/VA

D7 Percentage x 0.01 10 0.1 320 0.1 0.00…327.67 %

D8 Power Factor x 0.001 0.1 0.01 1 0.01 0.000…1.000 [None]

D9 Setting Group x1 1 1 4 1 1…4 [None]

D10 Energy x In x Vn / 110 n/a In x Vn / 110 32000 In x Vn / 110 In x Vn / 110 0…231-1 Wh/VArh/VAh

D11 Admittance (Standard Current) x ( In / 1000)( 110 / Vn) 0.1 (0.01 In)( 110 / Vn) 32 In x ( 110 / Vn) (0.01 In)( 110 / Vn) -7.040…+7.040 S

D12 Admittance (Sensitive Current) x ( In / 10000)( 110 / Vn) 0.01 (0.001 In)( 110 / 2 In x ( 110 / Vn) (0.001 In)( 110 / Vn) -0.0220…+0.0220 S
Vn)
D13 Time (Minutes) x 0.01 5 1 30 0.5 0.00…327.67 Min

D14 Temperature (Celsius) x 0.1 1 0.1 300 0.1 -40.0…300.0 C

D15 Time (Seconds) x 0.00001 0.001 0.0001 0.03 0.0001 0.00000…0.32767 s

D16 CLIO Input Value x 0.1 10 0.1 9999 0.1 -9999.9…+9999.9 [User]

Notes:
1. In and Vn are the relay input ratings: 1A or 5A and 110V or 440V respectively.
2. The scaling value represents the multiplier required for the master station to scale the value obtained from the relay to the relay’s secondary (i.e. input) terms. Additional scaling will be
required by the master station to obtain primary quantities.
3. Type D6 can represent Watts, VArs or VA, the exact unit applied depends on the description of the item.
4. The default change event deadband is used unless specified otherwise in the point list.
5. All quantities are presented to the relay’s internal DNP3 interface as signed 32-bit values. Use of the 16-bit variations will require an assessment on a point by point basis as to whether the
value should be treated as signed or unsigned. The specified numeric range for each point can be used as a good guide to making this decision.
Relay Menu Database

MiCOM P342, P343

6. The “D16” units are defined by the user, depending on the type of CLIO transducer connected.
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 157/170

MiCOM P342 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (07)


Opto Input and Fault Record Trigger Mappings

L3 Block IN>2 IN>2 Timer Blk


DDB #034 DDB #359

L4 Block I>2 I>2 Timer Block


DDB #035 DDB #355

L5 Reset Reset Relays/LED


DDB #036 DDB #386

L6 Ext Prot Trip Ext. Trip 3ph


DDB #037 DDB #380

L7 52a CB Aux 3ph(52-A)


DDB #038 DDB #381

L8 52b CB Aux 3ph(52-B)


DDB #039 DDB #382

Fault Record Trigger Mapping

R3 Any Trip Fault REC TRIG


DDB #002 DDB #288
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Databases

Page 158/170 MiCOM P342, P343

MiCOM P342 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (07)


Output Relay Mappings

Field Fail2 Trip


DDB #423
V Dep OC Trip
DDB #425
Z<1 Trip
DDB #500
Z<2 Trip
DDB #504
IN>1 Trip
DDB #442
IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
IREF> Trip
DDB #446
ISEF>1 Trip 100
DDB #447
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
1 Dwell
0
R1 Trip CB
DDB #000

VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
I>1 Trip
DDB #477
I>2 Trip
DDB #481
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
SPower1 Trip
DDB #495
Thermal O/L Trip
DDB #499
Field Fail1 Trip
DDB #422
NPS Trip
DDB #424
V/Hz Trip
DDB #429
RTD 1 Trip
DDB #430
RTD 2 Trip
DDB #431
RTD 3 Trip
DDB #432
RTD 4 Trip
DDB #433
RTD 5 Trip
DDB #434
RTD 6 Trip

1
DDB #435
RTD 7 Trip
DDB #436 &
RTD 8 Trip
DDB #437
RTD 9 Trip
DDB #438
RTD 10 Trip
DDB #439
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
CL Input 1 Trip
DDB #508
CL Input 2 Trip
DDB #509
CL Input 3 Trip
DDB #510
CL Input 4 Trip
DDB #511
Power2 Trip
DDB #476
SPower2 Trip 1
DDB #496
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 159/170

MiCOM P342 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (07)


Output Relay Mappings

Field Fail1 Trip


DDB #422
Field Fail2 Trip
DDB #423
NPS Trip
DDB #424
V Dep OC Trip
DDB #425
Z<1 Trip
DDB #500
Z<2 Trip
DDB #504
Thermal O/L Trip
DDB #499
V/Hz Trip
DDB #429
RTD 1 Trip
DDB #430
RTD 2 Trip
DDB #431
RTD 3 Trip
DDB #432
RTD 4 Trip
DDB #433
RTD 5 Trip
DDB #434
RTD 6 Trip
DDB #435
RTD 7 Trip
DDB #436
RTD 8 Trip
DDB #437
RTD 9 Trip
DDB #438
RTD 10 Trip 100
DDB #439
IN>1 Trip
1 Dwell
0
R2 Trip PrimeMov
DDB #001
DDB #442
IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
IREF> Trip
DDB #446
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
I>1 Trip
DDB #477
I>2 Trip
DDB #481
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
SPower1 Trip
DDB #495
CL Input 1 Trip
DDB #508
CL Input 2 Trip
DDB #509
CL Input 3 Trip
DDB #510
CL Input 4 Trip
DDB #511
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Databases

Page 160/170 MiCOM P342, P343

MiCOM P342 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (07)


Output Relay Mappings

Thermal O/L Trip


DDB #499
Z<1 Trip
Z<2 Trip DDB #500
DDB #504 V Dep OC Trip
100% ST EF Trip DDB #425
DDB #416 DeadMachine Trip
Gen Diff Trip DDB #417
DDB #418 Field Fail1 Trip
Field Fail2 Trip DDB #422
DDB #423 NPS Trip
V/Hz Trip DDB #424
DDB #429 RTD 1 Trip
RTD 2 Trip DDB #430
DDB #431 RTD 3 Trip
RTD 4 Trip DDB #432
DDB #433 RTD 5 Trip
RTD 6 Trip DDB #434
DDB #435 RTD 7 Trip
RTD 8 Trip DDB #436
DDB #437 RTD 9 Trip
RTD 10 Trip DDB #438
DDB #439 IN>1 Trip
IN>2 Trip DDB #442
DDB #443 100
IREF> Trip
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
DDB #446 1 Dwell
0
R3 Any Trip
DDB #002
VN>1 Trip
VN>2 Trip DDB #451
DDB #452 V<1 Trip
V<2 Trip DDB #453
DDB #457 V>1 Trip
V>2 Trip DDB #461
DDB #465 F<1 Trip
F<2 Trip DDB #469
DDB #470 F<3 Trip
F<4 Trip DDB #471
DDB #472 F>1 Trip
F>2 Trip DDB #473
DDB #474 Power1 Trip
Power2 Trip DDB #475
DDB #476 I>1 Trip
I>2 Trip DDB #477
DDB #481 SPower1 Trip
SPower2 Trip DDB #495
DDB #496 PSlipz Z1 Trip
PSlipz Z2 Trip DDB #497
DDB #498 CL Input 1 Trip
DDB #508
CL Input 2 Trip
DDB #509
CL Input 4 Trip
DDB #511
CL Input 3 Trip
DDB #510
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 161/170

MiCOM P342 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (07)


Output Relay Mappings

Thermal Alarm
DDB #307
Field Fail Alarm
DDB #309
SG-opto Invalid
DDB #290
RTD Thermal Alm
DDB #310
VT Fail Alarm
DDB #292
RTD Open Cct
DDB #311
CT Fail Alarm
DDB #293
RTD short Cct
DDB #312
CB Fail Alarm
DDB #294
RTD Data Error
DDB #313
I^ Maint Alarm
DDB #295
RTD Board Fail
DDB #314
I^ Lockout Alarm
DDB #296
Field volts fail
DDB #756
CB Ops Maint
DDB #297
CL Card I/P Fail
DDB #320
CB Ops Lockout
DDB #298 0
CL Card O/P Fail
DDB #321 1 Drop-Off
500
R4 General Alarm
DDB #003
CB Op Time Maint
DDB #299
CL Input 1 Alarm
DDB #322
CB Op Time Lock
DDB #300
CL Input 2 Alarm
DDB #323
Fault Freq Lock
DDB #301
CL Input 3 Alarm
DDB #324
CB Status Alarm
DDB #302
CL Input 4 Alarm
DDB #325
Man CB Trip Fail
DDB #303
CLI1 I< Fail Alm
DDB #326
Man CB Cls Fail
DDB #304
CLI2 I< Fail Alm
DDB #327
Man CB Unhealthy
DDB #305
CLI3 I< Fail Alm
DDB #328
NPS Alarm
DDB #306
CLI4 I< Fail Alm
DDB #329
V/Hz Alarm
DDB #308

V<1 Trip Voltage Prot Alm


DDB #453 DDB #316

1
V>1 Trip
DDB #461

F<1 Trip
DDB #469

F<2 Trip
DDB #470

1
F<3 Trip Freq Prot Alm
DDB #471 DDB #315

F>1 Trip
DDB #473
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Databases

Page 162/170 MiCOM P342, P343

MiCOM P342 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (07)


Output Relay Mappings

100
Bfail1 Trip 3ph R5 CB Fail
DDB #493 Dwell DDB #004
0

IN>1 Trip
DDB #442

IN>2 Trip
DDB #443

IREF> Trip
DDB #446 0

1 Straight
0
R6 E/F Trip
DDB #005
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447

VN>1 Trip
DDB #451

VN>2 Trip
DDB #452

V<2 Trip
DDB #457

V>2 Trip
DDB #465
0

1 Straight
0
R7 V or F Trip
DDB #006

F>2 Trip
DDB #474

F<4 Trip
DDB #472
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 163/170

MiCOM P342 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (07)


LED Mappings

IN>1 Trip
DDB #442

IN>2 Trip
DDB #443

ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447

IREF> Trip
1 Latching LED 1
DDB #064

DDB #446

VN>1 Trip
DDB #451

VN>2 Trip
DDB #452

I>1 Trip
DDB #477

I>2 Trip
DDB #481 1 Latching LED 2
DDB #065

V Dep OC Trip
DDB #425

Field Fail1 Trip


DDB #422

1 Latching LED 3
DDB #066

Field Fail2 Trip


DDB #423

NPS Trip
DDB #424
Latching LED 4
DDB #067

V>2 Trip
DDB #465

1 Latching LED 5
DDB #068

V<2 Trip
DDB #457

F>2 Trip
DDB #474

1 Latching LED 6
DDB #069

F<4 Trip
DDB #472

Power1 Trip
DDB #475

SPower1 Trip
1 Latching LED 7
DDB #070
DDB #495

Any Start
Non - LED 8
DDB #576 Latching DDB #071
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Databases

Page 164/170 MiCOM P342, P343

MiCOM P343 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (07)


Opto Input and Fault Record Trigger Mappings

L3 Block IN>2 IN>2 Timer Blk


DDB #034 DDB #359

L4 Block I>2 I>2 Timer Block


DDB #035 DDB #355

L5 Reset Reset Relays/LED


DDB #036 DDB #386

L6 Ext Prot Trip Ext. Trip 3ph


DDB #037 DDB #380

L7 52a CB Aux 3ph(52-A)


DDB #038 DDB #381

L8 52b CB Aux 3ph(52-B)


DDB #039 DDB #382

Fault Record Trigger Mapping

R3 Any Trip Fault REC TRIG


DDB #002 DDB #288
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 165/170

MiCOM P343 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (07)


Output Relay Mappings
Z<1 Trip
DDB #500
Z<2 Trip
DDB #504
V Dep OC Trip
DDB #425
PSlipz Z1 Trip
DDB #497
PSlipz Z2 Trip
DDB #498
100% ST EF Trip
DDB #416
DeadMachine Trip
DDB #417
Gen Diff Trip
DDB #418
Field Fail2 Trip
DDB #423
IN>1 Trip
DDB #442
IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
IREF> Trip 100

ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #446
1 Dwell
0
R1 Trip CB
DDB #000
DDB #447
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
I>1 Trip
DDB #477
I>2 Trip
DDB #481
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
SPower1 Trip
DDB #495

Thermal O/L Trip


DDB #499
Field Fail1 Trip
DDB #422
NPS Trip
DDB #424
V/Hz Trip
DDB #429
RTD 1 Trip
DDB #430
RTD 2 Trip
DDB #431
RTD 3 Trip
DDB #432

RTD 4 Trip
DDB #433

RTD 5 Trip
DDB #434
1
RTD 6 Trip
DDB #435

RTD 7 Trip
DDB #436
RTD 8 Trip
DDB #437

RTD 9 Trip
DDB #438
RTD 10 Trip
DDB #439
F<4 Trip
DDB #472

F>2 Trip
DDB #474
&
CL Input 1 Trip
DDB #508
CL Input 2 Trip
DDB #509
CL Input 3 Trip
DDB #510
CL Input 4 Trip
DDB #511
Power2 Trip
DDB #476
SPower2 Trip
1
DDB #496
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Databases

Page 166/170 MiCOM P342, P343

MiCOM P343 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (07)


Output Relay Mappings

Thermal O/L Trip


DDB #499
Z<1 Trip
DDB #500
Z<2 Trip
DDB #504
V Dep OC Trip
DDB #425
100% ST EF Trip
DDB #416
DeadMachine Trip
DDB #417
Gen Diff Trip
DDB #418
Field Fail1 Trip
DDB #422
Field Fail2 Trip
DDB #423
NPS Trip
DDB #424
V/Hz Trip
DDB #429
RTD 1 Trip
DDB #430
RTD 2 Trip
DDB #431
RTD 3 Trip
DDB #432
RTD 4 Trip
DDB #433
RTD 5 Trip
DDB #434
RTD 6 Trip
DDB #435
RTD 7 Trip
DDB #436
RTD 8 Trip
DDB #437
RTD 9 Trip
DDB #438
RTD 10 Trip 100
DDB #439

IN>1 Trip
1 Dwell
0
R2 Trip PrimeMov
DDB #001
DDB #442

IN>2 Trip
DDB #443
IREF> Trip
DDB #446
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
VN>1 Trip
DDB #451
VN>2 Trip
DDB #452
V>2 Trip
DDB #465
F>2 Trip
DDB #474
Power1 Trip
DDB #475
I>1 Trip
DDB #477
I>2 Trip
DDB #481
V<2 Trip
DDB #457
F<4 Trip
DDB #472
SPower1 Trip
DDB #495
PSlipz Z1 Trip
DDB #497
PSlipz Z2 Trip
DDB #498
CL Input 1 Trip
DDB #508
CL Input 2 Trip
DDB #509
CL Input 3 Trip
DDB #510
CL Input 4 Trip
DDB #511
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 167/170

MiCOM P343 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (07)


Output Relay Mappings

Thermal O/L Trip


DDB #499
Z<1 Trip
Z<2 Trip DDB #500
DDB #504 V Dep OC Trip
100% ST EF Trip DDB #425
DDB #416 DeadMachine Trip
Gen Diff Trip DDB #417
DDB #418 Field Fail1 Trip
Field Fail2 Trip DDB #422
DDB #423 NPS Trip
V/Hz Trip DDB #424
DDB #429 RTD 1 Trip
RTD 2 Trip DDB #430
DDB #431 RTD 3 Trip
RTD 4 Trip DDB #432
DDB #433 RTD 5 Trip
RTD 6 Trip DDB #434
DDB #435 RTD 7 Trip
RTD 8 Trip DDB #436
DDB #437 RTD 9 Trip
RTD 10 Trip DDB #438
DDB #439 IN>1 Trip
IN>2 Trip DDB #442
DDB #443 100
IREF> Trip
ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447
DDB #446 1 Dwell
0
R3 Any Trip
DDB #002
VN>1 Trip
VN>2 Trip DDB #451
DDB #452 V<1 Trip
V<2 Trip DDB #453
DDB #457 V>1 Trip
V>2 Trip DDB #461
DDB #465 F<1 Trip
F<2 Trip DDB #469
DDB #470 F<3 Trip
F<4 Trip DDB #471
DDB #472 F>1 Trip
F>2 Trip DDB #473
DDB #474 Power1 Trip
Power2 Trip DDB #475
DDB #476 I>1 Trip
I>2 Trip DDB #477
DDB #481 SPower1 Trip
SPower2 Trip DDB #495
DDB #496 PSlipz Z1 Trip
PSlipz Z2 Trip DDB #497
DDB #498 CL Input 1 Trip
DDB #508
CL Input 2 Trip
DDB #509
CL Input 4 Trip
DDB #511
CL Input 3 Trip
DDB #510
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Databases

Page 168/170 MiCOM P342, P343

MiCOM P343 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (07)


Output Relay Mappings

Thermal Alarm
DDB #307
SG-opto Invalid
DDB #290

VT Fail Alarm
DDB #292
CT Fail Alarm
DDB #293
CB Fail Alarm
DDB #294
I^ Maint Alarm
DDB #295
I^ Lockout Alarm
DDB #296
CB Ops Maint
DDB #297
CB Ops Lockout
DDB #298
CB Op Time Maint
DDB #299
CB Op Time Lock
DDB #300
Fault Freq Lock
DDB #301
CB Status Alarm
DDB #302
Man CB Trip Fail
DDB #303
Man CB Cls Fail
DDB #304
Man CB Unhealthy
DDB #305
NPS Alarm
DDB #306
V/Hz Alarm
DDB #308
Field Fail Alarm 0
DDB #309
RTD Thermal Alm
1 Drop-Off
500
R4 General Alarm
DDB #003
DDB #310
RTD Open Cct
DDB #311
RTD short Cct
DDB #312
RTD Data Error
DDB #313
RTD Board Fail
DDB #314
Field volts fail
DDB #756
CL Card I/P Fail
DDB #320
CL Card O/P Fail
DDB #321
CL Input 1 Alarm
DDB #322
CL Input 2 Alarm
DDB #323
CL Input 3 Alarm
DDB #324
CL Input 4 Alarm
DDB #325
CLI1 I< Fail Alm
DDB #326
CLI2 I< Fail Alm
DDB #327
CLI3 I< Fail Alm
DDB #328
CLI4 I< Fail Alm
DDB #329

F<1 Trip
DDB #469
F<2 Trip
DDB #470
F<3 Trip
DDB #471 1
F>1 Trip
DDB #473
Freq Prot Alm
DDB #315
V<1 Trip
DDB #453
V>1 Trip
DDB #461
1 Voltage Prot Alm
DDB #316
Relay Menu Database P34x/EN GC/F33

MiCOM P342, P343 Page 169/170

MiCOM P343 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (07)


Output Relay Mappings

100
Bfail1 Trip 3ph R5 CB Fail
DDB #493 Dwell DDB #004
0

100% ST EF Trip
DDB #416

IN>1 Trip
DDB #442

IN>2 Trip
DDB #443

IREF> Trip 0
DDB #446
1 Straight
0
R6 E/F Trip
DDB #005

ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447

VN>1 Trip
DDB #451

VN>2 Trip
DDB #452

V>2 Trip
DDB #465 0

1 Straight
0
R7 Volt Trip
DDB #006
V<2 Trip
DDB #457

F>2 Trip
DDB #474
0

1 Straight
0
R8 Freq Trip
DDB #007
F<4 Trip
DDB #472

0
Gen Diff Trip R9 Diff Trip
DDB #418 Straight DDB #008
0

V Dep OC Trip
DDB #425
0
Z<1 Trip
DDB #500 1 Straight R10 SysBack Trip
DDB #009
0
Z<2 Trip
DDB #504
0
NPS Trip R11 NPS Trip
DDB #424 Straight DDB #010
0

Field Fail1 Trip


DDB #422
0

Field Fail2 Trip


1 Straight
0
R12 FFail Trip
DDB #011
DDB #423

Power1 Trip
DDB #475
0
Power2 Trip
DDB #476
SPower1 Trip
1 Straight
0
R13 Power Trip
DDB #012
DDB #495
SPower2 Trip
DDB #496 0
V/Hz Trip R14 V/Hz Trip
DDB #429 Straight DDB #013
0
P34x/EN GC/F33 Relay Menu Databases

Page 170/170 MiCOM P342, P343

MiCOM P343 PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (07)


LED Mappings

100% ST EF Trip
DDB #416

IN>1 Trip
DDB #442

IN>2 Trip
DDB #443

ISEF>1 Trip
DDB #447

IREF> Trip
1 Latching LED 1
DDB #064
DDB #446

VN>1 Trip
DDB #451

VN>2 Trip
DDB #452

I>1 Trip
DDB #477

I>2 Trip
DDB #481 1 Latching LED 2
DDB #065

V Dep OC Trip
DDB #425

Field Fail1 Trip


DDB #422

Field Fail2 Trip


1 Latching LED 3
DDB #066
DDB #423

NPS Trip
DDB #424
Latching LED 4
DDB #067

V>2 Trip
DDB #465

1 Latching LED 5
DDB #068

V<2 Trip
DDB #457

F>2 Trip
DDB #474
Non -
1 Latching
LED 6
DDB #069
F<4 Trip
DDB #472

Power1 Trip
DDB #475

1 Latching LED 7
DDB #070
SPower1 Trip
DDB #495

Any Start
Non - LED 8
DDB #576 Latching DDB #071
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343

EXTERNAL CONNECTION
DIAGRAMS
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 1/36

2ND REAR COMMS PORT BOARD


ETHERNET BOARD
(Not Available Yet)
IRIG-B BOARD

P2139ENc

Figure 1: Comms Options MiCOM Px40 Platform


P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 2/36 MiCOM P342, P343

P2192ena

Figure 2: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator Using VEE Connected
VT's (8 I/P & 7 O/P)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 3/36

P2193ena

Figure 3: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator with Sensitive Power
(8 I/P & 7 O/P)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 4/36 MiCOM P342, P343

P2194ena

Figure 4: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator (8 I/P & 7 O/P & RTD’s)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 5/36

P2195ena

Figure 5: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator (8 I/P & 7 O/P & RTD’s)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 6/36 MiCOM P342, P343

P1357ena

Figure 6: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator (8 I/P & 7 O/P & CLIO)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 7/36

P2196ena

Figure 7: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator (8 I/P & 15 O/P)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 8/36 MiCOM P342, P343

P2197ena

Figure 8: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator (16 I/P & 7 O/P)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 9/36

P2198ena

Figure 9: Generator Protection Relay (40TE) for Small Generator (12 I/P & 11 O/P)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 10/36 MiCOM P342, P343

P1358ena

Figure 10: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) for Small Generator (16 I/P & 16 O/P &
RTD’s & CLIO)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 11/36

P1359ena

Figure 11: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) for Small Generator (16 I/P & 16 O/P &
RTD’s & CLIO)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 12/36 MiCOM P342, P343

P2201ena

Figure 12: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) for Small Generator (24 I/P & 16 O/P &
RTD’s)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 13/36

P2202ena

Figure 13: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) for Small Generator (16 I/P & 24 O/P &
RTD’s)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 14/36 MiCOM P342, P343

P2203ena

Figure 14: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) with Biased Differential (16 I/P & 14 O/P &
RTD’s)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 15/36

P2204ena

Figure 15: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) (16 I/P & 14 O/P & RTD’s)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 16/36 MiCOM P342, P343

P2205ena

Figure 16: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) with High Impedance Differential (16 I/P &
14 O/P)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 17/36

P2206ena

Figure 17: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) with High Impedance Differential (16 I/P &
14 O/P)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 18/36 MiCOM P342, P343

P2207ena

Figure 18: Generator Protection Relay with Biased Differential Using VEE Connected VT’s
and Sensitive Power (16 I/P & 14 O/P)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 19/36

P1360ena

Figure 19: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) with Biased Differential (16 I/P & 14 O/P &
CLIO)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 20/36 MiCOM P342, P343

P2208ena

Figure 20: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) with Biased Differential (24 I/P & 14 O/P)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 21/36

P2209ena

Figure 21: Generator Protection Relay (60TE) with Biased Differential (16 I/P & 22 O/P)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 22/36 MiCOM P342, P343

P1361ena

Figure 22: Generator Protection Relay (80TE) with Biased Differential (24 I/P & 24 O/P &
RTD’s & CLIO)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 23/36

P1362ena

Figure 23: Generator Protection Relay (80TE) with Biased Differential (24 I/P & 24 O/P &
RTD’s & CLIO)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 24/36 MiCOM P342, P343

P2212ena

Figure 24: Generator Protection Relay (80TE) with Biased Differential (32 I/P & 24 O/P &
RTD’s)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 25/36

P2213ena

Figure 25: Generator Protection Relay (80TE) with Biased Differential (24 I/P & 32 O/P &
RTD’s)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 26/36 MiCOM P342, P343

P1363ena

Figure 26: Generator Protection Relay (80TE) with Biased Differential (32 I/P & 16 O/P &
RTD & CLIO)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 27/36

P1364ena

Figure 27: Generator Protection Relay (80TE) with Biased Differential (16 I/P & 32 O/P &
RTD & CLIO)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 28/36 MiCOM P342, P343

P1366ena

Figure 28: Assembly P341/2 Generator Protection Relay (40TE) (8 I/P & 7 O/P with
Optional I/P & O/P)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 29/36

P1367ena

Figure 29: Assembly P342 Generator Protection Relay (40TE) (8 I/P & 7 O/P with Optional
RTD & CLIO)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 30/36 MiCOM P342, P343

P1370ena

Figure 30: Assembly P342 Generator Protection Relay (60TE) (16 I/P & 16 O/P with
Optional I/P & O/P)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 31/36

P1369ena

Figure 31: Assembly P342 Generator Protection Relay (60TE) (16 I/P & 16 O/P with
Optional RTD & CLIO)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 32/36 MiCOM P342, P343

P1365ena

Figure 32: Assembly P343 Generator Protection Relay (60TE) (16 I/P & 14 O/P with
Optional I/P & O/P)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 33/36

P1368ena

Figure 33: Assembly P343 Generator Protection Relay (60TE) (16 I/P & 14 O/P with
Optional RTD & CLIO)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 34/36 MiCOM P342, P343

P1371ena

Figure 34: Assembly P343 Generator Protection Relay (80TE) (24 I/P & 24 O/P with
Optional I/P & O/P)
External Connection P34x/EN CO/F33
Diagrams
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 35/36

P1372ena

Figure 35: Assembly P343 Generator Protection Relay (80TE) (24 I/P & 24 O/P with
Optional RTD & CLIO)
P34x/EN CO/F33 External Connection
Diagrams
Page 36/36 MiCOM P342, P343

P1373ena

Figure 36: Assembly P343 Generator Protection Relay (80TE) (32 I/P & 16 O/P & RTD &
CLIO or 16 I/P & 32 O/P & RTD & CLIO)
Hardware/Software Version P34x/EN VC/E33
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P342, P343

HARDWARE / SOFTWARE VERSION


HISTORY AND COMPATIBILITY

(Note: Includes versions released and supplied to customers only)


P34x/EN VC/E33 Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P342, P343
Relay type: P342/3 …
Software
Version Hardware Original S1 Technical
Description of Changes
Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation
Major Minor
A A Oct 1999 Original Issue V1.09 or Later TG8614A
MiCOM P342, P343

ü Corrected 90 degree phase angle displacement in


History and Compatibility

measurement of Ia, Ib, Ic


Hardware/Software Version

ü Corrected RTD temperature and invalid system frequency


B A Dec 1999 measurements in MODBUS fault records V1.09 or Later TG8614A
ü Corrected VT scaling factors for Va, Vb, Vc in fault
records
ü Minor bug fixes
01
ü Trip LED status saved during power cycling
ü Corrections to omission of fault duration and CB
operating time in fault record
ü Corrected -90 degree phase angle displacement in
C A Mar 2000 measurement of VN and VN derived V1.09 or Later TG8614A
ü Reset of alarms and indications event added to event
record
ü Minor bug fixes
ü DNP 3.0 protocol added
ü Courier and MODBUS enhancements to improve
compatibility with other protection (mainly PX20
products)
02 A A Oct 2000 V1.10 or Later TG8614B
ü Modifications to IEC60870-5-103 Test Mode
ü Poledead logic DDB signals made visible in PSL
ü Foreign Language text updated
P34x/EN VC/E33

Page 1/16
Relay type: P342/3 …
Software
Hardware Original S1 Technical
Page 2/16

Version Description of Changes


Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation
Major Minor
P34x/EN VC/E33

ü Active and reactive power added to MODBUS fault


02 record
A A Oct 2000 V1.10 or Later TG8614B
Cont.
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Event filtering added
A A Jan 2001 ü Correction to energy measurement inaccuracy V2.00 or Later TG8614B
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Correction to NPS Alarm operation
B A May 2001 V2.00 or Later TG8614B
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Resolved possible reboot caused by Disturbance
C A Jan 2002 Recorder V2.00 or Later TG8614B
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Resolved possible reboot caused by invalid MODBUS
D A Feb 2002 requests V2.00 or Later TG8614B
03
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Enhanced DNP 3.0 Object 10 support for Pulse
On/Close control points
ü DNP 3.0 Object 10 included in Class 0 poll
ü DNP 3.0 support for season in time information

E A Dec 2002 ü Correction to MODBUS CB Trip and Close via "0"


command
ü Change to neutral voltage displacement protection and
directional SEF protection so that they are not blocked by
the VT supervision logic when when the VN Input and
History and Compatibility
Hardware/Software Version

MiCOM P342, P343

ISEF>VNPol are selected as Measured


Relay type: P342/3 …
Software
Version Hardware Original S1 Technical
Description of Changes
Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation
Major Minor
ü Correction to undervoltage stage 2 (V<2) setting range.
MiCOM P342, P343

The setting range has been increased from 10-70V to


10-120V (Vn=110/120V) so that it is the same as V<1
History and Compatibility
Hardware/Software Version

03 ü Correction to VT ratio scaling problem in the disturbance


E A Dec 2002 V2.00 or Later TG8614B
Cont. recorder
ü Improvement to the RTD start-up calibration routine
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Not released to production
ü Pole slipping and sensitive reverse power added
ü 100% stator earth fault protection enhancements
ü Neutral voltage displacement threshold, VN>1/2,
increased from 50 to 80V (Vn=100/120V), 200 to 320 V
A A Jun 2001 (Vn=380/480V) V2.01 or Later TG8614B
ü Earth fault polarising voltage threshold, Vnpol, increased
from 22 to 88V (Vn=100/120V) and 88 to 352V
04 (Vn=380/480V)
ü cos phi and sin phi features added to SEF protection
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Not released to production
B A Jul 2001 ü Minor bug fix to background self check diagnostics V2.01 or Later TG8614B
introduced in 04A
ü Correction to Courier NPS thermal reset command
C A Dec 2001 V2.01 or Later TG8614B
ü Minor bug fixes
P34x/EN VC/E33

Page 3/16
Relay type: P342/3 …
Software
Hardware Original S1 Technical
Page 4/16

Version Description of Changes


Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation
Major Minor
P34x/EN VC/E33

ü Resolved possible reboot caused by Disturbance


D A Jan 2002 Recorder V2.01 or Later TG8614B
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Resolved possible reboot caused by invalid MODBUS
E A Feb 2002 requests V2.01 or Later TG8614B
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Enhanced DNP 3.0 Object 10 support for Pulse
On/Close control points
ü DNP 3.0 Object 10 included in Class 0 poll
ü DNP 3.0 support for season in time information
04 ü Correction to MODBUS CB Trip and Close via "0"
Cont. command
ü Change to neutral voltage displacement protection and
directional SEF protection so that they are not blocked by
F A Dec 2002 the VT supervision logic when the VN Input and V2.01 or Later TG8614B
ISEF>VNPol are selected as Measured
ü Correction to undervoltage stage 2 (V<2) setting range.
The setting range has been increased from 10-70V to
10-120V (Vn=110/120V) so that it is the same as V<1
ü Correction to VT ratio scaling problem in the disturbance
recorder
ü Improvement to the RTD start-up calibration routine
ü Minor bug fixes
History and Compatibility
Hardware/Software Version

MiCOM P342, P343


Relay type: P342/3 …
Software
Version Hardware Original S1 Technical
Description of Changes
Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation
Major Minor
ü Not released to production
MiCOM P342, P343

ü Thermal overload protection added


History and Compatibility

ü Additional stage of under-impedance protection


Hardware/Software Version

ü Control inputs added


ü PSL DDB list of signals increased from 512 to 1023
signals
ü PSL Data menu added with PSL Reference information for
version history
A A/B Sept 2001 ü Optional additional opto inputs and output contacts with V2.05 or Later P34x/EN T/C11
a larger case size option available
ü New ‘Universal’ wide ranging opto inputs (Model
05 number hardware suffix changed to B)
ü New output contacts with better break and continuous
carry ratings (Model number hardware suffix changed to
B)
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Courier and MODBUS builds only
ü Not released to production
ü Correction to VT ratio scaling problem in the disturbance
B A/B Oct 2001 recorder V2.05 or Later P34x/EN T/C11
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Courier and MODBUS builds only
P34x/EN VC/E33

Page 5/16
Relay type: P342/3 …
Software
Hardware Original S1 Technical
Page 6/16

Version Description of Changes


Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation
Major Minor
P34x/EN VC/E33

ü IEC60870-5-103 build with special private code


mapping for ALSTOM Power project in Iceland. Includes
private codes and uncompressed disturbance recorder

1(C) A/B Jan 2002 ü Resolved possible reboot caused by Disturbance V2.05 or Later P34x/EN T/C11
Recorder
ü Minor bug fixes
ü IEC60870-5-103 build only
ü Resolved possible reboot caused by Disturbance
Recorder
ü Resolved possible reboot caused by invalid MODBUS
requests
ü Enhancements to IEC60870-5-103 build to include
05 private codes, monitor blocking and disturbance record
D A/B Feb 2002 extraction. New uncompressed disturbance recorder for V2.05 or Later P34x/EN T/C11
Cont.
IEC60870-5-103 build only
ü Correction to Courier NPS thermal reset command
ü Correction to IEC60870-5-103 voltage measurements
for Vn=380/480V relays
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Correction to foreign language text for System Backup
E A/B Mar 2002 protection not included in previous 05 software builds V2.05 or Later P34x/EN T/C11
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Enhanced DNP 3.0 Object 10 support for Pulse
On/Close control points
History and Compatibility
Hardware/Software Version

MiCOM P342, P343

F A/B Oct 2002


ü Correction to MODBUS CB Trip and Close via "0"
command
Relay type: P342/3 …
Software
Version Hardware Original S1 Technical
Description of Changes
Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation
Major Minor
ü Change to neutral voltage displacement protection and
MiCOM P342, P343

directional SEF protection so that they are not blocked by


the VT supervision logic when the VN Input and
History and Compatibility

ISEF>VNPol are selected as Measured


Hardware/Software Version

F A/B Oct 2002 ü Correction to undervoltage stage 2 (V<2) setting range.


The setting range has been increased from 10-70V to
10-120V (Vn=110/120V) so that it is the same as V<1
ü Improvement to the RTD start-up calibration routine
ü Minor bug fixes
ü IEC60870-5-103 build with special private code
mapping for ALSTOM Power project in Iceland. Includes
05 private codes and uncompressed disturbance recorder
Cont. ü Correction to IEC60870-5-103 voltage measurements
for Vn=380/480V relays
ü Correction to foreign language text for System Backup
protection not included in previous 05 software builds
(1) F A/B Oct 2002 ü Change to neutral voltage displacement protection and V2.05 or Later P34x/EN T/C11
directional SEF protection so that they are not blocked by
the VT supervision logic when when the VN Input and
ISEF>VNPol are selected as Measured
ü Improvement to the RTD start-up calibration routine
ü Minor bug fixes
ü IEC60870-5-103 build only
P34x/EN VC/E33

Page 7/16
Relay type: P342/3 …
Software
Hardware Original S1 Technical
Page 8/16

Version Description of Changes


Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation
Major Minor
P34x/EN VC/E33

ü Not released to production


ü Additional IDMT characteristics for overcurrent and
voltage dependent overcurrent protection (rectifier and RI
curve), earth fault protection (RI and IDG curve) and
sensitive earth fault protection (IDG curve)
ü Change to time dial setting range of IEEE and US curves.
Previously curves were based on TD/7 where TD = 0.5-
15. Now, curves are based on TD where TD = 0.01-
100. Also, includes change to US ST Inverse (C02)
curve. K constant and L constant multipled x 7 because
of change to TD, now K=0.16758 and L=0.11858
ü Angle measurements for sequence quantities in
Measurements 1 menu added
ü Interturn protection added
06 A A/C Aug 2000 V2.06 or Later P34x/EN T/D22
ü Optional 2nd rear communication port added
ü New power supply with increased output rating and
reduced dc inrush current (typically < 10A). (Model
number hardware changed to suffix C)
ü Wider setting range for Power and Sensitive Power
protection. P>1/2 (reverse power) and P<1/2 (low
forward power) maximum setting changed from 40In to
300In W (Vn=100/120V) and from 160In W to 1200In
W (Vn=380/480V). Sen –P>1/2 and Sen P<1/2
maximum setting changed from 15In to 100In W
(Vn=100/120V) and from 60In to 400In W
(Vn=380/480V). There is also an additional setting for
History and Compatibility
Hardware/Software Version

MiCOM P342, P343

the Power and Sensitive Power protection to select the


Operating mode as Generating or Motoring
Relay type: P342/3 …
Software
Version Hardware Original S1 Technical
Description of Changes
Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation
Major Minor
ü Wider setting range for the voltage dependent
MiCOM P342, P343

overcurrent protection. Volt Dep OC V<1 and V<2


minimum setting changed from 20 to 5 V
History and Compatibility

(Vn=100/120V) and from 80 to 20V (Vn=380/480V). V


Hardware/Software Version

Dep OC k Set minimum setting changed from 0.25 to


0.1
ü Maximum overfrequency protection setting increased
from 65 to 68 Hz
ü Change to undervoltage stage 2 (V<2) setting range to
correct an error. The setting range has been increased
A A/C Aug 2000 from 10-70 V to 10-120V (Vn=100/120V) so that it is V2.06 or Later P34x/EN T/D22
the same as V<1
06 ü Change to neutral voltage displacement protection and
Cont. directional SEF protection so that they are now not
blocked by the voltage transformer supervision logic
when the VN Input and ISEF> VN Pol are selected as
Measured
ü Includes all the improvements and corrections in 05F
software except for 2 enhancements shown for 06B
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Correction to undervoltage stage 2 (V<2) setting range.
The setting range has been increased from 10-70V to
10-120V (Vn=110/120V) so that it is the same as V<1
B A/C Oct 2002 V2.06 or Later P34x/EN T/D22
ü Improvement to the RTD start-up calibration routine
ü Minor bug fixes
P34x/EN VC/E33

Page 9/16
Relay type: P342/3 …
Software
Version Hardware Original S1 Technical
Description of Changes
Page 10/16

Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation


Major Minor
P34x/EN VC/E33

ü Not released to production


ü Optional additional 4 analogue inputs and 4 outputs
(current loop inputs and outputs – CLIO)
ü Additional setting to select the current inputs (IA-1, IB-1,
IC-1 or IA-2, IB-2, IC-2) used for the breaker fail
undercurrent
ü Two new hardware configurations - (1) 32 Inputs, 16
Outputs, RTD, CLIO (2) 16 Inputs, 32 Outputs, RTD,
CLIO
A A/C Apr 2003 ü Number of alarms increased from 64 to 96 (New Alarm V2.09 or Later P34x/EN T/E33
Status 3 word - 32 bit)
ü Additional user alarms. Previously 1 manual reset and 2
self reset user alarms, now 12 manual reset and 4 self
07 reset user alarms
ü Control Input states added to non volatile memory
ü German language text updated
ü Courier and MODBUS builds only
ü Minor bug fixes
ü Power measurement limits added to prevent non zero
values with no current and voltage. Also power factor
measurements limited to +/-1
B A/C Oct 2003 ü In the Commissioning Test menu the DDB status has V2.09 or Later P34x/EN T/E33
been made visible on the front panel display
ü Support for Trip LED Status and Alarm Status added to
History and Compatibility
Hardware/Software Version

MiCOM P342, P343

G26 data type for MODBUS register 30001


Relay type: P342/3 …
Software
Version Hardware Original S1 Technical
Description of Changes
Suffix Date of Issue Compatibility Documentation
Major Minor
ü Correction to the CB trip/Close functionality via
MiCOM P342, P343

MODBUS so that local/remote setting in the CB Control


menu is not ignored
History and Compatibility
Hardware/Software Version

ü Correction to MODBUS auto event extraction which does


not work correctly in versions 05 and 06 software
ü Extension of the control input functionality to support
pulse and latch operations in DNP 3.0
ü DNP 3.0 object 10 added to class 0 poll
ü Correction to DNP 3.0 time sync operation so that it does
not modify the season bit in the time stamp
ü Improvement to the differential protection performance
at low frequencies
07
B A/C Oct 2003 ü Correction to the manual reset user alarms so that the V2.09 or Later P34x/EN T/E33
Cont.
event record shows the alarm turning off only when a
reset command has been issued. Previously the "alarm
off" event is produced once the initiating signal is
removed
ü Correction to the fault recorder window for current based
trips so that it can terminate properly once the
FAULT_REC_TRIG signal (DDB 288) is reset. Previously it
needed to wait for Relay 3 to reset also before
termination
ü DDB 649 for pole slip reactance line start removed from
the event list
ü Minor bug fixes
P34x/EN VC/E33

Page 11/16
Relay Software Version
01 02 03 04 05 06 07

01 ü ü ü ü û û û
Page 12/16

02 û ü ü ü û û û
P34x/EN VC/E33

03 û û ü ü û û û

04 û û û ü û û û

05 û û û û ü û û

06 û û û û û ü ü

07 û û û û û û ü

Setting File Software Version


History and Compatibility
Hardware/Software Version

MiCOM P342, P343


Relay Software Version
01 02 03 04 05 06 07

01 ü ü ü ü û û û

02 û ü ü ü û û û

03 û û ü ü û û û
MiCOM P342, P343

04 û û û ü û û û

05 û û û û ü ü ü
History and Compatibility
Hardware/Software Version

06 û û û û ü ü ü

07 û û û û û û ü

PSL File Software Version


P34x/EN VC/E33

Page 13/16
Relay Software Version
01 02 03 04 05A-E 05F 06 07

01 ü û û û û û û û
Page 14/16

02 û ü û û û û û û
P34x/EN VC/E33

03 û û ü û û û û û

04 û û û ü û û û û

05A-E û û û û ü û û û

05F û û û û û ü û û

06 û û û û û û ü û

07 û û û û û û û ü

Menu Text File Software Version


History and Compatibility
Hardware/Software Version

MiCOM P342, P343

1
Menu text remains compatible within each software version (except 05) but is NOT compatible across different versions.
Hardware/Software Version P34x /EN VC/E33
History and Compatibility
MiCOM P342, P343 Page 15/16

Information Required with Order

MiCOM P342 GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY NOMENCLATURE

Character Type (A=Alpha, N=Numeric, A N N N A X X X A X X N N X A


X=Alpha-numeric)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Character Numbering (Maximum = 15)
P 3 4 2 * * * * * * 0 * * 0 *

Vx Aux Rating
24-48 Vdc 1
48-110 Vdc, 30-100 Vac 2
110-250 Vdc, 100-240 Vac 3

In/Vn Rating
In=1A/5A, Vn=100/120V 1
In=1A/5A, Vn=380/480V 2

Hardware Options
Nothing 1
IRIG-B only 2
Fibre Optic Converter Only 3
IRIG-B & Fibre Optic Converter 4
Rear Comms Board* 7
Rear Comms + IRIG-B* 8

Product Specific
Size 40TE Case, No Option (8 Optos + 7 Relays) A
Size 40TE Case, 8 Optos + 7 Relays + RTD B
Size 40TE Case, 8 Optos + 7 Relays + CLIO* C
Size 40TE Case, 16 Optos + 7 Relays* D
Size 40TE Case, 8 Optos + 15 Relays* E
Size 40TE Case, 12 Optos + 11 Relays* F
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 16 Relays* G
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 16 Relays + RTD* H
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 16 Relays + CLIO* J
Size 60TE Case, 24 Optos + 16 Relays* K
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 24 Relays* L
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 16 Relays + RTD + CLIO* M
Size 60TE Case, 24 Optos + 16 Relays + RTD* N
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 24 Relays + RTD* P

Protocol Options
K-Bus 1
MODBUS 2
IEC870 3
DNP3.0 4

Mounting
Panel Mounting A

Software XX

Setting Files
Default 0
Customer 1

Design Suffix
Original A
Phase 2 Hardware C

Note Design Suffix

A = Original hardware (48V opto inputs only, lower contact rating, no I/O expansion available)
C = Latest hardware (Universal Optos, New Relays, New Power Supply)

* Not available in design suffix A relays

Note Mounting
For rack mounting assembled single rack frames and blanking plates are available
P34x/EN VC/E33 Hardware/Software Version
History and Compatibility
Page 16/16 MiCOM P342, P343

Information Required with Order

MiCOM P343 GENERATOR PROTECTION RELAY NOMENCLATURE

Character Type (A=Alpha, N=Numeric, A N N N A X X X A X X N N X A


X=Alpha-numeric)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Character Numbering (Maximum = 15)
P 3 4 3 * * * * * * 0 * * 0 *

Vx Aux Rating
24-48 Vdc 1
48-110 Vdc, 30-100 Vac 2
110-250 Vdc, 100-240 Vac 3

In/Vn Rating
In=1A/5A, Vn=100/120V 1
In=1A/5A, Vn=380/480V 2

Hardware Options
Nothing 1
IRIG-B only 2
Fibre Optic Converter Only 3
IRIG-B & Fibre Optic Converter 4
Rear Comms Board* 7
Rear Comms + IRIG-B* 8

Product Specific
Size 60TE Case, No Option (16 Optos + 14 Relays) A
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 14 Relays + RTD B
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 14 Relays + CLIO* C
Size 60TE Case, 24 Optos + 14 Relays* D
Size 60TE Case, 16 Optos + 22 Relays* E
Size 80TE Case, 24 Optos + 24 Relays* F
Size 80TE Case, 24 Optos + 24 Relays + RTD* G
Size 80TE Case, 24 Optos + 24 Relays + CLIO* H
Size 80TE Case, 32 Optos + 24 Relays* J
Size 80TE Case, 24 Optos + 32 Relays* K
Size 80TE Case, 24 Optos + 24 Relays + RTD + CLIO* L
Size 80TE Case, 32 Optos + 24 Relays + RTD* M
Size 80TE Case, 24 Optos + 32 Relays + RTD* N

Size 80TE Case, 32 Optos + 16 Relays + RTD + CLIO* P


Size 80TE Case, 16 Optos + 32 Relays + RTD + CLIO* Q

Protocol Options
K-Bus 1
MODBUS 2
IEC870 3
DNP3.0 4

Mounting
Panel Mounting A
Rack Mounting (Size 80TE case only)* B

Software XX

Setting Files
Default 0
Customer 1

Design Suffix
Original A
Phase 2 Hardware C

Note Design Suffix

A = Original hardware (48V opto inputs only, lower contact rating, no I/O expansion available)
C = Latest hardware (Universal Optos, New Relays, New Power Supply)

* Not available in design suffix A relays

Note Mounting
For rack mounting in the 60TE case size assembled single rack frames and blanking plates are available
Publication: P34x/EN T/F33

TRANSMISSION & DISTRIBUTION Energy Automation & Information energy.automation-information@areva-td.com


www.areva.com

Potrebbero piacerti anche